SCR RRR ARR Naa RN CGS ORR RRS BRE RS RR)
New York
State Callege of Agriculture
At Gornell Wniversity
Dthaca, N.Y.
Library
- N ill
| 3 1924 051 999 7
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The Rural Manuals
os
Manvat or Garpenine — Bailey
Manuva or Farm Animats — Harper
Farm AND GARDEN Rute-Boox — Bailey
Manvat or Home-Maxine — In preparation
MANuAL OF CULTIVATED PLants — In prepara-
tion
Cornell University
Library
The original of this book is in
the Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www. archive.org/details/cu31924051999732
Jersey head of quality, illustrating what has been accomplished by improved
methods of breeding and feeding, together with proper care and manage-
ment.
MANUAL
or
FARM ANIMALS
A PRACTICAL GUIDE
TO THE CHOOSING, BREEDING, AND KEEP
OF HORSES, CATTLE, SHEEP,
AND SWINE pap
BY
MERRITT W. HARPER
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF ANIMAL HUSBANDRY IN
THE NEW YORK STATE COLLEGE OF AGRICULTURE
AT CORNELL UNIVERSITY
News Work
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
1917
All rights reserved
Corrgieut, 1911,
By THE MACMILLAN COMPANY.
Set up and electrotyped. Published September, 1911. Reprinted
August, 1914; June, 1917.
Cj SI
Norwood press
J. 8, Cushing Co. — Berwick & Smith Co.
Norwood, Mass., U.S.A.
PREFACE
In America, raising farm animals does not receive the recogni-
tion that is accorded it in Europe. Because of this relative neg-
lect, when in search of animals with which to improve our studs,
herds and flocks, we still look largely to foreign lands. Conti-
nental Europe provides us with blood to improve our draft horses,
dairy cattle, and fine-wool sheep, while the British Isles furnish
improved blood for our beef cattle, mutton sheep, bacon swine, as
well as for horses, both light and heavy, and for dairy cattle.
A comparison of European methods with those employed in
America reveals the fact that our methods are lacking and en-
tirely inadequate to produce the greatest improvement. The
live-stock farmers of Europe exercise much careful judgment in
choosing their animals, in feeding, in breeding, and in the care
and management. It has been with a view of aiding to promote
such interest in the daily work with farm animals that this
volume is written. This has been done with the thought that
increased interest will lead to improved care, which in time, it
is hoped, will produce a better and more useful class of farm
live-stock. It is well recognized that a good animal husbandry
lies at the bottom of a good agriculture.
From the above, it will be seen that the author’s purpose is
to discuss the general care and management of farm animals
rather than the breeds. However, a knowledge of the breeds is
necessary. To economize space and the reader’s time, the writer
has adopted the method of freely inserting pictures of good
animals of many breeds, with liberal legends, letting them run
as a minor motive throughout the book. By this plan it is hoped
that some of the main characteristics of the breeds may be taken
away by the reader with little effort on his part.
v
vi PREFACE
In a book of this range, many kinds of advice must be given.
This advice may uot all be of equal value, even though it be the
product of actual experience. The author gives it for what it is
worth, and it is the responsibility of the reader to apply it and
to work it out as best he can. In the discussion of diseases, par-
ticularly, it is very difficult to give formal advice that will apply
to all cases; and the statements are meant to be used as guides
and suggestions and not as “doctor book” prescriptions or as
substitutes for the help of a trained veterinarian. It is hoped
that by calling attention to the diseases and ailments, the reader
will see the importance of securing reliable aid when the subject
is beyond his knowledge or skill.
The book is a manual, and therefore it considers the common
practical matters in much detail. No doubt much information
which we now accept in the breeding and feeding of animals is
very imperfect; but the writer has tried to discuss the daily
handling of farm live-stock in the light of such knowledge as
is at present best accepted and most capable of application.
Recognizing the importance of such a work, the writer will be
glad to correspond with those into whose hands the book may
fall, concerning difficulties in the management of animals, and
also to receive suggestions that will make future editions of the
Manual— if such should be called for— more useful as a practical
guide in raising farm animals.
M. W. HARPER,
Irnaca, N.Y.,
June 7, 1911.
CONTENTS
PART I— HORSES
CHAPTER I
Cuoosinc a Horse — Jupoine ‘
General Examination of the Horse . 2 5
Examination in the stable
Examination in action . . :
How to estimate the Age of a Horse . F . : e
General considerations .
Examination of the teeth ‘
Colt— Three years old — Four years a= Five years a
Six years old —Seven years old— Eight years old —Nine
years old — Ten years old — Eleven years old — Aged
horses.
Irregularities in the teeth
Detecting Unsoundness
A blemish
An unsoundness . ,
Decayed and broken teeth = pisbatee. fiGtn dis: nestle —
Impaired vision — Defective hearing — Poll-evil — Sweenied
shoulders — Fistula — Capped elbow — Unsound knees —
Splints — Ring-bone — Side-bone — Scratches — Unsound
hoofs — Thoroughpin — Spavin — Stringhalt — Curb —
Forging and overreaching — Interfering — Locating lame-
ness — Unsound in wind.
Types of Horses ° A ‘ A . 7 é -
The light type
Heavy type .
Choosing a Light Horse
General appearance in light horses
Form — Action — Quality — Patiperanienk:
Detail characters of a light horse .
Head — Neck — Chest — Shoulders — dean Bibowe — Tone
vii
18
14
14
14
19
20
20
20
21
23
vill CONTENTS
PAGES
arms — Knees — Cannons — Fetlock — Pasterns — Feet —
Ribs — Body — Loin — Croup — Thigh — Hind legs— Hocks
— Hind cannons — Hind pasterns — Hind feet.
Choosing a Heavy Horse . - z % . i A . 29
General appearance in heavy arses ‘ és : . 29
The form — The weight — The action — Quaitty.
Detail characters of heavy horses - . 83
Head — Neck — Chest — Shoulders — Arm — Hove ties _—
Knees — Cannon — Pasterns — Feet —- Body — Croup —
Thighs — Hock.
CHAPTER II
Tye Feepinc or ANIMALS— GENERAL CONSIDERATION , z 87-55
Food . ‘ : é 5 j Z ‘ é : ; ‘ . 37
Use of food . : : ‘ : : 3 2 ; . 37
Composition of food. F ‘ ; . 388
Water — Ash — Protein — Cuibahydries — Fat,
Function of various food materials . : Z . 4l
Water — Ash — Protein — Carbohydrates — Fat.
Digestibility of Food . F : - i : 44
Digestion . : . ; : s : . : 44
Size of digestive organs : : F . , . 46
Digestible nutrients. ‘i . : . é : 5 . 46
Conditions Influencing Digestion . é - : a : 48
Palatability . . 48
Time of havjestine —Gandine the tools ‘Cutne food —
Various processes.
Maintenance Rations and Productive Rations . % é . 60
Maintenance rations . ‘ ‘ _ . : c ‘ . 60
Productive rations : . RS ‘ é - 60
Feeding standards for farm ssanenels F . é 4 : . 61
Balanced Ration F . R F E R . . . 61
Nutritive ratio i é ‘ ‘ Fi ‘ ‘ ‘ 7 . §2
‘Method of calculating . ‘ ‘ ‘ 3 . - . » 62
Other methods of computing rations . . : is ; . 54
Using balanced rations. ‘ e ; : . s 3 » 65
CHAPTER III
Tue Feepine or Horses ‘ 3 : - F . F ‘ 56-69
Food Requirements for Work 2 , F - ‘ 7 . 66
CONTENTS ix
PAGES
Regularity in feeding . . : é . . . ‘ 57
Order of supplying food ‘ ° . E . ri 7 67
Watering the horse, ‘ ‘ 2 , es . . 59
Feeding the Work Horse . : 5 A ; io 5 . 60
Feeding the Driving Horse : 2 . 7 . F - 68
Wintering the Idle Horse... ; te ab 64
Feeding the Brood Mare . a . . 65
Feeding Mules . ; 5 ‘ Wa abe A ‘ 67
Sample Rations for the Horse : 4 . - é 5 68
CHAPTER I¥
Tue BREEDING or ANIMALS IN GENERAL . - ;. . A 70-95
Like produces like i A * ‘ E . r eT
Variation is the Basis of Titpiawainesle 3 ‘ : : 7 « 72
Variation universal among farm animals. c 3 ; 3 2!
Kinds of variation ‘ . : - ‘ ‘ 5 : . 73
Proximate Causes of Variation . : s .
Environment — Climate — Food supply — Gane _ “Or cetitig:
Selection. . . : ‘ . . U7
Individual inp _— _ Pedierea _ Mating.
Heredity . : ‘ 83
Inheritance of disasus = Bepoteney — ” Prolificacy or "Fecundity
— Sterility — Relative influence of parents.
Systems of Breeding . 4 ; . 89
Grading — Crossing — Tebmadiie= _ ie presi = Precding
from the best.
CHAPTER V
Tuer Breepinc or Horses anp Motes 3 7 . : 96-126
Plan of Breeding Fi ‘ ‘ a ‘ ; : , 3 - 96
Codperative breeding . : ‘ 5 . . i . . 98
Securing stallions . ‘ ‘ z " : ‘ 3 : . 98
Selecting Breeding Stock . : ‘i é . 99
The breed and type — Uniformity — eoundnea:
The Stallion : 5 f : . 7 . 5 é . 102
The Mare . 3 ‘ $ . 5 E 3 F . 103
Season of the gaa to breed . E ~ . ‘ i . 104
When mares should be tried ‘ - ; . : a . 107
Barrenness in mares. . < ‘ : ‘ e 5 . 109
Abortion in mares ‘i 3 3 ‘ z 2 . 110
Partutition time . : r . - 3 : is F . 110
x CONTENTS
PAGES
The mare and the young foal - : ; . : . 112
The Foal . = é : ‘ 3 a ‘ . 118
T!s of the young foal 3 é ‘ . 115
Constipation — Diarrhea or scours — Nive: infection,
Feeding the young foal , ‘ “ : . 118
Weaning the young foal : , : : . 119
Breeding Jacks, Jennets, and Mules . ‘ é ‘ : . 121
Jacks and jennets. - , 5 5 . 7 z . 121
Mules and hinnies ‘ a ‘ r : . . ; . 124
CHAPTER VI
Care AND MANAGEMENT OF HlorsEs . ‘ 2 ‘ 5 - 127-150
Grooming . ‘ Xs . . : : » 127
Care of the forse! 8 Teeth . ‘ : ‘ : é . . 5 - 128
Clipping. j 7 P ‘ ‘ : : 7 7 . 128
Bedding the Mone z : : : . ‘ . : : . 129
Blankets : 7 2 S 5 . 130
Stable blankets — outaour pinnae:
Care of the Feet : : : 2 . : . 131
Shoeing.
Training the Colt : ‘ . 133
Training to the halter -—— Tne to the uses of thie bit — iene
portance of a good mouth — Bitting the colt — Harnessing the
colt — Hitching double — Pee single — Training to mount.
Harness and Harnessing 141
The bit and the bridle — The bit — Heya aia — Blinds _ Genter:
pieces, ear-bobs, and tassels —The check-rein — Fitting the
collar — Adjusting the haime-tug — Breast harness — Fitting
the back-band and crupper — Fly-nets — Caring for harness —
Harness room.
CHAPTER VII
DisEaSES OF THE Horse : : , . ¢ F , . 151-181
Treating Sick Horses . ‘ ‘ . . ' 4 , . 151
Administering Medicine . é ‘ e . 154
Drenching — Hypodermic Meta Midn—aeiGaal et _
Enemas or injections into the rectum — Counter-irritants —
Blisters — Firing.
Lameness ; its Cause and Treatment 3 7 5 7 e - 158
CONTENTS xi
PAGES
Lameness due to ailments of the bones 158
Splints, ring-bones, side-bones, bone snevin, and bony en-
largements — Fracture.
Lameness due to ailments of the joints 160
Wind-galls, blood-spavin, bog-spavin, and forouetniin,
Lameness due to ailments of muscles and tendons : 161
Sprains — Shoulder lameness — Sweeny shoulder — Sore
shoulder and neck, and galls— Curb.
Lameness due to capped-elbows or shoe-boils 164
Capped-elbows — Capped-knee — Capped-hock — Shee-ball:
Lameness due to ailments of the foot 165
Interfering — Overreaching —Calk wounds — Cons _ Panes
tured wounds of the foot — Cracked hoofs.
Diseases of the Legs . 168
Scratches — Mud fever — ficecth.
Diseases of the Digestive Organs 169
Ailments of the Mouth . 169
Sore mouth — Abnormal and aidenced teeth _— ieinpae
Ailments of the throat and gullet . 170
Choking.
Ailments of the stomach and intestines 171
Indigestion —- Colic — Diarrhea or scouring — Gunetipalion,
Diseases of the Respiratory Organs i . (174
Catarrh — Heaves, broken wind, asthma — ieGatina, whistling,
thick wind.
Miscellaneous Diseases V7
Wounds — Distemper — has — ren —_ Foul Seon —_
Diseases of the eye.
PART II—CATTLE
CHAPTER VIII
Croosinc CaTtLe — JUDGING ‘ . ‘ ‘ r 3 - 185-202
Types of Cattle . : = . 2 . . : ' 185
The dairy type . 7 ‘ E : ‘ - 186
The beef type 3 : : P ‘ 186
How to estimate the Age of a cow . . 187
General examination : 187
Examination of the teeth . . : . 5 * 187
xii CONTENTS
PAGES
Examination of the horns . : ° a : . . 189
Choosing a Dairy Cow ri % 5 : a i . 189
General consideration in dairy cows. : 3 . - 190
Form — Quality — Constitution a Tomperanient,
Detail characters of a dairy cow . : . 194
Head — Neck — Fore-quarters — Bady. — Hind- qiectsis —_—
Udder — Milk-veins — Milk signs.
Choosing Beef Cattle : ‘ : : . : . 198
General characteristics of beef cattle ‘ 199
Form of the feeder — Quality of the feeder Condition of the
feeder — Uniformity among feeders.
Detail characters of beef cattle . 3 200
Head — Neck — Fore-quarters — Body — inal-auiai tend _— Fat
steer.
CHAPTER IX
Frepinc Dairy Cattle 7 Z . : Fi . . . 203-226
Food Requirements for Milk . ‘ . . . : . 203
Haecker Feeding-standard — Mature Cow. : F ‘ : . 206
Haecker Feeding-standard — Heifers. 5 F : : : . 209
Feeding-standards mere guides. : ; , ‘ . . 210
Effect of Food on Composition of Milk , 210
Effect of food on total solids — Effect of food on eis pereeniane
of fat — Food and flavor of milk— Order of supplying food —
Effect of food on quantity of milk.
Watering the Milking Cow r . 5 2 : : . 218
Feeding the Milking Cow . . . 214
Summer feeding of dairy cattle = Weeledinng cows from fie
Winter feeding of dairy cattle — Grain or concentrated feeds
— Dry forage —Succulent feeds —Silage— Roots and tubers
— Soiling.
Feeding for High Production . 7 < ° 5 7 3 . 222
Feeding the Heifer . , : : ° . : ; . 228
Sample Rations for the Dairy Ga ° 5 - . e . 224
CHAPTER X
Breepinc Dairy CATTLE. : : ss 4 ; 3 . 227-256
Milk-records. : ‘ 5 . 229
Method of keeping eécbats = Wala of valle reese
CONTENTS xiii
PAGES
Testing Milk for Butter Fat .. 7 : é . 282
Sampling the milk — Using the acid — Whirling the bottles —
Reading the percentage of fat.
Testing Associations . . . . ‘i . 235
General plan , 5 235
Records of Preformance and of Breeding . - 236
The individual animal the unit of ae : 237
Plan of Breeding 237
Raise the heifer calves from the best cows — Couperative preeding.
Forming the Dairy Herd 238
Grading-up the Herd . ‘ 239
The first generation — Select heifer calves from he Hisiepeodus:
ing dams — The second generation — Continued judicious selec-
tion the means of improvement.
The Dairy Bull . : 244
Choosing a dairy bull — Uniformity of ‘get — Number of cows to
the bull.
The Dairy Cow . 5 4 ‘ 246
Productive period in dairy entins F : . 246
Season of the year to breed . . . e 247
Parturition time a. : : ma 248
The Calf . ; . : : ; . ‘i 250
Feeding the dairy alt. ‘ . : . : 7 251
Removing horns from young calves. : ‘ . 255
Castrating the male calf : ‘ 5 . : : c 255
CHAPTER XI
Care AND ManaGeMENT OF Dairy CATTLE i 5 ‘ . 257-274
Sanitary Milk Production . : 257
The cow — The stables — Milica — tewis— ilies
Milking Machines 260
Management of the Bull 263
Ringing the bull 264
The Dairy Barn. 264
Light in abundance should cater the “dais barn = Ventilavion
essential to health — Floors are best made of cement— Water-
ing device.
The Silo 270
The size of ihe dio = Filling the silo. 271
xiv CONTENTS
CHAPTER XII
PAGES
Freepinc Beer CattLe . : : . : 275-304
Essentials of Feeding Cattle ; : z 275
Age at which to feed cattle . 276
Form for feeding cattle 277
Condition of feeding cattle . . ' 278
Quality of feeding cattle . 279
Uniformity in feeding cattle 280
Food Requirements for Beef 281
Wintering Stockers and Feeders 282
Roughage increases feeding capacity ; 284
Summer Feeding on Pasture 284
How to turn to grass — Feeding grain to cattle on pasture — The
pastures.
Winter Feeding in Dry-lot 289
Feeding grain to cattle in dry-lot.
Baby-beef . 291
Cattle used in pabysnest roaenGena Macaig for aby: beef
production — Advantages of baby-beef production — Disadvan-
tages of baby-beef production.
Feeding Cattle for the Local Market 293
Hogs following Grain-fed Cattle 295
Getting Cattle ‘‘ On Feed” 296
Length of Feeding Period . 297
Marketable Condition 297
When to market cattle.
Shipping Cattle . 299
Preparing cattle for dhnpmient _ Daliing oattis ie ihe: focal
market.
Sample Rations for Fattening Cattle . 300
, CHAPTER XIII
Breepine Beer CatrLe 305-319
Plan of Breeding 307
Cooperative erating : 307
Raise heifer calves from best cows 307
Selection of Breeding Stock : : 308
The breed — Crossing — The duel nuepade cow — Uniformity.
The Beef Bull 311
The cost of a bull.
CONTENTS xv
PAGES
The Beef Cow . - 3 . 313
Production-period in éattta _ season of fies year ig a The
pregnant cow— Cow with calf at foot-— Weaning — Feeding
the beef calf.
CHAPTER XIV
CaRE AND MANAGEMENT OF BEEF CATTLE . e 3 ‘ . 820-330
Farms for Fattening Cattle ‘ é - : ‘ ‘ . 822
Equipment for Summer Feeding : 322
Pasture — Feed-bunk — The self- feedés _— Siides —_ Winer Salt.
Equipment for Winter Feeding . - 326
Shelter for winter feeding — The feed io elatonni for: feed
bunks — Dry-forage-rack — Water-tanks.
CHAPTER XV
Diseases OF CaTTLE °, , . 831-855
Diseases of the Generative ‘Onan nd Difficulties of Parturition . 331
Barrenness in cows 5 i . x fl 4 . 3382
Abortion in cows . 7 é : Hi ‘ ‘ ‘ . 382
Difficult parturition =. 7 3 R : . . 884
Retained afterbirth : : - 3 ‘i e : * . 3836
Eversion of the womb . ‘ . 7 7 - : . 338
Milk-fever . . , ‘ : ‘ . 7 . : . 338
Garget . 7 2 : : ‘i 3 , : : . 840
Ills of the Young Calf 2 . : é : : s 340
, Constipation . ‘ . 5 s - ‘ ‘ . a . 841
Diarrhea or scours 7 s a “ é fe 3 ‘ . 3d41
Tuberculosis : . - ‘ - - . Fi 3 . 843
Methods of infection . . x e Fi 3 . 3848
The tuberculin test . A . é 7 : ‘i . 845
The testing outfit . F 2 ‘ : : 5 A 3 . B45
Directions for making the test. ‘ é 5 . Z . 3846
Retesting . ‘ : 5 : si : 5 . 3849
Tuberculin not infallible i : 3 7 : 7 . . 849
Prevention of tuberculosis . ‘ 2 , i Fi “ . 3849
Eradication of tuberculosis . 5 ‘ ‘: : : - . 350
Bloating in Cattle. 7 F . 3 . : . z . 3851
Impaction of the Rumen . 7 ‘ 5 5 : - é . 3853
Cattle off feed.
Dehorning : : " j . - . 7 . 854
Vices of Dairy Cattle . : ‘ - . - : . 3854
Kicking cows — Sucking cow.
xvi CONTENTS
PART III—SHEEP
CHAPTER XVI
PAGES
Cuoosine anp Jupcinc SHEEP. : : z s - - 859-876
Catching and Holding Sheep . j i , e . 360
How to estimate Age of Sheep . F ‘ ‘ : ‘ 361
Examination of the teeth 362
Types of Sheep . i ‘ : : . 263
The fine-wool type é 5 : : : s 363
The mutton type . 865
Choosing Sheep . 365
General appearance 366
Form — Condition and wees _ Gaaliee— _— Consithitional
vigor — Uniformity. 6
Detail characters of sheep 368
Head — Neck — Shoulders — Chest: — ede ae Tae of
mutton.
Examining the fleece . 3872
Quantity of fleece— Density — Hiatt ” Quality of fieccan
Softness — Crimp — Soundness — Condition of fleece —
Purity — Luster — Brightness — Yolk — Summary.
CHAPTER XVII
Frepinec SuperP. - : A . j ; . 877-402
Food Requirement of ‘Shes ‘ F : : 379
Feeding the Flock ‘ ‘ 380
The flock in summer 381
Pasture for sheep— Turning to paste —Pageing the dices
— Change in pasture — Providing shade — The use of sown
pasture.
The flock in winter 386
The winter ration — Beerede- _— Care of feet _ Bedding.
Fattening Sheep 3 388
Growing winter lambs . : 388
Foundation stock — Winter gontters for ‘intel prod:
tion — Feeding the lambs — Dressing winter-lambs.
Growing spring lambs . : ‘ é 396
Feeding lambs for fall . : : 396
Getting the lambs on full feed,
+
CONTENTS Xvil
PAGES
Fattening lambs in winter. ‘ ‘ i oe AD . 398
Feeding in the semiarid Weat— Baoding in the corn-belt —
Feeding in the East.
Sample Rations for Fattening Sheep . ; . . . . 401
CHAPTER XVIII
Tue Breepine or SHEEP. ¢ - ‘ ‘ , . 403-421
Plan of Breeding . : ‘ : ‘ ‘i 3 to ts . 404
Choosing Breeding Stock . . i . 5 : ; ’ . 404
Type — Uniformity.
The ram é " : : ‘ : eae . 406
The ewe flock ‘ ‘i 5 . ‘ . ‘ A é . 406
The Breeding of the Ewes . : . 407
Productive period — Season to Bead _— Method of caine
Managing the ram —The pregnant ewe-—-Lambing time —
Difficult parturition.
The Lambs z i . 413
The first nea chilled ime a disowned ian
Lambills . . . . 416
Constipation — ‘Diariea —K Planine a Bins fond Sees
eyes.
General care of lambs . F . . AT
Feeding the jams Wenning fa lambs calCuattadiay male
lambs— Docking the lambs — Marking lambs.
CHAPTER XIX ,
Care AND MaNnaGEMENT OF SHEEP : . é . « 422-438
Dipping Sheep . : ‘ . 423
Importance of dlepihe— The dipping ab How ne are used —
Frequency of dipping.
Shearing Sheep . ‘ . 427
Washing sheep — When is sienna Hud wheats inchine
shearing — Tying the wool.
Practical Sheep Barns E d . 483
The feed-racks — Quantity of peldive— _ The sheen it.
CHAPTER XX
Diseases OF SHEEP . 5 . 3 - < s - . 439-450
Treating Sick Sheep _ é : . A . . . . 489
XVill CONTENTS
PAGES
External Parasites. 4 E r z , : , 4 . 440
Internal Parasites . : 3 A < ‘ 440
The stomach-worm — The tavelworm,
Digestive Disorders . : 446
coe las ada iinaniens enined. by avatieedine
Other Diseases . : . : i : ‘ . 448
Caked udder — Gamer;
PART IV—SWINE
CHAPTER XXI
Cuoosinc AND JupGinGc SwInE. . : i : 5 . 453-166
Types of Swine . - . : i : F F F . 453
The lard type 7 7 i : : ‘ é 453
The bacon type . ‘ . F é ‘ i . ' 454
Age of Swine. . é : : . ‘ , 3 . 464
Choosing Lard Hogs . ‘ , ‘ ‘ Z 5 . 455
General appearance of lard fie : , 456
General form — Weight and condition — Outs _— Gaustie
tion — Uniformity.
Detail characters of lard hogs 5 459
Head — Jowls — Neck — Shouldens — Back and fein — ‘Sides
— Belly — Hips — Rump — Hams — Legs.
Choosing Bacon Hogs : : - : . 464
Condition — Form — Shoudldees _ ‘Sides _— Haws
CHAPTER XXII
Tue FEeEpinc or Swine ‘ : ‘ 2 - 4 » + 467-486
Food Requirements for Swine . . : F , 3 : . 468
Preparing Food . ‘ ‘ . 469
Grinding feed — Soaking ihe: feo Cooking the ‘fei,
Making up a Ration . : 470
Feeding capacity among swine — Giving swine shel feed — Salt
— Fresh cool water.
Feeding the Breeding Herd . : . 472
Feeding the herd in summer a : . 472
Ringing to prevent sootne Pann for SWitié.—- Roots for
swine — Pumpkins and squashes.
CONTENTS xix
PAGES
Feeding the herd in winter . I ‘ . F . c » ATT
Feeding the young and old herd.
Fattening Swine : . . 3 p . . . . A418
‘Feeding the lard hog. : i . : . - - . 479
Feeding the lard hog in summer . . : a . 479
Feeding the lard hog in winter . 2 : i 5 . 481
Feeding the bacon hog . : 2 J F . 7 ‘ . 483
Summer feeding on pasture. ; A i i . 484
Winter feeding in dry-lot A . F : : . . 484
Sample Rations for Swine . ‘ . : ‘ . 2 . - 486
CHAPTER XXIII
Tue BREEDING OF SWINE. is , : . . . » 487-602
Plan of Breeding ‘ : : . : . - * : . 487
Codperative breeding. ;
Selecting Breeding Stock . é 3 , 7 : . , . 489
The type — ein ps
The Boar . ; ¢ . i ; ‘ 7 : . 490
The Sows ‘i H 491
Productive period —Besan #6 ‘ied “Method of ee The
pregnant sow — Farrowing time — The brood sow eating her
pigs — The sow after farrowing.
The Pigs . 5 498
The first nial Pie ilig=edding the ee iodine the pigs
—Castrating pigs — Marking pigs — Pigs after weaning.
CHAPTER XXIV
Care anpD MANAGEMENT ¥ : : . 5 . - 5038-509
Dipping Swine . i ‘ 7 : 5 : ‘ . 508
Shelter for Swine : 504
The large hog-house _ The individual hom house _ The Aghaped
individual hog-house — The shed-shaped individual hog-house
— Disadvantages and advantages.
The Hog Lot. . é } . F ° : é . . 509
Hog-wallows.
CHAPTER XXV
Diskases oF SWINE ‘ ‘ F a a fj F Q . 610-524
Quarantine lot . - i 5 ‘ ‘ ‘ 3 A - 5610
’
XxX CONTENTS
PAGES
Hog Cholera. : P . 511
Manner of spreading the disease. Prevention of tie disease —
Prevention of hog cholera by immunization — Objections to the
serum method. :
Swine Plague . ‘ , : j 2 . : E . 517
Tuberculosis . : . 517
Manner of aioe the license are of a :Aivencullan heal
Worms ‘ ‘ : . §19
Prevention ef worms =Jaeatniout fers worms.
Lice . . ‘ ‘“ ‘ 4 ¥ ‘ . . 620
Scours ‘ , ‘ . , : : : . 621
Constipation : ‘ ; : : 3 7 4 A . 521
Thumps. : F ‘ . . . Ei . . 622
Sore Mouth P %, gk- es 2)
Garget F F ‘ , : . : z ‘ _ . 523
Removing the Tusks . . : : : é . 523
Chicken-eating Swine » 624
APPENDIX
AVERAGE WEIGHTS OF FEEDING StTurrs ; : - é : . 5625
DicestreLe Nutrients in Feevine STuFrrs ‘ 3 . 526
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
PAGE
Jersey Head . : ‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ . : . Frontispiece
Arab Stallion ‘“ Shahan. Ur” Ge ‘ s ‘ z 6
Lower Front Teeth of Horse at Three ce of Ree : F : . 10
Lower Front Teeth of Horse at Four Years of Age ‘ : F . 10
Lower Front Teeth at Five Years of Age s : : i : . 10
Front View of Five-year-old Mouth ‘ F - , ‘ , . 10
Side View of Five-year-old Mouth . 5 : F ‘ ‘ i . 10
Lower Front Teeth at Six Years of Age. ri : ‘ 5 ee. AO
Lower Front Teeth at Seven Yearsof Age. , é 5 10
Lower Front Teeth at Eight Years of Age. . 7 ; . . 12
Upper Front Teeth at Nine Years of Age ‘ 2 ri é 2 . 12
Upper Front Teeth at Ten Years of Age j j 3 , 2 12
Upper Front Teeth at Eleven Years of Age . ‘ . : ‘ . 12
Upper Front Teeth at Fifteen Years of Age . é ‘ s ‘ . 12
Upper Front Teeth at Twenty-one Years of Age . F . x 42
Side View of Twenty-one-year-old Mouth . : : 5 ‘ . 18
Front View of Twenty-one-year-old Mouth . . . : : . 18
Upper Front Teeth of Horse at Thirty Years of Age. . : . 18
Imported Percheron Stallion ‘‘ Carnot”. . 5 ‘ : 3 15
First Prize Percheron Stallions : : 5 $ . : : » AT
Percheron Stallion ‘‘Coco”” . ks ‘ - 3 : ‘ ; 18
Hackney Coach Team . 5 3 7 : . 3 . . 22
An American Trotter. ° F e 3 - A é . 24
Clydesdale Stallion ‘“ Calipt”?. ‘ $ , 7 3 , ‘ . 80
Clydesdale Mare. 5 , : : » 82
Champion English Shire Stallion ts Da Patch er 3 : 2 . 85
Champion English Shire Stallion ‘‘ Mazemore Harold” - 40
‘*¢ Wrydelands Sunshine,’? Champion English Shire Mare. ‘ . 45
‘¢ Wrydelands Starlight,’’ English Shire Mare : : 7 ‘ . 65
Belgian Stallion ‘‘ Robuste de Thiensies. ‘ : ; . ‘i . 68
Imported Belgian Stallion ; | . : : 5 : F » 61
Farm Team of Grade Belgians ‘ a oe By suse ft. whe 1902
Xxil LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Driving Team of Spirit and Good Form .
Black Percheron Gelding
Pair Well-bred Mules ,
Suffolk Stallion ‘‘ Rendleshau Seated ma
Suffolk Mare ‘‘ Bawdsey Pearl”
Hackney Coach Stallion ‘ Foundation ”’
Hackney Stallion ‘‘ Fandango M”’.
“ Decorateur,’’? French Coach Stallion
French Coach Stallion, five years old
Morgan Stallion ‘‘ General Gates”’.
*¢ Carolina,’’ American Saddler
Group of Percheron Mares
Percheron Mare ‘‘ Princess’? and Four of exe Colts
Cross-bred Coach and American Trotter
Arab Horse as a Polo Pony
Group of French Draft Horses
Hackney Coach Mare and Foal 3
Shetland Pony Team. ‘ 2 .
Champion Jack ‘' General Wood 2
Catalonian Jack : ,
Pair Two-year-old Jacks
Pair of Premium Mules .
Method of catching Young Foal ‘
Method of teaching Young Foal to Drive .
Arrangement of ‘‘ Bitting Harness ”’
Colt Hitched for First Time
Harness for controlling Vicious Horses
Types of Collars
Polo Pony of Good Form
Thoroughbred Running Horse F 2
Standard Bred Carriage Stallion iCarmnon aa .
American Trotting Bred Carriage Horse
Hackney Mare ‘' Kitty Grey’? in Action ‘
Jersey Cow ‘‘ Tormentor’s Lass”? . : A
Angus Steer . 3 5
Cow’s Teeth arranged pecomlinn to vo
Guernsey Cow ‘Dolly Dimple”. z r
Guernsey Cow ‘‘ Imported Hayes Rosie’’
Guernsey Bull ‘‘ Yeoman”
Holstein-Friesian Bull ‘‘ King Sopis”
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Xxill
PAGE
Holstein-Friesian Cow ‘ Dichter Calamity” . : : ‘ : - 208
Interior View of Dairy Barn . : ‘ : ; . 214
Holstein-Friesian Cow ‘‘ Daisy Pauline Pail 2d ae : é : . 216
Holstein-Friesian Cow “Betty Lyons Netherland ” - é . 224
Ayrshire Cow. : ; : 7 ‘ . 228
Apparatus for testing Milk ‘eae icone Hedords ; ; F ‘ 234
Jersey Bull ‘‘ Hood Farm Torono” 3 ; ; “ r : . 245
Jersey Cow ‘‘ Jacoba Irene’? . i : : § Z 7 . 250
Imported Brown Swiss Bull. J 3 é i ; ‘ A - 252
Brown Swiss Cow “ Vogel” . ‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ : . . . 258
Device for Cooling Milk. 2 : 3 : ‘i F : ‘ . 259
Dutch Belted Bull ** Auten”. é 3 ¥ : A ‘ ‘ . 262
Dairy Barn. 5 ‘ ‘ ; ‘ . 265
Interior View of Dairy Barn showing Becd-carsier F . 267
Interior View of Dairy Barn showing Litter-carrier F 5 : . 269
Dutch Belted Cow ‘‘ Echo 2” 2 ‘ : : , - 271
Silo in Process of Construction by Tee thor 3 ‘ é : . 273
Shorthorn Bull “ Avondale” . ‘ ‘ : ‘ F j 3 . 277
Prize Winning Shorthorn Bull 5 ‘i : ¥ : F 5 . 281
Fattening Steers on Pasture . . . . : E z 288
Steer that made Large Gains . : ‘ Z ‘ : s 294
Aberdeen Angus Bull. F j . : . ‘ ‘ . 298
Hereford Cow. fs 4 é : : ‘ . 806
Champion Hereford Bull “Dale” r : - ‘i F . 808
The Shorthorn Cow ‘“ Rose of Glenside ”’ 3 2 z : , 310
Galloway Bull. - ‘ ; , : : F é é ‘: . 3812
Galloway Heifers . F ‘ : 7 - 3 . 3818
Feeding Grain to Steers on Beatie , , A F i . 3824
Red Polled Bull ‘‘Cremo” . : . ‘ : 5 ‘ 329
Red Polled Herd . 7 ‘ : is ‘ c s : . 337
Devon Bull ‘‘ Darks Majesty ” ” ; : . z F . . 3844
Devon Herd ; ‘Sally’? and two otspring A ‘ : ‘ : . 852
Delaine Merino Ram “‘Beacon”’ . F . 7 : ; . 360
Sheeps’ Teeth, illustrating Age. , . 3 ; : ‘ 362
Champion Merino Ram. A type . 5 : ‘ 5 ‘ . . 864
Champion Merino Ram. Btype . é . . : 4 : . 865
Delaine Merino Ram ‘ Victor.” C type é 2 5 : s . 865
Judging Sheep. Noting General Appearance F A ri : . 3869
Determining Condition of Teeth and the Age ‘ . ‘ 3 . 869
Noting Fullness of Neck . z . - 7 ‘ : . 3869
XXiv LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Fullness of the Shoulder .
Width of Chest ‘ ‘ é Z s z
Width of Body ‘ 5 x
Depth of Chest
Fullness of Shoulder Tops
Determining Fullness of Back
Width of Hips
Width of Thighs
Condition of Leg of Mutton
Examining the Fleece for the Finest of the Wool .
Examining the Fleece for the Coarsest of the Wool
American Merino Ewes .
Rambouillet Ram
Southdown Ewe
Southdown Lambs .
Shropshire Ram
Champion Shropshire Ewes
Dressing Hot-house Lamb
Hot-house Lamb dressed and ready for Wiehe.
Hot-house Lamb wrapped and ready for Shipment
Hampshire Ram 3 A
Hampshire Ewe :
Champion Oxford Ram .
Suffolk Ewe
Method of teaching Haialows Lounge Lain’ to Suck
Horned Dorset Ram :
Method of marking Lambs F
Horned Dorset Ewe 5 : ‘ ‘ : .
Cheviots . z 7 ‘ . ‘
Shearing Sheep by Aachindey é : " .
Position while shearing Abdomen . : : 4
Position while shearing Left Hind Leg . ‘ °
Position while shearing Neck . : : é .
Position while shearing Left Shoulder : .
Position while shearing Left Side . , 5 ‘
Position while shearing Rump :
Position while shearing Right Shoulder
Position while shearing Right Side.
Position while finishing Sheep
Position of wool whén Finished
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Sheep Barn. . ¢ : é c : . .
Leicester Yearling Ewe . ‘ . : .
Cotswold Ram : ; . , ,
Champion Cotswold Bain : : ‘ ‘ .
Lincoln Ram . * F : ‘ a :
Poland China Yearling Hose ‘i 7 . : . .
Poland China Boar. . : . . . . .
Prize Berkshire Sow F ; 5 F . . .
Champion Berkshire Pig Fs - > :
Large Yorkshire or Large White Sa . . 7
Large Yorkshire or Large White Sow
Duroc Jersey Boar . -
First Prize Duroc Jersey Boar a z 7 : 7
Chester White Boar : 2 2 ‘ J .
Chester White Pigs . 3 ‘ : :
Victoria Sow . : 7 ‘ : a ° .
Champion Hampshire Swine : 3 . : -
Cheshire Pig of Good Type . ae : 2
Prize Cheshire Boar
Group of English Small Vedkehiines: or Small Whites
Method of marking Pigs ‘ : ‘
Hog-dipping Equipment .
A-shaped Individual Hog-house .
Shed-shaped Individual Hog-house ;
First Prize Tamworth Sow 4 ‘
Tamworth Pig : . . : °
PART ONE— HORSES
WITH GENERAL CHAPTERS ON FEEDING AND
BREEDING OF ANIMALS
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
CHAPTER I
CHOOSING A HORSE— JUDGING
In choosing any class of animals, there are three faculties
that should be well developed — familiarity with what is
wanted, powers of observation, and good judgment.
One must first consider the use for which the animal is
desired and the type or breed that will best accomplish the
given purpose. If the animal is wanted for light trucking
and to deliver produce at the market, it might be a mistake
to choose a heavy draft horse; whereas if the object is to
deliver heavy freight from the car to the freight-house, it would
be none the less a mistake to choose a running horse. Again,
if the animal is demanded for a farm where there is consider-
able heavy work, such as breaking the land, especially if the
soil is heavy, the type of horse should be unlike that for a
dairy farm, where the team work is ordinarily light. The
more familiar one is with the demand and the type best suited
to meet it, the better his chance of success.
The power of observation should be well developed. The
eye must see quickly and accurately, so that there may be no
mistake in the observations that are to form the basis for a
conclusion. Not only should one see things as they are, but
there should be dispatch in detecting deviations from the cor-
rect form. There is much difficulty in this. One may be fa-
3
4 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
miliar with the fact that a few white hairs on the knee may
indicate that the animal stumbles, and yet when examin-
ing the horse entirely overlook them; in like manner, he may
know that gray hairs on the inside of the pastern may indicate
that the animal interferes, and yet the white hairs go wholly
unnoticed. The difficulty is often increased by the salesman
attempting to cover up such signs, and this should serve to put
the prospective purchaser on his guard.
Having noted the desirable and undesirable qualities of the
animals under consideration, a mental picture of each should
be retained, for it often happens that in the choice of a horse
many animals are examined before one is found that is accept-
able. Many live-stock judges, particularly poultry ‘fanciers,
have this faculty developed to a marked degree. It often
happens that they are called on to judge large rings of ani-
mals, fifty or more in a single class, and to be able to place
these animals properly they must remember each of the ani-
mals, as it is impossible to see them all at a glance. Again,
retaining such a picture of horses is of value in matching
teams. A well-matched team is far more valuable than if
each animal is sold separately. There are those who make a
business of buying animals singly, matching them, and selling
the team thus matched. This is a very profitable business,
a few transactions each year often netting a good sum.
After having examined a number of horses, good, bad, and
indifferent, some of them filling the demand in part only, and
some not at all, the judgment is brought into play to decide
on the price. Perhaps one animal answers every demand, but
the price is high; another does not please so well, but the price
is low. Again, when judging a ring of animals, one must use
the judgment as to which of two defects is the more serious.
The judgment can and should be trained in much the same
way as the power of observation and the ability to retain mental
pictures.
CHOOSING A HORSE é
In choosing a horse, efficiency depends much on practice
and experience. The type to fill a certain demand, and the
value of the animal for such purpose, are recognized much more
quickly and accurately by one who is buying many horses
daily than by those who buy one only occasionally.
There are a few considerations that apply with equal force to
all classes of animals, such as the examination in general, esti-
mating age, detecting unsoundness, and the like. These will be
discussed first; then we will pass to the choice of the individual.
GENERAL EXAMINATION OF THE HORSE
In examining a horse, some system should be followed in
order that no point go unnoticed. To facilitate this and to
aid in establishing uniform values for the various points of the
animal, the score-card was devised. Official score-cards have
been adapted for many of the breeds, and while of little prac-
tical value in choosing or judging a horse, they do aid in estab-
lishing a uniform standard for the breeder. The examination
of the horse cannot always be made at leisure, but enough
time should be taken, if possible, to make the task complete.
Examination in the stable. — When possible, the horse should
first be examined in the stable. Note the way in which the
animal is tied to the manger; whether he has been chewing
the tie-strap or the fixtures; how he stands in the stall; and
his general behavior, when you step to his side. Note the
horse’s conduct while grooming, particularly along the belly,
the backs of the forelegs, and the fronts of the hind legs and
about the flank. Harness the animal. Note the manner of
taking the bit; the behavior when placing the headstall over
the ears; the Terie over the back; the crupper under the
tail; and when buckling the girth.
The horse may now be taken from the stall. Note the action
as he is being turned around. In many sale stables there is a
contemptible practice of introducing ginger into the rectum as
6 7 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the animal is being taken out, as this serves to stimulate the
animal and he shows to advantage. As the horse passes into
the yard, the door-way affords a very good place to examine the
horse’s eyes, nostrils, mouth, and noting the age.
Fic. 1.—Arap Sratuion “SHanwan.” Imported by J. A. P. Ramadell, of
Newburg, N. Y.
The Arab horse, named after his native country, is particularly noted as being the
animal that gave the English Thoroughbred running horse its speed and endur-
ance. Arabs are full of quality, very intelligent, and docile. They are chiefly
used as officers’ chargers, or for siring polo ponies.
Examination of the horse in action. — First, note action while
being led by the halter. Without regard for type, observe the
walk. This is a much neglected though very important gait
for all types and breeds of horses. Next note the trot, and,
CHOOSING A HORSE 7
with the saddler the various saddle gaits. These trials should
take place on pavement or hard surface, as solid footing affords
the best conditions to detect the existence of lameness. These
gaits should be noted from the front, from behind, and from either
side. Second, note the action when hitched to the kind of
vehicle for which the horse is intended. Observe the horse first
at the walk, then the trot from in front, behind, and either side.
Notice manner of starting, turning, stopping, backing, and the
like. The prospective purchaser should now mount the vehicle
and drive the horse, observing his action, general behavior,
manner of taking the bit, ease with which he is driven and
guided this way and that. When satisfied in all respects, stop
the horse and observe him standing after the exercise, especially
with respect to the regularity of breathing and his manner of
standing. Third, if the horse is intended for saddle purposes,
in part, he should be tried out under the saddle, observing his
behavior when mounting, the ease of movement and the like,
with even more caution than when being led or hitched to a
vehicle.
HOW TO ESTIMATE THE AGE OF A HORSE
The age of a horse is an important factor in determining his
present and prospective value. . Familiarity with the characters
that indicate age are, therefore, often extremely useful. A
knowledge of these characters is not difficult to secure, but skill
in their application depends much on continued practice.
General considerations. —In estimating the age of a horse,
the teeth furnish the best index, yet there are other general con-
siderations that play an important part, especially in the case
of young and very old animals. In estimating the age of young
animals, size is the principal factor to be considered. In very
old horses, white hairs make their appearance around the temple,
the eyes, the nostrils, and elsewhere; the poll or top of the head
becomes more pointed; the sides of the face more depressed ;
8 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the hollows above the eyes deeper; the backbone becomes more
prominent and often strongly curved downward, and the animal
does not stand squarely on his legs, which show more wear.
Examination of the teeth. — While the order of the appearance
of the teeth and their method of wearing are considered the most
important and accurate means of estimating the age of domestic
animals, and are the means employed by all horsemen, these are
not absolutely accurate, and much depends on the condition as
well as the individuality of the animal. The teeth of animals
that have bones of somewhat open structure are likely to in-
dicate that the animals are older than they really are; while
the teeth of those whose bones are of fine close texture may
indicate them to be younger than they are. Again, animals fed
on soft and succulent food are likely to show a younger mouth,
whereas those fed on hard, dry food are likely to show an older
mouth.
The horse when full grown has forty teeth, twenty on either
jaw, divided as follows: six nippers, two canines, one on either
side, and twelve molars, six on aside. In the mare the canines
are usually absent. Since only the nippers or incisor teeth are
inspected in estimating the age, they alone will be considered.
It is the order in which the nippers make their appearance that
enables us to estimate the age of the horse up to five years,
and the manner in which their surface is worn that aids us in the
estimation from five to eleven years of age. After the horse has
passed the eleventh year it is difficult to determine the age. In
practice the age is designated as eleven, twelve, or fifteen past,
as the case may be, but how much past cannot be told with any
degree of accuracy.
The colé is provided before the end of the first year with a set
of temporary or milk teeth, the first or middle pair appearing
at about two weeks of age; the second or intermediate pair at
one to two months of age ; and the third or lateral pair appearing
at about ten months of age. The difference in size of the jaw-
CHOOSING A HORSE 9
bone between the foal and the grown horse makes a change from
milk to permanent teeth necessary. The permanent replace
the temporary teeth at two and one-half or three years of age
up to five years. It is seldom that one is called on to esti-
mate the age before two and one-half years because the ani-
mal has not yet reached the period of usefulness, and even if
the age must be estimated, size is considered more than any
other factor.
Three years old. — At about two years and nine months of
age the permanent pair of center nippers replaces the temporary
ones, and by the time the animal is three years of age they are up
and ready for use. They will have deep cups and are much
larger than the temporary teeth. If the colt be a male, small
tusks will appear at about this time.
Four years old. — At about three years and nine months, the
intermediate pair of permanent nippers appear and is up and
ready for use at four years of age. The center pair shows much
wear and the cups are about one-third gone. The tusks, if
any, have enlarged, but are still sharp on their points and flattish
on the inside.
Five years old. — At about four years and nine months, the
permanent corner nippers make their appearance and are up
and ready for use at five years of age. At five years of age the
horse has a full mouth of permanent teeth; the center nippers
show two years’ wear and have changed slightly in shape, having
become rounder on the inside, the cups being two-thirds gone ;
the intermediate nippers show one year’s wear, the cup being one-
third gone. Five years is the age preferred on the market, and
occasionally horsemen extract the temporary nippers, which
hastens the appearance of the permanent teeth.
Six years old. — The cups in the center pair in the lower jaw
have disappeared, or nearly so; they have become much
smaller in the intermediates and show one year’s wear in the
corner nippers.
10 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Fic. 2.— Front TEErs 1N
Lower Jaw at THREE
Years or Acre. Two
center permanent teeth
up. — (Fias. 2-17, from
Gousaux and BARRIER.)
Fie. 6.— Front View
or A FIVE-YEAR-OLD
Movrts.
Fic. 3.—Front TrEetH In
Lower Jaw at Four
Years or AGE. Four
center permanent teeth
up.
Fic. 7.— Sipe VIEw
OF A FIVE-YEAR-OLD
Moora.
Fic. 4.—Front TreetH in
Lower Jaw at Five Years
or Agr. All permanent
teeth up.
Fic. 8.—Front Treera
Fig. 5.— Front Treetra in in Lower Jaw at
Lower Jaw av Six Seven YEARS or AGE.
Years or AcE. Cups Cups out of interme-
out of center teeth. diate teeth.
CHOOSING A HORSE 11
Seven years old. — At seven, the cups are gone from the inter:
mediate pair in the lower jaw, and have become quite shallow
in the corner nippers. There is a notch in the upper corner
nipper where it overlaps the lower one. Marked changes in
shape have taken place in thenippers; they are becoming thicker
from inside out, rounder on the inside, and meet at a sharper
angle than when they first made their appearance.
Eight years old. — At eight years, the cups are gone from all
the nippers of the lower jaw. They are present in all of the
upper jaw.
Nine years old. — The cups in the center pair of nippers of
the upper jaw have disappeared, but are still present in the
intermediate and corner nippers. The cups are not likely to
disappear at as regular intervals in the upper jaw as they did
in the lower. Therefore it is not always possible to tell the age
of the horse so accurately.
Ten years old.— At ten years of age, the cups have disappeared
from the upper intermediates, but are still retained in the corner
nippers, though shallow. The teeth are more triangular in
shape, and those of the upper and lower jaw meet at a sharper
angle as the age increases.
Eleven years old. — At eleven years, the cups are gone from
all the nippers of the upper jaw. However, because of the fact
that some horses have denser bones than others, it is not un-
common to find shallow cups in the upper corner teeth as late
as the twelfth or the fifteenth year.
Aged horses. — After the horse has passed the twelfth year,
the matter of a year or two amounts to little. Much depends
on the individuality of the animal, as some animals are worth
more at fifteen than others at twelve. One’s judgment of the
value of a horse at these ages should be formed on general ap-
pearances and activities rather than on age.
In old horses, the nipper teeth have become nearly triangular,
showing long wear and meeting at an acute angle. The tusks
12 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Fie. 9.—Fronr Teseru
in Lowzr Jaw at Eicur
Years or AcE. Cups all
out.
Fie. 10.— Front Tretu
in Upper Jaw at NINE
Years or Acr. Cups
out of center teeth.
Fie. 12.—Fronr TrertoH in
Upper Jaw at ELEVEN
Years oF AcE. Cups all
out.
Fic. 13.— Front TEETH 1n
Uprer JAw AT FIFTEEN
Years or Acs. Teeth
quite triangular.
Fic. 11.—Front Treetu
in Upper Jaw at Tan
Years or AGE. Cups
out of intermediate
teeth.
Fic. 14.—Front TEeeta in
Uprrer Jaw at TWENTY-ONE
Years or AGE.
CHOOSING A HORSE 13
are large, blunt, and round. The
nippers may have grown out so long
as to prevent the grinders from
meeting, in which case a horse will
spit out his food after masticating a
part of it. If the nippers are rasped
off, the grinders will meet, and the
horse’s life will be somewhat pro-
longed.
Irregularities in the teeth. —It
often happens that the teeth are’
not regular, in which case the horse
is said to have afalsemouth. These
irregularities may occur in the
number: there may be’ more or less
than the regular number — thirty-
six in mares or forty in horses; they
may occur in the form of the teeth or
the uniting of two teeth; they may
occur because one jaw happens to
be longer or shorter than the other ;
they may come as the result of
cribbing, some horses have the bad
habit of biting the stall fixtures or
other surrounding objects, thus break-
ing off the free borders of the teeth,
which make the teeth irregular and
which must not be confused with
normal wear. Such cases can usu-
ally be recognized by the broken-off
particles and the roughed surface.
Irregularities may result from the
employment of fraudulent means,
the horseman striving to give the
~
Fie. 15.—Smer View or a
T WENT Y-ONE-YEAR-OLD
Movutu. Note the sharp
angle at which the teeth
meet.
Fic. 16. — Front Vizw
OF A TWENTY-ONE-
YEAR-OLD Movuta.
Fic. 17.—Front TEETH IN
UpreR Jaw av THIRTY
Yuars or AGE.
14 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
mouth the characteristics of that period of life in which the
horses have their greatest value, thus endeavoring to make the
young appear old and the old appear young. It is ordinarily
easy for one of experience to detect a mouth that has been tam-
pered with. While many are very skillful at bishoping, it is a
hard matter very materially to alter the mouth without detec-
tion. After the teeth have once been interfered with they can
no longer serve as an index in estimating age, the dental tables,
the cups, and the like having been partly or wholly destroyed.
DETECTING UNSOUNDNESS
A satisfactory definition of soundness or unsoundness is not
easily given. The term ‘“unsound”’ as used by horse dealers
in this country is often loosely applied. It may mean anything
from a mere bad habit to a defect that renders the animal
absolutely worthless. The best usage warrants dividing these
imperfections into two classes — blemishes and unsoundness.
A blemish may be defined as something that depreciates the
value of a horse without interfering with his usefulness, such as
wire cuts, car bruises, and the like which mar the appearance of
a horse but do not limit his functions.
An unsoundness may be defined as an imperfection of so serious
a nature as to interfere with the usefulness of the horse, such as
ring-bones, side-bones, splints, curbs, and the like.
The ability to detect unsoundness depends largely on practice;
yet some imperfections cannot be detected by an ordinary ex-
amination, and it is only after becoming familiar with the animal
that these will be observed. In examining a horse for unsound-
ness, it is well to follow a regular order beginning with the head
and ending with the feet. There are a great number of im-
perfections to be found among horses, too many to be catalogued
here. The following list contains the more important : —
Decayed and broken teeth.—A foul odor indicates decayed
or unsound teeth. This can easily be detected, as it attaches
CHOOSING A HORSE 15
itself to the hand on heing introduced into the mouth. Nippers
with broken edges indicate that the horse is addicted to cribbing.
Fig. 18.—Imporrep PercHeron Srauiion ‘'Carnot,’’ No. 66666. Imported
by J. Crouch & Son, Lafayette, Ind. Sold to W. 8S. Corso, Whitehall, IIl.,
for $10,000. ‘‘Champion Percheron Stallion of America.’
The Percheron draft horse, a native of La Percha, France, is noted for his massive
size, quality, endurance, and action. In weight, stallions usually average
from 1700 to 2000 pounds and mares from 1400 to 1800 pounds. In height,
stallions range from 151% to 17 hands and mares from 15 to 164%. The color
is exceedingly variable, though black and dapple gray predominate. This is
the most common breed of heavy draft horses in the United States.
Discharge from the nostrils. — There should be no discharge
from the nostrils, which should be fresh pink in color. A profuse
16 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
colored discharge suggests glanders, distemper, shipping fever,
and similar diseases. This may be only temporary, but one can-
not afford to take the risk.
Impaired vision. — A horse by its action will usually betray
imperfect eyesight. Blind horses have a peculiar high stepping
gait or are inclined to shy readily and often without cause. The
ears are exceedingly active, as if trying to aid the eyes. Blind-
ness may be discovered by moving the hand gently in front of the
eyes or by closing the eye with the hand and excluding the light
for a moment; the pupil should dilate to its utmost capacity ;
when the hand is removed and the light strikes the eye, the
pupil should rapidly contract to its normal size. This shows
that the eye is sensitive to light.
Defective hearing. — When the horse’s ears are rigid, it in-
dicates that the hearing is defective. The animal is unre-
sponsive when spoken to, and the eyes are active. Defective
hearing is more common than supposed.
Poll-evil is a disease located at the top of the head and is in-
dicated by the parts being exceedingly tender. Its causes are
many, and it is very serious.
Sweenied shoulders is a wasting away of the muscle on the out-
side of the shoulder blade. This can be readily detected as
the shoulder appears flat and the blade bare of muscle.
Fistule. — Exceeding tenderness at the withers may in-
dicate that the horse has fistulz, though at the time there may
be no external signs.
Capped elbows.—Sores formed on the elbows while the ani-
mal is lying down are unsightly and can readily be seen.
Unsound knees. — The knee should be examined for bony
enlargements, wind-puffs, scars on the front, and speed-cuts.
Scars on the front indicate the horse is a stumbler.
Splints. — Bony bunches on the inside of the cannon are
called splints. These must not be confused with the two small
bones associated with the cannon. Splints located on the back
CHOOSING A HORSE 17
part of the leg near the tendon or close to the knee joint are con-
sidered most objectionable, as they are likely to interfere with
the action and cause the animal lameness. When located on
the side, they are less likely to cause lameness and not so objec-
tionable. Splints may disappear from young draft horses.
Ring-bones. — Bony bunches on the fetlock and pastern are
called ring-bone. There are two forms, called high and low,
depending on the location.
Side-bone. — Just at the top of the hoof, on either side, the
cartilages should be examined to see that they are not ossified,
forming side-bones. These are common on the front feet only.
Scratches is located on the back of the pastern, and can be
easily detected; it often causes the horse a great deal of pain
and annoyance.
Unsound hoofs. — The hoofs should be closely examined for
quarter cracks — cracks extending from the coronary band
downward; for sand cracks —
cracks extending from the bot-
tom upward; for seedy toe —
a softening of the wall at the
toe of the hoof; for thrush —
a diseased condition of the foot
in the region of the frog, which
makes its presence known by
a disagreeable odor ; for quitter
—a running sore occurring ab Ts, 10. Timex Pause Penorenoy
the top of the hoof or coronet, & Son, Lafayette, Ind.
sometimes called ‘‘gravel”’; for
corns — bunions located in the corner of the heels, common
in animals with weak low heels; for laminitis or founder —
congestion of blood in the region of the toe, common in heavy
horses; and for navicular disease — caused by overworking
the tendons that pass to the navicular bone, common in
light and very active animals.
c
18 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Thoroughpin occurs between the tendon and the upper point
of the hock. It consists of a soft swelling and may be easily
detected, as it can be pushed from side to side.
Spavin. — There are three kinds of spavin—bone, bog, and
occult. Bone-spavin is the most common, and consists of a
bony growth on the inside and
front of the hind leg just below
the hock. To detect bone-
spavin, stand in front and to the
side of the animal so the inner
outline of the hind leg may be
clearly seen. Bog-spavin occurs
in the natural depression on the
inner and front part of the hock
and consists of a soft swelling,
ee rr ee eee formed by the oil, which accumu-
“Coco.” A noted prize winner. lates from the joint. The term
“blood spavin” is sometimes
applied to the enlargement of the vein that passes across the
hock from the front. Occult-spavin is located in the joint and
is hard to detect. The usual method of detection is to lift the
suspected leg and then start the horse off quickly.
Stringhalt is a marked jerking of the hind leg as the horse
travels. In some cases it is seen only when the horse first starts
and disappears after a few steps have been taken.
Curb occurs on the back of the cannon just below the hock.
It may be easily detected by looking at the leg from the side,
as it is a variation from a straight line that should run from
the point of the hock to the fetlock joint.
Forging and overreaching. — A horse is said to forge when
the shoes of the hind feet strike those of the fore feet,
making a characteristic sound. Overreaching is the striking
of the fore and hind feet in such a way as to injure the
horse.
CHOOSING A HORSE 19
Interfering. — A horse is said to interfere when he strikes his
fore or hind feet together in such a way as to injure them.
Locating lameness. — When standing, a horse troubled with
sore feet will extend them as far as possible. If only one is
sore, he puts the lame one forward and is often spoken of as a
pointer. When the trouble is in the shoulder, the leg will be
flexed at the knee. When in motion, the horse puts the sound
foot down with confidence and makes an effort to ease the ailing
one by throwing the head up as it strikes the ground.
Unsound in wind. — There are three common defects in the
wind — unsound wind, roaring, and heaves. To detect these,
drive the horse rapidly for half a mile, then stop quickly and
listen to the breathing by placing the ear near the lungs or by
standing near the neck. If the horse gets his breath with
difficulty, he is thick winded. If in breathing he wheezes and
whistles, he isaroarer. If the breathing is irregular, it is likely
he is troubled with heaves. To detect this, observe the flanks
for the characteristic double movement, as the air from the lungs
seems to be half expelled when the respiration stops for a brief
period and then the expulsion of the air is completed.
If a horse has passed through many hands in a short period,
it is safe to conclude that there is some radical blemish or
unsoundness that is not easily discovered.
TYPES OF HORSES
There are two distinct types of horses. First, is the light
type, useful for light work and for speed. This group is further
divided into running, trotting, pacing, saddling, coaching, ex-
pressing type, and the like. Second, the heavy type for heavy
work and is further divided into light draft, medium draft, and
heavy draft type. Horses belonging to the first type are usually
designated light horses; those belonging to the second, draft
horses. As the form or conformation best adapted for one is
different from that of the other, we cannot find both united in
20 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the same animal. It is a physical impossibility to have maxi-
mum speed and maximum draft in the same engine, and such
is none the less the case among horses.
The light type. —In conformation, horses belonging to the
light type vary considerably, depending on the purpose for which
they are adopted. For example, the saddle horse differs in
many respects from the running horse, and the trotter or pacer
has many characteristics unlike either. However, since horses
belonging to the light type are each intended for light and rather
fast work, they possess many points in common.
In general conformation, the light type of horse is rather tall,
upstanding, the limbs long, the distance from the chest to the
ground is more than one-half the height of the horse from the
withers to the ground. The distance from the withers to the
knee and from the hips to the hock is great. The animals are
somewhat narrow but rather deep in front. In general form
the light type resembles the greyhound.
Heavy type. —In general conformation, the heavy type of
horse is massive, blocky, low set, the limbs short, the distance
from the chest to the ground one-half the height of the animal
from the withers to the ground. In general form, this type
resembles the bull-dog. Weight is important. In order to
pull heavy loads the draft horse must possess plenty of weight.
A draft horse in fair condition at maturity weighs from 1500 to
2400 pounds, according to the class.
CHOOSING A LIGHT HORSE
Having considered the method of procedure and the type, we
will now discuss the desirable and undesirable characters of each
type. For convenience these are divided into two classes:
first, the general appearance, those characters having to do with
the horse as a whole, such as form, quality, and action; and
second, the detail characters, having to do with each point in-
CHOOSING A HORSE 21
dependent of the others, such as the head, neck, shoulder, and
the like.
General appearance in light horses
The form, action, quality, color, and temperament are very
important characters among light horses, and add to or detract
from their desirability.
Form. — One of the first characters to attract attention
among light horses is the general form. In those of good form
there is a peculiar balance and harmony throughout the make-up
which is difficult to describe and must be observed to be appre-
ciated. The form varies according to the object sought, that
of the coacher being full and plump, while that of the trotter
or runner will be lean and angular. The position and direction
of the limbs should receive special consideration. They should
‘be viewed from in front, behind, and either side. In this con-
nection, it will prove helpful if one will bear in mind that the
limbs should be so formed as to meet the following requirements :
the fore leg when viewed from the side should be so formed
that a plumb line dropped from the elbow joint would pass
through the middle of the knee, the cannon, and the fetlock, and
fall a short distance behind the heel ; when viewed from in front,
the line lowered from the point of the shoulder would divide
equally the knee, the cannon, and the foot, leaving between the
two feet an interval equal to the width of the hoof. The hind
leg when viewed from behind should be so formed that a plumb
line lowered from the point of the buttock will pass through the
middle of the hock, cannon, pastern, and foot, leaving between
the two feet an interval almost equal to the width of the hock.
This line should also just touch the back of the hock and the
fetlock joint.
Action. —In the market for light horses there is no single
feature held in higher estimation than that of good action.
Desirable action varies according to the object sought, but to
22 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
sell well a light horse must possess as much as may be displayed
and used to advantage. Excellence at a walk is a very desirable
quality in all types of horses. The feet of the active walkers
leave the ground with a quick snap, and move straight away,
swerving neither to the right nor to the left, nor should the folding
of the knees or the flexing of the hocks result in an outward
pitching or spreading. In addition to being snappy, regular,
and straight, it should be fast. This is a point often neglected,
and many good acting horses are provokingly slow walkers.
Action at the trot will vary according to the class. In the
roadster a strong, long-reaching knee-and-hock action, with the
feet picked up
snappy, is most es-
sential. The stride
should be long and
not too high. In
the coacher, a rather
high, bold knee-and-
hock action is the
most sought. In
all classes the move-
ment should be
straight and regu-
lar. There must
i Ae il a al “) be style and dash
Fig. 21.—Hackney Coacu Tram. Well-trained jn the lifting and
and stylish.
planting of the feet.
The foot should be snapped from the ground and carried for-
ward, while the limb unfolds, as if following the rim of a
wheel. The hind feet should leave the ground with the same
quick movement, and at no time should be allowed to hang
back and give the horse the appearance of not gathering him-
self well together.
Quality is a term rather loosely applied and has reference to
CHOOSING A HORSE 23
' the bones, skin, and hair. Evidences of desirable quality are
clean-cut features, soft skin, silky hair, and clean dense bone.
In those horses possessing quality the lines of the face are
clearly defined, the veins in the skin show clearly, and there is
a complete absence of coarseness. Freedom from coarseness in
the joints and tendons emphasizes soundness and guarantees
durability. Another evidence of quality is seen in those ani-
mals whose muscles stand out clearly defined and distinct. The
best way to determine quality is to run the hand down the leg
over the knee and cannon bone. The hair and skin should feel
soft and pliable to the touch and the bone firm and smooth.
The fingers should seem almost to touch each other as they
pass between the tendon and the bone.
Coarse hair is: associated with coarse thick skin which indi-
cates an abundance of connective tissue which in turn is asso-
ciated with soft, spongy bones that cannot endure strain or
hard usage.
The temperament is reflected in the action and manners. It
should be lively and pleasant. When possible, the purchaser
should know something of the ancestors of the horse under
consideration, as a horse may inherit characteristics which can-
not be discovered until he has been used some time, and
peculiarities of temper are among these characters.
Detail characters of a light horse
Having considered the general appearance of the light horse,
then pass to a detailed examination of the characters; and in
order that none go unnoticed they should be observed in the
following order : —
Head. — Among light horses the head should be lean, with
broad forehead tapering towards the nostrils, and the features
of the face should be distinct. The nostrils should be large,
open, and of pink color. The eye should be large, full, clear,
and bright, indicative of a kind, generous disposition and good
24 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
health. The jaw-bones should be strong and wide, providing
ample room for a large wind-pipe. The ears should be active,
refined, neither large nor small, carried close and erect and turn-
ing slightly in at the tips. Lop ears indicate laziness. A
smooth neat attachment of head to neck is highly essential, a
fullness at the throat and about the wind-pipe being most
undesirable.
Neck. — A nicely arched and well-muscled neck of sufficient
length, carrying the head gracefully, is a highly desirable feature
Fic. 22.— An American Trotter. A driving horse of good form.
The American Trotting breed of horses developed in United States. The breed
is the outgrowth of a demand for a light road horse possessing speed and en-
durance. The weight and height are exceedingly variable. The body is light,
narrow, but deep, and the legs are long, but clean, and free from coarseness.
All colors are found, but solid colors such as browns and bays are preferred to
grays, roans, and the like.
of the light horse. Much of the style and symmetry of the
coach horse is observed in the make-up and carriage of the
head and neck. The wind-pipe should be large, and the outline
appear distinct from the rest of the neck. Many excellent road
horses have a ewe neck, but it detracts very much from the
CHOOSING A HORSE 25
general appearance. The neck and body should blend smoothly
at the attachment.
Chest. — Among light horses the chest should obtain its
capacity more from depth than width. A deep chest permits
a freer play of the shoulders, and indicates staying power.
A wide chest throws the fore legs out of line with the hind ones
and causes the horse to paddle or roll in his action. The chest
should be not only deep, but the breast should be carried forward
with some prominence.
Shoulders. — To give elasticity to the movement and to per-
mit of quick and clean action the shoulder should be long and
sloping well into the back, thus strengthening the back and
extending the length of the underline. The high action of the
coach horse and the long-reaching clean action of the roadster
depend much on a long oblique shoulder. A steep shoulder
prevents a strong rapid movement and results in hard stilted
action, leading to defects of feet and legs.
Arms. — Among light horses the arm should be short and
comparatively upright, giving the animal an upstanding ap-
pearance.
Elbows. — The elbow should work snugly alongside the
animal; if too closely ‘tied in,” as it is termed, the toes are
usually thrown out; if turned out, the toes are likely to be
thrown in.
The fore-arms should be long, wide, and well muscled. The
capacity of the animal to cover much ground at a step depends
on the direction of the shoulders and the length of the fore-
arms. Long sloping shoulders, upright arms together with
long fore-arms, give much distance from the withers to the knee,
which is considered very essential in animals of speed. The
muscles should be well developed and stand out distinctly just
below the junction of the leg and body and taper gracefully
downward. The fat accumulates very little at this point, and
it is a safe guide to the muscular development of the animal.
26 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The knees should be wide, deep, and straight. They should
be much broader in front than the rest of the leg, either above
or below. Breadth is desirable because the concussion is more
evenly distributed among the several bones forming the knee
joint. The bone forming the projection at the back of the
knee should be prominent, since this gives a better attachment
for the muscles and tendons which pass over it, thereby giving
the leg a deeper appearance and increasing the efficiency. The
knees are subject to many defects more or less serious, such as
calf knees, knock knees, spring knees, open knees, speed cuts,
scars, and the like.
The cannons should be short, wide, clean, and the tendons
well detached. The back tendons should be parallel to the
cannon-bones, and there should be no shrinking below the
knees, as it indicates weakness. This defect is spoken of as
“tied in,”’ and is quite common among light horses. The cannon
should be free from bony growths and puffiness. Evidences of
firing or blistering to remove such growths are series of lines
on the cannons or roughened places caused by blistering. On
running the hand over the cannons they should be free from
gumminess, puffs, and bony growths.
The fetlock jot should be clean, free from fullness due to
wind-galls, and should be wide, giving favorable attachments to
the tendons.
The pasterns should be sloping and strong. When the horse
is standing, they should form an angle of 45 degrees with the
floor and 1385 degrees with the cannons. The upright pasterns
cannot resist concussion, and bone diseases, such as ring-bones,
side-bones, and the like, are the result. Again, it lessens the
usefulness of the light horse, especially the saddler, as the step
is short and stilted and very disagreeable to the rider. On the
other hand, the pasterns are sometimes too long and slanting,
especially among thoroughbreds, which weakens them, and occa-
sionally ends in snapping the suspensory ligaments, resulting in
CHOOSING A HORSE 27
the animal “breaking down.” There should be freedom from
wind puffs and bony growths, as in the cannon.
The feet should be round, dense, fine in texture, of good size,
and perfectly sound. They should be of equal size and shape
and in line with the pastern. The hoof should have an oily
coat of natural wax, and should not appear flat, brittle, shelly,
or contracted. The heel should be rather vertical and about
one-half length of toe. The sole should be concave; the bars
strong, and the frog large, elastic, and bear the mark of natural
usage as a buffer. The dark-colored feet seem to be in favor.
The ribs should be well sprung from the spine, of good length,
and well inclined to the rear. The well-sprung rib gives lung
capacity, the deep rib gives digestive capacity, and the ribs
well inclined to the rear add much to the strength of the back.
Body. — The back should be short, strong, and well muscled.
The body should have a short back with a long underline
which not only adds strength to the back, but gives the legs
free play and insures freedom of movements. The long back,
the roach back, and the sway back are all very objectionable.
The loin should be wide, short, thick, and strongly joined.
This combination results when the ribs are directed well back-
ward. If the distance from the last rib to the hip is great, the
horse is likely to be weak in the coupling and irregular in his
action.
The croup should be long, muscular, and fairly straight. The
croup of light horses should be more horizontal than in heavy
horses. This in connection with its length allows greater play
of the main muscles, which is favorable to the production of
speed. The short, oblique croup interferes with the utility of
the light horse and detracts from the general appearance. While
examining the croup, the hips should also be observed to see
that they are of equal prominence and squarely placed.
The thigh should be muscular, long, and deep. It should be
so situated as to extend the muscles as far down towards the
28 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
hock as possible, without giving the leg too straight an appear-
ance. Some horses are so straight in this respect that the
muscle extends to the hock, giving it a thick appearance. Horses
show much variation in the muscling of the quarters; some are
full and heavily muscled, some decidedly lacking and called
“cat hammed,” while others are fairly full in this region, with
deep, hard muscles.
The Aind legs from the thigh to the hock should be long,
fairly straight, and well muscled, though they must not be too
straight, thereby causing either thoroughpin or bog-spavin.
On the other hand, if the legs are bent too far forward, it is
likely to develop curb. The position of the croup and thighs,
together with the long legs, should be such as to give length
from the hip to the hock, as this is the conformation desired
among animals of speed.
The hocks should be wide, properly set, and clean. They
should also be free from gumminess, fleshiness, and puffs of all
kinds, and the bone firm without the least indication of unsound-
ness. The bone forming the point of the hock should be
prominent, since this gives a better attachment for the muscles
and tendons which pass over it, thereby giving the hind leg a
deeper appearance and increasing its efficiency. The hocks
are subject to many defects more or less serious, such as cow
hocks, capped hocks, open hocks, crooked hocks, and the like.
The hind cannons should be short, wide, clean, with tendons
well detached and parallel to cannon bones, which gives
better attachments and strengthens the cannon. Slender hocks
‘and narrow cannons, especially at the top, indicate a predis-
position to curbs on account of the weakness thus produced.
The cannon should be free from all evidences of unsoundness.
The hind pasterns should be sloping and strong. When the
horse is standing, they will be more upright than the front
pasterns, and this is not so objectionable as there is less con-
cussion on the hind foot, the weight borne being only four-
CHOOSING A HORSE 29
ninths that of the total weight, and in addition the hind limbs
are not intended to break concussion as are the fore limbs.
The hind feet should be oval, dense, fine in texture, of good
size, and perfectly sound. They are inclined to become
narrow, the sides often appear sunken, leaving them rather flat,
thus causing the foot to appear narrow. The hind feet should
have the characteristics that have been described in the refer-
ence to the desirable points of the fore feet.
CHOOSING A HEAVY HORSE
In choosing a heavy horse, it must be borne in mind that the
fatter the animal the more difficult it is to detect many of the
defects which would stand out clearly were the animal not
padded with a thick coat of fat. A horse in serviceable condi-
tion will often show many defects, especially in the body, that a
thick coating of tissue will hide. By changing the food one can
increase or diminish the size of the abdomen: thus by feeding
food containing much bulk, the shape of the narrow-gutted horse
is modified; by feeding concentrated foods, such as oats, the
cow-belly can be made to disappear. By regulating the light
in the stable and increasing the temperature, the coat can be
made to assume brighter shades and to reflect a more brilliant
luster. By removing or clipping the hairs scattered over the
face, around the mouth, nostrils, eyelids, along the lower jaw;
in diminishing the thickness and length of the mane and tail;
in clipping the thick hairs along the cannons and pasterns; and
finally in cutting the hairs on the inner surface of the ears, the
apparent quality of the horse can be greatly changed and a
rough, coarse animal can be made to take on a rather refined
appearance.
General appearance in heavy horses
The same general method should be followed in examining a
heavy horse as in the light, with the difference, that we place
much stress on weight.
30 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The form.—In form, the draft horse should be massive,
compact, blocky, and low set. Power and not speed is the re-
quirement, and in order to attain this the animal must be
Fic. 23. — CiypEsDALE STALLION ‘'Cauipr.’’ Second Prize, International Live
Stock Show, Alex. Galbraith, Dixon, IL
The Clydesdale draft horse originated in Scotland. An active breed, though
not so heavy as the Shire or so massive as the Percheron. In weight stallions
average 1600 to 2000 pounds, the mares 1400 to 1700 pounds. The height
ranges from 15 to 16% hands. Bay or brown with white on forehead and on
the legs below the knees and hocks is the most popular color, though there are
many blacks, grays, and chestnuts. As with the Shire, the long hair on the
back of cannons below the knees and hocks is a breed characteristic.
close to the ground, strong, and heavy. In animals of speed we
find long bones, long muscles, and slightly angular joints; in
animals of strength we find heavy bones, heavy muscles, and a
comparative freedom from angularity about the joints.
CHOOSING A HORSE 81
The weight. — Among draft horses, weight is a very impor-
tant consideration; in fact, a horse must weigh at least 1500
pounds to be classed as a draft animal. Draft horses are
divided into three classes according to their weight : light draft,
1500 to 1600 pounds; medium draft, 1600 to 1800 pounds; and
heavy draft, 1800 pounds and up. This weight must be due
to strong bone, heavily muscled, as well as to large proportions,
and not the result of excessive fatness.
The importance of bulk is well illustrated in.the case of
the freight engine, in which the efficiency depends upon the
weight to such an extent that engines are graded according to
their weight; thus we have the hundred ton freight engine on a
certain section of the road and the hundred and twenty-five
ton engine on another section. The engine must have much
weight to keep the wheels from slipping on the track. Such is
none the less the case among draft horses. This is well illus-
trated in the rather common experience of the teamster whose
team is stalled, and observing that the animals seem too
light to push into the collar, conceives the idea of mounting
one of the animals, when to his satisfaction they are able to
pull the load. Illustrations of this principle are very common
in parts of the country where the heavy cart is used in which
the animal carries a part of the load on its back. It frequently
happens with vehicles of this kind that when the animal is
stalled, if a part of the load is moved forward so that a larger
portion rests on the back, it can pull the load with comparative
ease.
The heavy horse is in very great demand for draft work
in the cities. In our large cities the busy streets have be-
come so crowded that it is necessary for the traffic to move
slow. This has led to the use of larger loads and fewer trips,
whereas formerly more trips were made and the loads lighter.
To draw these heavy loads requires heavy horses; thus
within the past few years there has arisen a great demand
82 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
for the heavy horse. For this extra weight the market is will-
ing to pay. It is estimated that the heavy horse is worth 50
cents a pound for each additional pound that it weighs over
1400 pounds. In other words, a thin horse weighing 1400
pounds and worth $200 would be worth $250 if put in good
condition and weighing 1500 pounds.
The action. — While action in the heavy horse is not con-
sidered as desirable as in the lighter types, yet it should receive
much attention. The walk de-
serves special notice since it is
the principal gait of the draft
horse. It should be observed
in much the same manner as
in the lighter types — from
before, behind, and either side.
The horse should lift the feet
ye, a clear of the ground with much
snap, and the stride should be
Fra. 24.—Cuypespate Mare. First regular. Observe the fore
ae International Live-Stock and hind legs to see if they
work in unison. Horses with
long backs and weak loins often drag their feet in a discon-
nected manner. Observed from behind, the movement should
be straight away and regular. The hocks are often turned
outward, or bent inward when raised, both of which are very
undesirable. The flexion of the hock should be free and
straight.
While action at the trot is not so essential as in light horses,
yet the draft horse in trotting should go level, straight, and
regular. The feet should be picked up with snap and carried
clear of the ground. High knee and hock action is not
essential, but a strong, full, true movement without paddling,
dragging, or stiffness is very desirable. Good trotting action
is not only valuable in itself, but it indicates many other
CHOOSING A HORSE 33
desirable qualities, such as temperament, conformation, and
soundness.
Quality among heavy horses is as essential as among light
ones, and the evidences are the same — clean-cut features, soft
skin, silky hair, and clean, dense bone. The lines of the face
will not be as clearly defined nor the veins in the skin show as
prominently as in the light type. Quality is determined in the
same way, and in running the hand over the cannon the bone
should be flat, firm, and free from roughness and the tendons
should stand out distinct from the bone. Among draft horses
the mistake is sometimes made of considering small bone to bean
indication of quality, which should be guarded against, as small
bone is a very undesirable feature in a draft horse.
Detail characters of heavy horses
In considering the characters in detail among heavy horses
the same general order should be followed as in the lighter
types, in order that no character go unobserved. Only the
differences are here pointed out, and those characters that are
the same in both types are omitted.
The head should be lean and of medium size. The heads of
draft horses are as a rule larger, fuller, and coarser proportion-
ately than in the light type. Many of the breeds of draft
horses have a characteristic Roman nose. The assertion is often
made that small nostrils is associated with a Roman nose, and
consequently the respiratory or breathing organs lack develop-
ment; also that animals with very prominent Roman noses are
self-willed. Both statements seem to lack sufficient evidence,
and the opinion may owe its origin to.a few observations made
on Standard-bred animals. The nostrils, eyes, jaws, and ears
should be observed as among light horses.
The neck should be short, strongly muscled, and massive. A
well-arched neck is preferred. The neck of a draft horse is
more horizontal than in horses of speed.
D
84 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The chest should be deep, wide, and full. Its depth is about
one-half height of horse. Horses slack in the heart girth are
generally of weak constitution. Exceptional width in the chest
is likely to result in rolling and paddling motion of the fore legs.
Shoulders. — Among heavy horses, the shoulder should be
moderately sloping into the back and heavily muscled. The
statement is made that upright shoulders give increased power,
but such a conformation increases the concussion of the bones
and may result in unsound limbs; it also increases the length
of the back, which may result in weakness; and the step is
short and the action stilted.
The arm should be short, heavily muscled, and sloping well
to the rear, thus giving the animal a massive and low-set ap-
pearance. :
Fore-arms. — Among draft horses, the fore-arms should be
wide, heavily muscled, and large. As in the light type, the
muscling affords a safe guide to the muscle development of the
animal, as it is not padded with fat.
The knees should be broad and welldefined. While the knees of
heavy animals may not be as clean cut as among lighter horses,
yet there should be a freedom from puffiness and gumminess.
The cannon should be short, wide, clean, and the tendons
well detached. The Clydesdales and Shires have a fringe of
hair, called ‘‘feather,” starting from the knee and hock behind
and extending to the fetlock. The “feather” often furnishes
an index to the quality, as coarse hair is associated with coarse,
thick skin, which indicates coarse, porous bone. On the other
hand, fine, soft hairis commonly accepted as an indication of good
quality.
Pasterns. — Among draft horses the pasterns should be slop-
ing, strong, and of medium length. Horses of this type often
possess pasterns that are too short and too straight. This con-
formation lacks springiness, the concussion comes more on the
ends of the bones, resulting in ring-bones, side-bones, and the
CHOOSING A HORSE 35
like, also in a short stilted movement of the legs. Again, pas-
terns that are too straight often become more so with age, and
the usefulness of the animal depreciates in proportion.
a
Fic. 25.—CuHampion EneuisH Sarre Srauuion ‘Dan Parcu.”” Trumans
Pioneer Stock Farm, Bushnell, Ill.
The Shire draft horse was developed in England. This breed has long been
noted as the ‘‘Cart Horse”’ ; for heavy draft it is unexcelled. In size, Shires
are equal to the largest stallions, ranging from 1700 to 2200 pounds, with the
mares correspondingly less. In height stallions average from 15 to 17 hands.
The preferred color is bay or brown with white on the forehead and on the legs
below the knees and hocks. Grays, blacks, and chestnuts exist in abundance.
Long hair on the back of the cannons below the knees and hocks is a breed
characteristic.
The feet of the heavy horse deserve special attention, as sound
feet are rather the exception. The feet should be round, dense,
fine in structure, of equal size and shape, and perfectly sound.
The hoof should be dark in color, and have an oily coat of
natural wax. Common defects of the feet of heavy horses are:
36 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
soft hoof, dry and broken hoof, flat hoof, low or sloping heels,
and large hoof.
The body should be short, the back broad, and the ribs well
sprung, deep, and inclined well to the rear, thus giving a short
loin, which should be broad and thick. The upright shoulder
gives undue length to the back, which may become roached or
sunken,
The croup should be broad, thickly muscled, and moderately
sloping, although there is considerable difference in draft horses
in this regard. A moderately sloping croup gives a favorable
attachment of the muscles for the production of power. In
some strains of draft horses, the croup is so very sloping that it
detracts from their general appearance.
The thighs and quarters should be heavily muscled. The
direction of the thigh should be such as to give the muscles
the most favorable attachment for the development of power.
This means perhaps that the lower part of the thigh should
be inclined well forward, and that the leg should be moderately
sloping from the thigh to the hock.
The hock of the heavy horse should be closely observed, for
in this joint there is perhaps more work done than in any other
single part of the body. The hock should be wide, properly
set, and clearly defined. The tendons extending from the
hocks downward should be lean and well detached, thus giving
a deeper-appearing hock and a more favorable attachment of the
muscles for developing power. Crooked, narrow, and tied-in
hocks are subject to curbs, spavin, and the like. The hocks of
draft horses are likely to be fleshy or gummy, thus indicating
a liability to hock troubles and a general coarseness of the
organization.
CHAPTER II
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS— GENERAL DISCUSSION
THE economic feeding of farm animals involves a knowledge
of the principles underlying the practice. The better knowl-
edge one has of the food, its source, use, composition, and di-
gestibility, the more familiar he is with the function of the
various food materials, and the balancing of rations, the more
intelligently can he choose the foods that constitute the ration.
FOOD
Food may be defined as any material that an animal can
take into its digestive organs and from which it can absorb
matter for the nourishment of its own body. Plants and their
products and by-products constitute the food of farm animals,
although some farm animals are in part carnivorous, feeding
on other animals or parts of animals. Matter is transferred
directly from the food to the tissue with or without chemical
or physical change. Materials is not, however, the only thing
the animal gets from the food. The plant during growth absorbs
heat from the sun, which is held in latent form in the plant
compounds. When these compounds are taken into the ani-
mal body and broken apart by digestion, some of this stored
heat may be transferred to energy. The animal therefore gets
from the food both matter and energy.
Use of food. —The matter and energy the animal collects
from the food are put to three distinct uses: first, to support
life; second, to reproduce life; and third, stored up in some
387
38 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
form. The animal must maintain its existence, and for this
both energy and matter are required. A large part of the energy
of the food goes to the maintenance of the body temperature.
The body temperature of farm animals is considerably above that
of the surrounding atmosphere, and its maintenance requires
much heat, as the body is continually giving off heat. The
body tissues become worn out and must be constantly renewed.
This must be supplied by the matter and energy from the food.
In the case of young animals, there is a constant formation of
new tissue. This requires more matter than energy. Again, the
muscular function of vital processes require much energy, which
must be supplied by the food. Of the total amount of food
that an animal will ordinarily consume, a very large proportion
goes to support life and a small amount to production.
Composition of food. — The value of a food depends, among
other things, on its composition. There is a tendency to ig-
nore the fact that a food should be considered with reference to
its composition. It is assumed that a pound of timothy hay,
for example, is equivalent to a pound of clover hay, when as a
matter of fact their composition is such as to make them widely
different, so that one will not take the place of the other. The
number of compounds found in the food is very large, and many
of them very complex in their nature. For convenience in
comparing foods, these compounds are grouped into classes.
These classes are few in number, easy to comprehend, and serve
the purpose well from a practical point of view. We recognize
five distinct groups, one of which is divided into two sub-groups.
They are as follows : —
1. Water
2. Ash (mineral compounds)
3. Protein (nitrogenous compounds) es
Crude fiber Nutrients ‘
4. oie oe extract matter
5. Fats
It is customary to group together all the substances of a food
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS 39
except the water, and to speak of them collectively as dry-
matter, and not with respect to their total weight. Ash is also
eliminated, and the remaining three constituents are called nu-
trients. Each of these groups has its part to perform in the nu-
trition of animals, the function of one being different from the
others. There are a few foods containing these several constitu-
ents in the proper proportions to meet the needs of the animal,
but in most foods there is an excess of one and a deficiency of the
others. This makes it desirable to add two or more foods of
different composition in order to supply the proper balance for
the best development of the animal.
Water. — Water is present in all foods, even the driest. It
varies widely in different foods, running as low as 8 or 10 per cent
in the case of grains or concentrates, such as corn, oats, or cotton-
seed meal, and dried brewers’ grains, to 85 or 90 per cent in the
more watery foods, as silage, roots, tubers, and the like. Even
dry hay varies considerably in this respect, alfalfa containing as
low as 9 per cent and some clovers as high as 20 per cent. Water
not being a nutrient, its presence or absence is an important fac-
tor in determining the usefulness and therefore the value of afood.
Ash. — Ash or mineral matter is present in all plant food,
although it forms but a small part, shelled corn containing only
1.5 per cent, and alfalfa, one of the highest, containing only 8
per cent. The leaves and the region of the germ in grain contain
the most ash. The animal secures the ash from the food directly
by transfer. Most plants contain sufficient ash to meet the
needs of the animal, corn and certain prepared foods being the
only exceptions. In young animals, because of the large bone
development that is taking place, in milk and egg production
and the like, it is of special importance to have sufficient
mineral matter supplied by the food.
Protein. — Of the three nutrients — protein, carbohydrates,
and fats —~ the protein is considered to be the most important.
This is. perhaps due to two factors; first, protein is absolutely
40 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
essential to the animal body, and second, the percentage of pro-
tein is relatively small in most plants. Like the other nutrients,
the protein group contains
carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen,
and in addition it also con-
tains nitrogen, which is the
characteristic element of the
entire group. It is on the
element nitrogen that the im-
portance of this group de-
x . abe. pends. Protein enters largely
Pnpaiaiees/si9: pe into the composition of the
Fic. 26.— CuampPion ENGLISH SHIRE bones, muscle, lean meat,
Srauuion ‘‘Mazemore Harowp.” white of Coes and the curd of
milk. The only source from
which the animals can procure this protein is the protein of
the food.
The amount of digestible protein in various foods varies
within rather wide limits, corn containing only 8 per cent, while
cotton-seed meal runs as high as 382 per cent, but the larger
number of food materials contain rather small amounts of pro-
tein. There are comparatively few foods that are relatively
rich in protein. The value of the food turns very largely on
the protein which it contains. Protein is not, however, as
digestible as some of the other nutrients.
Carbohydrates. — There are two sub-groups of carbohydrates
— nitrogen-free extract, and crude fiber. The carbohydrate
group contains carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, but no nitrogen.
The nitrogen-free extract is composed largely of starches and
sugars, and constitutes the larger part of the dry-matter of most
plants. Starch alone forms as much as 75 per cent of the dry-
matter of corn, wheat, potatoes, and some other foods. It is
easily digested, more so than any of the other three constituents,
and therefore foods rich in nitrogen-free extract are ordinarily
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS 41
classed as most readily digestible. Fiber or crude fiber consti-
tutes the tough woody part of plants. The stems of all plants
contain more fiber than does the leafy part. Variation in the
digestibility of foods depends largely on the amount of crude
fiber, which is mostly insoluble and hence largely indigestible.
Crude fiber is the least valuable of the four nutrients, because
of its indigestibility. Young plants contain less crude fiber
than plants that have matured and formed seeds, and hence are
more digestible.
Fat. — Plants also contain fat or oil. It occurs in largest
quantities in the seed, and varies widely, running less than 2 per
cent in rye to 30 and 35 per cent in flaxseed. Fats like carbo-
hydrates contain carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, but no nitrogen.
The oil content of food is determined by extracting the fat by
ether; hence in tables giving composition of food the fat is often
designated as ether extract. A given weight of fat will develop
24 times as much heat energy as an equal weight of carbohy-
drates. If we multiply fat, therefore, by 24, it reduces it to the
starch or carbohydrate equivalent. Fats are not so readily di-
gested as nitrogen-free extract.
Functions of various food materials
A knowledge of the function of the various food materials
willenable one to choose and balance a ration more economically,
and to adapt it to the needs of the animal. A very satisfactory
ration for a race horse may be entirely inadequate for a dairy
cow.
Water. — The water of the food takes the place to a certain
extent of the water that an animal would otherwise drink. In
the case of food containing a large amount of water, the total
consumption of water by the animal will be greater than other-
wise. Watery foods will not, however, satisfy the animal in this
respect, as it will still drink water. In many cases the large
consumption of water is of advantage to the animal; this is
42 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
particularly true of the dairy cow, which, in addition to the
water needed for her own body, secretes large amounts in the milk.
The animal body requires much water, particularly the younger
ones; their bodies are more than 50percent water. Again, water
adds succulence to the food, which increases its palatability.
The great importance of an abundance of good water for all
animals is often underestimated.
Ash. — The ash or mineral matter is chiefly used in the for-
mation of bone, but also to some extent in the tissues, blood,
digestive fluids, and the like. Young animals fail to develop if
given no mineral matter, and mature animals become weak and
inactive if deprived of only one substance, that of common salt.
Hogs, if closely confined and fed on corn alone, are likely to be
weak-boned because of the lack of mineral matter in the food.
If to the corn ration some food rich in mineral matter, such as
alfalfa, or even wood ashes, is added, no difficulty is experienced.
Hens always-require more lime than is found in the food. This
is strikingly illustrated when we compare the composition of
eggs and corn, for example, the former containing 12.2 per cent
ash, the latter only 1.5 per cent. The ash in the food of the
milk cow also deserves special consideration on account of phos-
phoric acid, lime, and potash so abundantly found in the milk
which she secretes. In short, the ash or mineral matter in the
food of all animals, young and old, deserves much consideration.
Protein. — So far as is known, the proteids of the food are the
only source of the proteids of the body. In other words, the
muscles, the connective tissues, the blood, the skin, the hair,
the horn, the hoofs, and the larger part of the tissues of the
secretive and excretive organs owe their formation to the protein
of the food. Since these are the tissues that largely determine
the vigor and quality of the animal, and since they are formed
rapidly in the early stages of growth, a normal and continuous
development demands an abundant supply of protein food. In
addition to this, protein is a source of fat and can serve as fuel, or
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS 43
as a source of energy. The amount appropriated as fat and
energy depends on the quantity fed to the animal. A pound of
protein, however, is worth more than a pound of carbohydrates
on the market. Then to use protein substances largely as a
source of fat and energy, where cheaper substances would do
fully as well and perhaps better, as we shall presently see, is not
economical. On the other hand, if the protein in the food is in-
sufficient fully to supply the needs of the animal, the very best
development will not be attained. The economy of feeding,
therefore, depends largely on the balance between the protein
on the one hand and the remaining nutrients on the other
hand. It is to secure sufficient protein and yet not to useit waste-
fully that so much attention is given to the proper balancing of a
ration.
Carbohydrates. — Carbohydrates are used to maintain heat
and in the production of fat. Formerly it was thought that
carbohydrates are used for that purpose only, but it is now
well established that the animal fats may have their source
in’the carbohydrates. Again, experiments with milk cows
show clearly that milk-fat may also be derived from carbo-
hydrates. The fact that carbohydrates can be used as heat-
producersand as fat-formers, connected with their ease of digestion
and cheapness of production, tends to magnify the importance
of this group of nutrients. F
Fat. — Fat, like carbohydrates, serves as a source of heat and
of animal fat. The differencés are that the supply of carbohy-
drates is much the larger, and the heat value of a similar weight
of fats much the greater, —as we have already seen 2} times as
great. Moreover, there seems to be experimental evidence
showing vegetable fat to become deposited in the animal without
change, whereas fat formed from carbohydrates involves com-
plex transformation.
From the foregoing statements, it is evident that the water
taken into the animal serves as the water of the animal body.
44 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The ash or mineral matter taken in serves as the mineral matter
of the animal body. The protein acquired may serve a three-
fold purpose; it must serve as the proteid supply of the animal
body, as, so far as known, there is no other source ; it may serve
in heat production; and it may serve as a fat-former. The
carbohydrates serve a double purpose, that of heat-production
and fat-forming. The fat servesasimilar purpose as the carbohy-
drates — forming fat and producing heat — and is 2} times as
efficient as the carbohydrates.
DIGESTIBILITY OF FOOD
The value of a food depends on the digestibility of the
various materials of which it is composed, and not alone on its
composition as shown by a chemist. Because of the importance
of the digestibility of the various food materials, and in order
to get a clear conception of digestion, it will be necessary to
review briefly the process through which the food materials
must pass on their way from the food as such to the flesh or
energy of the animal body.
Digestion. — The process of digestion is largely a process of
solution, aided to a certain extent by chemical changes that take
place through the influence of various ferments with which the
food comes in contact as it passes through the digestive tract.
The digestive organs form a canal through the body, and the
food in its passage through this tract or canal is acted upon by
various fluids. Each fluid has a special work to do in the pro-
cess of digestion. To begin, the food is taken into the mouth,
where it is reduced to fine particles in order that the digestive
juices may better do their work and to put it into condition to be
swallowed. During this mastication there is a digestive fluid,
called saliva, poured upon the food, which moistensit and changes
a part of the starch. After leaving the mouth the food passes
down the esophagus into the stomach, where the digestive
fluid, called gastric juice, is poured upon it and which changes a
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS | 45
part of the protein. When the food leaves the stomach, it enters
the small intestines, where it comes in contact with two digestive
fluids — the bile from the liver,
and the pancreatic juice from the
pancreas. The bile prepares the
partly digested food for the ac-
tion of the pancreatic juice and
changes the fats. The pancreatic
juice has a more complex func-
tion. It contains at least three hey
distinct ferments, one changing . mid}
the proteids, another the starch, 4
and the third the fats. As the pote gO catego eer
material passes along the intes-
tines it comes in contact with a juice secreted by the walls
of the intestines and which acts upon the starch, but there is
little action on the proteids or fats. From the time the food
enters the stomach, during its entire course along the digestive
tract, in some way not wholly understood, the digested food has
been absorbed and received into vessels, through which it is
distributed to the various parts of the body. A part of the food
materials, however, in passing through the digestive tract, es-
cape digestion. The amount of food digested depends on the
kind of food, the amount fed, the class of animal, and on the
condition of the animal’s health.
Size of digestive organs. — The length and capacity of the di-
gestive organs of the various farm animals differ widely. Among
ruminating animals, — those capable of re-chewing the previ-
ously swallowed food, — the cow, sheep, and goat, the stomach
is a very complicated organ. It has four divisions or sacks
called paunch, honeycomb, many-plies, and rennet. The
paunch is very large and may be considered as a reservoir for the
storage of bulky foods. Because of this provision, ruminating
animals can be fed on foods containing much more bulk than can
46 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the pig or horse. The food during its retention in the paunch
becomes thoroughly softened and undergoes some fermentation,
then it is re-chewed, — called chewing the cud, — and swallowed.
The stomach of the horse and pig is a single sack and has not
nearly so much capacity.
The varying length of intestines and capacity of stomach
in farm animals is illustrated in the following table : —
Length of intestines and capacity of stomach of farm animals
Capacity, QUARTS L
A qT ENGTH, FreEr
aici Stomach Intestines ili ENEESTINES
Horse . ... . 19.0 204.8 223.8 98.1
Cow. . . 266.9 109.8 376.7 187.2
Sheep 31.3 . 15.4 46.7 107.3
Hog. 8.5 20.5 29.0 771
It requires three to four days for food to pass through the di-
gestive tract of farm animals. Since animals of the same class
and in good health are fairly uniform in the amount of material
they extract from a given class of food, it is practicable to
make digestion trials to determine the amount of the various
food materials digested and to use these figures as a basis of com-
putation for all animals of the same class.
Digestible nutrients. — Digestible nutrients are those parts of
food materials that are digested and appropriated to the ani-
mal’s use. Our knowledge of the amount of the food materials
that are digested is based on experimental data, and while not
absolutely accurate, is sufficiently so for practical purposes.
The method of determining the digestible nutrients is as fol-
lows: The animal is fed for a sufficient length of time on a
certain food or combination of foods, so that the digestive or-
gans contain only the food under test. Then for a certain length
of time the animal is fed a carefully weighed allowance of some
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS 47
food, the composition of which has been previously determined
by a chemist. Provision is then made for collecting all excreta.
By making an analysis of this waste matter, the undigested
protein, carbohydrates, and fat are found. This, deducted from
the total in the food, gives the digested part. The amount of
each constituent digested divided by the total in the food gives
the percentage digestible. Thisiscalled the “coefficient of digesti-
bility.” The grains are more highly digestible than the coarse
fodders; for example, in corn the protein is 76 per cent digestible,
the crude fiber 58, the nitrogen-free extract 93, and the fat 86
per cent digestible, while in timothy hay the protein is 56 per
cent, the crude fiber 58, the nitrogen-free extract 63, and the fat
57 per cent digestible.
Among the various food materials the carbohydrates as a
rule are the most digestible, running as high as 95 per cent in case
of corn, while the crude fiber is the least digestible, and between
these lie fat and protein. In general the fat is more digestible
than the protein. As a rule, the digestible coefficient falls
when large amounts of foods are used. If we crowd the con-
sumption of food, the animal does not digest it as thoroughly as
it would if fed smaller amounts. On the other hand, we cannot
secure a greater digestibility by limiting the consumption.
Animals under a starving ration do not digest any more than
when fed a normal amount.
Having the composition of the food as determined by the
chemist, and the digestible coefficient as determined with the
animal, it is an easy matter to calculate the amount of digestible
nutrients in the various food-stuffs. It is with the digestible
nutrients, and not the total food materials, that the feeder is
concerned in choosing a ration. A great deal of work has been
done at the various experiment stations to determine the digesti-
bility of food-stuffs. For ready reference Table II, showing the
amount of digestible nutrients in a large number of foods, is
published in the Appendix of this manual.
48 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
CONDITIONS INFLUENCING DIGESTION
The changes that the food undergoes in the digestive tract
during digestion are beyond the control of the feeder. They
proceed in accordance with fixed laws. The feeder, however,
can manipulate the food or change the conditions under which
it is fed so that the completeness of digestion is modified.
Palatability. — In the case of most foods, anything that adds
to their palatability will promote digestion. While an agreeable
flavor or taste adds nothing to the energy of a food, the more it is
relished the greater will be the flow of the digestive juices, the
more thoroughly the food will be acted on by them, and the
more completely the nutrients will be dissolved and digested.
Palatability, therefore, is an important factor in feeding, as it
promotes a more vigorous action on the part of the digestive
organs, which result in a more complete digestion of the food.
Time of harvesting. — The effect on digestibility of the time
of harvesting plants is great. The time to harvest a plant so
as to get the maximum amount of digestible material will depend
much on the part of the plant that is to be used for food. In the
case of hay, much of the food material is transferred from the
stalk to the seed as the plant ripens. These seeds are so small
and hard that they are not digested by the animal; hence hay
that is cut when ripe is not so digestible as that cut before the
seeds ripen and while the food materials were yet in the growing
parts. Again, the riper the plants the more crude fiber they
contain, and this we have already seen is mostly undigestible.
In the case of corn, it is the seed that is used as food, and in this
case the plant should not be harvested till the food materials
have passed from the stalk into the seed. Therefore hay plants,
or those plants of which the stems and leaves are used, should be
cut when green, and grain plants, or those plants of which the
seeds are used, should be cut when ripe.
Grinding the food. — Grinding certain kinds of foods promotes
digestion by increasing the surface exposed to the action of the
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS 49
digestive juices. It is a well-known fact that when grain is fed
whole, many entire grains pass through the tract. Grinding also
saves the animal the energy of crushing the grains. Many
experiments have been conducted, comparing the feeding of
ground grain with whole grain, with the results in favor of grind-
ing. The profit from grinding grain hinges, in part at least,
upon the relation of the cost of grinding to the loss from not
grinding. If the cost of grinding amounts to one-tenth the
value of the grain, the probability of profit from grinding is
small,
Curing food. — The method of curing food may result in a
loss of a part of the digestible nutrients. The mere curing,
drying, or preserving of food will not alter its digestibility. If,
however, hay is cured under adverse conditions, such as exposure
to rain and the like, when leaching occurs, or fermentation sets
in, or when many of the finer parts of the plants are lost, then
the digestibility is very much lessened.
Various processes, such as wetting, steaming, cooking, fer-
menting, and the like, are used with the several foods prepara-
tory to feeding, with the view of rendering them more acceptable
to the animal. When increased efficiency occurs, it is due to
more complete digestion rather than to added nutritive value.
It has been fairly well proved that cooking renders some parts
more undigestible, particularly the protein. On the other hand,
cooking certain foods changes the mechanical condition so they
are more readily eaten. The advantage of cooking is greater
for swine than for any other class of animals. The addition of
water, in the form of wetting, soaking, or even steaming, is often
advantageous because it increases the palatability and to a cer-
tain extent restores the succulence that the food lost in drying.
The addition of salt will cause an animal to eat food that it would
otherwise reject. The presence or absence of agreeable vege-
table oils is a matter to be considered. It is difficult to under-
stand why animals will readily eat clover and alfalfa hay, but
E
50 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
reject sweet clover, and why weeds, which often impart a bad
flavor to the product, are sometimes readily eaten.
MAINTENANCE RATIONS AND PRODUCTIVE RATIONS
A ration may be defined as the quantity of food that will
be consumed by an animal weighing one thousand pounds in
twenty-four hours. In forming rations, it is necessary to take
into account the purpose for which the animal is intended. For
a given purpose an animal will require a given amount and
kind of food. Thus a one-thousand-pound cow yielding
twenty pounds of milk per day will require a certain kind and
acertain amount of food. This is called a standard ration. For
convenience of study, rations are divided into two general
classes, — rations for maintenance and rations for production.
Maintenance rations. — A maintenance ration is one that sup-
plies the needs of a resting animal without producing any
kind of labor and with no loss or gain of body substance. We
have already seen that a certain amount of the food consumed
by the animal goes to support life, maintain body temperature,
repair waste tissue, and to provide muscular activity of vital
processes. Since the demands on the body for maintenance
are largely for the production of muscular energy and heat,
nine-tenths or more of the maintenance ration may consist of
carbohydrates. This fact has much significance in the winter-
ing of idle animals. Strictly speaking, no farm animal should be
fed only a maintenance ration. Animals receiving maintenance
rations are yielding no product. All farm animals should be
producing something at all times.
Productive rations. — Productive rations may be looked upon
as made up of two parts: that which is needed to maintain the
animal, and that which may be applied to production after the
bodily needs have been supplied. It is the food consumed in ex-
cess of the amount required for maintenance that enables the
animal to produce. The question, then, is as to the quantity of
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS 51
food the animal will consume and make sufficient returns for in
production. The more an animal consumes in excess of the
amount required for maintenance, the more it can produce.
While it is true in a sense that the amount of production is in
proportion to the amount of food consumed in excess of that
required for maintenance, it is only within rather narrow limits
that this relation holds strictly true. The individuality of the
animal plays an important part. All farm animals will eat and -
digest. more food than is required for maintenance, but the
amount of product that comes from this excess of food is very
variable, and in many cases this makes the difference between a
profitable and an unprofitable animal as well as a successful and
an unsuccessful feeder. This variation among individual ani-
mals is so great that standards for production can be used only
as mere guides. The economical and profitable feeding of farm
animals depends much on the feeder’s observations of the
animals directly in charge, to determine their capacity for the
use of food.
Feeding-standards for farm animals. — A feeding-standard is a
rule to which all rations should conform for a given purpose.
The Germans have done much work in establishing such stand-
ards, which have long been in general use as guides in computing
rations for farm animals. There is now, however, a prevailing
impression among American investigators that these standards
call for more protein than is needed for best results. Under
conditions as they exist in this country, a reduction of the protein
seems advisable, although just how much it is impossible to say.
A reduction of 10 per cent has been recommended as not un-
reasonable.
BALANCED RATION
A balanced ration is one that contains the food nutrients
in the proper proportion to meet the needs of the animal for a
given purpose. Skill in balancing a ration depends much on
one’s knowledge of the composition and digestibility of the more -
52 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
common foods. It is not now considered necessary to balance
rations with the mathematical exactness that was formerly in
vogue. Yet it must conform in a general way to the standard.
A great number of experiments demonstrate conclusively the
practicability of feeding the balanced ration. Balancing ra-
tions is, however, a tedious undertaking, as there is no mathe-
matical formula, and one must add to or take from his trial
ration until the desired standard is obtained.
Nutritive-ratio. — The nutritive-ratio isthe proportion between
the digestible protein in a given food and the digestible carbo-
hydrates and fats. It is ascertained in the following manner:
Multiply the digestible fat by 24, add the product to the
digestible carbohydrates, and divide their sum by the digestible
protein.
The method of calculating the nutritive-ratio of corn, the diges-
tible nutrients of which are protein 7.9, carbohydrates 66.7, and
fat 4.3, is as follows : —
Fat Heat EQuivaLentT
4.3 x 24% = 9.67
CARBOHYDRATES
9.67 + 66.7 = 76.37
PROTEIN
76.37 + 7.9 = 9.6
Nutritive-ratio 1: 9.6
This gives anutritive-ratio of 1 : 9.6 for corn, and it means that
for each pound of digestible protein in the corn there are 9.6
pounds of digestible carbohydrate and fat equivalent. A
nutritive-ratio may be distinguished as “narrow” or “wide.”
A. narrow ration is one in which the proportion of protein is
quite large, say 1: 4.5, whereas a wide ration is one where the
carbohydrates are large, say 1:8 or 1:10. These terms do not
represent exact values, but are used in a general way.
To illustrate the method of calculating a ration for a given
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS 53
purpose, we will assume the case of a horse weighing approxi-
mately 1000 pounds and at moderate work. From the discus-
sion on food requirements for the horse, p. 57, we learn that the
standard ration is as follows : —
Dry-Matrer PROTEIN CaRBOHYDRATES Fat Ratio
24.0 2.0 11.0 _ 0.6 1:6.2
y
Let us choose from Table II of the Appendix such foods as will
supply the conditions. For a trial ration, we will take 14 pounds
of timothy hay, 10 pounds of oats, and 2 pounds of bran. The
digestible nutrients in these are calculated as follows : —
Calculation of dry-matter and digestible nutriments in trial ration for
a horse at medium work
Timotay Hay Oats
In 100 In 14 In 100 In 10
Pounds Pounds Pounds Pounds
86.8 + 100 x 14 = 12.152 89.0 + 100 x 10 = 8.900
2.8 + 100 x 14 = 0.392 9.2 + 100 x 10 = 0.920
43.4 +100 x 14 = 6.076 47.3 + 100 X 10 = 4.730
1.4 +100 x 14 = 0.196 4.2 + 100 x 10 = 0.420
In like manner, calculate the digestible nutrients in two
pounds of bran and arrange the result in tabular form as fol-
lows : —
First trial ration for 1000-pound horse at moderate work
DIGESTIBLE NUTRIENTS
Foop Dry Nozernive-
MATTER Protein Carbohydrates Fat Ae
14]b. timothy) 12.125 0.392 6.076 0.196
10 lb. oats. 8.900 0.920 4.730 0.420
2 Ib. bran 1.762 0.244 0.784 0.054
First trial ra-
tion . .| 22.787 1.556 11.590 0.670
Standard .| 24.000 2.000 11.000 0.600
—
o>90
Now
54 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
This trial ration falls considerably below the standard in dry-
matter and is too wide. We must therefore add a food rich in
protein. We will try one pound of linseed meal, old process: —
Second trial ration for 1000-pound horse at moderate work
as Dax DicestisLeE NUTRIENTS Nomimve-
MATTER Protein Carbohydrates Fat ATIC
Ration as
above . .| 22.787 1.556 11.590 0.670
1 lb. linseed 0.908 0.292 0.327 0.070
Second trial
ration 23.695 1.848 11.917 0.740) 1:7.0
Standard .| 24.000 2.000 11.000 0.600} 1:6.2
The second trial ration is still slightly too low in dry-matter
and protein, and somewhat too wide in the ratio. From these
trial rations we learn the method of calculating ratios. The
standard only serves as a general guide from which to estimate;
then one must adapt the ration to suit his conditions. It often
happens, as in our trial ration for the horse, that one will have an
excess of certain nutrients and it will be of advantage to feed it
even though it is not quite so well balanced because of the ex-
pense of making the change; in the case above one would have
to dispose of food containing much carbohydrates and procure
one rich in protein.
In cases, however, where there is a great departure from
the standard, it would pay to make the change, as has been
proved by many experiments at the various experiment stations
and by the experience of our successful stockmen.
Other methods of computing rations. —'There are two other
methods of computing rations for farm animals; one is some-
what simpler than the above and the other much more difficult.
In the former the ration is computed on the total amounts of
THE FEEDING OF ANIMALS 55
nutrients. A 1000-pound cow yielding 22 pounds of milk re-
quires 29 pounds of dry-matter, of which at least 16 pounds
should be digestible and 2 to 24
pounds should be digestible pro-
tein. The ration is calculated
simply on the digestible matter
and the protein. The other
method of computing rations
for farm animals is by the use
of energy values of the food.
In this method one must know
the energy values of the vari-
ous constituents; also amount
of energy required to produce a
unit of whatever is wanted.
In other words, it is essential to know the energy required to
produce one pound of beef, pork, mutton, or milk. Knowing
the energy of the food and the energy required for produc-
tion, the ration is calculated accordingly.
Using balanced rations. — The nutritive-ratio may vary from
the standard without serious results. Milk cows have produced
good results on rations with a nutritive-ratio as wide as 1:8, and
horses have fared well on rations with a wider nutritive-ratio.
Much depends on the individuality of the animal, the conditions,
and the individuality of the feeder. It must be remembered that
no rules can be given that will apply in all cases, and that our
feeding-standards are guides and not laws.
Fic. 28.— WrypeLanps “STarR-
LIGHT,’ CHAMPION SHIRE Mare.
CHAPTER III
THE FEEDING OF HORSES
Frrpinc the horse presents a problem of as wide interest as
any in connection with farm animals. Practically all farmers,
whatever branch of farming they may be engaged in, have oc-
casion to feed horses. In addition to farmers, commercial firms
of various kinds keep horses in large numbers, business men and
sportsmen keep many horses for pleasure, all of whom have a
deep interest in methods of feeding as well as the proper food.
The farmer, the business man, and the sportsman each derive
much pleasure in having their horses presentable at all times.
The farmer’s relation to his horse may not be the same as that of
the sportsman, but his interest is as great and his care as pains-
taking.
FOOD REQUIREMENTS FOR WORK
The work horse may be compared to a steam engine in which
such foods as grain and hay serve as fuel, but it differs from
the engine because fire and steam are not used toconvert the fuel
into work or energy. In the horse the food is converted into
energy in a different way.
It is of interest to note that the horse makes better use of the
energy in the food than does the steam engine of the energy in
the fuel. It appears that about one-third of the total food
energy can be converted into useful work with the horse, while
the steam engine may recover as much as one-tenth of the
energy contained in the fuel.
Many experiments have been made to determine the exact re-
lation between the amount of muscular work performed and the
56
THE FEEDING OF HORSES 57
amount of nutrients required per day. And as a result of such
work the following standards have been suggested : —
Wolff-Lehman standard showing the amount of food required per 1000-
pounds live weight for horses at light, medium, and heavy work
DigestTisLE NUTRIENTS
Conprien OF Dry- NutTRITIVE-
sua ee Protein Carbohydrates Fat Ratio
Light work. . 20 1.5 9.5 0.4 1:7.0
Medium work .| 24 2.0 11.0 0.6 1:6.2
Heavy work. . 26 2.5 13.3 0.8 1:6.0
These standards were arranged to meet the need of the average
horse under normal conditions. They are to serve as guides, to
be modified to meet conditions, and not as laws, fixed and
absolute.
Regularity in feeding. — The importance of regularity in every-
thing that pertains to the management of the horse cannot
easily be overestimated. This applies particularly to feeding.
Whatever feeding-stuffs are employed in the ration, the horse
should be fed regularly and uniformly at all times. The horse
anticipates the feeding hour, and becomes nervousif it is delayed.
He neighs and coaxes for his food with great regularity. The
horse’s digestive system and his vital activities become accus-
tomed to a certain order, which should be followed. To change
the order for even a single meal produces more or less digestive
disturbance. The horse’s digestive system is not so large pro-
portionately as that of a cow or sheep; he has no rumen, no place
to store his food to be masticated at will; hence, when at work
the horse must be fed regularly and often. Undue fasting is
followed by taking an excessive supply of food, which in turn
calls for excessive drinking with consequent digestive difficulties.
Order of supplying food. — Because of the small size of the
horse’s stomach, the order of supplying grain, hay, and water
58 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
assumes much importance, Investigators have shown that the
stomach of the horse must fill and empty itself two or three times
for each meal given. It appears that during the fore part of the
Fic. 29.— Beuteian Srauyion ‘‘Rosuste ve TuieEnsies.’’ Imported by J.
Crouch & Son, Lafayette, Ind.
The Belgian draft horse is a native of Belgium. This breed varies widely in
weight and height, stallions from Flanders weighing 2000 pounds, those from
Ardennais weighing about 1200 pounds, with the height varying accordingly.
In color chestnuts are the most popular, although bays, browns, and roans are
numerous. The Belgians lack the heavy hair on the limbs possessed by the
Shires and Clydes.
meal the material is pushed into the intestines almost as soon as
it enters the stomach by the food which follows, while toward
the end of the meal passage is slow and the digestion in the
stomach more perfect. This being true, it would seem that the
THE FEEDING OF HORSES 59
more nutritious foods should be fed toward the end of the meal,
especially since some of the very important nutrients are largely
digested in the stomach and at the entrance of the small intes-
tines.
Watering the horse.— Many feeders think that the horse
should be watered before feeding, while others are equally certain
that feeding should precede watering. Each of these methods
is probably equally good for the horse, and the one employed
will be determined by circumstances. Certain conditions may
make it necessary to adopt one, other conditions the other. For
example, after severe loss of water, such as occurs in consequence
of long-continued, severe exertion, the animal may perhaps be al-
lowed to drink before he is fed, otherwise he will not feed well.
On the other hand if permitted to drink to excess, this method
of watering affects the appetite, and the horse will not consume
so much food as he otherwise would. Again, it has been very
clearly demonstrated that if a horse is fed his grain first and then
watered, much of the food is carried by the water into the in-
testines. Since the grain of the ration is rich in digestible nu-
trients, it should stayin the stomach as long as possible, since the
digestion of one of the most important of the nutrients is more
complete there. From this it would seem that the horse should
be given water first of all, and that should be followed by hay,
the grain being withheld until at least a part of the hay has been
consumed. There are, however, very serious objections to this
practice, as the horse is unsatisfied, is anxious, and very nervous
till fed his grain, and should not be compelled to wait for the
grain. A middle ground should be taken by watering first, feed-
ing the grain sprinkled with a small allowance of moistened,
chopped hay, if possible, and watering again after the ration has
been consumed. If this practice is followed, it will satisfy the
desires of the horse by supplying the most palatable part of his
food early, and yet insure the retention of the grain in the stom-
ach for a considerable time.
60 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Salt in limited quantities should be kept before the horse at all
times. While little is known from investigations on this subject,
it is evident from the extreme fondness of the horse for salt that
it should be regularly supplied him. It is best not to place too
much before him at a time as some horses will eat it to excess.
The successful horseman will study each individual and modify
the ration according to the varied needs; one horse should have
a little more than the regular allowance, and the next possibly a
little less, because some horses are more difficult to keep in con-
dition than others doing the same work and under similar con-
ditions.
In handling horses we should remember that they are very
sensitive animals and that we cannot be too quiet in our treat-
ment of them. Striking them or shouting commands at them
is an inconsiderate practice; it causes the animals to lose con-
fidence in their master, thereby rendering them less teachable,
and destroys nervous energy, making them less economical pro-
ducers than if they were protected at all times from these ner-
vous shocks.
FEEDING THE WORK HORSE
The work horse has a very hearty appetite, a vigorous
digestion, and responds more readily, than any other animal,
to intelligent care. He should be fed liberally and frequently, the
quantity given being regulated by the size of the animal as well
as the amount and kind of work he is required to do. In gen-
eral, the horse should be supplied with something over two
pounds of provender daily for each hundred pounds of weight.
Of this about two-thirds, the exact quantity depending on the
severity of the labor performed, should be grain in some form.
If the work is exceedingly heavy, the grain in the ration should
be increased and the hay diminished; whereas, if the work is
light, the grain should be diminished and the hay increased.
The morning meal should be comparatively light, consisting
mostly of grain. It should not possess much bulk. In many of
THE FEEDING OF HORSES 61
the larger stables in the city the mid-day meal is omitted. But
most horsemen hold that some grain should be given at noon,
which seems reasonable from a
our knowledge of the horse’s &
stomach. In any case, the mid-
day ration should not be large.
The heavy feeding should come
at night, after the day’s work is
over and when the animal has
ample time to masticate and di-
gest his food. A very good
practice is as follows: For the
morning ration, feed one-fourth
of the daily allowance at least
one hour before going to work. It should be in condition to be
easily and rapidly consumed, so as to be well out of the way when
the animal is led from the stable. After being watered, he is
ready for the morning’s task. If the work is exhaustive and
exacting, he should be fed after five hours of labor. When he
comes to the stable at mid-day, he should have a drink of fresh,
cool water, taking care that he does not drink too rapidly or
gorge himself if very warm. At this time give him another
quarter of his daily allowance. No greater service can be ren-
dered the horse at this time than to remove the harness so that
he can eat his meal in quiet and comfort and gain a few minutes
of much-needed rest. If possible, he should have one hour to con-
sume his meal. He should be watered again before going to
work. He is now ready for the second half of his day’s labor.
When the horse comes to the stable in the evening, tired and
warm, he should, first of all, be allowed a fresh, cool drink, care
being taken as before that he does not drink too rapidly. He is
now ready for the remainder of his day’s allowance. Unharness
at once, and when the sweat has dried, give him a thorough
brushing. If for some reason the horse is forced to stand idle
Fie. 80.—Importep Brioian STAL-
Lion. Three years old.
62 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
in the stable for a few days, the ration should be decreased.
Otherwise he will become stocky and his legs become swollen and
stiff.
During cold weather a more carbonaceous ration may be used.
When more food goes to furnish heat for the body, it is reason-
able that a horse needs a large proportion of heat-making food.
Equal parts of corn and oats by weight would be more satis-
factory and ordinarily much cheaper than a larger proportion of
oats.
Fic. 31.—A Goop Farm Tram or Grape Beteians. Weicut 3500 Pounps.
In providing a ration, whether for summer or for winter use,
due consideration should be given to the cost. Roughage is
ordinarily much cheaper than grain, but a horse at work is un-
able economically to dispose of a large proportion of bulky food.
If considerable time and energy must be expended in masticating
rough feed, the usefulness of the horse for work is lessened
thereby. The more concentrated the food, within proper limits,
the less percentage of energy will be needed to make it available.
The proportion of grain to roughage depends on the amount
and kind of work to be performed. A horse at hard work should
THE FEEDING OF HORSES 63
never be expected to consume more roughage than grain by
weight.
FEEDING THE DRIVING HORSE
The driving or carriage horse is more difficult to keep in con-
dition than the work horse. The periods of enforced idleness,
occasioned by lack of business engagements of his master or by
inclement weather, are often followed by long drives and hours
Fig. 32. A Drivine Team oF Spirit anp Goop Form.
of over-exertion. This irregular work weakens the constitution
of the driving horse, which generally has but a brief career.
When daily driving cannot be practiced, underfeeding is con-
sidered the safe course.
In feeding this class of horses, the same general plan that has
been suggested for the work horse should be followed. When
64 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the horse is not taken from the stable during the day, the con-
centrates, or grain part of the ration, should at once be reduced
by one-third and the normal allowance should not again be given
until the work is resumed. Driving horses are usually overfed,
because of the desire of the owner to keep them in the pink of
condition. This overfeeding and irregular exercise are the cause
of most of the ills of the driving horse. Oats leads easily among
the grains. When it is fed, the horse exhibits mettle as from no
other food. If at any time the animal should seem constipated,
a bran mash should be given. Timothy is the preferred hay.
While a certain amount of roughage must be fed to give bulk or
volume to the ration in order that the digestive functions may
be properly maintained, yet we must remember that a large ab-
domen cannot be tolerated in a driving horse. Another factor
that the feeder of this class of horses must ever be on his guard
against is the feeding of laxative foods, such as clover or alfalfa
hay or bran, in too large quantities, for when the horses are put
on the road and warmed up, they will prove very draining on the
system as well as disagreeable to the driver. Style and action
are prerequisites, while economy in feeding and sometimes the
health of the animal are held to be but secondary. Profes-
sional drivers may not be the safest persons to advise on
feeding.
WINTERING THE IDLE HORSE
On the average farm most of the work comes during the grow-
ing season. It is more economical, and perhaps advisable, that
the idle horse be turned into a lot, if it is well protected, to be
roughed through the winter rather than confined too closely in
the barn. As winter comes on the horse will grow a heavy coat
of hair, which will afford excellent protection. Such a horse
may be maintained wholly or nearly so upon hay, oat straw, or
corn fodder, as it has time to masticate food, and not being
taxed by labor, it is able to subsist on food containing a large
THE FEEDING OF HORSES 65
percentage of crude fiber. It is better to have the digestive tract
of the idle horse well distended with coarse material rather than
contracted, as would be the case if grains possessing only the
requisite nutrients were supplied. If the protected area is kept
dry and well bedded, the horse can be comfortably wintered in
this way at much less expense than by stabling. Some grain
should, however, be fed at shedding-time, even if the horses are
idle. Light grain feeding, together with some work, should
begin six weeks before the spring work starts, to put the horse in
condition.
FEEDING THE BROOD MARE
Many farmers are so situated that they may raise a team of
colts each year without seriously interfering with farm operations.
This is a good practice, as there is a demand for good horses for
both city and farm use. A team of mares in foal can be worked
until the day of foaling if the work is not too severe and the
driver is careful. In fact, moderate exercise is necessary for the
mareinfoal. Idleness is the bane of horse-rearing, and should be
avoided whenever possible. The Arabs have a saying, “Rest
and fat are the greatest enemies of the horse.’’ Mares in foal
should be fed much as suggested for work horses with perhaps
the addition of more protein foods, as bran and oil meal. The
ration should be such as will supply the demands for energy and
in addition allow abundant nourishment for the development of
the foal both before and for a time after birth. A very good ra-
tion for the pregnant mare is as follows: Four parts ground
oats, four parts wheat bran or its equivalent, and one part lin-
seed meal, with bright clover or alfalfa hay for roughage.
Pregnant animals have a tendency to fatten as pregnancy ad-
vances. This must be guarded against as the mare may
become so fat as to interfere with the development of the foal,
cause abortion or other troubles at parturition, such as milk-
fever and the like. The ration of the mare should be reduced
F
66 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
just before and for a short time after foaling. If she is consti-
pative, bran mash may be given occasionally. By the use of
proper foods the bowels
should be kept in good
condition and they
should be a little loose,
rather than otherwise,
at the time of parturi-
tion. While the mare
may be worked up to
the time of foaling, she
should be given a few
days rest after foaling
to enable her to gain her
strength and give the
foal the proper start.
For the first few days of
recuperation a hot bran
mash fed once a day has
both a cooling and a
laxative effect on the
Fic. 33. — Buack PercHERON GELDING, Four
Years Otp. Weicut 2460 Pounps. Ready A .
for market. Fed by H. D. Snyder & Sons. mare, and it is very
beneficial. If all has
gone well with the mare and foal, the mare may be put to
work at the end of one week from the time of parturition.
Some dams, especially those with their first foals, fail to supply
the proper amount of milk, and the young foals do not thrive.
In this case the mare should be provided with food which
stimulates the milk flow. Corn and timothy hay fed alone
are not good milk-producing foods. The ration suggested for
the pregnant mare is better, and it could be much improved if
a little succulent food were fed with it, such as carrots.
When inseason, good pasture grass is best. If there is an over-
supply of milk, or if the milk is too rich, the food may be restricted
THE FEEDING OF HORSES 67
and themare milked, in part, by hand; otherwise the foal will not
do well.
FEEDING MULES
Mules should be fed similarly to horses. The statement is of-
ten made that a mule requires less food than a horse to do a given
Fic. 34. A Parr oF WELL-BRED MULES. Photograph from National Stock-
man and Farmer.
amount of work. Such is not the case. True, a mule is less
likely to overfeed and gorge himself than a horse, and will make
68 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
use of coarse foods that the horse will not eat unless forced todo so
by neglect. Mulesare often preferred by large business concerns,
not that they consume less food for a given amount of work than
a horse, but that their feeding can be trusted to less skillful hands
without seriously endangering the mule’s health. If an extra
large mess is given him, he eats what he wishes and leaves the
rest; not so with the tired horse, as he will eat all the grain that is
given him up to the point of seriously endangering his health.
For best results the ration of the mule should be comprised of
easily digested and nutritious feeds which should be varied from
time to time as no animal loves a variety better than the mule.
The ration should be suitable to the kind of work. For light
work a small quantity of grain and a relatively large quantity of
hay is best, but when the work is severe and exacting, the quantity
of grain should be increased and the hay decreased. As among
all other farm animals there is much difference in individuals,
and the successful feeder will make a careful study of each and
modify the ration accordingly, as some should have a little
more than the regular allowance, others less. In all essential
features the mule is very similar to the horse, and what we sug-
gested for horses applies with equal force to mules.
SAMPLE RATIONS FOR THE HORSE
The following rations are collected from various sources and
furnish a guide in determining the kind and amount of feed that
should be allowed the horse under various conditions : —
THE FEEDING OF HORSES
69
WEIGHT Ration
ANIMAL AND Work OF j
Horss Grain Roughage
Colt, weaning time 2 lb. oats Hay ad lib.
Colt, one year old . 4 lb. oats Hay ad lib.
Colt, two years old 6 lb. oats Hay ad lib.
Colt, two years old
in training 8 lb. oats Hey Bllowomes lim-
ite
Colt, three years old Hay allowance lim-
in training 8-10 lb. oats ited
Race horse 15 lb. oats 6-8 Ib. hay
Hunter, small 12 lb. oats 12 lb. hay
Hunter, large 16 lb. oats 10 Ib. hay
Cavalry horses . 1050 | 12 lb. oats 14 lb. hay
Artillery horses . 1125 | 12 Ib. oats 14 Ib. hay
Heavy draft 2000 | 12 lb. oats 15 Ib. clover hay
3 lb. corn
6 lb. beans
Farm work
Farm teams, east .| 1220 | 8 lb. oats 10 lb. hay
6 Ib. corn
2 lb. bran
Farm teams, east .| 1230 | 8 Ib. corn 10 lb. hay
7 lb. bran
Farm teams, east .| 1170 | 8 lb. oats 10 lb. hay
6 lb. corn
2 Ib. bran
Farm teams, east .} 1175 | 7 lb. bran 12 Ib. corn-stover
7 |b. corn
Farm teams, east .| 1000 | 23 Ib. bran 6 Ib. hay
4} lb. corn
8+# lb. dried Brewers’
grains
Farm teams, east .| 1180 | 6.55 Ib. corn 8 Ib. hay
5.45 Ib. linseed
meal
Farm teams, west .| 1235 | 11.5 lb. oats 14.7 Ib. alfalfa hay
Farm teams, west .| 1870 | 5 lb. bran 25 Ib. alfalfa hay
5 Ib. shorts
Farm teams, west .| 1385 19.7 Ib. alfalfa hay
Farm teams, west . | 1420 32.6 lb. alfalfa hay
CHAPTER IV
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL
Tue breeding of farm animals is perhaps the most interesting
problem connected with their propagation and care. While
farm animals have been undergoing improvement from the time
that we have authentic history, it is only within the last one
hundred years or so that very great progress has been made in
their improvement. During this period practically all of our
breeds, as we now know them, have been formed, and great dif-
ferentiation has taken place in the production of the various
classes. Only recently have we paid much attention to the
milk-producing capacity of our cattle, although cattle have
been kept for milk since the beginning of history; only recently
have we selected horses for strength, though they have been used
in war and sport for four thousand years; and the same is true
of all the specialized breeds. Formerly, breeders had no system
of selection. Their standards constantly changed, so that no
real progress in the development of the most valuable qualities
could be made.
Shortly after the middle of the eighteenth century, Robert
Bakewell of Dishley Grange, Leicestershire, England, originated
a system which he practiced in the improvement of Leicester
sheep, Long-horn cattle, and the English cart-horse. His
method was taken up and successfully practiced by other men;
and we now have as the result of their labors a variety of im-
proved breeds, each differing from the others in the particular
characters for which they have been selected and that adapt
70
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 71
them to special conditions and purposes. Thus we have a strain
of cattle that, having been selected from generation to generation
for their milk yield, have become so profuse in the secreting of
milk that we call them by a certain breed name. The object
sought being milk yield and through several generations se-
lected for this one purpose, the ability to secrete a large flow
became fixed and capable of transmission to the offspring.
This increased milk flow is not to be understood as a new
character, as all cows give some milk,.but merely an increase in
the ability to secrete milk in large quantities.
Like produces like. — Everything brings forth after its kind.
In order that the offspring be a high-producing heifer, it is neces-
sary that the dam and sire before her be of a high-producing
strain of cattle. In other words, the offspring will bear a close
resemblance to the parents in all important essentials. This
Bakewell recognized, and he shocked the modest people of his
time by uniting animals that possessed the characters he wished
to propagate without regard to the relationship of the animals.
If a cow and her son possessed the characters he wished to retain,
he united them, and in this way secured an offspring possessing
the desirable characters to a greater degree than either parent.
It has been said of Bakewell that he regarded his animals as
wax out of which in time he could mold any form that he desired
to create. All farm animals have been molded to a great degree
by man. It is now thought that the Percheron draft horse and
the Shetland pony have descended from the same original type
of horse, and that the Shorthorn and the Jersey descended from
the same type of cow. In one case there was a continuous selec-
tion, whether natural or artificial, for a large animal with the re-
sult that to-day we have the ponderous draft horse; in the case of
the pony the selection was for the smaller animal with the result
that we have a diminutive horse. This selection has been going
on for ages, and now the two types are fixed under their present
conditions. Bear in mind, however, that a reversal of the con-
72 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
ditions might result in a reversal of the type. In other words,
if one wished to enlarge the Shetland ponies ail he need do is to
feed them abundance of nutritious feed and unite the largest to
the largest in breeding and in time they would no longer be
known for their small size. On the other hand, if one wishes to
retain the small size of the pony, or to diminish it still farther,
all that need be done is to restrict the food and unite the smallest
to the smallest in breeding. The same is true of any character
one wishes to propagate. From this it can be readily observed
that we have two forces operating. The first is that like tends
to produce like, and the second that if any improvement is
brought about, it is through variation.
VARIATION IS THE BASIS OF IMPROVEMENT
If characters were absolutely fixed and unchangeable, then no
improvement could be secured. The size of the pony could
neither be increased nor diminished and the milk flow of cattle
would remain constant from generation to generation, and the
offspring would be no better than the parent. Variation, then,
is the basis of improvement among farm animals.
Variation universal among farm animals. — No two animals
are alike. To those unfamiliar with swine, each pig of a litter
may look exactly like the others, yet the trained eye readily
recognizes differences and can describe each so that those with
equal training may recognize them. These differences extend to
all characters. Two cows of the same breed may differ widely
in the richness of their milk; two steers of like breeding differ
widely in their ability to fatten and the beef may also differ,
the loin of one being fine and tender while the other may be
coarse in grain. Of two sheep of the same breed, one may
possess wool of bright luster, fine crimp, and even throughout;
the other may have wool rather coarse, no crimp, and differ
much in various parts of the body. There is frce variation
among living things.
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 73
Kinds of variation. — Since variation extends to each char-
acter, it may aid us in a clearer understanding of variation among
farm animals if we consider the subject from four points of
view. First, we will consider that variation may be expressed
only in form and size. This is quantitative variation, having to
do with degree only. Such variation is the simplest form, and
we observe evidences of it on every hand. For example, of
two horses of the same breed, one may be large, the other small ;
on the same animal one foot may be larger than the others; the
two ears may not be of the same size; one eye may be larger
than the other. Between two dairy cows of the same breed,
one may have a very large, well-proportioned udder, the other
small and irregular in shape. Illustrations of the first class are
without number. The second class of variation is that which is
expressed in the quality, as distinct from form and size. This
is qualitative variation; that is, having to do with characters
only. Evidences of this are also abundant. For example, of
all the cows in existence, no two yield milk containing the same
amount of fat; in fact, the individual cow varies widely from day
to day in the percentage of fat contained in the milk. Again,
no two pieces of beef are exactly alike in flavor, tenderness,
juiciness, and the like. The quality of no two horses is alike, —
one has coarse, rough hair and a thick hide, the other has smooth,
soft hair and a smooth, pliable hide. The third class of varia-
tion has to do with the function or with the activity of the vari-
ous organs and parts of the body, such as muscular activity,
glandular secretions, and the like. There are many examples of
this, such as variation in the milk flow, some cows yielding as
high as 128 pounds in a single day; variation in the fertility,
some cows producing only four or five young in their lifetime,
while the Angus cow Old Granny (No. 1 of the Angus Herd
Book) produced twenty-five, the last one in her twenty-ninth
year; variation in speed, scent, and in fact all functions.
The fourth class of variations has to do with deviations from
74 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the pattern, especially as regards repeated parts, such as ex-
tra toes, extra teats on swine, and the like. This class is not so
common among animals, but evidences are everywhere observed
among plants, as stooling in wheat, oats, corn, and the like. It
Fic. 35.—Surrotk STauLion ‘'RenDLESHAU ScorceER.’”’ Three years old.
The Suffolk draft horse, a native of Suffolk County, England, is a very massive,
short-legged breed, possessing clean legs and a docile, teachable disposition.
In weight the stallions vary from 1400 to 1900 pounds and the mares from
1200 to 1600 pounds. The height varies from 15 to 16% hands. The breed
color is chestnut, varying from a bright to a dark shade.
is familiar in the doubling of flowers, in which the parts may
be much repeated.
It will be comparatively simple to recognize variation and to
make improvement in any of the breeds of farm animals if these
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 15
classes of variation are kept clearly in mind. Not all kinds
of variation are desired. The qualitative variations are most
sought. °
PROXIMATE CAUSES OF VARIATION
The conditions that bring about variation are worthy much
consideration since one, by modifying these conditions, can aid
in producing variation in a desired direction. For example, if
we want to increase the milk flow of cattle, the conditions
that will cause them to vary in that direction are of much im-
portance and should be well understood. In general, variation
results from environment, from crossing dissimilar animals, and
from use or disuse, all of which are under the control of man.
Environment. — Of all the external conditions bringing about
variation in farm animals, those influences that we sum up
under the term “‘environment ” are by far the most important.
As a matter of fact, it is through the ability to change the
environment of animals that man is able to induce variation and
improvement. Among animals in a state of nature, we define
environment as those conditions of climate and food that con-
cern the life of the animal. Among farm animals the conditions
of environment are somewhat changed or enlarged, and we are
accustomed to think of it as the sum of all of those conditions
that are influenced through association with man. The chief
factors of environment through which man seeks to control or
improve farm animals are those of climate, food, and care. The
environment means the “ surroundings.”’
The climate and the kind of animals that exist in it are closely
related. The characters that are most often affected are those
that have to do with size and the external covering of the animal.
The natural relation of climate to size is that animals inhabiting
cold climates are usually small as compared with those of the
same species inhabiting warm climates. Man modifies the
natural effect of climate through the housing that he affords farm
16 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
animals ; hence he can move animals from one climate to another
without serious results. Many animals show ease of acclima-
tization to wide changes of climate.
Climate has a marked effect on the external coat of the animal.
When farm animals are exposed to cold, damp weather, the hair
becomes longer and thicker than if protected. This heavy
coat is produced at the sacrifice of flesh. In some instances
the exposure produces a double coat of hair, an upper one
being long and wavy and an under one short, fine, and fur-
like. The Galloway cattle furnish a good illustration.
| The food supply is of prime importance in effecting variation
and improvement among farm animals. In general, full feeding
increases size. No other conditions influence development to
a greater extent than the food supply. Large breeds are devel-
oped from small ones largely by increasing the food supply.
In addition to the increase in size, there is also an increase in the
constitutional vigor when the animal is well fed. Withholding
the food supply not only arrests development but weakens the
capacity for future development as well. Thus it is that ani-
mals passing through such periods of arrested development
may never attain the development which they otherwise would
reach. In order to secure increased development— develop-
ment of productive function—the animal must be supplied
with more food than is required for the performance of the nor-
mal function. Again, there is a correlation between the food
supply and the kind of product. The Islands of Great Britain
have developed more high grades of flesh-producing animals
than any other country, and we find nutritious pastures over
almost all of that country.
The care that farm animals receive will go a long way towards
determining the extent of variation they are likely to undergo.
Farm animals that are well cared for, that is, properly housed,
fed, watered, groomed, exercised, and the like, cannot fail to
respond to such treatment. Many a man has fallen short of
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 77
success in breeding by depending upon blood alone for improve-
ment of his stock. He has forgotten that all of our improved
breeds are the product of adequate nutrition combined with
intelligent breeding, suitable environment, sufficient shelter,
and kindly care.
Crossing. — The uniting of dissimilar animals is another
cause of variation. Up to the time of Bakewell, cross-breeding
was one of the chief means by
which improvement was sought.
This was before the time of
pedigree books, and crossing
was made easy from the fact
that no record of the breeding
was kept. It was also observed
that the uniting of two animals
that were unrelated, or that
had existed under different te Fig. 36.—Surrotk Mare “ BawpsEy
vironment, resulted in increased Peary.” Three years old.
constitutional vigor and in many
cases in greater prolificacy, and often individual improve-
ments. The great difficulty came when they attempted to
breed these cross-bred animals. The offspring of cross-bred
animals varied widely, some were good, more poor, and no
one could foretell which way the offspring would tend to de-
velop. While crossing is a cause of much variation, the results
are usually disappointing in theend. The fact must be recog-
nized, however, that the abundant crossing practiced by the
early British breeders gave to the animals a plasticity of con-
formation that prepared them for quick improvement when
subjected to the Bakewell method.
SELECTION
The purpose of selection is to modify the type to suit our
purpose, to prevent as far as possible the production of unde-
78 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
sirable individuals, and to encourage the production of those
individuals that meet the demand. In choosing farm animals
for breeding purposes, there are at least three factors to be taken
into consideration: First, the perfection of the individual as a
representative of its race or type, or the individual merit of the
animal as a specimen; second, the capacity of the individual
to reproduce itself or to show improvement, or the pedigree of
the animal; and third, the suitability of the two individuals
to be mated.
Individual merit. — It is often a question as to whether we
should pay more attention to the individual merit of the animal
or to its pedigree. It cannot be said that they are equal, or that
one is more important than the other. There are two general
principles in this connection that should always be borne in
mind: the offspring of an inferior individual with a good pedi-
gree is very likely to possess merit; many of the offspring of a
superior individual with a poor pedigree will, in all probability,
be distinctly inferior in merit. In other words, no matter
what the individual merits of an animal may be, unless he has
inherited these qualities equally from his ancestors, we can-
not expect him to transmit them with any degree of cer-
tainty.
Pedigree. — The capacity of the individual to reproduce itself
or to show improvement depends much upon his ancestors; that
is, upon his pedigree. Pedigree is a record of the ancestry
of an animal; it furnishes, therefore, a guaranty of the purity
of the stock. The book in which such records are kept is
called a herd-book. The mere fact that the lineage of an animal
is known, is a certain indication of the quality of the animal,
but this fact does not indicate the capacity of the individual to
reproduce itself. The knowledge of the individual quality of
the animals making up a pedigree is an important factor. Char-
acters will be transmitted in proportion to the degree with which
they have become fixed in the parents. We are accustomed to
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 79
associate great length of pedigree with high breeding quality.
Historical evidence goes to show that we place too high value
on extreme length of pedigree. Many of our pure breeds that
Fia. 37.— Hackney Coacu Stauuron ‘‘Founparion.”” Owned at Maple-
wood, Attica, N. Y.
The Hackney coach horse originated in England, in the counties of Suffolk,
Norfolk, and York. This breed is noted particularly for style and high action.
In height there is much variation. There are Hackney ponies under 14
hands, Hackney cobs that are larger than the ponies, and Hackney coaches
over 16 hands, the weight varying accordingly. Chestnut is the most
popular color, although bays, blacks, browns, and other colors are of frequent
occurrence. This is the most popular breed of coach horses when high-step-
ping action is desired.
80 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
show a high tendency to reproduce their characteristics have
secured these qualities from a comparatively short line of
animals noted for their breeding qualities. It would be difficult
to trace the actual influence of the parents back of the fourth
or fifth parents, in a number of cases. It is the individuals
making up the pedigree for the last four or five generations that
are of great influence in giving any individual the power to trans-
mit qualities; and if all of the individuals constituting the
pedigree for these generations have the qualities that we rec-
ognize as good, we may count upon the animals transmitting
their qualities with such a degree of certainty that it makes
little difference what the individuals were back of that point.
Of late there has been much discussion as to the part
each ancestor contributes in the total heritage. Galton was
one of the first to answer this question. While he answered it
with much hesitation, his suggestions received considerable
support and have come tobe knownas “ Galton’s Law of ancestral
heredity.” Galton set forth the idea that one-half of the full
heritage comes from the parents; one-fourth from the grand-
parents ; one-eighth from the great grandparents ; one-sixteenth
from the great, great grandparents, and so on to infinity.
This being true, an offspring will procure 24 of its full heritage
from the five nearest generations of ancestors.
In selection, the performance of the animal, when available,
as it is in race horses and dairy cows, should also be considered.
The record of performance affords very valuable information
as to what the offspring will probably be like. When breeding
dairy cows, if one unites two animals of low-producing strains, as
shown by the records, his chance of procuring a high-producing
result are not very great. On the other hand, if one unites
two animals of high-producing strains, as shown by the records,
his chance of procuring a high-producing offspring are very good,
although not sure, as there may be a certain influence of the
heritage from the very early ancestors whose records were not so
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 81
good. There is no factor of more use than the record of per-
formance, although some breeders push it to an extreme. If
one wishes to increase the performance, he must select the indi-
viduals upon their performance rather than on fancy. If ani-
mals are selected, however, wholly by performance, without
regard to form, we are likely to lose the best conformation.
There is another reason for selecting animals with a pedigree
and a record of performance, which is entirely a commercial
one. Animals registered in a herd book and that have a rec-
ord of performance back of them are more likely to reproduce
themselves and will command a higher price in the market ;
and there is always a good market for such stock, as the
supply is limited.
Mating. — In selecting animals, we must consider the suit-
ability of the two animals to mate together. We have already
seen that no two animals are alike, and since two animals are
essential in the reproduction, the offspring can never be exactly
like both parents. We must er
strike an average between the ¥
characteristics of the parents
and what we expect to get in
the offspring. As compared
with its parents the offspring
of two individuals will fall
into one of the following three
classes: First, a perfect com-
bination of the qualities of
both parents; this is called
breeding true. Second, a pre-
ponderance of characters of
either parent; this is called
prepotency; and third, the offspring may exhibit none or few
of the characters of either parent; this is called reversion.
When the offspring shows equal blending of the qualities of
G
Fic. 38.—Hacxney Srauuion ‘ Fan-
panco M.”? Owned by A. R. Gillis.
82 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
both parents, the mating is considered to be most successful.
At the same time it is almost never fully attained. It is
approached in proportion to the similarity of the parents.
Uniformity of type and characteristics in a herd or flock is one
of the very desirable things, for many reasons. The uniformity
that is secured by reason of the equal degree of characters secured
from each parent is the most desirable type of uniformity.
More often the offspring will resemble one parent more than
the other, and in this case one parent is said to be prepotent
over the other. This resemblance will vary from a very slight
preponderance of the characteristics of one parent, up to a great
over-balance, amounting almost to a complete exclusion of the
characteristics of the other parent. This question of prepo-
tency is one of the most important having to do with selection,
and one which will be further discussed in the chapters on
breeding the various classes of farm animals.
When the offspring shows no resemblance to either parent,
but to some near ancestor, it is called reversion ; if to some of the
far removed ancestors it is called atavism. Examples are often
seen: as, in the case of a pure Angus cow, which is naturally
black, giving birth to a red calf; the case of Poland China
swine, naturally black, occasionally possessing a sandy tint on
the hair.
Two animals to be suitable for mating must be alike in gen-
eral physical characters. Otherwise the outcome of a union
cannot be foretold. When the offspring shows good qualities,
the mating of the parents is considered a fortunate nick. The
history of farm animals is full of such nicks. The success or
failure of a stock breeder very often depends on his ability to
discover these nicks and to make use of them. Some breeders
become very skilful in these matters, even though they may
not be able to give reasons for their choice or to instruct
others in the same methods. Very often these are untaught
and unread men,
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 83
HEREDITY
For our purpose, we will define heredity as the transmission
or passing down of characters from parents to offspring. We
have already noted two great forces underlying our breeding
operations; like tending to beget like, which has to do with
heredity ; the other the great run of variation through which
improvement is sought in our farm animals. On heredity all
successful breeding operations depend. We have just noted the
kinds of variation, as well as the causes that lead to their
appearance, and now come to the question whether and to what
extent such variations are hereditary or transmissible to the
offspring.
The extent to which these variations are transmitted is a
very important matter, because variations that are not re-
tained are of no importance in breeding, though they may be
of much consequence to the individual possessing them. If
they are transmitted, they influence the race for good or bad,
depending on whether desirable or undesirable. Practical men
work on the supposition that these variations or so-called
modified characters are transmitted. All recognize the neces-
sity of the highest development of the individual for the specific
purpose for which it is intended. If one is to breed the
best kind of beef animals, he must unite animals of the best beef
strains. If one is to breed the highest class of trotting horses,
he must unite horses that can trot fast. If one is to
produce cows yielding a high milk flow, he must unite animals
with high records of performance. Working breeders are uni-
versally of this opinion. All of our improved breeds of ani-
mals are comparatively recent. It is difficult to see how we
could have secured such development in so short a time, unless
it came through the inheritance of modified characters.
Inheritance of disease. — In all of the early writings on hered-
ity, there is much discussion on the heredity of disease, and
84 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
nearly every disease has at one time been classed as transmis-
sible. In a good many cases, diseases seem to pass from gen-
eration to generation with regularity or even certainty and are
often classed as hereditary diseases, whereas the facts are that
such troubles are germ diseases and are due to infection.
Again, there are diseases peculiar to certain conformations,
such as a curb or a spavined hock on the horse. The peculiar
conformation may he hereditary, and the animal contracts
the disease because of the conformation, but the disease as
such was not transmitted. The results are the same, but it is
best to state it correctly.
Prepotency is the power that one parent has over the other
in determining the character of the offspring. It is usually
considered from two points of view; first, ‘race’ or “breed”
prepotency, when all the individuals of the race or breed are
possessed of such power in transmitting their characters; and
second, “individual” prepotency, when the individual possesses
the power to transmit its own characters to the offspring to
the exclusion of the other parent.
Breed prepotency is clearly exhibited when two distinct
breeds are crossed, as the offspring will more clearly resemble
one breed than the other. Among cattle, the Galloways are
noted for being prepotent in color and in the polled charac-
ter, for when crossed upon other breeds, the offspring are
nearly all black and hornless. The Herefords are prepotent in
transmitting their white face to the offspring when crossed on
other breeds.
Individual prepotency is a very great factor in breed im-
provement. Many of the modern breeds of farm animals owe
their existence to the individual characters of the animal that
founded the line. Hambletonian 10 among trotting horses
is an example. He sired horses who in turn gired animals of
great. speed, with the result that most of the Standard Bred
horses trace either directly or indirectly to Hambletonian 10.
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 85
Again, the breed of American saddle horses owes much of its
excellence to the individual prepotency of Denmark. The
families of the various breeds of farm animals that owe their
existence to the individual prepotency of the animal that founded
them are almost without number, such as the St. Lambert
family descended from Stoke Pogis, 1259, and the Eurotas family
descended from Eurotas, 2454, among Jerseys; the Johanna
family descended from Johanna, 1421, and the De Kol family
descended from De Kol 2d, 734, among Holsteins; the Perfec-
tion family descended from Chief Perfection, 32144, and the
Corwin family descended from Tom Corwin 2d, 2037, among
Poland China swine.
Since prepotency is of so great importance in improvement
among farm animals, those influences that tend to produce it
in the individual are worthy of note. While many of the
factors surrounding prepotency are not well understood, yet
those that do aid and are under the control of man are: purity
of breeding, strong constitutional development, and in-breeding.
Purity of breeding strengthens prepotency in individual as well
as in the breed or race. It strengthens prepotency because it
makes for stability. The introduction of outside animals
becomes a disturbing factor in the stability of the characters of
the individual and therefore a disturbing factor in the cer-
tainty of transmission. On the other hand, each generation of
pure breeding adds to the stability of the type and to the cer-
tainty of transmission.
Vigor in the individual is a very important factor when
selecting for prepotency. This is sometimes lost sight of, as
in selecting hens for high egg production when nothing but
production is considered, and always with serious results, for
without vitality all else will fail.
In-breeding aids prepotency, for it strengthens dominant
characters. The more inbred the animals the more intense
their power of transmission. This applies, however, to good
86 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and bad characters alike, and will be discussed in the para-
graph on in-and-in breeding (p. 92).
These three factors acting in conjunction, and when properly
manipulated, giye the highest degree of prepotency attainable,
and all are under the control of the breeder.
The prepotency of the male is given more consideration than
of the female. This is due to the fact that it is more noticeable,
as the sire is the parent of many more animals than the dam.
A stallion may sire fifty or more foals in a year, whereas the
dam can give birth to but one. This is a fortunate view of the
matter, since improvement can be much more cheaply brought
about through a good sire from the mere fact that he is
represented in more progeny.
Prolificacy or fecundity. — For our purpose we will assume
that these terms have the same meaning, and that they refer
to the fruitfulness or the number of young brought forth.
This is a very important consideration in practical operations.
Breeds vary widely in this respect, it being a characteristic of
some to give birth to more than they can raise, whereas others
are not so fruitful. Under “functional variation” (p. 78) we
have noted the Angus cow Old Granny (No. 1 in Angus Herd
Book). She produced twenty-five calves, the last one in the
twenty-ninth year of her life. Old Fanny Cook, the English
Thoroughbred mare, produced fifteen foals, giving birth to
twins at twenty-two years of age. The Thoroughbred mare
Pocahontas also produced fifteen living foals and lived to the
old age of thirty-three years. In this connection it is interest-
ing to note the number of performances some of the leading
males of the various breeds have sired. Among Holstein cattle,
the bull Hengerveld De Kol, 23,102, is the sire of ninety-eight
daughters with advanced registry records; Paul Beets De Kol,
22,235, of ninety-three ; and Lord Netherland De Kol, 22,187, of
eighty-nine. The Jersey bull Exile of St. Lambert has ninety-
four daughters in the Register of Merit. Among Standard
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 87
Bred (trotting or pacing) horses the stallion Gambetta Wilks,
4659, has two hundred and four standard performers ; Onward,
1411, has one hundred and ninety-eight ; Allerton, 5128, has one
Fig, 39. —‘' DecoraTeur,’’ Frencn CoacH STALLION.
The French coach horse is,a native of France. This breed is similar to the
Hackney, but possessing more bone and substance and lacking much of the
flashy action. In weight stallions vary from 1100 to 1400 pounds, with mares
100 to 200 pounds lighter. The height varies from 15 to 16% hands. Bays
and browns are the most popular colors, although there are many blacks and
chestnuts.
hundred and ninety; and there are' more than a score with over
one hundred. The importance of this high fertility, from a
profitable point of view, need not be dwelt upon.
88 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
In these cases much depended upon the opportunity. The
better the sire the better will be the class of dams offered and
hence the better the offspring, all of which leads to further
opportunities. Another fact in this connection well worth re-
membering is that imported animals are seldom fertile until
acclimated. In general, distance makes less difference than
altitude, temperature, sunlight, and food supply.
Sterility. — One of the breeders’ greatest difficulties is ste-
rility among animals. The causes which lead to sterility are
very many, some of which are well understood and are more
or less preventable, while others are not so well understood
and beyond control. If due to the male, then all the females
put to him will be sterile, whereas if due to the female, she alone
fails to breed. Some of the causes that can be easily controlled
are as follows: confinement and lack of exercise; irregular
supply of food and lack of uniformity in conditions; food lack-
ing the proper nutrients or containing too much sugar ;- animals
in too fat condition ; and in-and-in breeding, close breeding, ex-
cessive breeding; and the like. Again, the tendency to sterility
or lack of fertility is often hereditary. The Duchess family
among Shorthorns affords a good example. This family was
always known as “‘shy breeders,’”’ and this was considered one
of its valuable attributes. The breeders argued that this
diminished the numbers and kept the price very high. The
results were that this most excellent family of Shorthorns dis-
appeared because of its infertility.
Relative influence of parents. — No question in the breeding
of farm animals has given rise to more discussion than the
influence that each parent exerts on the offspring. As one
reviews the literature on the subject, he collects the following
ideas: the male controls the external and the female the in-
ternal organs of the offspring; the male controls the forward
and upper parts of the body. and the mental qualities of the
offspring; that parent which has the stronger nervous and
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 89
sexual organization controls the characters of the offspring ;
the female controls the characters because of her close asso-
ciation with the offspring; and so on, almost without number.
So far as is now known, the parents play an equal part in
their control of the characters of the offspring. This, of course,
is aside from the question of prepotency discussed above, and
in which case either parent is likely to dominate over the
other. In general, that parent possessed of the purer breeding
and whose characters are the most intensified and most stable,
will control the characters of the offspring, be it male or
female.
SYSTEMS OF BREEDING
The system of breeding to be employed will depend on
the purpose of the breeder. In the breeding of farm animals
the breeder has one of two objects in view, — the one herd im-
provement, the other breed improvement. These purposes are
separate and distinct. In herd improvement, the object is the
betterment of the individual herd. It is perhaps the cheapest
and most convenient of all forms of breeding and productive
of the most rapid results. In breed improvement, the object
is the betterment of the entire race. It is perhaps the most
expensive, and calls for much intelligence on the part of the
breeder as well as much patience and painstaking labor:
Grading consists in mating unimproved farm animals with
those more highly improved or with those that are purely
bred. The pure-bred may be either sire or dam, but for eco-
nomic reasons the sire is usually the pure-bred parent. This
mode of breeding can be used only in herd improvement, and is
the one to be recommended to the great mass of stockmen ; and
if it could be generally adopted and followed, it would add
millions to American agriculture. It is the safest for beginners
even though they intend to engage in the business of breeding
pure-bred animals, as it will bring out clearly the strong and
weak points of the breed, and after becoming familiar with the
90 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
work they may undertake the breeding of pure-bred animals
with much better prospects of success.
The great advantage of grading is that it is cheap, particu-
larly when accomplished with the male. For example, a
pure-bred bull, in a herd of twenty-five cows, will make half-
bloods of the entire crop of offspring, whereas if the grading
was attempted in the other way, it would require twenty-five
pure-bred cows and the calves would show no more improve-
ment. Furthermore, if the improvement were accomplished with
the cows, it would be in twenty-five lines, each with its shade
of difference, and not in one line as would be the case were the
grading done with the bull. This is a very important factor
when we consider the value of uniformity among all classes of
farm animals.
Crossing, as we have seen (p. 77), consists in mating two
distinct breeds or families, and is a powerful means of inducing
variability. Because of its strong tendency to produce varia-
tion, crossing is very seldom employed as a system of animal
breeding. Attention is directed to it in this connection because
it is the mode employed in breeding mules, the offspring of a
jack and mare. The reciprocal cross, or the stallion on the
jennet, gives an offspring called hinny. It is interesting to
note that the mule more nearly resembles the jack, having
long ears, large head, no hairs in mane and tail, and very
small feet, whereas the hinny resembles the stallion, having a
rather small head, rather short ears, hairs in mane and tail, and
large feet similar to the horse.
While we have mules and hinnies of both sexes, they are
sterile; that is, one cannot produce mules by mating a male
with a female mule, nor will the mule breed with either the jack
or stallion. The only way to produce a mule is to mate jack
and mare.
Line-breeding consists in mating animals representing a
single line of descent. This system of breeding is used either in
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL . 91
herd improvement or in breed improvement. Few of the many
breeds of farm animals, as well as few of the more noted strains
of the various breeds, have been formed without more or less
line-breeding. Experience has shown that it is not enough to
confine selection to the limits of the breed, for all breeds are
exceedingly variable, and for best results one must restrict his
selection to those lines that most nearly approach the object
sought.
Line-breeding combines animals very similar in their charac-
ter, narrows the pedigrees to few and closely related lines of
descent, intensifies characters both good and bad, and thus gives
stability to the strain or breed. It is a very strong factor in
securing uniformity, and increasing the prepotency among farm
animals.
No method is equal to that of line-breeding for the. improve-
ment of farm animals. It is conservative and safe. It is free
from many of the objections that attach to other methods.
There are, however, two factors that must not be lost sight of :
both good and bad characters
alike are intensified, and the
importance of the individual in
selection is great. Formerly
much was said against line-
breeding, but since the time of
Robert Bakewell it has been a
recognized factor in live-stock
improvement (p. 77).
The chief disadvantage of :
this system of breeding is that Hag ee oe
the breeder is likely to select Champlin Bros., Christon, Iowa.
by pedigree, and thus fail to note
the individuality of the animals he is mating. A line-bred pedi-
gree is good or bad according as the animals. composing it are
good or bad. The breeder who selects by pedigree alone with-
od
92 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
out regard for merit is likely to find his herd deteriorating in a
few generations, for bad characters, if they exist in the parent,
will be intensified by this method of breeding just as rapidly as
will desirable characters (p. 78).
In-breeding consists in mating animals closely related. It is
line-breeding carried to its limits, and consequently it intensifies
all the advantages and disadvantages of that system of breeding.
In-breeding has been used successfully in the improvement of
practically all of the present breeds of farm animals. The sys-
tem was first put into regular practice by Robert Bakewell,
and since that time has been employed more or less by all
successful breeders.
The objects of in-breeding are twofold: First, more quickly
to secure desirable characters in the offspring; and second,
to render these characters more stable that they may be uni-
formly transmitted. Thus a certain parent, for example, a sire,
is found to possess an unusual degree of excellence in some
particular which he transmits to the offspring. To retain the
excellency this offspring, if a female, when of the proper age is
mated with her own sire, and this product, if a female, is in turn
mated to the same male that was her sire as well as her grand-
sire. This method is resorted to for three and often four genera-
tions with the view of intensifying and perpetuating a desirable
character for which the sire is especially noted.
There are three forms of in-breeding: First, mating sire with
daughter, giving rise to an offspring containing three-fourths of
the blood lines of the sire. This method, if followed up, pro-
duces offspring with but one line of ancestry and eliminates the
characters of the dam. It is practiced when it is desired to in-
tensify the characters possessed by the sire. Second, mating son
with dam, which gives rise to offspring containing three-fourths
of the blood lines of the dam. This method is practiced when it
is desired to intensify the characters of the dam. Third, mating
brother with sister, a method which preserves the characters of
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 93
both sire and dam. It is inferior to either of the other two in
strengthening characters, and is not so safe because nothing is
known. of the breeding of either parent.
There are many advantages that follow this system of breed-
ing: it intensifies characters, gives ‘stability to the family,
increases the prepotency, and favors uniformity. In-breed-
ing results in the highest possible percentage of the desired blood
being retained in the offspring, and is therefore recognized as the
strongest of all breeding. It also gives rise to the simplest
form of pedigree. Since the infusion of new strains shatters
existing characters, no system equals in-breeding for perpetu-
ating characters, doubling up existing combinations, as well
as retaining all there is of good in the exceptional individ-
ual. Capable of producing the great improvement that it
is, in-breeding is not without its disadvantages. It does not
respect characters; it does not separate the good from the bad,
but intensifies both good and bad alike. In-breeding, if per-
sisted in, results in loss of fertility as well as vigor, which may
quickly lead to race extinction. These are two most common
defects resulting from this method of breeding, and they come
about naturally. Few animals are regular breeders, and a still
fewer number are both vigorous and regular breeders. Hence,
when such animals are in-bred, the tendency is. still further to
lower both the vitality and the fertility. When practicing
this method, therefore, too much cannot be made of selecting
for high fertility and much vigor.
There are two situations under which it may be desirable to
practice in-breeding. One is in grading, where, if we have a
proved sire, one that is known to get excellent offspring, it may
be entirely permissible to mate him with his own daughters
rather than to procure a new sire, in which the breeding power
is not known. Again, such an exchange of sires as would be
necessary to prevent in-breeding often calls for a considerable
outlay of time and money.
94 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The other condition under which in-breeding is permissible
is when one finds himself in possession of a very limited su-
perior blood and is at a loss to know how to retain it. If he
breeds out, the desirable characters will be obliterated. In this
case, the only way he can retain the desirable characters is to
Fig. 41. —-Tue Morean Srauion, ‘GENERAL GATES,”’ AT THE HEAD OF THE
U. S. GovERNMENT Stup at MippLesory, Vt.
The Morgan family of trotting horses originated in Vermont. These horses
can scarcely be classed as a breed, but rather a family of the American Trotter.
They are noted for their activity and endurance, but are considered by many
as undersize. The average weight is from 900 to 1000 pounds, and the height
14 to 15 hands. Bay with dark points is the preferred color.
breed in. Often the risk is great, but it is the only way
the desired blood can be retained. In such case it is best to
strike out boldly and know the worst at once. Many breeders
have found themselves in just such position and by in-breeding
have not only retained the good characters but have increased
THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS, IN GENERAL 95
and intensified them by in-breeding, and in a few generations
have succeeded in building up the best herds in the breed.
Breeding from the best. — The advisability of breeding from
the best depends on the situation. When one is grading, it is
advisable to procure the very best obtainable. On the other
hand, when one is building up a pure herd, it is equally import-
ant to give due regard to the strain with which one is working.
That is to say, in actual practice the breeder who breeds from
the best without regard for blood lines is likely to bring to-
gether a confused herd, out of which nothing of note can be
established. Crossing family lines brings about much the same
condition as crossing the breeds, only on a more limited scale.
From this it must be apparent that if one is to secure the best
results from any system of breed’ng whatsoever, he must have
due regard for ancestral lines. He must keep the strains pure,
intensify the desirable characters, thus increasing prepotency
and securing uniformity. If the purpose is herd improvement,
grading is practicable, as it is a cheap, quick, and conserva-
tive method, and if persisted in for a few generations, develops
animals about equal to pure breds for production. If the pur-
pose is breed improvement, then line-breeding or even in-
breeding will be found to be most effective, for by these
methods the ancestral lines can be kept true.
CHAPTER V
THE BREEDING OF HORSES AND MULES
WHILE we have no data available in the United States on the
number of horses and mules consumed, or used up in a year,
yet a very conservative estimate would be approximately two
million, this to include export animals as well as those consumed
at home. These horses must be replaced as consumed, or there
will be a horse famine. There are approximately ten million
mares in the United States, of which we will assume one-half,
or five million, are of breeding age. If we are to raise these
two million colts, both horse and mule, it means that at least
one-half, or 50 per cent, of these mares should be bred each
year.
It must be remembered that the horses that supply this
demand are produced on the farms. Their production is the
work of the general farmer, who is primarily a grain raiser, a
dairyman, or whose main business is general farming, and who
raises horses because he is so situated as to be able to propa-
gate them with but little inconvenience to his main work.
Such farms usually possess three advantages: they grow large
amounts of cheap food; they contain abundant range for the
proper exercise of growing animals; and there is considerable
team work to be done. On such farms horses can be grown
with little extra labor and at a good profit.
PLAN OF BREEDING
A clearly defined plan of procedure should be thought out
before the farmer makes the attempt to breed horses. To do
96
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 97
this a good knowledge of horses and horse-breeding should be
secured. Breeding establishments and horse-producing farms
should be visited. One should familiarize himself with the
methods of successful horse-breeders, should note the condi-
tions that lead to success and those that cause failure. The
Fic. 42.—‘Caroxtina.” The American Saddler owned by John B. Castle-
man, Louisville, Ky.
The American saddle horse is a native of the United States, principally the
states of Kentucky, Virginia, and Missouri. This breed is noted for its easy
gaits, endurance, and intelligence. The weight varies from 900 to 1200 pounds
and the height from 154 to 16 hands. Saddlers are of two classes: (1) walk-
trot-canter horse; (2) the five-gaited horse; walk, trot, canter, rack, and run-
ning walk or fox trot or slow pace.
intending horse-breeder should take account of his likes and
dislikes. He may prefer the light active horse to the heavy
phlegmatic drafter. The horse-producer should study his con-
ditions. Some conditions will be favorable to the production
of one class, some to another. It should be kept clearly in
H
98 MANUAL OF FARM' ANIMATS
mind, whatever the type or class chosen, whether it is light or
heavy, or for speed or draft, that none but superior horses will
sell at remunerative prices. There will always be an over-
production of common horses, which will be the first to be
affected by oversupply and other business depressions, and the
last to be revived. The market should also be studied. In
some sections the demand will be for a certain class and in other
sections another class will be in most demand.
Coédperative breeding. — From observations made in localities
where horses are bred in a commercial way, it would seem ad-
visable to breed on the codperative plan. It is apparent that
the formation of horse-breeding associations in townships and
counties would do much to advance the progress of the industry.
Such associations should be formed of breeders who possess the
same class or breed of mares. It would be the work of such
an association to protect the interests of its members, provide
suitable stallions each year for use on the mares owned by the
members, advertise stock, attract buyers, hold sales, make
exhibits at the county, district, and state fairs, hold meetings
for discussion of horse-breeding matters, and educate the far-
mers of the locality to better methods of breeding, feeding, and
developing marketable horses.
Securing stallions. —'The fact that mares are often bred to
unsuitable stallions is, in many instances, due more to the dif_i-
culty of finding the right horse close at hand than to indiffer-
ence or carelessness on the part of the breeder. A fitting start
may be made in grading up in a certain district, and in a few
years no horse of the same blood is to be found to continue the
good work in the right direction. The consequence is that a
horse of different breed, unsuitable in many respects, is used
until a more suitable sire can be secured, or happens to enter
the district.
It often occurs that a stallion is unexpectedly thrust on a
district by a salesman of some importing firm. A company is
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 99
formed for the purchase of the horse, and the price is usually
high, as it must contain many and sometimes questionable ex- *
penses. The “company plan” of purchasing a stallion is
therefore objectionable. It is much better for the farmers
interested in horse-breeding to get together and choose one of
their own members and send him to the importing stable or
horse-breeding firm to purchase the stallion. He will have an
opportunity to choose and will get one much cheaper.
Undoubtedly, any reputable breeder or importer of horses
would be glad to send into any district the horse desired by
a company of farm-breeders and in close accord with their re-
quirements as regards pedigree, character, quality, size, and
price. It is equally likely that the same firm would be willing,
for a certain consideration in price, to replace the stallion when
he could no longer be used in that particular district. If such
a plan were followed persistently, each district so acting would
secure much better results than at present.
SELECTING BREEDING STOCK
In the selection of breeding stock, we must keep in mind the
principle of heredity that “like produces like.” This applies
to the brood mare as well as to the stallion. Bad qualities in
the mare are as likely to appear in the colt as are bad qualities
possessed by the stallion. The influence of the mare in the trans-
mission of qualities to the foal is often very much underestimated,
and frequently ignored entirely by horse-breeders. This can-
not be other'than a serious mistake, and the farmer who
keeps worthless mares for breeding simply because he can-
not sell them, will not be able to compete with his neighbor
who keeps only the best brood mares, even though they both
patronize the same stallion. The mare has as much influence
on the colt as has the stallion. Once in a while we may get
a very fine colt from an inferior mare, but such is very rarely
100 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the case, and no man can afford to breed horses for this excep-
tional case.
It is a serious but common error in breeding horses to suppose
that the bad points in one animal can be fully offset or overcome
by the good points in the mate. The statement that the stallion
controls the outward characters and the mare the internal
characters has led many breeders to think that the offspring
would resemble the paternal parent irrespective of the mother.
Such is not the case. The foundation of successful horse-breed-
ing is to mate two animals each of which is as nearly perfect as
possible.
The breed and type.— Choose the breed which best suits the
conditions, the markets, and the tastes of the breeders. There
isno best breed or type for all conditions. Light horses naturally
belong on land devoted to grass, to dairy industry, and to market-
gardening, where but little plowing and other heavy horse work
is required, and the necessity of reaching the market, the station,
or the creamery requires quick-moving horses.
On farms devoted to fruit-growing and the like, where the
horse work is somewhat heavier than on the dairy farm, the
coach horse may be used. Coach horses are well adapted to
fruit farms with one exception — they are rather too tall to be
used to best advantage in tilling under trees in the orchards.
On grain farms, where there is much plowing and the work to
be done is hard, heavy horses are needed. On general farms
the draft horse finds his true place. Draft horses can be reared
with less risk than the lighter and more active types, such as
the roadster and the coachers. They do not require so much
training, and can be put to light work younger. The draft horse
is in great demand for city traffic. Again, the roadster and the
coacher require much training before they can be marketed, if
good values are to be secured. This training requires skill,
time, and money, which should be taken into account. A well-
bred and well-trained coach or driving team will bring a good
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 101
price, but the skill, time, and money required to breed and train
them is too great for the general farmer.
Uniformity. — Each community should produce horses uni-
form in type. As it is now, each district produces a number
of types. For this reason, buyers in search of a particular type
or breed of horse do not know where to find it, and buy, here and
Fic. 43. —Grovur or Percueron Mares. Imported and owned by J. Crouch
& Son, Lafayette, Ind.
there throughout a wide territory and at a great outlay for
traveling expenses, individual horses of the right type, until
the lot Has been gathered together. When each farmer in a
district is breeding according to his individual ideas, he has to
’ find a separate and individual market or buyer for his product,
and the price paid is consequently small. Such districts may
sell large numbers of horses annually, but they are of non-
descript type and character. These horses neither make a name
for the district as a horse-breeding center nor attract buyers
willing to pay appreciative prices. The individual farmer will do
better to cast in his lot with the majority of his neighbors, and
breed the same type as they are breeding, even though this type
102 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
may not be the one that suits his fancy best or even the one that
is best suited to the district.
Under the system suggested, the buyer of any particular type
or breed should be able to go to a district noted for the produc-
tion of the class of animal required and there find it in sufficient
numbers, uniform in type and quality, to meet all needs. Could
this be done, buyers would save much time, and expense.and
would be ready and willing to pay better prices for the full supply
of horses thus easily found.
Soundness. — It is of great importance that the stallion should
be free from all forms of unsoundness or disease that are heredi-
tary, transmissible, or communicable to the offspring. It is
equally important that the mares bred ta him should be sound
in the same way, for not until both mare and stallion used for
breeding purposes are free from unsoundness can we hope to
raise the excellence of our horses to the degree possible as the
result of intelligent breeding and development.
Many imported and home-bred stallions are unsound and
transmit to their progeny the predisposition to like unsoundness.
This is equally true of mares used for breeding purposes, as many
breeders have fallen into the grievous way of considering any
broken-down, halt, maimed, blind, or otherwise unsound mare
fit for breeding purposes when no longer able to work.
THE STALLION
The stallion is of prime importance in horse-breeding. We
have already seen that the male is concerned with many more
individual offspring in a given season than the female and that
his influence is much more extensive because of the increased
number he influences. To secure the improvement in the horses
of a given community through the females would require the
use of fifty or more superior mares to accomplish the same result
as migit be secured by the use of a single stallion, and even then
there would be less uniformity in the progeny. This has no
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 103
reference to the relative influence of the two parents over the
offspring, but is simply because the stallion controls one-half
the characters in the entire crop, whereas the mare controls but
one. Often one has no choice of stallions when mating the mares
because there is but one male in the vicinity, and this no doubt
is responsible for much of the mixed breeding among our horse
stock. On the other hand, usually there are several stallions
available, and one must choose among them. While there are
many things to be taken into account, the following are among
the most important: individuality, type, soundness, and
breeding.
THE MARE
The most fertile period in the mare’s life is usually at four to
twelve years of age. In exceptional cases, this period may be
extended both ways. Just how young it is safe to breed fillies
or young mares is a question concerning which there is great
difference of opinion. In some cases it is perfectly safe to
breed a two-year-old filly, and in many cases it is far from safe
and positively detrimental to both the young mare and her
offspring.
The advisability of breeding a two-year-old filly depends on
at least three important factors: First, the breed. Horses
of draft breeding mature much earlier than the lighter and
more active breeds, so that a draft filly at two years old is
often as forward as a trotting or running filly at three years
of age. Second, the individual animal. There is consider-
able difference in the way mares mature. Usually a smoothly
turned, neat, and well-finished filly makes its growth earlier
than a rougher, more vigorous individual. Again, the feed
and care have much to do with the early maturity of the filly.
One that is kept growing continuously will mature earlier than
one imperfectly cared for and which receives a set back each
winter. Third, the object sought. Is the question to improve
104 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the strain of horses with which one is breeding, or only to
market the greatest possible number of animals? If the ob-
ject is to improve the strain, one should never attempt to breed
a two-year-old filly.
The practice in certain draft-horse producing countries, Great
Britain for example, is to breed the draft fillies the spring they
are two years old and allow them no work whatever that season.
After weaning their foals, they are taken as three-year-olds and
put to work, and not bred again until they are four years old.
This system is worthy of adoption when one wishes to know
the breeding qualities of his mare as early as possible; otherwise
there is no advantage, as one will secure just as many colts if he
waits till the mare is three years old and then breeds her.
When draft horses are wanted only for marketing, there is
no reason why fillies cannot be bred at two years of age, provided
they are mature, have been well grown, and their owner is
willing to feed and care for them properly during their pregnancy.
Nor is there any reason why they should not be bred each year
thereafter. They should not, however, be put to work till over
three years of age.
At about twelve years, the productive powers of some draft
mares will begin to wanc, although many of them are reliable
breeders to about fifteen years, especially if they have been bred
continuously from their maturity. Above this age, it is rarely
profitable to keep them for breeding. Perhaps it is best to
dispose of draft brood mares at ten or twelve years old unless
they are exceptionally good breeders, in which case they should
be kept as long as they will breed.
Season of the year to breed. — The natural time for foals to
arrive is in the spring, and under ordinary conditions, especially
on breeding farms, this is customary. However, on most farms
the mare must do the season’s work in addition to raising the colt.
This often necessitates breeding the mares so as to have the
colts arrive in the fall. With good stables, abundance of food,
105
THE BREEDING OF HORSES
‘aBaT[OH [einyNousy sesueyy oy} Aq poeuMg
*"SLIOD UAH JO HOO ANY ,,SSHONIUT,, UV NOMAHOUAY — FH “OLT
106 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and the necessary help, there is no reason why mares should not
be made to foal in the fall if it is more convenient to have them
do so. In fact, if one is forced to choose between a spring foal
with no chance properly to favor the mare and a fall foal which
arrives and is suckled while the mare is laid by, the latter would
be more desirable. During winter, however, both mare and
foal will require more attention than if bred to foal in the spring.
Fic. 45.— A Cross-Brep CoacH AND AMERICAN TroTrTiInc Horse. A type
used by the New York police.
By fall foaling, the youngsters can be given a good start before
they are set back by the short pastures and flies of midsummer.
The mare is not so likely to breed in the fall and winter as in
the spring. She is often thin in flesh after the summer’s work.
But by increasing the food, especially the grain rations, by
regular and moderate exercise, and by blanketing, the desired
results can often be brought about. The bowels should be
kept free from constipation by feeding moderate amounts of
succulent foods.
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 107
Breeders of race and show horses take every advantage of the
age limit, and therefore favor early foaling. There are also un-
questionable benefits to be derived from the life in the open, and
the new grass, to commend springtime for foaling, but the
prejudice against fall colts is not altogether warranted, and cir-
cumstances may be such as to make it most advantageous.
According to the table (p. 108), a mare bred on January 1
should foal on December 6; one bred on March 27 should foal
on March 1 the following year.
When mares should be tried. — There is great diversity of
opinion as to when and how often a mare should be tried after
she has been served by the stallion. It can be accepted as a
general rule that if the mare is perfectly normal and healthy,
she will conceive. If she is not normal or is unhealthy, she
either will not conceive at all or only occasionally at best, and
even then there is likely to be difficulty. We should see to it
that her organs are perfectly normal and that she is in good
health. We should not change her diet or her mode of life so
suddenly as to upset her general health.
Some mares are shy breeders. If a mare is unwilling and it
is desired to breed her, she can occasionally be brought about
by hobbling her securely and then breeding her. Then she
will behave more or less peaceably for eighteen to twenty-one
days, when she may be bred again. There are other mares, and
they are numerous, that will freely be served when they are in
foal, in some cases almost up to the time of foaling.
A mare will almost invariably breed on the ninth day, or
thereabouts, after foaling, and if she is healthy and has received
no injuries in giving birth, it is the practice to breed her at this
time. Just when mares should be returned to see whether
they have conceived is a much discussed question. Mares differ
greatly in the recurrence of their periods. It is best for each
breeder to study the individual differences among his mares.
The common practice is to return them fourteen to eighteen
108
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Table showing period of gestation — Mares 340 days
Date of service on the left.
Date of foaling on the right
CoOIyanmwne| Jan
oR wre JAN
00 “1 ors co ny et | Fes.
=
Seo Kou A ak wwe | Mar
pany
pan
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Om om oo toe | APR
10
ll
12
13
14
15
16
17):
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
onragnmwwe | Mar
ooo on | APR.
May
ere
Bc wna ae wre | Joe
12
op Whe
CHINES ow owe | Jury
CONS ow ww HE | Ave.
owe | Jour
ob wwe AUG.
=
So Mook we | SePr
an
i
Bee ee
oor Wd
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
OMNA ow wy | Ocr
© 0 ~1H on | SEPT.
OMNIS TB wWhy eH | Nov..
po tom Nov.
NPePrPrPerpeyeepe
SSHUSER BNE SOMNSG UR wNwE| DEC
NNN
WN re
nN
ns
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
© ONG a | Nov.
10
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 109
days after the first service, and to return them each week there-
after for at least one month.
Barrenness in mares. — It often happens that mares are
served normally, yet fail to conceive. Some of the causes of this
difficulty are readily
understood and eas-
ily prevented, while
others are not so
well known and are
perhaps beyond the
control of breeders.
Mares that are not
served till late in
life are often diffi-
cult to impregnate
at the first time.
This is often noticed .
in mares that have
spent a good part of
a lifetime at hard
work. In such cases
it is due perhaps to
the long inactivity
of the generative organs. An excess of rich and stimulating foods
is a common cause of non-breeding; and the dangers attend-
ing parturition are more than trebled in the case of fat animals.
Milk-fever never occurs in mares that are kept actually at work
and are in only moderate flesh at the time of foaling. On the
other hand, barrenness may be due to poor feeding and hard
work, the system being weakened by the lack of sufficient
nutrition. Undue sexual excitement at the most active stage
of heat is often responsible for the mare not conceiving. In
addition to these, there is a long line of causes of barrenness in
mares over which the breeder has little or no control, such as
Fic. 46.— Aras Horse usep as A Poo Pony.
110 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
derangement of the female organs, diseased ovaries, tumors, and
the like.
Abortion in mares. — Abortion is the expulsion of the fetus
at any period from the date of impregnation until the foal can
survive out of the womb. It is produced by any cause operating
to disconnect the union of the fetal membrane from the uterus.
The mare may abort by reason of almost any cause that very
generally disturbs her system, as the influence of too stimulating
diet or the reverse, wet seasons, a previous miscarriage, and
all circumstances opposed to efficient nutrition and respiration.
The more direct mechanical causes are falls, blows, violent
exertion, severe illness, large draughts of cold water or eating
iced grass, ergot of rye, the smut of corn or other grain, and
drinking filthy stagnant water; also, traveling on heavy muddy
roads, soft plowed ground, or jumping over fences, ditches, and
the like.
The prevention of abortion is the avoidance of all causes which
may have a tendency to produce it. When abortion has once
occurred, the greatest care in subsequent management is neces-
sary. The breeder must avoid all causes of constipation,
diarrhea, indigestion, and the like. When all measures fail and
miscarriage results, all that can be done is to assist in the removal
of the fetus and its membranes as in ordinary parturitions.
The mare should have extra care at this time. She should have
a roomy, well-lighted stall, with plenty of air and easily digested
food. The mare should not be served again for a month or
longer, and in no case till after all discharges from the vulva
have ceased.
Parturition time. — The average period of gestation in the
mare is popularly placed at eleven months, more accurately
perhaps three hundred and forty days, but it may vary greatly.
(See page 108.) Because of the uncertainty of the period, the mare
should be closely watched from the tenth month till parturition.
There are certain signs of the near approach of parturition that
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 111
rarely fail. The udder often becomes greatly distended some
time before foaling, but the teats seldom fill out full and plump
to the end more than two or three days before the foal is born.
About one week or ten days before foaling, there is a marked
shrinking or falling away of the muscular parts at the top of the
buttocks back of the hips. Another sign is the appearance of
the wax on the ends of the teats. This generally appears not
earlier than three days before the foal comes. In some cases,
however, the foal may be born without any of these signs.
Fig. 47.—A Farm Group or Frenco Drarr Horsss. This breed was
developed in France and is similar to the Percheron.
About the three hundred and thirtieth day, or when the mare
begins to show signs, the work should be much lightened and
the grain ration reduced, although for best results the mare
should be kept at light work up to the day of foaling. Bran
mash will prove very beneficial now, as it will keep the bowels
in good condition and allay any tendency to feverishness. She
should have a roomy, well-lighted, and ventilated box stall,
thoroughly clean and freshly bedded.
If birth is easy and normal, let both mare and foal alone.
They will come through the ordeal all right. It may be neces-
sary that a caretaker be near by at night to render assistance if
112 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
need be, but the mare must not know of his presence. Most_
mares will not give birth to their young in the presence of per-
sons if they can help it.
If the mare shows after a reasonable time that she cannot de-
liver the foal, or if examination discloses that there is an ab-
normal presentation (normally the fore feet appear first, then
the nose), a veterinarian should be summoned at once. Do
not wait too long, for her strength rapidly fails. Difficult par-
turition among horses is much more likely to result fatally
to the offspring than among cattle, sheep, or swine.
The mare and the young foal. — After foaling, if all is normal,
the mare will usually get up and tend to her foal. After she is
on her feet, offer her a drink of gruel made from a pound of fine
oat meal in half a bucket of water from which the chill has been
taken. While the mare should be lightly worked up to the day
of foaling, it is essential that she have a few days’ rest after foal-
ing; how long will depend on the condition of the mare and
foal, and the financial circumstances of the breeder. Strong
mares that have come through satisfactorily will be able to
do light work in three or four days if need be, whereas others
will need at least two weeks to recover from the shock.
Two things require attention at this time so far as the mare
is concerned: she must be properly nourished, not fed too
much or too little and with the right sort of food; if able,
she must have light exercise or the foal will suffer.
The foods given the brood mare when nursing her foal should
be such as have a tendency to produce milk. Corn and timothy
hay fed alone are not good milk-producing foods. Foods rich
in protein and ash, such as oats, bran, clover, and alfalfa hay,
are preferred, and they could be improved by the addition
of a succulent food such as carrots. Many mares are poor
milk-producers at best, and they must be encouraged. Plenty
of good fresh grass is one of the best aids to healthy and abun-
dant nutrition for both mare and foal.
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 113
One should keep close watch on the mare’s udder and the
condition of the colt’s bowels. If the colt is not taking all the
milk, the udder will be greatly distended, become sore, and
possibly cake, when there will be difficulty with both mare and
foal. Itis then necessary to milk the mare. If the bowels of
the colt are loose and he is scouring, it may be due to the fact
that he is getting too much milk. In that case, the mare
should be partly milked by hand.
THE FOAL
It is essential that the new-born foal get the first milk from
thedam. This fore-milk looks thick and yellow and is a natural
purgative for the removal of the material that has accumulated
in the foal’s digestive tract during the last few days of its de-
velopment. Its prompt removal is essential to the life of the
colt. Sometimes this fore-milk, or colostrum, is drawn off as
unfit for the colt, but such practice is a common cause of death
to the foal two or three days after birth.
The young foal that makes its appearance normally and is
bright and active needs only to be let alone as long as both mare
and foal are doing well. The infant foal will be better for it.
By giving proper attention to the food and exercise of the mare,
the foal may be kept thriving and in the pink of condition with-
out any special care or attention. Not all foals, however, are
so fortunate. Occasionally one loses its life through want of
attention at the time of birth. Occasionally foals are troubled
with digestive disorders that must be attended to and remedied
at once before they prove fatal. Again, they are sometimes
troubled with an infectious navel disease which may be due to
unsanitary conditions at the time of foaling.
It sometimes happens that the new-born foal cannot breathe
— does not establish the function of respiration. In this case,
steps must be taken quickly to establish respiration by blowing
violently up the muzzle and into the mouth, and by briskly
I
114 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
rubbing the body. If breathing is slow, a few tablespoonfuls
of brandy and water, given after the first few respirations, will
be of material service in invigorating the low vital process.
As soon as the mare has recovered from the shock of giving
birth, she should be allowed to tend the foal, for it will be phys-
Fic. 48.— Hackney CoacH Mare, anp Foat THREE WeExs OLp. Owned
by A. R. Gillis, Syracuse, N.Y.
ically benefited thereby. If she refuses to dry and caress it,
a little flour sprinkled over the back of the foal will often attract
her to it. Should she still refuse, the foal must be dried with a
soft flannel, aided to find the teat, and assisted to obtain its
first nourishment.
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 115
Ills of the young foal. Constipation. — Notwithstanding the
purgative effects of the colostrum or first flow of milk, the
young foal frequently suffers from constipation, especially if
the mare has not been in good health during the latter periods
of pregnancy. Then again, the dam may have something
wrong with her first milk, or the young foal through weakness
may not get a good draft. Whatever the cause, if the digestive
tract has not been cleaned of its contents within twenty-four
hours and the foal presents a droopy, listless appearance, eyes
not bright, ears lopped over, something must be done to stimu-
late the action of the bowels. The bowels will ordinarily be
stimulated actively by administering two ounces of olive oil
or castor oil and an injection of warm water into the bowels.
The water should be at blood heat and have added to it a little
glycerine — a teaspoonful of glycerine and enough warm water
to make two or three ounces, not more. Never try to fill the
little foal with copious douches of soap-suds, as is often done.
Plain cold water is better than soap-suds. Only a very little
is needed. Inject gently into the rectum with a common two-
ounce hard rubber syringe, taking care not to rupture the tender
membrane. This will lubricate the passage and induce the foal
to endeavor to pass the fecal matter, which is a yellowish, rather
hard, waxy substance. If given as directed, the injection can
do no harm, and it may be repeated every hour. In five
hours, relief will usually have been gained and the appearance
of the youngster will have changed greatly for the better.
Diarrhea or scours. — This disease is rather prevalent among
suckling animals, and is often fatal. Although less subject to
it than calves, foals often die from diarrhea within a short
time after birth. The causes are not certainly known. It is
ordinarily attributed to changes of an unknown character in the
composition of the milk. Two facts, however, have been proved:
First, that the causes of scours are many and varied; second,
that their potency is increased by unclean surroundings, espe-
116 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
cially unwholesome stables. Apparent causes are the non:
removal of the fecal matter; also anything that very materially
affects the health or condition of the mare, such as becoming
fretful when kept away from the colt for a time soon after partu-
rition. The mare becomes feverish, the quality of her milk
materially altered, and the foal coming to her hungry, gorges
itself with this changed milk which induces indigestion and
diarrhea. Very rich foods may stimulate the flow to such an
extent that if the foal is permitted to take it all, digestive dis-
orders and diarrhea will result. The same often happens in
early spring when the mare is pasturing on a rank growth of
succulent grass. Confinement in close buildings is objectionable
to mare and foal alike. In both it induces a weakened condition,
and leaves the system an easy prey to disease. A cold damp
bed, exposure to cold rain storms, and the like are to be avoided.
A passing shower may do no harm, even if cold, but a prolonged
exposure to rain with a low temperature is hard on a new-born
foal and often leads to disorders of the digestive organs and fatal
diarrhea.
The best treatment is to avoid conditions likely to cause such
disorders. If the dam is properly fed and exercised, there is
very little danger. One should attend the foal at the first
appearance of digestive disorders and remove the cause; even
then it may be too late. If it is due to an oversupply of rich
milk, the dam should be milked in part by hand. One should
be cautioned against giving an astringent with a view to cutting
off the discharge. The best policy in all such cases is to expel
the disturber with a laxative, such as two ounces of castor oil,
and later when the irritant has been expelled, to check the dis-
charge by a weak solution of gum arabic, of slippery elm, or by
well-boiled linseed tea or starch, or the like. But even this road
is beset by many a difficulty.
Navel infection.—- Another disease common to young foals
is the so-called navel infection, or joint disease. It should be
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 117
ry
understood that this disease is due to filth germs that gain access
to the body of the foal by way of the open umbilical vein of the
navel at birth. When these germs enter, they set up irritation
and inflammation; pus forms and is absorbed into the circula-
tion from the navel abscess, and other abscesses are formed
in all parts of the body, notably in the joints. The foal is
seen to have a swollen joint and one is likely to think the mare
caused the injury ; but soon other joints will be affected, and it
may extend to the throat and poll. It is comparatively rare
that an infected colt can be saved after the disease has reached
the pus-forming stage.
Fic. 49.—Bressary or Pirrsrorp. ABERDEEN OF PitTsrorD. Unbeaten
Shetland team of stallions.
The Shetland Pony, a native of the Shetland Islands, is the smallest breed of
domesticated ponies. In height they range from 36 to 44 inches. They
are built like miniature draft horses, being thick-set and strong, and
so very docile as to require hardly any training. These ponies are com-
mon in the United States, where they are used for children to drive.
It has been proved that simple hygienic measures will prevent
the disease. The stall in which the mare foals should have
every bit of old bedding, litter, and dirt removed, and the young
foal should be born only on clean fresh bedding. Perhaps it
would be safer to wash the stump of the umbilical cord, which
118 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
should never be cut but allowed to break of its own accord, with
a saturated solution of boracic acid and then dust it with boracic
acid powder.
Feeding the young foal. — It often happens that the milk of
the mare is insufficient to promote healthy, vigorous growth in
the foal, and occasionally it becomes necessary to raise a foal
entirely independent of the dam. In such cases the best addi-
tion or substitute for the milk of the mare is that of the cow.
The milk of the mare has more sugar and less fat than the milk
of the cow. One should get milk from as fresh a cow as possible,
and the poorer in fat the better, as mare’s milk will average only
about 1.2 per cent fat, while the milk of most cows runs above
3 per cent. Do not use Jersey milk for colts, as it is too rich in
fat.
A little patient effort will soon teach the colt to drink milk
readily, but one must be careful not to give it too much at first.
A half pint is enough for a foal two or three days old, but the
ration should be repeated often. If it is necessary to feed the
foal cow’s milk from the beginning, the milk should be modified.
To a dessert-spoonful of white granulated sugar add enough
warm water to dissolveit. Then add three tablespoonfuls of lime
water and enough milk to make a pint. Warm the mixture to
blood heat. Let the foal have a half teacupful every hour at
first. This takes time, but must be done. If the colt scours,
give a dose of two ounces of castor oil and discontinue the feed
for two hours. As the colt grows older, the amount of food
should be increased and the frequency of feeding decreased,
first to twelve, then to nine, six, and lastly four times a day.
The purpose is to give the foal all it will drink, and to feed so
often that it will not require much at a time.
Gruels, made by boiling beans or peas and removing the skins
by pressing the pulp through a sieve, or oil meal and shorts
made into a jelly by boiling, are excellent for the motherless
colt.
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 119
As soon as the foal is old enough, it should be encouraged to
nibble at grain, preferably ground oats. It will begin to munch
in the grain and hay at three or four weeks of age, and should be
encouraged to eat. It will eat only a very little at first. If it
is necessary that the foal have milk after it is two months old,
skimmed milk ‘should be substituted for fresh cow’s milk.
Never feed a colt sour milk. Never feed milk from unclean
vessels. Should there be any trouble from constipation, it
will be well to add about one-half pint of oil meal per day to the
ration. Oil meal can be fed with profit to growing colts, as it
furnishes a large proportion of muscle-forming and bone-form-
ing food. The effect of such a ration — sweet skimmed milk,
ground oats, and oil meal — on the growth and development
of a foal is remarkable, and in all cases when the foal is likely
to enter winter in low flesh such a ration cannot be too highly
recommended.
Many breeders advise leaving the colt in the stable while the
mare is at work; others allow the colt to follow the mare into
the field. Much depends on the kind of work that is to be done.
Never let a colt drink from a warm mare ; allow her to cool off
and perhaps draw some of the milk by hand, when she may be
turned into the stall with the foal with perfect safety to both
mare and foal.
Weaning the foal. — Weaning is more a question of prepara-
tion than of the absolute removal of the foal from the dam; and
the simplicity of the weaning process depends on the thorough-
ness of the preparation. If the foal has been accustomed to
grain as suggested, if it has been permitted to take increasingly
more as it grew, then the process will not be difficult, for as the
ration increases in amount of grain it will decrease in the amount
of milk consumed. When the time arrives for complete separa-
tion, there will be very little if any set hack or disturbance to
either foal ordam. On the other hand, if the foal must learn to
eat after being deprived of its accustomed source of supply, it
120 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
will require time to get used to the new condition, and the
mare will demand special care because of the removal of
the colt before her milk supply has been diminished to any
extent.
Foals are usually weaned at four to six months of age, depend-
ing on conditions. Ifthe mare was bred soon after foaling and
conceived, it is best to wean the foal early, so that the mare will
have time to recuperate and nourish the fetus. If for any
reason mare and foal are not doing well, it is perhaps best to
wean comparatively early. If, on the other hand, the mare has
a full flow of milk and her services are not needed, there is no
reason for weaning the foal under six months of age. When
dam and foal are separated, it is better for both that the separa-
tion be complete. If, after both have hecome reconciled to the
separation, they are permitted to see, hear, or smell each other
again, all that has been gained is lost, and it will be necessary
to begin over again. Care should also be taken to see that
the new quarters where the weanlings are confined are so con-
structed and arranged that they cannot injure themselves
while fretting over the separation.
At this time the food and the udder of the mare require extra
attention. Work the mare right along if she has been at work,
but reduce her grain ration till she is dried off. When the udder
becomes so full as to cause her uneasiness, part of the milk
should be drawn, but she should not be milked dry. If the milk
is all withdrawn each time, it will take longer to dry her.
Skimmed milk may still be given to the colt, especially if it
is not in good condition to enter the winter. Clean, sound oats
well ground constitute the best of all grains for the weanling.
As cold weather approaches, one-fourth in weight of corn meal
may be added, as it helps to produce fat and keeps up the animal
heat. If to this a little oil meal, say a half pint a day, is added,
the weanling will make good gains in spite of the cold weather
and the fact that it has just been separated from its mother.
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 121
Do not be afraid of feeding too liberally. Many colts are per-
manently injured the first six months after weaning by too
scanty supply of food.
BREEDING JACKS, JENNETS, AND MULES
Because of the increasing importance of the mule, it seems
desirable to point out some of the peculiarities connected with
‘its breeding. In general, the same suggestions apply to horses,
jacks, jennets, and mules, yet there are a few characteristic
differences.
Jacks and jennets.— In selecting breeding stock, choose those
with long, thin, bony head and long, well-tapering ears, sitting
gracefully on the head, and with large, flat, clean limbs, big feet
deeply cupped. As to color, it should be a good black with dis-
tinctly light points. Breadth in hips and pelvis is very essential,
particularlyin jennet. Many jennets areso deficient or narrow in
the pelvis that they have great difficulty in giving birth to their
offspring. In size they should be large and well proportioned.
The action should be snappy and straight: away. Perhaps the
most important characters are color, size, action, and boniness.
The jennet carries her foal somewhat longer than the mare,
perhaps well up to twelve months. At foaling time the jennet
must be closely watched. This is essential. When the colt is
born, it sometimes has the membrane over its head and nostrils;
if this is not torn and removed, it will smother the young foal.
Usually, the navel cord is tough and does not give way or
break. If it is pulsating after the colt is born, it should be tied
with a silk or flax thread and then cut three or four inches from
the navel. Never cut the navel before tieing. Jack colts are
liable to have troukle with the navel; hence the importance of
being on hand when the colt is foaled. Again, foaling jennets are
often troubled with sore, tender, and inflamed udders, due to
the large amount of milk they contain. When such is the case,
they will not allow the colt to suck, but kick and bite it, and
"AM ‘WOYBUIXeT ‘YOoD “7 *°O Aq pouMO ,,,dOOM IVEENAD,, MOVE NOIANVHD — ‘0G ‘SIT
“SE Se a =~ = = ae
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 123
it will starve if not looked after properly. The jennet must
be carefully milked and the udder bathed in warm salt water to
relieve the inflammation.
Some jennets give great quantities of milk. It is a good plan
not to give much stimulating food before she is due to foal, and
not have her too fat. Therefore, the food should be reduced
for a short time just before and after foaling.
Fic. 51.—A Two-year-oLp CatTsatonran Jack. Owned by C. F. Cook,
Lexington, Ky.
When it is desired to re-breed mares, we have stated that they
should be mated about the seventh or ninth day after foaling,
for should they fail to breed then, they are likely not to come
in again while nursing the colt. On the other hand jennets
breed much later, about the twelfth to fourteenth day, and if
‘they fail to breed then, are not likely to mate while nursing.
124 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Jack colts should be cared for and weaned much as suggested
for horses. Because of the length of jack colts’ limbs, they seem
to be more liable to spring their fore legs when feeding on pas-
ture than the horse colt. They are required to put too much
weight on the fore legs to enable them to reach the grass, and
there is a giving way in the joints; usually the knee springs in
or out, but often the ankle gives way. Again when the dams are
low, thus compelling the colt to stoop and suck, the fore limbs
Fig. 52.— Two Two-year-oLp Jacks. Owned by C. F. Cook, Lexington, Ky.
are often cramped in such position as to increase their liability to
injury. These difficulties are so serious that Knight gives the
following advice: When short grazing is the cause of the trouble,
put the colt in the stable and feed with suitable food; when
caused by a low dam, the difficulty may be obviated by the colt
being put in the stable and fed on modified cow’s milk, or milk
from the dam.
Mules and hinnies. —'The mule is the product of a jack and
THE BREEDING OF HORSES 125
mare. A hinny is the product of a stallion mated to a jennet.
The latter is seldom seen in this country. It resembles the
mule. It is asserted, however, that the hinny takes more the
characters of the horse, the head is neater and ears shorter
than the mule, the hair in mane and tail heavier and the foot
larger. The bray is like the horse. Hinnies are scarce because
Fic. 53.— A Parr or Premium Muues. Owned by C.F. Cook, Lexington, Ky.
the stallion has an aversion to the jennet, and will not mate
with her unless he has been reared with jennets.
The jack is likewise peculiar in his habits. Jacks will not serve
both mares and jennets. Nor will a jack serve a mare at all if
reared along with a jennet. In the rearing of mule-breeding
jacks, this is a factor of much importance and cannot be im-
pressed too strongly. To mate with mares, in order to breed
mules, a jack must be raised along with mare colts and
not permitted to see or smell a jennet until well broken
126 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and trained to mate mares properly. If permitted to serve a
jennet, he will not again serve a mare, and his usefulness as a
mule breeder is at an end.
It is best to have a stallion to tease the mare when a jack is
to be used. Some mares are afraid of jacks and will not show
signs to them, hence the importance of having a stallion as a
teaser. After the mare is bred, her subsequent treatment
should be the same as suggested for brood mares.
CHAPTER VI
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES
Mucu attention has been given the feeding as well as the breed-
ing of horses, yet each of these will fail wholly or in part to bring
about the desired results unless animals thus fed and bred receive
proper care and attention. Many a person has fallen short of
success in breeding by depending on blood alone to improve the
stock. He has forgotten that all of our improved breeds of
horses are the product of adequate nutrition as well as intelli-
gent breeding, suitable environment, sufficient shelter, and
kindly care. To make a success with horses, one must be indus-
trious, patient, and untiring. He must have a fidelity that is
unswerving. He must have a genuine love for his work.
GROOMING
Nothing contributes so much to the beauty and the luster of
the coat as grooming. As a consequence, the body receives
much attention and the legs entirely too little, whereas the
legs should receive the more attention. On arriving at the
stable, if the animal’s legs are muddy, they should be roughly
cleaned by using a half-worn common broom. The animal
should then be placed in the stable, fed, unharnessed, given a
thorough grooming, and blanketed. The legsshould not then be
neglected, but be given a thorough and rapid brushing. Time
spent in cleaning and rubbing the horse in the evening after the
day’s work is done is worth much more than time thus spent
in the morning.
127
128 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
If the animal is working in the mud, it is desirable that the hair
be clipped from the limbs. It is then all the more important
that they should be thoroughly cleaned and rubbed each even-
ing after work. The hoofs should be examined and the cleft
between the sole and the frog cleaned.
Animals cared for in this way will pay for the extra care
many times overinthesatisfactionin having the team come from
the stable in the morning in the best of spirit, as indicated by the
pleasing appearance, the snap and vigor with which they lift
their feet, and by the complete absence of any stiffness in the
joints. Again, animals whose limbs are thus cared for will re-
main comparatively free from the many diseases to which the
legs and feet are subject. This care will greatly increase an
animal’s efficiency and prolong his usefulness.
CARE OF THE HORSE’S TEETH
Occasionally a horse does not feed well, due to irregularities of
his teeth. If the first, or milk teeth, are not looked after, they
are likely to remain, causing the second, or permanent teeth, to
grow in crooked. The young horse’s mouth should be closely
watched and the persistent milk teeth removed with forceps.
Again, it must be remembered that the upper jaw is somewhat
wider than the lower, and as the teeth are not perfectly op-
posed, a sharp edge is left unworn on the inside of the lower
molars and on the outside of the upper, which may cut the
tongue or cheeks. This condition can readily be felt by the
hand, and the sharp edges when found should be filed down
by a guarded rasp; otherwise the tongue and cheeks be-
come sore, the food irritates them, and the horse will not feed
well,
CLIPPING
Clipping consists in cutting the hair over the entire surface of
the horse’s body. Several advantages are secured from clipping ;
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 129
it improves the appearance of the horse and makes his coat more
easy to keep clean ; a clipped horse is less liable to take cold than
a long-coated one because the evaporation is more rapid and the
animal does not get sowarm ; the natural process of shedding the
hair is a draft on the vitality of the animal, the appetite is dimin-
ished and the horse runs down in flesh. Clipping accomplishes
in a very short time what nature requires much time to do.
From this it would seem that horses with long thick coats should
be clipped. The long coat causes them to become warmer, they
sweat more, and the coat holds the moisture, and then when
permitted to stand, they are likely to catch cold.
If horses are to be clipped twice each year, the operation
should be performed the first time soon after the hair has grown
out in the fall. When thus cared for, they become used to the
change before cold weather, and there is some growth of hair
before winter. The second clipping should be in early spring
as soon as the weather begins to get warm and before the winter
coat begins to shed. Horses thus treated will be much more
easily kept in presentable condition, and if protected by blankets
and properly groomed, will pay many times over for such extra
care.
When horses cannot be protected from the cold and wet,
either in the stable or outside of it, they should not be clipped in
the fall. Animals exposed to the weather grow a long coat for
their own protection.
BEDDING THE HORSE
A horse at hard work needs rest at night, and much more
rest is had when the animal is given a good liberal bed. The bed-
ding should not be permitted to become foul, as this will not only
lessen the comfort of the animal but promote disease as well. Of
bedding materials, straw leads the list, but when high in price,
may be replaced by other materials, such as shavings from the
planing mill, rejected parts of corn stalks; tan bark, leaves, and
K
130 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the like. Old straw is preferred to new, as it is dryer and more
elastic. The more broken and bruised the straw the less its
bulk and elasticity and the more of it needed.
BLANKETS
In cold climates the use of blankets is indispensable. The
horse will prove more efficient and will endure much longer if
reasonably protected against sudden changes in temperature, the
cold rains, and heavy winds.
Stable blanket. — The proper use of the stable blanket is of
first importance. It is a common practice after the day’s work
to hurry the horses into their stalls, unharness, blanket them at
once, feed and leave them for the night; in the morning it is
desired to get to work early, the horses are fed, the blankets re-
moved, the animal’s body curried a very little, the harness is put
on, and in a few minutes the horses are at work. Animals thus
treated stiffen in the joints, develop leg and foot diseases, and soon
become useless, and may be sold or traded as part payment on
others to undergo the same treatment.
The usefulness of a horse can be prolonged and his efficiency in-
creased by proper blanketing and grooming.. On arriving at the
stable very warm and sweating, the horse should not be blank-
eted until he has ceased to steam, nor should he be left in a draft
If blanketed at once, little opportunity is given for him to dry
off, the blanket will become damp, and the hair remain so all
night. In case the blanket is not used until the animal has
ceased to steam and is somewhat cooled, which will be in a
quarter of an hour, the hair will be dry and smooth the following
morning. Stable blankets may be dispensed with in the hot
summer months if the flies are excluded by screens or by some
other means. If blankets are used at this time, they should be
of light material and kept clean. As soon as the nights begin to
get cool, the blankets should be resumed, as an early use will
arrest to a marked degree the growth of hair. This may obviate
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 131
the necessity of clipping. In case the horse is clipped, he should
be covered with an extra heavy blanket, or with two blankets,
for a time.
Outdoor blanket. — The use of the outdoor blanket is as im-
portant as the use of the stable blanket. If the horse is allowed
to stand outdoors, either for a short or for a long time, he should
be well blanketed. If one is going to stop but a short time, the
temptation is strong not to blanket the animal. The horse cools
off rapidly and may chill, so that it is best to blanket if only for a
moment. Again, in the spring when the weather is fair, one is
likely to think that no ill will result from leaving the animal un-
blanketed ; and yet he may chill as before. It is best, on stop-
ping the animal, to see that he is well protected at all times.
CARE OF THE FEET
Because of the great importance of the foot it should be
carefully cared for throughout the active career of the horse.
Each evening after returning from work as well as in the morning
before being sent out, the sole of the foot should be examined and
all foreign materials removed. For this purpose a small hay
hook with the point sharpened is excellent. It is very common
to find foreign bodies, such as nails and stones, either driven into
the wall or sole of the foot, or collected in the clefts along the
frog, and it is very essential that they be removed if the hoof is
to remain in healthy condition.
Occasionally the hoofs have a tendency to dry out, thus be-
coming hard and brittle. Such hoofs should be oiled with some
good oil, as linseed or olive oil, or with hoof ointment, of which
there are many kinds on the market. This will soften the wall
of the hoof and make it less likely to crack or break. It often
happens that a piece is worn or broken from the side of the hoof,
which throws the weight of the body in such a way as to bring a
strain upon the joints of the leg, which often causes deformity
anddisease. Whensuch break occurs, the hoof should be leveled
132 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
with a rasp. When horses are closely confined in the stable,
the hoofs grow out long, and if not trimmed, will deform the
limb and make traveling difficult.
The rate of growth of the hoof is of much importance, for we
are often interested to know how long it will take a crack, such
as quarter-crack, side-crack, or toe-crack, a cleft, or a calk to dis-
appear. On the average, the hoof grows one-third of an inch
a month. Hind hoofs grow faster than fore hoofs and unshod
ones faster than shod. While influenced to some extent by work
or exercise, grooming, moisture, and food, the time required for
the horn to grow from the coronet to the ground varies in propor-
tion tothe distance of the coronet to the ground. The toe, there-
fore, depending on its height, grows down in ten to thirteen
months, thesides, six to eight, and the heel in three to five months.
Shoeing. —The horse’s hoof wears off faster than it grows out,
and it becomes sore. In order to prevent the hoof from wearing
too rapidly the feet are shod. While there are many reasons for
applying shoes, the most important are as follows : —
First, to prevent wearing away of the hoof in order that it
may not get sore. Horses show need of shoeing first in the fore
feet, and in some parts of the country only the fore feet are shod.
For this purpose the light shoe is preferred. Second, to prevent
slipping, as on ice or mud. For this purpose, when the work is
hard, one needs heavy shoes with large calks, but for easy work
they maybelighter. Inthis connection it must be borne in mind
that a smooth-shod (shoes without calks) horse slips more on the
ice than though he were bare-footed. There are several makes
of shoes with removable calks. Third, horses are shod to
modify their action.
Of the many things to be considered in fitting a shoe perhaps
the most important is to keep the foot perfectly level, thus pre-
venting undue weight being thrown on one side, and other attend-
ant injuries. The frog should be left in its natural size and
shape to serve as a cushion for the foot. Make the foot normal.
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 133
Then make the shoe fit the foot. In fitting a shoe, nothing will
aid one as much as a careful examination of the wear of the old
shoe. The shoe should be fitted cold or not so hot as to burn the
sole when placed against it in fitting. In nailing the shoe to the
foot, the nail holes should not be too near the edge of the sole,
for in such case it is necessary to drive the nails too far up into
the wall to make them hold. On the other hand, the nail holes
should be well back, the nails small in size, and when driven,
should be brought out well down on the hoof. If driven high,
when the shoes are reset, or the animal reshod, the former nail
holes are near the edge and serve to weaken the hoof and interfere
with driving the new nails. After driving the nails, they are to be
clinched in a small groove fitted for that purpose. Smooth with
rasp, but never rasp the outside of the hoof as it will remove the
natural protective covering. This natural covering should not
be removed, as the hoof will absorb water in the wet season and
dry out much more rapidly in the dry season.
TRAINING THE COLT
The colt should be taught subordination at the very start and
not be allowed to become headstrong. The usefulness of the
future horse will depend much on his courage and fearlessness,
and it is to promote these that the colt should become familiar
with man at as early an age as possible. If taken in time and
properly handled, he need never know fear. A colt should never
be frightened. Too many persons thoughtlessly try to make
the young colt show off by doing something to startle it, by run-
ning at it, throwing sticks, “shooing” it, and the like, which
should never be done if a reliable animal is to be developed.
Teach the colt useful lessons only. Because colts are bright and
very susceptible to training, they are often taught tricks and al-
lowed to become mischievous — to bite, rear, kick, or anything
else that may seem “cute.’’ These very things later become a
great annoyance and are very hard to overcome. One should not
134 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
‘make the mistake of trying to teach the colt too much at a time;
he should understand each lesson thoroughly before a second is
attempted. On the other hand, colts should be worked con-
tinuously day by day and not simply at the convenience of the
trainer. The trainer should be gentle and firm at all times and
go through with whatever is attempted.
Training to the halter. — The foal should be taught very early
the uses of the halter; first to lead, then to drive. But even
before haltering the
youngster may be
taught to ‘stand
over,” to have his
foot raised, to back,
and the like. In
handling the colt
be careful about the
ears, the back of the
fore legs, and the
flanks, as these are
often very sensitive.
Catch the colt by
putting one hand
under the neck and
the other under the
hams or around the
buttocks (Fig. 54).
Never catch a colt
around the neck
only — if this is done, the colt will go backwards and perhaps
fall — but instead catch him around both ends, as described;
then if he attempts to go forward, press back with the hand
under his neck, and if he attempts to go backwards, press for-
ward with the hand that is around the buttocks. Colts caught
in this way will let one walk up to them, whereas if they are
Fic. 54.— MertHop of caTCHING A YOUNG FoaL..
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 1385
-- caught around the neck, there may be difficulty in coming near
them.
When ready to halter the foal, choose a strong, well-fitting
halter and not a new one that smells of a lot of things that are
new to the colt, but one that has recently beenused. Care should
be taken not to pull heavily on the nose-band at any time.
Occasionally deformed face lines and necks are caused by this
means. It is not necessary to drag a colt by the halter in order to
suggest to him that his business is to follow. As a matter of fact,
the reverse effect is usual, and the harder a colt is pulled, the
harder he holds back. If, on the contrary, he is coaxed along the
accustomed route, as to the water trough and back, he will soon
follow promptly. If he resents, however, other means must be
tried. Secure a small rope, the size of a light clothes line, about
ten feet long, tie a noose or fasten a ring on one end, place this
gently over the colt’s back just in front of the hips with the noose
or ring on the under side of the body, so that when the other end
of the rope is run. through the noose, the rope can be closely
drawn around the flanks; pass the rope along under the body,
then between the fore legs, then up through the ring in the halter.
Hold the halter strap in one hand, the light rope in the other, pull
gently in the halter strap, and as the colt begins to shake his head
give the light rope a sharp pull and the colt will immediately step
forward. Do not be in a hurry, but give the colt time to get
used to the lesson. Soon he will follow wherever you lead.
After the colt understands the uses of the halter and will lead,
he may be taught to drive with lines (Fig. 55). To do this
successfully a surcingle properly adjusted is required. The sur-
cingle must be provided with loops or rings on each side, placed
well below the center of the body, the lines passed through these
and fastened to the rings on either side of the halter; never use
a bit in the mouth of a very young colt. Now the lines will
pass the hind quarters low down, and thus prevent the colt from
turning with his head towards the trainer. It is very
136 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
important to keep the reins low in turning to make the guid-
ing process easy. After a little, as the colt becomes accus-
tomed to being driven, he can be touched up with the lines,
guided to the right or left, but he should be stopped often to
assure him he is doing well.
Training to the uses of the bit. — It is best perhaps to train the
horse to the uses of the bit when he is about two years of age.
The manner in which the horse is educated to know and mind
Fic. 55. — ARRANGEMENT OF HALTER AND LINES FOR TEACHING YOUNG COLT
to Drive.
the bit will go far towards determining his usefulness. Inas-
much as the conveyance of the master’s desire to the horse’s mind
for execution is through the hands, reins, bit, and mouth, no
progress can be made and none should be attempted until
this means of communication has been well established.
Importance of a good mouth. — No factor contributes so much
to the pleasure, comfort, and safety of either rider or driver as a
responsive mouth in a horse — one that always obeys promptly
the slightest instruction from the master. A good mouth to a
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 1387
large extent is natural to the horse. Tender and bad mouths
usually result from improper handling. Bad mouths are very
aggravating and often the cause of many other imperfections —
tongue lolling, crossing the jaws, hobbling, irregular and un-
steady gaits, and the like— many of which when well established
are very difficult to overcome.
Bitting the colt.— The young animal can usually be made
familiar with the uses of the bit by the application of the bitting
Fic. 56.— ARRANGEMENT OF ‘‘Birtinc HaRNESS’’ TO FAMILIARIZE THE COLT
WITH THE Bir.
harness or “dumb jockey.” This harness consists of an open
bridle with a large smooth bit and check-rein, a surcingle and
crupper, and two side-lines running from the bit to buckles on
either side of the surcingle (Fig 56). The adjustment of the
bridle is important. The length of the head-stall must be so
188 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
adjusted as to bring the bit in mild contact with the bars of the
mouth. If the head-stall is too short, the bars and the corners
of the mouth soon become sore, and the animal may become
vicious; on the other hand, if it is too long, the bit drops down
in the mouth and the animal becomes careless. With the bit-
ting harness properly adjusted, turn the colt into the familiar
open paddock to get used to having the bit in his mouth. The
check- and side-reins should be left slack at first. Gradually
from day to day the reins should be shortened, care being taken
that they are never made so short as to place the head in an un-
comfortable position, or draw the b‘t so tightly as to make the
corners of the mouth sore. The colt should be subjected to the
use of this apparatus for a few hours each day for perhaps a week
or less, depending on the individual. Real lines may now be
substituted for the side-reins and the colt driven until he knows
how to guide this way and that; to stop at the word “whoa,”
and to step forward at the command “get up.” Train the colt
to stand absolutely still when being harnessed, saddled, or
when it is desired that he should stand. A horse that is con-
tinually stepping about while one is working with him is but half
trained at best.
Harnessing the colt. — After the colt has become familiar with
the bitting apparatus and has learned to obey simple commands
he may be harnessed. Do not use new harness, smelling of
things unfamiliar, but one that has been in constant use, pref-
erably by a horse that the colt knows. After being driven with
the bitting apparatus for a time and the colt is rather tired, put
him in his stall, bring the collar to him, let him smell of it if he
likes, then put it right on asif he were an old horse. Now get
the harness, walk up to him, and lift it gently over his back.
Do not stand off and throw the harness over his back, for the
loose straps hitting his back and abdomen will be resented, and
he may kick. Walk behind him, put the crupper strap on, then
step to the side and fasten the bands.
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 139
The harness should be of good quality and in good repair; if a
part breaks, there may be trouble and the colt ruined for all time.
See to it that it fits perfectly. The collar should receive atten-
tion, as it is by means of this that the horse exerts his power.
The colt’s shoulders are likely to be tender and easily abraded,
and we must see that the collar fits him well. The collar must
be kept scrupulously clean. When the colt is fleshy, we must
watch to see that he does not lose flesh, and the collar, which
fitted perfectly in the beginning, become too large. A breast-
collar is admissible when the load is light ; it must not be ad-
justed so high as to choke the horse nor so low as to interfere
with the action of his limbs. The saddle and the crupper also
need careful attention. Care should be taken to have them fit,
neither too loose nor too tight, and then to keep them clean, lest
they abrade the back or tail and produce a vicious horse.
Hitching double. — With the harness properly adjusted, the colt
is ready to be hitched to a vehicle. Get a well-trained, gentle,
but active horse if the colt is active, for it is a mistake to hitch a
quick, active colt with a slow, lazy horse. The vehicle to which
they are attached should be provided with a good brake. The
colt should be attached to the “off side’? and the team be.
driven at first in a closed field till the colt learns what is wanted
of him. When hitching the colt double for the first few times, it
is well to keep a pair of single lines on the colt’s bridle which can
be handled by an assistant.
Hitching single. — When the colt is desired for single use, it is
often advisable to train him to go single from the first. This
may be done after he has become familiar with the bit, harness,
and use of the lines. When training the colt to go single, a train-
ing-cart — one with long shafts, substantially constructed, and
the seat so arranged that the driver can get off and on quickly —
should be employed. Such a cart can easily be constructed from
the rear wheels and the axle of a buggy or carriage by fastening
two long poles, — hickory or any tough, springy wood, — to the
140 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
axle, securing a cross-bar and whippletree in front, and a board
seatintherear. Theshafts should betwelve or fourteen feet long,
with provision at the ends for the attachment of a strap across
from point to point to prevent the colt in rearing from throwing
his front leg over the end of the shaft. At first a kick-strap at-
tached to each shaft and passed over the colt’s rump should be
used, at least till the colt is accustomed to the shafts (Fig. 57).
When the colt is first hitched, an assistant should hold him until
Fie. 57.— Court HITCHED FOR THE First TIME, SHOWING ARRANGEMENT OF
Kick-STraP ovER Rump.
the driver is ready, then he should be allowed to go. As soon as
he has become familiar with the vehicle he should be compelled
to stand still until he is wanted to start.
Training to mount. — In training a colt to mount, one must be
very careful that the colt does not succeed in throwing the
trainer, for if he once succeeds in getting the man off, one will
never be able to convince him that he cannot do it again. The
best time to take the colt is after he has been exercised vigorously
and while tired. The best place is on soft ground where he can
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 141
hurt neither himself nor the rider. Put on the saddle in the same
way as we did the harness; see that it is fastened securely.
Have an assistant hold the colt’s head while you mount. The
horse may rear, bound forward, buck, or liedown. In anyevent,
the rider must stay on, remembering that the colt is already tired
and on soft ground. It is often an endurance trial, and this is
Fic. 58. —- ARRANGEMENT OF THE ‘‘DOUBLE SAFETY’’ FOR CONTROLLING VICIOUS
HorssEs.
When the horse strikes or rears, the trainer pulls the safety and the horse
comes down on his knees.
the reason why one must have the colt tired to begin with, for
otherwise he may be able to bound and buck till the rider is so
exhausted that he can no longer hold to the saddle.
HARNESS AND HARNESSING
In harnessing the horse, much care should be exercised in prop-
erly adjusting the various parts of the harness. Properly fitted
harness adds much to the efficiency and comfort of the horse.
This is well emphasized by the sore mouth, shoulders, neck, back,
and tail produced by poorly fitted harness. The tension on
these parts is rather great, and as they are very tender they are
142 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the places likely first to show abrasion. Sores thus produced
give the horse much pain and are likely to become a cause of
viciousness. Sore mouth thus often provokes a horse to run
away; sore shoulders and neck often provoke balking ; and sore
tail often provokes kicking. Since the efficiency and comfort of
the horse depend so largely on the adjustment of the bit, lines,
collar, saddle, and crupper, it seems desirable to discuss each of
these separately.
The bit and the bridle. — When one recalls the extreme tender-
ness of the mouth, the cruel manner in which it is often bitted,
the irritation from the sores, he can understand why a horse may
lag behind till the parts become numbed, then begin to pull,
holding the head to one side, going with mouth open, lolling the
tongue, slobbering, tossing the head, crossing the jaws, and
in many other ways showing evidence of the discomfort he is
suffering. :
The bit. — Bits of many types have been devised to meet the
various and peculiar habits of horses, most of which have been
designed to punish the horse and irritate the sensitive parts.
With the punishment of the whip at the rear and a harsh and
severe bit at the front the horse is between two goads, and if he
does not balk, rear, plunge, or run away, he is exceptional.
A good-sized straight bit covered with leather or rubber, if the
mouth is tender, cannot be improved on in most cases. One
must be careful to get a bit of the proper length for the horse’s
mouth. Many bits are too long and are pulled out of adjust-
ment in the mouth, so that the pressure on either side is not
equal. The bit must be of the correct length for the particular
animal, and properly adjusted.
Some horses work better with the jointed or snaffle bit. It
gives more room for the tongue, and the pressure is more evenly
distributed on the jaws than with the straight bit. Severe bits,
of which there are many in the market, and which are intended
for punishment, should never be used unless it is absolutely
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 143
necessary. Such bits in the hands of a novice are responsible
for much of the viciousness of horses. The tendency of the
nervous horse to loll his tongue can often be cured by the use
of the “tongue-lolling bit.” This is a straight-bar bit with
a plate fastened on the bar, and is just as easy in the horse’s
mouth as the plain straight-bar bit except for the annoyance of
the plate.
In the training and driving of high-acting horses the curb-bit
may be used. A horse properly bitted with this shows himself
to better advantage than with any other kind of bit. The curb-
bit should be used only by those who are familiar with it, as it
may become an instrument of torture in the hands of the in-
experienced.
The choice of the proper bit for each horse can be determined
only by trial, and if several changes are necessary, one should not
be discouraged. However, when it has been determined which
bit best serves the purpose, no further change should be made.
After becoming used to a certain kind of bit a horse does not take
kindly to a change. It makes him uncomfortable and may in-
terfere with his action.
Head-stall. — The bridle should be so fitted to the horse’s
head as to let the bit rest easily in the mouth. The head-stall
should be neither too long nor too short. If it is too long, the bit
drops so that the rings are drawn into the mouth. The horse
becomes careless and unmindful of the driver’s wish. On the
other hand,eif the head-stall is too short, the bit is drawn up-
wards into the angles of the mouth and becomes a constant
source of annoyance to the animal and may produce a sore
mouth.
Blinds. — As to the advisability of using blinds on the bridles
there is diversity of opinion. Some persons contend that they
are of benefit to the horse, while others are just as certain that
they are cruel. Here much depends upon the individuality of
the animal. Some animals work better with them; some work
144 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
better without them. If the horse works better with blinds on
the bridle, use them; if he works better with the open bridle,
discontinue the blinds. If blinds are used, they should be firmly
adjusted to the bridle so they cannot swing back and forth.
Both should be of the same height on the horse’s head, as it is
very unsightly as well as annoying to the horse to have one
placed low and the other high on the face.
Center-pieces, ear-bobs, and tassels. — It is said that such fix-
tures add to the appearance of the turnout. While fashion and
custom seem to demand a certain amount of unnecessary fixtures
to worry and annoy the horse, the use of them cannot be too
strongly condemned.
The check-rein. — The check-rein should be properly adjusted.
In common practice there are two methods of checking the horse’s
head — by means of the side-rein and by the over-check rein.
The former is used more often on work horses, the latter on driv-
ing horses. The side-rein is used with and without check hooks
at the throat-latch. This rein is not so effective in compelling
the animal to hold his head up, but is much more comfortable to
the horse and enables him to handle himself more efficiently.
Horses checked with the side-rein are not so likely to stumble
as those with the over-check rein, and will pull a much heavier
load. This is because they have more liberty with the head,
thereby enabling them to see the ground immediately in front
and to lower the head and thus throw more power into the collar.
The over-check rein was devised for trotting horses, but has
become so popular that it is used almost exclusively for driving
horses. Originally it was used on the track where the surface
is as smooth as a floor, and was employed only for short periods.
To-day it is used on roads of all sorts and for indefinite periods.
Thereare many strong objections to its use if drawn too tightly, —
as is the tendency. It holds the horse’s head in such position
that he is unable to see the ground immediately in front of him,
so that he is very likely to stumble. It also holds the head
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 145
in such a way that he cannot pull efficiently. This is particu-
larly true in ascending a steep grade. The animal is unable to
lower his head and hence can put little power into the collar.
An animal that is stalled when thus reined can often pull the load
if unreined or if the driver will ride him, thus bringing forward
the center of gravity and enabling the animal to get a firmer hold
on the ground and to put more power into the collar. The
over-check rein is also very hard on the animal’s back and front
limbs in descending a grade. Again, it holds the head and neck
in such an unnatural position that they soon become numbed,
and the horse is seen to toss his head from side to side and to
take other characteristic attitudes in search of relief.
The horse should always be reined mildly. Without the rein
he is likely to become careless in his habits, shambling in his
gait, and to yield to the temptation to eat grass when standing.
When the animal lowers his head and neck the lines, collar, and
breast-harness slip down and he is likely to become tangled in
the harness and may get into difficulty.
Fitting the collar. — The service of the horse is largely accom-
plished by the shoulders, and it is of the utmost importance that
the collar fit the neck and shoulders perfectly. Poorly fitted
collars cause the horse much pain, result in sore necks and
shoulders, and are a common cause of viciousness and bad habits.
Because of the extreme importance of having a well-fitting collar,
many makes have been put on the market, such as the leather,
the sweeny, the half sweeny, the pneumatic, the steel, and the
humane, each asserting superiority over the others (Fig. 59).
Each has its advantages and disadvantages. No attempt is
made here to favor any style or make; only general suggestions
are given.
Fitting the collar is a rather difficult task. It is so firm and
stiff that usually it- is impossible to buckle the harness tight
enough to bring it to the shape of the animal’s neck, and the
shoulders are therefore adjusted to the collar rather than the
L
146 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
collar to the shoulders, with sore shoulders as the result. To
avoid this soreness, it is necessary that the stiff collar be adjusted
to the shoulders of the horse for which it isintended. To do this,
take the poorly fitting collar, new or old, place it in three inches
of water and let it remain over night. In the morning put the
collar on the horse, and with hame-straps draw it snugly to the
sides of the neck; be sure that the hame-straps are properly
adjusted, then work the horse moderately through the day.
After soaking in this way the collar will adjust itself to every
inequality of the shoulder, and the horse will seldom be troubled
with soreness.
Fic. 59. — Types or CoLtuars: (1) common leather; (2) half sweeny; (3) steel;
(4) pneumatic; (5) humane.
Every horse should have his own collar. It should fit close
to the neck along its entire width and should never be tight in
some places and loose in others. The hame-straps should be
properly adjusted at top and bottom to suit the shape of the
horse’s neck. Be sure at all times that the lower hame-strap is
buckled as tightly as the thickness of the neck will permit. Oc-
casionally the careless driver fails to buckle the hames tightly,
and when the horse is backed, the hames slip off the collar. This
may not be noticed at the time, and the animal be compelled to
pull the load with the hames resting on the shoulders.
Adjusting the hame-tug. — The adjustment of the hame-tug is
also an important matter and should receive the closest attention.
If the draft is too low, the action of the shoulder while walking
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 147
gives too much back-and-forward motion to the collar, which
is noticeable at the hame tops. This is likely to cause sore
shoulders either at the points or at the top. If the draft is too
high, the likelihood of injury will be equally great. There is a
proper place for the draft, varying with the conformation of the
horse. When the hame-tugs are at the proper place, there will
be very little motion at the top of the hames as the horse walks.
Again, the tugs should be so adjusted that they are both of the
same length. Often careless drivers hitch one tug longer than
the other, which is very hard on the horse, and a source of much
extra exertion as well as sore shoulders.
Breast harness. — For light driving, breast harness is admissible
and is to be preferred for such light rigs as runabouts and buggies.
In the adjustment of breast harness, care should be taken that
the neck strap is not so long as to let the breast harness drop and
interfere with the action of the fore limbs. On the other hand,
the neck strap should not be so short as to draw the breast
harness up and choke the animal. The breast harness is in-
tended for light work only, and if the load is heavy, the horse
may choke. This is particularly true in ascending a steep
grade. Much care should be exercised in its use.
Fitting the back-band and crupper. — Perhaps next in impor-
tance to the bit and collaristhecrupper. If the back-band or the
check-rein is too short and the crupper is drawn too tight against
the tail, it is likely to cause soreness; since this is a very tender
part, it may lessen the reliability of the horse. A horse with a
sore tailis hard to manage. At any time he may get his tail over
the line, become excited through fear that the abraded part will
be injured, clamp his tail down on the line, and be difficult to
control. If the back-band is too long and the crupper too loose,
it is likely to result in the back-band, crupper, hip-straps, and
breeching all slipping off to one side of the horse, with the result
that the animal may become excited and difficult to manage. It
is therefore necessary that the back-band and check-rein be so
148 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
adjusted that the saddle is in the proper place on the back and
the crupper fits snugly under the tail; then there will be no
trouble from sore back or sore tail.
Fly-nets. — The use of fly-nets often brings much comfort
to working animals. Such horses should be provided with
throat-latch cloths when the bot-flies are present, as these pests
are very annoying, and the animals in fighting them will often
become excited, with a consequent lessening of their usefulness.
Whether to use fly-nets or fly-blankets may depend on con-
ditions. The use of the fly-blanket is not advised by many per-
sons, but there are conditions in which it proves very desirable,
particularly on horses whose color is such as to fade on being
exposed to the direct rays of the sun. The fly-blanket, while
very efficient in retaining the color and keeping out the flies, is
not so presentable and is much warmer than the open net.
Leather fly-nets are the most presentable and the most desired by
horsemen. But fly-nets and fly-blankets are rather annoying to
the teamster and are more or less expensive, for which reasons
they are often discarded entirely.
To do away with the use of fly-nets a number of “fly-killer”
preparations have been compounded. ‘These materials are ap-
plied with a small sprayer, and to be effective must be used often.
It is said that they ‘“‘do not soil or injure the hair and, all things
considered, are cheaper and more satisfactory outdoor fly pro-
tectors than are blankets.”
Caring for harness. — The proper care of the harness should
recetve much consideration, as care will increase the length of its
usefulness and lessen the liability of its injuring the animal. It
is very important that the bearing parts be kept scrupulously
clean at all times. This applies particularly to the parts in con-
stant contact with the animal, as the collar, saddte, and crupper.
It is not possible to prevent sore shoulders, sore back, and sore
tail if these parts are permitted to become dirty, which they
will, because of the sweat and dandruff. They must be carefully
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF HORSES 149
watched and frequently cleaned. It is best to clean these parts
each morning before harnessing the horses or, better still,
immediately after removing the harness.
Harness should be thoroughly cleaned and oiled at least once a
year, preferably in the spring. This will cause it to retain its
fiber and to last longer. While there are many ways of cleaning
and oiling harness, the following is as simple and effective as any:
Take the harness apart and soak the parts in a wash-tub of luke-
warm water containing a handful of washing soda. Let the
harness soak for fifteen or twenty minutes, then scrub the parts
on a board with an ordinary scrub-brush. When the leather
is nearly dry, blacken with edge blackening, which can be ob-
tained at any harness shop. Unless the harness is thus black-
ened or lamp black put in the oil, it will turn red. When dry,
take a cotton cloth and rub the harness thoroughly. Always
rub straps with the grain. This lays down the fiber and gives
a smooth edge. Take a quart of neatsfoot oil, add a small
quantity of kerosene, mix and warm, then give the leather two
coats, using the oil freely. Hang up to dry, taking care not to
hang in the sun. When the oil is well dried, sponge with white
castile soap and buckle the parts together. Harness treated in
this way will neither turn red nor become gummy, and if often
sponged with white castile soap, can be kept looking like new.
A number of oils may be used if neatsfoot oil is not at hand,
such as olive, codliver, or castor oil, all of which are considered
good for harness. In case the edge blackening cannot be pro-
cured, put enough lamp black in the oil at the time the kerosene
is added to turn it black. The lampblack will prevent the
leather from turning red.
Harness room. — Another factor that must not be overlooked
in the care of harness is the place where it is kept. It frequently
happens that the harness is hung on hooks just back of the horse
in the stable. There are at least two very strong objections to
this practice. In the first place, gases escaping from the manure
150 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
are very destructive to the harness ; and in the second place, the
harness is frequently knocked down under the animal’s feet and
becomes soiled with manure. It is much better to have a har-
ness room convenient to the horse stable where all harness can
be kept. When it is kept in a separate room, it is much less
difficult to keep in order. If one has a hanger for each horse’s
harness and hangs it there each time, the work will be much
lighter than otherwise. A well-kept harness room will pay for
itself each year because of the ease with which the harness is
kept in condition and the increased time that it will last.
‘CHAPTER VII
DISEASES OF THE HORSE
Tue horse is a robust animal and with proper care is easily
kept in health. Like all other farm animals, however, he is
subject to ills and accidents, many of which can be prevented if
taken in time, while if they go unnoticed, may become serious and
render the animal useless. Every one who owns a horse should
know how to care for the simpler difficulties, and when to call for
the advice of a veterinarian. Thischapter will not take the place
of a veterinarian; it may tell you when to callone. Nowthatwe
are giving so much attention to feeding and breeding we should
also give additional thought to the difficulties and ailments.
The horse is subject to a very large number of ailments,
some of which are simple and easily cared for, more of which are
complicated and require skillful treatment. Little more than
a catalogue of the more common ailments is given in the follow-
ing pages; to discuss them fully would require a volume larger
than this manual.}
TREATING SICK HORSES
Horses that are ailing should receive much care. In many.
cases good care is to be preferred to the use of medicine. In
other cases rest is to be preferred to both. The aim is to hasten
recovery from the ill effects of the ailment; and to be most
efficient one must understand the horse thoroughly and be able
1 The reader may consult Mayo’s “‘ Diseases of Animals” for fuller
popular description and treatment.
151
152 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
to supply his every need. He must be careful, painstaking, and
patient. The first thing to be done is to look for the cause of the
trouble, and if possible, to remove it. If the disease is con-
tagious, the ailing animal should be put away from other
animals equally susceptible to the disease. Whether contagious
or otherwise, the quarters should be comfortable. Note care-
fully the surroundings of the animal, the work it has been
doing, the exercise, general care, food, water, and the source
of infection if the disease is contagious.
The food should receive much attention. When the horse
can eat, a small quantity of easily digestible and nutritious food
should be given. The food should not contain much bulk and
should be rather laxative, as sickness often brings constipation.
It should be as attractive as possible, as the appetite is usually
poor and sometimes lacking. When it can be prevented, medi-
cine should not be put in the food or water, unless tasteless and
odorless, as the horse is likely to refuse the food when it is im-
portant that he should have it. Natural foods, such as fresh
grass, roots, bran mash, and milk, are to be preferred to prepared
foods, though the use of patent stock foods may prove beneficial
in certain minor ailments, when a tonic is valuable. The feed
boxes should be kept clean, and if any food is left, it should be
removed and not left until the next meal.
In certain ailments, it is necessary to protect the horse against
the cold or from drafts. This can be done by the use of blankets.
To protect the limbs, bandages may be applied. The bandage
should be made from strips of woolen cloth about three inches
wide and five to eight feet long. Make it into a neat roll, then
apply by beginning at the lower or smaller part of the limb
and wind upwards. This requires considerable patience and
skill, but after a few attempts it will stay in place.
In those ailments in which the horse cannot stand, yet should
remain in an upright position, a sling is used. A sling consists
of a wide strip of stout canvas, placed under the animal and
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 153
supported from above by means of a chain and tackle, so that
the weight of the animal may be taken off its limbs and still be
kept in an upright position. It is rarely advisable to attempt to
carry the entire weight of the horse. The sling should be so
placed under the animal that he can settle into it of his own ac-
cord.
In other ailments, when the horse is unable to lie down for a
considerable length of time, much relief may often be had by
Fic. 60.— A Poto Pony or Goop Form.
arranging a “lean to.” This consists of supports so arranged
that the horse can lean up against or settle down on them and
thus relieve his weight. The supports in a “lean to” are
placed about the animal much like shafts, with the addition of
a piece across in front for the chest, and another cross-bar
behind for the haunches to rest upon. These supports should
be covered with cloths or blankets. Animals are quick to
154 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
take advantage of such supports and will get much relief by
leaning against them.
ADMINISTERING MEDICINE
In giving medicine the rule should be to give only for a definite
purpose. This rule must be strictly followed or more ill than
good will result. While medicine may be given in many ways,
we will discuss only a few of the more simple, such as drench-
ing, hypodermic medication, external medication, and enemas
(or injection into the rectum), and counter-irritants.
Drenching. — A very convenient way to give medicine to the
horse is by ‘‘ drenching.’’ The medicines are first dissolved in
water or other suitable liquid. Just enough liquid should be
added thoroughly to dissolve the medicine, as more than this
makes the drench bulky and isunnecessary. Insoluble medicine,
if not irritant or corrosive, may be given simply suspended in the
water. The bottle should be well shaken immediately before
giving the drench. It should be clean, strong, and have
a smooth long neck. The head of the horse should be slightly
elevated. To do this, place a loop in the end of a rope and in-
troduce this loop into the mouth just behind the upper front
teeth, then place the free end over a beam and draw the head up,
not too high, for in such cases the horses cannot swallow. Gradu-
ally pour the medicine into the horse’s mouth at the corner. If
the horse strangles, lower his head.
Hypodermic medication. — Medicines are frequently given by
the hypodermic syringe under the skin. In this method much
smaller quantities of medicine are required to produce given
effects than when given by the mouth, there is less liability to
waste, and the action of the medicine is much more rapid and
certain. The use of the hypodermic syringe, however, requires
more skill, and one should understand it thoroughly before at-
tempting to use it. The medicine should be sufficiently diluted,
otherwise it will injure the tissue and cause severe pain. It must
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 155
be free from sediment and germs. When all is ready, the syringe
should be taken in the right hand; the skin in the region of the
neck and shoulder is firmly grasped with the left, and with
the right the needle is quickly pushed through in a slanting
direction and the medicine injected into the loose tissue beneath
the skin. In older animals or those with tough skin considerable
force is required to push the needle through the skin. It is
of greatest importance that the instrument be perfectly clean
and sterile, otherwise infection may be introduced along with
the medicine.
External medication. — Medicine is often administered to the
horse by applying to, or rubbing on, the skin, in the form of
liniments, ointments, lotions, or salves. Applications are also
made in the form of poultices and bathing. Liniments, of
which there are many kinds, are solutions containing some irri-
tating substance such as ammonia or turpentine. They should
never be applied to fresh wounds or sores, but are useful in
chronic cases of inflammation. Liniment is often mixed with oil
and applied to the part by rubbing. Care should be taken not
to apply too frequently or rub too hard, as it will blister the part.
Ointments, of which there are many kinds available, are medi-
cines mixed with waxy material and are used to soften, soothe,
and heal inflamed parts. Blisters are ointments containing
irritating substance, and are used to reduce inflammation.
Lotions are medicines in solution and are used to soothe, cool,
and heal.
Poultices are soft, moist substances. They should be applied
hot, but should not remain long, as the tissues become soft and
flabby. Poultices are applied to soften and soothe and are very
useful to relieve severe inflammation. In old chronic sores they
soften the tissues, arrest the irritation, and hasten recovery.
They should be changed frequently; and a part should seldom be
poulticed for more than forty-eight hours continuously. There
are many substances used in making poultices, chief of which are
156 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
flaxseed meal, bran, bread and milk, and mashed boiled turnips.
Whatever the substance, it should be clean, soft, and capable of
retaining heat and moisture. To keep them clean and sweet,
add a teaspoonful of carbolic acid to a pint of poultice.
Bathing the parts in hot or cold water often proves very bene-
ficial. The application should continue for fifteen minutes to
half an hour. When warmed, it may be as hot as can be com-
fortably borne. The bathing should take place two or three
times a day. It is much used and with good results in lessen-
ing inflammation, pain, and swelling of recent injuries, and the
like.
Enemas, or injections, into the rectum. — Medicines are given
by injections into the rectum when they cannot be given by the
mouth; when they are not retained by the stomach; when it
is desired to empty the bowels; to destroy small worms infecting
the large bowels ; and to stimulate action. Foods may also be
given in this way. Six to eight quarts of warm water is suffi-
cient for an adult horse, and if to this is added a half teacupful
of pure glycerine, much better results will be obtained. In-
jections are best given by means of a rubber hose four feet
long to which a funnel is attached. Oil the hose, insert gently
into the rectum about two feet, then pour the liquid into the
funnel and by raising it above the animal, it will force itself
into the bowels.
Counter-irritants. — This is a class of practices applied for
the purpose of setting up a local and artificial inflammation in
order to cure or counteract a disease or injury. Their appli-
cation requires some skill and much experience. The counter-
irritants most used are liniments, blisters, and burning with a
hot iron or “firing.”
Blisters. — Two substances are commonly used for blisters:
pulverized Spanish flies makes “ fly-blister,”’ and the biniodide
of mercury makes “‘red-blister.”” Both are poisonous and should
be cared for accordingly. They are made by mixing one part
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 157
by weight of the drug to eight parts of fresh lard or vaseline.
For ordinary use the fly-blister is preferred, but to remove a
bunch, the red-blister is most used.
Clip the hair from the area, then rub in blister with a cob
from three to ten minutes, depending on the severeness of the
irritation and the thickness of the skin. As a rule a light blister
repeated is more effective than a single severe one. Much care
should be taken to see that the horse does not succeed in scatiter-
ing the blister. To this end his head and tail should be so tied
that the animal cannot reach the substance. After twenty-
four to thirty-six hours, or when a watery, gummy fluid
exudes from the skin, the area should be thoroughly washed
with warm water and soap, then wiped dry, and greased with
fresh lard or vaseline.
Mustard plasters are often used when large surfaces must be
treated, as in pleurisy, inflammation of the lungs, and a few
other diseases. This plaster is made by stirring up finely ground
mustard with warm water into a thin paste, then applied to the
area and rubbed in well with a cob or stick. Mustard will prove
more satisfactory than fly-blisters when large areas are to be
treated, as the latter often irritates the kidneys, and as a result
there is painful passage of the urine. When such symptoms
appear, the fly-blister should be washed off and the part
greased.
Firing. — This consists in burning the skin with a red hot iron.
The firing-iron is rather heavy so as to hold heat, but has
a sharp point. Firing is used to remove bunches, ring-bones,
spavins, and the like. The hair is clipped from the area, the
irons heated in a stove, the horse is blindfolded, a twist applied
to the nose, and the opposite foot is lifted and in this way the
one to be operated on is confined. At first the skin is barely
touched and the lines marked, then the lines are burned to a good
russet brown by drawing the hot irons through the former lines.
A fly-blister is then rubbed on the fired area and the case treated
158 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
as for blistering. The horse should be given plenty of time
to recover before being put to work.
There are two methods of firing in common use: One consists
of making a number of parallel lines, and is known as “line-
firing.” The other consists in burning a number of little holes
over the part to be treated, and is known as “‘point-firing.” It
is held that point-firing sets up a deeper inflammation. Oc-
casionally both methods are combined, and after the line-firing
a few points are made over the most diseased part.
LAMENESS: ITS CAUSE AND TREATMENT
The horse is used largely for locomotive power. Anything
that interferes with his travel and pull materially lessens his
usefulness. Of all farm animals, the horse is the most exposed
to accidents and injuries leading to lameness. Lameness inter-
feres with his usefulness more than with that of any other farm
animal. A lame horse cannot work, whereas a lame cow may
give as much milk, a lame pig take on fat, and a lame sheep
shear as much wool as though it were sound. “ The causes of
lameness among horses are numerous and varied. Only a few
of the more important are discussed here, as a complete list
would fill a volume.
Lameness due to ailments of the bones
The bones of the horse’s legs are particularly subject to
ailments causing lameness; this is especially true of the bones
below the knees and hocks. The most important ailments of
the bones likely to cause lameness are splints, ring-bones,
side-bones, bone-spavin, bony enlargements, and fractures of
the bone.
Splints, ring-bones, side-bones, bone-spavin, and bony enlarge-
ments. — These ailments are caused by severe strains, concus-
sion, blows and hurts; by poorly kept hoofs; and by certain
diseases of the foot as corns, cracks, quittor, and the like.
159.
DISEASES OF THE HORSE
Wahatters
: "ysyzuq oy} suoulE
refndod AyZurpaeoxe st pooiq stqy, “periesoid ore ‘synuyseyo ‘sumoiq ‘sheq sv YONsS s1ofoo pryos aq} ING
‘punoj are si0joo [Ty ‘a[qeLrea ATZurpseoxe ore YYSIOY pus FYZIOM oY, “punoyAolZ oy} Sur[quieser ‘passey
-Za0] pus perpoq-443q sJoyyeI ore speuTUe oy} soUEIvodde [e1oUed UT ‘sDUvINpUs pue paads IO} pazou SI 47
“peaoiduit oq 0} spaerq aq} JO 4SIY 9} SBA SIG, “PUB[SUG Ul poywULsi10 soss0y Jo paatq perqysno10yL, oy,
‘unwasioHyy 24], Worl ydeis0}04g “ASHOP, ONINNOY agxAsHOAOMOH], — "19 “Ol
160 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The treatment is to let them alone as long as the horse
suffers no inconvenience. If slightly lame, remove shoes and
give rest. If lameness persists, try cold water bath and hand-
rub thoroughly; then try astringent lotion. If still-lame, try
tincture of iodine. Paint on twice daily until skin becomes
sore, then withhold a few days. If still lame, try Spanish-fly
or red-blister. Lastly, the firing-irons may be resorted to.
Such operations should be performed only by those familiar
with the work.
Fracture. — A fracture is a break in a bone. Fractures are
caused by blows, falls, collisions, and the like, as well as by sud-
den muscular contractions such as a violent effort to move a load,
a quick jump, a sudden stop or too sudden start, and like causes.
The treatment of fractured bones consists in replacing the
broken bones in their natural position and keeping them there
without movement until they grow fast together. This is easiest
accomplished by covering with two layers of flannel bandages,
smoothly applied. Over this bandage place thin strips of wood,
or other light material, so as to hold the bones in place, then bind
with bandages. These wooden strips or splints should be as long
as convenient. In the place of splints, plaster of Paris bandages .
can often be used to advantage. Such bandages may be ob-
tained from the drug store or made from cheese cloth and plas-
ter of Paris. After applying splints, they should be carefully
watched to see that they do not shut off the circulation below
the break. If the horse is to be maintained in a standing posi-
tion, a sling and “lean to” must be supplied to rest the animal.
Lameness due to ailments of the joints
There are three classes of injuries due to ailments of the joints.
These are, affections of the synovial sacs of the joint structures,
or of the bones and their articular surface, and dislocations of the
joints. The most important ailments of the joints likely to
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 161
cause lameness are wind-galls or wind-puffs; bog, blood, and
occult spavin, and thoroughpin.
Wind-galls, blood-spavin, bog-spavin, and thoroughpin. —
Wind-galls usually occur between tendons where small sacs,
containing synovial fluid or joint-oil, are situated to lubricate
the tendons as they play over each other. They appear in the
form of soft and somewhat rounded or elongated puffs of vary-
ing size. They may be located on either side of the leg. Usually
wind-galls are painless and cause lameness only under certain
conditions. In rare cases they solidify into hard masses. The
blood-spavin is situated in front and on the inside of the hock.
It is merely a dilated condition of the vein and is soft and yield-
ing to pressure. The bog-spavin is a round, smooth, well-de-
fined puff situated in front and a little inward of the hock.
On pressure it disappears from this joint to reappear on the out-
side and just behind the hock. Thoroughpin is found at the
back and on the top of the hock in the part known as the “hol-
lows” just behind the shank bone. These rarely cause lameness,
but may under ¢ertain conditions. They are rather unsightly.
These ailments are usually due to strains and overexertions.
In colts they may disappear. The treatment is to cause the
puff to be absorbed. Rest, cold water baths, followed by hand-
rubbing, will usually bring about the desired result. If they
persist, ,paint with tincture of iodine twice daily until sore.
Later try a dull red-blister, but never a sharp one.
Lameness due to ailments of muscles and tendons
Diseases and ailments of the muscles and tendons are a fre-
quent cause of lameness among horses, the most important of
which are sprains, shoulder lameness, hip lameness, knuckling,
sprung knees and curb.
Sprains is the name applied to the injury of the muscles,
tendons, or ligaments whereby their fibers slip or yield. It is
very common, as none of the muscles or tendons are exempt
M
162 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
from liability to sprains. Severe lameness usually comes on
suddenly after the injury. The parts become inflamed, swollen,
and tender.
The usual cause of a sprain is external violence, such as a fall
or a powerful exertion of strength and sudden twisting and
bending of the joints.
The treatment depends on the conditions. If there is severe
pain, hot baths will soften, soothe, and relax the part. If there
is much inflammation, cold baths will prove beneficial. The
animal should be given rest and kept quiet; hence the box
stall is preferable in this case to the pasture. If the lameness
persists, apply liniment and perhaps fly-blisters.
Shoulder lameness, the result of a sprain, is of common occur-
rence. Itis by the shoulder that the horse does his work, and
for this reason the part is particularly exposed to injury.
It would be difficult and not worth while to name all the
forms of violence by which the shoulder may be injured.
The chief causes are falls, violent efforts in starting heavy
loads, balling the feet with snow, and colliding with other
objects.
If not severe, time and rest will cure. When there is pain
and swelling, bathe in hot water for half an hour three times
daily and apply some astringent lotion. Warm wet blankets
are of great service. Anodyne liniments, camphor, belladonna;
either in the form of tinctures or oils, are beneficial. Lastly, try
dull blisters.
Sweeny shoulder is a rapid wasting away of certain muscles
on the outside of the shoulder-blade. While met with in horses
of any age, it is more common in young animals. If neglected,
it ruins the animal.
Sweeny is caused by straining, by severe pulling, and by
jerking movements. Idle horses when put to work are most
liable. The nerves or blood vessels of the affected part seem
to be injured by the pressure of the collar.
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 163
The treatment is to remove the cause. Rest the horse if pos-
sible; if not, procure a perfect fitting collar. Rub and manip-
ulate the skin and muscle. Later apply a mild liniment, and
hand rub. Two months should be allowed for a complete cure.
Light fly-blisters three weeks apart may be used.
Sore shoulders and neck, and galls are of frequent occurrence
among horses and are due to poorly fitting collars and harness
as well as to certain kinds of work when the load borne by the
neck is great.
The remedy is to remove the cause. Keep the parts dry.
Wash in cold or hot water, depending on conditions, three times
daily, and apply white lotion. If nothing else is at hand, and
the galls not bad, wash the parts in hot or cold salt water.
Dust on finely pulverized air-slaked lime. Oxide of zinc oint-
ment is good. If the parts become calloused, apply a dull red-
blister, which will absorb the callous. It will be necessary to
. give the animal rest while applying the blister.
Curb is a thickening or bulging of the ligament on the back
part of the hock, and just below the point, giving the cannon
a curved, protruding outline. A curb is easily noted when
viewed from the side.
The cause may be a sprain of the tendon which passes over
the back part of the hock. Hocks of certain conformation, such
as overbent, coarse, thick, or those too narrow, are liable to
this ailment. The tendency seems to be hereditary (see dis-
cussion in Chapter IV).
The treatment for curb is to give cold bath on the first
appearance of inflammation. Allow the animal to rest. Shoe
the foot of the affected leg with high-heeled shoe. This will
raise the heel and slacken the ligament. Apply ointments of
iodine. Later the application of dull red-blister repeated in
two or three weeks may prove beneficial. In cases in which
animals have a natural curby hock and it does not cause lame-
ness, it is best to let it alone.
164 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Lameness due to capped-elbows or shoe-boils
Capped joints and shoe-boils first appear as a soft, flabby
bag containing a little watery fluid.
Capped-elbows are caused by the irritation due to the horse
lying on the shoe when the foot is bent back under the body.
The treatment of capped-elbows is to devise a means for its
prevention. This is often difficult. The horse should be well
bedded. If the heels of the shoe protrude, they should be
shortened. A good method of preventing a horse from lying
on the heel of the shoe is to fasten a piece of wood, say two by
two inches, across the stall about one foot back of where the
horse usually stands. This prevents the animal from doubling
his fore feet back under the body when lying down.
Capped-knee is an enlargement on the front of the knee and
is somewhat similar to a capped-elbow. Capped-knees may
prove a great source of annoyance because of the unsightly
blemish they constitute.
‘While there may be many causes of capped-knees, they are
most common among horses addicted to the habit of pawing
while in the stable and striking the front of the stalls with their
knees, and among naturally weak-kneed animals which are sub-
ject to falling and thus bruising their knees on the ground.
The treatment is first of all to remove the cause. This, of
course, cannot be accomplished among animals with weak
knees, and this class is difficult to treat. The enlargements can
be reduced in size by hot baths and by rubbing with liniment.
A warm poultice of oil-meal or ground flaxseed enveloping the
entire joint and held in place by bandages is often followed by
an absorption of the enlargement.
Capped-hock is an enlargement of the point of the hock and is
somewhat similar to capped elbows and knees. It is commonly
caused either by the horse lying on the hock or by irritation due
to the repeated hitting of the hock against a whiffle-tree or
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 165
similar object. The treatment should be much the same as that
suggested above for capped-knees.
The shoe-bot! should receive attention. It should be bathed
in hot water twice daily, followed by a stimulating liniment well
rubbed on the parts. In some cases, however, astringents are
used in the form of poultices or pastes. An excellent astringent
for such cases is a putty made of powdered chalk and vinegar,
Fic. 62.—SranparpD Brep CARRIAGE STALLION ‘‘CARMON” AT THE HEAD
OF THE GOVERNMENT Stup aT Forr Couiins, CoLoRADO.
and the entire swelling is then covered with a thick coating of
soft clay made into a mass with water. This will dry and fall
off, after which it should be reapplied.
Lameness due to ailments of the foot
Since the value of a horse depends largely upon his ability
to do labor, which in turn depends largely on the condition of
his feet, it is, therefore, important that the feet be kept sound;
166 - MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and to accomplish this end it is necessary not only to know how
to cure ailments to which they are liable, but, better still, how
to prevent them.
Interfering. — This is the name given to the condition when
one foot strikes the opposite leg while traveling. The inner
surface of the fetlock joint is the part most subject to this injury,
although it may happen along the cannon, when it is usually
called ‘speedy cuts.’’ The hind legs are more liable than the
fore legs. As a result of interfering the skin and deeper tissues
are bruised, which often causes lameness and thickening of the
injured parts. It is often caused by faulty conformation ; from
the feet growing too long; from defective shoeing; from rough
or slippery roads; from exhaustion; from high knee action;
from fast work; and because the chest or hips are too narrow.
The treatment is often difficult, and perhaps impossible when
due to deformity or faulty conformation. When due to fatigue,
fetlock- and ankle-boots may be used. Proper shoeing will often
prevent interfering. The outside heel and quarter of the foot
on the injured leg should be lowered enough to change the posi-
tion of the fetlock joint, by bringing it farther away from the
center, thereby permitting the other foot to pass by without
striking, at the same time setting the shoe that is causing the
injury well under the hoof.
After removing the cause, apply cold water bandage to the
injured parts to remove the soreness and swelling in recent
cases. In older cases, when the parts have become calloused
from long-continued bruising, apply a fly-blister to the parts,
repeating in three weeks if necessary.
Overreaching is the condition when the shoe of the hind foot
strikes and injures the heel or quarter of the fore foot. It
seldom occurs except when the horse is traveling fast. It is
most common in trotting and running horses. Animals
that are subject to overreaching should not be driven
fast without quarter boots. It can sometimes be remedied
DISEASES OF TUE UORSE 167
by shoeing treatment, the same as for interfering mentioned
above.
Calk wounds. — These are wounds near the top of the hoof
and are caused by sharp-shod horses either trampling on them-
selves or on each other. Heavy draft horses are more subject
than lighter ones, and the fore feet more liable to injury than
the hind ones, though they often result in the hind feet from the
horse resting one foot on top of the other. The treatment is the
use of boots properly to protect the top of the hoof, and shoeing
the foot causing the injury with blunt calks. When the wound
is not deep and soreness slight, cold water bandages and a pro-
tective dressing, such as carbolized vaseline, will be all that is
needed.
Corns result from bruises of the sole. They occur on the in-
side half of the sole of the front feet. Corns often accompany
weak flat feet, and often result from poor shoeing. The treat-
ment is to discover the cause and if possible remove it. Give
the horse rest. Horses subject to corns should be shod with
wide-webbed bar shoes, as these protect the foot. As to a cure,
the blood or pus that has collected needs to be removed. To do
this cut a hole through the sole of the foot, allowing the fluid to
escape. Wash in warm water and apply a 5 per cent solution
of carbolic acid, turpentine pure or white lotion. When the
discharge has ceased, apply pine tar to the opening to keep out
the dirt.
Punctured wounds of the foot.— The foot of the horse is
liable to wounds made by some sharp object puncturing the sole
or the frog and injuring the soft tissues. Such wounds may
become serious and hence should receive close attention. Te-
tanus or lockjaw often follows such wounds in the horse. Such
wounds are caused by nails, sharp rocks, glass, wire, and the like.
They often cause lameness. The treatment is first of all to
withdraw the object. If pus and blood has collected, the hole
must be enlarged to facilitate drainage and the sole washed with
168 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
5 per cent solution of carbolic acid. Where there is much sore-
ness, the foot must be poulticed for a day or two. Keep the
horse in a clean, dry stable, as otherwise dirt will get into the
wound.
Cracked hoofs. — Cracks occur in the wall of the hoof. They
are designated by three names depending on the location. A
“quarter-crack”’ is when the crack begins at the top of the hoof
and extends downward in the wall; a ‘‘sand-crack”’ when the
crack begins at the bottom and extends upward; a “toe-crack”
when the crack is in the front of the hoof. They may be due
to severe work, injuries at the top of the hoof, and to a dry,
weakened condition of the walls of the hoof. When the cracks
extend to or from the top of the hoof, they may cause severe
lameness. As the horse steps the hoof spreads and the soft
tissues are pinched in the crack. Sand and gravel may get into
the crack thus increasing the trouble. The treatment is to
clean out the crack neatly. If ‘proud flesh” has formed, swab
with butter of antimony. Wash with 5 per cent solution of
carbolic acid, then apply pine tar to keep out the dirt and to
aid in healing. Draw crack together by shoeing nails driven
across the crack and clinched. Small clips can be procured
for this purpose. The hoof should be kept well oiled.
DISEASES OF THE LEGS
Scratches is an inflammation of the skin, especially in the
region of the heels, and by some is called “grease heel.’ This
ailment is usually due to nud and filth. The hind heels being
more exposed to the manure are more subject. The treatment
is to clean the parts. First clip the hair close to the skin, bathe
in warm water, then apply a warm poultice of scalded bran or
linseed meal, changing twice in twenty-four hours. After scabs
are removed wash, wipe dry, and apply an antiseptic as boric
acid, dusting into the sores, then cover with some oily dressing
as vaseline, glycerine, castor oil, or fresh lard.
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 169
Mud fever is an inflammation of the skin of the legs. It is
caused by the irritation of the mud and water in the spring of the
year, and occasionally by spattering urine against the fore legs in
the case of geldings. The treatment is to keep the parts clean.
Clip the hair, cleanse by washing with tar soap, wipe dry, then
rub with vaseline, castor oil, or glycerine.
Eczema is an inflammation of the skin. It usually occurs
among horses in good flesh, especially in the spring when the hair
is long. It is characterized by small eruptive blisters that dis-
charge a gummy substance. This dries about the roots of the
hair, causing intense itching, especially when the animal sweats.
The treatment is to clip the hair, cleanse by washing with tar
soap, wipe dry, then rub the skin with some bland oil as vaseline,
glycerine, or castor oil, or better still, oxide of zinc ointment.
DISEASES OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS
In considering ailments of the digestive organs, it must be.
remembered that by far the greater number of these difficulties
are due to improper food or to careless feeding. Hence in the
treatment of the various diseases of the digestive organs, the
method of feeding as well as the kind of food should receive
careful attention.
Ailments of the mouth
The mouth is subject to many injuries which may have a
serious effect upon mastication and digestion. When the horse
does not masticate his food, the mouth should be closely ex-
amined.
Sore mouth may result from irritating foods, injuries, and
germs of diseases, from severe bits and irregular or diseased
teeth, also from vicious habits. The treatment is to locate
the cause and remove it. Wash the mouth thoroughly with
warm water, then apply three times daily a healing lotion, such
as a strong solution of alum. Do not use poisonous remedies.
170 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The horse should be fed soft foods, such as gruels and
mashes.
Abnormal and diseased teeth. — The outer edges of the upper,
and the inner edges of the lower, back teeth may become sharp
and cut the cheeks or tongue. With a guarded rasp, remove
the sharp points, taking care not to rasp the grinding surface of
the teeth.
Decayed, ulcered, split, and broken teeth should be removed.
This should be done with forceps. Never punch teeth out if
it can be avoided, as the tooth is likely to be broken and some
of the pieces remain in the jaw where they cannot be removed,
and thus cause much trouble. Occasionally, however, it will be
necessary to cut a hole through the jaw bone and punch the
tooth out. In all cases the opposite tooth should be filed off
at least once a year.
Lampas is a swelling of the mucous membrane covering the top
of the mouth. It is caused by some irritation of the mouth,
and is more troublesome at teething time, after which it will
disappear. The treatment is to remove the cause when pos-
sible. In very bad cases a few pricks with a suture needle,
then bathing the mouth in alum water, will prove helpful. If
the mouth is pricked, the horse should be fed on soft food for
a time. In mild cases the feeding of ear corn will’ suffice.
Burning lampas is cruel and injurious and should never be
tolerated.
Ailments of the throat and gullet
Diseases and derangements of these organs are not common
except choking, the result of the introduction of foreign bodies
or of giving some irritating medicine.
Choking is the closing of the gullet with some foreign body.
It often happens when the animal attempts to swallow an
apple or turnip and similar objects without crushing them.
Some horses choke from feeding too rapidly. The treatment is
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 171
to remove the object by getting it up if possible; if not, by
pushing it down. If the object is in the beginning of the gullet,
it can be worked up. To do this it is necessary to use a mouth-
gag in the horse’s mouth to protect the hand, then as some one
presses upward and forward on the object from the outside of
the gullet, pass the hand into the mouth and if possible, with-
draw the offending object. It may require some effort to work
the object up-in this way, but it should be done if possible. If
all attempts to work the object up fail, then it should be pushed
down with a probang, — a smooth, flexible tube or rod. A piece
of three-fourth inch rubber hose is good.
Ailments of the stomach and intestines
Because of the small size of the horse’s stomach, it is often
difficult to distinguish between the diseases of the stomach and
intestines. While the stomach and intestines of the horse are
subject to a great many ailments, we shall discuss only the
more important, which are indigestion, colic, diarrhea, and con-
stipation.
Indigestion is one of the most common ailments of the diges-
tive organs among horses. It may be due to, both the stomach
and small intestines failing to digest the food ‘properly. Some
of the more important causes are the feeding of indigestible food,
improper feeding, bad teeth, which prevent proper mastication
of food, hard work immediately after feeding, and any cause
that profoundly disturbs the system. It may occur in either
mild or acute form. ‘If the attack is mild, the animal refuses
his food, lies down, and immediately after gets up, looks toward
_ the flanks, and frequently paws the ground. In such cases the
treatment is not difficult. Give the stomach and intestines a
few days’ rest in which to recuperate, feeding only a light laxa-
tive diet, such as bran mashes and fresh grass. Drench the
horse with two ounces of Jamaica ginger, dissolved in a pint of
fairly hot water, three times daily. In acute indigestion the
172 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
animal suffers much pain. The symptoms are much the same,
The animal, lying down frequently, paws the ground, looks
towards the flanks, stands stretched out, and shows evidence
of the pain he is suffering. Treat much the same as for mild
indigestion, but repeat the Jamaica ginger drench every three
hours. If there is much pain, an ounce of laudanum may be
given three times daily.
Fic. 63.— An American Trortinc Brep CarriaAce Horse possessing Goop
Form AND StTyLisH ACTION.
Colic. — This term is often loosely applied to almost any
ailment of the digestive organs that is accompanied by pain.
For our purpose we shall consider it under two forms: spas-
modic or cramp colic, and flatulent or wind colic.
Spasmodic colic is a violent and painful contraction of the
coats of the intestines. It is caused by some irritant in the
intestines, such as undigested food, large amounts of cold water
when the horse is tired and warm, sudden changes in the food,
such as changing from dry to green food, and similar changes.
The pain is severe and often comes on suddenly. The horse
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 173
stops suddenly, looks towards the flanks, stretches, and strains
as if trying to pass urine, paws the ground, kicks at his belly,
throws himself down, and rolls. He sweats, and the respiration
and pulse are increased in rapidity. After a time the pain
ceases, only to be renewed by another attack in a few minutes.
The treatment is to get the horse into a comfortable place
where he can roll without injury. Inject into the rectum eight
quarts of warm water, containing half a teacupful of glycerine.
This should be injected slowly so as to allow the animal to retain
it as long as possible. Drench with two-ounce doses of Jamaica
ginger as in indigestion. Sweet spirits of niter in ounce doses is
also good, as is a tablespoonful of common baking soda dis-
solved in warm water. To relieve the pain, give one ounce of
laudanum and half an ounce of spirits of camphor mixed in half
a pint of water. Rubbing the belly vigorously also relieves
the pain, as do blankets rung out of hot water and applied to
the belly.
In flatulent or “wind” colic the pain comes on more gradu-
ally and is continuous. The pain is due to the accumulation of
gas in the stomach and intestines, resulting from the fermenting
of food. Sometimes the pain is severe, other times it is not.
The large intestines are often extended with gas; in fact the
bloating may be severe enough to interfere with the horse’s
breathing. The animal acts much the same as in spasmodic
colic. He often attempts to lie on the back as this seems to
favor passing of the gas. The treatment is much the same as
in spasmodic or cramp colic.
Diarrhea or scouring. — This is an effort of nature to remove
some irritant from the bowels. The discharges are frequent,
the matter thin and watery, and often characterized by a very
foul-smelling odor. Often there is severe straining. Diarrhea
may be caused by overfeeding, by bad food, by sudden changes
in the food, by eating too rapidly, by drinking bad water, and
by driving immediately after feeding. Again, some horses are
174 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
predisposed to diarrhea, especially when driven on the road.
Since diarrhea is caused by an irritant, the treatment is first
to locate the cause and remove it. The discharge must not be
checked too suddenly. A half teacupful of castor oil, combined
with an ounce of Jaudanum and given as a drench with a little
linseed gruel, is excellent. Oak-bark tea, made by steeping the
inner bark of white oak, is good for persistent cases. A teacup-
ful of this tea combined with an ounce of laudanum should be
given as a drench twice daily. Horses that are subject to
diarrhea while on the road should be watered and fed as long
as possible before put to work. Water sparingly immediately
before and during the drive.
Constipation is the opposite to diarrhea. The discharge is
not frequent, the matter hard and dry and often passed with
much effort. The causes are rather numerous and varied.
Constipation may be due to bad food, lack of exercise, insuffi-
cient water, improper feeding, and is often due to other dis-
eases. The treatment is to reach the cause and remove it,
then feed laxative foods, such as thin bran mashes, linseed
gruels, and if possible, green grass. Injections of warm water
and glycerine are good to empty the bowels. If the ailment
persists, give small doses of castor oil or raw linseed oil, say
one pint, and if this is not effective, repeat. This is more satis-
factory than one large dose.
DISEASES OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS
The stable is the source of many respiratory ailments. Poorly
ventilated, poorly lighted, poorly drained, and poorly kept
stables are perhaps the source of more ailments among horses
than all other agents combined. Pure air, light, dryness, and
cleanliness are essentials to the horse’s well being. These can
be procured with small cost and should not be neglected in the
arrangement of a stable in which to care for the horse.
Catarrh is an inflammation of the mucous membrane of the
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 175
nostrils and nasal chamber. There are two well-recognized
forms; the acute and the chronic. Catarrh is often associated
with distemper. Acute catarrh comes on rather suddenly.
The animal appears dull. There is often a chill in the early
stages, followed later by fever. The membrane is dry and
rather red. Soon a watery discharge flows from the nostrils,
the eyes may be affected and tears flow down the cheeks.
The discharge from the nostrils becomes thicker and pus-like.
The bowels are often constipated. The cause is exposure to
cold and wet. The treatment is to give rest, provide comfort-
able quarters, blanket the animal, and feed laxative, easily
digested food, such as bran mashes, linseed gruel, and grass, if
inseason. A few days’ quiet rest, with pure air and good food,
will be of greater benefit than most medication. Give a table-
spoonful of saltpeter in the drinking water once daily. Often
much benefit can be derived from the inhalation of steam.
To do this throw a blanket over the horse’s head, place under this
a pail of boiling water containing a tablespoonful of carbolic acid.
Chronic catarrh comes slowly ; in fact is usually due to some
other disease such as a cold, though there are other causes.
The animal appears much the same as in acute catarrh, the
discharge being thicker, often yellowish to white. It may be
discharged in lumps. In some cases it clogs, and the face may
bulge from the pressure of the pus inside. Occasionally the
parts become diseased and the pus cuts through and is dis-
charged to the outside. Sometimes there is a cough. The
treatment so far as rest and food is concerned is the same as
in acute cases. Give the horse a tonic. Steam the head.
After steaming spray the nostrils once daily with the following:
two drams of boric acid dissolved in one quart of warm water.
Occasionally the pus collects in one of the cavities, and it is neces-
sary to cut open and wash out the cavity. The boric acid solu-
tion makes a good wash for this purpose. This may greatly
hasten the cure.
176 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Heaves, broken wind, asthma.— Many loosely apply the term
“heaves ”’ to all ailments where the breathing is difficult and
noisy. While the veterinarians define these ailments as if well
understood, yet they seem to be unable to do much for such
diseases. Heaves is often associated with indigestion, or to an
error in the choice of food. Overfeeding, especially with dusty
or moldy hay, is a common cause. Severe work immediately
after feeding may bring on the ailment. Again the tendency
to the disease seems to be hereditary, hence animals thus dis-
posed should not be used in breeding. Heaves is readily rec-
ognized by the deep, moist, grunting cough; by the peculiar
movement of the flank during expiration and by the dilated
nostrils which frequently discharge a thick mucus. These
are more noticeable immediately after feeding or watering.
“Heavy ’’ horses are very common.
When the disease is established, there is no cure. Proper
attention should be paid to the quarters and diet. Provide
light, dry, clean, and well-ventilated quarters. Feed easily
digested, nutritious, and not bulky food. Moisten the hay
and do not feed too much. Molasses as well as carrots, pota-
toes, or turnips chopped and mixed with oats and corn, are a
good diet. For medicine give arsenic, in the form of Fowler’s
solution, at first two teaspoonfuls in the food or water three
times daily, gradually increasing to a tablespoonful three times
daily and continuing for one month.
Roaring, whistling, thick wind. — These are due to an obstruc-
tion in some part of the respiratory tract which prevents the
free passage of air. The causes are numerous and not well
understood. It often follows distemper or injury to the throat.
The tendency is hereditary. Some animals seem more dis-
posed than others, especially those with long slender necks.
When the disease is established, there is little that can be done
by way of treatment. In certain forms of the ailment, light
blistering over the larynx will give relief.
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 177
MISCELLANEOUS DISEASES
There are many ailments of the horse, more or less general
in their nature. Some of them involve more than one of the
systems of the animal body. Many of them are not well under-
stood. It has seemed best, therefore, to set these ailments out
by themselves and discuss under one general heading.
Wounds are injuries to the living tissue. Their causes are
varied and numerous. First examine the wound to find the
depth and direction and to see that there is no foreign substance
in it. All foreign materials, such as dirt, hair, and the like,
must be carefully washed out with water to which a little car-
bolic acid has been added, about a teaspoonful of the acid to a
quart of water. Where there is much bleeding, this must be
stopped, at least in part. If the bleeding is from an artery, it
may be necessary to tie the end of the artery towards the
heart. In ordinary wounds the treatment is to hasten the
formation of a clot. To do this bring the edges of the wound
together and bind them there. If this is not convenient, apply
some material, such as absorbent cotton, to the wound; this
serves to gather and hold the blood, thus hastening the clot.
Ordinary wheat flour applied to the wound is good to hasten
clot formation. So is bathing in alum solutions. Cold water
is also good. In large wounds it may be necessary to sew the
edges together. In doing this much care must be exercised to
keep everything perfectly clean. The parts must be brought
together evenly so that the edges will not pucker. In stitching,
if possible use silk thread, but whatever material used, it should
first be dipped into a solution of carbolic acid. Make the
stitches independent, tying the two ends across the wound.
Place stitches one-quarter to one-half inch apart. Bathe in 5
per cent solution of carbolic acid. Protect the wound and re-
strain the horse so it cannot rub or bite the injured part.
Distemper, often called strangles, colt ill, catarrhal fever, or
N
178 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
shipping fever, is peculiar to the horse, mule, and ass, and it
is common. It appears as a fever lasting a few days, with
formation of matter or pus, in the air tubes, and often the for-
mation of abscesses in other parts of the body. It usually leaves
the horse perfectly healthy, but may leave it a roarer. The
disease is infectious and passes from one animal to another,
and few are the animals that escape it. Ordinary light cases
require but little treatment beyond proper protection and feed-
ing nutritious, easily digested food, such as bran mashes. They
must have protection from exposure to cold and damp or the
disease will be complicated with bronchitis or similar ailments.
If the case becomes serious, more care is required. “To reduce
the temperature the safest and simplest plan is to inject large
quantities of cold water into the rectum; or give a table-
spoonful of nitrate of potassium, as a drench or in the drinking
water once daily. To ease the cough and allay the inflammation
of the mucous membrane, place a blanket over the head, and
steam with the vapor of warm water poured over a bucket of
bran and hay in which belladonna leaves or tar have been
placed, as in catarrh. If the bowels are constipated, give in-
jections of warm water and glycerine. Physic should not be
given. If an abscess forms, poultice with warm linseed, chang-
ing daily, open and wash with 3 per cent solution of carbolic
acid.
Influenza, sometimes called pink-eye, bilious fever, grippe,
and various other names, is also peculiar to the horse, mule, and
ass. It usually appears as a fever; the animal seems greatly
depressed, the mucous membranes of the eyes are very fre-
quently enlarged and inflamed, giving rise to the name pink-eye.
One attack usually protects the animal from future ones of the
same disease, but not always. The disease is infectious and
contagious, passing from one animal to another. The treat-
ment is to give rest, provide comfortable quarters, and feed
easily digested and nutritious foods, such as bran mash, roots,
DISEASES OF THE HORSE 179
apples, good oats, and grass in season. The animal must have
protection and warmth or complications will develop. If the
cough is troublesome, steam the head as suggested for distemper,
using a piece of camphor about the size of a walnut in a pail
of boiling water and hold the animal’s head over it for fifteen
minutes at a time at least three times daily. To reduce the
temperature, inject cold water as suggested for distemper, or
give a tablespoonful of nitrate of potash, as a drench or in the
drinking water once daily. If the throat is sore, rub on a little
mustard once a day for a few days. Care must be taken to
avoid complications.
DIE TOE EN Ptas a
Tic. 64.— Hackney Mare ‘Kirry Grey” in Action. Owned by C. W.
Watson.
Azoturia is a form of poisoning resulting from high feeding
and lack of exercise. It is often called ‘‘bloody water” because
of the dense reddish or brownish urine. Azoturia occurs only
among horses that are in good flesh, when they are exercised
after standing in the stable for a few days. It often comes on
quickly, attacking the animal after traveling only a short dis-
tance. The horse becomes stiff, particularly in the hind part,
and in severe cases sweats profusely, the muscles tremble, his
180 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
hind parts difficult to control, and he goes down and is often
unable to rise again. This ailment varies much in severity;
in some cases the animal goes lame and if stopped and blanketed,
the disease passes away; in other cases the animal goes down
and dies in a few minutes. The treatment in mild cases is a
laxative, and graduated daily exercise. Sudden attacks will
sometimes promptly subside if taken on the instant and the
subject kept still and calmed by a dose of bromide of potassium
in half ounce dose and sweet spirits of niter in ounce dose. If
the animal does not calm, the bromide may be repeated in five
hours and the niter twice daily. Blankets wrung from warm
water and placed over the loins are also good to quiet the
animal. After the animal has calmed, iodide of potassium in
dram doses may be given three times daily in place of the
bromide. The horse should be given all the water he wants,
and if unable to stand, must have a thick soft bed, and should
be turned from side to side at least every twelve hours. It is
often necessary to draw the urine with a catheter.
Foul sheath. — Geldings are occasionally troubled by an
accumulation of the material from the glands of the sheath
which often hinders the free passage of urine. The sheath
may become stopped up and the retained urine increase the
trouble. In such cases the sheath should be well cleaned, and
then greased with fresh lard or vaseline.
Diseases of the eye. — The value of sound eyes among horses
cannot be overestimated. While there are many diseases and
injuries to which the eye is subject, we shall consider only the
three common ailments: simple inflammation, “moon blind-
ness,” and “pink-eye.”’ Simple inflammation is usually due
to an injury, or to some foreign bodies in the eye, such as hay
seed, chaff, cinders, sand, and the like. Strong light irritates
the eye. The eye becomes red and inflamed, the eyelids
swollen, and the tears are discharged freely. The treatment is
to locate the cause and remove it. Such bodies as hay seed
, DISEASES OF THE HORSE 181
and chaff can be removed by wiping the surface of the eyeball
with a piece of soft silk. To do this it is often necessary to put
a twitch on the animal. If any substance should stick into the
eye, it is best removed with the forceps. After the cause is
removed, bathe the eye with cold water and apply cold cloths
to reduce the inflammation. If this does not reduce the in-
flammation, bathe three times daily with hot instead of cold
water. Follow this by applying a few drops of a solution of
boric acid, a teaspoonful to a cup of water. This may be ap-
plied with a medicine-dropper.
In some parts of the country, moon-blindness is a very
common disease of the eye among horses. Its causes are not
known, though the disease tends to be hereditary. The eye
behaves much as in simple inflammation. The eye becomes
red and inflamed, the tears are profuse, the lids swollen and
kept partly closed to shield the eye. In a week or two the in-
flammation goes down, the eye clears up, save there remains
around the iris a yellow band. In a few weeks the attack
comes on again. These attacks continue until the animal
becomes permanently blind. The sight can, however, be pro-
longed by careful treatment. When the attack comes on,
keep the animal in a moderately dark stall and treat as in simple
inflammation. Bathe with hot water and apply boric acid solu-
tion. In addition give internally as a drench one teaspoonful
of iodide of potassium. Continue for five days, then withhold
five days, and repeat.
Pink-eye, as we have seen (p. 178), is a sort of influenza.
The disease affects the entire system and is contagious. The
treatment is to isolate the horse and disinfect his stall. Bathe
with hot water and apply boric acid solution as in simple in-
flammation. In addition give internally as a drench a heaping
teaspoonful of nitrate of potassium, twice daily, as this stimu-
lates the kidneys and reduces the fever.
PART TWO—CATTLE
CHAPTER VIII
CHOOSING CATTLE — JUDGING
In the choice of a cow, one must cultivate the same general
faculties as in the choosing of a horse. Familiarity with what
is wanted, powers of observation, and good judgment are
equally as important in the choice of a cow as in that of any
other animal. These can be gained only by study and prac-
tice. The importance of these faculties cannot be overesti-
mated in the choice of a cow, either for the dairy or for beef.
TYPES OF CATTLE
There are two distinct types of cattle: first, the dairy type,
adapted to the production of milk; and second, the beef type,
employed for the production of beef. These types are con-
trolled by the demands made on the body of the animal.
For example, in milk production the udder is perhaps as im-
portant an organ as any, whereas in beef production it is needed
only to sustain the young. Again, in the case of beef pro-
duction it is very important that the animal take on flesh and
that the body be plump and full, whereas in the production of
milk this would be considered an objection, as the food should
go to the production of milk and not to fat. These two
types are of necessity widely different and one can no more
have maximum milk production and maximum beef produc-
tion in the same cow than he can have maximum speed and
maximum force in the same horse, or in the same machine.
185
186 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The dairy type. — When we reflect upon the purpose for
which dairy cows are kept, the type becomes apparent. They
are useful for the milk they can
secrete, and not for the flesh of
their bodies; and as the faod
should go to produce milk and
not fat, therefore the body will
be spare and not fleshy. The
secretion of milk takes place in
the udder and allied organs;
therefore, the rear development
Fic, 65.—Jansey Cow “‘Torment- will be large. Furthermore, we
or’s Lass.” Owned by Hood :
Farm, Lowell, Mass. Dairy type. Cannot have large production
without a large factory; thus a
large secretion of milk calls for a large digestive tract, which
adds to the rear development (Fig. 65).
In general appearance, the form of the dairy cow resembles
that of a triple-wedge. Viewed from the side, she shows greater
depth of body behind than in front. Viewed from the rear and
top, she gradually widens from
the chest to the hips. Viewed
from the front and top, she
gradually widens from the
withers backward and down-
ward to the abdomen. While
this is the desired form and
many superior cows possess it,
yet exceptions occur, and
many heavy milkers are not Fic. 66.— Anaus Sreer. Grand cham-
associated with this form. pion at the International Live Stock
Fleshiness, however, is dis- P*Position, 1909. Beef type.
tinctly objectionable in the milking cow.
_ The beef type. — In the beef type, the food goes to the pro-
duction of flesh; hence a tendency to fatten is desired. The
CHOOSING A COW 187
quality of the flesh in different parts of the body varies widely.
In the meat-market, flesh forming certain parts of the body is
worth many times that from other parts. We demand there-
fore in, the beef type not only an animal with a tendency to
take on fat, but this tendency must be accelerated in the
region of the valuable cuts.
In general appearance, the form of the beef type resembles
that of a brick set on edge. Viewed from the side, the top and
bottom lines are parallel. There is no wedge shape; the ani-
mal is as deep in front as behind. Viewed from the rear and
top, the withers and chest present an appearance almost as
wide as the hip and rump. The animal is compact and broad
of back from shoulders to hips. Cattle of the beef type are
often referred to as “blocky,” indicating compactness and
squareness of form (Fig. 66).
HOW TO ESTIMATE THE AGE OF A COW
The age of a cow is a very important factor in determining her
present and prospective value. Familiarity with the characters
that indicate age, therefore, are often extremely useful. As in
the case of the horse, a knowledge of these characters is not
difficult to secure, but skill in their application depends much
on continued practice.
General consideration. —In estimating the age of a cow,
the order of the appearance of the permanent teeth furnishes
the best index, especially from two to five years of age. There
are, however, other general considerations that aid in estimat-
ing age, especially in the case of young and very old animals.
Size is the principal factor in determining the age up to a year
and one-half. In old animals the top of the head becomes
more prominent, the sides of the face more depressed, and the
hollows above the eyes deeper. With age the backbone be-
comes more prominent and often strongly curved downward.
Examination of the teeth. — While the order of the appearance
188 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
of the permanent teeth and their method of wearing are con-
sidered the most accurate means of estimating age among cattle,
Fic. 67.—Cows’ TEETH aR-
RANGED ACCORDING TO AGE.
Lowest row represents a 15
months’ old mouth, second
row 18 months’, third row 27
months’, fourth row 36
months’, fifth row 45 months’,
and the top row represents
the teeth of a ten-year-old
cow. — WALLACE.
yet they are not absolutely accurate
nor are they as dependable as in
the horse. Teeth in cattle vary in
much the same manner as in the
horse. See page 8 for variation in
teeth among horses.
As in the horse, there are two
sets of teeth, —first, the temporary
or milk teeth, and later the perma-
nent teeth. The latter differ from
the former in their greater size.
This replacement of the temporary
by the permanent is made neces-
sary by the increased size of the
jaw as the animal grows older.
The calf is often born with the
central pair of milk teeth, and the
remaining pairs appear within the
first month after birth. The calf
is provided with four pairs of in-
cisor teeth. There are incisors
in the lower jaw only, the upper
being provided with a cartilaginous
pad.
When the animal is approxi-
mately eighteen months of age,
the middle pair of milk teeth is replaced by permanent ones,
which are fully twice as broad as the milk teeth, hence easily
recognized (Fig. 67). The intervals between the appearance of
the succeeding pairs varies much according to the conditions,
but can be stated as approximately nine months, perhaps more
rather than less. In general the age of the animal at the time
CHOOSING A COW 189
each pair is up and in full wear may be estimated as
follows : —
First or middle pair of permanent teeth . . « 18 months
Second or first intermediate pair of permanent teeth . . 27 months
Third or second intermediate pair of permanent fees . 36 months
Fourth or lateral pair of permanent teeth . . . . 45 months
If there is a variation for this table, the cow is likely to be
older rather than younger than the teeth indicate according to
the ages. In fact, some authors say the first pair of permanent
teeth appear at two years of age; the second pair at three; the
third pair at four; and the fourth pair at five years of age.
The permanent teeth of the cow differ in many respects from
those of the horse. After they are up and in wear there is com-
paratively little change for a few years. They are never firmly
fixed in the jaw, as are the permanent teeth of the horse.
As the animal grows older the teeth become narrower, and
by the ninth year there is much space between them. They
shrink away from each other and often become more or less
discolored and finally drop out one by one.
Examination of the horns.— The horns of cattle are often
used in estimating the age. During the first two years the horns
grow rapidly, and in this time they make approximately their
entire growth. After two years of age, the growth is slow, and
each year’s addition is marked by a more or less distinct ring.
The first ring does not make its appearance until the animal is
approximately three years old. The age is estimated, there-
fore, by adding two to the number of rings present.
CHOOSING A DAIRY COW
The dairy cow is desired for her ability to secrete milk at a
profit. In estimating the value of a dairy cow there is no
method so satisfactory as the actual record of her performance
as determined by the scales and the Babcock test. Having
190 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
a record of the quantity of milk, the percentage of fat, and the
approximate food consumed, the value of a cow for dairy pur-
poses may be determined very accurately. If in addition to her
own record, we have a record of the performance of both her
dam and her sire’s daughters, we can speculate with some
degree of certainty her prospective production, as well as that
of her daughters and her sons’ get. Such records, however,
are seldom available, and in their absence we estimate the pro-
duction by those signs that most certainly indicate it. While
these signs are not always true indications of high production,
yet in the absence of more accurate information they are the
best we can do.
As in the choosing of a horse, it is essential that we examine
the animal in systematic order, otherwise some very valuable
character may go unobserved. Perhaps the most convenient.
and simplest method is to note the general appearance of the
animal first, that is, the form or shape, weight, quality, and
constitution, and if these are satisfactory, then make a more
detailed examination, studying each character in relation to
milk production.
General characteristics in dairy cows
By carefully observing the general appearance of the dairy
cow, one can gain a fair knowledge of her desirability. Very
often the general features are not given much consideration
and we pass to a detailed examination, with the result that
many very important characteristics go unconsidered. Some
persons have such an accurate ‘eye’ for appearances that
they are able to judge a cow very surely by a general look;
but for thost people this method is unsafe.
Form. — The general form should be considered from two
points of view: First, with respect to angularity; second,
freedom from beefiness. It will aid us to gain a clearer under-
CHOOSING A COW 191
standing of the form among dairy cows if we will remember
that there is extra heavy demand made upon four systems.
These are the milk-secreting system, the digestive system, the
circulatory system, and the nervous system. It is because of
the extreme activity of these centers that the dairy cow is in-
clined towards a given form. The milk-secreting organs and
the digestive organs having an undue amount of work to do
tends towards extreme development, while the other parts, be-
cause of their inactivity, are inclined to be narrow.
The typical form of a dairy cow is that of a triple wedge, as
already indicated. Viewed from either side she should show
greater depth of body behind than in front. The shoulder
should be lower than the hips and the floor of the chest higher
than the bottom of the udder. If a straight edge were laid
along the back and allowed to project forward, and a second
straight edge placed along the under line touching the bottom
of the udder, the abdomen, and the floor of the chest, and allowed
to project forward, it should meet the one from the back a short
distance in front of the animal. Viewed from the rear and top
the dairy cow should gradually widen from the chest to the hips.
Straight edges placed along either side and projecting forward
should meet a short distance in front of the animal. Viewed
from the front and top she gradually widens from the withers
backward and downward (Fig. 68). This illustrates the typical
dairy form and the one towards which most good milk cows tend,
though it does not follow that a cow, to be a good dairy animal,
must be of this type. Occasionally a good milker can be found
not of this form, but since most good milk cows tend towards
this shape, and in the absence of more accurate data, such as
the actual records, the choosing of animals possessing such
configuration is to be recommended.
If the cow tends naturally to take on fat, she is worth just so
much less as a milk cow. The dairy cow should be spare.
There should be an absence of fleshiness throughout, partic-
192 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
ularly in the region of the shoulders, the back, the rump, and
about the tail-head, places likely first to show fat among animals
possessing such a tendency. While this is the form ordinarily
Fic. 68.— Guernsey Cow “Dotty Dimpie.”’ Sired by Yeoman. She gave
18,459 pounds of milk containing 907 pounds of fat. World’s record for the
breed. Bred and owned by F. L. Ames, North Easton, Mass.
The Guernsey dairy cattle originated on the island from which they take their
name, one of the Channel Island group. They possess similar characteristics
to the Jerseys, but are somewhat larger, and the milk is hardly so rich. The
weight will run 900 pounds and upward. The color is either yellowish, brown-
ish or reddish, fawn, and white.
possessed by the best producers, here too exception can occa-
sionally be found. A cow may be found that is so efficient
with her food that she can take on fat and in addition secrete.
more milk than another and less efficient cow can secrete alone,
CHOOSING A COW 193
be she ever so spare. But in the absence of more accurate in-
formation, the spare form is to be preferred.
Quality. — The quality is a very important factor in the choice
of a dairy cow. It is well determined by the condition of the
skin, hair, and bone. The skin should be soft, mellow, oily to
the touch, and comparatively thin. Care must be exercised in
respect to the thinness of the skin, as a thin, papery skin as such
is usually associated with weakness of constitution. The skin
lining the ear, as well as that in the region of the udder, inside
the thighs, and at the root of the tail, should be of a golden color
and -the secretions abundant. The hair should be soft, silky,
. and comparatively short. Black hairs will usually be harsher
than white hairs, even on the same animal. While many good’
milking cows are loose in form, possessing an open conformation,
yet the bone should be dense and of fine texture. Dairy cows
possessed of a tight, heavy skin, coarse, harsh hair, and of a heavy,
rough, coarse bone are deficient in quality.
Constitution. — Because of the peculiar conditions under
which most dairy cows are kept, the constitutional vigor de-
serves much attention. Vigor is estimated by the expression,
by the condition of the hair and hide, and by the chest capacity.
The expression of the eyes, ears, and head should be mild and
lively, and the animal should be on the alert. The chest ca-
pacity should be large, particularly across the floor. A good way
to note the width of the floor of the chest is to place the hand
-along the chest between the front legs, as the width between
the front legs should be great. Narrowness between the front
legs is objectionable for the reason that it indicates lack of
constitution.
Temperament. — The dairy cow should have a good tempera-
ment. Among cattle there are two divisions of temperament :
the nervous and lymphatic. In.a cow of the former tempera-
ment, the nervous organization is strong and well developed,
while a cow of lymphatic temperament is sluggish in disposition
°
194 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and inclined to fatten. Hence, for the dairy we desire a cow
of nervous temperament, one that is sensitive and active, pos-
sessing greatest vitality, and that is capable of giving all organs
the greatest producing powers.
Detail characters of a dairy cow.
Having considered the general appearance of the dairy cow,
we should pass to a more detailed examination of her characters
before choosing. In order that none of these characters go
unobserved, they should be considered in order.
The head of a dairy cow should be long, lean, and feminine in
appearance. There should be freedom from coarseness and
heaviness. The face should be prolonged, lean, and the fea-
tures distinct. The poll should be prominent and the forehead
broad. The eyes should be mild, bright, and full. The nostrils
should be large, permitting of the free passage of air. The ear
should be of medium size, fine quality, and of an orange color
inside. The horn should be rather small and free from coarse-
ness, especially at the base.
The neck should be rather long, slim, and fine, carrying the
head gracefully. There should be freedom from fullness and
heaviness. The windpipe should be rather prominent, especially
up near the throat. While the neck should have a neat attach-
ment at the head and shoulders, yet it should not blend so
smoothly as in beef cattle because of the lack of flesh. The
animal should not have a “ bull neck.”
Fore-quarters. — The shoulders should be prominent, free
from beefiness, and rather angular. The withers should be
lean, thin, and refined. Both withers and shoulders should be
free from meatiness and heaviness. The legs should be straight
and short with fine shanks (Fig. 69).
Body. — The producing powers of the dairy cow depend
largely on the depth and volume of the barrel: We have already
noted theimportance of the digestive, circulatory, and respiratory
CHOOSING A COW 195 .
systems in the dairy cow. In order that these systems perform
their functions most efficiently it is necessary to provide them
ample room. The chest should
be deep, with large heart girth, ‘“ %
and broad on the floor, partic-
ularly as noted between the
fore legs. The ribs should be
long and sufficiently arched to—
provide a _ capacious body.
The abdomen should be large
and deep, indicative of much
capacity, and should be well F's. cis —Gusrnsey Cow, “Im-
PoRTED Hayes Rosiz.’’ Dam of
supported. The back should “Yeoman.” Owned by F. L. Ames.
be lean, backbone rather promi-
nent and strong. In many good dairy cows there is much
distance between the spinal processes, and the cow is said to
be “open jointed.” The loin should be broad, although the
space between the last rib and hip may be rather open.
Hind-quarters. — As a whole, the hind-quarters in a dairy
cow should be wide, long, and deep. There should be freedom
from fullness and meatiness, particularly at the tail-head. In
many very good cows there is a slight raise from the hips to the
attachment of the tail. The hip bones should be rather sharp,
prominent and wide apart, thus giving ample room for the gen-
erative organs. They should not be lower than the spine. The
rump should he long and wide, with the thurls and pin-bones
high and wide apart. From the points of.the hips to the tail-
head there should be a marked hollow, due to the absence of
flesh. The thigh should be outcurved and thin, as this provides
room for the udder. ‘A thick thigh and a full twist are de-
cidedly objectionable in a dairy cow. The legs should be
comparatively short.
Udder. — Too much stress cannot be placed on the impor-
tance of thoroughly examining the udder when choosing a dairy
We er
196 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
cow. If one can say that one organ is more important than
another, the udder is perhaps the most important organ in the
dairy cow. The udder should be considered from two points
of view: the size and form, and the quality.
The udder should be large. In form it should be moderately
thick, attached high and full behind, extending well down,
though not pendulant, and extending far in front. The quar-
ters should be comparatively even, with the teats of convenient
size and well placed. The length of the udder is important
since it gives a long line of absorption. It should be approx-
imately thirty inches from the attachment at the back to
where it joins the belly.
More important than the size and form of the udder is its
quality. Many persons have purchased a cow because of her
large udder, only to learn that it was large because fleshy
and not because of containing much milk. Perhaps the best
way to determine this is to see the udder milked out. When
empty, the udder should almost lose its form. It should appear
to consist of folds of soft, pliable, and loose skin. The im-
portance of this cannot be overestimated. Those of large
experience can determine by the touch whether the udder is
large because fleshy or large because filled with milk. When
filled with milk, the udder yields to pressure somewhat as a
sponge when filled with water. On the other hand, when large
because fleshy, the yielding is more like soft rubber. There is
a characteristic difference which can be learned only by ex-
perience.
While there are many defects of the udder, the mest common
are small front quarters, with the teats much higher above or
close to the hind ones; fleshy udders which reduce but little
with milking and yield a small flow; udders entirely deficient
in size and often with very unequal quarters.. One must be
on the alert for small teats, so deficient in size as to be very
inconvenient when milking.
CHOOSING A COW 197
The milk-veins should be large, tortuous, long, and branching.
These veins are considered important as they indicate the
amount of blood that has passed through the udder. The veins
usually lack development in heifers with their first calf. In
a cow that has recently dropped her calf, the milk veins should
be very prominent -and full, extending well forward, and much
crooked, passing into the body through large holes called
“milk wells.”
Milk signs. — In the cow, as in the bull, there are a consider-
able number of so-called milk signs that are relied upon more
or less in the choice of a dairy
animal. First among these
is the “open” organization.
It is said that an animal in
which the joints of the skele-
ton are loosely knit is likely
to have good powers of secre- aaherranrnesc Bl he
tion and assimilation. This
loose-jointednes oF lax organ ¥g,70.—Cosmssry Bots “Yeowan
ization is well indicated by 1, Ames.
the distance between the
vertebre in the spinal column, and this open or loose chine —
the jointing of the spinal column — is taken to indicate good
capacity to secrete milk. When the edges of these spinal pro-
cesses are very prominent on either side, it is called a double
chine, and this is supposed to be even a better indication of milk
production. A long tail is also thought by many to indicate
good powers of secretion, and we find many cattle judges who
criticize the animal if the tail does not reach to the hock and the
longer the better.
On the back of the thighs and above the udder, it will be
observed that the hair runs in the opposite direction from that
on the other part8 of the body. This up-growing hair upon
the rear of the udder, thighs, and perineum constitutes what
198 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
is called ‘“‘ the escutcheon ”’ or ‘‘ milk mirror.’”’ It is asserted
that the larger the area covered by this up-growing hair, the
better producer the cow will be. Guenon, a Frenchman, held
that the shape of the escutcheon was indicative of the quantity
of milk and that the size was an index of the length of milk
flow. Another character which Guenon associated with large
production was the “thigh ovals.” These are circular patches
of hair often found on the rear of the udder and just above
the hind teats. They are not present in all udders, but their
presence is considered to indicate large milk production.
There are many more of these so-called milk signs which have
from time to time and by different men been considered to be
a true index to the value of a dairy cow as a milk producer.
While it is no doubt true that many large-producing milk cows
have possessed all of these signs, it is also true that many more
and higher producers have been lacking in them, one and all.
CHOOSING BEEF CATTLE
In beef production there are two classes of cattle to be
considered: the breeding animals and the fattening animals.
We are concerned here in the selection of cattle to fatten for
beef. The beef animal at various times in his life is designated
by three names: store animal, feeding animal, and fat animal.
Cattle are spoken of as store animals when merely being carried
along, as through the summer, or winter, and before feeding
begins; they are called feeding animals during the process of
fattening; and fat animals after they are “‘finished’”’ and
ready for market.
For fattening purposes steers are preferred to heifers. All
things being equal, steers will feed out better than heifers.
This is due in part to the fact that steers are quieter in the feed
lot than are heifers. The females are often restless for three
or four days every three weeks on account of their periods of
heat. For this reason it is objectionable to have even a few
CHOOSING FOR BEEF 199
heifers in with a lot of steers as they disturb the steers at such
times. Furthermore, too, the market discriminates against
heifer beef, and the butcher will not pay as much for a drove
of heifers as he will a lot of steers.
General characteristics of beef cattle
In choosing feeding cattle one should note carefully their
general appearance. The form, the quality, the condition, the
uniformity, and the age are each important, and should re-
ceive due consideration.
Form of the feeder.—In form the feeder in general should
resemble a brick set on edge. It should fill out a parallelogram.
The top and bottom lines should be parallel. The shoulders
and chest should be almost as wide as the hips and rump.
Feeders should be “blocky,” indicating: compactness and
squareness of form. Those with long bodies are termed
“rangy,” while those with long legs showing too little depth and
fullness of body are termed “‘leggy,” both of which are objection-
able in a feeder. Steers standing high from the ground, light
in the flanks, and shallow in the heart girth rarely make good
feeders.
The quality of the feeder. — Quality in feeders is detérmined
in the same way as in dairy cattle, that is, by a soft, mellow
hide, silky hair, and a fine bone. The condition of the skin is
thought to be an important indication as to the probable feed-
ing qualities of a steer. If the skin is mellow and elastic to
the touch, it indicates good ‘‘ handling.’ Animals possessed of
such skins usually fatten rapidly, whereas those with heavy
stiff skins often fatten slowly.
The food influences the handling to a marked degree. When
liberally fed, especially on oily laxative foods, the skin is soft
and elastic and the hair usually silky and fine. On the other
hand, if scantily fed or with improper foods, the skin often
becomes tightly attached to the body, and it feels dry
200 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and paper-like. Feeders possessed of rough, coarse hair,
tight, harsh skin, rough, heavy bones with coarse joints,
prominent hips, and rough, open shoulders are objectionable
as feeders.
Condition of the feeder. —In inspecting a lot of cattle with
a view to choosing feeders, it is important to note their condition
in respect to thrift and fleshiness. The indications of thrift
are a good coat of silky hair; soft, pliable skin; a clean and
mild eye; absence of discharge from the nostrils; and the
dung or excreta of proper consistency, neither too loose nor too
hard and dry. Thriftiness is of much importance if steers are
to make economical and profitable beef-producing animals.
Other things being equal, the thinner the steer at the time of
beginning the feeding operations, the more rapid and the more
economical as well as the more profitable the gains will be pro-
viding, of course, that the animal is thrifty and that he has
not been stunted in his growth. If the animal has been
stunted, it is likely to prove a disappointment in the feed lot.
Uniformity among feeders. — Cattle chosen for feeding pur-
poses should be of uniform age, color, type, breeding, condi-
tion, and quality. While such uniformity will not add to their
ability to take on flesh or to make economical gains, yet it
will add very materially to their general appearance when on
the market. Such a lot of fat steers will command a much
higher price than a similar lot of mixed colors, or of mixed
types, or of mixed breeding, or even of mixed ages.
Detail characters of beef cattle
Beef cattle are as a rule not so well trained as are dairy
cattle, and it is not so possible to handle them effectively,
yet a consideration of details is essential if one is to make a
success of choosing animals to feed for beef production.
The head is usually considered a good index in the choice of
a feeder. It should be broad and short, as such accompanies a
CHOOSING FOR BEEF 201
low-set, thick, and wide body; whereas a long, slim face is usually
associated with a long, slim body. The face and cheeks should
be full and deep with a broad, strong lower jaw. The nostrils
should be large, indicating that there is an abundant lung
capacity. The eyes should be large, prominent, and mild, in-
dicating a quiet temperament. The feeder should be quiet, as
a restless, nervous animal usually proves unsatisfactory. The
forehead should be somewhat prominent and covered with a
mass of wavy hair. The ear should be of medium size, pointed,
and covered inside and out with fine silky hair, and should be
neatly attached to the head. If horns are present, they should
be of fine texture and free from coarseness.
The neck should be short and thick, tapering gradually from
the shoulders to the head. It should be neatly attached to the
head and smoothly blended with the shoulder.
The fore-quarters. — The shoulders should be well laid in,
smoothly covered with flesh, compact, and blending neatly with
the body. The crops or withers should be full, thick, and broad.
Both shoulders and crops should be covered uniformly with
flesh. Rough, angular’ shoulders, unevenly covered with flesh,
are among the most common defects of feeding cattle.
The body. — The chest should be wide, deep, and full, with light
development of brisket, yet sufficient to fill out the squareness
of the body. Narrow-chested animals are as a rule poor feeders.
The ribs should be well sprung and long, giving an abundance
of room for the vital organs, such as lungs and heart, and to
provide large digestive capacity. The back should be broad
and straight from the shoulder to the tail-head and covered with
thick, even flesh. The loin should be wide and joining the
body to the hind-quarters, with little or no departure from a
straight line.
The hind-quarters. — As a whole the hind-quarters in the
feeder should be wide, long,and deep. The hips should be wide
and in proportion with the other parts, but not prominent. The
202 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
rump should be long from the hips to the tail-head, with pin-
bones and thurls rather high and wide, but not prominent. The
rump should be level and free from hollowness. The thighs
should be full and fleshed well down to the hock, with twist full.
The fat steer. — In choosing a fat steer, one must keep in mind
the demands of the butchers. They desire a steer to dress with
a relatively small percentage of offal; with a relatively large
percentage of meat in the region of the valuable cuts; and an
animal that is in the proper condition to slaughter, that is,
neither over nor under fed. Fullness at the base of the tongue
and just in front of the point of the shoulder, a full twist, a
large mellow cod (scrotum), a full, thick flank that stands out
and rolls as the animal walks, fullness at the tail-head and along
the rump, indicate that degree of fatness essential to the highest
quality of beef.
CHAPTER IX
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE
PERHAPS no other question in connection with the propagation
and care of farm animals has received so much consideration as
that of feeding the dairy cow. Many and difficult are the prob-
lems involved. To catalogue and discuss them all would require
a work larger than this manual. It is not, therefore, in this
connection, proposed to enter into an elaborate discussion, but
only to call attention to some of the more important items in
connection with the most successful practice.
FOOD REQUIREMENTS FOR MILK
The quantity of food required by a milking cow depends on
many factors, chief of which are the kind of food, the quantity
of milk yielded, the quality of the milk, as well as the individual-
ity, the weight and age of the animal.
We have already observed, in connection with feeding the
horse, that foods vary widely in the amount of energy they con-
tain. In addition to this they also vary greatly in their in-
fluence upon milk secretion; that is to say, certain foods act
favorably on the secreting glands, whereas other foods tend
towards the production of fat. The exact action of the foods in-
fluencing secretion is not understood, nor is their ultimate effect
upon the animal definitely known. Chief among the foods
tending to economize milk production are succulent foods, such
as green forage crops, silage, and roots; by-products such as
bran, brewers’ grains, and dried distillers’ grains, and the legu-
minous hays, such as clover and alfalfa.
203
204 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The quantity of food which the milking cow requires will be
influenced by the amount of milk which she yields. This was
taken into account by Wolff and Lehman in their standard.
Thus we notice that a 1000-pound cow yielding 11 pounds of
milk daily requires 25 pounds of dry-matter, whereas one yield-
ing 22 pounds of milk per day requires 29 pounds of dry-matter
in her ration : —
Wolff-Lehman standard, showing the amount of food required per 1000
pounds live weight for the growing and the mature cow yielding varying
quantities of milk
DicEstiBLE NUTRIENTS
ConpDITION OF ANIMAL reece aa oe
Protein Fat
hydratcs
Growing Cattle, Dairy
Breeds
” he: Mo. “Weight 4
2-3 150 23 4.0 13.0 2.0 1:4.5
3-6 300 24 3.0 12.8 1.0 1:5.1
6-12 500 27 2.0 12.5 0.5 1:6.8
12-18 700 26 1.8 12.5 0.4 1: 7.5
18-24 900 26 1.5 12.0 0.3 1:85
Milking Cows, when
yielding Daily
11.0 Ib. of milk 25 1.6 10.0 68 Lise?
16.6 Ib. of milk 27 2.0 11.0 0.4 1:6.0
22.0 lb. of milk 29 2.5 13.0 0.5 1:5.7
27.5 lb. of milk 32 3.3 13.0 0.8 1:4.5
These standards were arranged to meet the need of the average
farm cow under normal conditions. They were not intended to
be absolute and fixed, but to be varied in practice as circum-
stances suggest. Of late years they have been subjected to
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE 205
much criticism by investigators in the United States, who feel
that they call for more protein than is needed, especially by
those animals giving a rather large flow of milk rather poor in
butter-fat. These investigators object to the fact that the
standards do not take into account the quality as well as the
quantity of the milk.
Fic. 71.— Houstsin-Frinsian Buut “Kine Secis” at stx YEARS Otp. The
sire of fifty A. R. O. daughters owned by H. A. Moyer, Syracuse, N. Y.
The Holstein-Friesian breed of dairy cattle originated in Holland. While the
Jersey is noted for the quality of milk, the Holstein is noted for the quantity or
the large flow of milk. It is often spoken of as ‘‘the milk cow.’’ In size they
are the largest dairy breed, mature bulls weighing 1700 to 2200 pounds, the
cows 1400 to 1800 pounds. The color is black and white. In America this
breed is very popular for milk production to supply the cities.
The quality of the milk as well as the quantity has an in-
fluence on the amount of food required by a milking cow. For
example, the daily production of 22 pounds of 3 per cent
milk involves the elaboration of approximately 2.5 pounds
of milk solids, whereas if the milk contained 6 per cent fat, it
206 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
would require approximately 3 pounds of milk solids, or an actual
secretion of one-half pound more solid matter in the milk. Thus
the cow yielding the 6 per cent milk would require more food
than the cow giving only 3 per cent milk.
Haecker has conducted many experiments in an endeavor to
gain some knowledge of the relation between the percentage of
fat in the milk and the food required to produce the same.
From these experiments he has calculated the nutrients —
protein, carbohydrates, and fat — required for the production
of a given amount of fat, and using this as a basis, has con-
structed standards for milk production :—
HAECKER’S FEEDING-STANDARD — MATURE cow !
Table showing food of maintenance per 100 pounds live weight and nutri-
ents required for the production of 1 pound of milk testing a given per
cent of butter-fat
PROTEIN CARBOHYDRATE Fat
For maintenance zs 0.0700 0.700 0.0100
Milk testing 2.5 ‘ 0.0362 0.164 0.0124
Milk testing 3.0 . . 0.0397 0.181 0.0136
Milk testing 4.0 : 0.0467 0.214 0.0159
Milk testing 5.0 4 0.0537 0.247 0.0182
Milk testing 6.0 : 0.0607 0.280 0.0206
Milk testing 6.5 ‘ 0.0642 0.296 0.0217
To illustrate the method of using the table to determine the
amount of food required in milk production, choose the case of a
1000-pound cow yielding 22 pounds of milk daily. Let us as-
sume that in one case it contains 3 per cent fat and in a second
that it contains 6 per cent.
1 Minnesota Agricultural Experiment Station Bulletin No. 79.
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE 207
From the table we learn : —
Pro. C. H. Far
Nutrients for 1 Ib. of 3 per cent milk .
Nutrients for maintenance 100 lb. weight
0.0397 | 0.181 | 0.0136
0.0700 | 0.700 | 0.0100
For cow weighing 1000 pounds and yielding 22 pounds of 3 per
cent milk : —
Pro. C. H. Fat Ratio
Nutrients for 22 lb. 3 per cent milk .| 0.87 4.00 | 0.30
Nutrients for 1000 lb. maintenance .| 0.70 7.00 | 0.07
Haecker ration required . . . .{ 157 | 11.00 | 0.87 | 1:7.5
For cow weighing 1000 pounds and yielding 22 pounds of 6
per cent milk: —
Pro. Cc. H. Far Ratio
Nutrients for 22 lb. 6 per cent milk .| 1.34 6.16 | 0.45
Nutrients for 1000 lb. maintenance .| 0.70 7.00 | 0.07
Haecker ration required . . . .| 2.04
Wolff-Lehman standard .-. . .| 2.50
13.16 | 0.52 | 1:7.
13.00 | 0.50 | 1:5.7
Thus we see that even though the flow was 22 pounds in either
case, the food required is much greater in the case of the milk
rich in fat. By comparing these with the Wolff-Lehman stand-
ards we note that they are approximately the same, except in the
case of the protein. According to Haecker the protein required,
even in the 6 per cent milk,is much less than that called for in
the Wolff-Lehman standard.
208 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
While no doubt some such formal standard as the Wolff-
Lehman or the Haecker should be followed in calculating the
amount of food required for milk production, yet it is well to
remember that there are many difficulties encountered in feeding
dairy cattle that standards cannot decide. Chief among these
are the digestibility of the food and the individuality of the ani-
mal. Our methods of arriving at the digestibility of foods are
crude, and foods vary widely in their digestibility, and either of
these difficulties may seriously interfere with such close figuring
as is recommended in the Haecker standards; that is to say, the
digestive values assigned the foods may easily be so erroneous as
to offset any saving that seemingly occurs from such calcula-
tion.
The individuality of the cow is a factor which standards can-
not take into account. Cows vary widely in the amount of food
they will consume for the production of milk, some requiring
twice as much food to produce
a given product as_ others.
Some hold that this variation
is due to the fact that the cow
will consume the feed, though
she does not need it, and that
lads - by limiting her ration she can
’ ae f often be made to produce at
a a profit. That there is a vast
Fic. 72.— Horsteiw-Friestan Cow difference among individuals in
ne teuten Canamrty.” Owned the amount of food required
for a given product must not
be lost sight of if one is to succeed in the dairy business.
The age of the animal also has an influence on the amount of
food required for milk production. This subject has also been
investigated by Haecker. His experiments show that the heifer
requires considerably more nutrients for the production of a
given amount of fat than the mature cow. From these experi-
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE 209
ments he constructed a standard similar to the one for mature
cows: — .
HAECKER’S FEEDING-STANDARD — HEIFERS !
Table showing food of maintenance per 100 pounds live weight and nutri-
ents required for the production of 1 pound of milk testing a given per
cent of butter-fat
PRoTeIN CARBOHYDRATES Fat
For maintenance . . 0.07 0.700 0.0100
Milk testing 2.5 . . 0.0378 0.188 0.0130
Milk testing 3.0 . . 0.0443 0.218 0.0152
Milk testing 40 . . 0.0573 0.287 0.0197
Milk testing 5.0 . . 0.0703 0.338 0.0242
Milk testing 6.0 2 0.0833 0.398 0.0287
Milk testing 6.5 . . 0.0898 0.428 0.0310
To illustrate how these differ from the mature cow we will
take the same example, that of a heifer weighing 1000 pounds
and yielding 22 pounds of 3 and 6 per cent milk. While a
heifer might not weigh as much as this, the figuring is on a per-
centage basis and the results will be the same.
For a heifer weighing 1000 pounds and yielding 22 pounds
of 3 per cent milk: —
Prorein| C. H. Fat Ratio
Nutrients for 22 lb. 3 per cent milk .| 0.98 4.80 | 0.33
Nutrients for 1000 lb. maintenance . | 0.70 7.00 | 0.07
Heifer, Haecker ration required. =. |: 1.68 | 11.80 | 0.40 1:7.5
Mature cow, Haecker ration required. | 1.57 | 11.00 | 0.37 1:7.8
1 Minnesota Agricultural Experiment Station Bulletin No. 79.
P
210 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
For a heifer weighing 1000 pounds and yielding 22 pounds
of 6 per cent milk: —
Protein} C. H. Fat Ratio
Nutrients for 22 Ib. of 6 per cent milk. | 1.83 8.76 | 0.62
Nutrients for 1000 lb. maintenance 0.70 7.00 | 0.07
Heifer, Haecker ration required .| 2.53 | 15.76 | 0.69 1:6.8
Mature cow, Haecker ration required .| 2.04 | 13.16 | 0.52 1:7.0
Wolff-Lehman standard - . . .| 2.50 | 18.00 | 0.50 1:5.7
According to this standard, the heifer needs considerably more
nutrients than the mature cow, and in the ease of high produc-
tion calls for more nutrients than the Wolff-Lehman standards
provide. This is due to the fact that she needs nutrients in
building up her own body as well as for the production of milk.
It is worthy of note, however, that in all these cases the Wolff-
Lehman ratio is much more narrow than the Haecker ratio.
Feeding-standards merely guides. — From the foregoing discus-
sion of the food requirement for milk it must be apparent that
while one should use a standard, it should be considered only as
a guide and be modified to meet the conditions, such as the indi-
viduality of the animal and the prices of foods. It is not prac-
ticable to attempt to follow standards with strict mathematical
accuracy, ‘any more than to follow them slavishly with fer-
tilizers or with quantities of seed per acre.
EFFECT OF FOOD ON COMPOSITION OF MILK
Of all the problems connected with the feeding of dairy cattle,
perhaps none has received more attention than the effect of food
upon the composition and quality of the milk. There is a pre-
vailing opinion among practical dairymen that one can improve
the composition of the milk, particularly with respect to the per-
centage of fat, by liberal feeding. This, however, is one of the
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE 211
results that careful investigations have been trying to secure for
the last three decades, and so far they have met with little or no
success.
It is asserted that the food may affect the milk in many
ways, the two most important being its composition and its
flavor. There are three ways in which the composition
might be affected: First, by changing the proportion of water
and total solid matter; second, by changing the proportion of
fat, sugar, and proteids; and third, by changing the constitu-
ents or consistency of the fat.
Effect of food on total solids. — In the great majority of cases
the conclusion of experiments is that no consistent relation
seems to exist between the quantity or character of the food
and the composition of the milk. In a few cases a temporary
change occurred in the milk immediately after changing the
food, but in most cases the milk soon returned to its normal
composition. While in a very small number of experiments the
milk appeared to undergo slight permanent change, yet one is
forced to the conclusion that the quality of the milk cannot be
changed at will by the feed. It would seem that the treatment
of the cattle has a greater influence upon the character of the
milk than does the food consumed.
Effect of food on the percentage of fat. — The idea prevails
that it is possible to feed fat into milk. This problem has been
the subject of careful experimentation. After a painstaking
perusal of the work one is forced to conclude that it is not pos-
sible materially and permanently to increase or diminish the
percentage of fat by changes in the amount and character of
the food, providing, of course, that the animals receive sufficient
nutrition in all cases. It may be possible with a cow that has
been insufficiently fed and has never had a chance to develop,
to feed her such an abundance of rich milk-producing food as
slightly and permanently to increase the percentage of fat in
her milk; but beyond this we probably cannot go.
212 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Food and flavor of milk. — It is definitely known that certain
foods, especially if fed in large quantities, impart bad odors to
the milk. Chief among the foods producing such deleterious
effects are cabbage, turnips, onions, silage, wild leeks, and the
like. It is held that such odors may be imparted to the milk in
two ways: First, by transference through the animal, and
second, by absorption from the air of the stable. Concerning
many of these points we have little definite evidence, and
there is great difference of opinion as to what odors are absorbed
from the air and what are transferred through the animal.
There can be little doubt, however, but that the feeding of certain
foods before milking imparts certain flavors to the milk, and that
such flavors are not detected when the food is given after milk-
ing. It is advised particularly that silage be not fed just be-
fore milking.
Order of supplying food. — Because of the supposed ill effect
of some foods in giving odors to the milk, the order of supplying
certain of these foods assumes much importance. In the case
of cabbage, turnips, and the like, it is perhaps best that they be
fed after milking. In the case of hay, which is likely to contain
more or less-dust, it is perhaps best to feed this after milking
also, and in either of these cases it would necessitate the feeding
of grain first. Perhaps the ideal way, when the food is of such
a nature to permit, is to feed the grain and succulent food to-
gether, sprinkling the grain over the succulent food, and then
when these are both cleaned up, to feed the hay. A good order
for the day’s work is as follows: In the morning milk first, then
feed grain, then silage, clean stable, water, feed hay, groom the
animals, then on pleasant days turn out for an hour or so. In
the 4fternoon water, clean stables, feed grain, milk, feed silage,
arrange bedding, and lastly feed some long hay. Sufficient
attention is not given to the day’s program, in the dairy
business.
Effect of food on quantity of milk. — Occasionally the state-
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE 213
ment that we cannot increase the percentage of fat in the milk
by feeding is taken to mean that we cannot increase the total
fat yield. This, of course, is not true. We can very materially
increase the total yield of fat by increasing the total flow of
milk by liberal feeding. This is demonstrated on every hand.
On the farms where no succulent food is fed during the winter
and very little grain, it is well known that the cows will give a
much larger flow when turned to pasture in the spring. On the
average the percentage of fat will remain the same.
WATERING THE MILKING COW
The milch cow requires a liberal supply of water. Shenot only
has the demands of her body to meet, but must supply that in
the milk as well. When we recall that cows have yielded over
129 pounds of milk in a single day, we can see the urgent need of
a large supply of water. The question is often raised as to meth-
ods of watering: whether to make provisions for a constant
supply of water, or to supply the animal at certain intervals, two
or three times daily. It has been fairly well proved that cattle
provided with water constantly give a slightly larger yield than
when watered twice daily, though the difference is not marked.
This observation has led to the placing of small troughs or vessels
in the stable immediately in front of the animals (Fig. 73).
If these vessels can be kept clean and free from odor, the practice
is a good one. In many instances, however, these individual
watering devices are traps of filth and foul-smelling water, and
produce anything but good results.
There are two factors that must not be lost sight of in water-
ing the milking cow: regularity and temperature of water in
winter. Whatever method of watering is employed, the animal
should be watered regularly and uniformly. When we recall the
large amount of water necessary to meet the needs of the high-
producing cow, it becomes apparent that she should not be com-
pelled to drink ice-cold water. There are many objections to
214 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
such practice; in the first place it requires much food to heat this
water up to the body temperature, and the animal will not
drink the required amount. Such large drafts of cold water may
Fic. 73.—Inreriork View or Datry Barn, sHowING Frepina ALLEY, Man-
GERS, AND INDIVIDUAL WaTERING Device. Bowen & Quick, Auburn, N. Y.
cause indigestion and in some cases may lead to abortion. To
take the chill off drinking water in winter is now an accepted
practice with progressive dairymen.
FEEDING THE MILKING COW
Since the quantity of milk produced by a cow depends largely
on the amount and character of the feed supplied, it is of the
utmost importance that the feeding be given careful considera-
tion. Developing the milking cow calls for skill second to none
other among farm animals. The milking cow should be fed
liberally, frequently, and regularly, the amount given being regu-
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE 215
lated by the size of the animal and by the quantity as well as the
quality of her milk. We may say, in general, that a good dairy
cow in full flow should receive approximately two and one-half
pounds of dry-matter for each hundred pounds of weight. Of
this, at least one-half to two-thirds should be digestible matter.
Cows giving very large yields may be fed considerably larger
quantities to advantage, while the low-producers should receive
less. The reader may recur to the general discussion of food
requirements as detailed on pages 203 to 210.
Feeding dairy cattle naturally divides itself into two parts:
the summer period when the cows are at pasture, and the winter
period when they are stabled and fed their entire ration.
Summer feeding of dairy cattle. — Pasture is one of the essen-
tials of successful dairy farming. The favorable influence of
early spring pasture on the secretion of milk is well known. The
flow is materially increased, as is the total yield of fat, though
the percentage of fat is perhaps not materially altered. True,
some years the percentage of fat seems to increase, but other
years it decreases in the same animal; and the food is prob-
ably not the cause.
As a rule, in the early part of the pasture season, the cows will
obtain sufficient food from the pastures alone, but later in the
season it will often be necessary to supplement the pasture.
This may be done by soiling, — cutting the forage and feeding it
‘to the cattle green, — with silage, or with grain.
Experiments seem to indicate that the feeding of grain to cows
on pasture is profitable only when there is scarcity of pasturage.
In fact, they will consume but little while the pasture is abun-
dant and nutritious. It would seem wise, however, in case the
animals eat it, to provide a few pounds of wheat bran or bran
and oats mixed particularly in the case of heavy milkers, as
this will insure maximum production.
Protecting cows from flies. — The marked falling off in the milk
flow of the dairy cow in the late summer and fall is looked upon
216 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
as unavoidable and is attributed to the worry of the stock by
flies. This conclusion is not borne out by the experimental data
available. Many experiments have been conducted to deter-
mine to what extent the worry caused by the flies affects the yield
of milk and fat. In these experiments the flies were excluded
from the animals at intervals and a careful record kept of the
production. These records show that the flies had very little if
any effect upon the yield either of milk or fat. The failure to
provide an abundance of succulent forage to supplement the
parched pastures, thus compelling the animals to graze over
large areas in the hot sun, seems to be the principal factor in
causing a decreased production in the later summer.
Winter feeding of dairy cattle. — Winter feeding is the most
expensive, and the profit to be derived from a dairy cow will
depend, in a large part, upon the economy of the winter ration.
This does not mean that she should be fed sparingly; on the
other hand, the good dairy cow should be fed abundantly
with a variety of nutritious feeds. Feed a variety whenever
possible. A good dairy cow should make economical use of
seven to ten pounds of grain
per day, and fifteen to twenty
pounds of dry forage, or better
ft. still, thirty to forty pounds of
Te ad | succulent food and five to ten
f « pounds of dry forage or hay,
i a the exact amounts to be varied
to meet conditions.
Fic. 74.—Houstein-Frresian Cow Grain, or concentrated feeds.
Daisy Pautine Pavu 2nd. s
Owned by John Arfman, — The more common grains fed
to dairy cattle are the cereals
—corn, oats, wheat, barley, and rye — and the mill refuse, of
which there is an almost endless variety upon the market.
The amount of grain that can be fed with profit to a dairy
cow will depend on the price of the food, the yield of the cow,
€
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE 217
and the price obtained for her products. Some have suggested
the feeding of as many pounds of grain per day as the cow
produces pounds of butter-fat per week. In determining the
amount and kind of grain it is necessary to take into account
the forage that is to go with it. For example, in many dairies
it is felt that bran may be replaced ton for ton by carefully
cured alfalfa hay, or by five tons of pea-vine silage when not
too succulent.
Dry forage. — The more common dry forage crops fed to
dairy cattle are clover, alfalfa, or mixed hays and corn stalks.
Occasionally pure timothy hay is fed, though this is not to be
recommended, particularly if cut late. Straws of the various
small grains are also used, but they are even more worthless as
a dairy cow feed than is timothy hay.. Hay cut early is more
valuable ton for ton, though the yield obtained per acre will
not be so great. It is preferable to feed the hay long, if
fed in connection with silage. The exact amount of dry
forage that should be fed cannot be stated, as it will depend
on the amount of grain and whether or not silage is being
used. Let the rule be to feed all the hay the animal will eat
with relish.
Succulent feeds. —Some kind of succulent food should be
fed the dairy cow during her entire lactation period. The
common succulent foods used in feeding dairy cattle are silage,
roots, or tubers. Silage is preferable, but if the herd is not
large enough to warrant the construction of a silo, roots make
a good substitute. The amount of succulence it is profitable
to feed will depend much on the attendant conditions. Thirty
to forty pounds serve most conditions. If the supply is limited,
it is perhaps best to make it last throughout the winter period ;
that is to say, if one has enough succulent food to feed twenty
pounds throughout the season or forty pounds for half the
season, it would be preferable to feed the twenty throughout
the season. This again might be modified by conditions; for
218 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
example, if one had a few cows only and fed but twenty pounds
per head and day, the silage would be likely to spoil on top,
in which case it would be necessary to feed it faster.
There are many ways of procuring succulent foods, such as
preserving green foods in the silo, raising of roots and tubers,
procuring refuse from the breweries, distilleries, and sugar fac-
tories, and soiling.
Silage. — Green food preserved in the silo is coming to be a
very common succulence for the dairy cow. While there are
many green plants, such as alfalfa, clover, cowpea vines, and
the like, preserved in this way, yet corn is by far the most im-
portant silage crop. No other plant will furnish nearly so much
silage per acre as corn. All silage contains a very high per-
centage of water, and for this reason is bulky. As a succulent
food for milking cows, good corn silage is hard to improve on.
It is very palatable, readily digestible, and stimulates the flow
of milk second only to grass.
Roots and tubers. — When the construction of a silo is not
convenient, one can procure a very good succulent food by
raising roots and tubers. While there are many roots and
tubers, such as potatoes, beets, flat turnips, rutabagas, and the
like, that may be grown, mangels are by far the most important
root-crop as a succulent food for cattle. These roots all possess
a very high percentage of water, even more than silage. As a
succulent food for the milking cow they are excellent, being
palatable, almost entirely digestible, and stimulating the flow
of milk. While the amount that may be fed varies according
to conditions, the same as in silage, one may feed from 35 to 50
pounds daily per 1000 pounds of live weight.
Soiling. — As we have already seen, soiling consists of cut-
ting green crops and feeding them fresh. Successful and
economical soiling means furnishing to the milking cow a sup-
ply of green forage during the growing season. It means that
crops and areas must be so arranged that one green crop will
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE 219
succeed another during the entire season. There are many
advantages of soiling, such as increased food production from a
given area, providing three times that of pasturage; less waste,
as the cattle are not constantly tramping and lying on the
forage; greater variety of food, as the succession of crops
provides many changes; increased milk and butter production
when prices are high, as in the fall; less discomfort of animals,
as they are fed in the cool stables; and less fencing required.
One great objection is the increased labor; such as preparing
the soil for the crops, seeding every few days, cutting the crop
of green material and hauling to stables,—the food being
green and heavy, —and the extra labor of carrying for the
cattle in the stable. -
Soiling crops vary widely in their composition and as a suc-
culent food for the milking cow. As a rule, they contain more
waste than silage. They are very palatable, readily digestible,
and stimulate the flow of milk. It is customary to feed some-
what larger quantities of soiling crops than of silage, 60 pounds
being considered a fair daily allowance for a 1000-pound cow.
In addition she must have her grain ration, the same as when
silage is fed, and a small allowance of hay of good quality,
clover, or alfalfa when possible. Instead of choosing coarse
grains, such as bran, distillers’ dried grains, and the like, it is
preferable to feed the more concentrated, such as middlings,
oil meal, corn meal, gluten meal, and the like.
When soiling is practiced, the area required to the cow and
the rotation of crops are interesting problems. Both vary widely
in different sections of the country, but on the average one acre
should support two cows, when grain and some hay is fed in
connection, as suggested. While the crops to be used in rota-
tion vary as does the time of planting, yet the following examples
will serve as a basis to be varied according to conditions : —
220
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Examples of rotation of soiling crops, showing kind of forage, seed to
acre, time of seeding, approximate areas, and time of cutting for u herd
of 10 cows, allowing 60 pounds of forage a cow daily or 600 pounds
a day in all, for different sections of the country
New York — Wine’s Sorting System as Basis
5 Montus— May 15 To Ocrosper 15—10 Cows—60 Pounps rER Cow DaiLty
. Seed per Time of .
Kind of Crop Sete Seeding Area, Time of Cutting
Rye . 2 bu. Fall l acre] May 15-May 31
Wheat ! 2bu. Fall 4 acre] June 1—June 10
Red clover . 20 Tb. Spring £ acre| June 11—June 20
Clover 10 Ib.
Mixed; Timothy . 10 1b. Spring 1 acre| June 21—-July 10
Red top . 15 lb.
, Oats 2 bu. :
Mixed . tok 1 hin. Spring 4 aere| July 11-July 20
s {Oats 1} bu.
Mixed { Peas 1ibu.Can-] Spring 4 acre] July 21—July 31
ada peas
Corn, early flint . 10-20 Ib. | Spring 4 acre| Aug. 1-Aug. 15
Corn, medium dent .|10-20lb. | Spring 4 acre| Aug. 16-Aug. 31
Second cutting, clover
and grasses . Sept. 1-Sept. 10
Corn, late, ‘‘Mam-
moth Evergreen”’ | 10-201b. | Late spring |4 acre | Sept. 11-Sept. 30
: Barley 1} bu.
Mixed {par Ad bu, Aug. 1-10 | % acre] Oct. 1-Oct. 15
1 Where alfalfa will do well it should be used instead of wheat.
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE
221
ILuino1is — Fraser’s Sortine System as Basis
5 Montas— May 15 To Ocroser 15—-10 Cows—60 Pounps per Cow DatLy
Seed i
Kind of Crop 8 a Pm Area Time of Cutting
Rye . 2 bu. Fall lacre| May 15-May 31
Alfalfa 20 Ib. Spring 4 acre| June 1—-June 10
Red Clover 20 Tb. Spring + acre| June 11-June 20
Clover 10 Ib.
Mixed} Timothy . 10 Ib. Spring 1 acre| June 20-July 1
Red top . 15 lb. \
2 Oats 1h bu. . =
Mixed | pats ihe. Spring 4 acre| July 1-July 10
Corn, early (2d cut-
ting alfalfa) 10-20 lb. | Spring 1 acre} July 11-July 31
Corn, medium (2d
cutting clover) 10-20 Ib. | Spring 1 acre} Aug. 1-Aug. 31
Corn, late . 10-20 lb. | Spring 1 acre] Sept. 1-Sept. 30
Rape 10 Ib. June 3 acre| Oct. 1-Oct. 15
.
WIsconsIn — Car.yLe’s Sorting System as Basis
5 Montus— May 15 to Ocroser 15—10 Cows—60 Pounps PER Cow Datty
. Seed per
Time of
Kind of Crop Aes Seeding Area Time of Cutting
Rye . 2 bu. Fall 3 acre | May 15-May 31
Alfalfa 20 |b. Spring éacre | June 1—June 15
Red clover . 20 Ib. Spring 4 acre | June 15-June 25
Clover 10 Ib.
Mixed; Timothy . 10 Ib. Spring dacre | June 25-July 4
Red top . 15 |b.
222 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Wisconsin — CaARLYLE’S SoILING System as Basis — Continued
5 Montus— May 15 ro Ocroser 15— 10 Cows —60 Pounps per Cow DaliLy
sa
Kind of Crop one Ee Besaice Area Time of Cutting
Mixea/ Oats - + «| Libu. April dacre | July 4-July 31
Peas . . | Lbu.
Corn, early (2d cut-
ting alfalfa) . .j| 10-20lb.| Spring lacre| Aug. 1-Aug. 31
Corn, medium (2d
cutting clover) 10-20 1b. | Spring 1 acre | Sept. 1-Sept. 30
Rape ... . .| 10lb. June 4 aerc}] Oct. 1-Oct. 15
FEEDING FOR HIGH PRODUCTION
Those who are raising breeding animals are often interested
in high records of production. As we have already seen, the
major dairy breeders’ associations — Holsteins, Jersey, Guern-
sey, and Ayrshire — encourage this by establishing registers in
which only those animals that make certain records may be
recorded. The feeding of a cow in order that she may make
an ‘‘advanced registry record,” as it is often called, is a
different problem from that of feeding a cow in a commercial
dairy. In this case, all is sacrificed for a high record of pro-
duction. The high record serves as an advertisement, and the
breeder is enabled to sell his animals at. a much higher price
than otherwise.
While the methods of feeding as well as the food used by the
different breeders vary widely (in fact no two are the same),
yet the general procedure is somewhat as follows: have the cow
very fat at calving time. To do this she should be dried off
some time before calving and receive extra care and feed. It
is true that a very fat cow is more subject at calving time to
difficulties, svch as milk fever, garget, difficult parturition, and
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE ai 223
the like, but these will be cared for by a painstaking and fa-
miliar attendant. The argument here is that the cow will use
this extra body fat to repair the waste of the body, thus en-
abling her to use a larger part of her food in the elaboration of
milk, some going so far as to say that a part of the extra fat is
used in the manufacture of the milk. While just what processes
take place in the animal’s body are not known, yet it is true
that such an animal will produce more than as if she were in
average condition.
When extreme high production is sought, the cow is fed and
milked four times daily. The time varies somewhat, but the
more common is 5 a.m. and 11 a.M.; 5 P.M. and 11 p.m. The
reason for choosing these hours is that the 5 a.m. and 5 P.M.
feeding and milking are at the same time the rest of the herd
is being fed and milked. Everything about the stable should
be quiet, and the milking carefully and well done (see page 260).
The feeds composing the rations vary widely, no two breeders
using the same. In all cases, however, the secret of success is
variety. Sometimes the grain part of the ration is composed
of a half dozen or more different kinds of grains; the dry
forage of two or more kinds of hay and three or four kinds of
succulent foods. The amount given is limited only by the
appetite of the cow.
FEEDING THE HEIFER
As the time of calving approaches, the feeding of the heifer
should receive careful attention. Do not feed too stimulating
or decayed foods, as they are likely to cause abortion. Clean
sweet clover or mixed hay or corn stalks and corn silage or roots
with a small allowance of grain, such as ground oats, bran,
shorts, or corn, will prove very efficient. Just previous to calv-
ing it is best to discontinue the feeding of grain, or at most
only a couple of pounds per day, and not increase again till the
heifer freshens. Immediately after calving, a warm thin gruel
224 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
consisting of oatmeal or bran should be given. Feed sparingly
with rather loosening foods for a few days or until the dangers
of milk fever are over. Then increase the ration gradually until
‘she is receiving a full feed.
It must be remembered that the heifer is doing double duty:
in addition to elaborating milk, she is growing rapidly, and if
bred, she must supply the fetus;
hence the importance of extra
care and, above all, liberal feed-
ing. To meet the requirements
of her growing body, the devel-
oping fetus, and the milk a good
ae supply of protein must be fur-
nished. Protein the young
Fic. 75.—Horstein-Frisstan Cow growing heifer must have if she
“Berry Lyons Netuerianv.”” jig to develop into a high-produc-
Owned by H. A. Moyer, Syracuse, . é
N.Y. ing cow. The treatment given
the heifer will largely determine
the usefulness of the future cow. Heavy feeding should con-
tinue throughout the entire lactation period, which should be
extended as long as possible, for the developing of a persistent
milking habit is favored by a long continuance of the first
lactation period.
SAMPLE RATIONS FOR THE DAIRY COW
The following rations are collected from various sources, and
furnish a guide in determining the kind and amount of feed
that should be allowed a dairy cow. They apply to a 1000-
pound dairy cow yielding 22 pounds of average milk : —
FEEDING DAIRY CATTLE
225
Ration
No. Ratio
Grain Forage
3 lb. corn meal
1 3 lb. oats 20 Ib. hay 1:6.7
2 lb. linseed meal
3 Ib. corn meal
2 3 lb. wheat bran 10 lb. hay 1:7.6
2 lb. cotton-seed meal corn stalks ad lib.
3 lb. oats
3 | 3b. wheat bran 50 lb. roots 1:6.9
2 Ib. gluten feed corn stalks ad lib.
3 lb. middlings
4 | 3lb. dry brewers’ grains 40 lb. corn silage 1:7.3
2 lb. linseed meal corn stalks ad lib.
2 Ib. oats
5 4 lb. wheat bran 40 lb. corn silage 1:68
2 lb. gluten meal hay ad lib.
3 Ib. oats
6 | 2b. wheat bran 50 Ib. corn silage 1:6.6
1 Ib. linseed meal hay ad lib.
1 lb. cotton-seed meal
2 lb. oats 30 Ib. corn silage
7 | 2 Ib. wheat bran clover hay ad lib. 1:74
2 lb. corn
2 lb. oats 25 lb. corn silage
8 | 2 Ib. corn 5 lb. clover hay 1:66
2 lb. cotton-seed meal corn stalks ad lib.
9 4 lb. wheat bran 30 lb. alfalfa silage 1:5.0
: 2 Ib. corn meal clover hay ad lib.
10 | 4b. oats 20 lb. alfalfa hay 1:44
2 lb corn meal
11 | 2 Ib. wheat bran 20 tb. hay 1:8.2
4 lb. cotton-seed meal
10 Ib. cotton-seed hulls
Q
2:26
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Ration
No. Ratio
Grain Forage
12 | 4 1b. wheat bran 30 Ib. corn silage 1:7.8
2 lb. cotton-seed meal cotton-seed hulls ad lib.
13 | 6 Ib. wheat bran 40 lb. corn silage 1:5.9
cowpea hay ad lib.
14 | 3 lb. wheat bran 10 lb. cowpea hay 1:5.1
3 lb. cotton-seed meal sorghum cane ad lib.
15 | 3 1b. cotton-seed meal 15 lb. alfalfa hay 1:4.7
cotton-seed hulls ad lib.} *
Grain Mixture ror Caur RaTIon
3 parts corn meal
3 parts ground oats
3 parts wheat bran
1 part linseed meal
AaeE, Mo. Grain Mixtore, Lp. SuMMER WINTER
6 2 pasture clover hay
12 4 pasture clover hay
18 6 pasture clover hay
CHAPTER X
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE
Tue breeding of dairy cattle offers a greater field of opera-
tion than any other in connection with the propagation of
farm animals. Perhaps in no other class is variation so great
or improvement so easily accomplished as in the improvement
of dairy animals, providing proper methods are used. The in-
creasing population is making increasing demands for milk and
its products, — butter and cheese ; — and while the supplying
of this demand, particularly in our large cities, is a very com-
plex problem, improvement in the production of dairy cattle
cannot be said to be a difficult task. In the past we have bred
dairy cattle without regard to their record of production. In
fact records of production were wanting, as none such were kept.
True, we have kept pedigrees of our dairy cattle for many
generations, but these pedigrees tell us only: the color, the
date cf birth, the owner and his address, the sire and the dam,
none of which supplies us with information as to the merits
of the cow. What is equally true, we have estimated pro-
duction of dairy cattle from time immemorable by saying one
cow gives so many quarts, another so many quarts more, and
still another so many quarts less; but such estimation is almost
worthless because of the great variation in the yield of in-
dividual cows from day to day. Perhaps two days a week a
cow will yield 15 quarts, the other five days only 10 quarts; and
in our estimation we are likely to remember the 15 quarts and
227
228 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
forget the 10 quarts. Again, for many years we have kept
a more or less accurate record of the show-yard career of our
leading dairy animals, but this in turn gives us no information
as to their producing powers, for it is now well known that ani-
mals with brilliant show-yard careers are not among the best
producers.
t h
J
,
Fic. 76.—AyrsHirE Cow. Grand Champion National Dairy Show, 1907.
Photograph from National Stockman and Farmer.
The Ayrshire dairy cattle originated in the county of Ayr, Scotland, where they
are used chiefly in cheese-making. They are trim and neat in appearance.
In weight the cows run about 1000 pounds end the bulls 1500 pounds. The
color includes red, brown, and white.
As has been noted in the chapter on general breeding,
variation is the basis of improvement. Without variation
there can be no improvement, and when great variation exists
much improvement is possible. Dairy cows vary widely both
in respect to the quantity and the quality of their milk. To
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 229
illustrate the variation in the quantity, we may compare
average production of all cows in the United States with two
of the high-producing ones. It should be borne in mind that
this is not a. comparison of the poorest and the best, as we
have no record of the poorest cows : —
Average yearly production per cow in the United States
Year MILE Burrer Year , MILK Butter
Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb.
1850. . .| 1486 61 1880 . . 2004 85
1860. . . 1505 64 1890 . . 2709 115
1870. . . 1772 75 1900. 3646 155
Production in one month
Naa MILE BurrEer
Lb. Lb.
De Kol Queen La Polka2d . . .| 3377 145
Colantha 4th’s Johanna... . 2874 138
From the table we note that the monthly record of our high-
producing cows is approximately equal to the average yearly
record of all cows in the United States. Colantha 4th’s Johanna
yielded 27,432 pounds of milk in one year, or approximately
eight times that of the average cow.
MILK-RECORDS
Record of performance among dairy cattle constitutes the
only method of determining their value. Without such records,
we would not be able to choose the very high- or the very low-
producing, or the profitable from the unprofitable animals. At
230 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
present, many dairy herds possess cattle producing at a loss —
not yielding sufficient milk to pay for the food consumed —
yet in the absence of accurate records the fact goes unobserved
and the owner does not know the profitable from the unprofit-
able animals. No person is able to go into a herd of ten cows
and pick out all the best by examination. Records are abso-
lutely necessary to determine profit and loss.
Method of keeping records. — Records are more easily kept
than is generally supposed. The time and cost of keeping a
record of the amount of milk and butter-fat yielded by each
cow is quite insignificant, especially when compared with the
value of such records. The materials needed are a pair of scales,
a hand Babcock tester with outfit, and a blank milk-sheet.
The scale should be graduated to tenths of a pound instead of
ounces, as the records are much more easily added. Chatillon’s
Improved Circular Spring Balances are ordinarily used.
The scales should be hung in a convenient place and each
cow’s milk weighed separately and set down on a Record-
Sheet, similar to table on p. 231.
Once each month the milk from each cow should be tested
for the percentage of butter-fat. To do this, one should take a
careful sample of the milk for two successive days. The sample
need not be large, but the quantity should be in proportion
to the flow. One-half pint saved from the two days’ milk-
ing is sufficient. This should be placed in a jar and covered
to prevent evaporation. In warm weather it is necessary to
put some sort of preservative into the milk, otherwise it will
sour, and in that case cannot be tested. For each cow there
should be a jar with her name pasted upon it, thus avoiding any
possibility of getting the samples mixed. By placing the per-
centage of fat thus obtained on the record-sheet beneath the
flow, one has a complete record of each animal each month. By
multiplying the total milk by the per cent of fat, one gets the
total amount of fat. This completes the record for the month.
231
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE
yey [BIOL
yez %
IPA [ey],
Té
0g
SA | OE
‘qT | “OT
‘qi | ‘aT
“EOE
‘qr | ‘aT
L|| “Wd
"aT | G1
a ee
Wed wv
‘Wd se
‘Ad “ACV
‘Wd “Av
e1uBoy
auld
Or AL
spurt
eqdiv
Ayneag
' MoO
40 GNVN
aquooaYy-TUL ATIVG
232 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The length of time required to weigh the milk and take
the sample will depend much on the activity of the one
doing the work. On the average it will require less than one-
half minute a day for each cow to weigh the milk and set the
weight down on the record-sheet. On the two consecutive
days that the samples are taken, it will require the same time
daily to the cow as weighing and making the record. Then an
hour or two once a month is all that is required to make the
Babcock test for percentage of fat. With this length of time,
one can obtain a reasonably accurate record of the performance
of every cow in his herd.
Value of milk-records.— The highest degree of success
cannot be attained unless we know the production of each
individual cow. In addition, such records serve a much larger
usefulness because they enable us to mate the animals more
judiciously. Not only are the low-producers unprofitable in
themselves, but in the absence of a record of their production,
they are propagated, and their offspring in turn prove un-
profitable.
TESTING MILK FOR BUTTER-FAT
The materials needed in testing milk for butter-fat are a
centrifugal tester, test-bottles, a 17.6 c.c. (cubic centimeter)
pipette to measure the milk, a 17.5 c.c. acid measure, and sul-
furic acid, all of which can be purchased for about five dollars
from any dairy supply company (Fig. 77). They may be
ordered of a hardware dealer. Sulfuric acid is sold at any
drug store.
Sampling the milk.— The milk to be tested should be
thoroughly mixed just before sampling. To do this, pour back
and forth between two vessels several times. With the pipette,
measure out 17.6 ¢.c. of milk and place in the test-bottle. To
do this, suck the milk up above the 17.6 ¢c.c. mark. Quickly
place the index finger over the upper end of the pipette, then
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 233
by releasing the pressure allow the milk to run down to the
17.6 c.c. mark. Place the point of the pipette into the test-
bottle neck, holding both pipette and bottle at an angle, then
remove the finger to allow the milk to flow into the bottle.
To be sure that every drop is out of the pipette blow through
it into the test-bottle. The sampling should be done in dupli-
cate to make sure of the results.
Using the acid. — Much care should be exercised not to
spill the sulfuric acid on the hands, clothing, or floor. Should
any be accidentally spilled, pour on plenty of water, then add a
little lime or baking soda. Always keep water and lime at
hand for this purpose.
After all the samples of milk to be tested have been meas-
ured, the acid should be added. To do this, fill the acid meas-
ure to the 17.5 c.c. mark and gradually pour into the test-
bottle, holding the bottle in a slanting position. By turning
‘the bottle ‘the acid will carry down all particles of milk left in
the long neck. Hold the bottle by the neck and give it a cir-
cular motion for a few moments, thus mixing the milk and acid
until no milk or clear acid is visible. The contents of the
bottle should be dark colored and hot. Do not allow the bottle
to stand too long before mixing or the test will not be clear.
Whirling the bottles. — The bottles and machine should be
hot; and if not a steam machine, use boiling water to warm up
the machine. Place the bottles in the machine so that each
will have another directly opposite to keep the machine in
balance. Whirl fiveminutes. Then stop, and with the pipette
or cup with small spout, add hot water to each bottle until the
contents come up to the bottom of the neck. Whirl two
minutes. Add hot water sufficient to bring the top of the fat
nearly to the top of the graduation on the neck of the bottle.
Whirl one minute. The fat should form a clear column free
from black or white patches in the neck of the bottle. -
Reading the percentage of fat.— Keep the fat warm. Hold
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
234
‘LV, UULLAG 4O GOVINGOUTY AOL WII] ONILSAL ANY Ssaquoogy ONIdAAA UOX AUVSSHOAN SALVUVdLY —
LL
Ol
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 2385
the bottle by the upper end of the neck, letting it hang in a
perpendicular position on a level with the eye. Read the mark-
at the top and bottom of the column of fat. The difference
between these is the percentage of fat in the milk. For example,
if the top reading is 8.2 and the bottom 5.0, then the milk tests
3.2 per cent.
Much care should be exercised in cleaning the test-bottles
as they should be perfectly free from dirt when used.
TESTING ASSOCIATIONS
In those sections of the country in which dairying is extensively
practiced, the forming of testing associations will prove very
advantageous. Cow-testing associations are organizations of
farmers having for their object the determination of the pro-
duction of the individual cow in the herd. While the methods
of procedure of these associations vary widely in different
localities, yet the following plan gives a general idea and may
be modified to suit the conditions.
General plan. — A number of dairymen, twenty to twenty-
five, having a total of 300 to 600 cows, effect an organiza-
tion, elect officers, adopt a constitution and by-laws, and
give the officers power to employ a man to do the testing.
This tester visits each of the herds once a month, weighs the
milk of each cow for a period of twenty-four hours, takes
samples of the same and tests for percentage of fat. In some
cases the tester weighs the feed of each cow and figures the
cost of the ration. The tester makes a complete record of the
amount of milk, the percentage of fat and total fat, and the food
consumed, for each cow in the herd, leaves a copy of this record
with the dairyman, and proceeds to the next herd, to return
again in about one month: In addition he gives all the helpful
suggestions possible, such as the successful practices of the
other members of the association. The entire cost to the
236 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
dairyman is approximately one dollar per cow in addition to
‘boarding and providing passage for the tester.
RECORDS OF PERFORMANCE AND OF BREEDING
In order to mate dairy cattle judiciously, it is absolutely
essential that we know not only something of the performance
of the animals thus mated, but the records of production of
their ancestors as well. Such records enable us to mate the best
with the best, and in so doing improve the strain with which we
are working.
In all breeding operations, it must be remembered that like
produces like, with the trend of the race downward. That is to
say, the offspring will resemble the parents in general, though on
the average they will be slightly inferior. While on the average
the offspring are inferior to their parents and while in general
they resemble their parents, yet individual offspring will vary
widely, some far superior to their parentage, while others will be
equally as inferior. This is where the successful breeder is
able to mold the destiny of his herd by selection. Possessing
a record of the production of each individual, inferior and superior
alike, he mates the superior to the superior and discards the in-
ferior.
In this connection it may be well to call attention to a rather
widespread but incorrect idea. We have certain breeds of
dairy cattle that are recognized as heavy milkers but rather
low testers, and we also have high testing breeds but rather light
milkers. Many a breeder of dairy cattle has fallen into the
grievous error of thinking that if he mates a heavy milker with
a high tester, the offspring should give a fairly heavy flow of
milk with a liberally high test. Such breeders have forgotten
that the drag of the race is downward, and that by crossing a
heavy milker but low tester on a high tester but light milker,
that on the average the offspring will be both a light milker
and a low tester.
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 237
The individual animal the unit of improvement. —In the
improvement of dairy cattle by breeding, the individual must
be considered as the unit. This applies to sire and dam
alike. The longer the line of high-producing ancestry, the more
certain are we that the offspring in turn will be a high producer.
The importance of this individual record of performance backed
by ancestors with similar records cannot be overestimated.
Having satisfied one’s self as to the individual excellency of
both sire and dam, he must even then be prepared to accept
some low-producers, for such is the law of chance, which accom-
panies all breeding operations. One may, however, rest as-
sured that on the average the offspring of individuals thus care-
fully selected will be equal to their parents, and that he will be
rewarded by obtaining a few that will exceed the records of
their parents.
PLAN OF BREEDING
If one is to succeed in breeding dairy cattle, he must proceed
according to some well-adapted plan. Before deciding on
a plan, one should familiarize himself with the details of the
business. This can best be done by visiting and making a study
of dairy farms both successful and unsuccessful. Compare all
farms thus observed, note the difference, the causes that led
to success on one, and to failure on the other. No sugges-
tions can be given as to a working plan, as all will depend
on the local conditions. The intending breeder should take
into account his likes and dislikes. Some may prefer the heavy
milking breeds, others the high butter-fat-producing breeds.
It should be kept clearly in mind, whatever the class or breed
chosen, that none but superior cattle are to be considered if
highest success is to be attained.
Raise the heifer calves from the best cows. — Many dairymen
are not raising their heifer calves. They are sold for veal,
whether from high- or low-producing cows. Near large cities
238 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the dairies are so crowded for room that there is often not
space enough to raise these calves; yet when possible provision
should be made for perpetuating the high-producing cows.
The practice of buying all the cows has a tendency to lower
rather than raise the average production of the herd, for the
reason that few of the kigh-producing cows are for sale, and the
dairyman is obliged to take rather inferior producers to supply
his customers with milk.
Coéperative breeding. — A very successful method of improv-
ing the dairy cattle of a community is to breed them on the
coéperative plan. In the localities where cow-testing associa-
tions exist, this is a very easy matter. It is also apparent that
the formation of cow-breeding associations, in connection with
cow-testing associations, would do much to advance the prog-
ress of the dairy industry. Each association should have for
its object the production and improvement of high-grade and
pure-bred dairy cattle, and should be formed of breeders who
possess the same class or breed of cattle. It would be the work
of such an association to protect the interests of its members,
provide suitable bulls each year for use on the cows owned by
the members, advertise stock, attract buyers, hold meetings for
discussion of cow-breeding matters, and educate the farmers of
the locality to better methods of breeding, feeding, and develop-
ing high-producing dairy cows.
FORMATION OF THE DAIRY HERD
Perhaps one of the most-discussed questions in the formation
of a dairy herd is whether to begin with pure-bred or grade
cows. By purely bred animals are meant those that are re-
corded in the herd books of their respective breeds; by grade
is meant the produce of a pure-bred sire upon a native or com-
mon dam. Opinions differ widely as to which is the more
profitable. Pure-bred animals are much sought for breeding
purposes; their offspring are therefore more valuable and com-
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 239
mand a higher price than do the offspring of grades. There.
fore, if the value of the calves is taken into consideration, a
pure-bred herd is a more profitable one, other things being
equal, than a grade herd. On the other hand, by the grading-
up process, that is, by continually selecting and breeding the
cows that are the best producers to a pure-bred bull, it is
entirely possible and by no means difficult to establish a herd
of grade cows that will equal in the production of milk any
herd of pure-bred animals. If, therefore, milk-production alone
is sought, a grade herd may produce as largely as a pure-
bred; but if the offspring is taken into consideration, a purely
bred herd certainly has an advantage over a grade herd of
equal productive capacity.
The enterprising and progressive owner will hardly be con-
tent with grades only. In the beginning, his bull will be pure-
bred; presently he will want a pure-bred cow to match, then
one or two more. Thus he will be steadily and properly work-
ing towards a pure-bred herd and gaining in knowledge and
experience at the same time. This will be found a much
better plan, especially with the beginner or those unaccustomed
to handling registered stock, than to purchase a pure-bred
herd in the beginning.
GRADING-UP THE HERD
We remarked just above that by the grading-up process it
is entirely possible and by no means difficult to establish a
herd of grade cows that will equal in the production of milk
any herd of pure-bred animals. This may seem a bold state-
ment, but it is the one that it is desired to impress on the
average dairymen. While the methods of accomplishing this
vary greatly, careful selection and judicious mating furnish
the key to the situation. There are no secrets in herd im-
provement. In this discussion it is proposed briefly to indicate
the lines along which an attempt to breed up and improve a
240 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
herd of common cattle is most likely to prove successful. For
it must be remembered that the large majority of dairymen
seeking to improve their herds must depend largely on the
individual animals they have already on hand, as the basis from
which to start the improvement.
The first essential is a record of the performance of each
cow comprising the herd. In herd improvement it is funda-
mental, and without it advancement cannot be made. No
one, not even the experienced dairymen, can afford to do this
upon guesswork alone. :
The second essential is the selection of a suitable bull. Three
factors in order of their importance are: his pedigree based
upon a record of performance, his individuality, and his ability
to get uniform offspring. Greatest improvement is not possible
with any one of these factors wanting.
The first generation— If the sire has been well chosen, the
calves in the first generation are likely to be an even and uni-
form crop, even though their dams be of mixed breeding. If
the sire be a pure-bred, the first crop of calves will be half-bloods.
If convenient, all of the heifer calves should be retained. A
great advantage in the rapid improvement of a herd of cows
under this grading-up process is the ability to raise a large num-
ber of individuals up to the time that they begin to produce, so
that a greater number may be available from which to select.
If often happens, however, that the circumstances of the owner
do not admit of rearing a large number, and some selection
must be made at the time of birth.
Select heifer calves from high-producing dams.— If some
calves must be discarded, owing to lack of facilities for rearing
them, let it be those from the low-producing dams. Retain the
heifers from the high-producing cows. This is in keeping with
our law that “like produces like.” Some have recommended
retaining the heifer calves from those cows that show variation,
particularly toward improvement, basing their argument on
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 241
the fact that such an animal is not likely to be prepotent, and
that such being the case, the calves more nearly resemble the
sire. There may be two objections to this. In the first place,
animals that show much variation are as likely to vary toward
the bad as toward the good; and in the second place, if the dam
has at some time made a low record, as she probably has if she
shows much improvement, it means that we are oftentimes
selecting our heifer calf from a low-producing dam. Such a
course is as likely to lead to failure as to success. There are
many experiments and an abundance of experience going to
show that greatest success is attained by retaining the heifers
from the high-producing dams and discarding those from the
low-producers. ,
The second generation. — There are many perplexing questions
arising in the second generation of this grading-up process. In
the first place, there is the question of the sire. If the original
sire was young at the time of his purchase, there will be a
number of his half-blood offspring ready to breed while he is
still in the height of his power. If the bull has proved a good
one, the owner does not wish to sell him, and he does not feel
able to buy another to breed the heifers. The owner is at a loss
to know what to do, as he has heard much against the practice
of in-breeding. In a majority of such cases, if the sire is vigor-
ous, he is the very best bull to breed to a lot of high quality,
uniform, and half-blood heifers, if it is desired to receive greater
uniformity as well as greater average production, even though
he be their own sire. On the other hand, suppose the owner
wishes to change bulls and procures an animal equal in produc-
tive capacity, but of slightly different type from the original sire.
In all probability these second-generation calves, even though
they are three-fourth blood, will not be nearly so uniform a crop
as the first-generation or half-blood calves. Experience has
shown that the second generation is not nearly so uniform as
the first, and frequently shows little if any increase in average
R
242 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
production, although a few individuals may show marked
improvement. This will prove the skill and patience of the
breeder.
Continued judicious selection the means of improvement. —
The few individuals of the second generation that show the
marked improvement are the ones to be relied on to carry
the herd forward in the improvement. Their female offspring
will in turn show many inferior to themselves, with only a few
superior ones. It is the continued and judicious selection from
the high-producing and the discarding of the low-producing
that improves the general average of the herd. As generations
come and go, characteristics of the pure-bred sire will become
more and more fixed and uniform. Reversions towards the
low production of the common-bred ancestors will be less and
less frequent. The herd will be practically pure-bred from the
standpoint of the capacity of the individual animals to re-
produce their characteristics, although they can never become
eligible to registration in a herd-book.
This plan of grading-up has been successfully practiced in the
improvement of a large number of herds of dairy cattle, and is
entirely within the reach of any one. As an example of this
plan there is shown in the table (p. 243) the improvement that
was secured in the case of a herd descending from a single in-
ferior cow.
The table shows a very rapid improvement for the first two
generations, and for the next three it just about holds its own.
There are two reasons why the third, fourth, and fifth genera-
tions do not equal the second: first, because they contain many
heifers which have not yet reached maturity and serve to pull
the general average down; and second, there are a large number
of animals taken into account.
While the plan has been applied to the improvement of a herd
starting with a common cow, it should be remembered that the
same principles apply equally well to any herd. There are very
243
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE
i
.
tin descendants of an inferior cow by pure-bred
The number underneath each animal indicates her average yearly
record in pounds of fat
.
Table show
ing improvemen
bulls.
; the years show the number of years in milk
“AI 826
“1 863-34 T
edaUIQ "D
“A SLE—44 F
nW ‘OD
SIVAINY Z
NOILVHANGD
Hiatt
“Al O86
SIVWINY 6
NOILVYANGY)
HLU00,T
“d1 886
“QI g8T—I4 T
auUlloy “5
“qI L9¢—"14 €
BUISIC “D
“q10gt—s4 T
BqyRpOIeD "4H
“QI 363-14 F
epquiey “5
“qT OTe—"s4 2
uopsdg “5
“qIZTE—14 6
eydTy "D
“ql g0g—I4 9
lo ed *D
SIVWINY OT
NOILVEENGY)
que,
“41 908
“QL 908-14 9
Bq D
“AI 68-14 ¢
“q1 Tog—24 6
spd “D
“qT 98Z—"IK g
purpeyieN “OD
SIVWINY ¢
NOLLVYSNGY)
anooag
“OL Sh
"I SLZ—“I4 ¢
UP BISHD
“qT 9Et—"I4 g
PE BISTID
} GI LLT—44 §T
PS BISI1D
STIVNINY ¢
NOLLVUSNA
LSU
“A 661 ‘odBIDAY
“AI 661-14 F }
BSD
244 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
few herds, even the best, in which the intelligent application of
these principles will not result in marked improvement.
THE DAIRY BULL
The bull is of prime importance in breeding dairy cattle. We
have already observed that the male is concerned with so many
more individual offspring that his influence is much more ex-
tensive because of the increased number he influences. To
secure the improvement in a herd of cattle through the females
would require the use of twenty-five or more superior cows to
accomplish the same results that might be secured by the use
of a single bull, and even then there would be less uniformity
in the offspring. This is due merely to the fact that the bull
controls one-half the characters in the entire crop and not to any
special prepotency on his part.
Choosing a dairy bull. — In choosing dairy bulls, it may be
noted that they have many points in common with the dairy
cow, particularly features of type, such as were fully discussed
in the chapter on choosing a dairy cow, page 189; but it is a
much more difficult task to choose a bull than it is to discrimi-
nate between cows.
The first and most important attribute is good pedigree,
based on a record of performance. Not only should the dams
in the pedigree have good records of performance, but the
males should also be getters of performers. The longer the
line of high-producing ancestry, the more certain are the off-
spring to be high producers.
After having satisfied ourselves with respect to the pedigree,
as based on records of performance, then we may take into
account the individuality of the bull. In no case should one
sacrifice individuality, no matter how perfect, for performance.
It would be unpardonable to choose a bull, if he was so weak
as to be unable to propagate his kind. The constitutional
vigor and prepotency are indicated to a certain extent by the
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 245
individual. The bull should possess a masculine appearance.
The features of the head should be strong, with the eyes mild
and clear. The chest should be deep, the heart girth large,
the hide loose and pliable, and the hair fine and silky, as these
are associated with constitution, vigor, and thrift.
Fic. 78.— Jersey Buut ‘‘'Hoop Farm Torono.” Sire of ten daughters in the
Register of Merit. Owned by Hood Farm, Lowell, Mass.
The Jersey breed of dairy cattle, a native of the Island of Jersey, one of the
Channel Islands, near England, is unexcelled in the quality and richness of the
milk. By many it is considered the ‘‘butter cow.’’ In size the animals are
small, weighing 700 and upward. The color is fawn, being of many shades,
yellowish, reddish, grayish, brownish, and silver fawn. This breed is popular
in the United States.
Uniformity of get.— The importance of uniformity among
the calves sired by a bull is of much importance. At the present
time, lack of uniformity among our dairy cattle is one of the most
noticeable defects. This is due in a large measure to our
246 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
utter lack of system in breeding. When once we have decided
on the breed, there should be no further change. Were this
done for a few generations, until certain breeds became identi-
fied with certain localities, then we could depend on uniformity
of the entire crop of calves sired in any given season.
Number of cows to the bull. — The number of cows that it is
safe to breed to a bull in a season depends much on the breed.
The bulls of the heavy phlegmatic beef breeds are not so prolific
as the lighter more active dairy breeds. The same is true among
the various dairy breeds, but to a less marked extent. It is
entirely safe to count on a bull serving twenty-five cows, and
when the bulls are exceedingly strong and vigorous, they may
far exceed this number.
THE DAIRY COW
While all dairy cows must be bred in order that they may
freshen, the cows to which we look to replenish the herd should
be carefully selected. The first and by far the most important
factor to take into consideration is pedigree based upon the
record of performance. After having satisfied ourselves as to
the performance, then we may look to the individuality, as
suggested in the chapter on choosing a cow (p. 189).
Productive period in dairy cattle. — The most fertile period in
the cow’s life is usually from two to eight years of age. In ex-
ceptional cases this period may be extended both ways. Just
how young it is best to breed heifers is a question concerning
which there is great difference of opinion. Some argue that
secreting milk is a kind of habit, and the sooner the young ani-
mal becomes accustomed to it the better it is for her; whereas
others say that the cow should not be bred until she gets her
growth, contending that the demands made on the young
animal by the growing fetus and her own growth are too severe,
and that she is likely to be stunted.
The advisability of breeding a heifer so as to have her drop
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE Q47
the calf at two years of age depends much on the individual.
If she is vigorous, healthy, and well grown, it will probably be
better to breed her rather young, and encourage the milking
habit from the beginning. Once giving milk, keep her at it as
long as possible, for the cow that dries off after secreting milk a
few months is unprofitable at best. Do not breed her a second
time till rather late, as the effect of the animal again becoming
pregnant is to decrease the flow of milk. This practice has much
to recommend it. In the first place, unbred heifers are in heat
two or three days every three weeks, and these constant recur-
ring periods are as much of a check on the growth of the heifer
as that of the growth of the fetus. Again, if the cow is let run
in this unbred state, the reproductive organs are likely to be-
come deranged and the animal barren. The animal bred young
in life will prove a more regular breeder. The ‘coridition of
pregnancy seems to have a marked stimulating effect on the
system of the heifer. The assimilation is much better, and if
provided with an abundance of nutritious food, she will make
a greater growth during pregnancy than otherwise. It is easier
to develop the: milk-secreting organs at this early period.
Therefore, if the heifer is thrifty and well grown, it would seem
best from a practical point of view to breed her young.
At about eight or ten years of age, the productive powers
of most dairy cows begin to wane, although many of them are
reliable breeders well into the teens. Above twelve years of
age, however, it is rarely that they will breed, and when an
animal of this age persistently fails to conceive, it is perhaps
best to dispose of her as the chances of her propagating are
exceedingly remote.
Season of the year to breed. — The natural time for calves to
arrive is in the spring. Under ordinary farm conditions this
is the customary time for having the cows drop their calves.
There are many advantages in having the calves come at this
time. The pregnant cow can be turned to grass, which is the
248 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
natural food for pregnant animals, and need not receive so close
attention as would be necessary were she confined to the stable
and fed dry foods. The warm weather approaching, the calf
is more easily cared for than in the winter. There is natural
grass for the calf to feed on, and nothing is better.
Fall calving is much to be preferred on dairy farms or where
high production is desired. There are many reasons for this.
By having the calves dropped in the fall the cows are giving
their maximum yield when the price of dairy products is high.
While the calf is more trouble to care for in winter, this is the
idle season, and more attention can be givenit. Again, on the
average the flow can be kept up longer, and the total produc-
tion made much more when the cow freshens in the fall. This
is due, in part, to the fact that she is turned to pasture just as
her flow begins to wane, which causes it to rise again. On the
other hand, if the cow freshens in the spring, the animals give
their maximum yield when the price of dairy products is low,
and then the dry fall coming on cuts their flow, then later they
are put on the dry food of winter, which still further reduces the
yield, so that at the time dairy products are high, the animals
are giving very little or no milk at all.
A cow bred Jan. 1 should calve Oct. 10, or one bred June 23
should calve April 1, according to the table on next page.
Parturition time.— The average period of gestation in the cow
is properly placed at nine months, more accurately perhaps two
hundred and eighty-three days, but it may vary either way.
A calf born at the two hundred and fortieth day may live, and
a case is reported where a thrifty calf was dropped on the three
hundred and thirty-fifth day. Because of the uncertainty of the
period, the cow should be closely watched from the eighth month
until calving. There are certain signs of the near approach of
parturition that rarely fail. The udder becomes enlarged, firm
and resistant to the touch, with more or less swellingin front, and
secretes a milky fluid; the vulva becomes enlarged and swollen,
249
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE
6 ;|1e 6 |T€ 6 |Te| 6 | Ie 6 | 1g L |18 6 | Te
8 j|oe| s |oe}] s joe] 6 |og] 8 joe] 8 jog] 8 joe] 8 {oe |9 {oe {9 | 08 8 | 08
2 |oz| 2 |6z| 2 |6e| 8 |ez| 2 |6z| 2 |6e|] 2 |62) 2 |62 ]}¢S | 66 }E | 6 2 | 6%
9 |sz| 9 |sz} 9 |sa! z2 |92] 9 |82] 9 |821 9 |82] 9 |82 |b | 82 |% | 82 [24 | Bel 9 | 8
¢ |22| ¢ {22} ¢ |ze[ 9 |22| ¢ |2e] ¢ {42} ¢ |22] S$ |2a]e |24e]e |24e]9 | 2a] ¢ | 4
% |oz| + |oz; & |9z} ¢ |9z] > |92| F | 92] & | 93] F 19% |e |9%2 |e | 9% |S Joc] F | 98
¢ |ez|e lez] e |ez] * |ez]e |ez]| e |ee}] € |se] e¢ |oz ]t |ee |t |oe |e {as} e | ge
z |e) || 2 |e] 8 |e] e |Fo] @ | Fo] 2 | Fel co | \o8F ‘uer @ |] 2 |
t fez] t |ez| t |ez} 2 {jec| t jee] t jez] £ jez] t |ee | ie | te |] te |e |e jes] I | ee
220 “ydeg ‘any T a | eune ABTA ady “eI og | ez | oe | es | t_ | 2 Aon
og | 2z| te | 2e| te | ao) sme te | oe] og | ee] te | az] 8 | oz | 62 | az | 6% | ez |29q Te | 2
6z |1z} og | te} o€ | tz} og | tz] of | tz] 62 | 12] of | 12] 22 | Te | 8% | Iz | 82 | Te jog | Is] oe | Iz
sz |oz| 62 | oz! 62 | oz] 62 | 02] 62 | 02} 8a | oz] 62 | 02] 9% | 0% | 22 | 0% | 24% | 02 | 6B | OZ] 62 | OZ
2@ | 6L| sz |e6t} sz | 6t} sa |et| gz | él} 22 | 61} 82 | 61} Ga | 6T | 9 | 6T | 9G | GT | 8B | GL} 8S | ET
gz |st| ze | st} zz |st| 2% | 8] 22 | St} 9% | 81] 22 | 8L} Fe | St | ge | 8t | ge | st | 2a | 81] 2¢ | 8st
ez |2z1| 92 | zt} 92 | zt] 92 | 2t] 92 | 2t] s@ | 2} 93 | zL} €% | Zt | be | Lt | Fe | ZT | 9S | ZT] 9S | ZT
#2 |o1| gz lot} ec | ot} ea lot} ez | ot} # | 9t| sz | ot] 22 | ot | e% | 91 | 2 | 9T | se | OT] g@ | OT
ez jet} ¢ | etl te | et] 2 | etl #2 | et] ge | st] Fe | st] IZ | st | a | st |e | St | | ot] Fe | oT
ze | *t| ec | tr} ez | er] g2 | et] g2 | FL] o% | FL] e% | FL] Of | FT | 12 | FL | Te | Ft | Ss | FT] es | FT
1 |et}] e |et| ge | st] 22 |et| ae | et] to | et} 22 | et| et | et | oc | et | oe | et | a | et) 2 | et
-o2 |2z~| t2 |at} t2 | et} t |2t}] 12 | 2t}-o2 | et} T@ | at) St | Zt | GL | Zt | 6L | st | te | st} 1 | et
6t |1r| of | it} of | it} of | TL] of | TE] 6t | Tr] Of | TL] ZT | It | SE | IL | SE | IL | Os | Tr] 08 | Tr
st |ot| 6t |ort| 6r jot] 6t |ot| 6t | ot| gt | OT] 6T | OT} 9T | OT | ZT | OT | 24T | OT | GE | OT] GT | OT
zui6|stiesstié6 | st i6é | st i6 |] zt ij6 |] st |]6 ) st |6 {ot |6 |9t |6 {st |6 | St /6
ot |3 | zt |s |] zt is | zt }s | zt |s | or |8 | 2t ]8 } #1 78 [Fl |S |st |s Jar |s |] ats
ct |}z | ot |z | 9t {2 | ot Jz | ot |2 | st {2} gt [2 | et | 2 [PE | 2 Jet [2 Jot {2 | ot fe
71 19 | et |9 | et 19 | st lo | st |9 | #1 19 | ST |9 |] at |9 | St |9 fet |9 Jst |g | St Ig
et |¢ | #1 |¢ | pr l¢ | #1 1¢ | er |s | et |e | FL Je | Tr |e Jer |s [et }e jr |¢ | l¢
zi |p | et |e | et |p | st | | et | + | ot |e | et je | or |e [I |r | |r jet |e | St | >
fief] e2edse | aie} aisle | aie | mie | aie | 6 {s jor |e jor |e | at je |] a je
or |z | tisiej]tmii2 is «mis it mie | or je] mje} s je J6 |@ {6 |e Jr {se ] i se
6 |t | ot |t | ot |t | or |t | or |t | 6 {Tt |] or |tT |] 2 J|t Js Jt {Ss |r fou |r | or |t
alyolelels)o| s|2le2)/>] Pe lol 2y/s! Z|] sele Pl] oo} ses] 42le]/ oo];
oO oO iJ S o 2 oO r)
glele lf ele| 8 lel ela; Fe lel ele, SF s/s ye] ELS Fl] F fF
uwnjoo yqnop yous ut 7yOrs ay Uo Busazvo fo aq “2fa] 2Y7 UO ad%e1as fo 91D
shop §9¢ ‘sn09 -uorynyseb fo poviad Buamoys 21q0,],
250 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and discharges a stringy mucus; the belly droops and the
muscles on each side of the root of the tail “fall in,” leaving
deep hollows. Later the cow
becomes uneasy, ceases eating,
lies down and rises again,
switches her tail, and may bel-
low or moan. Soon the labor
pains come on, the animal
arches her back, lowers her
croup, draws the belly up, and
straining is more or less violent
Fic. 79.—Jnursey Cow “‘Jacoza and continuous. Soon the clear
tmp he wave 17253 pounds water-bags protrude between
The world’s record for the breed. the lips of the vulva, though
aia by A. O. Auten, Jerseyville, blood may precede them. The
water-bags come rapidly, hang-
ing downward toward the hocks, pull at the fetus, and aid in
dilating the womb. In this manner these bags aid materially
and should not be ruptured until they do so naturally. The
after-pains come on later and expel the afterbirth which
should not be left longer than twenty-four hours.
For difficult parturition and removal of afterbirth, see page
334. Directly after calving, give a warm gruel of oatmeal,
wheat bran, or shorts. Increase the grain ration gradually
until on full feed.
THE CALF
The young calf that makes its appearance normally and is
bright and active needs only to be let alone as long as both cow
and calf are doing well. Not all calves, however, are so fortu-
nate. Occasionally one loses its life through want of atten-
tion at time of birth. It sometimes happens that the new-born
calf cannot breathe — does not establish the function of respi-
ration. Steps must be taken quickly to establish respiration.
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 251
If detached membranes cover the air passage, remove them.
Wiping out the nose deeply with a feather, or even with the
finger, excites sneezing and starts breathing. Blowing violently
into the nose and mouth has a similar effect. Slapping the
chest with the palm of the hand or with a towel dipped in cold
water is good to start breathing.
As soon as the cow has recovered from the shock of giving
birth, she should tend the calf, for it will be physically bene-
fited thereby. If she refuses to lick and caress her calf, a little
flour sprinkled over the back of the latter will often attract her
to it. Should she still refuse, the calf must be dried with a cloth
or wisp of straw, and if necessary, assisted to get its first meal.
It is especially important for the calf that it get the first or
colostrum milk of the dam. This milk is rich in mineral matter
and ash, is a powerful laxative, and is effective in removing the
fecal matter from the alimentary canal, and in addition serves
asa tonic. The calf should be allowed to suck the dam a few
times; some recommend until the milk is fit for human con-
sumption, usually about the eighth or ninth milking, while others
recommend separating them on the second day, providing the
calf is strong and the cow’s udder in good shape, as the cow is
more easily reconciled to the separation, and the calf can be
taught to drink more easily than if it has sucked the cow for
some time. If, however, the calf is weak, it is better to have
it with the cow, as it will feed oftener and grow stronger ; or if
the cow’s udder is inflamed, the calf will help to bring it back
to the proper condition. The calf may be placed in a near-by
pen and in sight of the dam, as it is thought she will be less ex-
cited and not attempt to “hold up”’ her milk.
Feeding the dairy calf. — On account of the high price of milk
it becomes necessary to feed the dairy calf by hand. This calls
for extra labor and sometimes entails extra difficulties, but if
proper precautions are taken, these may in a large measure be
avoided.
252 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS o
Teaching the calf to drink. — When the calf is taken from the
cow, it may not drink at first, but after the omission of a feed
it becomes hungry and as a rule can be taught to drink very
easily. A calf is much more tractable when hungry. The calf
will not learn to drink any younger by being forced to breathe
CO pgp a eg ee
Fic. 80.—Iuportep Brown Swiss Buuu. A first prize winner. Owned by
Sedgley Farms, Hinsdale, IL.
The Brown Swiss cattle, natives of Switzerland, are classed as dual-purpose;
that is, they yield a fair quantity of average quality milk and the steers when
fattened make average beef. In size the bulls weigh from 1500 to 2000 pounds ;
the cows 1200 to 1500 pounds. The color is usually light or dark brown, fading
to gray along the backbone to the tail and about the belly.
the milk into its lungs. It should be remembered that instinct
teaches the calf to look up for its food, and the feeder must
change this by teaching the calf to look down. There is great
difference among breeds as well as among individuals in the ease
with which the calves are taught to drink from the pail. Some
are taught to drink at the first trial with little or no sucking of
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 253
the fingers, whereas others require much more persistent effort
and considerable patience as well as common sense.
Danger of overfeeding. — When feeding by hand, there is
much danger of overfeeding and gorging the calf’s stomach,
thereby causing digestive disorder, scours, and death. When
permitted to run with the cow, the calf sucks many times daily,
— ten to twenty, — taking only a little milk at atime. When
removed from the dam and left from eight to twelve hours, it
gets exceedingly hungry, and when offered milk in large quan-
tities, will gorge itself and bring digestive disorders that may
prove fatal. If there are two or more calves in the same pen,
it will be very necessary to fasten them, so that in case one gets
through drinking before the others it cannot rob them of their
supply, for if it should, it may prove fatal.
The calf on whole milk. — For the first few weeks, the calf
should be given the milk from its own dam rather than from an-
other cow, as changing from one to another is likely to throw
the digestive system out of balance, and result in digestive dis-
orders such as scours, colic, and the like. When convenient, it is
best to feed the calf three times a day for the first few days.
The milk should be fed from a clean pail, directly after milking,
while still at the body temperature. The amount of milk fed
should be carefully regulated. A good plan with the average
calf is to give four pounds — two quarts — of whole milk three
times daily. If the cow’s milk tests high in butter-fat, it is ad-
visable to feed that part of the milk which is first drawn from the
udder, as it possesses a lower fat content, and is less likely to
cause digestive disorders. In a state of nature, a calf gets milk
containing about 3 per cent fat, whereas some of our improved
breeds give almost twice that amount. The amount fed should
be increased gradually, taking much care to avoid overfeeding.
In case scours develop, the feed should be immediately reduced.
The calf on skim-milk. — Whole milk, being rather expensive,
should not be fed longer than is necessary. The time for begin-
254 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
ning to substitute skim-milk will vary according to conditions.
In general the change should begin when the calf is four weeks of
age. This change should be made gradually, so that the calf may
adjust itself to the new feed without trouble. A good plan is to
increase the skim-milk one pound each day and decrease the
whole milk by the same amount, and thus requiring about one
week to make the complete change. The skim-milk should
always be sweet and as nearly the same from day to day as is
possible. The amount fed may be gradually increased to 20
pounds daily, but it is not considered advisable to feed more
than that amount.
When two or three weeks old, the calf should be taught to eat
alittle grain. This is best accomplished by placing a handful in
the pail immediately after the calf has finished drinking the milk.
It is not a good practice to put the grain in the milk, as the calf
will swallow it with the milk and not learn to masticate it prop-
erly. After the calf has learned to eat the grain, a box should
be provided in which to feed the grain. If for some reason the
calf fails to eat the grain, it must be removed and not left in the
box to decay. The grain should be kept fresh and clean. At six
wecks of age, the calf should be eating one pound daily of the
following mixture: 3 parts corn meal, 3 parts ground oats, 3
parts wheat bran, and 1 part linseed meal.
The young calf should be taught to eat hay along with the
grain. If sweet nutritious hay is put within its reach, it will
soon learn to eat it. Whole hay is preferred to chopped.
Among the various hays, alfalfa holds first place, but if not avail-
able, bright clover hay of fine quality is excellent for the calf.
The hay should not be overripe, as such hay contains too much
crude fiber and is coarse and woody. The calf may have all the
hay it will consume, providing it gets grain and skim-milk in
addition. It is doubtful whether it is advisable to feed silage or
roots while the calf is getting skim-milk.
Fall calves may be turned to grass the following spring,
BREEDING DAIRY CATTLE 258
but grain feeding should also be practiced, as stronger and larger
calves will result. Later in the summer, when the grass is short
and dead, the flies bad, and weather very warm, some green feed,
if available, would be a valuable addition. After the first or
second month the calves should have access to cool, clear water,
as the milk furnished will not be sufficient for them to drink,
particularly if the weather is hot and the flies troublesome.
Milk substitutes for raising calves. — Whole milk is the nat-
ural food for the calf. On it the average calf will thrive better
than on any other food. Because of the high price of milk
many substitutes for milk as a calf food have been put upon
the market from time to time. From a careful perusal of the
literature, both with respect to experiments and practice, it
seems that skim-milk, grain, and hay make the best substitutes
for whole milk in raising calves. Skim-milk, however, is seldom
available, and this has led to trying the substitutes found upon
the market. While skim-milk, grain, and hay are the best sub-
stitutes for whole milk, it is true that healthy calves can be
raised without milk of any kind after the first four weeks. In
general calves so raised will be inferior in size, but they can be
brought through strong and healthy.
Removing horns from young calves. — When dairy cattle are
desired without horns, the removal is very easily accomplished
while the calf is very young. Assoon as the horn can be located
by examining the head with the hand, clip the hair away from
the budding horn. Wrap a stick of caustic potash in paper to
protect the hand, dip the end of the stick in water, and rub this
upon the tipof the horn until the skin or scurf begins to loosen up
and gets red, taking care all the time that none of the potash
comes in contact with the skin surrounding the horn. In a few
days the place will scale over. One application is sufficient.
Castrating the male calf. — The age at which castration is per-
missible varies, but usually is performed during the second
or third month. If done in early life, there is less danger of
256 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
complications, as the organs are not fully mature; and if
let go too long, the animal becomes ‘‘staggy”’ in appearance
and will not make as good a feeding calf as otherwise. Castrat-
ing a calf at so early an age is not a difficult task. The operation
may be performed with the calf standing, if one is provided with
“stocks” to hold him; or in the absence of stocks, by throwing
the calf upon his side and holding him firm. When ready, hold
the testicle in the left hand, and with a sharp instrument in the
right make a good free incision, remembering that there are two
thick coats that must be cut through. Now the testicle may
be removed by simply cutting it off, though this may be followed
by a hemorrhage. To avoid this, take the cord in the left hand,
having the cord between the thumb and the index finger.
Now twist the testicle several times with the right hand and
push with the left hand towards the body of the animal. This
will do away almost entirely with the bleeding. If, however,
this seems too difficult, scrape the cord in two instead of cutting.
Let the animal up, and in a few days he will be all right again.
CHAPTER XI
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE
THERE are many factors to be considered in the formation and
management of a dairy herd, some of which are personal in their
nature and do not lend themselves readily to discussion, while
others are more general, of interest to all,and may be discussed
intelligently. The two most important factors in a dairy herd
are of course the owner and the cows. A discussion of the
qualities of a good dairyman, further than that he should be
in love with his work, have faith in it, be industrious, and pains-
taking in selecting, breeding, and caring for his stock, is a difficult
task, as all kinds of men on all kinds of farms are making a suc-
cess with dairy cattle, whereas other men similarly placed are
constantly failing of success. The cow, on the other hand,
with her desirable and undesirable qualities more easily defined
and more uniform in their nature, may be intelligently discussed.
SANITARY MILK PRODUCTION
By sanitary milk is meant a clean, wholesome product pro-
duced under healthful conditions. The principal factors to be
considered in its production are the cows, the stable, the milk-
house, the milking, and the cooling and storing of the milk.
The cow. —In the production of clean milk, extra care must
be given the cows. They must be curried daily to remove the
loose hair and dirt. The udder and rear parts of the animal
should be clipped, thus removing the long dirt-catching hair and
rendering the parts much more easily cleaned. The udder
8 257
258 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
should be wiped with a damp cloth just before milking. Hay
should not be fed previous to milking, as it fills the air with
dust. Care should be taken to
feed clean, nutritious foods and
such as will not contribute an
undesirable flavor to the milk.
The drinking water for the cows
should be clean, fresh, and the
tanks protected from possible
contamination. Furthermore,
Fic. 81.—Brown Swiss Cow ‘‘Vo- the cows should be healthy. One
a at Sedgley Farms, cannot produce sanitary milk
and keep diseased cows. Each
animal composing the herd should be tested for tuberculosis
once each year and the diseased cases removed.
The stables. — If one is to produce sanitary milk, the stable
must be kept clean. This applies to dust, cobwebs, and the like,
as well as to the manure and litter. Much light and good ven-
tilation are essential. The floors should be of cement. The
gutters and litter should be cleaned out twice daily, and the
material hauled to the field, or placed in a protected water-
tight pit outside the barnyard and of sufficient distance to pre-
vent odors from reaching the stable. The covered shed, if one
is used, and stable-yard, must be clean and well drained. It
is a rather common practice to house other animals, such as
horses or sheep and sometimes swine, in the same stable with
cattle. If sanitary milk is to be the product, no other animals
should be placed in the same stable with the cows.
The cows should be bedded liberally, particularly if the floor
is of cement. The bedding should not be permitted to become
foul, as this not only lessens the comfort of the cattle, but makes
it more difficult to keep them clean and it promotes disease.
Old straw makes the best bedding material, but when high in
price, it may be replaced by many other materials, such as shav-
ae
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE 259
ings from the planing mill, — which make a clean and sweet
bedding, — by tan-bark, by leaves, and the like.
Milk-housé. — Preferably the milk-house should be separate
from the barn and located at a safe distance from all sources of
Fic. 82.—A Device ror coouring Mitx. Milk cooled immediately after
drawing will keep sweet much longer than otherwise.
contamination, yet convenient to the cows. It should be divided
into two rooms, one for heating water and cleaning the utensils,
and the other for weighing, sampling, cooling, and storing the
milk. The milk-house should be well lighted and well venti-
lated, the floors should be constructed of cement, and the wall,
260 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and ceiling made tight and smooth in order that they may be
easily cleaned. The windows and doors should be screened to
exclude the flies.
The wéensils, such as the milk-cooler, the pails, cans, strainers,
and the like, should be thoroughly cleaned by first soaking in
warm water, then washing in boiling water containing some
cleaning material, rinsed in clean hot water, and then sterilized
with steam. After thoroughly cleaning, they should be inverted
in the pure air, preferably in the sunlight.
Milking. — The milker should be cleanly in his habits, and
should milk with dry hands. A small-top milk pail should be
used to exclude the dirt as far as possible. As soon as each
cow is milked, the milk should be taken directly to the milk-
house and there weighed, a record made of the weight, a sample
taken to test for the fat, then it should be strained, and im-
mediately run over a cooler, reducing its temperature as low as
possible (Fig. 82). The milk should then be kept at as low a tem-
perature as possible. A good plan is to set the cans in a vat
containing ice, and cover the vat with a lid. If thisis not con-
venient, set the cans in running well or spring water. During
transportation cover the cans with a blanket. In summer the
blanket should be wet, in winter dry.
MILKING MACHINES
Perhaps the most important factor retarding the development
of dairying is the difficulty of securing milkers who can be de-
pended on to do their work satisfactorily. In general the size
of the dairy is restricted to the number of cows that the owner
can attend to at such times as his help fails him. If the question
of milking the cows, without being so dependent on hired help,
could be satisfactorily solved, the number of animals kept on
many dairy farms would increase up to the limit of the acreage
to feed the animals. Any possibility, therefore, of milking cows
by machinery is likely to appeal strongly to the dairy farmer.
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE 261
There are now machines on the market that will milk cows.
There are, however, many questions relative to their use that
cannot be answered with much positiveness; chief of which are
the efficiency with which they milk, the effect on the cow, the
effect on the milk, and their economy.
It is well known that one milker may secure more milk than
others from the same cow, and that after a cow has become
accustomed to a milker, a change results in a decrease in the
production. It may be expected, therefore, that the immediate
effect of changing from hand to machine milking will be at-
tended by the same results. The question as to the practicability
of machine milking is, therefore, whether or not cows can be
milked satisfactorily by this method for an extended period of
time. Furthermore there comes the question of the effect upon
succeeding generations, whether the machine milking will have
a tendency to discourage the transmission of milking qualities.
The milking machine is of so recent invention that there are
not data enough at hand to answer these questions. The data
available go to show that by taking the year through, the
average cow yields approximately as much milk to the machine
method as to the hand method of milking, particularly if she is
stripped by hand after the machine milking.
Mechanically, the machine seems to do its work efficiently.
There are, however, certain difficulties encountered which hin-
der the working of the machine and over which it can have
no control. Chief among these are the shape, size, and other
peculiarities of the cow’s udder and teats. The quality of
the udder as regards fleshiness or flabbiness and unevenness
of the quarters, teats abnormally small, warty, those that milk
down, and those that are very close together, are likely to give
much difficulty.
The effect of the machine on the milk, particularly the
bacteria content, depends much on the manipulation of the
apparatus while in operation as well as its care between the milk-
262 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
ings. If the teat-cups slip from the teats while the machine is
working, many germs are likely to be drawn into the milk pail.
The machines are provided with air filters, and the efficiency
in keeping the germ content low depends much on the condition
of these filters. The milk in its passage from the teats to the pail
OB
Fig. 83.—Durca BEe.ttTep Buu “Auten.” A first prize winner. Owned by
R. F. Sanders, Bristol, N. H.
£5
The Dutch Belted breed of dairy cattle is a native of Holland. The cows are
fair milkers, producing milk of average richness. The size is much smaller
than the Holsteins, the bulls weighing 1400 to 1800 pounds and the cows 1200
to 1500 pounds. The color is black, with a white belt around the body.
must pass through the teat-cups and a few feet of rubber tubing.
These teat-cups and tubing are likely to crack, and these mi-
nute cracks become laden with germs, which are hard to wash
out, and if the rubber is steamed sufficiently to kill the germs,
it soon wears out. To obviate this difficulty it is recommended
to keep the teat-cups and rubber parts in a 10 per cent solu-
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE 263
tion of common salt. This treatment proves very effective.
If, therefore, the workman is skilled in the manipulation of
the machine and cares for it properly, the germ content of the
milk can be kept low and a clean product secured. The avail-
able data seem to indicate that the machine has no effect on
the fat content of the milk, particularly if the cows are stripped
by hand, as is usually advisable.
MANAGEMENT OF THE BULL
The bull calves must be removed from the heifers when four
to six months old. In rearing a bull, accustom it to being
handled from calfhood. From the very beginning it should
be gently but firmly managed and not fondled or permitted
to frolic. Give it kind, quiet, firm, and unvarying treat-
ment. Always keep it under subjection, that it may never
know its strength and power. Place a ring in its nose before it
is a year old. This ring should be frequently renewed, in order
that it be always strong. If this is neglected, the ring will come
in two when most needed. Always lead and handle the bull
with a staff. The bull should never run loose in the yard or
pasture. It should be provided with abundant and regular
exercise. At such times it should be under restraint and full
control. For exercise, some recommend placing the bull in a
tread-power and use the power thus generated to grind thegrain,
run the fodder cutter or cream separator, and the like, but this
does not seem practicable. A very good plan to provide exer-
cise for the bull is to arrange a wire overhead and attach the
bull’s halter strap to it. This will enable him to take exercise
at will and still keep him under control. As age and strength
increase, a second ring should be placed in the nose in which to
attach a strap, chain, or rope to supplement the staff when the
animal is let out for service. Let there always be a double hitch-
ing device, so that the bull may never by accident find himself
free when he should be tied. In the management of a bull, itis
264 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
well to remember that one physically tired may be depended
on to be quiet and easily managed; hence the importance of
much exercise.
When possible, it is much better to keep the bull in the
presence of the herd than stabled by himself, in a lonely place,
as is so often the case.
It is a common practice among dairymen to use immature bulls
and to dispose of them before their merits as sires are known.
This is because bulls of some age are likely to be vicious and
dangerous. Many a good bull has been sold for beef only be-
cause he was not easily managed and it was thought desirable
to dispose of him before some one was injured. A bull that
is known to get good offspring should be kept as long as he
is useful as a sire.
Ringing the bull. — Many neglect to ring the bull calf under
the erroneous impression that it is a difficult task. On the other
hand, itis very easy. All one needs to do is punch ahole through
the membrane between the two nostrils, insert the ring, and screw
it together. If one has a bull-ringing punch to make the hole, it
is much easier, but in the absence of the punch the hole may be
made with a knife, placing the ring in as the blade is drawn
out. To restrain the calf it must be tied up securely by the
head. The ringing of an older bull is more difficult because of
the difficulty of restraining him.
THE DAIRY BARN
The dairy cow is perhaps the most difficult of farm animals
to stable properly. The purpose for which she is kept, that of
supplying milk; the use to which the milk is put, that of
human food; the condition in which it is used, being raw; the
place from which it is drawn, being exposed to greatest filth;
the manner in which it is drawn, by hand and often by unclean
milkmen; and the condition of her dung or manure, as well as
the fact that if maximum production is to be obtained, she
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE 265
must be fairly warmly housed, yet provided with an abundance
of light and much fresh air;—all serve to complicate the -
problem of providing suitable quarters for the dairy cow.
There are certain fundamentals that should be provided in
every building in which the dairy cow is stabled. Chief among
these are light, ventilation, sufficient room, smooth and light
walls and ceilings, a good floor, a comfortable and convenient
tie, and properly constructed mangers.
Fig. 84.—Darry Barn, New York Strate Counece or AGRICULTURE
MILK-HOUSE IN THE FOREGROUND.
Light in abundance should enter the dairy barn. — Sunlight is
nature’s disinfectant. With sufficient light and proper ventila-
tion, germ diseases are not likely to occur. It is said that
direct sunlight will kill the growing tuberculosis germ in a very
few minutes. Hence, cattle kept in well-lighted and well-ven-
tilated quarters are not so likely to contract this much
dreaded disease. Again, light shows dirt and makes it easy to
keep the barn clean. Dark stables are likely to be dusty or
dirty and damp, thus providing conditions for germ growth.
In addition to freedom from germ disease, health, cleanliness,
and the like, a barn in which the sun shines freely furnishes a
cheerful place in which to work.
266 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Sunlight, the most efficient disinfectant as well as the most
powerful of all medicines, is free, and provision for its admit-
tance into any cow barn need cost but little. Window glass is
inexpensive. Old barns that are dark and dismal may easily
be provided with sufficient light by cutting holes in the walls
and putting in windows. Best results are obtained by cutting
the windows long from top to bottom and low, as more direct
sunlight will fall on the floors.
Ventilation essential to health. — The importance of pure air
in a cow stable cannot be overestimated. It is essential to
the well being of the herd; without it, disease will surely work
destruction. While there are many methods of ventilating a
dairy barn, the King system in some of its modified forms
is admitted to be the most efficient. If in addition the
windows are arranged as suggested on page 268, ample ven-
tilation can be procured.
King’s system of ventilation. — While there are many meth-
ods of arranging this system, it consists essentially of two
parts: the inlets and the outlets, in the form of flues. This
system will not work if the walls of the barn are full of cracks
or the floor is made of loose boards. The floor, walls, ceilings,
and windows must be so constructed as to prevent any large
quantity of air from leaving or entering.
The inlets must be so constructed as to meet two condi-
tions; first, they must admit the fresh air near the ceiling,
where the barn air is warm, in order that the fresh air may
mingle with the warmest air of the stable and raise the tem-
perature before descending to the floor, thus not allowing
the animals to lie in cold air. In the second place, they must
not permit the warm air to pass out instead of the cold fresh
air to come in. This is accomplished by constructing the inlet
flue so that it begins near the ground on the outside and ends
near the ceiling on the inside. All that is necessary is to have
the outer end of the flue several feet lower than the inner end.
.
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE 267
The inlets should be numerous, of small size, and constructed
on all four sides of the stable in order to take advantage of the
wind, regardless of the direction from which it blows. In this
way a large quantity of air is admitted and evenly distributed
throughout the stable. A convenient size for these inlets is
4 x 12 inches, as this permits the flue to be built between two
Fic. 85. — Interior View SHOWING FEED-CARRIER, Freep ALLEY, MANGERS,
AND STANCHION OF THE Darry Barn, New York State CoLuEGE oF
AGRICULTURE AT CORNELL University, IrHaca, N. Y.
4-inch studdings. There should be one such flue to each three
cows. The flues should be lined with building paper, and this
covered with matched lumber. All openings, and especially
the outside ones, should be securely covered with heavy wire
netting.
The outlets must be so constructed as to meet three con-
ditions. First, the ventilators should reach to near the stable
268 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
floor in order to remove the air from that point. This is
desirable because the refuse gases from the animals being
heavier than the other air of the stable remain near the floor.
The animals not only lie down, but they breathe the impuri-
ties from the floor when standing. The colder air is at the floor,
and it is desirable to remove this, particularly in the winter, in
order that the warmer air at the ceiling may move downward.
In the second place, these ventilators should be provided with
an opening near the ceiling for the removal of the warm air when
the stable becomes too warm, particularly if the animals are to
be kept in the stable most of the time. This opening must be
provided with a door or slide to be closed or opened at will. In
the third place, it is important that these ventilators be so con-
structed as to afford as little inconvenience as possible, particu-
larly when they extend through the hay loft, where they are
sometimes in the way of the hay fork. The ventilating flue
should be as large as convenient. The essentials of a good
ventilating flue are similar to those of a good chimney. In
addition to their being of air-tight construction and as straight
as conditions will permit, it should rise above the highest
part of the roof so as to get the full force of the wind.
Window ventilation. — If it is not possible to install the King
system in one of its many forms, the windows can be so ar-
ranged as to form a fair system of ventilating the cow stable.
To do this, hinge them at the bottom, allowing’ the top to
open inward. Place a board edgewise along each side of the
window, so that the air will not enter at the bottom and blow
directly on the animals when the window is open. By leaving
several of the windows open an inch or two at the top they will
provide fair ventilation without producing serious drafts.
When this plan is employed, it is best to open the windows on
the side of the barn away from the wind and to regulate the
size of the opening according to the severity of the weather.
Floors are best made of cement. — While many objections have
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE 269
been raised to the use of cement, such as its cost, its being cold
and damp, injuring the cattle and the like, it is nevertheless
the most desirable material from which to construct floors
for the cow stable. The gutters and mangers should likewise
Fig. 86.—Inter1or View oF Dartry BARN SHOWING LITTER-CARRIER, GUT-
TER, AND ARRANGEMENT OF Winpows. NEw York SraTe CoLLEeGn oF
AGRICULTURE.
be laid in cement. Cement has two very great advan-
tages over all other materials: it is easily kept clean, and if
properly put down, is durable. If desired, plank may be laid
over the cement where the cows stand. This, however, is not
necessary, as cement can be made dry and fairly warm by
270 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
placing a layer of some non-conducting material, such as build-
ing paper, an inch or so beneath the surface. This may be
done as follows: lay the cement as usual until within one and
one-half inches of the desired thickness. Now lay down one
thickness of heavy building paper, leave a strip at least six
inches wide, along the edge next to the gutter. Paint this build-
ing paper with aspbaltum paint, then lay down another thick-
ness of the paper. Spike this paper down, leaving the heads of
the spikes sticking up about one-half inch above the paper. Put
on the remainder of the cement and proceed as though the
paper was not there. This paper need be put only where the
cattle lie. Figs. 85 and 86 show good cement construction.
Watering device. — There are many devices on the market
for keeping a constant supply of water before the animal.
The question of their use depends largely on the ease of
keeping them clean. In many cases they are provided with
tops which the cow soon learns to raise and which fall down
and cover the device when she is not drinking, but these do
not keep the water clean. The cow with her mouth partially
full of grain or hay often opens the lid and slobbers the grain
into the water. This material soon decays and the device
becomes a trap for foul-smelling water. Perhaps the safest and
most convenient plan is to have a large tank located near by.
This can be easily cleaned, the water kept fresh and cool in
summer, and the chill easily driven off in winter.
THE SILO
The silo has passed the experimental stage, and the economy
as well as the practicability of preserving fodder in it has been
fully demonstrated. Silage is a valuable food, and is relished
by all classes of farm animals, but is more particularly adapted
to ruminating animals like the dairy cow. In fact, in order
to secure maximum production, some kind of succulent food is
necessary, and ordinarily silage will be found the most efficient
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE 271
as well as the most economical form of succulence that can be
provided.
The fundamental principle in the preservation of green
forage when placed in a silo is the exclusion of air. To pre-
vent the air from reaching the silage, the silo must be constructed
with air-tight walls. These walls must be rigid enough to pre-
vent springing out of shape by the pressure of the silage, for in
this case air will enter next to the wall. The pressure is greatest
from the second to the sixth day after filling. The silage at
this time begins to heat and settle, and if the walls are not
sufficiently rigid to prevent any bulging, a considerable loss of
silage is likely to result. The walls should be perpendicular,
and the diameter the same from the bottom to the top.
The size of the silo. — On being exposed to the air, silage
spoils rapidly, and to avoid this must be fed off at the rate of
one and one-half to two inches
daily in the winter and three
inches in the summer. A good
plan is so to construct the silo
that the horizontal feeding area,
for each cow will be approxi- |
mately six square feet daily. If
we feed six square feet off the
top and two inches down, this
means one cubic foot to the cow. Fic. 87.—Dutcx Bztrep Cow
The approximate weight of a cu- Baw 2”, A fst pre wane.
bic foot of:silage is forty pounds, ow, H.
though this varies much between
the top and the bottom. As this is about the proper quantity
to feed daily, it becomes evident that six square feet is the
proper area for each cow.
The table that follows gives the capacity of a silo of various
widths and depths; also the area required to fill it, and the
approximate quantity that should be fed daily to lower the
—
272
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
surface two inches per day, based on an average weight of
forty pounds to the cubic foot.
By examining the table one
can get an idea of the size desired ; also the economy of increas-
ing the depth:
Approximate capacity in tons of round silos of different diameters and
depths and the area required to fill them as well as the amount that should
be fed daily
InsIDB
ACREAGE TO
AMOUNT THAT
DIAMETER HEIcut Capacity FILL SHOULD BE
Feet Feet Tons 10 Tons to Acre FED DalLy
10 28 42 4.2 525
10 32 51 * 5 525
10 36 61 6.1 525
12 30 67 6.7 755
12 34 80 8.0 755
12 38 94 9.4 755
14 30 91 9.1 1030
14 34 109 10.9 1030
14 38 128 12.8 1030
16 30 119 11.9 1340
16 34 143 14.3 1340
16 38 167 16.7 1340
16 42 193 19.3 1340
18 36 196 19.6 1700
18 40 229 22.9 1700
18 46 282 28.2 1700
20 36 243 24.3 2100
20 42 300 30.0 2100
20 50 382 38.2 2100
22 36 292 29.2 2300
22 42 366 36.6 2300
22 50 469 46.9 2300
Filling the silo. — Occasionally the construction of a silo is
criticized, whereas the fault may be found in the method of
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF DAIRY CATTLE 273
filling. It is essential to the preserving of silage that it be
well packed, keeping it level and thoroughly tramped. This
very important task is often intrusted to a lad who spends his
Fic. 88.—Sito 1n THE Process oF CoNnsTRUCTION BY Farm Lazpor. This
silo, 16 feet in diameter and 30 feet high, was completed at a cost of one
dollar for each ton capacity.
time in standing in the breeze of the blower, with the result
that the silage comes out of the silo somewhat molded the
following winter.
7
274 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
In filling with corn there is a tendency toward an uneven
distribution of the ears; these, being heavier than the other
parts of the plant, are blown to the opposite side of the silo.
To obviate this, many devices are employed, perhaps the most
simple of which is a long bag open at both ends and fastened
to the end of the carrier. By means of a small rope attached
to this bag the corn may be deposited in any part of the silo
desired.
CHAPTER XII
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE
FEEDING beef cattle differs considerably from feeding dairy
cattle, as well as from feeding horses. In the case of horse feed-
ing, the product sought is energy in the form of work; in the
case of dairy cattle the product is milk; whereas in the case
of beef cattle the product is flesh. This calls for special
methods of feeding, special foods or food combinations, and
special management. Much discussion was devoted (in Chap-
ter IX, page 203) to the production of milk in which it was
treated largely as an independent industry because of the
fact that the successful dairymen have time for little if anything
else; whereas beef production is not a special industry and
does not require all of the feeder’s time, and on the average
is conducted successfully only in connection with grain farm-
ing. Among successful beef producers, beef-raising is regarded
. a8 a convenient way of marketing grain, as well as a means
of conserving soil fertility, and hence the ability to grow more
grain to feed more stock and also a profitable means of utiliz-
ing much coarse forage which otherwise would be largely wasted.
ESSENTIALS OF FEEDING CATTLE
In feeding beef cattle one of the most important factors is
the kind of cattle, for on the choice of them will turn in a
large measure the possibility of success. In considering the
cattle with a view of estimating their profit as beef producers,
there are a number of essentials to be taken into account.
275
276 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Chief among these are the age, form, condition, quality, uni-
formity, and the price.
Age at which to feed cattle. — In recent years no question has
been more discussed, or the object of more experimentation
among cattle feeders, than the most profitable age at which to
fatten cattle. This interest has been due in part at least to
the fact that writers on agricultural topics strongly advised
feeding young cattle, whereas the professional feeder, whose
livelihood depends upon his success, has shown a decided
preference for older cattle. To secure some idea of the age at
which gains can be made most cheaply, let us examine the com-
position of the body of an old and young steer. In Jordan’s
“Feeding of Animals,’’ we note the composition of the body
of an aged fat steer and of a fat calf to be as follows : —
WaTER ASH PROTEIN Fat
Per Cent Per Cent Per Cent Per Cent
Aged fat steer. 49.5 4.4 15.6 30.5
Fat calf . “ 64.6 4.8 16.5 14.1
From this we observe that the body of the fat calf con-
tains 15.1 per cent more water and 16.4 per cent less fat than
that of the aged fat steer, the ash and protein being practically
the same. This would seem to indicate that the aged steer
in fattening required considerably more solid food, particu-
larly those foods rich in fat, whereas the calf requires less
fat, and less dry-matter to the pound of gain. As water is
cheaper than fat we would expect the calf to make the cheaper
gains, and such is the case.
Not only does the age influence the cheapness of the gains,
but it affects the rate of gain as well. Here, too, the younger
animal has the advantage ; that is to say, all things being equal,
the younger animal will make more rapid gains for 1000 pounds
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE QTT
live weight than the aged one. This is due in part no doubt
to the fact that the younger animal’s digestive organs are likely
to be in better condition, the teeth are sounder, the glands
more active, so that the food is better masticated, more
thoroughly digested and assimilated than in the aged steer.
Fie. 89.—Tue Noten SHortHorn Bur ‘‘AvonpALE.’”’ Owned by Carpen-
ter & Ross, Mansfield, Ohio.
The Shorthorn, a native of England, is the most popular beef breed all over the
world. Though not so early maturing, they attain the largest size of any of the
beef breeds, cows weighing around 1500 pounds, bulls 2200, and finished steers
from 1200 to 1500 pounds. The bulls are noted for the excellency of their
get when bred to native cows, while the finished steers are noted for their good
quarters. In color they are red, white, and roan.
Form for feeding cattle. — The form of the steers must be
such as to meet two conditions: those demanded by the cattle
feeder, and those demanded by the butcher. The cattle feeder
wishes an animal that will make rapid and economical gains in
the feed lot, while the butcher wishes one that will dress a rela-
278 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
tively high percentage of edible meat, particularly of the high-
priced cuts, such as prime of rib, porterhouse, sirloin, rump,
and round, which are taken from the back, loin, rump, and
quarters. In general the form that best fills these conditions
will be low set, deep, broad, and compact, rather than high up,
gaunt, narrow, loosely made. The cattle should be low set,
standing on short legs, as animals of this form are likely to
prove good feeders capable of maturing early. The top and
bottom lines should be straight and nearly parallel, the flanks
should be low, thus giving much depth and great capacity.
Cattle possessing such a form are likely to prove rapid and
economic producers while in the feed lot, thus making a profit
for the feeder, and when slaughtered to dress a relatively high
percentage of edible meat, particularly of the high-priced cuts:
Such an animal should dress out 55 to 60 per cent or better with
approximately one-half of the edible meat in the region of
the valuable cuts, and this will sell for about 75 per cent of
the value of the entire carcass, leaving the other half from the
region of low-priced meat to bring the other 25 per cent of the
valuation. G
Condition of feeding cattle. — In considering steers to feed,
their condition should be carefully scrutinized from two points
of view: their thrift, and the amount of flesh they possess.
Feeding cattle should be thrifty but not coarse. Thrift is indi-
cated by a wide, deep chest, by fullness in the heart girth, by
depth and breadth of body, and by good handling quality.
While the cattle should not be coarse, too much refinement is’
likely to prove disappointing, as it often means delicacy or
lack of thrift,and no animal lacking in thrift should find its way
into the feed lot. .
To make rapid and economic feeders the cattle should not
possess much flesh at the beginning of the feeding period.
All things being equal, the thinner the steer at the beginning
of the feeding process the more rapid and economical gains it
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 279
will make, providing there is no lack of thrift. It is easily pos-
sible, however, for a steer to be so low in flesh as to lack thrift.
Such animals require time to get back into normal condition,
and there is a possibility of their being stunted permanently.
If we examine the bodies of the thin and fat steer, it may give
us an insight as to why the animal gains in flesh more rapidly
and on less feed when in a thin condition. In Jordan’s “ Feed-
ing of Animals’’ we note the composition of the bodies of
such steers to be as follows: —
WatTER ASH PROTEIN Far
Per Cent Per Cent Per Cent Per Cent
Thin steer . . 66.2 5.9 19.2 8.7
Fat steer. . : 49.5 4.4 15.6 30.5
It seems that the body of the thin steer contains a relatively
high amount of water and low fat, whereas the fat steer’s body
contains a relatively small amount of water and high fat con-
tent. This may have a bearing on the fact that a thin steer
gains more rapidly and on less feed than a fat one, and also
on the fact that as the full feeding proceeds the gains are made
less rapidly and require more feed.
Quality of feeding cattle. — Quality should be considered from
two points of view: general quality, and handling quality. By
general quality is meant that general refinement of external form
found in the neat head, fine horn, dense bone, smooth outline,
and compact body. This quality is affected by nothing so much
as breeding. General quality and good breeding are closely
associated, well-bred animals being likely to possess quality,
whereas it is often wanting in the common-bred steers. The
importance of general quality in feeding cattle cannot be over-
estimated, as steers possessing it will give higher profit to both
280 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the cattle feeder and the butcher, not because such animals
will necessarily make more meat from a given amount of food,
but because they will dress out better and bring a higher price
on the market.
Good handling quality indicates that the steer is a good
feeder. By good handling quality is meant a fine silky hair
and a loose mellow skin. These are associated with thrift and
the ability to take on flesh rapidly and economically, whereas
a heavy stiff hide is considered to indicate slower fattening.
The previous care that the steers have received has a marked
influence on the hair and skin, and hence on the handling quality.
The importance of good handling quality is not to be over-
looked if one is to succeed in feeding cattle.
Uniformity in feeding cattle. — Feeding cattle should be uni-
form in age, weight, color, type or form, condition, breeding,
and quality. As we have observed, young steers gain more
rapidly than aged ones, and, as we shall see, aged steers fatten
more rapidly than young ones; hence it is not likely that a lot
of steers of mixed ages would all be ready to market at the
same time. If some of the animals are fat, while others are
only half fat, they will not command as high a price on the
market as though they were uniform in flesh. Not only must
they be uniform in flesh, but they must be approximately uni-
form in weight if the highest price is to be obtained. Butchers
and packers desire cattle uniform in weight, so that the cuts
of meat will run uniform, as their trade demands. While uni-
formity of color does not add to the animal’s capacity to take
on flesh economically or to his ability to dress out well, yet
the butchers desire such similarity and are willing to pay
for it. The cattle should be uniform in type or form. If they
vary in type, the weight of the cuts of meat will likewise vary,
and to this the butcher objects. The butcher also demands
animals equal in condition and quality, to meet the demands
of his trade calls.
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 281
FOOD REQUIREMENTS FOR BEEF
The quantity of food required to fatten a beef animal depends
on many factors, chief of which are the kind of food and the age,
weight, and condition as well as the individuality of the animal.
Some foods promote the formation of flesh and bone, and as a
result the animal tends to grow, whereas certain other food en-
courages fat formation and the animal tends to fleshen rather
than to grow. The age, weight, and condition also have much
influence on the amount of food required to fatten the animal.
Fic. 90.—A Prize Winninc SHorTHORN Buty. Owned by Carpenter & Ross,
Mansfield, Ohio.
The younger the animal the less food will be required to produce
a given gain in flesh. The thinner the animal, providing it is
thrifty, the less food will be required to produce a given weight.
Perhaps most important of all is the individuality of the steer.
Some steers will gain three pounds daily, while others receiving
the same amount and kind of food will gain but one pound.
The only method of distinguishing the animal! that makes three
282 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
pounds from the animals that make but one is by external
appearance. The external indication of a good feeder is a
low-set form, being deep, broad, and compact, with low-dewn
flanks, showing that the animal possesses great capacity for
digestion and assimilation (p. 278-279).
No definite quantities can be given that will apply to all
animals, to all conditions, and to all foods. The Wolff-Lehman
standards furnish us a guide to be modified by the judgment
and experience of the feeder : —
Wolff-Lehman standards, showing the amount of food required per 1000
pounds live weight for both the growing and fattening beef animal
ConpiTION OF ANIMAL DianstivE NUTRIENTS
Dryr- oe
. MattTer ATIO
oe BR Seca ||
Age, Mo. Weight
2-3 160 23 4.2 13.0 2.0 1:4.2
3-6 330 24 3.5 12.8 1.5 1:4.7
6-12 550 25 2.5 13.2 0.7 1:6.0
12-18 750 24 2.0 12.5 0.5 1:6.8
18-24 950 24 1.8 12.0 0.4 1:7.2
Fattening Cattle
First period . . 30 2.5 15.0 0.5 1:6.5
Second period . 30 3.0 14.5 0.7 1:5.4
Third period . . 26 2.7 15.0 0.7 1:6.2
WINTERING STOCKERS AND FEEDERS
Large numbers of feeding cattle are purchased in fall and
early winter for the special purpose of economically disposing
of such roughage as corn stalks, straw stack, second-class clover
hay, clover chaff after the seed has been removed, and the like.
Wintering cattle with a view to fattening the following summer
on pasture is a very convenient way of converting such feeds
into cash. The cattle feeder is now confronted with the question
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 283
as to how well he shall winter these animals. That is to say,
he is often at a loss to know whether to feed a small allowance of
grain along with the roughage or to feed the roughage alone.
If he feeds the roughage alone, it is doubtful whether the steers
can be wintered without loss in weight, unless the roughage is
of good quality and a legume, such as clover, alfalfa, or cowpea
hay. On the other hand, if he feeds grain, then comes the ques-
tion as to how much shall be fed, for it is well known that if
steers are grained too liberally through the winter, they will
not do so well the following summer on pasture.
While different systems of feeding should undoubtedly be
recommended for cattle of various ages and quality, there are at
least three conditions that should be kept clearly in mind: first,
cattle wintered on roughage alone, providing they retain their
thrift, will make more economical beef producers the following
summer on pasture than when they receive grain along with
the roughage; second, cattle wintered on a too liberal grain
ration may fail to make a profit the following summer on pas-
ture; and third, other things being equal, cattle wintered on a
ration containing a liberal supply of protein, particularly if this
protein is contained in the roughage, as clover, alfalfa, or cow-
pea hay, will make greater and more economical gains during
both winter and summer than if this nitrogenous roughage is
wanting. Itis true that animals receiving this nitrogenous
roughage will not finish or fatten so quickly, but they will make
gains more economically, and the quality of the flesh will
be better than otherwise. From practical experience, there-
fore, it would seem best to provide considerable protein
in the ration of the wintering stocker or feeder. If this
protein is lacking in the roughage, in which it should be
provided if possible, then supply the needed protein by
feeding such grains as cotton-seed meal or linseed-oil meal
in rather limited quantities in the grain ration. In case
the grain is fed no suggestions can be given as to the exact
284 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
amount, but when one is simply wintering the steers without
any attempt to fatten them, the maximum amount should not
exceed six pounds daily, and perhaps better results can be
obtained by feeding two to four pounds daily.
Roughage increases feeding capacity. — It is conceded by ex-
perienced cattle feeders that roughing steers preparatory to put-
ting them on full feed requires much skill. The feeding of an
abundance of roughage encourages the enlargement and develop-
ment of the digestive organs, thus increasing the capacity for
handling more concentrated feeds later on. ‘This, of course,
gives the thin animal a large paunch, which must certainly be
reduced before the animal is ready for market. A _ large-
paunched steer is not wanted on any fat-cattle market. From
this it would seem that before beginning to feed, or in the early
part of the feeding process, the enlarging of the paunch should
be encouraged in order to increase the capacity, while the latter
part of the feeding period should be devoted to reducing this
paunch and smoothing up the steer.
SUMMER FEEDING ON PASTURE
Fattening cattle in the summer on pasture is usually more
profitable than winter fattening. By such feeding the labor is
reduced to a minimum, there is no handling of bulky foods, no
bedding to provide, no lots to clean of manure, and no outlay for
an extensive plant, such as sheds, lots, and the like. Approxi-
mately the only labor in summer fattening is that of feeding the
grain, when such is fed.
There are two methods of fattening beef cattle on pasture:
pasturing alone with no grain, which is called “grass fatten-
ing”’; and feeding grain, often all they will eat, in connection
with the pasturage. Which of these methods should be em-
ployed will depend on conditions. When land is cheap and
there is an abundance of pasture, one may secure fairly good
returns from pasturing without grain. On the other hand, if
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 285
the pasture is limited, the land high in price, and one has the
grain, no doubt it will be more profitable to feed grain in con-
nection with the pasture. The previous treatment of the cattle
may likewise have an influence. To get good results from
fattening cattle on pasture alone, the cattle should be wintered
very largely on roughage and should be rather thin in flesh
though not lacking in thrift. Cattle that are accustomed to
grain and in the habit of depending on it very largely for their
nourishment will shrink heavily if the grain is refused them.
While cheaper gains can usually be made from pasturing alone,
the cattle cannot, as a rule, be made very fat, and hence will not
command a high price on the market, which will often offset the
advantage of cheap gains. There are, however, many ex-
perienced cattle feeders who rely on grass fattening, particularly
on the edge of the corn-belt. Cattle feeders in the corn-belt
will, as a rule, secure greater returns from a liberal grain feed
in connection with the pasture.
How to turn to grass. — As cattle are very subject to bloating
if turned to succulent grass, especially if wet with dew or rain,
much care should be exercised. This is particularly true on
clover or alfalfa. If it is convenient, one should turn the cattle
out for an hour or so in the afternoon and then take them up
for the day, turning them out the following day at noon and
leaving a few hours longer, then taking them up again, when on
the third day they may be allowed to remain.
Feeding grain to cattle on pasture. — The amount and kind of
grain that should be fed to fattening cattle on pasture will de-
pend much on the previous treatment, age, condition, and
quality of the cattle as well as the time of marketing them.
Young stock, that are to be made thick fat, will need grain con-
tinually throughout the summer. Older cattle, that are not in-
tended for market until fall, may well have their grain withheld
until the pasture begins to get short, say along in July. On the
other hand, many cattle feeders prefer to “warm the cattle up”
286 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
in the feed lot before going to grass, and then to finish them on
pasture, disposing of them by the middle of July before the
hottest of the. weather and just about the time the pasture begins
to fail. Under this system it would be necessary to feed grain
liberally from the beginning of the pasture season. While this
method has much to commend it, there is the serious objec-
tion of turning cattle to succulent pasture when they are receiv-
ing a liberal supply of grain. On account of the very succulent
grass so early in the spring such cattle “drift”? or shrink con-
siderably, even though the grain is continued. This drift is
so serious that if the cattle are intended for market by, say,
the middle of June, it will be more profitable on the average to
finish them in a dry-lot. In addition to the disadvantage of
the heavy drift it is poor economy to turn cattle to pasture
before the grass gets a good start; this is particularly true
if the grass was closely cropped the preceding fall.
There is difference of opinion as to the kind of grain that
should be fed cattle of the various ages on pasture. In some
cases perhaps corn alone cannot be improved on, particularly
if there is some leguminous grass, as clover or alfalfa, in the
pasture. Some contend that with young stock especially, it is
advisable to supplement corn with a food rich in protein, as
linseed or cotton-seed meal, whereas in the experience of others
the addition of this extra protein food has caused the young
stock to grow and not fatten so readily as if the extra food
was withheld. Among this class of cattle feeders, when they
supplement corn, it is more likely to be for the older cattle.
The pastures. — There are two general plans for providing
pasture land: permanent pastures; and pastures in rotation
with other crops. Permanent pastures are rapidly disappear-
ing from those sections of the country suitable for growing grain,
because of the increased value of the land for grain raising, but
there are vast areas unsuited for grain growing which can be
very profitably utilized for permanent pasture. In fact much
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 287
of the land east of the Sciota, south of the Ohio, and west of
the Missouri rivers is suitable for permanent pasture. This
cheap land, much of it, could be laid to permanent pastures and
yield a very creditable return as pasture for beef cattle. In
fact, if conditions continue in the future as in the past, much
of our beef must come from these cheap outlying lands. The
grains grown on the grain farms are rapidly becoming too valu-
able as food for human consumption to permit of their being
fed to animals.
No definite suggestions can be given as to the choice between
permanent pastures and pastures in rotation further than to say
that all depends on the location. If those farms or parts of farms
that are unsuited for growing grains can be laid to permanent
pasture, it will, on the average, be profitable to do so. Each of
these systems has certain advantages. For example, permanent
pasture simplifies the fencing, provides the water supply, the
shade, and the feed racks or bunks, while pastures in rotation
give a much better opportunity to distribute the manure to
all parts of the farm. Permanent pastures even if seriously
affected by drouth are not likely to be a failure, while pastures
in rotation occasionally do fail. Properly managed permanent
pastures will increase in value with age.
The pasture crop is perhaps the most neglected of farm crops
at the present time. Many pastures that are now supporting
one animal to two or three acres can with proper care be made
to support twice the number. First, secure a good stand. Many
pastures do not now possess more than one-half a crop. Blue-
grass should form the basis of all permanent pastures in the
East, but should be reénforced by white clover, orchard-grass,
and red-top. The pasture should be harrowed and reseeded
each spring until a stand is secured. Second, keep down the
weeds. Animals eat the grass and leave the weeds. To ob-
viate this, pastures should be mown twice each year. This
not only keeps the weeds down, but keeps the pasture in such
288 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
condition that the animals will feed more evenly over the entire
field. Animals are likely to feed where the grass is rather
short and tender, and leave the ranker growth. Third, drain
pastures well. This is often entirely neglected, and the parts of
the farm that are too wet to grow crops are left to pasture.
Fourth, top-dress permanent pastures with manure when con-
venient. Often corn stalks or straw scattered over the north
Fig. 91.—Farrenine Steers on Pasture. Frspine Crover Hay to sup-
PLEMENT THE PASTURE.
slopes when the land is broken will materially improve the
pasture. Another factor which often reduces the total yield of
a pasture is the fact that the grass is pastured too early in the
spring, which hinders the growth of the young plants before they
get a good start, whereas if they were left a week longer, they
would return a much greater total yield. Pastures thus treated
will increase in value with age, as has been practically demon-
strated, as far east as Central New York and as far west as
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 289
Western Missouri, where there are permanent pastures vary-
‘ing in age from one-third to one-half of a century, and are now
supporting one animal to each acre from four to six months
each year without extra feed, and supporting two animals an
equal length of time when grain is fed in addition. (Fig. 91.)
WINTER FEEDING IN DRY-LOT
While feeding steers in the summer time on pasture may be
the most profitable for those cattle feeders possessing the pas-
ture, there are many farms, especially in the corn-belt, lacking
in pasture and yet possessing an abundance of grain and dry
forage that the farmer desires to convert into beef. On such
farms winter feeding in the dry-lot is the common practice. This
system of feeding beef cattle is not without its advantages. For
example, the feeding is done at a time of a year when there
is little other work, and if the cattle are measurably protected
from the wind and rain, they suffer less from the weather than
from the heat of summer, and especially if the flies are trouble-
some. When the steers are purchased in the fall and fattened
during the winter, the cattle feeder has his money tied up
a much shorter period, resulting in correspondingly quicker
returns. Furthermore, such a system affords a very convenient
method of converting the previous crop, grain and dry forage,
into ready cash to finance the farm the coming season, as the
steers are marketed and out of the way before farm work begins
in the spring.
Feeding grain to cattle in the dry-lot. — The amount and kind
of grain that should be fed to fattening cattle in the dry-lot will
depend much on the age, condition, and quality of the cattle
as well as upon the kind of dry forage. Young stock will need
a heavy grain ration from start to finish if they are to be
made fat, whereas older cattle may be fed grain rather spar-
ingly at first, gradually increasing to a full grain feed sixty days
before marketing. With the older cattle already having their
U
290 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
growth, they have but to fatten; whereas with younger cattle
there is continued growth, and to fatten them requires an extra
effort, as increasing the grain in the ration. With steers rather
rough and coarse in quality that cannot be made prime in any
event, there is not the necessity for the heavy grain ration re-
quired by steers of finer quality that can be made prime and thus
command a premium on the market. This heavy grain ration
for the steers of finer quality is likely to increase the cost of gains,
making them even more expensive than the lighter grain ration
for the coarse steers, but the extra premium commanded on the
market will make the finer bred steers the more profitable. The
amount of grain that can be fed economically to fattening cattle
depends much on the kind of dry forage. On the average
animals receiving a leguminous forage, such as clover, alfalfa,
or cowpea hay, will make economical use of a larger grain ration
than when other forage, such as timothy, red-top, corn stalks,
and the like, is fed. In fact, fattening farm animals will make
more economical use of a larger-grain ration if the grain also
contains a high percentage of protein. The length of the fat-
tening period will also have much to do with the amount of
grain that should be fed. If it is intended to market the
steers in 100 days or less, they will have to be full-fed grain from
the beginning if they are to be made reasonably fat, whereas if
the feeding period is to last 150 days or more, the cattle may be
fed grain rather sparingly at first.
As to the kind of grain to feed fattening cattle, this likewise
depends largely on the cattle and the kind of dry roughage.
When rather young steers are being fattened, it is the com-
mon opinion that a more nitrogenous ration should be used;
hence it is considered the better plan to provide much protein
for the young animals, whereas in the case of older and more
mature cattle the grain ration often contains less protein.
While this plan is usually recommended, it is well to remember
that a ration rich in nitrogenous material has a tendency to
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 291
keep the young cattle growing rather than to fatten them.
While it is true that young stock thus fed will make gains more
rapidly and more cheaply, the cattle will oftentimes lack in finish
because they have been growing rather than fattening. The
kind of roughage determines, in part, the kind of grain that
should be fed. When the cattle are being fed a dry roughage
containing much protein, as clover, alfalfa, or cowpea hay, the
grain may contain a correspondingly less amount of protein.
On the other hand, when the dry forage lacks the protein, the de-
ficiency should be made up by feeding a grain rich in protein,
as cotton-seed or linseed meal. In addition, the length of the
fattening period will have an influence on the kind of grain to
feed. If the period is short, it will be necessary to feed very
fattening foods, such as corn and cotton-seed meal, from the
beginning; whereas if the cattle are to be fed 150 days or more,
they may be given foods containing less fat during the early
stages of the feeding period.
BABY-BEEF
By baby-beef is meant fat cattle between one and two years
of age and weighing from 800 to 1100 pounds. Of recent years
much has been written concerning the advantages of producing
this class of beef. A general perusal of the recent literature on
beef production would lead one to think that it is far more
profitable to produce beef from young animals than from ani-
mals possessing some age, and yet the practical cattle feeder has
continued to employ two-year-old cattle in his feeding opera-
tions. The experiment literature has in a large measure
fostered the idea that beef could be more profitably produced
by feeding younger cattle. These recommendations are based
largely. on the fact that the younger animal will make much
more economical gains than older animals. There are, however,
many factors besides economic gains entering into profitable beef
production.
292 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Cattle used in baby-beef production. — First of all, the cattle
must be young. They must be well bred and of fine quality,
as such cattle can be finished for the market at a much younger
age than the plainer kinds. The cattle to be used in the pro-
duction of baby-beef should not be permitted to lose their calf
fat. They must be kept fleshy from start to finish, for if once
they get run down in flesh, it is very difficult to make them
prime under eighteen months of age.
Feeding for baby-beef production. — If young animals are to
be made fat, they must be fed liberally on fat-producing feeds,
particularly grain. Heavier grain feeding is required in the
production of baby-beef than of older beef. Calves and yearlings
have a tendency to grow rather than to fatten, and to overcome
this they must be fed a heavy ration of grain, a fact not to
be lost sight of in figuring the cost. In the beginning the calf
should be fed considerable quantities of dry forage, such as
clover, alfalfa, or cowpea hay, as such foods have a tendency
to increase the digestive capacity of the calf, thereby enabling
it to handle large quantities of grain later on. If heifer calves
instead of steers are fed, they wil! finish more quickly and
hence should be marketed earlier. The younger the prime
heifers are at the time of the marketing, the less discrimination
in price the butcher will make between them and steers. In
feeding for baby-beef, the most common mistake is to market
the animals before they are fat enough. There is little likeli-
hood of getting them too fat to meet the demands of the
market.
Advantages of baby-beef production.— The production of baby-
beef has two very distinct and outstanding advantages over that
of older beef. First, young animals require less food for a given
gain than older animals. Second, the same capital invested in
young animals produces more meat than in older animals.
During recent years these two advantages have been much
heralded by experimenters, and while at first sight they may
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 293
seem to be the beginning and the end of beef production, they
are nevertheless far from it. While, possibly, each advantage
has been exaggerated, they are both certainly true, and since
there is an abundance of experimental data to prove them,
we will let them stand as unimpeachable.
Disadvantages of baby-beef production. —'The production of
baby-beef is not without its disadvantages, most of which have
been lost sight of because of the lack of practical knowledge on
the part of its exponents. Chief among the disadvantages are:
first, the difficulty of obtaining cattle possessing sufficient quality
to make choice baby-beef. Second,.the marked difficulty in
making the younger animals fat, it requiring a heavy grain
ration. Third, since much baby-beef finds its way to market
lacking in finish, it fails to command a high price. Fourth,
cattle possessing sufficient quality being scarce, the cost price of
such animals is high and because they lack finish on the market
the selling price is low; hence the margin between cost and selling
‘price issmall. Fifth, the initial weight of the calf is small; hence
in the production of baby-beef the cattle feeder cannot depend
for his profit on the advance in value to the hundredweight on
the initial weight. From the foregoing it must be apparent
that there are many questions involved in the production of
baby-beef, and that the profit is not in proportion to the cheap-
ness of the gains.
FEEDING CATTLE FOR THE LOCAL MARKET
Feeding cattle for the local meat market varies greatly from
feeding for a large central market. The agricultural writers
and practically all of the experiment literature give advice on
feeding cattle by the car-load and for the large central market,
yet according to the best figures obtainable nearly one-half
the cattle slaughtered in this country are slaughtered by local
butchers.
The local butcher in small places cannot charge enough for
,
294 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
meat to warrant his paying a high price for the cattle he kills;
hence he usually purchases plain butcher cattle. As a rule,
the local slaughter houses are
not equipped to handle heavy
cattle; the cuts of meat are
usually retailed in small
amounts; therefore, the local
butcher demands a rather
small animal, weighing from
600 to 1000 pounds. The
local butcher cannot pay for
Fie. 92.—A Srezr THAT mapr ex- high finish. Thick fat cattle
Sasa prance: oo 4Srx carry too much waste. Grass-
fat cattle can be made to
carry sufficient flesh for the local butcher. While no con-
sumer, rich or poor, wishes to pay for waste fat, yet highest
quality of beef is impossible without considerable quantities
of such waste. There is, however, no demand in the local
market for beef carrying waste fat, no matter how excellent its
quality.
From the foregoing it is apparent that the cattle feeder who
plans to feed cattle for the local market and make a profit should
procure heifers, young cows, or low-grade steers as his feeding
stock, since such cattle can be purchased at a low price. These
cattle must be fattened as economically as possible, largely on
dry forage or on pasture, and then sold before they become too
fat to meet the demands of the local market. This class of
butcher cattle can be very profitably produced on farms lying
east, south, and west of the corn-belt. Perhaps the greatest
handicap to profitable beef production in these regions is lack of
suitable pasture land. That much of the land in these regions
can be made to grow pastures suitable for the profitable
production of this grade of beef no longer admits of doubt
(page 286).
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 295
HOGS FOLLOWING GRAIN-FED CATTLE
Among grain-fed cattle, hogs are considered indispensable to
profitable beef production. Cattle receiving a rather heavy
grain ration fail to digest the grain completely, and hogs, if
given a chance, will pick up this grain and convert it into pork.
So great is the saving thus effected that beef production is sel-
dom profitable without the hog. The principal questions in
connection with hogs following grain-fed cattle are: the kind
of hogs to use, the number of hogs to a steer, the advisability
of feeding the hogs grain in addition to what they get from the
droppings, and the gains that the hogs may be expected to
make.
The most satisfactory hog to follow grain-fed cattle is one
weighing approximately 100 pounds and thin in flesh. If the
hogs are too heavy or too fat, they do not make good rustlers,
and will fail to find all the droppings, especially in pasture.
On the other hand, it is not good practice to use pigs too young
because of the danger of injury from the cattle. Brood sows
are oftentimes used to follow cattle. They are not likely to
be good rustlers, however, and will fail to find many of the
droppings, especially if heavy with pig.
The advisability of feeding grain in addition to that ob-
tained from the droppings will depend much on the conditions.
If the price of cattle is high and that of hogs low, one would
preier to allow the hogs only what they gather from the drop-
pings; whereas if the price of hogs is high and cattle low,
then it would no doubt be more profitable to feed the hogs
in addition, especially since hogs are more economical feeders
than cattle. The great majority of cattle feeders use grain in
addition to that secured from the droppings.
The number of hogs to follow each steer will depend on two
conditions: the form in which the grain is fed, whole or ground;
and whether extra grain is fed in addition to that obtained
296 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
from the droppings. When grain is fed extra, the number of
hogs to each steer will depend on the amount of grain thus fed.
The common practice is to put a 100-pound hog behind each
steer and feed grain in addition. If, however, grain is not fed
in addition, one hog to two steers will be sufficient to pick up
the grain of the droppings when the grain is fed to the steer in
the whole form, and one pig to four steers when the grain is fed in
the form of meal. There is much less available material for the
hogs when the grain is fed in the form of meal than when fed
as shelled or ear corn.
The gains that may be expected from hogs following steers
will depend on the method. When meal is fed, the gains will
be less than when the grain is fed whole; and when grain in
addition is fed, the gains will depend entirely on the amount
of grain that is fed to the hogs. When one 100-pound hog is
placed behind each steer and grain fed in addition, as is the
common practice, the cattle feeder expects to secure at least
one pound gain on each hog daily for a period of 100 days. By
this time the hogs are weighing over 200 pounds and are too
heavy to make good rustlers, so they are withdrawn from the
feed lots and another drove of 100-pound hogs placed with
the cattle. The 200-pound hogs may be marketed at once or
fed extra grain for two weeks, by which time they average
better than 225 pounds each when they are put on the market.
GETTING CATTLE “ON FEED”
There is no more important question connected with cattle
feeding than that of getting the cattle on a full feed of grain,
meaning by full feed all the grain they will consume. Opin-
ion differs widely as to the time that should be required, some
very successful cattle feeders employing the so-called short
method, that is, getting the cattle on full feed in one to two
weeks, whereas others equally as successful employ the long
method, taking one to two months. Which of these methods
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 297
one should choose will depend somewhat on the length of the
feeding period and the amount of grain that the cattle feeder
plans to feed.
LENGTH OF FEEDING PERIOD
The length of the cattle feeding period is extremely variable,
ranging from ninety days to fifteen months. Either of these ex-
tremes or any intervening time may be profitable under certain
conditions. There are several factors affecting the length of
the feeding period, chief of which are the kinds of foods, the
quality and condition of the cattle, and the age of the cattle. If
the cattle feeder wishes to feed a relatively large proportion of
dry forage and a small amount of grain, the fattening process
will be slow and the feeding period prolonged; whereas if he
wishes to feed a maximum amount of grain and a correspondingly
small amount of dry forage, the fattening process will be acceler-
ated and the period shortened. If the steers are rough and of
such poor quality that they cannot be made prime, the feeding
period may be of shorter duration than if the steers are of finer
breeding, and of good quality; the extra finish requires much
time, but it is considered profitable because of the premium
commanded in the market. Furthermore, the age of the cattle
affects the length of the feeding period, as in common practice
it requires from ninety to one hundred and fifty days to finish
mature cattle and approximately fifteen months to finish
calves, with intervening ages ranging between these extremes.
MARKETABLE CONDITION
The cattle feeder is ofteh at a loss to know just when to mar-
ket his cattle. The problem is complicated all the more by the
fact that the finishing process is a very expensive one, and yet
this extra finish is what commands the premium of the market.
The butcher at the large central market demands excessive fat-
ness, and for it he is willing to pay an extra price, whereas the
298 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
local butcher fails to appreciate such finish and may even
discriminate against it, saying that his patrons will object to the
waste fat. Much depends on the market also; if there is a light
demand and a heavy run of extra fat cattle, the butchers will
Fic. 98.— ABERDEEN ANGUs Butt. Owned by J. 8. Goodwin, Naperville, Ill.
The Aberdeen Angus breed of beef cattle developed in northeastern Scotland.
Like the Hereford, Angus mature early, but lack the size of the Shorthorn,
cows weighing around 1400 pounds, bulls 2000, and finished steers 1000 to
1400 pounds. The steers are unexceled for fattening in the feed lot and are
held in high esteem by the butchers, although if made too large they are likely to
become coarse. They are all black and hornless.
take advantage and bid down the price, whereas if there is a light
run and a heavy demand for cattle showing much finish, the
butchers will bid up the price accordingly. Therefore, the ques-
tion as to when the cattle are ready for the market cannot be
answered without a knowledge of, first, the age of the cattle;
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE 299
second, the quality of the cattle; third, the relative cost of put-
ting cattle in prime condition compared with the cost of merely
“‘warming them up’”’; and fourth, a knowledge of the condition
of the market.
The more prominent indications of a finished steer are fullness
at base of tongue, a roll of fat in front of the point of the
shoulder, a full thick flank that stands out as the animal walks,
a large mellow cod, a full twist, and fullness at the tail-head.
When to market cattle. — As to where and when to buy feeders,
no definite statement can bemade. The demand for extra prime
beef, such as is used by the high-grade hotels and restaurants,
is fairly good every month. There is an extra demand for
such beef during the Christmas season, beginning about Novem-
ber 20 when the Christmas order for export beef begins to come
and continuing to about the middle of December. There is
good demand for prime baby-beef the year round, with an
extra call during the Christmas season. Export cattle are in
greatest demand in the winter and spring months; Canada
supplies the demand in the late summer and fall. Common
cattle are in greatest demand in the spring months, as after the
first of July they come into competition with the cheap western
range cattle.
SHIPPING CATTLE
There are some precautions that should be taken in getting
cattle ready for shipment. The object sought is to ship the cat-
tle with as little “drift”? or loss in weight as possible. While
there are those who manage the cattle in such a way as to induce
them to drink an unusual amount of water when they reach the
market, thus securing an abnormal fill, such practice is far from
commendable. Cattle buyers are always on the lookout for such
cattle and discriminate heavily against them. On the other
hand, it is perfectly legitimate for the cattle feeder to take such
precautions as will insure his animals against the likelihood of
scouring and to prevent abnormal shrinking in weight.
300 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Preparing cattle for shipment. — Since there are certain foods
that have a tendency towards loosening the bowels, such should
be withheld for at least 24 hours before shipment. Chief among
the foods likely to scour cattle are shelled corn, corn meal, oil
meal, clover, alfalfa, cowpea hay, and green grass. In fact, a full
grain ration of any kind is likely to loosen the bowels. There-
fore, for 24 hours before shipment the cattle should be shut up
in a dry lot, fed grain sparingly, but may have all the timothy
hay they like. Oats make a very good grain to feed at this
time. Water should be withheld four hours before shipment.
The car in which the cattle are to be shipped should be well
bedded with straw. If in addition to these precautions it is
not overloaded, the cattle should arrive at the market fresh and
clean. Cattle thus treated will make a normal fill. Several car
loads of cattle thus treated have been shipped a 36 to 40 hour
journey without unloading on only a 3 per cent drift or loss.
Drifting cattle for the local market. — When the fat cattle are
sold on the local market instead of shipping, it is customary in
some localities to sell them on a 3 per cent drift, taking the
weight at the farm. From the fact that cattle can be shipped
40 hours on a 3 per cent drift, this would seem to be the maxi-
mum that should be allowed the local buyer, and this should be
on weights taken at the farm where the animals are fed.
SAMPLE RATIONS FOR FATTENING CATTLE
The following rations are collected from various sources and
furnish a guide in determining the kind and quantity of feed
that should be allowed fattening cattle. They apply to 1000
pounds live weight : —
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE
301
Foop Per Pounp
meal
AGE AND Ration Gaw
WEIGHT
or CaTTLEe Grain Dry Forage Grain eu
. Calves 22 1b. shelled corn | 12 lb. clover hay 5.9 2.9
457 |b. 3 Ib. cotton-seed
meal
Calves 18 lb. shelled corn | 5 lb. clover hay 5.8 1.41
534 Ib. 2.5 lb. cotton-seed | 18 1b. corn silage 5.3?
meal
Calves 18 lb. shelled corn | 4.5 Ib. clover hay 5.3 1.1!
508 Ib. 3 lb. cotton-seed | 19 lb. corn silage 4.8?
meal :
Yearlings | 21 1b. shelled corn { 11 1b. clover hay 7.3 3.2
685 lb. 3.5 lb. cotton-seed
meal
Yearlings | 191b. shelled corn | 4.5 lb. clover hay 7.9 1.73
854 Ib. 2.5 lb. cotton-seed | 18 Ib. corn silage 6.8?
meal
Yearlings |17.5Ib. shelled corn | 11 lb. prairie hay 8.1 4.6
799 Ib. 2.5 Ib. linseed-oil
meal
Yearlings | 191b. shelled corn | 11 Ib. alfalfa hay 7.7 4.7
808 Ib.
Yearlings | 17.5 Ib. shelled corn] 15 lb. cornstalks 8.0 5.7
777 |b. 2.5 Ib. linseed-oil
meal
Yearlings {17.5 lb. shelled corn |15 lb. sorghum 8.7 6.4
788 Ib. 2.5 Ib. linseed-oil
1 Clover hay.
2 Corn silage.
802
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Agz AND RATION pose Gun
WEIGHT OF
CaTTLe Grain Dry Forage Grain pee
Two-year-olds| 18 lb. shelled corn | 9.5 lb. clover hay 8.9 4.1
966 Ib. 3.2 lb. cotton-seed
meal
Two-year-olds| 16 Ib. shelled corn | 4 lb. clover hay 7.6 1.5}
1010 Ib. 3 lb. cotton-seed | 15 lb. corn silage 5.82
meal
Two-year-olds| 10 lb. snapped corn] 18 lb. prairie hay TA 15.2
975 |b.
Two-year-olds| 10 lb. snapped corn} 12 lb. prairie hay 4.7 10.5
979 lb. 10 Ib. alfalfa hay
Two-year-olds| 10 Ib. snapped corn| 22 Ib. alfalfa hay 4.6 10.7
977 lb.
Two-year-olds] 20 lb. ear corn 10 lb. clover hay 9.5 4.0
893 lb.
Two-year-olds| 21 lb. ear corn 5 lb. shredded 10.5 3.9
896 Ib. stalks
2lb. linseed meal | 3 Ib. oat straw
Two-year-olds| 18 1b. shelled corn | 7 lb. timothy hay 9.3 3.4
1017 lb.
Two-year-olds| 16 lb. shelled corn | 8.81b. timothy hay | 10.0 3.9
1054 lb. 5.4 lb. cotton-seed
meal
1 Clover hay.
2 Corn silage.
FEEDING BEEF CATTLE
308
AGE AND csi Poeen Gans
WEIGHT OF
CaTTLE Grain Dry Forage Grain ee
Yearlings | 14]b. shelled corn | Pasture 7.9
774 Ib. 3.1 lb. gluten feed
Yearlings | 141b. shelled corn | Pasture 7.0
723 Ib. 3.5 lb. linseed meal
Yearlings | 141]b. shelled corn | Pasture 7.5
734 lb. 3.5 lb. cotton-seed
meal
Yearlings 16 Ib. shelled corn | Pasture 7.2
730 Ib. i
Two-year-olds| 11 Ib. shelled corn
859 Ib. 2.8 lb. cotton-seed | Pasture 7.8
meal
2.8 Ib. wheat bran
Two-year-olds| 16 lb. shelled corn | Pasture 8.7
940 Ib. 2.5 Ib. gluten feed
Two-year-olds| 16 lb. shelled corn | Pasture 8.3
933 Ib. 2.5 lb. linseed meal
Three-year- | 12 1b. shelled corn | Pasture 9.6
olds
1269 Ib. 2 lb. cotton-seed
meal
Three-year- | 14lb. shelled corn | Pasture 10.1
olds
1251 lb.
304
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Sample rations for wintering cattle with no attempt to fatten them
Ration FoR Eacu STEER
WEIGHT OF GAIN PER
CaTtTLe Da
Grain Dry Forage Ib,
736 Ib. none 16 lb. timothy hay 0.4
707 lb. none 20 lb. whole cornstalks 0.2
667 lb. none 15 lb. shredded corn- | — 0.1
stalks
743 Ib. none 44 lb. corn silage 1.0
771 Ib. none 10 lb. cornstalks 0.7
10 lb. clover hay
788 lb. none 20 Ib. cowpea hay 0.5
765 lb. 4 lb. shelled corn 16 lb. timothy hay 0.6
767 Ib. 4 lb. shelled corn 9 lb. cornstalks 0.9
9 lb. clover hay
783 Ib. 4 lb. shelled corn 19 lb. cowpea hay 1.5
2 6 Ib. shelled corn 17 lb. timothy hay 1.4
6 lb. shelled corn 19 Ib. clover hay 1.9
6 lb. shelled corn 17 lb. alfalfa hay 1.6
6 lb. shelled corn 17 lb. cowpea hay 1.3
6 lb. shelled corn 9 |b. cornstalks 1.6
9 lb. clover hay
6 Ib. shelled corn 8 lb. wheat straw 1.3
8 lb. clover hay
1 Weight approximately as above.
CHAPTER XIII
BREEDING BEEF CATTLE
Tue breeding of cattle for the production of beef should re-
ceive more attention from the general farmer than is being ac-
corded it at the present time. During the past decade the breed-
ing of beef cattle on the common farms has been on the decline,
especially in the north and central part of the country. For-
merly, in traveling over this section, it was not an uncommon
sight to see large herds of well-bred beef cattle grazing, often
on permanent pasture, while at present such a herd is so-un-
common as to elicit much comment. As has been pointed
out in the discussion on purchasing feeding cattle, the reasons
for this decline in beef breeding are many, the chief one being
that there is more money to be made in other branches of
farming. Along with this decline in breeding there has been
an increase in consumption, until the problem of supplying the
demand for beef has taken on a serious aspect. The remedy
for this is only to breed more and better beef-producing animals.
No doubt other branches of farming are more profitable for
that section of the country lying west of the Sciota, north of the
Ohio, and east of the Missouri rivers, yet such may not be true
of the immediate surrounding territory. In this outlying ter-
ritory there is land not well suited to growing grain that with
proper management can be turned to the profitable production
of beef cattle (pages 276, 290).
The chief defect of the common cattle is their lack of quality
and uniformity. This is due both to the lack of good blood and
x 305
306 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
‘to the indiscriminate admixture of the blood of the several breeds
of both beef and dairy types. Proof of this is not wanting. In
traveling about the country one notes a great variation in the
type, form, and especially the color of the animals in each herd.
In many small herds one often sees red, white, black, brindle,
and all conceivable combinations of these colors, as well as in-
Fig. 94.—Hzrerorp Cow. First prize winner, International Live Stock Show.
The Hereford beef cattle originated in the county from which they take their
name in England. In size this breed is a close second to the Shorthorn.
Herefords are noted for their early maturing qualities and for their good
grazing qualities; on the ranges they are often preferred to the Shorthorn.
This breed lacks the full quarters of the Shorthorn. The color is red, with
white markings. MHerefords are often called ‘‘ White Faces.”
dividual animals that conform in a measure tc the strictly beef
form, others of the dairy form, with all gradations between the
two. There is lack of uniformity in all respects. Before any
community can improve its cattle, it must decide upon a plan,
and each person must proceed largely along the lines of this
well developed idea.
BREEDING BEEF CATTLE 307
PLAN OF BREEDING
Before deciding upon a plan of breeding beef cattle one should
make a careful study of his conditions; he should visit farms
where beef cattle are successfully bred, noting conditions and
comparing with hisown. Such improvement as he may be able
to bring about must be upon the common native cattle of the
community. To dispose of the native cattle and purchase well-
bred uniform cattle would be very expensive and in most
cases very unprofitable. The task is then to adopt some plan
of breeding that will result in an improvement of the native
stock. In most cases this can be most profitably accomplished
by the grading-up process; that is, by the use of pure-bred
bulls on the native common females.
Codperative grading-up. — A very successful plan to improve
the beef-producing qualities of the cattle of a locality is by the
coéperative grading-up method. The formation of beef-breed-
ing associations throughout a given locality would do much to
advance the progress of the industry. Each association should
have for its object the production and improvement of high-
grade and pure-bred beef cattle, and should be formed of breed-
ers who possess the same class or breed of cattle. It would be
the duty of such an association to protect the interest of its mem-
bers, provide suitable bulls each year for use on the cows owned
by thé members, advertise stock, attract buyers, hold sales, call
meetings for the discussion of beef breeding and feeding matters,
and to educate the farmers of the locality to better methods of
caring for live-stock.
Raise heifer calves from best cows. — Because of the excellency
of the heifer calves from the good cows, the cattle feeder is
tempted to fatten them for beef. This should not be done.
They should be reserved for breeding purposes. Many cattie
breeders are actually reducing the quality of their beef-produc-
ing herd by fattening the best calves and reserving the poorer
ones for breeding because they will not make good feeders.
308 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
SELECTION OF BREEDING STOCK
The best cattle should be retained and propagated and the
poorer animals discarded. In a very few generations, by em-
ploying such a method, the common cattle of the country
could be greatly improved. It isthe application of haphazard
methods that has resulted in the lack of character that exists
among our common native cattle.
The breed. — Choose the breed that best suits the conditions,
the markets, and the fancy of the breeders. There is no best
breed of beef cattle for all conditions. There is much variation
in the temperament, size, and
quality of product among the
leading beef breeds. Whether
Shorthorns, Herefords, Angus, or
Galloways should be chosen de-
pends on the attendant condi-
tions and the personal preference
among the breeders and feeders.
The Shorthorns have excellent
Fic. 95.— Campion HeRErorp hind-quarters and nick well with
see ame aemee eh fm the common cattle as well as
other beef breeds. The Here-
fords mature early and are excellent grazers. The Angus ma-
ture fairly early, produce a high quality of beef, and are much
sought on the markets. They are hornless though rather
nervous. The Galloways produce high quality beef, are
hornless, and often possess good ccets of hair; the hides are
much sought for tanning, and are used in manufacturing
coats, robes, and the like. The breed itself is never so
important as is the individuality and the uniformity.
Crossing. — For the propagation of animals intended solely for
beef many experienced cattle breeders and feeders prefer a Short
horn-Hereford cross, contending that the cross-bred steer. in-
-
BREEDING BEEF CATTLE 3809
herits the good grazing and early maturing qualities of the Here-
ford and the desirable hind-quarters of the Shorthorn. But it
must be understood that this cross-bred offspring should not
be used for breeding, no matter how excellent an individual,
for the second generation is very likely to inherit the poor
qualities or other qualities of both ancestors.
The dual-purpose cow. — By dual-purpose cow is meant one
capable of yielding a good flow of milk, and in which the offspring
will make a fair quality of beef as will the cow when dried off.
This is the so-called “farmer’s cow,” concerning the profitable-
ness of which there is much discussion. Because of the high
price of land over much of the grain belt, it is no longer profit-
able to keep a cow merely for the calf she raises. This has led
to the opinion that it is possible to develop a strain of dual- or
double-purpose cattle, one that while raising a calf that would
make a fair quality of beef would also yield milk sufficient to pay
for her keep.
The demand for such double-purpose animals has led a few
of the breeders, of at least three of the established breeds, Short-
horn, Red Polled, and Devon, to endeavor to breed such animals.
In the breeding of such cattle there are two very pertinent ques-
tions to be considered: First, the amount of milk or butter-fat
that should be expected; and second, the degree of excellency
in beef production that should be sought among the offspring.
These questions assume much importance, for, as we havealready
seen, the type suited to the production of milk is ill adapted to
the production of beef, and the type that takes on beef economi-
cally is not likely to make good milkers. Dual-purpose cattle
breeders vary widely in their opinion as to the amount of milk
and fat that should be expected as well as the excellency sought
in the calves. While the flow and fat required to make a profit
will vary according to conditions, yet if one can secure 5000 to
7000 pounds, yielding 200 to 250 pounds of butter-fat yearly,
and a calf of sufficient quality to reach a weight of 350 pounds
310 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
by the time it is 6 months of age, there should be no difficulty in
realizing a handsome profit, providing, of course. that the prod-
ucts are marketed to advantage (Fig. 96).
Instead of procuring dual-purpose strains of cattle, some
persons suggest breeding the dairy cows to a beef bull, thus
producing a half-blood beef animal. They recommend the
following plan: Since a good
cow, properly cared for, may be
Sm profitably milked for a period of
six to eight years, during which
time she is likely to produce
three or four heifer calves, only
one-third to one-fourth of the
cows need be bred to a dairy
bull; or the breeding of the
a ee ee ee ee entire herd to a dairy bull once
“Rose or Guensipe.” The dairy in three or four years is suff-
ore Tie, ee oy cient to maintain the dairy herd.
pounds of milk containing 625 All other calves are available for
pounds of fat. Owned by May & beef production and should be
Otis, Granville Center, Pa. Ex- .
ample of'acdual<purpose cow. sired by a beef bull. Such a plan
is likely to encounter practical
difficulties that would render its serviceability doubtful. It
would no doubt result in the production of calves of little value
to maintain a dairy herd and with doubtful value as feeding
cattle. It would also be extremely hazardous to attempt to
maintain a dairy herd with only one-fourth to one-third of
the calves to select from.
Uniformity. —Lack of uniformity is one of the greatest faults
connected with breeding common cattle. As it is now, each
locality is producing cattle of a number of types and breeds.
Such cattle are not desirable feeding animals, as they will
not finish or fatten evenly and must be sent to market
lacking in uniformity in type, color, weight, quality, and con-
BREEDING BEEF CATTLE 311
ditions. Mixed droves of cattle of this kind are not desired
on any market, and hence are discriminated against and
must sell for an exceedingly low price. On the other hand, if
each farmer in the locality would conform with the' majority
of his neighbors and codperate in propagating the same breed,
even though this breed may not be the one that suits his fancy
best or even the one that is best suited to the district, until
the community became noted for the production of such a
breed, then a cattle feeder in search of any particular type
should be able to go to the district noted for the production of
the breed required and there find cattle in sufficient numbers
to meet all needs.
THE BEEF BULL
To the bull we must look for the improvement of the
common cattle. To secure the improvement in a herd of
cattle through the females would require. the use of forty
or more superior cows to accomplish the same results as
might be secured by the use of a single bull, and even then
there would be less uniformity in the offspring. This is be-
cause the bull controls one-half the characters of the entire
crop of calves. This has led to the assertion that “the bull
is half the herd.” This assertion is misleading in a way, for
when it comes to herd improvement, he is even more than
one-half the herd.
The cost of a bull. — Among dairymen who keep a record of
the production of their cows, there is a fair knowledge of the
value of a good bull, while those who breed feeding cattle seem
to lack such information, or at least ignore it entirely. From
this it must not be inferred that one should pay a fancy price
for a beef bull. Many general farmers are depending on
practically worthless grade and scrub bulls to head the herds
of grade cows. Properly cared for, a bull should sire forty
calves in a season. Suppose the bull is of sufficient quality
812 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
to increase the value of each calf $5, a very conservative
estimate, then he makes $200 with his first crop of calves.
One-half of this sum will bring a very desirable bull of any of
the Icading beef breeds into any locality. Such a bull in-
troduced into a locality can be made to pay for himself the
Fic. 97.—GauLoway Buty. First prize, Ifnois State Fair. Owned by C. 8.
Hechtner, Clariton, Ia.
The Galloway breed of beef cattle originated in southwestern Scotland, adjacent
to the sea, where the breed developed much hardiness. Though neither so
early maturing nor so large as the Angus, the flesh is of good quality. This
breed is particularly noted for its fine coat of hair, which seems to be com-
posed of two parts, a very fine, short under growth and a long, wavy outer
growth. The hides are often used to manufacture coats, robes, and the like.
All animals are black and hornless.
first year. When once a desirable bull is procured, he should
be retained as long as he remains a true breeder. Bulls
possessing some age are likely to be difficult to control, and
many an excellent sire has been sold for beef simply because
the owner was afraid he would injure some one.
BREEDING BEEF CATTLE 313
THE BEEF COW
While all common cows must be bred in order that they
may freshen, yet the cows to which we look to replenish the
herd should be carefully selected. The heifer calves from the
best cows should be retained for breeding. By using a good
pure-bred sire and retaining the best heifers to replenish the
herd, in a few generations one can have a herd of cows equal
to any pure-bred herd for the production of feeding cattle.
The production-period in cattle.— As in the dairy cow, the
most fertile period is two to eight years of age. In exceptional
cases this period may be extended both ways (see page 246).
. Season of the year to breed.— While it seems desirable to have
dairy calves dropped in the fall, it is equally desirable to have
beef calves dropped in the spring. With dairy cattle, a some-
what larger flow can be ob-
tained when calves come in the
fall. With beef cattle the milk
flow is not so important. Cows
may be wintered more cheaply
when not in milk, requiring less
room, less careful attention,
and less food. Calves dropped
in the spring get a good start
on pasture. They need be car-
ried over but one winter, as
they can be fattened or finished
the following fall when approximately eighteen months of age,
if it is so desired; or if desired to fatten them during the
winter, they can be finished the second winter and put on
the market at two years of age. Fall-dropped calves are
more trouble to care for during the winter, although the advo-
cates of fall-dropped beef calves say that better steers can be
produced and developed by fall calving, as the cow in the fall
Fic. 98.— Gattoway Hetrers. True
to type. Owned by C. 8. Hechtner.
314 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
is in better condition; they also say that the increased flow
of milk caused by turning the cow to pasture in the spring is
a good thing for the calf, and that the fall-dropped calf is
better able to endure the heat and flies the following summer.
After a careful consideration of both practices, the writer
thinks it desirable to have the beef calves dropped in spring.
A very important factor in the breeding of calves for feeding
is to breed the cows in such a way that the calves will be as
nearly uniform in age as possible. This applies to both fall
and spring bred calves that are intended for feeding. Farmers
who possess only afew cows have them freshen at intervals
throughout the year in order that they may be well supplied
with milk the year round. This, of course, makes the calves of
unequal age, and they are not so desirable as feeding cattle.
The pregnant cow. — The pregnant cow should receive some
attention, particularly when she is to drop her calf in the
spring. Cows are often carried through the winter on a
ration of dry forage, such as corn stalks with no grain
in addition, with the result that they are in very poor
condition at calving time. This often leads to trouble at
parturition time, the cow being so weak she cannot bear the
calf, which is likely to be very small, thin, and weakly.
The cow may not have milk for it at first, or if she does,
it will be thin and scant. Such a condition must be avoided
if profitable feeding calves are to be propagated. If the
pregnant cow may have succulence in the shape of corn
silage, with clover, alfalfa, or cowpea hay in addition, no
grain need be fed. These feeds should be free from mold.
On the other hand, if non-nitrogenous dry forage is to be fed,
she should have grain in addition. Corn and wheat bran with
a small amount of linseed meal as a conditioner cannot be
improved upon. This may be fed at the rate of six pounds
daily per 1000 pounds live weight. Shelter from the storms
and rain should be provided; for this a common shed open to
BREEDING BEEF CATTLE 315
the south is sufficient except in very cold climates. Pregnant
cows thus cared for will come through the winter in good con-
dition and give birth to a strong thrifty calf that, if bred right,
will make a profitable feeder.
Cow with calf at foot. — The cow that is to suckle her young
need not receive the extra care that must be accorded the
dairy cow. When the calves are dropped in the spring and
the pasture is of good quality and abundant, the cows and
calves will require very little attention during the pasture
season. If, however, the pasture becomes short in late sum-
mer and fall, extra feed, such as clover, alfalfa, green forage,
or grain of some kind, should be given. Cows and calves at
pasture should have free access to fresh water. Salt should
be supplied at regular intervals or kept before them at all
times. Shade of some kind should be provided in the absence
of trees.
As soon as convenient the calves should be taught to eat
grain. This may be done by arranging a small pen with
small gates or passages through which the calves may enter
but the cows cannot. The pen may be placed near the water
tank. By all means calves should be taught to eat grain
before being weaned, as this will prevent shrinking at weaning
time. For suckling and weanling calves, the following grain
mixture proves satisfactory: 3 parts of corn meal, 3 parts .
ground oats, 3 parts of wheat bran, and 1 part of linseed meal.
When the calves are dropped in the fall, the cow and calf
will require more careful attention; this, however, comes during
the winter when there is little urgent work on farms where
cows are thus kept. The object sought is so to feed and manage
both cow and calf that they may be brought through the win-
ter in a healthy and thrifty condition; the cow in order that
she may properly nourish the suckling and be in condition to
breed again when so desired, the calf in order that it may make
a profitable feeding animal, as its future development depends
3816 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
much upon its growth during the first six months of its
life.
If possible, the cow should have some succulent food, as
corn silage, as such food improves her physical condition and
encourages the milk flow, thereby giving the calf a more liberal
supply. Clover, alfalfa, cowpea, or mixed hay should con-
stitute at least a part of the dry forage, with some grain fed in
addition. For the grain, a mixture of corn and bran with a
little linseed meal added cannot be improved upon, and if a
leguminous dry forage with silage is fed, a small amount of this
grain, say four pounds daily, will prove ample to keep the cow
and calf in thriving condition. If the dry forage consists of
non-leguminous plants only, such as prairie or timothy hay or
corn stalks, then a somewhat larger grain ration should be fed
and the proportion of linseed meal may be increased. Pro-
tection from the storms and rain must be provided. While a
common shed open to the south will serve where the mercury
seldom goes below zero, it is not sufficient in colder climates,
particularly if very moist. On the other hand, the quarters
must not be dark, damp, and poorly ventilated, as such is the
ideal place for the propagation of all kinds of calf ills. The
quarters should be measurably protected, well lighted, well
ventilated, and dry. Cows and calves thus cared for will come
_ through the winter in a thrifty and healthy condition. As on
pasture, the calves should be taught to eat grain as soon as
convenient and by all means at least one month before
weaning.
The calf that is permitted to suckle its dam can be raised
with little extra care. It should have attention at birth to
see that the function of respiration is started, and that it gets
some of the first or colostrum milk of the dam. If the calf
scours badly, some of the dam’s milk should be drawn off,
remembering that the last milk is richer in fat, and is the part
likely to cause the trouble, After the calf gets a start by proper
BREEDING BEEF CATTLE 817
feeding of the dam, both cow and calf can be kept in healthy
condition.
Male calves should be castrated before they have reached
the age of three months, and this may be done any time after
the calf is one week old. If hornless animals are desired, the
horns should be removed with caustic potash as soon as they
begin to appear (page 255).
Calves should be weaned at five to eight months of age.
Weaning is rather a question of preparation than of the
absolute removal of the calf from the cow, and the simplicity
of the weaning process depends on the thoroughness of the
preparation. If the calf has been accustomed to the grain as
suggested, if it has been permitted to take increasingly more
as it grows, the process will not be difficult, for as the ration
increases in the amount of grain it will decrease in the amount
of milk. With such precaution, there will be very little if any
set-back or disturbance to calf or dam. On the other hand,
if the calf must learn to eat after being deprived of its accus-
tomed source of food supply, it will require time to get used to
the new condition, and the cow will demand special care, be-
cause of the removal of the calf before her milk supply has
been diminished to any extent.
Weanlings should be well cared for during their first winter
if they are to make profitable feeding cattle. They should
have snug quarters, with opportunity for exercise, and be well
fed. Weanling calves are often let run with the stock cattle
and compelled to subsist entirely on dry forage, with the result
that they run down in condition and sometimes are stunted,
from which they never fully recover. A calf that is once
stunted will not make a good feeding animal. On the other
hand, if these weanlings are fed a liberal allowance, say four
pounds daily per head, of the grain mixture suggested for the
sucking calf, with clover, alfalfa, cowpea, or mixed hays in
addition, they will come through the winter strong and thrifty
818 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and will give a good account of themselves when fattened the
following summer.
Calves cared for as suggested should reach a weight of
375 to 450 pounds by the time they are six months of age.
While such calves make very excellent beef when well fed, they
are nevertheless very expensive, for the breeder must keep the
cow one year for the production of this 400-pound calf. No
exact figures can be given as to the cost, for much will depend
on the conditions. It is true that formerly many calves were
thus raised in the grain belt, whereas at the present time prac-
tically none are so raised. It would seem then to be no longer
profitable on land suited for grain growing. In view of recent
developments it seems unlikely that the price of beef will go
high enough to make it a profitable industry. That producing
such calves can be made a profitable industry in the outlying
territory of cheap pasture lands, however, admits of no doubt.
Feeding the beef calf. — If the cow’s milk is desired, the calf
should be weaned on or before the ninth milking, when the
milk becomes fit for human consumption. As a rule the earlier
the calf is weaned the more easily it can be taught to drink
from the pail. On the other hand, it is better for both cow
and calf to have the calf suckle as long as possible. The beef
calf can be taught to drink and changed from whole to skim
milk much as suggested for the dairy calf (pages 251 to 255).
There has been much discussion from time to time, among
beef producers, as to the possibilities of the skim-milk-fed calf
as a beef-producing animal. In fact, the skim-milk calf as a
beef producer is not likely to be considered seriously by the
experienced beef producers of the middle West. To these men
the skim-milk calf means a stunted, pot-bellied animal with
papery skin, lacking in quality and thrift, a fit subject for ridi-
cule, but hardly worth while in the feed lot. That these ex-
perienced men are justified in their opinion there can be no
doubt, for the average skim-milk calf has not much to recom-
BREEDING BEEF CATTLE 319
mend him as a beef-producing animal. On the other hand,
conditions are rapidly becoming such that we are obliged to
rely, in part at least, on these skim-milk calves for the coun-
try’s beef supply. Furthermore, it has been proved that by
giving the skim-milk calf proper care a fair kind of beef-produc-
ing animal may result. Such a calf should have extra care
and be encouraged from the beginning, for it must be remem-
bered to attempt to make beef from a stunted calf will prove
an unprofitable venture. They must be kept strong and
thrifty.
CHAPTER XIV
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF BEEF CATTLE
Tue ability to fatten cattle rapidly and quickly is to be
increased and strengthened by careful study and experience.
All that may be spoken or written will not make one suc-
cessful, nor cover his defects, if he does not take kindly to
the work. Study, observation, and especially practice add to
the ability of the cattle feeder. The ability to carry a steer
through a one-hundred-and-eighty-day fattening period without
once getting him “off feed’’ is the end to be attained.
The importance of regularity in everything that pertains to
the management of feeding cattle cannot easily be overesti-
mated. This applies particularly to administering feed and
water. Cattle anticipate the hour of feeding and become
nervous if it is long delayed; they bellow, coax, and become
much excited, all of which operates against the economical pro-
duction of beef.
Sudden changes in the food are to be avoided, as the digestive
system is unable to accommodate itself at once to such changes,
and digestive disorders are likely to follow. Such shifts
sometimes result in scours, other times in colic, and in fact may
result in various kinds of indigestion. When necessary to
change from one food to another, the transfer should be made
slowly and gradually, replacing the old with the new.
Scouring is very disastrous and should be carefully avoided,
as a single day’s laxness may offset a week’s gain. The
inexperienced feeder is likely to overfeed because of the
320
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF BEEF CATTLE 3821
desire to push the cattle to better gains, which not only
often induces scours, but has a tendency to throw the
cattle off feed. Cattle of about the same size and strength
should be fed in the same lot or pasture, while weak animals
and those unable to push their way to the feed-rack and get
their share should be placed where they can be supplied in
quiet. Strong animals often push the weak away from the
feed-troughs, which not only prevents the weaker from feeding,
but enables the stronger to get an overfeed, resulting in scours
or other digestive disorders. Unwholesome food, or a fault in
the feeding mixture, may result in scours.
At a glance, the successful and experienced cattle feeder
recognizes the shortcomings among his fattening cattle. By
‘going through the feed lots, noting the condition of the
manure or droppings, their general appearance and odor, by
noting the feed-boxes and the general conduct of the cattle, he
is able to discern their needs, and governs himself accordingly.
The droppings of the steers are an excellent index to the prog-
ress of fattening cattle. While these droppings should never
be hard, they should, however, be thick enough to pile up and
have that greasy or bland appearance that indicates a healthy
action of the liver. The droppings from steers that are not
fattening well, or suffering from indigestion, have a disagreeable
odor. Sour-smelling odors, and thin watery droppings indicate
something wrong with the feeding cattle.
The behavior of the cattle is a further index to their general
thrift and progress in fattening. Their quiet pose while rumi-
nating; their peculiar loud breathing when lying down, due
no doubt to the cramped position of the internal organs be-
cause of a well-filled paunch; the quiet and prominent eyes;
their manner of approaching the feed-box; the way in which
they feed; their mellow skin and oily coat; and in fact each
movement, gives the experienced cattle feeder a clew as to their
general condition.
Y¥
822 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
FARMS FOR FATTENING CATTLE
While cattle feeding may be conducted on any farm, there
are two general types of farms on which it is likely to prove
the more profitable. First, grain farms that grow large quan-
tities of dry forage incidental to the grain and which would be
otherwise largely wasted; second, pasture farms, where for
some reason grain cannot be successfully grown and where
the land is suitable for pasture.
EQUIPMENT FOR SUMMER FEEDING
In considering the profits likely to result from steer feeding,
among the first items to be taken into account is the equip-
ment. While the equipment for beef production is not nearly
as extensive as for milk production, there are, nevertheless, a
few necessities to be provided. Since the equipment for sum-
mer feeding on pasture differs from that of winter feeding in
the dry-lot, each will be considered separately.
The necessary equipment for summer feeding on pasture
consists of the pasture, the feeding-boxes or bunks, water,
shade, and salt.
Pasture. — The importance of properly managed pastures
cannot be overestimated. The general management, such as
the importance of a good stand of grass; of keeping down the
weeds; of providing suitable drainage; of top dressing with
barnyard manure when convenient; and of not turning to
pasture too early in the spring, was discussed on pages 284 to
289. It was there shown that many pastures that are now
supporting one animal to three or four acres could, with very
little extra care, be made to support an animal to the acre with-
out feed in addition, or two animals to one acre by the use
of additional feed, such as is commonly practiced in the beef-
producing localities of the central West.
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF BEEF CATTLE 823
| Feed-bunk.— While any kind of durable box or trough, slightly
elevated, may be used in feeding grain, a feed-bunk similar
to those illustrated in Fig. 99 will prove the most efficient.
These feed-bunks are three feet wide, fifteen feet long, inside di-
mension, and two and one-half feet high. They are constructed
as follows: From a 4” X 4” scantling cut six posts two and
one-half feet long, bevel off the top of each so as to shed water
and prevent the sharp corners from injuring the cattle. Cut
three 2” X12” plank sixteen feet long and six 2’’X4’’’s four feet
long. Place two of the 2” X 4’”s, edges up, on a level place, in
such a position that when the sixteen foot plank are placed upon
them, the plank will project over one inch on either end, thus
leaving the 2” X 4’’s fifteen and one-half feet apart, inside
dimensions. Spike or, better still, bolt the three 2” X 12” plank
to these 2” X 4's, leaving six inches clear on. either end of the
2” x 4'"s. Place a third 2” X 4” under the three planks two
inches to one side of the middle, and spike or bolt fast, leaving
six inches on either end of the 2” X 4” projecting as before.
Cut two 2” X 8” plank sixteen feet long and place one, edge up,
either side of the platform, thus making a box; spike fast to the
2” X 12's and to the 2” X 4's. Elevate the box thus con-'
structed, and with six 8” bolts, bolt fast to the 4” X 4’ posts,
thus making a bunk as illustrated in Fig. 99. Cut two
2” X 6’"’s approximately three feet long for the ends. This
should be accurately measured in order to fit tightly. Place the
remaining three 2’”” X 4's under the box on the opposite side
of the 4” X 4” posts, bolt and spike all together. Invert the
bunk and batten the cracks with 1” x 3’”s, otherwise the timber
in the bunk will dry out, leaving cracks through which the grain
will leak. This bunk can be materially-strengthened by plac-
ing three 4’ rods across, one at either end and one in the
center. One bunk of the dimensions given will be sufficient to
accommodate fifteen to twenty cattle, depending on their size.
Any kind of lumber may be used, but oak is the more durable
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
324
“yuNq-poe} oy} 230N
‘HUOLSVG NO SUABLG OL NIVUX) DNIGIAA — "G6 “ONT
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF BEEF CATTLE 3825
and will make a stronger bunk. Such a bunk can be moved
from place to place.
The self-feeder is a feed box or bin holding a large amount of
grain and so arranged that part of the grain is accessible to
the cattle at all times. The great advantage stated for self-
feeders is that they save labor. They have been used with vary-
ing success, some cattle feeders using them continuously, others
using them one or two years and then abandoning them. In
some localities the self-feeder is common, in others not known.
Shade. — When there are trees in the pastures, the matter of
shade need receive no attention, but in the absence of natural
shade, some provision should be made for it especially during
the hot, dry weather when the flies are troublesome. Droves
of fattening cattle occasionally become so excited, due to the
excessive heat and flies, that they bunch up or stampede and
sometimes injure each other, or whoever comes in their way.
Water. — Fattening cattle must be supplied with an abun-
dance of fresh water at all times. Many pastures through-
out the country are not thus supplied. As a rule beef
cannot be produced economically on such farms. The hotter
and dryer the weather, the more the cattle need, and this is just
the time there is likely to be a shortage. In the absence of
running water, perhaps the most efficient source is a good well,
equipped with a wind pump. When the water is pumped by
hand and the drove of cattle large, the water supply is likely
to be deficient. It is also important that the water be fresh
and clean. Hot, stale, and muddy water, laden with mosquito
larve and other impurities, is not fit for cattle to drink.
Something better than mud-holes should be supplied.
Salt should either be kept before the feeding cattle at all
times or supplied them regularly twice each week. A very
good plan is to cut a common salt barrel in two at the middle
and place one-half where the cattle can have free access to it.
This should be under a shed, as rain dissolves the salt.
326 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
EQUIPMENT FOR WINTER FEEDING
The equipment for feeding cattle in the winter deserves
special attention; not that it is difficult or expensive but
that the proper kind of equipment is often neglected and
much money expended for items that are not only unnecessary
but positively objectionable. The most particular item is
that of efficient shelter. Other items are the feed-lot and its
location, the racks from which to feed dry forage, and the
like.
Shelter for winter feeding. — While it is essential to provide
warm winter quarters for the dairy cow, because she is thin in
flesh and because of the nature of her product, such warm
quarters are not necessary for the fattening steer. The fat-
tening steer possesses a coat of fat or flesh which serves to
protect him from the cold, and when on full feed the heat gen-
erated in the body by masticating, digesting, and assimilating
the food is sufficient to maintain the body temperature. No
doubt the needs of the fattening animal are such as to make a
reasonable amount of cold air beneficial rather than detrimental.
But it is very desirable that the fattening steer be kept dry
and provided with a comfortable dry bed. Dry quarters are
far more important than warm quarters. A structure which
protects the animals from the rain and snow and provides
them with a dry comfortable bed is sufficient.
Waters, who has thoroughly investigated the shelter prob-
lem, concludes his work as follows: “Apparently then the only
shelter required for cattle of this class is that which will protect
them from rain and snow and break the northwest winds and
furnish a dry place in which the animals may lie down. It is
more important that the fattening animal lie down regularly
and during a large portion of the time than that he be pro-
tected from the cold. An abundance of sunshine and fresh air,
a comfortable place in which to lie, and freedom from external
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF BEEF CATTLE — 827
disturbances furnish ideal conditions for rapid and economic
gains.”
The feed-lot.— Relatively too little attention is given the feed-
lot. In choosing the location of the lot, consideration should
be given to drainage and the natural protection. A south
slope is the most desirable, as the water will drain off quickly
after a rain, and the full benefit of the sun’s rays will be received.
A muddy lot is one of the greatest objections to winter feeding.
Over much of the grain belt the soil is rather impervious to
water, which is held at the surface. The cattle in walking
mix the water with the soil, which is often clay, thus making
a most disagreeable mud.
The only known corrective for such lots is to pave them, or
at least in part, particularly where the animals must lie and
where the feed-bunks and racks are placed. For this purpose
various materials are used, chief of which are cobble stones,
bricks, cement, and plank. Before laying the pavement a
grade should be established slightly higher than the sur-
rounding surface, to eliminate the surface water. The grade
should have a slope of at least one inch to six feet. The surface
should then be covered with six inches of gravel rolled and
tamped down solid; over this place a one-inch covering of fine
sand on which the brick or cobble stone may be laid. Roll,
or better still, tamp down solid. Over this should be placed a
cement mortar of the consistency of cream made by thoroughly
mixing one part clean sharp sand and one part of Portland
cement. This mixture should be thoroughly swept into’ the
joints and cracks. A second coat of the cement mortar may be
laid ‘in ten days to insure the complete filling of the cracks and
joints. A feed-lot thus paved will be free from mud, can be
cleaned with team and scraper, and makes a very desirable
place on which to feed cattle.
Platform for feed-bunks. — On soils that are porous and from
which the water drains off rapidly, the mud gives little incon-
328 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
venience except about the feed-bunks, dry-forage-racks, and
water-tank. About these and extending back six feet, may
be placed a few loads of coarse gravel or, better still, a pave-
ment similar to that described above, or a plank platform.
Whatever the material used in construction, it should be so
arranged that the farmer may drive alongside the bunk or rack
with a load of feed. Such platforms will save feed bills enough
each year to pay for their construction, to say nothing of the
extra annoyance caused by the mud in case they are not used,
The same feed-bunks suggested for feeding on pasture may be
moved to the lot and used for winter feeding as well. As a
rule, it is not desirable to place the feed-bunk under the shed
except when the winters are extra severe.
Dry-forage-rack. — It is not advisable to have the feed-bunks
and the dry-forage-racks combined, since the litter from the
dry forage falling upon the grain renders it distasteful to cattle,
particularly when on a full grain ration. Neither is it advis-
able to construct such racks under the shed except where the
climate is very disagreeable, though they should be placed to
the south of the shed or barn to protect them measurably from
the winds and driving storms. The form and shape of the dry-
forage-racks will depend on the condition in which dry forage
is fed, corn stalks calling for one form, hay for another, and
chopped hay or shredded fodder for still another. As these racks
are likely to be permanent, they should be constructed to meet
the particular conditions under which they are to be used.
Water-tanks. — A liberal supply of fresh water is as essential
for winter feeding as for summer feeding. While water is
likely to be more plentiful in winter than in summer, it is often
allowed to freeze for days at a time, so that the cattle are wholly
deprived of a supply and often compelled to eat snow or lick
the ice to get the water needed for their bodies. In very severe
weather cattle are not likely to drink much ice water; this ob-
servation has led the rather careless cattle feeder to think the
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF BEEF CATTLE 3829
cattle do not need much water at such times. This is a mis-
taken idea, as fattening cattle need a liberal supply of fresh
water at all times, even though they will not consume as much
as in the hot, dry weather of mid-summer.
Fic. 100.— Rep Potitep Buu ‘‘Cremo.’’ A very noted prize winner, owned
by Frank Davis & Son, Holbrook, Neb.
The Red Polled cattle, natives of Norfolk and Suffolk counties, England, are
classed as dual purpose. They give good returns in both beef and milk, but
do not equal the beef cattle for beef or the milk cattle for milk. In size the
bulls range from 1500 to 2000 pounds, the cows 1200 to 1400 pounds. The
color is always red, and the horns wanting.
When the water-tanks are not too large, a very good way to
prevent freezing, except in very severe weather, is to encase
the tank in a box or frame and fill this frame with litter from
the horse stable. The frame should be so constructed as to
permit the use of a layer of this manure at least one foot
thick all around the tank. By covering all, both frame and
tank, with a large lid which is to be shut down at night, and
330 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
during a part of the day when the weather is severe, there
is not much likelihood of the water freezing. A little labor
spent in constructing such a frame will save many times its
cost in food, as it requires considerable heat to warm up the
ice water that cattle drink.
CHAPTER XV
DISEASES OF CATTLE
CaTTLE are very subject to certain diseases which render
their usage for domestic purposes questionable. Milk from
diseased cows, or meat from diseased carcasses, may endanger
the lives of those who consume it. While these diseases are
properly classed as incurable, it should be remembered that
they are communicable germ diseases and are therefore pre-
ventable. Therefore, some space will be devoted to their pre-
vention. In addition to these diseases, cattle are subject to a
number of ailments, some of which are simple and easily cared
for, but more of which are somewhat complicated, requiring
skilled treatment.
The sick cow should receive much care, as in many cases good
care is to be preferred to the use of medicine (see page 151).
This chapter is intended merely to serve as a guide and to
make suggestions; it is not designed to take the place of a
good veterinarian, who should always be called in case of
serious difficulty or doubt. The dosages here advised, except
when otherwise noted, are for mature animals.
DISEASES OF THE GENERATIVE ORGANS, AND DIFFICULTIES OF
PARTURITION
There are few diseases to which cattle are subject that are
of wider interest than those of the generative organs. This is
particularly true of those herds that are being kept for breed-
ing purposes and when the principal product is the offspring.
331
332 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Cattle are particularly subject to a contagious form of abortion
which destroys many young before they can live out of the womb.
The principal diseases or difficulties are barrenness ; abortion,
both contagious and non-contagious; difficult parturition; re-
tention of the afterbirth; milk-fever; garget.
Barrenness in cows. — It often happens that cows are served
normally, yet fail to conceive. Some of the causes of this diff-
culty are readily understood and easily prevented, while others
are not well understood and are beyond control of the breeder.
An excess of rich and stimulating foods is a common cause of
non-breeding, especially if the animals are denied exercise.
The dangers attending parturition are often more than tre-
bled in the case of fat animals. This excessive fat, however,
may be of much advantage once these dangers are past. On the
other hand, barrenness may be due to poor feeding, the system
being weakened by the lack of sufficient nutrition. Undue
sexual excitement at the most active stage of heat is often
responsible for the cow not conceiving. Cows that for some
reason have missed a season are often difficult to impregnate.
Animals that are too closely inbred are also likely to be
barren. In addition to these, there is a long line of causes of
barrenness in cows over which the breeder has little or no con-
trol, such as derangement of the sex organs, diseased ovaries,
tumors, and the like.
Abortion in cows. — Abortion in cows is either contagious or
non-contagious. Because of the great differences as to cause
and subsequent treatment, we consider them separately.
Non-contagious abortion. — This is produced by any cause
operating to disconnect the union of the fetal membrane from the
uterus. A cow may abort by reason of almost any cause that
very generally disturbs her system, as from the influence of a too
stimulating diet or the reverse, as when the nourishment is so
deficient that the fetus dies in the womb; damp, unhealthy
stables; worms in the bowels, lungs, or liver; indigestion of all
DISEASES OF CATTLE 3383
kinds; the drinking of putrid, stagnant water; of ice water;
the eating of iced grass; of ergot, of smuts on corn or other
grains; and severe illness. The more direct mechanical causes
are falls, strains, violent exertion, and blows; also traveling on
icy ground, muddy roads, or jumping over fences, ditches, and
the like.
The prevention of non-contagious abortion is the avoidance
of all causes that are likely to produce it. All causes of excite-
ment, of constipation, of diarrhea, of indigestion, and the like
must be avoided. With cattle, non-contagious abortion may
often be prevented, although the first signs have appeared. So
long as the fetus has not perished, the waters not discharged, nor
the water-bags presented, attempts should be made to check the
progress. Place the cow alone in a quiet stall and check the
labor pains if possible. To do this, laudanum given in one ounce
doses for small cows and two ounce doses for large ones is good.
Repeat the dose in three or four hours should the labor pains
recur. When all measures fail and miscarriage results, all that
can be done is to assist in the removal of the fetus and its mem-
branes, as in ordinary parturition.
Contagious abortion in cows.—-Though not well understood,
contagious aborticn is known to be due to an organism. The
germ producing the disease is conveyed by infected bulls, by the
tongue or tail of infected animals, or by the external genital
organs coming in contact with the wall, fence, rubbing post,
litter, or floor which has been previously soiled by an infected
animal.
Cows should be kept in fair flesh and in vigorous condition.
The method of preventing contagious abortion differs from non-
contagious only in the separation of the infected animals and in
free use of disinfectants. When a cow shows signs of aborting,
or when she has aborted, she should be separated from the other
cows and the stable or stall she occupied thoroughly disinfected.
For this purpose, use a 5 per cent solution of carbolic acid or a
334 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
1 to 1000 solution of corrosive sublimate. All litter and the dead
fetus should be burned. After the cow has aborted, she must
be kept thoroughly clean by use of a disinfectant. Dissolve 1
dram of corrosive sublimate, 1 ounce each of alcohol and glycer-
ine, shake this up in a gallon of water, and use as an injection
into the vagina and wash the parts about the vulva and root of
the tail. Disinfect the animal each day as long as the discharge
continues. Do not breed aborting cows for two or three months.
For two days before breeding, the vagina should be washed out
with the sublimate-alcohol-glycerine-solution, but on the day
of breeding warm water only should be used as the corrosive
sublimate will destroy the semen. The disease seems to run
out and disappear from the herd after a time.
The best methods of combating contagious abortion are
cleanliness, the free use of disinfectants, isolation of infected
cows, and precautions against using infected bulls. Many pre-
ventive remedies have been suggested, of which the following is
as good as any: Mix one pound of pulverized hyposulfite of
soda, one pound of sulfur, and ten pounds of common salt.
Give a small handful to each pregnant cow two or three times
a week.
Difficult parturition. — There are a number of causes of diffi-
cult parturition among cattle. Cows, however, have an ad-
vantage over mares, in that the fetus and fetal membranes are
more strongly attached and not so likely to be disconnected and
may, therefore, be left alone longer with practically no danger
to the young. Among cows the maxim may be: Do not inter-
fere too soon. Bruising, tearing of the passages, and bleeding
from the uncontracted womb may follow the too rapid extrac-
tion of the calf. If there is no obstruction, let the calf be ex-
pelled slowly by the unaided efforts of the cow.
If, however, after the cow has labored some time, there
seems to be some mechanical obstruction, she should be ex-
amined. As this is likely to be much of a task, the operator
DISEASES OF CATTLE 8385
should prepare himself for it by dressing in a shirt from which the
sleeves have been cut off at the shoulder. This avoids danger
of soiling the clothing or of exposure, as is the case when the
shirt is removed, and yet leaves the whole arm free for the work.
The hand and arm should be smeared with oil, lard, or vaseline.
This grease should be fresh, neither salted nor rancid, and
should be purified by boiling or rendered antiseptic by the
addition of a tablespoonful of carbolic acid to the pound of
grease. This should always be done, as it protects both the cow
and the operator from infection.
After the labor pains have lasted some time without any signs
of the fetus, the hand should be introduced to examine; if the
water-bags have burst and neither feet nor head appear for some
time, if one fore foot only and the head appears, or both fore
feet without the head, or the head without the fore feet, and
if one hind foot appears without the other, make very careful
examination. In normal presentation the fore feet, hoofs down,
should first appear, then the nose. In any of these abnormal
presentations, secure the presented limb or head by a rope with
arunning noose, so that in case it should slip back into the
womb it will not get lost during the examination, but may be
retained in the vagina or easily brought up again. This
examination can be made much easier if one turns the cow
with head down hill, as the internal organs gravitate forward
into the belly of the cow thus making more room in which to
bring up the missing limb or head and to manipulate the
fetus. In case the cow is lying down, turn her on the side
opposite to that on which the limb is missing, so that there
may be more room to arrange the fetus or to bring up the
missing member.
De not attempt to arrange the fetus, limb, or head, during
the labor pains, but wait until the pain has ceased and then
straighten out the part before the next pain comes on. One
must be patient and painstaking, remembering that the fetus
336 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
will not come until properly arranged, and when so arranged,
it is likely to come fairly easy. The task is all the more difficult
because it is very trying on the arm of the operator, as the arm
of the strongest man is likely to become numb working in such
positions. If the passages have lost their natural lubricating
liquid and become dry, smear the interior of the passages, the
womb, and the surface of the calf as far as can be reached with
fresh lard or sweet oil. In pulling on the fetus, draw only
while the cow is straining. When pulling, draw downward
toward the hocks as well as backward, as the natural curvature
of both fetus and passages are thus followed and the extraction
of the fetus rendered easy. If the pains of the cow are violent
and long continued, they may be checked by pinching the back
or by placing a tight surcingle around the body in front of the
udder. If the pains continue, one to one-and-one-half ounces of
chloral hydrate in a quart of water may be given to check them.
Retained afterbirth. — The cow of all farm animals is especially
subject to this difficulty. When the afterbirth is retained it
decomposes and is discharged as a yellow or reddish fluid,
having an extremely offensive odor. This discharge is most
apparent when the cow is lying down and while she ruminates.
The rear parts of the cow, rump, tail, and vulva are soiled by the
discharge, which often contains lumps of decomposing material.
To avoid this, the afterbirth should be removed within twenty-
four or thirty-six hours after calving. To do this, a simple
method which is often effective is to hang a small weight, not
to exceed one or two pounds, to the hanging portion of the after-
birth and allow this by its constant dragging and by its jerking
effect as the cow moves along to pull the membranes from their
attachments and to stimulate the womb to expulsive contrac-
tions. In neglected cases when the hanging mass is already
badly decomposed this cannot be done, as the membrane is
liable to tear under the added weight, leaving a part of the
material in the womb. If the bowels are constipated, a physic
DISEASES OF CATTLE 337
consisting of one ounce of ginger given with a quart of sweet oil
will prove advantageous. If the afterbirth remains, it is neces-
sary to remove the membrane by hand. This should be done
within twenty-four hours after calving, since the mouth of the
womb may be so closed that it becomes difficult to introduce
the hand. The operator had better dress as suggested for diffi-
cult parturition (p. 334). The arm should‘also be greased as
suggested for that operation, as otherwise the operator may
become infected from the decaying membrane. It is a good
Fic. 101.— Rep Potuep Herp. Owned by Frank Hartlin, Strasburg, Ohio.
plan to wind the free portion of the hanging membrane around
a small stick and roll up until it reaches the vulva. An assistant
should hold the tail and membrane to one side while the operator
introduces the greased arm which he passes along until the places
of attachment are reached. These places of attachment will
be found to resemble mushroom-shaped bodies and are detached
one by one by pushing the hand between the membrane and
the womb and slipping the membrane from the heads of these
bodies, taking care not to rupture the womb. As the membrane
is released, the assistant should keep rolling it up on the stick.
Zz
338 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
After the whole membrane is removed, it may be well to disin-
fect the womb with a two per cent solution of carbolic acid.
Eversion of the womb. — This ailment is commonly called
“casting the wethers,” and is rather common among cattle.
It often follows difficult parturition, the cow continuing to
strain until the womb is forced out and hangs in a large mass
from the vulva. The womb can be instantly recognized from
the other membranes by the presence of the mushroom-shaped
bodies, each two to three inches in diameter and attached by
a narrow neck. There are a large number of these bodies, fifty
to one hundred.
The displaced womb should be carefully washed with cold
water containing a one per cent solution of carbolic acid. The
cold is useful to drive out the blood and reduce the bulk. Now
with the closed fist planted in the rounded end of the largest
horn of the womb, push back so as to reinvert the womb into
place. This must be done gradually. The cow will strain
while this is being done, but the womb is to be firmly held until
the straining is over. This straining may be overcome in part
by pinching on the back.
The holding of the womb in place is the next point. This is
perhaps best accomplished by the use of a rope truss. This
truss can be made from a long one inch rope. Double the long
rope at its middle and place over the neck of the cow; bring the
ends, one on either side of the neck, down between the fore legs,
twist them together to make firm, carry back between the hind
legs and up to the vulva, here cross them and tie firmly with
a string, then, just before the tail is reached, cross back and tie
firmly, thus making a ring which when drawn tight will press
the vulva; then carry the ropes forward along the back and tie
into the middle of the rope at the top of the neck. The rope
should be drawn so tight that the rope ring is made to press
firmly all around the vulva.
Milk-fever.— This disease is also known as parturition
DISEASES OF CATTLE 839
apoplexy and parturition fever. There is, however, very little if
any fever connected with the disease, as temperature is usually
below normal. High-producing, fleshy, aged cows that have
been closely confined are likely to be attacked. In fact, the best
and heaviest milkers are most subject to the disease. It is
more likely to occur when the birth has been comparatively
easy and quick, and from one to ten days after calving. There
is a sudden dullness, hanging back in the stall, drooping of the
head, uneasy movement of the hind limbs, unsteady steps; and
the cow staggers, lies, or falls down and is unable to rise. At.
this time there may be some temperature. At first the cow lies
with her head turned around with nose resting on the right
flank; later she may stretch full on her side. She soon becomes
unconscious, the eyes are glazed, their pupils widely dilated and
their lids not movable when the ball of the eye is touched with
the finger. Treatment must follow quickly or she will soon
expire.
While this disease was formerly considered very fatal, with
the air-treatment it is seldom so. This air-treatment consists
simply of injecting air into the udder and carefully kneading
the udder at the same time. Care must be taken that the air
be sterile. There are Schmidt-Kolding sterile-air milk-fever
outfits on the market with which to force the air into the udder,
yet if one of these is not near at hand, a very convenient ap-
paratus can be made from a common bicycle air-pump and a
milk-tube. In fact, this simple apparatus will prove as efficient
as any. Attach the milk-tube to the pump, insert the tube
into the teat and as the air is pumped in, knead the udder well.
In two hours milk the air out, rest a few minutes, and pump up
again. This may be repeated every two hours until the animal
is relieved. If the animal is badly bloated, puncture the paunch
in the left loin with a canula and trocar as suggested for bloating
(page 351). This treatment should be pursued while there is
life, irrespective of how low the cow may seem. Do not let the
340 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
cow die. In case the milk-tube is not at hand, use a medicine
dropper to get the air into the udder. Ifthe canula and trocar
are not at hand, stick a knife into the paunch. This is recom-
mended only in the absence of something better. . Many a cow
has been saved by these crude methods.
Garget is perhaps one of the principal forms of mammitis, of
which caked-udder is asecond. The udder often becomes highly
inflamed soon after the young is born, and occasionally before
when the glands are active, congested with blood, and the udder
over-distended with milk. In addition to this, inflammation of
the udder is often due to mechanical injuries such as blows,
kicks, scratches, and being horned by other cows; and especially
by germs entering the udder.
The treatment is to relieve the congestion by drawing the
milk frequently. This should be done before calving if the udder
is distended. After the milk is drawn gently but thoroughly,
rub the udder. Bathe the parts with hot water for fifteen min-
utes at a time, rub dry, and apply an ointment made as follows:
Dissolve two tablespoonfuls of gum camphor in a teacupful
of melted fresh lard. This can be greatly improved by the
addition of one ounce of the fluid extract of belladonna. The
udder should be bathed three times daily and the ointment well
rubbed in. It is often advantageous to support the udder by
the use of a wide piece of cloth with holes cut for the teats and
this held in place by arranging a band over the back. When
the trouble is due to germs entering the udder, a two per cent
solution of carbolic acid should be injected into the udder; leave
this in ten to fifteen minutes; milk out and bathe as before.
This solution may be injected by fastening a milk-tube on a
syringe with a small rubber tube.
ILLS OF THE YOUNG CALF
The young calf, even though it establishes the function
of respiration and gets its first meal without difficulty, is still
DISEASES OF CATTLE 341
subject to many ills, chief of which are digestive disorders of
some kind. These digestive defects are likely to be more
numerous among dairy calves or those that are weaned while
young and fed from the pail. This is often due to the difficulty
in keeping the conditions just right: the milk may get cold, the
pails may be unclean, the calf may drink too fast, and many
other irregularities.
Constipation. — Notwithstanding the purgative effects of
the colostrum or first milk, the young calf occasionally suffers
from constipation, especially if the cow has not been in good
thrift, or has been fed on dry innutritious foods during the
latter periods of pregnancy. Whatever the cause, if the calf is
costive, straining violently without passing dung, lying down
and rising at once as in colic, and failing in appetite, no time
should be lost in giving relief. First remove the cause, if it can
be located. The bowels will ordinarily be stimulated to action
by administering one to two ounces of olive or castor oil. An
injection of warm water into the bowels will prove helpful.
The water should be at blood heat and have added to it a little
glycerine, — a teaspoonful of glycerine and two or three ounces
of water. It is not advisable to inject too much, or to use soap
suds as is often done. Inject gently into the rectum with a
common hard rubber syringe, taking extra care not to rupture
the tender membrane. This will induce the calf to try to pass
the fecal matter and in addition will lubricate the passage.
The injection may be repeated every hour.
Diarrhea or scours. — This disease is prevalent among calves
and occurs in two forms: simple; and contagious or ‘‘white
scour.’ The causes of simple diarrhea are many and varied;
bad food, over-feeding, and too rapid feeding are the most
common. The surroundings of the calf often bring on the dis-
ease. Calves kept indoors are more liable to attacks than those
in the open air and having exercise, pure air, and sunshine.
‘Closely crowded, filthy, foul smelling buildings are likely to
342 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
bring on an attack. Whatever the cause, it should be removed
and the case treated at once, as the calf is not likely to live long
if the diarrhea continues. Perhaps the first thing to do is to
reduce the feed from one-half to two-thirds. In treating, one
must keep in mind the nature of the disease, that it is caused by
an irritant in the stomach or bowels which must be removed
before a cure can be effected. For this reason one should be
cautious about giving an astringent with a view to cutting off
the discharge. The best policy in all such diseases is to expel
the disturber with a laxative, such as one to two ounces of castor
oil. Later when the irritant has been removed by the oil, check
the discharge by a weak solution of gum arabic, or by adding a
little lime water, not to exceed one-third to the milk each meal,
or by adding parched flour to boiled milk, or by the essence of
Jamaica ginger well diluted with hot water, and in persistent
cases by the use of such astringent as oak bark tea, which is
made by stripping the inner bark of white oak.
White scour is a violent and deadly form of diarrhea, frequently
attacking young calves. This may appear immediately after
birth and is likely to show itself within the first or second day.
It often occurs as a contagious disease, attacking all the calves
that are dropped in the stable for some time. For this reason
it is often called ‘‘ contagious scours.’’ The disease is caused
by a germ that enters in most cases through the navel. The
calf appears dull and weak, the eyes are sunken, the belly
retracted, the breathing is short and rapid, the temperature
very low, and the calf soon becomes unconscious. The dis-
charge from the bowels is rather profuse, of a yellowish white
color and very offensive odor. As a rule the calf dies within
twenty-four to thirty-six hours.
As there seems to be no treatment, we must rely on pre-
vention. A week before calving the pregnant cow should be
placed in comfortable quarters where no sick calves have been
confined. This seems to be the only safe course, for after the
DISEASES OF CATTLE 343
disease breaks out in a stable, often the most thorough disinfect-
ing fails to stop future calves from infection. As soon as the
calf is dropped, the cord should be tied close to the navel and
the parts thoroughly wet with a twenty per cent solution of
carbolic acid, or better still, with a solution of the tincture of
iodine. Fresh milk, diluted with lime water, not to exceed one-
third, in which a teaspoonful of dried blood has been dissolved,
should be given the calf in small quantities and at frequent in-
tervals. The stable in which the first attack occurred should be
thoroughly disinfected, and to do this perhaps nothing is better
than corrosive sublimate; however, if this seems undesirable
and ordinarily disinfectants are used, they should be used strong
and flushed into every nook and corner of the stable.
TUBERCULOSIS
Perhaps no disease to which cattle are subject is more dis-
cussed than tuberculosis. This is due in a large measure to the
use of cattle to provide food for the human race. There are
perhaps few diseases so common among cattle as tuberculosis,
particularly among those animals that are kept closely confined.
Tuberculosis is a communicable germ disease, and is, therefore,
preventable. The disease is caused by a small germ or bac-
terium known as Bacillus tuberculosis. This germ is, of course,
invisible to the naked eye.
‘Methods of infection. — As tuberculosis is a communicable
germ disease, the methods of infection should receive much at-
tention. This can be made clear by considering from two points
of view: first, how the small germs escape from diseased ani-
mals; and second, how sound animals become infected. All
diseased animals possess the germ. This germ escapes when
the tissues it has destroyed are being discharged from the
body. Thus, if the lungs are affected, the animal on coughing
dislodges the germs, which may be forced directly out of the body
or lodged in the mouth, when they leave the body with the saliva.
344 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
In the cases in which the germs are found in the saliva they are
left in the watering troughs, on the bottom of the mangers, on
the grass, on other animals when licked by diseased ones, and
in fact spread wherever the diseased animal goes. If the dis-
ease happens to be in the glands of the intestinal walls, the germ
Fic. 102. — Devon Butt ‘‘Darxs Masestry.”” Owned by Stockwell and
Gifford, Sutton, Mass.
The Devon cattle originated in the counties of Devon and Somerset, England.
They are variously classified, sometimes as beef cattle, at other times as dual-
purpose animals. They tend more toward beef than milk. The animals‘are
symmetrical and trim. In size the bulls weigh from 1500 to 2000 pounds, the
cows from 1300 to 1500 pounds. The color is red, although the shade is
often light.
escapes with the dung. If the glands of the udder are diseased,
the germ passes out with the milk. If the disease is located
in the glands of the skin, the germs may escape through the
openings of the skin.
When the germs have escaped into the watering troughs,
mangers, on the grass, and the like, they are readily taken up by
DISEASES OF CATTLE 845
healthy cattle. In case the germs escape in the milk, whatever
feeds upon it is liable to infection. The length of time that
will pass after infection and before the disease visibly appears
varies widely, even to months or years. The length of time
the animal may possess the disease varies equally as much.
With some it may prove fatal in a few months; others may
carry it for years.
The tuberculin test. — Often it is not possible to tell by a phys-
ical examination which animals are infected with tuberculosis
and which are not. The most accurate means of detecting the
disease in cattle is by noting the temperature of the animal
following the injection of a small amount of tuberculin be-
neath the skin. The tuberculin is prepared by sterilizing,
filtering, and concentrating the liquids in which the tubercle
bacillus has been allowed to grow. It contains the cooked
products of the growth of these germs, but not the germs them-
selves. Hence when this liquid is injected under the skin of
cattle, it is absolutely unable to produce the disease, but it sets
up a characteristic reaction or symptoms.
Any intelligent owner of cattle, who will make a little effort
to familiarize himself with the test and its limitations, can use
it on his own cattle with safe results. It does not require
the trained veterinarian. The operator must, however, be
familiar with the method, be very careful, painstaking, and
patient.
The testing outfit. — The testing outfit consists of five things:
(1) tuberculin, (2) syringe, (3) thermometer, (4) disinfectant,
(5) vaseline.
1. Tuberculin. — Tuberculin can be procured from the ex-
periment stations in the various states. If the Experiment
Station fails to provide it, the Bureau of Animal Industry, Wash-
ington, D.C., can tell where to secure it.
2. Syringe.— A hypodermic syringe of 6c¢.c. to 10 ec.
capacity,such as is commonly used to inject liquid vaccine, is
346 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
necessary. This syringe should be provided with short, stout
needles, well reénforced at the base.
Any druggist will procure the syringe and needles and show
how to use them.
3. Thermometer.— A guaranteed clinical thermometer is
necessary. If a large number of animals is to be tested, it will
facilitate matters to provide two or three thermometers. Any
druggist will provide a thermometer and show how to adjust
or shake down and how to read it. A string should be tied
around the thermometer, at the other end of which should be
fastened a wire hook, or asmall bull-dog clamp. After inserting
the thermometer in the rectum, the clamp or wire hook is fastened
to the long hairs at the base of the tail, or the wire wound around
the tail so that if the thermometer is thrown out, it will not be
broken by dropping to the ground. Cows are likely to void dung
soon after the insertion of the thermometer, and unless this
precaution is taken, the thermometer is very likely to drop to the
floor before many temperatures are taken.
4. Disinfectant. — A small bottle of strong carbolic acid
(95 per cent), to be used in disinfecting the syringe before begin-
ning the test and to disinfect the needle-point before injecting
each animal, is essential. This can be procured at any drug
store.
5. Vaseline. — A small can of vaseline or lard should be pro-
vided to grease the thermometer before insertion. A vaseline
jar also affords a safe and convenient place to keep the ther-
mometer between times of taking temperature.
Directions for making the tuberculin test. — While making the
test is not difficult (in fact easier done that told), one should
be exceedingly careful, going about the work methodically
and keeping everything neat and clean. The test may be
divided for convenience into five essential parts: (1) keep-
ing records, (2) taking the normal temperature, one day,
(3) injecting the tuberculin same day, (4) taking temperature
DISEASES OF CATTLE B47
after injection, second day, (5) interpretation of the tempera-
ture records.
It is very essential that the animals be well known or num-
bered, for in no case should they get mixed. It is not advisable
for the beginner to attempt to test more than twenty animals
at one time.
Cattle suffering from such diseases as garget, retained
afterbirth, and the like, or those that are in heat or far along in
pregnancy, should not be tested.
1. Keeping records. — An accurate record of each tempera-
ture must be kept. To do this procure a large sheet of paper,
writing the names or number of each animal down the left side,
and the hour at which the temperature is taken across the top.
As each temperature is taken, record it under the hour and op-
posite the name.
2. Taking the normal temperature. —On account of the
variation in temperature it is essential to take the temperature
of each animal at intervals of two hours until at least four
temperatures are taken, before the tuberculin is injected. These
temperatures must be carefully recorded to compare with the
temperatures of the same cow after injection. After becoming
familiar with the method of reading the thermometer, shake it
down, smear it with vaseline and insert full length into the rec-
tum. Attach the thermometer to the base of the tail by means
of the clamp of wire, and allow to remain in the rectum for three
minutes. Withdraw the thermometer, read the temperature,
record on the sheet at once, shake the thermometer down, and
proceed as before.
Because of the ease with which variations in temperature
are caused, it is important to keep the animals that are being
tested under normal conditions. They should be fed, watered,
and milked as usual.
3. Injecting the tuberculin. — This is preferably done in the
evening, say eight hours before the time of milking in the morn-
348 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
ing. For example, if the cows are milked at 6 A.M., inject the
tuberculin at 10 p.m. The syringe should be disinfected by
drawing it full of carbolic acid, emptying it, and then rinsing in
boiling water before beginning the injection. In addition to
this, just before injecting each animal, dip the needle in strong
carbolic acid to disinfect it. Carefully fill the syringe through
the needle from the bottle of tuberculin. Set the burr on the pis-
ton-rod of the syringe so that not more than the dose intended
can be injected. The druggist will show how this is done when
the syringe is purchased. The size of the dose will be stated on
the tuberculin bottle. With the cow restrained in a stanchion,
or tied short in a stall, take hold of the skin with the left hand
along the side of the neck where it is thin and loose and with the
syringe in the right hand quickly insert the point in the
pocket thus formed and inject the dose. Occasionally some
force is needed to insert the needle into the skin. Before in-
jecting another cow, see that the syringe is working properly
and the needle is in good shape.
4. Taking temperature after injection. — Begin taking tem-
peratures eight hours after the injection of the tuberculin and
continue every two hours until six temperatures are taken, and
continue those cases showing a rise in temperature. For ex-
ample, if the tuberculin was injected at 10 p.m., begin taking
temperatures at 6 a.m., then at 8 am, 10 am. 12 Mm,
2 pm., and 4 p.m., and make a careful record of each
temperature as taken. When an animal shows a rise above 103,
it is well to take the temperatures at more frequent intervals.
5. Interpretation of the temperature records. — The tem-
peratures after injecting the tuberculin must be carefully studied
and compared with those taken the day before. In typical
cases of tuberculosis, an elevation of temperature usually comes
on gradually, although in the more pronounced reactions, when
the temperature goes above 105.5 degrees, the rise is often rapid.
This elevation usually occurs between the eighth and sixteenth
DISEASES OF CATTLE 349
hours after injection. It should remain practically at a maxi-
mum for two hours or more and gigdually subside. When it
reaches 104 degrees or more and is maintained for some hours,
the animal is regarded as tubercular, if no fever was shown
before the injection. Sudden rises for a short time only do not
indicate a reaction. The rises of less than 1.5 degrees do not
indicate a reaction. In all cases of doubt, the animal should be
separated from the herd and retested not sooner than four to six
weeks (the test will not give reaction under this time).
Retesting. — A single test of a diseased herd cannot be relied
upon to detect every tuberculous animal. If animals are found
by the first test to be affected, they should be tested again in four
to six weeks. Even in those herds in which no reacting animals
are found, it is a good plan to test once each year.
Tuberculin not infallible. — While tuberculin is the best
method known for detecting tuberculosis, it is not infallible. On
the average if properly handled, it will detect 97 per cent of the
cases. In some cases, especially when the animals are badly
diseased, it fails to react, and in a very few cases it seems to cause
a rise of temperature in healthy animals.
Prevention of tuberculosis. —In the beginning of this discussion
it was stated that tuberculosis is a communicable germ dis-
ease, and therefore preventable. In order to prevent, infected
animals must not be brought into healthy herds, for as we have
observed diseased animals spread the infection wherever they go.
Much space has been given to methods of locating the disease in
order that those herds already free may not be infected by the
addition of an infected animal. If a herd is known to be healthy,
never bring a new animal into the herd until it has been tested,
and if there is the slightest doubt about its being tubercular, it
should be excluded.
If in addition to the tuberculin test and the exclusion of all
diseased animals, the quarters where the cattle are kept are well
ventilated, and well lighted, admitting the direct rays of the sun,
350 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
the chance of the herd’s being infected is very slight. Since the
trouble and expense of making the test are so slight, it is well
worth while to make it in order to have the assurance that the
herd is entirely free and there is absolutely no danger in the con-
sumption of their products, either milk or meat.
Eradication of tuberculosis. — The eradication of tuberculosis,
once it gets a foothold, is not so easy or at least not so inexpen-
sive. There is of course no curefor the disease, so other methods
of eradication must be sought. It has been suggested that all
diseased animals be slaughtered, but this would mean untold
waste and were it enforced, might lead to a national calamity,
for it is doubtful if the nation could spare all of its tubercular
cattle at one time. There is one plan, however, which, if it could
be employed, would seem to bridge the difficulty and in a few
generations would result in bovine tuberéulosis being practically
swept from the land. This plan, however, requires extra
labor, as well as the expense of extra equipment, and its em-
ployment is purely economical; but since, from the nature of
the disease and the importance of the animals concerned, it
seems to be the only avenue of hope, the plan is here given.
The Bang method of eradicating bovine tuberculosis. — This
method, recommended by Dr. Bang of the Copenhagen Veteri-
nary College, is being successfully employed in Denmark. The
object of the method is to replenish a tuberculous herd with as
little loss as possible. The original method has been modified
from time to time and at present stands thus: Immediately
after testing the herd divide it into two parts, placing the sound
animals in one and the diseased animals in the other, thus mak-
ing two herds, one diseased, the othersound. At once remove
the sound herd to new and uninfected quarters, and keep it .
away from the infection. The difficulty of this is that it means
two sets of equipment, barn, lots, pastures, and the like; for if the
plan is to succeed, the sound herd must be kept entirely away
from the infected barn, lots, and pastures. They must even have
DISEASES OF CATTLE 3851
different care takers. Since calves at birth are free from tubercu-
losis, those from the diseased herd may be put with those from
the sound herd. No animals should be admitted to the sound
herd without first being tested and the sound herd itself should
be tested once each year, and if any animals react, they are to be
put with the diseased herd and the stable thoroughly disin-
fected with corrosive sublimate.
If dairy cattle, the milk from the tuberculous herd must be
handled in entirely separate utensils and pasteurized at 185° F.,
after which it is considered harmless both for stock and human
food.
This method, though it involves much expense, seems to be
the only feasible one for the eradication of bovine tuberculosis.
It is being successfully conducted on several farms in this coun-
try at the present time. The painstaking and careful cattle
owner can eradicate tuberculosis from his herd in a very few
years by the Bang method, or some modification, if he so desires.
BLOATING IN CATTLE
Bloating, or “hoven,” is the distention of the paunch or
rumen with gas. It is liable to occur when cattle are first
turned to young clover or alfalfa, especially if the growth is
rank, as they eat it so greedily that gas formation results.
Turnips, potatoes, and cabbage may likewise set up fermenta-
tion, which proceeds rapidly; the gas does not escape, and
soon the rumen becomes distended to a large size. Bloating
is easily recognized by the distension of the rumen, particu-
larly on the left side, that part bulging outward and upward
very noticeably, and when struck with the tips of the fingers,
giving a drum-like sound. Breathing is very difficult, the animal
reels; and soon may lie down or fall.
The treatment varies according to the severity of the case. In
mild attacks, driving the animal at a walk often gives relief, or
dashing cold water by the bucketful against the sides may suffice.
352 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
If the animal is bad, it may be necessary to put a gag in the
mouth as follows: Take a piece of inch rope, smear it with pine
tar, wagon grease, or other unsavory substance, place it in the
animal's mouth as a bit, and fasten by tying around the horns;
or, take astick the size of afork handle and eight or ten inches
long, place this in the mouth as a bit and secure with a string by
tying around the head. It will try to dislodge these objects by
movements of the tongue, jaws, and throat, thus stimulating the
secretion of saliva and swallowing, which opens the esophagus
and permits the gas to escape. At this time a little salt thrown
Fic: 108.— Devon Herp; ‘Sauty”’ IN THE CENTER, HER TWO-YEAR-OLD
Buit CaF To THE RIGHT, AND HER YEARLING CALF TO THE LEerr. Owned
by L. P. Sisson.
into the mouth often proves advantageous. In severe cases, how-
ever, the gas must be allowed to escape without delay, and this is
best accomplished by the use of a trocar and canula. On the left
side, about halfway between the last rib and the hip, make an in-
cision through the skin about three-quarters of an inch long with
a sharp knife; through this incision insert the trocar and canula,
directing downward, inward, and slightly forward, and thrust
the point into the paunch. If this happens to be a fat animal,
it will be some distance through, but thrust it home. Remove
the trocar, leaving the canula in place, through which the gas
DISEASES OF CATTLE 858
may escape. This should be left in place as long as the gas is
generating. In the absence of a trocar, a sharp knife may be
thrust through to let the gas escape. Do not let the animal die
of bloating. Give internally two ounces of aromatic spirits of
ammonia in a quart of cold water. Repeat every half hour.
Turpentine in two-ounce doses is also good, but it must be well
diluted with milk to prevent injuring the animal: After bloat-
ing has subsided give physic; one pound of Glauber’s salt is
good.
Since there is danger of bloating in turning cattle to luxuriant
pasture, especially if wet with dew, they should always be well
fed and turned to pasture in the afternoon when the grass is dry.
Some advise taking them up the first night, feeding them well
the next morning, and not turning in pasture again till after-
noon. A little dry hay put in the pasture is excellent to prevent
bloating, as the cattle seem to crave it.
IMPACTION OF THE RUMEN
This difficulty often occurs among cattle and is due to the fill-
ing of the third stomach with indigestible material, such as frozen
grass, weeds, or foreign materials. The animal refuses to eat,
stands with back slightly arched, breathes rapidly, and may
bloat, though not always. Often the mass of undigested food
can be felt on the left side. The animal on lying down usually
lies on the right side.
For treatment give a mild purgative, three-fourths to one
pound of Epsom salts and two ounces of ginger dissolved in
warm water, and administer in the form of adrench. Feed gruels
and bran mashes if the animal will eat, and allow plenty of
water. To aid the bowels in moving one may give an injection
of warm water.
Cattle off feed.—Often cattle are thrown ‘‘off their feed” by
overfeeding, by irregular feeding, or by consuming indigestible
things such as frozen grass, weeds, and perhaps by eating foreign
2a
354 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
matter, particularly if it be salty. Such animals are simply in-
disposed, do not eat, and stand around with a dejected look. If
no attention is given them, they may remain in this condition
for some time. This is to be avoided if possible, as animals that
are not doing well are sure to prove unprofitable. The treat-
ment is to give pound doses of Epsom salts dissolved in warm
water to which a little ginger has been added. If they will eat,
give gruels or mashes, and allow all the fresh water they will
drink.
DEHORNING
In case the horns were not removed when the calf was small, as
suggested on page 255, and it is desired to remove them later, it
will be necessary to remove them with either a saw or a pair of
dehorning clippers. The animal must be confined in a chute or
stocks made for such purposes, a rope placed around the head,
which should be pulled to one side and held firmly while the horn
is removed. Whether sawed or clipped, remove the horn so close
to the head as to take a ring of hair off at the base of the horn,
otherwise the horn will grow out asastub. If in fly time, apply
tar to keep the flies away. The bleeding will stop of its own
accord. The pain of the operation is slight, and whenever
animals are disposed to be vicious the horns should be removed.
It is not a good plan to dehorn when the flies are bad, nor should
dehorned animals have access to straw or hay stacks where they
can get the chaff into the wounds.
VICES OF DAIRY CATTLE
There are afew bad.habits or vices to which dairy cattle are
subject. They are often serious and lessen the usefulness of the
animal. Most of them, however, can be remedied with a little
patient effort, or by the arrangement of inexpensive apparatus.
Kicking cow. — To prevent a cow from kicking, procure a
half-inch rope long enough to reach around the cow’s body and
DISEASES OF CATTLE 855
tie ; place the rope, with slip noose on one end, around the body
of the cow, just in front of the udder and back of the hip bones.
Draw tight and tie. Repeat each milking, always treating the
cow gently. After a time one need only lay the rope over the
cow’s back. Finally the rope may be discarded.
Another method recommended by some is to take a hame strap
and buckle the two hind legs together, but this is not efficient as
she is likely to get one leg loose or throw herself endeavoring to
do so.
When the cow is tied by the stanchion, the experienced milker
will be able to milk almost any cow by crowding her over as far
as the stanchion will let her go, then by placing his knee in front
of her hock and his head in her flank she is not likely to try to
kick ; in fact she cannot, if the milker understands holding her
in the proper position.
Sucking cow. — Occasionally a cow develops the habit of
either sucking herself or another cow. While there are many
ways of preventing this, perhaps as efficient way as any is to
procure a stiff piece of old leather, say one and one-half inches
wide and eight inches long, drive through this several eight-
penny wire nails with the ends filed down to a point and fasten
to the nose-band of a common halter and place this halter on the
sucking cow. With this she cannot reach her own teats or those
of any other cow without injuring the flanks, and she not likely
to try more than once.
PART THREE — SHEEP
CHAPTER XVI
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SHEEP
FAMILIARITY with what is wanted, powers of observation, and
good judgment are equally as important in choosing sheep as in
choosing cows or horses. These can be gained only by careful
study, and more especially by practice, as sheep are often de-
ceptive. The importance of these faculties cannot be overesti-
mated in the choice of any class of farm animals.
The wool-covering of the body of the sheep makes an examina-
tion of the form rather difficult. The wool is often so trimmed
as to deceive. An expert trimmer, possessing much skill with
the shears, can give a rather inferior sheep the appearance of a
plump full form; thus animals with sway backs, narrow, flat
ribs, narrow, peaked rumps are often so trimmed as to conceal
such defects. To facilitate the inspection and hasten the work,
to avoid being deceived and to enable the examiner to discover
all defects, the following method of examining sheep is
suggested : —
After noting the general appearance, the age, the teeth,
the eyes, and the like, then, with the open hand, as shown
in the illustrations (page 369), proceed to a detailed examina-
tion. Do not depend on the eye alone, but fortify it with the
touch, carefully noting each character as described under detail
examination (page 368). During this examination keep the
fingers and thumb together and the hand flat. Never stick the
fingers into the wool. When it is desired to examine the wool,
open up the wool with the hand flat (Fig. 121).
359 *
360 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Catching and holding sheep. — There are two places to catch
sheep: First, the hind leg above the gambel joint ; second, by
i BF
Fic. 104.—Derrtains Merino Ram ‘Beacon.’ <A prize winner, owned by
C. Marshall, New London, Ohio.
The Delaine Merino sheep are of American Merino ancestry, bred mainly by
selecting from varieties free from folds. This breed resembles the American
Merino except lacking the heavy fold, and the fleece is not so heavy. There are
several families of Delaines, such as National, Standard, Dickinson, and Black
Top. Rams shear from 12 to 20 younds, the ewes from 8 to 15 pounds of
strong, fine wool. In weight the rams vary from 130 to 200 pounds, the ewes
from 100 to 140 pounds. This breed is popular in the United States.
placing the hand underneath the jaw and around the neck. Do
not catch a sheep by its wool, as this not only pulls and injures
the wool, but leaves a black mark or bruise on the body which
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SHEEP 361
interferes very much with the sale of the carcass of mutton. If
the shepherd’s crook is used in catching the sheep, the aim
should be to catch above the gambrel joint, as there is danger of
injuring the leg if caught below this joint.
To hold a sheep, stand on the left side and place the left hand
under the animal’s jaw, keeping the right hand free to place
behind the sheep in case it attempts to move backward. Do
not attempt to keep the sheep from moving backward by pull-
ing on the head or the wool, as either of these methods will
be quickly resisted, which will result in injury to the wool and
carcass. Gently place the right arm around back of the thighs,
and the sheep will stop the backward movement at once. Like-
wise do not attempt to keep the animal from going forward by
pulling on the wool, but place the left hand gently under
the jaw.
HOW TO ESTIMATE AGE OF SHEEP
The age of sheep is a very important factor in determining
their present and prospective value. Familiarity with the
characters that indicate age are, therefore, often extremely use-
ful. As in the case of the horse a knowledge of these characters
is not difficult to secure, and skill in their application depends
much on continued practice.
In estimating the age of sheep the order of the appearance
of the permanent teeth furnishes the best index, especially from
one to four years of age. There are, however, other general
considerations that aid in estimating the age, especially in the
case of young and very old animals. Size is the principal factor
in determining the age up to one year. In very old animals
the poll becomes more prominent, the sides of the face more
depressed, and the hollows above the eyes deeper. With
age the backbone becomes more prominent and often strongly
curved downward, the sheep loses its plumpness, and in many
ways shows the effects of age.
3862 . MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Examination of the teeth.— While the order of the appear-
ance of the permanent teeth and their subsequent method of
wearing are considered the most accurate means of estimating
age among sheep, they are not absolutely accurate nor are
they as dependable as in the horse. Teeth in sheep vary much
according to the conditions, as in the case of the horse (see
page 8).
Sheep, like cattle, are provided with two sets of teeth; first,
the temporary or milk teeth, and, later, the permanent teeth.
The permanent teeth differ from the temporary in their greater
size. The replacement of the
temporary teeth by the perma-
nent is made necessary by the
increase in size of the jawbone
as the animal becomes older.
As in the case of cattle, sheep
have incisor teeth in the lower
jaw only, the upper being pro-
vided with a cartilaginous pad.
The number likewise is the
same, eight in either case.
Fic. 105.— Suezps’ TEETH, ILLUS- The lamb is often born with
eee one pair of milk teeth and the
oF aa eg a eae others soon make their appear-
48 months. — 8 years. ance. These milk teeth are
narrow and peg-like in appear-
ance. When the animal is approximately fifteen months of age,
the middle pair of milk teeth is replaced by permanent ones,
which are fully twice as broad as the milk teeth, hence easily
recognized (Fig. 105). The interval between the appearance
of the succeeding pairs varies according to conditions, but can
be stated as approximately eleven months. In general the age
of the animal at the time each pair is up and in full wear
may be estimated as follows : —
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SHEEP 363
First or middle pair of permanent teeth . . . . . . 15 months
Second or first intermediate pair of permanent teeth . . 26 months
Third or second intermediate pair of permanent teeth . 37 months
Fourth or lateral pair of permanent teeth. . . . . . 48months
After the teeth are up and in wear, there is comparatively
little change for a time, but as the animal grows older the teeth
become narrower, and by the eighth or ninth year there is
much space between them. They shrink away from each
other, become more or less discolored, and finally drop out one
by one.
TYPES OF SHEEP
There are two distinct types of sheep: the wool type,
adapted for the production of much wool, and the mutton
type, adapted for the production of meat. These types are
controlled to a considerable extent by the demands made upon
the body of the animal. Thus in the case of wool production
as much skin surface as possible is desired, and the skin is
thrown into folds. Large wool yields depend much on the con-
stitution, the vigor, and the condition of the skin; hence much
consideration is given these characters in choosing wool sheep.
Likewise much attention is paid the skin secretions, which should
be oily in appearance This oil is commonly called “ yolk.”
The wool should be fine, with a natural bright luster and a
clean white color. On the other hand, the mutton type calls
for a form similar to that of beef cattle. The carcass is the
product, and a plump full body is desired. The energy of the
food should go to the production of mutton and not of wool.
These two types, therefore, are of necessity widely different,
and one can no more expect maximum wool production and
maximum mutton production in the same sheep than he can
have greatest milk flow and greatest yield of beef in the same
cow.
The fine-wool type.-- There are three important breeds of
364 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
fine-wool sheep, the American Merino, the Delaine Merino,
and the Rambouillet. The fine-wool, or Merino and Ram-
bouillet type, may be compared to that of the dairy cow. The
body is spare, lacking in fullness, in breadth of back, and in
general thickness throughout. The wool is rather short, very
thick over the entire body, and exceedingly fine.
Fig. 106.— CHampion Merino Ram. A type. Photograph from Nattonal
Stockman and Farmer.
Owing to the difference in type, as shown by thc folds or wrinkles on the neck
and over the body, fine-wooled sheep are divided into three classes. Class A,
Merino, represents the class or type with very heavy folds; Class B, Merino,
has a smoother body ; Class C, Merino, has a smooth body with only a few or
no folds at all about the neck and breast.
There are three classes of fine-wool sheep, grouped according
to the folds or wrinkles on the neck and body. By common
consent these forms are distinguished by letter as follows:
Class A. — Merino, representing those with heavy folds at the
neck and over the body and hind-quarters, and possessing an
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SIITEEP 365
abundance of yolk or grease (Fig. 106). Class B. — Merino,
representing those with fewer and smaller folds on neck and
body and carrying less yolk in
the wool (Fig. 107). Class C.—
Merino, representing those with
comparatively smooth bodies,
possessing less yolk than Class
B, though the wool is, as a rule,
somewhat longer (Fig. 108). Of
the three classes A is perhaps
the heaviest shearer, a case being Fic. 107.—Cuampion Merino
reported of an animal shearing 36 ame oe dam
per cent of his gross weight. \
The mutton type. — There are many breeds of mutton sheep,
divided into two general groups, known as the medium-wool
and the long-wool; each, however, in the main possesses the
characteristic mutton type.
The mutton type resembles the
beef type. The animals are low-
set, compact, and blocky in
appearance,
CHOOSING SHEEP
In choosing sheep, whether
for the production of mutton or
fine wool, they should be care-
fully examined. It is essential
that the examination be syste-.
ee ree matic. Perhaps the most con-
yearling ram at four State fairs, venient and simplest method is
1909. Bred and owned by W. N.
Cook and Son, New London, Ohio. to note, first, the general ap-
pearance, the form, weight, con-
dition, quality, and constitution, and if these are satisfactory,
to make a more detailed examination.
366 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
General appearance
By carefully observing the general appearance of a sheep,
one can gain a fair knowledge of its desirability. Very often
the general appearance is not given much consideration, with
the result that many important characters go unobserved.
Before proceeding to a detailed examination one should care-
fully note the form; this applies with equal force when selecting
for mutton or wool; if for mutton, the weight and condition
are important and the quality as well as the constitution are
of vital importance to both types and should receive much
careful attention.
The form will vary according to the object sought. In the
fine-wool sheep the form may differ materially from that desired
for mutton. Class A, fine-wool, should have very heavy folds
over the entire body. Great depth of body is often more
sought than width, and the animals are often quite angular in
appearance. The form sought is that which indicates great
vitality and gives much surface for the production of wool.
Fine-wool sheep are therefore often high-standing; deep of
chest, though narrow; long of body, though well supported ;
light in the hind-quarters with skin fold varying according to
the class.
On the other hand, the form of the mutton sheep should be
comparable to that of the beef animal. They should be low
and condensed in organization. The top and bottom lines
should be parallel, the shoulders and chest almost as wide as the
hips and rump. The body should be short and thick, as long
bodies lacking in depth and fullness are objectionable to the
sheep feeder and to the butcher. The region of valuable cuts
of mutton are the same as those of beef, that is, along the
back, loin, rump, and thigh; hence these regions should be ex-
ceedingly strong and well developed.
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SHEEP 367
Condition and weight. — Since the weight depends much on
the condition of the sheep, they will be considered together.
As weight is a breed characteristic, no definite figures can be
suggested, but the animals chosen should be fairly large for the
particular breed to which they belong. Among wool sheep the
condition should be such as to indicate thrift and health; exces-
sive fleshiness is not essential. In general, the condition must
be determined by the touch, as the wool often deceives the eye.
Among mutton sheep a fair amount of flesh is desirable, even
in the breeding stock, as the tendency to fatten quickly is a
very important consideration in this type.
Quality. — Sheep possessing -much quality are desired for
both mutton and wool production. With sheep, as with other
farm animals, quality is determined by the bone, skin, and hair.
The bone should be dense, clean, and of fine texture. The skin
should be soft, pink in color, and comparatively thin. Care
must be exercised in respect to the thinness of the skin, as a
thin paper skin is often associated with weakness of constitu-
tion. The hair on the ears, face, and legs should be soft and
silky. These are important features in sheep intended for
wool or for mutton, for breeding or for feeding. Sheep possess-
ing a tight, heavy, pale skin, coarse, harsh hair about the face
and on the legs, and heavy rough, coarse bone are deficient in
quality.
The constitutional vigor deserves much attention, for in its
absence the wool will be of poor quality and the mutton sheep
an unprofitable animal. Vigor is estimated by the general
expression, by the condition of the skin, and by the chest ca-
pacity. The expression of the eyes, ears, and head should be
mild and lively, and the sheep should be on the alert. The skin
should be deep pink and not pale. The chest capacity should
be large. A good way to estimate the chest capacity among
sheep is to note the distance between the front legs along the
floor of the chest. If the distance between the legs is small, it
868 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
denotes a narrow chest. A narrow chest is always objection-
able, as it may indicate lack of constitutional vigor.
Umiformity.— The importance of uniformity in a flock of
sheep chosen either for wool or mutton cannot be overestimated.
They should be uniform in type, size, and breeding. While
such uniformity may not add to the production of wool or to the
ability to take on flesh, it materially improves their general
appearance and increases their market value. Either the
butcher or the sheep breeder will pay more for a uniform flock
than for one in which such regularity is wanting.
Detail characters of sheep
A detailed examination of the characters of sheep is of
greater importance than that of any other class of farm ani-
mals. This is due to the wool covering many defects. In
order that none of the characters be overlooked, they should
be considered in order.
The head should be short, with strong jaws and large nostrils.
The mouth should be examined to note the age and whether any
teeth are missing. Sheep with missing teeth are undesirable at
any price, either for mutton or wool. The eyes should be mild,
bright, and prominent; the forehead broad and full. The ears
should be refined, short, and active. Coarse, leathery ears are
objectionable, as they indicate poor quality. The horns, if pres-
ent, should be strong, rather angular at the base, and have a
spiral shape turning backward and around, sometimes making
two complete turns (Fig. 110).
Neck. — With the flat hand note the length and fullness of
the neck. Among mutton sheep the neck should be full, short,
and neatly attached to the head and shoulders. In fine-wool
sheep it may possess some length, deep folds, and lack the full-
ness, though it should be neatly attached at both head and
shoulders (Fig. 111).
Shoulders. — Among mutton sheep the shoulder should be
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SHEEP 3869
Fig. 110. — DeteRMINING CoNDITION
or TEETH, AND THE AGE.
Fic. 109.—Jupcine Suesr. Noting
THE GENERAL APPEARANCE,
Fic. 112. — FULLNESS OF THE
Fie. 111.— Noting FULLNEss oF SHOULDER.
THE NEcK.
Fic. 118.— WiptH oF CHEST. Fic. 114.— Wipts or Bopy.
2B
370 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
full, neat, and closely rounded along the sides and over the top.
Sharp, angular shoulders are very objectionable. They should
be smoothly curved with flesh (Fig. 112).
Chest. — With the flat hand note the capacity of the chest
as follows: kneeling on the left side of the animal, place the
left hand on the floor of the chest, between and just back of
the fore legs, at the same time placing the right hand on the
back just to the rear of the shoulder-tops. In this position one
can note lack of depth as well as the narrowness of the chest
at both top and bottom. Next note the heart girth and width
of chest by placing one hand on either side at the same time.
The importance of a wide, deep chest, indicating great vitality,
cannot be overestimated. In no other way except by the
touch can these dimensions be determined, as the wool covers
the parts so completely (Fig. 115).
Body. — With the hands in the same position, one either side
of the animal, note the width of the body. Next place the
flat hand on the back at the shoulder-tops and note the width
and straightness of the back from the shoulder-tops to the tail-
head, by pressing down gently as the hand is drawn to the rear.
In so doing one must observe that the sheep does not move his
back as the hand is passing over and make the back appear
swayed when in reality it is not. Since the back, loin, and
rump contain the valuable cuts, a close examination of this
region is important, and, as in the chest, this can be noted only
by the touch (Figs. 114 and 117).
The rump should be long, wide, and level. This can be ascer-
tained only by the touch. The fleshiness should be carried
well down to the hock, and the twist should be plump and full
(Figs. 118 and 119).
The leg of mutton, which includes the rump also, is the most
valuable cut of mutton; therefore, the thigh should be heavily
meated. This can be determined only by the touch, and to do
this one places the left hand around the leg at the flank and
the right around the rear at the thigh (Fig. 120).
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SHEEP 3871
Fic. 115.— Deprun or Cusst.
Fia.'116.— FuLuness ar SHOULDER
Tops.
Fic. 117. — DeTeRMINING FULLNESS Fic. 118. — Wipru or Hips.
or Back.
Fie. 119.— Wipts or THiGHs. Fig. 120.— Conprrion or Lea or
Morron.
372 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
The legs should be carefully observed. Sheeps’ legs are at
best far from straight. As a rule, the fore legs of fine-wool
sheep are too close together, the knees often almost touching.
This is objectionable, for, as we have already observed, fore legs
placed close together indicate a narrow chest, which in turn
signifies lack of constitutional vigor. Fine-wool sheep also
have very crooked hocks, which is equally as objectionable.
Often the legs below the hocks are carried too much under the
body, the shanks being too slanting. The toes are often neg-
lected and let grow out too long, which throws the legs still
farther out of their proper position.
Examining the fleece
In the examination of the wool the chief factors to consider
are the quantity, the quality, and the condition. In consider-
ing the quantity the entire body must be examined. To note
the quantity along the belly
and arm pits, the sheep
should be turned up and
placed on itsrump. To turn
the sheep, stand on the left
side of the animal, place the
left arm around under the
neck at the shoulder points,
with the right hand reach
under the sheep, seize the
right hind foot, gently lift the
animal off his feet, and place
him on his rump, belly up.
One should have a mat or gunny sack on which to place the
sheep to prevent soiling the wool of the rump, particularly if
in the show ring. With the sheep in this position, the wool
along the belly and arm pits can be carefully noted. These
places should be densely covered, though such is seldom the
Fic. 121.— Examininc Tur Fierce
FOR THE FINEST OF THE WOOL.
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SHEEP 873
case among many of the mutton breeds. In considering the
quality, the best method is to open the fleece along the side
just back of the shoulder and
in the region of the thigh.
With the hands placed in a
flat position, open the wool just
back of the shoulder (Fig. 121).
It is in this region that the
finest and soundest wool of the
fleece is found. With the
hands in like position, open
the wool along the thigh (Fig.
122). ; In this region the poor- Fie. 122.—Examinine THE FLEEce
est and coarsest wool of the FOR THE CoarsesT or THE WooL.
entire fleece is to be found.
Quantity of fleece. — The chief factors to be considered in
determining the quantity of fleece are the density and length,
and the evenness of both over all parts of the sheep’s body.
By density is meant the closeness of the fibers or the number
of fibers that grow on a square inch. As a rule the greater the
number, the finer the fibers will be; hence the fleece will not
only be heavier, but more valuable as well. A dense fleece is
desired, as it affords the animal more protection than one that
is loose and open; hence sheep with dense fleeces suffer less
from catarrhal and other disease:. A dense, oily fleece is im-
pervious to rain, snow, and wind, as well as dirt, dust, and
pieces of hay. On the other hand, the loose open fleece becomes
saturated with water on exposure, the sheep catch cold, suffer
from catarrh, running at the nose, scouring, and various other
diseases, and the fleece becomes loaded with dust, dirt, and
chaff.
The length of the fleece is one of the important features in
considering the quantity. The length is a breed characteristic,
and the only suggestion that can be made is that it should be
874 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
long tor the particular breed concerned. The length will vary
from approximately two inches in the case of the fine-wool to
twenty and even more inches for a single year’s growth in the
case of some of the long-wool breeds.
Quality of fleece. — The chief factors to be considered in de-
termining the quality of the fleece are the softness, crimp, and
the soundness. Quality and quantity are not associated; that
is to say, as a general rule the shorter-wool breeds of sheep
possess the finest quality of wool. As stated, the finest quality
of wool is located over the heart region and the poorest quality
on the thigh.
The softness is estimated by pressing the fleece with the closed
hand. The amount of oil or yolk influences the softness to a
considerable extent; also the management, the kind of food, and
the nature of the soil. Providing the sheep suitable quarters,
feeding foods rich in fat, and pasturing them on clay soils, all
have a tendency to increase the softness of the fleece. Chalky
soils, on the other hand, are noted for emphasizing harshness of
the fleece. Harshness is due in a large measure to the absence
of yolk, which results from exposure, lack of proper food, ill
health, and the like.
Crimp refers to the folds or spirals of the fiber. The crimp
should be fine, close, and regular from one end of the fiber to
the other, as this indicates wool of finest quality. If the crimp
is irregular, short and close in places, long and wavy in others,
the fiber is probably unsound. In all coarse wool, the crimp is
open and wavy.
Soundness indicates that the fiber should be strong from end
to end, as it usually will be if the crimp is fine, close, and
regular. To furnish an additional guide in locating unsound-
ness, remove a small lock of the wool and stretch evenly and
gently until the strength becomes apparent. If the fibers each
break in approximately the same place, it indicates an un-
sound place in the wool. When such break occurs near the
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SHEEP 3875
bottom, it is spoken of as “weak bottoms”; when near the
middle, ‘‘weak middles,”” and when near the top, “weak tops.”
If the fibers are resistant, each breaking in a different place, and
the crimp fine, close, and even, the fiber is sound.
Condition of the fleece. — The chief factors to be considered
in determining the condition of the fleece are its purity, luster,
brightness, and the oil or yolk. The condition of the fleece is
influenced by breeding, feeding, and management, some breeds
possessing much brighter wool than others, some foods produc-
Fic. 123.— American Merino Ewes. Owned by W. M. Staley, Marysville,
Ohio.
The American Merino developed from the Spanish Merino, although they have
been much improved in America. This brecd is noted particularly for the
strong, fine, and heavy fleece. Ewes shear from 10 to 15 pounds, while rams
easily attain 20 pounds of fine wool. In weight the ewes reach 100 pounds
and up, while the rams weigh 130 pounds and up, often attaining 200 pounds.
This breed is very popular in the United States.
ing more yolk than others; and providing suitable quarters
and giving proper care keeps the wool much more clean than
otherwise.
Purity refers to the freedom of the fleece from foreign ma-
terial. In the absence of proper management, where sheep are
long exposed to conditions opposed to thrift, the wool has a
tendency to revert to its original form. Hairs and dead fibers,
often called “kemp,” make their appearance. The fleece
that is loose and open often accumulates much chaff, pieces of
376 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
hay, and the like. This foreign material is very injurious to
the fleece, as it is difficult to remove, does not absorb dyes,
and interferes in the manufacture of cloth.
Luster refers to the glistening appearance of the fiber. On
being held in the light the fiber appears as if it were varnished.
Luster is independent of oil, as fibers possessing a small amount
of oil or yolk may be very lustrous, while other fibers possessing
much oil may be rather dull. The significance of this luster is
that wool possessing it more readily takes delicate dyes.
Brightness refers to the color of the fibers. Wool is spoken of
as bright or dark, the former signifying a clear white color, the
latter signifying the darker colors.
Yolk refers to the oil or grease that is found in the wool.
This oil is readily recognized by running the hand over the
wool. The various breeds differ widely in the amount of oil
secreted and the amount is influenced by the food. Yolk is
desirable as the fleece is much softer, more compact, as well as
brighter and cleaner, and in addition it indicates thrift in the
sheep. Excessive quantities of yolk are of no advantage, and
may be a source of direct loss, especially in the manufacturing
of woolens.
Summary.—In the examination of wool, therefore, one must
consider first the quantity, second the quality, and third the
condition. Under quantity note the covering over the entire
body, including the belly and arm pits, also the density and
length which should be even over the entire body; under
quality note the softness, crimp, and soundness; and under
condition note the purity, luster, brightness, and yolk.
CHAPTER XVII
FEEDING SHEEP
SHEEP are among the most difficult of farm animals to feed,
Thorough familiarity with their habits is essential to success.
No other farm animal is less understood by the masses of
American farmers. A knowledge of their peculiar characteris-
tics can be gained only by a careful study and much experience
in handling the animals. Sheep are naturally very timid in
their disposition, very dainty feeders, and are easily frightened
out of their appetite. A sudden noise or disturbance of any
kind, as the bark of a dog, will often greatly frighten them and
sometimes create a stampede or panic in the entire flock.
Sheep have a natural aversion for strange dogs, and one coming
near the flock will cause the sheep to run, which excites the
dog to the chase, not necessarily because he is a vicious dog
but because of his nature to give chase to whatever flees from
him. In the excitement of the chase, the dog may tear the
skins of the sheep with the teeth, sometimes inflicting fatal
wounds. Sheep thus chased may die of exhaustion, and the
entire flock will shrink badly in weight. In most cases if the
sheep would stand their ground, the dog would not give chase.
As goats do not ordinarily run from dogs, one or two placed in
the flock often prevents the sheep from becoming frightened.
The difficulty is to get the goats to stay with the flock. It
may be necessary to raise the goats with the flock to teach
them to remain with it at all times. It is very apparent that
if sheep are to be profitable, they must be kept free from all
377
378 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
such excitement, and all unnecessary noise must be avoided.
To avoid startling the sheep, herdsmen often make it a prac-
tice to whistle or talk to them as they approach.
Sheep are the most susceptible of farm animals to the
ravages of parasites, both internal and external. These para-
sites in some one or more of their many forms are responsible
for the larger number of failures in this country. No part of
our land is free from them all. In certain localities one form
will be the more destructive, in other localities another form is
to be dreaded. For example, in the corn-belt the stomach
worm (Strongylus contortus) is by far the most serious, while
in the far West, scab is the more troublesome. As arule little
attention is given these parasites; the flock becomes infested,
many of the sheep become ill and die, and the others fail to
thrive, and sometimes the owner does not know what causes the
trouble.
Sheep possess a very dainty appetite. The food must be at-
tractive when placed before them or they are likely to refuse it.
Any food left in the feed boxes must be removed as soon as the
sheep are through feeding. If such food is left, it undergoes
slight change, becoming sour, and when the fresh food is placed
in this, the sheep refuse it entirely. Sometimes the trough in
which the grain is fed is placed beneath the hay-rack in such a
way as to collect the dust, dirt, and chaff that sifts from the
hay. This construction, while economical of material and
space, is objectionable because the grain trough cannot be
kept clean as it should be, with the result that occasionally
the sheep refuse the grain.
While sheep can withstand the cold without suffering much
inconvenience, they cannot endure the rain or snow that satu-
rates their wool, nor dark, damp, and poorly ventilated quar-
ters. Such conditions lead to colds, running at the nose,
catarrh, inflammation, diarrhea, and all kinds of sheep diseases.
From this it follows that if sheep are to prove profitable, they
FEEDING SHEEP 3879
must be kept quiet; all unnecessary excitement avoided, prop-
erly nutritious foods and suitable quarters provided.
FOOD REQUIREMENTS OF SHEEP
The quantity of food required by sheep depends on many
factors, chief of which are the kind of food, and the age, weight,
condition and individuality of the animal as well as the chief
product sought, whether wool or mutton.
Since foods vary widely in the energy they contain as well as
in their influence upon wool or mutton production, and since
young animals, for an equal weight, require more food, and of a
different kind than older animals, it is not possible to state exact
amounts. The Wolff-Lehman standards, however, will serve as
a guide to be modified to suit the foods, animal, and conditions.
These standards (p. 380) were arranged to meet the need of
the average farm sheep under normal conditions, and as general
guides to be varied in practice as circumstances suggest.
Sudden changes in the food of sheep are to be avoided for the
reason that the alimentary system, in many cases, is unable to
accommodate itself at once, and digestive disorders follow.
Such changes sometimes result in bloating, as when sheep are
transferred from a dry to a watery diet, from the dry-lot feed-
ing of winter to the early spring pasture where the grass is
very succulent. Some pasture grasses are very likely to pro-
duce bloating, particularly alfalfa and clover. In regions of
considerable rainfall and much dew, alfalfa is serious in this
respect.
Fresh cool water should be available at all times. In winter,
when it is exceedingly cold, sheep are not likely to drink very
much, but if one is to succeed with them, they must have free
access to water. Sheep are peculiar in their habit of drinking as
well as eating, and if watered at intervals, do not do so well as
when the water is available at all times.
Salt in limited quantities should be kept before the sheep.
380 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
It is especially useful in the spring when the grass comes, and no
doubt often checks bowel troubles when the sheep have free
access to it.
Wolff-Lehman standards, showing the amount of food required per 1000
pounds live weight for both wool and mutton as well as growing, mature,
and fattening sheep
ConpDiITION oF ANIMAL
DIGESTIBLE NUTRIENTS
Growing Sheep Dry- NutTRITIVE
Wool Breeds MatTrer Ratio
Age, Mo. Weight Protein pa . Fat
4-6 60 25 3.4 15.4 0.7 1:5.0
6-8 75 25 2.8 13.8 0.6 1:5.4
8-11 80 23 2.1 11.5 0.5 1:6.0
11-15 90 22 1.8 11.2 0.4 1:7.0
15-20 100 22 1.5 10.8 0.3 1:7.7
Growing Sheep
Mutton Breeds
4-6 60 26 4.4 15.5 0.9 1:4.0
6-8 80 26 3.5 15.0 0.7 1:48
8-11 100 24 3.0 14.3 0.5 1:5.2
11-15 120 23 2.2 12.6 0.5 1:6.3
15-20 150 22 2.0 12.0 0.4 1:6.5
Mature Sheep
Coarse wool . . 20 1.2 10.5 0.2 1:91
Fine wool . . . 23 1.5 12.0 0.3 1:8.5
Breeding ewes
with lambs . . 25 2.9 15.0 0.5 1:56
Fattening sheep,
first period . . 30 3.0 15.0 0.5 1:5.4
Second period. . 28 3.5 14.5 0.6 1:4.5
FEEDING THE FLOCK
The feeding of the flock deserves special attention. The
flock is often sadly neglected; it is pastured along lanes and
FEEDING SHEEP 381
highways, in woodland and marshland, or in hilly land in
summer; given the protection of the woodland or straw stack:
and fed at intervals during the winter; and as a result of such
treatment the sheep become affected with parasites, both exter-
nal and internal, many may die; all are unthrifty, and the owner
becomes discouraged, selling the animals for little or nothing.
Fic. 124.— RampBoviuttet Ram. Photograph by National Stockman and Farmer
The Rambouillet breed of fine-wool sheep developed in France, although tracing
to Spanish origin. This breed is similar to the Delaine, but possessing more
size, the rams weighing from 150 to 225 pounds, the ewes 125 to 175 pounds.
The fleece is the lightest of the fine-wool sheep, the rams shearing from 10
to 20 pounds and the ewes from 8 to 12 pounds.
The flock in summer
Unlike stock cattle, the flock must receive careful attention
in summer as well as in winter, particularly in those regions
infested with stomach worms,— the sheep’s greatest enemy.
3882 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
These worms have done more to discourage the propagation of
sheep than all other causes combined, especially on the fertile
farm lands in the central states. These pests seldom trouble
sheep in cool regions, or in cold weather. Lambs are espe-
cially susceptible to attack, the older suffering much less and
being more easily managed in summer. Because of the cool
weather, the New England states, northern New York,
Ontario, upper Michigan, and northern Minnesota and Wiscon-
sin are comparatively free from these pests. Only occasionally
do stomach worms trouble sheep west of the corn-belt, and
there they may be avoided by clearing up the watering places.
Much of the cheap farm land throughout this section could be
put to the profitable production of sheep.
Pasture for sheep. — Pastures for sheep need similar care tc
those suggested for cattle. The stand of grass, the drainage of
the soil, and keeping down the weeds deserve much attention.
It is even more important that they be kept free from weeds,
particularly burrs of various kinds, as they are especially inju-
rious to the wool (page 286).
Sheep thrive on pasture as nowhere else. They are particu-
larly adapted to grazing short forage, and prefer it, as it is tender
and juicy. In fact, sheep often keep parts of the pasture grazed
so closely as to injure the plants, while the grass in other parts
of the same field is left to grow up and seed. This can be pre-
vented in part by mowing the entire pasture twice each year.
The sheep will then pasture on the tender second growth.
Turning to pasture. — Care should be exercised in turning
sheep to pasture, otherwise some of the flock may be troubled
with bloat. The extent of the trouble depends much on the
condition as well as the kind of grass, young succulent grass
being more troublesome than older and riper grass, and alfalfa
or clover more than blue-grass or orchard-grass. In regions of
much dew, alfalfa is likely to be the most troublesome of all.
After alfalfa becomes woody there is not so much danger from
FEEDING SHEEP 383
bloating. Mixed grasses are also less dangerous. There are
many methods suggested for turning sheep to pasture. The
following is as good as any; when the grass is very succulent,
make the change from dry forage to pasture gradually ; that is,
after feeding the sheep, turn to pasture say two hours during the
middle of the first day, taking the sheep off the pasture before the
dew falls. The second day leave them on a little longer, and by
the fourth or fifth day they may remain in the pasture over night.
When the sheep are familiarized with the pasture in this way,
they must be carefully noted the next morning to see that none
is suffering from bloat.
Tagging the sheep. — When sheep are first turned to pasture,
the succulent grass often induces a more or less lax condition of
the bowels. The soft dung soils the wool below the tail-head,
causing the parts to become foul, and may produce troublesome
and vicious sores unless given attention. Such troubles are not
likely to occur when the sheep have been shorn previous to turn-
ing to pasture. If, however, it is desired to turn to pasture
before shearing, the wool should be carefully clipped away be-
neath the tail-head and along the inside of the thighs behind.
Change in pasture. — When convenient, an occasional change
of sheep from one pasture to another will prove advantageous.
On farms heavily stocked with sheep there are two reasons for
this: first, the change gives a chance for the fresh grass to
grow, thereby preventing the sheep from cropping parts of the
pasture too closely; and, second, it lessens the danger from par-
asitic germs by allowing the larvee to die before finding lodg-
ment in the sheep’s body. More satisfactory results would be
obtained by dividing large pastures into several small ones, and
pasturing them in turn from the time warm weather sets in until
the cool weather of the fall. While this system would no doubt
largely enable the sheep to escape parasite infection, it involves
extra equipment in the way of fencing, shade, water supply, and
the like, and there may be other means of accomplishing the
384 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
desired end without the extra expense, such as by the use of
sown pastures.
Providing shade. — Sheep on pasture should be given pro-
tection from the sun. They are fond of shade and will seek it,
Fic. 125.—Sournpown Ewe. First prize ewe, International Live Stock Show,
1909. Owned by Chas. & Jas. Leet, Mantua, Ohio.
The native home of the Southdown breed of mutton sheep is in England. This
breed is noted for its rapid maturing qualities, and its delicious mutton. In
outward appearance the animals are perfect. In weight the rams average
about 175 pounds, and the ewes 135 pounds. Asa wool breed it occupies a
subordinate place, the fleece not weighing much over 4 to 8 pounds.
even though all they can find is that provided by the shade of a
wire fence-post. They will spend much of the time in the shade
during the heat of the day. Unlike cattle, the shade tree is not
sufficient for sheep, artificial shade being much preferred. The
FEEDING SHEEP 385
great objection to the shade tree as a resting place for sheep
is the danger of parasite infection. (There is also danger from
lightning.) There is an accumulation of droppings, which
either bear or afford a convenient brooding place for such
harmful parasitic germs as “grub in the head,” throat worms,
stomach worms, nodular disease, and the like. The droppings
encourage the growth of sweet rich grass near the tree. The
germs are harbored about the base of this sweet grass.
When the pasture is near the shed or barn, no better shade
can be provided than to give the sheep the freedom of these
quarters, which should then be slightly darkened by hanging
blankets or gunny sacks over the windows. A blanket may be
so hung over the door that the sheep in passing into the shed will
brush the flies off their backs. The shed or barn should be kept
well bedded, as this preserves the manure which otherwise would
be largely wasted. Hay kept in the racks will prove advanta-
geous, as the sheep will eat much of it and be benefited thereby.
If small sheds are provided in the field, they should be placed
on runners in order to move them from place to place as the
sheep are changed from one field to another. This plan scat-
ters the manure more thoroughly and does away with much of
the evil caused by parasites. These shades need be only a
roof and may be made of pine boards, ag it is not essential
that they be rain-proof. They need not be high. Such a
roof sixteen feet square will provide shade for a flock of forty
sheep.
The use of sown pastures. —- The best way to care for the flock
in summer, in order to avoid parasite infection, particularly with
a flock of lambs, is to sow special pasture crops for the flock. In
this way the owner may have various green forage crops coming
on regularly at different times, and thus avoid having the
sheep graze on the same area for any considerable time. It
avoids practically all danger from the many parasites that at-
tack sheep during the summer season. There are many plants
2c
386 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
that may be used as green feeds for summer pasture, chief of
which are rye, oats, alfalfa, clover, rape, kale, cabbage, turnips,
and pumpkins.
While it is less trouble to provide permanent pastures and
grow the common farm crops for the sheep, and while sheep may
be maintained upon them alone, it is nevertheless essential to
highest and healthiest development. Such food aids in escap-
ing the ravishes of the parasites. Rape, kale, cabbage, and
turnips add to the healthfulness and soundness as well as the
quality of the wool, and pumpkin seeds are among the best
vermifuges known. The owner who is to attain greatest success
with sheep will find it necessary to grow such supplementary
foods. They need not necessarily occupy extra land, as both
rape and pumpkins may be grown in the corn field and the
corn not be injured thereby ; or they may be grown similarly
to soiling crops for dairy cattle (page 220). There will be extra
labor connected with harvesting and feeding, but the ad-
vantage will pay many times over. It is these little things
that make sheep farming profitable.
The flock in winter
In winter the flock is entirely dependent on the care of the
owner, and it must receive more careful attention than during
the summer. This is the season of catarrhs, running at the nose,
inflammation, diarrhea, and the like. When convenient, the
change from the fields to the yards should be made gradually.
The flock should be yarded at night as soon as the pastures be-
come crisp from night frosts, as frosty forage is likely to lead to
digestive disorders. Hay should be provided in the lot, so that
the sheep will not go to pasture hungry in the forenoon. If on
permanent pasture or where there is much old grass, such yard-
ing is not so necessary, as the sheep will feed on the dead grass in
preference to the frosty succulent grass.
The winter ration. — The feeds that should enter into the
FEEDING SHEEP 887
winter ration will depend on the kind available. If convenient,
succulence of some kind should be provided. On farms where
there are silos, nothing is better than corn silage. In the absence
of silage, roots will serve, some sheep owners even preferring
roots to silage. The roots suggested for late fall use, such as
mangels and ruta-bagas, will serve admirably. When such suc-
culence is available at the time of changing from pasture to dry-
lot, the sheep will suffer no loss whatever. In the absence of
silage or roots, a little wheat bran, oats, linseed meal, or similar
grain should be fed, particularly to the ewes that are to lamb in
the spring. The advisability of feeding grain when succulence
is available will depend on the kind of dry forage being fed and
Fic. 126.—SoutHpown Lamps. A prize pen, owned by Chas. & Jas. Leet,
Mantua, Ohio.
on the use to which the lambs are to be put. If winter lambs
are desired, grain should be fed. On the other hand, if ewes are
not to lamb until time of going to grass, and the dry forage con-
sists of clover, alfalfa, or mixed hay, then the grain may be dis-
pensed with at least until the sheep show signs of falling off in
flesh. It may be of advantage to begin grain feeding four to
six weeks before lambing time.
Exercise. — In order to keep the sheep healthy and thrifty
they should take exercise daily. This often becomes a serious
problem in the cold climates when the ground is covered with
deep snow much of the winter season. It may be advisable to
388 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
remove the snow from parts of the lot and feed them some dry
forage in some spot not too near the winter quarters.
Care of the feet. — During the winter season when the sheep
are rather closely confined, it is important to watch the feet and
see that the toes do not grow out too long, as they very often do
at this season of the year. Long toes should be trimmed. The
aim in trimming should be to keep the feet natural, so that the
sheep stands squarely upon them. Lack of trimming is some-
times responsible for diseases of the feet. The toes may be
trimmed with a sharp knife, a chisel and block, or better still a
sharp hand pruning knife; take care not to cut them too short,
for if the quick is cut, the feet will get very sore and prove very
annoying. If the hind parts become foul tag as suggested on
page 383.
Bedding should be used liberally, otherwise the floors will be-
come damp and foulsmelling. Sheep lying on damp, filthy beds
are subject to the same ills as those exposed to draughts. Fresh
bedding is of greatest importance during the lambing season,
as damp, filthy quarters are particularly hurtful to lambs and will
soon prove fatal to them. At this time, fresh bedding should
be put down daily. This not only increases the healthfulness
of the sheep-fold, but increases the quantity of valuable ma-
nure as well.
FATTENING SHEEP
Feeding sheep to fatten them differs considerably from feeding
the flock in general or feeding for the production of wool; it
is somewhat similar to feeding cattle for the production of beef.
Growing winter lambs
In recent years a considerable demand has developed for
winter lambs, particularly in the eastern cities. Because of the
forced methods of feeding adopted in pushing the lambs forward
so as quickly to prepare them for market, they are spoken of as
FEEDING SHEEP 889
“hot-house”’ lambs, a term which has misled many as to the con-
ditions under which the animals are raised. The high price that
these lambs command on the market has led many to think
the demand only a fad that will soon pass. While the de-
mand could no doubt be oversupplied, it has managed to take
care of the supply and bids fair to continue to do so for some time
to come, particularly all that can be supplied from Christmas to
Easter. Many sheep owners have not attempted to raise winter
lambs because they did not know where to find a market, not
realizing that such lambs are a regular product upon the
provision market and can be sold through any commission
merchant. Some persons have not gone into the business be-
cause they think it difficult to prepare the lambs for market;
but this is an easy task, as any one can prepare a carcass who
is willing to exercise a little care.
Foundation stock. — There are two characteristics that the
foundation flock must possess for the production of winter lambs:
the ewes must drop the lambs in the fall and early winter, and
this is perhaps the greatest difficulty in winter lamb production;
and the ewes must be good milkers in order to nourish the
lambs well, as they should weigh fifty to sixty pounds at ten to
twelve weeks of age. All things considered, it is thought best
that the sheep composing the foundation flock, for the produc-
tion of winter lambs, be grades rather than pure-bred animals.
The mutton breeds would, of course, produce the best lambs,
but they will not breed at the proper season. The Merino
bears lambs fairly early, but the lambs grow too much wool
before they have size or are fat enough for the market.
The best plan is to choose a grade Merino flock. Put it on
good pasture and mate the ewes with a good, vigorous pure-bred
Horned-Dorset ram. The lambs of this mating will probably be
dropped in January, February, and March. This crop will come
too late for winter lambs. The ewe lambs should be saved for
breeding and the others may be fattened for spring lambs. The
890 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
grade flock should be shorn rather early, in March or before if the
quarters can be well protected for a few days. In May turn the
sheep to pasture and in addition feed considerable stimulating
grain, such as ground oats, or bran, and, at the same time, mate
to a thrifty, vigorous pure-bred Horned-Dorset ram by turning
the ram to the flock each morning, as suggested on page 407,
Fic. 127.—Suropsyuire Ram ‘“ Davison’s AMBITION.’’ Champion, Interna-
tional Live Stock Show, 1909. Owned by Dr. G. H. Davison, Millbrook,
N. Y.
The Shropshire Down breed of mutton sheep originated in the county of Shrop-
shire, England. This breed issimilar to the Southdown, but somewhat larger,
the standard weight for mature rams being 225 pounds, with 150 for the ewes.
It, also, is noted for its early maturing qualities and delicious mutton.
As wool-producers this breed excels the Southdowns, bearing from 5 to 10
pounds of medium-length wool. This breed is extremely popular in the United
States.
rather than letting him run with them all the time, and at the
same time marking the ewes served for identification. This
system of mating should result in the lambs being dropped in
October, November, and December. It is not considered a
FEEDING SHEEP 3891
good plan to have the lambs dropped before the ewes go into
winter quarters, as the lambs then entirely escape danger from
stomach worms and as a rule can be taught to eat grain much
younger.
After purchasing the grade Merino flock, some persons prefer
to give the ewes a year’s rest, shearing them in March and begin-
ning the breeding in May. This has the advantage that the
ewes are not nursed down in flesh as a result of raising a crop of
lambs. Whatever system is used, the ewes must have weaned
their lambs sometime previous to going to pasture, they must
have been shorn for some time, and they must be gaining in
flesh while mating. With such a flock thus treated, there
should be no difficulty in having the lambs dropped in the
late fall and early winter months.
The winter quarters for winter-lamb production. — In the discus-
sion on care and management will be found a statement of the
method and equipment for housing sheep (page 433). The term
“hot-house” lambs has led many to think that extra warm
quarters must be provided, some thinking that artificial heat
must be used, others that the roof or side of the sheep barn
should be of glass construction resembling a green-house. Not
only is such extra equipment unnecessary, but if the quarters
are too warm, neither the ewes or lambs will thrive. On the
other hand, winter lambs cannot be grown if the ewes are ex-
posed to the rain, snow, or storm. The winter quarters must
be well lighted, well ventilated, and free from draughts. There
should be sufficient window space to make the quarters light
and comfortable. Artificial heat is entirely unnecessary.
Feeding the lambs. — The ewes should be fed milk-producing
foods, such as wheat bran, silage, and clover hay, in order that
the milk flow be large, but in addition to the dam’s milk the lambs
should be taught to eat grain as soon as they will take to it.
Some lambs will begin to nibble grain when only ten days or two
weeks old, and they should be encouraged to do so. A lamb
3892 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
creep should be provided. This‘ creep” consists of a little pen
with openings so small that the lambs may pass in and out at
will, but through which the sheep cannot pass. These openings
may be made of vertical slats placed seven inches apart, and the
edges of the slats rounded. These must be conveniently placed
for the lambs or they will fail to find them, as the young lamb is
largely a victim of circumstances. The grain boxes within the
creep should be flat-bottomed and placed rather low. The first
feed put into the trough may be wheat bran, to which has been
added a little brown sugar. At first it may be necessary to aid the
lambs by placing some of this mixture on their lips. The troughs
Fic. 128.— Cuampion SHROPSHIRE Ewes. An almost perfect flock. Owned
by Dr. G. H. Davison, Millbrook, N. Y.
must be cleaned daily and the food kept fresh. After the lambs
have learned to eat grain, the following mixtures should be used:
50 parts of cracked corn, 50 parts of wheat bran, and 10 parts of
oil meal, coarse ground. This may he varied by adding oats,
barley, or gluten feed as circumstances demand. A fresh sup-
ply should be provided each day. Lambs thus cared for should
grow rapidly and fatten at the same time, so that by the time
they are ten to twelve weeks of age they will weigh from 50 to 60
pounds, when they should be slaughtered. The most desirable
weights vary somewhat on the different markets, and the owner
FEEDING SHEEP 893
should find out what weights are mostly in demand. The weight
demanded will range from 45 to 65 pounds, — not more, as they
will not sell for hot-house lambs if larger. The lambs must in
all cases be fat, as it will not pay to ship a thin carcass to a
winter-lamb market.
Dressing winter lambs. — Dressing winter lambs requires
some skill, — not more, however, than dressing a squirrel, — and
any one can develop the required skill after carefully reading the
directions and practicing on a few lambs. The methods vary
somewhat, but the following is as simple and efficient as any:
Suspend the lamb by
fastening a rope around
the hind legs so that
the head comes within
a foot of the floor.
~ With a sharp-pointed
knife sever the artery
and vein in the neck
close above the head.
It is very important
to have the lamb thor-
oughly bled out:
Bright red blood gives
this assurance. It is ———
well to hold the head, Fic. 129.— Drussinc Hot-nouse Lams, sHow-
otherwise the lamb will ive Mernops oF REMOVING THE HIDE FROM
throw blood over the 7" ABDOMEN.
operator and may soil the wool. As soon as the lamb ceases to
struggle, remove the head. This can be easily done if severed
at a vertebra. Place the carcass on a table. Remove the
front feet and cannons at the knee. Loosen two or three
inches of hide along the front of the cannons to cover the joints.
Remove the hind feet at the pastern joints. Slit the skin from
the tail to the brisket. Loosen and remove the skin along the
3894 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
floor of the abdomen and for
about four inches up the inside
of the hind-quarters (Fig. 129).
Suspend the carcass by the
hind legs. Open the lamb
and carefully remove the caul
fat, —a sheet of fat surround-
ing the intestines. Save the
caul fat to cover the openings,
and if the weather is cold, put
in warm water. Remove the
intestines, stomach, and esoph-
agus, and in warm weather
the liver, heart, and lungs,
though these may be left in
when the weather is cold. Pro-
cure two spreaders or back-sets
twelve or fourteen inches long,
depending on the size of the
lamb. These back-sets should
have shoulders about one inch
up from the pointed end to
prevent them from entering
the flesh too far. Insert one
in the outer and upper part
of the hind flank, then cross
the back diagonally, entering
the opposite side nearly or
quite as far forward as the
aah chest. The second crosses the
Fic. 130.—Hor-novuse Lame pressep first at right angles across the
AND READY FOR WRAPPING. back. Carefully spread the
caul fat over all exposed flesh, holding in place by means of
tooth picks (Fig. 180). Make small slits in it over the kidneys
FEEDING SHEEP 3895
and pull them through.
Hang the carcass in a cool
place for twelve to twenty-
four hours. As soon as the
animal heat is given off wrap
in two separate wrappers.
The first may be of cheese-
cloth or muslin, which should
be drawn tight to prevent
soiling when handling. The
outer covering may be of bur-
lap or sacking and must be
well secured. The lamb is
now ready for consignment to
a provision commission mer-
chant (Fig. 181). When the
lambs are to be shipped a long
distance, they are often crated,
placing three carcasses in a
crate. In warm weather ice
may be put between the
lambs but never in them.
The lambs should be dressed,
as they are ready for market,
preferably sending a few each
week during the season which
tuns from Christmas to
Easter.
After the lamb is removed,
the udder of the ewe must be
watched closely and not per- yg, 131,—Hor-nousz Lame WRAPPED
mitted to spoil. If necessary, AND READY FOR SHIPMENT.
remove the milk by hand for a few days.
396 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Growing spring lambs
Because of the difficulty in getting ewes to conceive suffi-
ciently early for the growing of winter lambs and the disad-
vantages of dressing and marketing, many sheep owners prefer
to grow spring lambs. There is much profit in selling lambs
afoot in May and June. Usually the highest prices are obtained
in June, as at this time the supply of winter-fed western lambs
is exhausted and the summer-fed lambs are not yet on the
market in any considerable number.
The foundation stock and the management should be much
the same as that suggested in growing winter lambs. The
ewes should be mated in August, September, and October, as the
lambs should be dropped in late January, February, and March,
not later than March. The lambs should be provided with
creeps and fed grain in the same manner as advised for winter
lambs; for if they are to be marketed in a thick fat condition at
the age of four or five months, they must be forced from the
beginning. It is rather difficult to fatten lambs for the spring
market if they once lose their baby fat. Lambs thus cared for
should be able to make a vigorous start before grass comes and
be in condition to make the most of it when turned to pasture.
Lambs dropped in February and thus cared for should make
a weight of approximately eighty pounds by the middle of June.
As this is the weight demanded of this class of mutton, it should
be the aim of the sheep owner to supply it. When there are
several lambs or when one is located convenient to market, it
may be advisable to make two drafts, selling the larger and fatter
ones say the first of June and the remainder of the lamb flock
the latter part of the month.
Feeding lambs in the fall
Lambs may be fattened at almost any season, but ordinarily
the fattening period extends from September until the follow-
FEEDING SHEEP 397
ing May. Fall feeding is extensively practiced both by the
farmer who raises his own lambs and by the sheep feeder who
buys his lambs either locally or from the western range and
fattens them in seventy to one hundred days. Fall feeding is
practical on pasture, either permanent or sown, when supple-
mented by feeding grain. The various pastures that may be’
used for this purpose are the same as those suggested for the
flock in summer (pages 382 to 386).
Getting the lambs on full feed. — Much care must be exercised
in getting a flock of lambs on full feed, particularly if they are
from the range and not familiar with grain. Furthermore,many
of the plants used in fall pastures for fattening lambs are likely to
produce bloating, and for thisreason much care must be exercised
in turning the flock to pasture, particularly if the grass is com-
posed of alfalfa, clover, or rape plants. These are most ex-
cellent crops for fattening lambs in the fall, but due care must
be exercised in turning on the sheep. The grain should be fed
sparingly at first and gradually increased from day to day until
the full amount is being fed. Most satisfactory results can be
obtained by feeding the grain twice daily. Care must be ex-
ercised never to feed more than the lambs will consume; or if
there is any grain remaining, it should be removed before a new
supply is placed in the troughs.
.Lambs thus cared for should make rapid and economical
gains. Under such feeding, 60-pound lambs should attain a
weight of 85 pounds in 75 days and be sufficiently fat
for the market. Thus, lambs put on feed September 1
would be ready for the market November 15. As suggested in
the case of spring lambs, when the flocks are sufficiently large
and the sheep feeder is located conveniently near to market, it
will, as a rule, pay to make two drafts, selling the fattest at the
end of about 75 days and the remainder of the flock in 90 to
100 days. This keeps the two flocks more even and avoids
holding those already fat for the slower maturing ones to
398 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
fatten, and avoids selling a few thin in flesh after the majority
have fattened.
Fattening lambs in winter
By iar the greater number of lambs are fattened during the
winter season. The methods employed differ fundamentally
in different localities. In the West little or no attention is paid
to shelter, and exercise is considered essential; in the corn-belt
much attention is given to the shelter, at least to protect the
lambs from the rain, snow, and storm, and to provide them dry
footing and. exercise; in the East, where lamb-feeding is
rapidly developing, shelter is considered essential, though
exercise under the methods employed is likely to prove fatal,
and the sheep must be kept absolutely quiet or trouble will result.
Feeding in the semiarid West.— Large flocks of lambs are
shipped from the ranges to points where alfalfa hay is available.
Here the sheep are confined in corrals which are divided into
lots containing approximately 500 head. No shelter is provided
other than that furnished by the fence or the alfalfa hay which
is often stacked near by. Rain and snow storms are rather in-
frequent, and it is felt that the loss occasioned by the lack of
protection is less expensive than shelter. These corrals provide
accommodations for many thousands of sheep. To save labor
in feeding, the lots are arranged in rows with feeding lanes be-
tween. In these lanes the hay is stacked and fed out each
morning and evening. Sometimes the fence has a space be-
tween the first and second boards large enough for the sheep
to introduce its head, and the rack is arranged on the stack side
of the fence. In each lot are placed rows of grain troughs
sufficient to accommodate the entire flock. These lots are pro-
vided with water, often pumped by windmills, though sometimes
by hand or with an engine. Salt is kept before the animals at
all times. In this way five men can care for 10,000 or 12,000
head of sheep.
FEEDING SHEEP 399
Feeding in the corn-belt.— In the corn-belt the practice is
entirely different; in the West sheep are fed in larger numbers
and by few men, while in the corn-belt few sheep are fed by
great numbers of farmers. Here feed, both grain and hay, is
very abundant, but the climate is the objectionable element.
Sheep need dry coats and dry footing. The dripping skies of
the corn-belt makes this impossible without providing shelter
from the rain and snow. Hence, before attempting to feed
lambs ample provision must be made to shelter them.
Much care should be exercised in getting the lambs on full
feed. The lambs may be fed hay liberally, but the grain must
be fed sparingly, beginning with one-fourth pound to the head
daily and gradually increasing the ration to one pound by
the time the sheep have been on feed three weeks, and
continuing until they are getting all they will consume. The
lambs should not be fed more grain than they will clean up at
each feeding. As the grain is increased, less hay will be required.
Lambs thus cared for should make a gain of 25 to 30 pounds
in 100 days, when they should be fat and ready for the
market. If desired, two droves of lambs may be fed each
winter, purchasing the first drove in November and fattening
by the last of January, immediately purchasing a second and
fattening by the first of May. This system is extensively
practiced when feeds are comparatively low and mutton high.
Feeding in the East. — During the recent high price of mutton
many lambs have been fed in the eastern part of the United
States, and the methods are peculiar to the East.
The feeding pens are usually rectangular in shape, wilh hay-
racks and grain-troughs the entire length of either side. These
grain-troughs are protected with vertical slats so arranged that
there is just room for one lamb to feed in each opening, and there
are just as many of these openings as lambs and not one more.
When the lambs are feeding, they are packed solid along either
side of the pen. The space allowed each pen is approximately
400 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
twice the room on which they stand while feeding. Water and
salt are supplied in this pen, and the lambs do not leave it
from the time they are put in until they are finished and ready
for the market. The lambs are put on full feed in about three
weeks and forced until fat.
fe PsN ome epenec A
Fig. 132. — HampsuirE Ram. Champion, International Live Stock Show, 1908.
Photograph from National Stockman and Farmer.
The native home of the Hampshire Down breed of mutton sheep is in Hampshire
County, England. This breed is noted for its large size and its mutton quali-
ties. Mature rams should weigh about 240 pounds and the ewes 180 to 200
pounds. In general appearance this breed is somewhat coarser than either
the Southdown or the Shropshire, but in quality of the mutton is not inferior
to either. As a wool producer the breed does not rank high, the average yield
being about seven pounds, which is inferior in quality to wool of either the
Southdown or the Shropshire.
Two factors deserve special attention, and they are at vari-
ance with accepted ideas. First, there must be no more feeding
space than lambs; and second, the lambs must be prevented from
being excited. A violation of either of these will prove fatal in
FEEDING SHEEP 401
this method of feeding. Formerly those engaged in lamb feed-
ing lost many lambs without apparent cause. They were the
thriftiest and fattest lambs, and the loss was often very heavy,
for when one lamb died, others were sure to follow. This led to
experimentation which brought out the following facts: the lambs
died of apoplexy, the result of overeating or of excitement.
When one lamb died, this left an extra feed space, another lamb
overate and died of the same cause. When the feed space was
closed as a lamb was removed and the amount fed was cut
down accordingly, and when the animals were kept perfectly
free from excitement, no fatalities occurred. In all other re-
spects, such as the feeds used, watering, salting, and the like,
the lambs were treated the same as suggested for corn-belt
feeding.
SAMPLE RATIONS FOR FATTENING SHEEP
The following rations are collected from various sources, to
furnish a guide in determining the kind and amount of feed that
should be allowed fattening lambs. In all cases the rations are
calculated for 100 head:
Foop PER
Weicut Ration Pounp Gain
OF
ike Grain * Dry Forage Grain hoe
92 lb. corn 110 lb. mixed hay 4.7
55 Ib. | 13 Ib. oats 112 lb. roots 4.7 5.01
49 |b. bran 147 Ib. hay 5.4
56 Ib. | 37 Ib. linseed meal | 143 Ib. roots 4.5 5.31
37 lb. cotton-seed
meal
140 lb. speltz 3.5 4.2
111 Ib. | 10 Ib. bran 180 lb. clover hay
110 Ib. | 140 lb. soy beans 3.5 4.7
10 Ib. bran 180 Ib. clover hay
1 Roots.
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
WEIGHT Ration Foop per Pounp Gain
ene Grain Dry Forage Grain Dry Forage
93 Ib. corn
109 Ib. | 45 lb. gluten 3.2 4.2
10 lb. bran 180 lb. clover hay
109 Ib. | 135 lb. corn 180 lb. clover hay 3.2 4.2
10 Ib. bran
82 lb 149 lb. shelled corn | 104 lb. clover hay 4.8 3.3
80 lb 81 Ib. shelled corn | 107 lb. clover hay 6.4 4.2
81 lb. bran
85 Ib 64 lb. shelled corn
64 lb. wheat 124 lb. clover hay 5.1 5.1
83 lb 164 Ib. oats 140 lb. clover hay 5.2 4.5
100 lb. roots 3.1!
83 Ib 132 lb. corn 110 lb. clover hay 4.8 3.2
33 Ib. oil meal
76 Ib 87 Ib. shelled corn | 183 lb. corn fodder 5.3 5.8
87 lb. peas
76 Ib 154 Ib. shelled corn | 188 lb. corn fodder 5.6 6.8
89 lb 94 1b. shelled corn | 95 1b. hay 49 2.5
94 lb. oats
74 Ib 211 Ib. wheat | 72 Ib. timothy hay 7.2 2.5
screenings
76 Ib 189 lb. barley 72 1b. timothy hay 5.8 2.2
14 lb. oil meal
62 Ib 97 lb. cotton-seed | 97 lb. cotton-seed 3.4 3.4
meal hulls
89 Ib 67 lb. corn 290 lb. alfalfa hay 2:2 10.0
80 Ib 80 lb. corn Pasture 1.7
81 lb 78 lb. oats Pasture 1.9
80 Ib 77 |b. barley Pasture 2.0
75 lb 65 lb. corn Pasture 1.5
24 lb. oats
1 Roots.
CHAPTER XVIII
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP
THERE are fewer sheep bred in America than of any other of
our farm animals. This is due in a large measure to the average
American farmer’s lack of knowledge in propagating sheep.
He is wont to treat them as swine, and under such care sheep fail
to thrive. Sheep breeding is a very profitable branch of farm-
ing in England and France, where entire farms are devoted to
the industry. These farms are profitable because in charge of
a competent flock-master, who does no other work, but makes
a very careful study of the needs of his flock and supplies
every want. On many of these farms the soil was formerly very
poor, but through sheep farming they have been restored to
fertility, and at present many of them grow very luxuriant crops
of forage.
In America conditions are somewhat different, though there
is no reason why our cheap pasture lands cannot be made to
yield a handsome profit if slowly converted into sheep pastures.
Lack of suitable labor is the greatest drawback to sheep farm-
ing in America. We have no flock-masters, as do the English,
and the average American seems to be too nervous and unsteady
to tend sheep with perfect assurance of success. Properly
cared for, sheep are among the most profitable of farm animals,
and restore fertility to the land as do no other animals. Every
farm devoted to general agriculture should possess a small flock.
While they will need considerable care, on such a farm, the food
they consume will be largely that which otherwise would be
wasted.
403
404 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
At present, the farmer should start with a small flock, increas-
ing it gradually as he learns its habits and needs. The unex-
perienced should begin with a grade flock of ewes, which should
be mated to a pure-bred ram. ‘The sire is as important in the
flock as in the herd of dairy cattle. Thesecond year afew pure-
bred ewes, of the same breeding as the ram, may be purchased;
and with these as a basis, start a pure-bred flock. Some of the
best flocks in America have been started in this way.
PLAN OF BREEDING
A clearly defined plan should be outlined before the farmer
makes an attempt at breeding sheep. The intending sheep
breeder should make a careful study of successful sheep farms,
noting the conditions wherein his differs, and the modifications
that must be adopted. The farmer who rushes into sheep
breeding blindly because the price of wool or mutton seems
to warrant it is likely to pay dearly for his experience.
Coéperative breeding. — The value of united effort cannot be
overestimated in breeding sheep. This does not mean that
the farmers should be partners from a financial point of view,
but all should help to advance the interests of each other’s flock.
Free conversation on all matters relating to the flock will prove
of common advantage; the owner will improve in sheep knowl-
edge, and the flock improve in excellency. There are many
things that a few sheep breeders would be able to do that one
alone would hardly undertake, and not least among these is
the purchasing of a pure-bred ram of much excellency. The
influence of such a ram is left in the flocks of several breeders,
and uniformity is promoted. The old saying, “in unity there
is strength,” applies to the sheep industry, as to others.
CHOOSING BREEDING STOCK
In choosing the foundation flock, the farmer must have in
mind the demand that he means to supply, wool or mutton, and
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 405
if mutton, whether he means to raise hot-house lambs or older
mutton. He should bear in mind that in general “like pro-
duces like” and that ‘blood will tell.” This applies to the
ewes as well as to the ram. Bad qualities of one are as likely
to appear in the lambs as bad qualities of the other. Even after
using the greatest care in finding the breeding stock, the breeder
must be prepared to expect many lambs inferior to both parents.
The type or breed should depend on the individual preference
of the breeders. The advisability of selecting wool or mutton
sheep will depend on the conditions. Mutton is preéminently
adapted to the corn-belt, although a great many wool sheep are
found there. Where hot-house and early spring lambs are to be
produced, Merino and Horned-Dorset blood must predominate.
Where the grazing land is much broken, some breed other than
the pure mutton is likely to give best results. For such lands
a good grazing breed is demanded. Whatever breed is chosen,
there should be no further change,
for it is indiscriminate and zigzag =
crossing that has produced our ' »
present common stock. aw
Uniformity. —In choosing the
foundation flock of breeding ewes,
no single factor is of greater im-
portance than uniformity. The
ewes should be uniform in type, Pea) ed ee
weight, quality, and breeding. Champion, International Live
Such flock wll cost slightly more Sk Son, 1908 Phosroh
than one not uniform in these
characters, but will prove much the more profitable in the
long run. As we have already observed in the discussion of
mutton production, uniformity is a market requirement, and
when it is wanting in the breeding ewes, it will also be lacking
in the crop of lambs. When one is producing wool, an even, uni-
form clipping is to be desired. Furthermore, if the breeder
\
406 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
wishes to sell his surplus ewes for breeding purposes, they will
command a much higher price if uniform in all features, both
because of their intrinsic worth, and because of their improved
general appearance.
The ram
The ram is by far the most important member of the flock.
Successful sheep breeders rely on him for much of the improve-
ment of the flock. What has been said about the stallion (page
102) and the bull (page 244) also applies here.
The ewe flock
If the farmer is just beginning, the best time to purchase the
foundation ewes is in the early fall; the best place to purchase
is in the locality in which the flock is to be kept. Breeding ewes
on the large markets are often discarded from other flocks or
from the western ranges. Such ewes are usually sent to market
because of their age or failure to breed, and are to be avoided
when possible. Local ewes will give much better satisfaction
when they can be procured; they are adapted to climatic
conditions and parasite dangers. Western ewes do not resist
parasites as do native ewes. By purchasing the flock in the
early fall, the new owner has time to become familiar with it
before winter; he can see to the mating, and thus know exactly
what time to expect the lambs.
In choosing foundation ewes, too much attention cannot be
given the individual animals. They should each be carefully
considered. If purchased on a large market, the condition of
their teeth should be especially noted, as a ewe without teeth,
even though she breeds, is likely to give much trouble at lamb-
ing time. Moderately heavy fleeces are to be preferred, as they
indicate stronger sheep-and greater feeding capacity. When
possible the condition of the udder should be noted, as many
ewes have spoiled udders and imperfect teats.
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 407
THE BREEDING OF THE EWES
Productive period. — There is a strong tendency on the part
of beginners to breed yearling lambs, particularly if they are well
grown. The yearling ewe should not be bred, as the drain on
her system weakens her condition and leaves her an easy prey
to parasite infection. Furthermore, if breeding the yearling
is persisted in, it will lessen the size of the ewe. The ewe
may remain in the breeding flock as long as she continues to
breed true. She will be unreliable after her teeth drop out, as
it is difficult for her to nourish the fetus in winter when dry
forage is the main feed. Unless a valuable ewe, a better plan
is to fatten her as soon as she begins to lose her teeth. Ewes
vary widely in the age at which they stop breeding, some being
unreliable at four or five years, while others will continue to
breed until eight years, and even longer.
Season to breed. — The season to mate the ewes will depend
on the time the lambs are wanted. In this country, on the
average farm, the breeding season begins in September or
October. To encourage breeding early, the ewes are often fed
a very stimulating ration, a practice sometimes spoken of as
“flushing” ; and some owners hold the ewes while the ram
serves them, then in a few days the ewes come around natu-
rally, when the ram serves them again in the natural way.
When spring lambs are to be produced, the mating must he
done in August, September, and October, as the lambs should
be dropped in January, February, and March. To get the lambs
to mate in August requires similar treatment to that suggested
for winter lambs (page 389). On the average farm the mating
should all be done before Christmas, as lambs dropped after the
middle of May are not likely to thrive without much extra care.
Method of mating. — The éommon practice is to let the ram
run with the flock during the breeding season. This is not a wise
practice. A better plan is to keep him away from the ewes,
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
408
6% | T€ 6¢ | TE 246/18] 2e | T€ LG | 18 26 | 18 66
8G | 08} 82 | 0€) 8B | O08] 9% | OF} 96 | OF | 9S | O8| 9% | O& | 9B | OF | 9S | Of] 92 | OF 83
46 | 66) L4G | 66] 43 | GZ] SS | 6] GS | 6B} GS | GZ} Ge | 6@| GS | 6B) Go | 6) Ga | 6@ LB
96 | 83} 9S | 8S] 93 | 8S] Fe | 82] FS | 8S) FF | 8B} FE | BZ] FE | BU] FZ | 8B] Fe | 8S] Le | 8B] 9a
GS | 46] Go | 2G] 3% | 4a) SS | 4a] SS | 4G} ES | Lo] SS | La] SS | La] SS | 4a] G% | 42) 9% | Le) Go
¥Z [9S] FO | 9G{ FZ | 9G] G | 9S] GS | 9S} BG | 9B} 2 | 9Z| ZS | 9B] ZG | 9B] 2 | 9G] Se | 92] Fe
& | SG] & | Se] & | Se} Te |}Ss@} 12 | se|] 12 | Ss} 1 | Se] 12 | Ge} 16 |} Se] 12 | Se] Fe | Se] ge
SZ | FZ] GS | FS] BS | HB] OF | FZ} OF | HZ} OF | FB} OS | FZ] OS | FZ] OS | HZ) OZ | FS] ES | FB] Ze
I | 8%} 1@ |G] 13 | &] GE | €e} GT | &s] GL | S|] GL | SS] 6 | €s}] GL | ES] GI | &Z] a | eB] Ts
02 | 22] 03 | 2] OG | 2] ST | 2] SI | Gs} ST | os} SI | ee] ST | a] ST | ss] BI | aa} 12 | a] o@
61 | 12} 6f | To}] Gf | TZ} 2T | Te] 2ZT | 1} 2ZT | 1} AT | te] 2 | 1a] 2£t | 13} 2T | ie} Of | 12] 6T
Sl |}Oa|] 8f | Oa] St | OG] OT | Oa} OL | OZ] OT | OZ] OT | OS} OT | 0%] OT | Of] 9T | 08] 6I | 08] 8ST
2T | 6t] 20 | 6L] £0 | GE} SE | GT} ST | GL] ST | GL] SE |] 6L] ST | GT] ST | 6L;y ST | 61] 8T |] 61) ZT
OT | ST] Of | SL} OT | ST] FL | SL] FL | SE] FL | SL] FL | 8ST] FL | ST] FL | ST] FL | 8T] 2r | ST] OT
ST | ZT] St | 24T] St | ZT] St | ZT] €T | AT] ST | ZT) ST | ZT] ST | 4T] ST | ZT] St | Zt] OT | ZT] ST
$I |; OT] FE | OT) FL | OL] Ot | OT] ST | OT] St | OT] Vt | OT] SE | OT} St | OT] St | OT} St | OT] FT
SI | ST] €f | ST] ef | St] TT | ST] Tt | St] Tt | Sst }| TL | St} Tt | St} Tf | st] Tf | st] Fl | St] gt
ot | FL] Gt | FL] SF | FL] OF | FL | OT | FL} OT | FT} OT | FL] OT | FT] OT | FLT] OT | FT] EL | FLY] at
It | st} If | er} Tf | st] 6 st] 6 el} 6 sl] 6 eI} 6 el] 6 el] 6 Sl] al | et} It
Ot | et{ OT | et} OT | @t] 8 as 8 er | 8 aL} 8 er] 8 ot} 8 el] 8 él} If | et] OT
6 IT] 6 It {| 6 IT] 2 IL 4 Tt] 2 IT} 2 It] 2 IT] 42 IT] 2 Il] Of | IT] 6
8 or] 8 or} 8 or] 9 or] 9 oly 9 or} 9 or] 9 or] 9 or}; 9 OL} 6 or; 8
Z 6 Z 6 ZL 6 g 6 ¢ 6 Si 6 ¢ 6 g 6 ¢ 6 g 6 8 6 Z
9 8 9 8 9 8 4 8 ¥ 8 4 8 ‘7 8 ¥ 8 v 8 t 8 Z 8 9
g Z g Z g Z € ZL € 4 € Z € Z € Z € Z € Z 9 Z ¢
¥ 9 ¥ 9 P 9 z 9 rd 9 z 9 & 9 4 9 id 9 z 9 S 9 4
€ ¢ € ¢ € S I s T S Tt g T G. T g I g T ¢ ‘4 g €
@ ¥ 4 4 rd be | 49F ‘UB len “AON “po “dag ‘any g 4 &
T € T g T € Tg |b Tg | ¥ og | F Té | % of | % TE | F T€ | % z € T
ABT “aidy “TBAT of | € og | € 6% |e of | 6% | € og |e og | & I @ jeune
Og 13 I |@ 83 | 6% | 3 6% |S 83 1% 66 | 2 82 | 3 66 1% 6% | @ | Aime Té
6@ | T oe | T 46/1 8% | T 8% | 1 46 \T 8B | T 46/1 83 | T 86 | T og | T 0g
> ly zl ajolelezlu0lelzitsl ola] we > |p] o a |g
SEI RIS) FEF IZ 2 le] Sle) 2 (212 12] 2/2] ELE |e]
Il
“ave | AQ OM IONDHS
SUUAN]OO sTqNop oY} Ul FYSI oy} UO Suqurey jo ayeqy °7 Je] OY} WO doTAIOS Jo aR
shvp QST ams —wo103saB fo porsad burnoys ajqv 7,
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 409
bringing them to him each morning while it is cool. The ewes
should be placed in a small pen and the ram turned in, when he
will single out those ready to be mated. As soon as mated,
the ewe should be marked and placed in a quiet pen, where she
should remain for about two days before returning to the flock.
Fic. 134.—CuHampion Oxrorp Ram. Photograph from National Stockman
and Farmer.
The Oxford Down breed of mutton sheep originated in Oxford County, Eng-
land. This breed is similar to the Hampshire except in size, when it occupies
first rank, rams weighing 275 pounds and the ewes 200 pounds. When large
mutton is desired, this breed is unexceled. In wool production it excels the
Hampshires, shearing from 5 to 10 pounds of combing wool.
One service is sufficient. The ram will search out another, and
she should be treated likewise. The ram should not be per-
mitted to serve more than four in asingle morning; if more are
ready, return them to him in the evening. All ewes that are
410 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
served in the same week should receive a similar mark. Those
served one week may be marked on the back, or top of head,
with red paint, the second with black, those served during the
third week with green, and so on, using a different color each
week. By this method one can tell the week the ewe was
served, when the lamb may be expected, and when the entire
flock of ewes has been mated.
Managing the ram. — During the day the ram should be kept
in a quiet cool place, and out of sight of the ewe flock. He should
be fed liberally on stimulating food, such as oats, bran, and
clover or alfalfa hay. In the closed season, when not in use,
he should have the run of a paddock. In summer this should
contain sufficient grass for much of his feed, although he should
be fed grain in addition. In winter he should be treated much
as the flock, but kept in a quiet place and away from all un-
necessary noise and excitement.
The pregnant ewe. — The proper care of the ewe flock during
pregnancy will do much to lessen the difficulties at parturition
time and subsequently. The ewes must be kept in fair flesh,
neither too fat nor too thin. The wool deceives, and one is likely
to think the ewes in good condition when in reality they may
be thin. Being thin, the ewe has no milk, and will not own
the lamb, which must be raised by hand,—a very difficult
task, and entirely impracticable when there are many lambs.
On the other hand, if the ewes are fed abundantly on oats,
wheat bran, and clover or alfalfa hay, the lambs get so large
that there is much trouble in giving birth. In such cases, ewes
are likely to perish at lambing time, although such as do
survive will raise thrifty, vigorous lambs. Better results will
follow taking a middle course.
The pregnant ewe flock should be liberally fed such foods as
will develop bone and muscle, but not to excess. If the dry
forage is cornstalks, then feed wheat bran and oats for the grain
part of the ration; and if the dry jodder is clover or alfalfa hay,
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 411
then cracked corn may constitute the grain. If at all possible,
succulent food, either roots or silage, should be provided, as
such food serves to keep them in good physical condition, and to
encourage the flow of milk.
Fic. 135.—Surrotk Ewer. A prize winner. Photograph from National Stock-
man and Farmer.
The Suffolk Down mutton sheep originated in Suffolk County, England. They
are similar in many respects to the Hampshires, though perhaps a little under
them in weight. They are inferior to the Hampshire as wool producers,
shearing only 5 to 7 pounds of fair-quality wool.
Lambing time. — The period of gestation in the ewe is popu-
larly placed at five months, more accurately 150 days (page
408). Previous to the lambing time the sheep owner should
make ready for this eventful season. The ewes should be neatly
tagged, all wool being removed from the udder, as otherwise a
412 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
lamb might nurse a tag instead of a teat. A number of small
panels three feet high and four feet long, made from light wood,
should be provided. Two of these panels should be hinged
together like the letter L, so that when placed in the corner of
the barn they make a pen four feet square. Enough of these
should be provided so that a row of four-foot pens may be placed
along the side of the barn or shed. When not in use, these panels
may be folded up and laid away. As soon as a ewe has lambed,
she and her lamb should be placed in one of these small pens,
thus preventing the lamb from straying away, as it is very
likely to do if not restrained.
Ewes that have been well cared for during pregnancy are
likely to have a good supply of milk. They should be separated
from the flock at once, and given extra care. For a time they
should be sparingly fed on grain, as it is not considered best to
force the milk flow until the lambs are able to take care of it
without danger of digestive disorders, such as scouring. The
grain ration may consist of 50 parts chopped corn, 50 parts
wheat bravi, and 10 parts linseed meal. For dry forage, clover or
alfalfa hay is preferred, and if possible a small amount of silage
or roots should be fed, as in the case of the pregnant ewe.
Difficult parturition. — Ewes that are not properly fed during
pregnancy, and are thin and weak, often have difficulty in deliv-
ering the lamb. Young ewes, even though well kept, often have
trouble in dropping their first lamb. Whenever there is difficult
parturition, an attendant of experience should be near by to
render assistance. When the ewe shows signs of lambing, such
as teats filling out to end, the vulva swelling and becoming deeply
colored, and in some cases the ewe looking for her lamb before
it is born, she should be placed in a pen away from the flock, and
closely watched. In natural parturition the lamb comes with
front feet first and nose just between. Non-interference is
recommended until it is evident the ewe needs aid. The head
and shoulders are the hardest part to deliver, and after these are
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 418
through, there is not likely to be further trouble. In wrong
presentation it is usually necessary to place the parts in the
right position before the lamb can be delivered. The method is
much thesame as that suggested for difficult parturition in cattle
(see page 334). In such cases the attendant is fortunate if he
‘possesses a small hand, which should always be annointed or
greased before attempting to manipulate the parts. Forceps
are sometimes used, because of the small size of the opening,
but their manipulation requires some experience, though their
use is to be recommended in preference to permitting both ewe
and lamb to die unaided. In all manipulations extra care should
be taken, drawing gently, during labor pains only. The traction
should be downward as well as backward.
After delivery, if the ewe is weak, there is nothing better for
her than a drink of warm oatmeal gruel. If she will not drink
without aid, the gruel may be given from a long-necked bottle,
similar to drenching. This may be fed three or four times daily
until she gains strength.
THE LAMBS
Young lambs are very delicate things, and their treatment
the first few hours after birth will go a long way toward deter-
mining the kind of sheep they are to make. If they make their
appearance naturally, and get their first meal unaided, they are
not likely to give much trouble. Not all lambs are so fortunate.
Occasionally one is born without difficulty, but fails to establish
respiration, — does not breathe. In such cases assistance
must be given at once, or the young lamb perishes. Respiration
may be established by blowing into the mouth and nostrils,
by rubbing the lamb, or by gently slapping the sides with the
open hand. Other lambs may establish respiration, but be so
weak they cannot find the maternal teat, and perish in a few
hours if not assisted to the first meal.
The first meal. — It is very essential that the lamb get the first
414 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
milk of the ewe. When the lamb is too weak to move, it must be
assisted. To do this, gently set the ewe on her rump, as though
you were going to shear her. Place the lamb on its side under
her hind limbs, with one hand open the lamb’s mouth, and with
the other milk a small
©) quantity of the dam’s
| milk on the lamb’s
tongue, at the same
time placing the teat
into the lamb’s mouth,
f| when it will usually
2| begin to suck at once.
The ewe and lamb
should be watched
closely to see that the
lamb gets its second
meal, for it may be nec-
essary to aid it a second
time and even a third
(Fig. 136).
If the ewe perishes
during the parturition,
and there is no other
ewe the lamb can be put with, it will be necessary to give the
lamb its food from a bottle with rubber nipple. Modified cow’s
milk should be given. Feed the milk at about body tempera-
ture, 103° F., giving a very small amount, but often, every two
hours at first.
A chilled lamb. — Occasionally lambs get separated from their
dams and become chilled. This is very likely to happen unless
ewe and lamb are confined to a small space. A hot bath is the
best thing for a chilled lamb. Immerse the lamb in water as
hot as one can bear the hand. Keep the water hot by adding
more of it, taking care not to scald the lamb. When warmed,
Fic. 136.— MeEtHop oF TEACHING HELPLESS
Youne Lams to Sucx.
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 415
wipe dry with flannel cloth and restore to the dam. ° Aid the
lamb to get its first meal, and watch closely. Sometimes
a few drops of whisky in warm water is given chilled
lambs. It is surprising how much a hot bath will revive
cold wet lambs, and the method is worth trial, no matter how
limp the lamb. ,
It is a good plan to make some provision in advance, to care
for twin lambs; for often one will chill while the dam is nursing
the other. To do this provide a box, say two feet square and
eighteen inches deep, placing five inches of bran in it. While
the ewe is nursing one lamb, the other may be placed in the warm
bran, and all covered but the nose; this will keep the lamb warm
and help to dry it. After a time return to the ewe. In licking
off the bran she will own it. In the absence of the bran, a jug
of hot water may be placed in the box with the lamb, and a
blanket thrown over the top of the box.
A disowned lamb. —- Occasionally a young ewe, or an old one
very thin in flesh, will neglect or disown her lamb, and refuse
to care for it. Usually the ewe will take to the lamb if she is
held while the lamb nurses. To hold the ewe, a small stanchion
should be constructed. The stanchion may consist simply of
two green stakes, one and one-half inches in diameter, driven
into the ground and held at the top with a piece of rope or strap.
Sometimes a little meal placed on the lamb will induce the
ewe to nurse it and to claim it.
Occasionally a ewe will lose her lamb, and have her udder
filled with milk. At the same time, there may be other ewes in
the flock with twins, and it is a good plan togive one of the twins
to a ewe that has lost her lamb. Sometimes difficulty is experi-
enced in getting her to own it. The ewe may be placed in
a stanchion; if she still refuses, the lamb may be washed to re-
move its odor, then some of the ewe’s milk placed on its head
and back, at the same time placing some of the ewe’s milk on
her own nose, when she will often own the lamb.
416 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Lamb ills
Having made its appearance into the world, with or without
difficulty, the lamb is still subject to many troubles, chief of
which are diarrhea, constipation, sore mouth, and contagious
sore eyes. The extent of these troubles will depend largely on
the care given the ewe while she is nursing the lamb. By proper
management these troubles may be materially reduced, and in
many cases entirely avoided. The ewes should be kept in dry,
well ventilated, well lighted quarters, permitted to take exercise
in a dry or well bedded lot, and fed healthy, nutritious foods.
Constipation may be caused by the lamb getting too much
milk, or to difficult teething, in which latter case the gums
should be rubbed until the teeth are through. When constipa-
tion prevails, reduce the ewe’s grain ration. It may be necessary
partly to milk the ewe. If this does not afford relief, inject in
the rectum a small amount, not to exceed two ounces, of warm
water, to which a little glycerine has been added. Do not inject
too much, and do not use soap suds.
Diarrhea is often caused by overfeeding. When the lamb is
troubled with diarrhea or scouring, the treatment is to milk the
ewe, in part, remembering that the last milk is the richer in fat,
the element causing the disturbance. The ewe’s grain ration
should be reduced. If the ewes are running on pasture, feed some
timothy hay scattered on the grass or placed in racks conven-
iently located. If the scours persist, or if the discharge is white,
then a mild, healing laxative and tonic should be given. Mix
one-fourth ounce of common cooking soda, one ounce of sulfate
of magnesia, and as much ground ginger ascan be taken up on a
penny, with one-half pint of gruel, and give asa drench. In four
hours follow with a dose of one ounce of linseed oil.
“Pinning” is due to an accumulation of excrement at the
vent and tail in such a manner that the proper function of
the bowels cannot be performed. The treatment is to remove
the filth from the parts, and dust with powdered chalk.
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 417
Sore mouth.— Often lambs are troubled with a kind of conta-
gious sore mouth, which affects the teats of the ewes as well.
These sores form scabs along the edges of the mouth, and small
sores on the teats of the ewe. This often becomes so serious
as to interfere with the thrift of the lamb. The treatment is
to rub off the scabs and apply undiluted coal-tar dip, of which
there are many kinds on the market, such as are mentioned on
page 426. This will effect a complete cure.
Sore eyes. — Like sore mouth, this is a contagious disease;
and, while often interfering seriously with the thrift of the lambs,
is very easily cured. One of the coal-tar dips diluted with forty
parts water used as a wash will work a rapid cure. It is well
to see that a little of the diluted dip gets into the eyes; this may
start the tears, but it has the desired effect.
General care of lambs
Feeding the lambs. — Lambs early begin to nibble at hay and
grain, and advantage should be taken of this to encourage them
to eat solid food. During lambhood the digestion is more
thorough, and lambs make larger gains from a given quantity
of food, than at any other time. Encourage the lamb to eat
food. in addition to that furnished by the dam. Furthermore,
this extra feeding renders weaning a very easy task. At the
age of ten days to two weeks lambs will begin to eat grain, and
special provision should be made for them. For this construct
a creep (page 392). Grain should be put down twice daily,
and no more than the lambs will consume, as it will become
stale if left in the boxes. Lambs that have been well fed in
every way always mature to be much larger and stronger with
heavier fleeces than the others.
Weaning the lambs. — Weaning is more a matter of prepara-
tion than of actual separation. When lambs have been accus-
tomed to grain as suggested and when they can have access
to the creeps after the ewes are removed, there will be very little
25
418 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
shrinkage. When practicable, the ewes should be removed, leav-
ing the lambs in their accustomed place. All things considered,
it is better that the separation be complete. The ewes should
be carefully watched to see that none suffer from caked udder.
The age at which lambs should be weaned will depend on the
Fig. 137. —-Hornep Dorser Ram. First prize and champion ram at four State
Fairs, 1909. Owned at Heart’s Delight Farm, Chazy, N. Y.
The Horned Dorset, a native of Dorset County, England, while noted for the
production of both mutton and wool, is more especially noted for prolificacy
and the production of lambs at any season of the year. No breed excels the
Dorsets in the production of winter lambs. As w breed the animals are
hardy and good grazers. The rams average 200 pounds and the ewes 160
pounds. They shear from 5 to 10 pounds of wool. This breed is popular in
the United States,
object sought. When spring lambs are sought, the lambs may
run with the ewes until sold, but for other lambs it is better to
wean at three or four months of age. In such cases the lambs
should be weaned and removed from the old pastures before
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 419
there is danger of parasite infection. As soon as weaned, the
lambs should be placed on sown pastures as suggested in the
discussion on feeding the flock in summer (page 381). While
this is often neglected, it is very important, for after the young
lambs once become infected with germs, they are not likely to
thrive, and will prove a failure. Some forethought is required
in arranging and sowing the pastures, but if sheep farming is
to prove profitable, it is very essential, especially throughout
the corn-belt and those regions subject to parasites.
Castrating male lambs. — The male lambs should be castrated
at ten days to two weeks old, as they will suffer less if operated
at this time. Lambs intended for hot-house trade should not be
castrated, as the exposed testicles add to the appearance of the
carcass when on the market. The operation is not difficult,
and there is practically no danger of injuring the lamb. An
assistant should hold the lamb in such a position as to expose the
scrotum. Sever the end of the scrotum, pinch the testicle out,
and remove with the adhering cords. The scrotum may be
rubbed with a mixture of tallow and turpentine, half and half,
and the lamb returned to the dam.
Docking the lambs. — Unless the lambs are to be sent to market
under three months of age, they should have the tail removed.
The tail is of no use to the sheep and is likely to become foul.
Docked lambs thrive better than undocked, and they present a
fuller and squarer appearance. The lambs should be docked
at ten days to two weeks of age, or even younger if strong.
This may be done by severing the tail with a sharp knife, cut-
ting from the under side, by the use of a mallet and sharp chisel;
or, better still, by the use of docking pincers. These pincers
resemble the ordinary shoeing pincers and may be made by any
blacksmith. The edges should be rather thin, with the back
heavy in order to hold heat, for by heating them to redness and
then severing the tail the stump will bleed but little, whereas if
the tails of lambs in very good condition are severed with a
420 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
sharp instrument, such as a knife or chisel, a few of the lambs
may bleed to death. Bore a hole of sufficient size to admit the
lamb’s tail in a board, and when ready for use, heat the pincers
to redness, pull the tail through the hole to protect the lamb’s
rump, and sever the tail quickly.
Wing suggests to make the pincers large enough to admit a
grown ram’s scrotum, and when it is desired to castrate such a
ram, protect the body with a board as before and hold up the
scrotum and slowly sever with the pincers heated to redness.
Fig. 188.— MrtHop oF MARKING LamBs FOR FuTURE IDENTIFICATION, OR
UNTIL PERMANENT TaG8S CAN BE INSERTED INTO THE Ear.
Marking lambs. — To avoid errors and mistaken identity
the young lambs should be marked as soon as possible after
birth. Identifying unmarked lambs is a difficult task and one
which experienced flock-masters are often unable to do, hence
the importance of marking the young lamb. The young lamb’s
ear is very tender and will not carry a label until well grown,
so a temporary marking must be used. There are two
THE BREEDING OF SHEEP 421
successful methods of marking sheep,— by the use of water-
proof ink, and by notching the ear. Procure a small brush
and some waterproof ink, or regular sheep-marking fluid, and
place on the lamb the number on the ear tag of the ewe. If
this method is used, it will be necessary to renew the number,
as it will fade as the lamb grows.
Some persons prefer to notch the ear of the lamb, as it is
likely to be more permanent. The ordinary ear punch is
used to mark the ear, and the following method is as good as
any :— The first lamb would have one notch in the top of
the left ear next to the head; the second, one notch in the
middle; the third, one notch in-the end; the fifth, one notch
on the lower side, and so on, up to 400. Then when permanent
ear markings are desired, they may be inserted when convenient
and the record inserted in the flock book. (See Fig. 138.)
CHAPTER XIX
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP
Tue ability to care for sheep successfully is a faculty to be
increased and strengthened by careful study and experience.
All that may be written is of no consequence without practice.
The timidity of sheep, dainty appetites, inability to endure
dampness, draughts, mud lots, as well as their liability to para-
site infection, must be well understood by those who expect to
make sheep growing profitable. The knowledge is very easy
to obtain, and methods of combating are not difficult, but they
demand persistent effort on the part of the sheep owner.
Sheep may be successfully grown on any general farm or where
there is an opportunity for changes in grazing. When the
farm has the equipment and is conveniently located to a rail-
road leading to one of our larger cities, winter-lamb production
may be most profitable, whereas if the farm lacks equipment
and has much cheap grazing land, some other form of sheep
production would doubtless yield the greater profit. Each
farmer must make a careful study of his conditions, sueh as
location, facilities for shipping, demands of his market, condi-
tion of the soil, and the like, then lay his plans accordingly.
Wherever the farm, whatever the conditions, whenever sheep
growing is to be practiced, ample provision must be made for
change in pasture. Sheep may live, or at least the older ones
may, without change, but if put into a pasture in the spring,
and compelled to remain there until fall, they will never attain
the size they would have attained had there been a frequent
change of pasture. Where sheep are thus pastured, the lambs
422
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP 423
often perish as a result of parasites. Sheep profit by a change
of pasture even if, so far as the pasture is concerned, the
change is from a good to a poor one.
DIPPING SHEEP
Dipping the sheep is an essential part of sheep growing.
No farmer should attempt to raise sheep without planning to
dip the sheep, not only upon their arrival at the farm, but
twice annually thereafter. Fortunately the process is very
simple as well as inexpensive.
Importance of dipping. — There are two essential reasons why
all sheep should be dipped: first, to free them of ticks; and
second, to free them of scab
_ germs. It is absolutely impossi- ~~ oe
.
ble for lambs infected with ticks
or other parasites to thrive. A
good dip cleanses the skin, in-
creases the quantity and im-
proves the quality of the wool.
From this it is apparent that all
sheep, whether foundation stock
or lambs intended for fattening,
should be dipped immediately
upon their arrival on the far a Fic. 1389.— Hornep Dorset Ewes.
Sheep ticks can be entirely Owned by Heart’s Delight Farm.
overcome by dipping. Sheep
ticks inhabit no other farm animals, and once eradicated, there
is no possible chance of their reappearing unless brought to the
flock on infested sheep, or carried in some manner, as in the
clothing of shearers, from an infested flock.
Sheep scab can likewise be prevented by dipping. This scab
is caused by a minute parasite, too small to be seen by the naked
eye, which irritates the skin, causing a watery exudate. This
exudate forms a crust beneath which the scab mite burrows,
424 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
greatly irritating the animal, causing loss of flesh, intense itch-
ing, loss of wool, and frequently results in death to the sheep.
Sheep affected with scab are uneasy, pawing with the foot and
biting at the affected parts, which are usually along the neck and
shoulders. If such an animal be carefully examined, the wool and
skin will appear abnormal at the affected parts. A slight exu-
date is noticed which later forms a scab, which rapidly spreads.
The mite is transferred from one sheep to another and soon the
entire flock is affected.
Common places for sheep to become infected with the scab
mite are in the stock-yards, railroad stock-pens, and in stock-
cars, unless well disinfected. As they multiply very rapidly,
a few parasites gathered up in this way will soon run through
an entire flock. When once the sheep become affected and
scabs formed, the disease is hard to eradicate. If taken in
time, prevention is very easy. Hence the importance of dip-
ping all newly purchased sheep before they infect the farm or
the flock.
The dipping vat. — The nature of the dipping vat or tank will
be determined largely by the size of the flock. For a small
flock such as is kept on the average farm, a simple trough of wood,
metal, or concrete, 16 inches wide at the top and 6 inches at the
bottom, 4 feet deep, and 8 to 12 feet long, will prove ample.
The vat must be narrow so the sheep cannot turn around; must
be deep so they can be plunged clear under and no spot escape the
dip; and the longer the vat, the quicker the dipping can be per-
formed, as each animal should remain in the dip at least one
minute. The end of the vat at which the sheep enter should be
perpendicular, so that they may be made to jump in the dip and
thus be completely submerged. At the other end, there should
be a gradual incline up which the sheep can walk. Here an in-
cline platform should be constructed, so that the drippings of the
dipped sheep may be returned to the vat, otherwise much of the
dip will be wasted, particularly if the wool is long. On farms
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP 425
where sheep are to be kept continuously the vat should be con-
structed in the ground. This will facilitate getting the sheep in
and out, and in many clay soils will last a lifetime. In the ab-
sence of such a vat, do not neglect to dip the sheep upon their
arrival at the farm, for trouble will surely follow. In the ab-
sence of anything better, use an ordinary water-trough, one man
holding the sheep by the forelegs, another by the hind legs, and
Fic. 140.—Cueviots. True to type. Owned by G. W. Parnell.
The Cheviot breed of sheep originated in Scotland. The breed is noted for the
production of wooland mutton. The sheep are comparatively small,. but very
hardy and excellent grazers. In appearance the animals are neat and trim.
Mature rams average about 175 pounds and the ewes 150 pounds. They will
shear from 6 to 11 pounds of medium-length wool.
dip backs first. See that the head is immersed. The dip
will run down the legs when the sheep are permitted to stand.
This is crude but to be preferred to no dipping and the farm
becoming infested with ticks and scab, which it surely will if
dipping new arrivals is neglected..
How dips are used. — The dip must be hot. The best tem-
perature is that which a man can endure with the bare arm.
426 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
If the dip is too hot, it will scald; if too cold, it will be less
effective. The water may be heated in a large kettle and kept
hot by throwing red-hot irons or heated stones into the tank.
This is a very convenient way to heat the dip if any remains in
the tank. The water should be softened by the addition of
enough concentrated lye to give it an oily feeling like soap
suds, or by the addition of wood ashes.
The best dip to use is some one of the coal-tar preparations, as
Zenoleum, Naptholeum, Daytholeum, Milk Oil, and the like.
These are fairly cheap, very effective, cleansing to the skin, heal-
ing to diseased eyes and mouth, pleasant to use, and sure death
to all forms of parasite life. The direction given on the cans in
which the coal-tar comes is to use at a strength of one part
of dip to 100 parts water. While this is strong enough to kill
ticks, it is not sufficient to remove scab germs. When the sheep
have first arrived or when dipping for scab, use one part dip to
40 parts water.
When dipping for ticks, one minute is sufficient length of time
for the sheep to remain in the solution. When dipping new ar-
rivals or for scab, the sheep should remain in the dip two minutes
and the head should be immersed twice. With the dip hot, the
water softened, the dip used at a strength of 1 to 40, and the
sheep left in for two minutes, all external parasitic life will be
destroyed. If scab is suspected, the dipping should be repeated
in eight to ten days, as the dip will not kill theeggs, and a second
dipping is essential completely to eradicate the scab mites.
Frequency of dipping. — All sheep arriving at the farm should
be dipped before they infect the lots. In addition to this the
entire flock should be dipped at least once a year, and it will be
the better for it if dipped twice annually. One dipping should
take place soon after shearing, as less dip will be required. It
should not, however, follow too closely after shearing. A
pleasant day should be selected, and the sheep should be well
protected until dry. It will take them several hours to dry
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP 427
out. At this time it should not take more than one quart of
the mixture to a sheep, whereas if the sheep is not shorn, it
will take approximately one gallon. The second dipping should
be in the fall, some fair day just before the sheep are placed
in their winter quarters. This second dipping will pay be-
cause of its invigorating influence, even though the sheep are
free from ticks. By all means, the sheep should be dipped at
once on the outbreak of scab unless in the very severest of winter
weather.
SHEARING SHEEP
Formerly it was the custom to wash the sheep before shearing
and shear later in the season than at present. This was in the
days of the spinning wheel and hand loom. The practice of
washing the wool was continued somewhat later, for it was
thought that it prepared the wool for the manufacture. This
it did not do, but it did render the wool lighter by removing the
natural oil and hence was a distinct disadvantage to the farmer.
Washing sheep. — At the present time comparatively few
sheep are washed before shearing, though in some localities it is
still profitable, as buyers discriminate against unwashed wool.
The washing is usually done in a brook. The water should be
about waist deep, the bottom of the brook sandy, gravelly, or
rocky, and free from mud, and the shore firm, clean, and grassy.
There should be sufficient current to carry the dirt away when
pressed out of the wool. A small inclosure near the shore re-
strains the sheep; one man catches the sheep, a second tags
them and removes the filth from the hind-quarters, while the
third man washes. The washer leads the sheep into the water
beyond its depth. The sheep is easily handled. Attention
should be given all parts of the fleece. The wool is pressed
between the open hands, which removes the dirt and discolors
the water. When no further discoloration can be produced,
the sheep is removed to the shore. The animal should be held
428 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
until slightly drained to prevent it from falling as a result of
the weight of the water in the fleece. The flock should then
be kept in a clean place for at least one week to permit the
yolk or oil to be replaced.
When to shear. — The time for shearing will depend somewhat
on the conditions. If winter lambs are sought, the shearing
should be done in March or before, whereas if there is no hurry
about the lambs and the sheep are not well protected, the wool
may be left on until warm weather. With the coming of warm
weather the wool must be removed or the sheep will not thrive.
When at all practicable, early shearing is to be recommended, as
the sheep will do much better. If troubled with ticks, they will
leave as soon as the sheep are shorn, though in this case it is well
to see that the ticks do not go to the lambs. The amount of
wool taken off will be greater if the sheep are shorn regularly in
March or April than if shorn in June. Where washing the wool
is practiced, the sheep cannot be shorn until warm weather as
it is unsafe to wash the animals in the late winter or early
spring.
Hand shearing. — Hand shearing requires much skill and con-
siderable practice. A good man will shear from 40 to 100 sheep
in a day, using common hand shears. Many experts shear upon
the floor, though some prefer a platform. The work should
be done in a light, airy place. While each shearer has his own
method, it is some modification of the following: The sheep is
placed on its rump with its back to the shearer supported by
the left arm, with the shears in the right hand. The wool is
then removed from the brisket and neck down to the shoulders.
The fleece is then opened down the abdomen and first clipped
on the left side as far around as the back bone and then on the
right side in a similar manner, all the time exercising much care
in keeping the fleece together. Care must be exercised not to
cut too deep at one stroke or the sheep will not be smooth. The
points of the shears must be kept close to the hide, otherwise a
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP 429
second stroke will be necessary, which injures the wool and takes
much time.
In some regions it is customary to tie the fore and hind legs
of the sheep to a board in such a manner that the animal cannot
kick, placing it on a low platform, and in this position reliev-
ing it of its wool. Such practice is condemned by all experi-
enced sheep owners.
For the beginner to shear a sheep by hand is really a very
difficult task, and if the sheep be a fine-wool, the task is still
greater.
Machinery shearing. Shearing sheep with a machine is a very
much more easy task than shearing by hand, and the beginner
can do very much better work with it. On the market there
are both hand and power machines, but on the average farm
the hand machine is, of course, the one to use. To operate the
machine requires two men or a man and boy, — one to turn the
machine, the other to shear the sheep. If available, the be-
ginner should take a coarse-wooled sheep, as the fine-wools are
more difficult to shear. With a rather coarse-wooled sheep one
can follow the directions and shear the sheep, even though he
has never seen the operation. Most sheep are now shorn by
a machine.
With the sheep before you and facing to the left, grasp it by
the right hind leg with the left hand and gently but firmly place
it on its rump, in an upright position, the shoulders resting against
the shearers knees, with the machine to the right. It is impor-
tant to remember that the sheep should always be turned to the
right. With a little experience this can be done with the feet,
leaving the hands free for the real work. Another essential
always to be borne in mind is to hold the sheep in such a way
that the skin is stretched tight on the part of the body that is
being sheared. Never place the left hand in front of the shears,
as you will surely cut the sheep (if you are right-handed).
With the sheep held firmly between the knees, part the wool at
430
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Fic. 141.—Suearinc SHEEP By MACHINERY, SHOWING POSITION OF THE
SHEEP, SHEARER, AND THE MACHINE.
{
reas
~~
eat
5
Fig. 142. — PosirioN WHILE
Fic. 143.—Posirion WHILE SHEARING LEFT
SHEARING ABDOMEN. Hinp Lec.
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP 431
the forward end of the brisket and run the shears down as far as
the pit of the stomach. Clip the wool from the floor of chest, as
in illustration (Fig. 141). Place
the front legs behind the left arm
and run four swaths down the
right side from the fore legs to
the flank. Next run the shears
across the belly from right to
left, clipping the wool from the
belly and flank, as in illustra-
tions (Figs. 142 and 143).
Straighten up the sheep, resting tee
the head against the knee as at
first, take hold of the sheep as in ery ee
illustration (Fig. 144), and clip See
the wool along the under side of
the neck, starting the shears at the brisket, and run upwards,
coming out just below the ear. Clip the wool from the neck.
as in illustration (Fig. 145),
With the feet turn the sheep
slightly to the right, the sheep’s
feet pointing towards the ma-
chine, and clip the wool from
the side and the back, as in
illustrations (Figs. 146, 147).
Turn the sheep to the right
so that its back rests next to
the machine and clip the other
side, as in illustrations (Figs.
Fic. 145.— Posir1ioN WHILE SHEARING 148, 149, and 150). Take ex-
To ee Ge veep me tra care all the time to keep
the hide . stretched tightly
where the shears are working, otherwise the sheep will not be
smooth, and in addition there is danger of cutting the skin.
i
Fic. 147.— PosirioN WHILE SHEARING
Rump.
Fic. 146.— PosITION WHILE SHEARING LEFT
Sipe.
ae ™ 5 ; } y
ee
EOE oa manatee Fic. 149.— PostrIoN WHILE SHEARING
Fic. 148.— PosiTION WHILE Ricur SIDE.
SHEARING RIGHT SHOULDER.
»
nn eee ee a
Fie. 151.— Position or Woou
Fie. 150.— Posrrion WHILE FINISHING WHEN FInIsHEpD. Cut ends
SHEEP. out and loose pieces within.
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP 433
Gather up the wool, as in illustration (Fig. 151). With a
little practice the task of shearing with a good machine will
be more easily accomplished than it is to explain.
Tying the wool. — The fleece is rolled with the belly and loose
ends inside, the cut ends out. All very dirty pieces should be
removed and never tied up in the wool. Special wool twine
should be used to tie the fleece, as binder twine greatly injures
. the wool, for small bits of the fiber often get into the fleece and,
not taking the dyes, must be picked out by hand. There is no
need of a wool-box for tying a compact bundle, as buyers prefer
the fleece loosely tied.
For those who prefer the wool-box, a very convenient one is
made as follows: Secure five pieces of boards; three, each one
foot square, the other two each three feet long and one foot wide.
Of the three pieces one is to serve as the bottom of the box, the
other two as the ends, and they should be hinged together ac-
cordingly. The other two boards are likewise hinged to the
bottom piece, so that when all are raised, they form a neat wool-
box.
Later the wool is packed in large sacks for shipment. In filling
the large bags care should be exercised to see that the wool is
well packed and the corners all well filled. After being packed
full the bags are sewed at the top. If stored,the wool should be
put in a dry place where there is no danger of mice cutting the
bags and building nests of the wool.
PRACTICAL SHEEP BARNS
Proper shelter for the flock adds greatly to its comfort and
thrift. It need not, however, be either elaborate or costly. In
the sheep barn there are several factors that must be provided
for, but extra warmth not being one of the factors, the rest
is comparatively simple and inexpensive. Chief among the
factors for which provision must be made are ventilation with-
out draughts, sunshine, drainage, convenience for feeding, ar-
2F
434 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
rangements for separating the ewes at lambing time, storage
for grain and hay, and, if possible, a root cellar.
The ventilation of the sheep barn should receive careful
consideration. This must be so arranged that there are no
draughts, as such will result in colds, running at the nose, ca-
tarrh, and like troubles. Many experienced sheep owners pre-
fer to ventilate the sheep quarters by placing doors across one
side of the barn. These doors are divided in halves horizontally,
the lower part of the door swinging as an ordinary gate swings,
while the upper half is hinged at the upper edge. The top half
is opened by lifting to a horizontal position and held by props
or pendant chains. By raising the upper halves and closing the
lower, the ventilation can be made so thorough that the inside air
is as pure as that on the outside, and since the doors are all on one
side of the barn, there is freedom from draughts. If the sheep
have the run of these quarters in summer, it is well to open both
top and bottom doors, arranging a slat door on the inside to re-
strain the sheep. During the heat of summer, a blind is fastened
over the windows and doors to keep out the sun’s rays and
slightly to darken the quarters, as sheep prefer this to the
daylight.
An abundance of sunshine is essential to the well being of the
breeding flock in winter. Sunshine is nature’s greatest disinfec-
tant, and keeps the quarters light and cheery. If the row of
doors arranged for ventilation is on the south side of the quar-
ters, as it should be, it will admit sufficient sunshine on days when
thedoors can be keptopen. It is oftennecessary to closethem on
account of the severity of the weather, just after shearing, or just
after dipping, and in such cases extra windows are very conven-
ient. These may preferably be placed along the south side be-
tween the doors, as then they will serve their maximum efficiency.
In selecting a site for the sheep barn, due consideration should
be given to drainage. Sheep cannot survive damp and muddy
footing. Wet floors and muddy lots are to be avoided. If
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP 435
possible, select ground from which there is a little slope in all
directions, facing the barn to the south and arranging the lots
on the south slope. It would be of much advantage to have
the place protected on the north and west by a grove or bluff.
In arranging the sheep quarters, convenience of feeding must
be kept in mind. This factor is often complicated by the desir- °
ability of having provision for separating the ewes at lambing
time. As a rule, it is more difficult to feed the sheep in two lots
than in one. This difficulty can often be overcome, in large
" )
bi ite ee Np With
aby
’
fetid
Ty ee
Fic. 152.—Surepr Barn; Interior Virw, SHOWING ARRANGEMENT OF JFEED-
RACK AND MRBTHOD OF DIVIDING THE PENS.
part at least, by using the feed-rack as a partition for the two
pens. Such an arrangement also saves the material otherwise
necessary for the partition. To facilitate labor in feeding, ample
provision should be made for storage of all feed, hay, and straw
in the loft, grain in a bin on the ground floor, and if possible,
a cellar for the storage of roots. Where convenient, water should
be placed in the barn. >
The size of the sheep barn will depend entirely on the number
of sheep in the flock. Experienced sheep owners do not agree as
436 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
to the amount of space required, some stating that ten square
feet is sufficient, others that they desire eighteen square feet for
each animal. In practice, twelve square feet of floor space will
be ample for each breeding ewe.
The feed-racks. — Movable feed-racks are to be preferred.
They should be comparatively long and narrow and, as suggested,
may be used as partitions between the pens, thus economizing
on material, and the racks may be used in different places if
desired. A very good combination. hay-rack and grain-trough
is made as follows: With 1” X8” boards for the bottoms and
1X4” boards for the sides and ends, construct two grain-
troughs. Place these side by side and fasten together. Or
make one shallow trough 16 inches wide and put a partition in it
longways, thus making two shallow grain-boxes. With 2’’ X
4” scantling and 1’’X10” boards construct a frame 2 feet
wide at the top and as long as the grain-troughs, to serve as the
top of the hay-rack. Now on the center partition of the grain-
boxes nail 1’’ X 2” slats 30 inches long, placing them V-shaped
and nail to the frame above, thus making a hay-rack. These
slats may be placed 7 inches apart in order that the sheep may
thrust their heads clear into the rack to feed. If the slats are
placed closer together, say 3 inches apart, as is often the case,
the sheep pull the hay through the cracks and drop much of it
under their feet. We now have a combination grain- and hay-
rack which, when properly braced, makes a very efficient feed-
rack for the breeding flock. When it comes to forced feeding, as
in fattening lambs, such a rack has the objection that more or
less dirt filters down into the grain-troughs, and the sheep with
their dainty appetites do not feed as well as when the grain-
troughs and the hay-rack are separated.
Quantity of bedding. — Bedding should be used very liberally
in both the sheep barn and at least a part of the lot. <A fresh
supply should be put down every few days. There is much dis-
agreement among experienced sheep owners as to the frequency
1
1
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF SHEEP 437
of cleaning the sheep barn. Some state that they would rather
keep adding fresh bedding and not remove the litter from the
time the sheep go into the winter quarters in the fall until
turned to pasture in the spring. Their chief objection to remove
—e
f
Fig. 153.— Leicester YEARLING Ewe.
The Leicester breed of sheep developed in Leicester county, England. The
breed is noted for the production of mutton and wool. In weight, the rams
average 225 pounds and the ewes 175 pounds. This breed produces a fine
grade of long wool, the wool averaging 6 to 10 inches in length and the fleece
5 to 10 pounds in weight.
ing the litter is the foul odor and the annoyance occasioned the
sheep at the time the litter is removed. There are others, how-
ever, who insist that the sheep barn should be cleaned out just
438 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
previous to lambing time. The work should be done rapidly so
as to annoy the sheep as little as possible. After the manure
has been removed it is a good plan to scatter some air-slaked
lime over the floor. This serves as disinfectant and deodorizer.
Fresh bedding may then be put down, and the barn will be
clean and pure for the advent of the lamb crop.
The sheep lot.—TIf possible, the sheep should at all times,
except in the very severest of winter weather, have free access
to a small lot. If this is dry and a part well bedded, the sheep
will spend much of their time outside and will be much benefited
thereby. Above all things the lot should not be muddy.
Where sheep are allowed to wallow in the mud, trouble from
foot-seald is likely to result; particularly is this true if there is
much sheep manure mixed in the mud. Foot-scald is usually
known as foot-rot. This disease is hard to eradicate. The
sheep lot is Very much easier kept free from mud than the fat
steer lot, and it will pay the sheep owner well to take ample
precautions.
A straw stack in the sheep lot has many advantages, such as
keeping the sheep out of the wind, providing them a clean place
to lie; and they will eat of the straw to some extent. It has the
disadvantage, however, that the chaff gets in the wool, and for
this reason is objected to by many good sheep owners. Yet ewes
and lambs delight in lying alongside such a stack, and they will
be found there more often than in the barn, except in very severe
weather.
CHAPTER XX
DISEASES OF SHEEP
THE common diseases of sheep are not numerous, but they
are mostly incurable. This is particularly true of the ravages
of internal parasites. Prevention is better than cure. There
seems to be no good reason why nearly every contagious and
infectious disease to which sheep are subject cannot be eradi-
cated in two or three years with proper precautions, yet these
diseases result in nine-tenths of the failures in this country. It
seems that farmers cannot realize that diseases so easy to prevent
will work such destruction once they break out in the flock. In
this Manual much has been made of the importance of dipping
all sheep immediately upon their arrival at the farm and thus
preventing an outbreak of any kind of external parasites; also
of the absolute importance of frequent changes in pastures, es--
pecially with the lambs, in order to prevent internal parasites.
In addition, there are the hygienic conditions, such as proper
shelter and dry lots, that must receive careful attention.
"TREATING SICK SHEEP
Sick sheep should be removed from the flock at once, not only
that they may receive extra care and attention, but to prevent a
spread of the ailment in case the disease should prove contagious.
The sick animal should be removed to comfortable quarters and
given. the benefit of good care, for in many cases good care is
to be preferred to medicine. The food should be given careful
consideration. The general management, the food, and the
methods of administrating medicine should be much the same
439
440 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
as suggested on page 161, modified to meet the attendant con-
ditions.
For convenience in discussing the common diseases of sheep,
we may divide them into four classes: those due to external
parasites, as scab, foot-rot, sore eyes, sore teats, tick, lice, and
the like; second, those due to internal parasites, as stomach-
worms, tape-worms, and the like; third, derangement of di-
gestion, due to improper feeding; and fourth, other diseases,
as caked udder, garget, catarrh, and the like.
EXTERNAL PARASITES
The cure for external parasites is dipping. When done as sug-
gested in pages 423 to 427, it will completely eradicate such
parasites as ticks and lice as well as the pests that cause scab,
foot-rot, sore eyes, and sore teats. The prevention of any of
these parasites is a very simple matter.
INTERNAL PARASITES
Treating internal parasites is much more difficult. In many
cases the parasites are located where medicine cannot reach
them, as in the brain or liver; and even when located where
medicine can reach them, as in the stomach, the medicine is of
very little value as it is so diluted with digestive juices by the
time it reaches the worms. The only practical treatment is
prevention. This involves some trouble, and in order to make
the necessity for such clear, we will consider a case in detail.
Of course, dipping is of no avail for the internal parasites.
The stomach-worm. — This worm (Strongylus contortus) is a
small, thread-like worm about three-fourths of an inch in length.
It lives in the fourth stomach, and especially afflicts lambs, at-
tacking them at any age after they begin to nibble grass until
cold weather in the fall. This stomach-worm is by far the most
destructive of parasites, doing more damage than all others
combined. When the fourth stomach of the lamb becomes filled
DISEASES OF SHEEP 441
with these small worms, digestion is greatly interfered with, the
lamb looks dejected, the skin loses its pink color, the wool appears
Fie. 154.— Cotswotp Ram. Owned by F. W. Harding, Waukesha, Wis.
The Cotswold, a native of England, is noted for the production of both mutton
and wool. The animals are rather large, rams averaging 250 pounds and the
ewes over 200 pounds. The breed is noted for the production of very long
wool of fine quality. The wool averages 10 to 14 inches in length and 6 to 10
pounds in weight, This breed is extremely popular in the United States.
442 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
dead, and the animal takes on a starved appearance. Scour-
ing is more or less frequent. The best evidence, however, that
the lamb is afflicted with stomach-worms is the presence of the
small worms in the droppings. Older sheep also become affected,
but seem to withstand the ravages of the worms better than
lambs, due no doubt, in the lambs, to the more tender condition
of the stomach wall and to the milk diet.
The life history of these small worms seems to be simple and to
furnish a clew to the means of prevention in lambs. The worms
become mature in the body of the older sheep and, laden with
eggs about to hatch, pass out with the excreta. Just what the
-worms do outside the sheep’s body is not known. When it is
moist and warm, in some way the worms find their way into the
lamb’s stomach. Perhaps the small worm is taken in while
eating, perhaps by drinking surface water. We know that
warmth and moisture are necessary for the transfer, hence
there is little danger in the North, on mountain uplands, and but
little danger in the dry regions of the West. The method of
prevention is to remove the lambs and place them on fresh or
preferably sown pastures before there is danger of infection.
Lambs receiving no other food than grass and the dam’s milk are
much more likely to be attacked than those fed grain in addition,
particularly if the grain contains linseed-oil meal. The only
safe way, however, is to remove the lambs to new pastures before
infection.
In case lambs become infected, treatment should be resorted
to, though many practical sheep owners state that the treatment
at best is not satisfactory. Circular No. 35, the United States
Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Animal Industry, reports
that satisfactory results were obtained from the use of coal-tar,
creosote, thymol, and gasolene. The following is taken from
the circular, as it gives a general idea of the treatment for other
worms as well :—
Coal-tar Creosote. — Excellent success in treating sheep,
DISEASES OF SHEEP 443
goats, and cattle for the twisted wireworm (Strongylus contortus)
has been obtained with a 1 per cent solution of coal-tar creo-
sote. The medicine is easily prepared and inexpensive. It may
be purchased of a druggist in small quantities of 1 ounce, or in
pound bottles. One ounce is sufficient for about 20 adult sheep,
and the cost of the treatment is less than one-half acent per head.
If creosote is called for at the drug store, beechwood creosote
will be usually dispensed. This is more expensive than the coal-
tar creosote and not so satisfactory in expelling worms.
A 1 per cent solution of coal-tar creosote is made as follows : —
Coal-tar creosote . ‘ , . 1 ounce
Water . . 99 ounces
99 ounces = 6 pints and 3 ounces
Twisted wireworms taken directly from the stomach of sheep
or cattle die in one-half to one and a half minutes when immersed
in this solution.
If, in drenching, this liquid enters the lungs, the animal may
succumb in a few minutes. If the dosing is performed carefully,
as much as 63 ounces may be given to a full-grown sheep with-
out fatal results. In some cases, however, the animal shows ill
effects, from which it usually recovers within half an hour. Six
ounces were given to a number of sheep without the slightest ill
effects. The following table gives the doses of the 1 per cent
mixture which were used in about 400 cases without ill effects : —
Lambs 4 to 12 months old . . . 2 to4 ounces (about 60 to 120 c.c.)
Yearling sheep and above . . . 38to5 ounces (about 90 to 150 c.c.)
Calves 3 to 8 months old . . . 5tol0ounces (about 150 to300c.c.)
Yearling steers . . . . 1 pint (about 480 e.c.)
Two-year-old cattle andover. . 1 quart (about 960 ¢.c.)
Sheep, goats, and calves which received this treatment showed
a marked improvement a few days after receiving a single dose.
If an overdose is given by mistake, and if the sheep appears
severely affected by it, the animal should be placed in the shade.
Even in some cases of very severe overdoses, where the animal is
444 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
given up for dead practically, it may entirely recover in an hour
or so.
Coal-tar Creosote and Thymol.—TIf, in addition to the
stomach-worms, the animals are suffering from a severe infection
of bowel worms, such as the hook worms, better results are ob-
tained in the treatment when powdered thymol is added to the
creosote. In cases of this kind, the creosote solution is prepared,
as already directed, and 30 to 80 or even 100 grains of thymol
added to each dose after it has been measured, giving 30 grains
to lambs, 50 to yearlings, and 70 to 100 grains to older sheep,
according to size.
The tape-worms. — The digestive tract of sheep is occasionally
infested with tape-worms. There are several kinds of tape-
worms, but only two infesting sheep in this country. The
common one (Tenia expansa) varies in length from ten to
twenty feet and in breadth from one twenty-fifth of an inch
at the head to one-half an inch at the tail. The life history
is somewhat similar to that of the stomach-worm. Sheep
become infested in the same way, the most common source
being old infested sheep pastures and the most susceptible
animals being those rather run down in flesh.
The best method of combating tape-worms is prevention by
changing from one pasture to another and by the use of sown
pastures, as suggested in the discussion on summer care of the
flock (page 382). Wing recommends liberal feeding of pumpkins
in the fall, Pumpkin seeds are well-known vermifuges. By
the frequent use of sown pastures and the feeding of pump-
kins almost every fall he reports entire freedom from this
disease. T'ape-worms are easily prevented but very difficult
of eradication.
In case the sheep are affected with tape-worm, treatment
should be given, though the results will depend in a large meas-
ure upon the degree of infection. From Bulletin No. 19 and
Circular No. 35, Bureau of Animal Industry, we take the fol-
DISEASES OF SHEEP 445
lowing: Dissolve one ounce of copper sulfate in two quarts of
boiling water. Use only copper sulfate of a uniform blue color.
Avoid that which is in conglomerate lumps with white patches
and covered with a white crust. The owner is cautioned against
guessing at the weights and measures, for this is likely to result
in too strong a solution, which will kill the animal, or in too
weak a solution, which will fail to be effective. Prepare the
animals for treatment by fasting from twenty to twenty-four
hours. The dose is as follows : —
TABLESPOON- Cusic
AGE oF ANIMALS FULS CENTIMETER
Lambs 3 months old . 1 ‘20
Lambs 6 months old . 2 40
Sheep 12 months old . 3 60
Sheep 18 months old . 4 80
Sheep 24 months old . 4} 90
The medicine is given in the form of a drench as suggested for
stomach-worms. If, after dosing, any of the sheep seem to be
suffering from an overdose, indi-
cated by lying apart from the
flock, not feeding, manifesting a
painful, excited look, and a
spasmodic movement in run-
ning, walking with a stiff gait,
or purging with a dirty brown
discharge, take the affected ani-
mal from the flock to a shady
place and dose with laudanum and
milk. For a lamb four to six frye. 155.—Cxampron CorswaLp
months old, give a tablespoonful oe Ebotpgrapk fom je
of laudanum in a tumbler of
milk. Repeat half the dose in two or three hours if necessary.
446 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
After treating, the sheep should not be allowed water for
several hours.
Each animal in the flock should be treated at the same time.
While some sheep may be able to withstand the presence of the
parasite, they serve as a source of infection. While the tape-
worms are being voided, the flock should be confined to one place,
and the droppings with the segments of worms destroyed.
DIGESTIVE DISORDERS
Among sheep, digestive disorders arising from overfeeding,
from irregular feeding, and the feeding of food too dry and woody,
are of rather common occurrence. First of all, however, we will
consider bloating, as it may be of frequent occurrence, unless
extra care is taken, when turning to clover, alfalfa, and rape
pasture.
Bloating. — When bloat occurs among sheep, treatment to be
of any avail must be prompt, as the gas generated often causes
death from suffocation in a very few minutes. If the animal is
in much distress when found, the paunch should be punctured
where the distension is greatest, in order that the gas may escape.
For this a trocar and canula is best, but in the absence a long-
bladed pen knife will serve. After relief has been had, disin-
fect the wound. If there was not sufficient time to remove the
wool from the spot before the puncture, it should be removed
now and a little pine tar applied to repel the flies. (See page
351.)
If the bloating is not so severe, relief may be obtained by tying
a stick or corn cob in the mouth similar to a bit, thus holding the
mouth open, and the sheep, in rubbing the cob or stick with the
tongue, often struggles in such a way as to prevent further bloat-
ing. If the sheep are noticed when first distressed, give them
three tablespoonfuls of raw linseed oil to which has been added a
teaspoonful of turpentine. Slowly pouring cold water over the
DISEASES OF SHEEP 447
distended paunch often gives relief by stopping the accumulation
of gas.
Constipation. — In winter when the ration is composed largely
of dry woody food, sheep often suffer from impaction, which~™
often leads to constipation and in some instances to inflamma-
tion of the bowels. This condition of the digestive tract ma-
terially weakens the animal, and it becomes susceptible to
various ailments. All tendencies to impaction, constipation,
inflammation, and the like should be avoided by feeding daily
some laxative food, such as roots, silage, oil meal ‘‘pea size,”
along with the dry food. If sheep growing is to prove profit-
able, some such foods must be used.
When impaction occurs, it may be relieved by giving Epsom
salts. The size of the dose should vary somewhat according to
the size of the animal ; a 150-pound animal may be given from 4
to 6 ounces dissolved in a pint of hot water. If not relieved
within 10 hours, repeat the dose.
Disorders caused by overfeeding. — As indicated in the discus-
sion on feeding lambs in winter (page 399), digestive disorders due
to overfeeding are likely to prove fatal. Occasionally fatalities
will occur from this cause on the best regulated farms. Many
remedies have been suggested to relieve such disorders, but they
fail. Death is almost sure to follow, no matter what may be
done. In fact, among sheep suffering from apoplexy, the result
of overfeeding, little time will be given to do anything. The
lambs die in a few minutes. This sometimes can be impressed
only by experience. The lambs will seemingly be in the best of
condition, when, for some reason, one gets an overfeed, and fatal
results rapidly follow. It is usually the largest and strongest
lambs that are attacked, as they are the ones likely to crowd the
smaller ones away and consume too much feed. The ration,
particularly the grain, should be increased very slowly. While
it is very important that the sheep be fed all they will consume, it
is even more important that they be not fed more than they will
448 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
clean up from meal to meal, as this is likely to result in one or
more of them overeating.
While water, salt, and succulent food of some kind are neces-
sary to the well being of sheep, care must be exercised in feeding
them, as otherwise they are likely to produce kidney and bladder
troubles. Drinking too much hard water, the result of eating
large quantities of salt, causes the deposit of limy substance in
the bladder, which becomes washed into the urethra, where
it lodges, causing stoppage of the urine, inflammation, followed
by distention of the bladder, which after a time results in death.
The long-continued feeding of too many mangels, rich in lime,
is likely to give similar results.
OTHER DISEASES
Caked udder. — This trouble often occurs among heavy milk-
ers. In most cases it is due to neglect at lambing time. The
udder becomes greatly distended, inflamed, and swollen. The
treatment is to relieve the congestion by drawing the milk, fre-
quently. Bathe the parts with hot water and apply camphor
ointment, as in caked udder among dairy cattle. Some
prefer an ointment made of lard and turpentine, equal parts.
The ointment should be well rubbed in and applied three
times daily.
Garget often proves serious in certain localities. It is said
to be due to mechanical injuries, such as a blow, a scratch, or the
udder being horned ; to the udder becoming distended with milk;
and to germs entering the udder. The udder becomes hard,
distended, and the milk is often watery and may contain
blood. The treatment usually recommended is the hot water
bathing and the camphor-belladonna ointment treatment, as
suggested for cows (page 340).
Among sheep, however, garget seems to be due to other causes
as well, and when such is the case, the above treatment often fails
of relief. Atypical case is somewhat as follows: A strong ewe
DISEASES OF SHEEP 449
lambs without difficulty, the first milk comes, and the lamb as
well as the ewe is doing nicely. The owner, in order that the
ewe may give an abundance of milk, places the ewe on a full
Fic. 156. — Lincotn Ram CuHampion at INTERNATIONAL Live Stock SHow,
1906. Photograph from National Stockman and Farmer.
The native home of the Lincoln breed of sheep is in the county of Lincoln, in
England. This breed is particularly noted for its large size and great length
of fleece. In weight the rams average about 300 pounds and the ewes
275 pounds. The wool often attains a length of 18 to 20 inches, and at
shearing time gives a fleece weighing 10 to 12 pounds, for the ewes, and 12 to
20 pounds, for the rams.
grain feed at once, perhaps feeding corn alone, as the grain; in a
few days milk secretion stops, the sheep has fever, the flesh of the
udder is red, and on pressure is dented with the hand. The sheep
seems in great distress and may soon die. If she lives, the udder
2G
450 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
never regains its consistency and after a time sloughs off, leaving
a slow healing sore. In such cases, physicking the animal and
treating the udder are of no avail. There seems to be a relation
between the disease and the food supply. The grain part of the
ration seems to have been increased too rapidly immediately
after lambing. When the grain ration was increased more
slowly and when it contained oats and linseed meal, no such diffi-
culty was experienced. From this it would seem that the treat-
ment should be prevention by increasing the grain ration slowly
after lambing.
PART FOUR—SWINE
CHAPTER XXI
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SWINE
SwINE are grown for a single purpose, that of pork pro-
duction; yet the successful swine breeder will give the selection
of his animals much serious consideration. In choosing swine,
as in all classes of meat animals, the butcher’s preference must
be the leading guide. The butcher’s preference is determined
by the demands of the market. Uniformity in size and quality
is the most urgent demand.
TYPES OF SWINE
There are two distinct types of swine: the lard type, noted
for the production of thick fat; and the bacon type, known
for the production of bacon.
The lard type far outnumbers the bacon type in America. As |
a type, the lard-hog has reached its highest development in the
corn-belt of the United States. This is often called the American
type of hog, and is not looked upon with favor by people of other
countries because of its extreme fat development.
The lard-hog should be compact, with the body very wide
and deep. The shoulders should be full although not coarse,
with the hind-quarters or hams carried out straight to the tail-
head and well fleshed down to the hock. Since the valuable cuts
lie along the back, rump and quarters, the general conformation
of the lard-hog should be similar to that of the fat steer. The
flesh covering should be thick and evenly distributed throughout
the body, particularly over the shoulders and quarters. The size
453
454 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and weight are determined largely by the market conditions.
Formerly very heavy hogs were in demand, but at the present
time pigs weighing from 225 to 250 pounds will command the
highest price, all other conditions being equal.
The true bacon type of hog is little grown in the United States.
Denmark, Great Britain, and Canada furnish most of this class
of pork. In recent years the American breeders, particularly
those east of the corn-belt, have given this class of swine some
active consideration, but its production is not likely to make
much headway in America. We prefer the rapid-fattening,
heavily fleshed, and early-maturing lard type. In contrasting
the general appearance of the bacon type with the lard type, we
note that the body of the former lacks the width of the latter,
the shoulders and hams are lighter and longer, the body is some-
what longer, and the animal stands on somewhat longer legs.
The weight of the bacon hog is not so great as of the lard type,
American markets preferring 155 to 195 pounds and the Danish
markets 160 to 220 pounds.
Because of the extreme difference in type we will consider
the desirable features of the lard- or fat-hog first and then con-
trast with it the bacon type, first pausing to discuss the age.
AGE OF SWINE
In choosing other classes of farm animals age enters largely
into the choice, but in market hogs it is seldom considered except
in the case of old sows and stags. The weight and condition of
the animal determine the value. As in other farm animals, the
age is indicated to acertain extent by the teeth, but the difficulty
of catching, holding, and examining is so great that the teeth are
seldom, if ever, used to determine the age of swine. Among
breeding stock the matter of age is of considerable importance,
but even here it is estimated more by a general examination than
by any specific character. The older the boar the coarser and
heavier the ‘“shields” — outside of shoulder — and the longer
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SWINE 455
or larger the tusks as well as the larger and more wrinkled the
body throughout. The older the sow the more pendulent the
belly, the coarser and more wrinkled she becomes.
CHOOSING LARD-HOGS
The lard- or fat-hog is desired for full shoulders and heavy
hams. These points must be kept clearly in mind. The
Fic. 157.—Ponanp Cutna YeEaruine Boar. First prize, Wisconsin State
Fair, 1908.
The Poland China breed of swine originated in Warren and Butler counties in
southwestern Ohio. The breed is noted particularly for its early maturing
qualities and for the ability to take on fat economically. This breed repre-
sents the extreme development in lard production, and because of this it lacks
in fecundity and prolificacy. In size the breed is classed as a middle-weight.
The color is black with white markings, the ears drooping, and face straight.
The breed is very popular in America.
sides and especially the belly produce a cheap grade of meat,
and there should be a minimum of these parts with maxi-
mum loin, rump, and quarters. In choosing lard-hogs, or any
other for that matter, the most convenient and simplest method
456 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
is to note the general appearance first, then pass to a more
detailed examination.
General appearance of lard-hogs
By carefully noting the general appearance of a hog one can
gain a fair knowledge of its value. Carefully view the hog or
the drove of hogs from a distance before moving up closely to
the animals. This gives one a good knowledge of their uniform-
ity, temperament, and their general form. The butcher will
base his estimate of their value largely on the uniformity and
form, and the feeder will base his estimate mostly on their tem-
perament, as a mild-tempered pig is likely to be a good feeder.
Such an examination will give one a good idea of the weight,
quality, and constitution, all very important factors in swine
growing.
The general form of the fat-hog is of primary importance.
It should be compact, with the body deep, broad, smooth, and
symmetrical. The length should be medium, as a too long
back is likely to result in weakness just back of the shoulders.
As with the steer, the hog should have the larger part of its
weight in the region of the most valuable cuts; that is, along
the back, loin, and hams. While the fore-quarters, neck, and
head are parts of lesser value, they must show much develop-
ment in order to insure constitutional vigor and vitality, which
is largely controlled by chest capacity. The chest, therefore,
should be broad, deep, and carried well forward. This develop-
ment gives the hog a parallelogram development similar to that
desired for beef cattle.
The weight and condition. — The weight will depend largely
on the condition, and as these determine the market value
they will be considered together. Formerly heavy hogs, those
weighing from 400 to 500 pounds, commanded the highest price,
but at the present time the market demands a much lighter ~
hog. While market demands are exceedingly variable, in
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SWINE 457
general the most desirable weight is from 180 to 275 pounds,
though heavier hogs sometimes command a premium on the
market. Very heavy hogs are often spoken of as “fat backs”
because of their broad, heavily fleshed backs. A lard pig in
good condition. should weigh from 175 to 200 pounds when six
months old, and 350 to 400 pounds when one year old. Some
hogs under the best of conditions may weigh much more, many
others will weigh much less, but those are the weights one can
reasonably hope to attain.
Quality. — The indications of quality are fine hair, freedom
from bristles, and a comparatively light, dense, and clean bone.
Fineness of the parts in general is an evidence of quality. This
is often overdrawn, as too
much fineness leads to delicacy,
which is sometimes observed in
the hogs being too small, facial
features too fine or small, and
the bone fine to the point of
weakness. On the other hand, [-: eg prises ONS
hogs with coarse bone, coarse Fic. 158.— Pouanp Cina Boar.
hair, and coarse hide are likely Seid ae)
to be poor feeders, and the butcher objects to them because
of the large percentage of offal which they dress. The qual-
ity of bone, hide, and hair should lie between these two
extremes. In addition to being rather fine and free from
bristles, the hair should lie close to the body and the skin be
free from wrinkles and undue roughness caused by scurf.
Constitution. — The indications of a good constitution and
much vigor are a deep, broad, and well-advanced chest, thus
giving capacious chest capacity and good heart girth. The
chest should be deep from the top of the shoulder to the brisket,
which should be placed low down; it should be wide, as indi-
cated by much width between the front legs, and the brisket
should be well advanced between the front legs. The real
458 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
width of the chest is often difficult to estimate, as the external
width depends much on the thickness and the way the shoulders
are attached; thus an animal wide from shoulder to shoulder
might have a small chest capacity, which would not leave suffi-
cient room for the organs to do their work as they should.
The flank, both front and rear, should be full and well let down,
as this also indicates good constitution.
Uniformity. — One of the most important general considera-
tions in choosing a herd of swine, either for breeding or feeding,
is the uniformity. While this adds nothing to their ability to
make economic gains, it does add materially to their selling value.
This is one of the most neglected factors in American pork pro-
duction. The first thing the commission merchant does on re- _
ceiving a mixed drove of hogs is to separate them into bunches
uniform in all important characters, as age, weight, and con-
dition. The butcher will very often pass by a mixed drove of
hogs, even though they are of good quality and in good flesh,
refusing to place a bid on them merely because he lacks the
facilities for handling such mixed lots. Separate them into uni-
form droves, and he is attracted to them at once and will pay an
extra premium for the same stuff he refused to bid on
before. ;
Uniformity in color is perhaps not so essential as age, weight,
and quality, although a drove alike in color will command a
better price than mixed droves. White is not considered well
adapted to southern conditions, as it is likely to sun-scald or
blister, and this introduces skin diseases of various forms. For-
merly, by far the larger part of the hogs sent to the market
were black, but recently blacks have been decreasing and reds
increasing, with the whites remaining practically stationary.
From information gathered from the ten largest packing houses
in the United States, the color ran as follows: black, 55 per
cent; red, 35 per cent; white, 10 per cent; all others, 5
per cent.
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SWINE 459
Detail characters of the lard-hog
Since the individuals are small and the drove often composed
of a large number, the beginner is likely to neglect the detail
examination, with the result that many poor individuals find
their way into the beginner’s herd. Individuality among swine
is just as great as among fat cattle. The breeder or feeder in
choosing his swine should carefully observe each character, and
in order that none go unnoticed they may be considered in the
following order : —
The head should be short and broad. No facial character
among any class of farm animals is more variable than the hog’s
snout. In some breeds, notably the Tamworths and Hamp-
shires, the snout is very long and straight from the ears to the
tip of the nose; in other breeds, as the Yorkshires, it is long and
dished ; while in others it is short and straight, as in the Poland
China; and in still others it is short and very much dished, as
in the Berkshires. The eyes should be wide apart, clear, and
prominent. Folds of fat about the eyes, while rather common,
are very objectionable. In heavy fat-hogs these patches of
fat are often so prominent as entirely to close the eye. The
ears should be of medium size for the breed and fine in texture.
The way the ear is carried depends on the breed, being erect
in the Berkshire and Yorkshire; half drooping in others, as the
Poland China and Duroc Jerseys; and wholly pendent in still
others, as the Chester White breed. Whatever the carriage,
ears should be neatly attached to the head. Large and coarse
ears are usually associated with heavy coarse bone and are,
therefore, objectionable on any breed.
The jowls should be firm, smooth, of medium size, and not
pendulous. Jowls that are flabby, owing to the excessive amount
of fat, are very objectionable. They should be firm, indicating
* an intermixture of lean meat. The size of the jowls is rather
a breed characteristic, being rather large in the Poland China
460 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and Berkshire, and rather small in the Tamworths and Hamp-
shires. The statement is often made that large jowls indicate
great feeding capacity. This is not true, as Tamworths and
Hampshires feed as well as Poland Chinas or Berkshires. The
medium-sized jowls for the breed are to be preferred. They
should be free from heavy folds and not pendulous and loose.
MATIN ;
Fic. 159. — Prizz BerKsHire Sow. Owned at Hood Farm, Lowell, Mass.
The native home of the Berkshire breed of swine is in England. Like Poland
China, this breed is noted for its early maturity and for its ability quickly to
attain marketable condition. This breed lacks the extreme fat development
of the Poland China, and for this reason the quality of the meat excels the
Poland China. In prolificacy and fecundity the breed ranks fair. In weight
the animals are classed with the middle-weight breeds. The color is black,
with white markings, ears erect, and the face dished. The breed is very popu-
lar in America.
The neck should be of medium length and possess sufficient
width and depth to swell smoothly into the shoulder-vein and
pass back without any noticeable depression. It should narrow
toward the nape and join smoothly with the cheeks. It should
join the head and shoulders smoothly without undue thickness, °
as a neck too thick and too heavy is objectionable because it
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SWINE 461
indicates general coarseness and increases the relative percent-
age of cheap meat.
The shoulders should be long, full, and level on top. They
should be long, extending down even with the underline of the
body. While long shoulders are not necessarily correlated with
a deep chest or constitutional vigor, they give the hog a more
symmetrical appearance. They should be full, especially at
the lower end, which is often a weak point, and just forward of
the shoulders in the region known as the shoulder-vein. The
shoulders should not be too heavy, as it is a comparatively
cheap cut, nor should the skin be too thick and heavy, as such
indicates reversion to ancestral types, because these parts were
abnormally developed in the wild hog as a protection in fighting.
The back and loin should be of moderate length, straight,
broad, and evenly fleshed throughout. They should be very
carefully considered, as the back and loin furnish some of the
most valuable cuts. Here pork chop and pork roasts are se-
cured. The back should be strong, and this can best be ob-
tained by moderate length, as a too long back is likely to be
weak, particularly just back of the shoulders. It should be
straight or, better still, slightly arched, gradually rising from
the neck to the center of the back, and from there sloping very
gradually to the tail. There certainly should be no depression
or sway in the back from the shoulder to the tail. The back
should be broad, and this breadth should be evenly maintained
from the shoulder to the tail. It should be as broad on the
rear as it is in front. Tapering towards the rear — that is,
narrower across the loin and rump than across the shoulders —
is objectionable. The flesh covering should be even and firm,
giving a smooth carcass when slaughtered. °
The sides should be as long as possible and yet maintain suf-
ficient strength of back, which is best accomplished by medium
length. They should be deep and thick. The ribs should be
well arched and continue low down, giving great feeding
462 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
capacity. The underline should run straight from front flank
‘to rear flank, giving the side an even width throughout its
entire length. Sides should be firm and smooth, and free from
wrinkles and flabbiness. Wrinkles and creases, particularly
just back of the shoulders, are of common occurrence and are
usually objectionable, as they indicate uneven fattening and
poor quality of flesh. While the development of the shoulders
and hams is usually much greater than the sides, thus leaving
a marked depression just back of the shoulder and in front of
the hams, this should not be; the sides should be even with the
hams and shoulders and carry the fullness well down, giving
the animal a symmetrical and well-balanced appearance.
The belly should be low, giving the side good depth and in-
dicating great feeding capacity; it should be straight from fore
to rear, giving an even cut to the sides, and it should be firm
and smooth, as wrinkles indicate lack of lean and general flab-
biness. The width of the belly should be in proportion to the
hog in general. A very narrow belly is objectionable. :
The Azps should be as wide as the body in general and smoothly
covered with flesh. Narrow hips are very objectionable, as this
is the region of valuable meat. The hips should be so smoothly
covered that their location is not apparent to the eye. It is
commonly held that the hips should be rather low, as a very
high hip is not likely to be well covered.
The rump should be long, wide, and fairly level. It should
be long so as to increase the length of the ham. The width
should be carried back proportionately with the back, as a
peaked rump is very objectionable. Narrow, peaked rumps
mean thin-hams, which do not sell well on the market. As
a rule hogs droop considerably from the hips to the tail; never-
theless the nearer the rump approaches the level, the better
the cuts of meat will be; for this reason extremely drooping
rumps are to be avoided. The rump should be evenly and
smoothly fleshed from hips to tail.
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SWINE 463
The hams should be wide, deep, and plump. Viewing the pig
from behind, the hams should be wide from between the legs
to the outside; viewing from
the side, they should be deep,
that is, long from the tail down-
ward and fleshed well down to
the hock. Such a conformation
will give a long, wide, and
plump ham when slaughtered.
Often the hams lack fleshing [— =
above the hocks, the region be- Fis. 160.—Cxampion Brerxsurre Pra.
ing bare and thin, which results
in a poor ham when slaughtered. The flesh should be firm,
indicating that there is not too much fat, as very fat hams
are not desired on the market. Extra fat hams sell at low
prices.
The legs should be straight, strong, tapering, and well placed.
Knees that are considerably bent, or “bucked knees,” and
hocks that are very much cramped, are common defects among
swine. Crooked knees, those which come too close together,
and hocks too close, are all too common. Another very serious
objection, particularly among fat-hogs, is the tendency of their
pasterns to break down, leaving the animal to walk on the dew-
claws. Although common, and often among the very best bred
hogs, this is very serious and always to be guarded against.
Sometimes the underline slants upward from the front to the
hind flank, due to the hind legs being longer than the fore legs.
This should not be.
The legs should be short, strong, and placed wide apart, and
when the hog walks, the hind and fore legs should pass forward
in a straight line. Although inward and outward movements
of the legs are common, they are objectionable and account for
the awkward gait of many hogs. This is a common defect
among well-bred swine.
464 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
CHOOSING BACON-HOGS
The bacon-hog differs materially from the fat- or lard-hog,
particularly in type and flesh covering. The bacon type
originated to meet the demand for lean meat. Excessive fat-
ness is objectionable in this type and does not bring as high
price as when the lean and fat are well interspersed, giving the
meat a marbled appearance. The bacon-hog is extensively
grown in the Old World and Canada, but has never become
popular in the United States, although considerable bacon is
produced in the Eastern States.
In general appearance, the bacon type differs from the lard
type in the animals being more upstanding, much longer of
limb, the bodies considerably longer and not so wide, and the
hams and shoulders much lighter. The animals lack the heavy
flesh covering of the lard type.
Condition. — The flesh is not so thick as on the lard type of
hog, rarely exceeding one and one-half inches, but it must be
firm, smooth, and even over all parts. It should be firm, as
this indicates the presence of lean meat; it should be smooth
and free from wrinkles and seams, as smoothness indicates even
fleshing and good quality; and the flesh covering should he
even over all parts of the body in order that the cuts of bacon
may be uniform.
The form should be long, level, and deep. It should be long
in order to give length to the side cuts; it should be level and
free from sway back; andit should be deep in order to increase
the percentage of side meat. The shoulders and hams should
be light and the animal of uniform width from the shoulders
to the hams. Width is not sought, but both length and
depth are of prime importance. The form should appear
trim and neat, and the animal be free from all coarseness in
hair, hide, and bone.
The shoulders should be smoothly laid-in before, behind, and
CHOOSING AND JUDGING SWINE 465
on top; compact, indicating quality and firmness; and they
should be light, lacking the bulge of the lard-hog. The shoul-
der should fit closely to the body and not show more width on the
back; it should be free from coarseness; and the fleshing should
Fic. 161.— Lance Yor«SHIRE, oR LarcE Wuite, Sow. Photograph from
Farmers’ Advocate.
The Large Yorkshire or Large White breed of swine developed in England.
This breed is noted particularly for its bacon qualities. The quality of the
meat is unexcelled, being well marbled ; that is, the fat and lean are well mixed,
although the animals are rather late maturing. In size the breed is classed as
large. The breeding qualities are excellent. The color is white, the ears in-
clined to droop forward, and the face dished.
extend well down the legs, indicating muscular development
and giving a long shoulder cut.
Sides. — Among bacon-hogs the sides are of prime impor-
tance, as the choicest bacon comes from this region. It is,
therefore, essential to have as much as possible of the desired
weight in this region. The sides should be long, smooth, and
level. From shoulder to ham should be as long as possible
without increasing weakness, thus giving long side cuts; they
245
466 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
should be smooth and free from wrinkles and seams; and they
should be level from shoulders to hips. A swaying back or a
too pendulous belly are very objectionable.
Hams. — The rump should be long, and the fleshing should
be carried well downward toward the hock. Fullness and
plumpness are not essential, while good length, with smooth
muscular development, is of prime importance. The fleshing
should be firm and tapering towards the hock, thus giving a
neat and trim ‘‘gammon,” which is a cut very similar to the
ham.
CHAPTER XXII
THE FEEDING OF SWINE
UNLIKE cattle feeding, in which it is the common practice
for the animals to be bred on cheap land and later shipped to
the-corn-belt to be fattened, swine are largely bred and fed on
the same farm. The swine feeder must breed and grow his
own stock. The dangers from hog cholera and other swine
plagues are too great to make the buying of feeding swine in
the open market practicable. The breeding herd does not re-
quire much space, and in addition the sows are very prolific,
thus making it possible for a comparatively small number of
sows, maintained on a small
area, to produce many stock
hogs. Swine feeding, therefore,
is inseparable from swine breed-
ing.
No farm animal equals the
hog in turning food quickly into
marketable meat; and none has
yielded more profit to the aver- Fic. 162.—Larer Yorxsnire, or
age American farmer. In health p seal aera ee hotograph
no farm animal is more easily
cared for than the hog; it requires little shelter and will eat
almost any article of food placed at its disposal. From this
it would seem that the hog is the most economical meat pro-
ducing animal. This is true during health. The effort should
be, then, so to feed and manage the herd as to keep it in good
thrift at all times.
467
468 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
FOOD REQUIREMENTS FOR SWINE
The food required for a given gain among swine varies with
the kind of food and the age and weight of animals. Foods
vary largely in the energy they contain.
larger the animal the more food required for a given gain.
Wolff and Lehman, after much experimentation along this line,
have given us the following standards : —
The older and the
Wolff-Lehman standard, showing the amount of food required per 1000
pounds live weight for both growing and fattening swine
ConpDITION OF ANIMAL
DicesTIsLeE NUTRIENTS
Growing Swine Dryr- NUTRITIVE
Breeding MatrTer Ratio
Age, Mo. Weight Protein ae Fat
2-3 50 44 7.6 28.0 1.0 4.0
3-5 100 35 5.0 23.1 0.8 5.0
5-6 120 32 3.7 21.3 0.4 6.0
6-8 200 28 2.8 18.7 0.3 7.0
8-12 250 25 2.1 15.3 0.2 7.5
Growing Swine
Fattening
2-3 50 44 7.6 28.0 1.0 4.0
3-5 100 35 5.0 23.1 0.8 5.0
5-6 150 33 4.3 22.3 0.6 5.5
6-8 200 30 3.6 20.5 0.4 6.0
8-12 300 26 3.0 18.3 0.3 6.4
As with the standards for horses, cattle, and sheep, these
are arranged to meet the need of the average farm hogs
They are not intended to be abso-
under normal conditions.
lute.
THE FEEDING OF SWINE 469
PREPARING FOOD
Foods for swine are often prepared by grinding, soaking,
or cooking. There have been many experiments to deter-
mine the efficiency of each of these methods. These tests
give more or less contradictory results, and it is difficult to
‘letermine from a perusal of the literature to what extent the
food is rendered more efficient by such preparation. There
can be little doubt, however, but that each of these mcthods
increases the efficiency of certain foods under given conditions.
Grinding feed. — The advisability of grinding feed for swine
depends much on the kind of food and to some extent on the
age of the animals. Most of the experiments have been with
the grinding of corn, and the results have been varying. With
smaller and harder seeds and grains, such as peas, beans, millet,
and the like, there is a much better showing in favor of grind-
‘‘ing. The Canadian Central Experimental Farm conducted ex-
periments which show a saving of 17 per cent in favor of grinding
these smaller and harder seeds. The same may be true of corn
when the grain is very hard and dry.
Grinding some foods increases the palatability and thus favors
larger consumption. Swine fed ground food in the form of mash
are not likely to masticate it, but simply swallow it, and in
case the grain is not ground fine, the coarse particles are not
so readily or thoroughly digested. In masticating their own
grain swine will usually reduce it to rather fine particles, par-
ticularly if fed in the natural state. Thus it would seem that
if the grain is to be ground, it should be ground fine.
Soaking the feed.—It is a rather common practice to soak
whole grains and to wet meals before feeding. Soaking is a less
expensive process and in many instances may be as good as
grinding. One rather strong objection to feeding soaked grains,
especially when the animals are used to eating the grains whole,
is that they are likely to swallow the grains entire without mas-
470 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
tication. Soaking or wetting is, however, a very cheap method
of preparing hard grains for swine, by rendering them more
palatable and adding succulence.
Grains should be soaked long enough to make them soft.
They should not be permitted to sour. While sour food, as
such, is not injurious to swine, there is risk of feeding it one
time sour and the next time sweet, as digestive disorders will
surely follow a changing from one to the other.
Cooking the feed. — As a general practice, cooking food for
swine is no longer regarded as profitable. In fact, cooking
certain foods renders some of the nutrients less digestible.
Cooking feeds for swine, however, has many advantages, chief
of which are that it softens small and hard seeds; increases the
succulence and to some extent the palatability of certain dry
grains, such as peas and beans; reduces the water content of
certain other feeds, such as roots and tubers, which contain
more water than swine can economically use; and renders foods
more uniformly mixed. Furthermore, cooked foods do not sour
so readily, and the hard grains or particles of feed become
thoroughly softened. It is considered best to put a variety
of foods into the cooker. This serves a double purpose: since
the small grains usually contain more protein, they form a more
nearly balanced ration; and they add variety to the ration, and
thus increase the palatability.
MAKING UP A RATION
The ration is ordinarily not given much consideration in
swine feeding, but at the same time it is of great importance.
The several factors considered in determining the desirability
of a ration for other farm animals are of equal importance in
swine feeding. The dry matter, digestible nutrients, protein,
palatability, variety, suitability, and cost of foods should be
carefully considered.
Feeding capacity among swine. — As with steers, it is desirable
THE FEEDING OF SWINE 471
to develop capacity while the animals are young. A rather
bulky ration fed during the early part of the pig’s life will in-
crease the feeding capacity so that later in life he can consume
more than would be possible if he received only a concentrated
ration at first. “Furthermore, there is great danger of overfeed-
ing a pig; and if concentrated foods are used, this danger is
greatly increased. If once a pig is overfed, he will never con-
sume as much feed thereafter as he otherwise would.
Young animals grow much more rapidly than older ones.
The young pig should be encouraged to consume as much as
he can use to the best advantage. If the animal is fed too
small an amount at this time, he not only fails to develop
capacity, but does not make the most of that period of his life
when he is the most economical producer.
Later, as the time approaches for fattening and after the ca-
pacity has been developed, the animals should be put on a full
feed of rather concentrated food. This change should be made
gradually, as swine cannot endure a sudden change without dis-
orders following. :
Giving swine their feed. — When foods are fed in the form of
mash,.there is always much crowding about the trough, which
makes it very difficult for the feeder. To avoid this crowding,
place the trough alongside the fence and parallel to it, so that
the feeder may approach the trough from the outside and the
animals from the inside. A very good plan is to hang a panel
immediately above the trough, suspended from either end of
the upper side. By placing a latch in the center of the lower
side of the panel, it may be swung in and fastened to the
side of the trough in the lot, thus shutting the swine out of the
trough and giving the feeder an opportunity to put in the feed.
The panel may now be swung back and fastened to the out-
side of the trough, giving the swine access to the entire meal at
once. If there is more than one trough in the lot, the feed
should be placed in all before any of the panels are swung back.
472 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Sait in limited quantities should be kept before the swine at all
times. A very good plan is to provide a shallow strong box,
with slats nailed across the top, so the pigs cannot lie in the box,
then place charcoal and salt in the box. The box should be
placed under a shed and in a clean place. It is best not to
place too much before them at a time, but to keep renewing
the supply often, as this keeps the food clean and sweet.
Fresh, cool water should be available at all times, even though
the animals are being fed mash or slops. The trough should
be so arranged that the hogs cannot lie in the water and thus
litter up the trough. During the winter, hogs often fail to drink
a sufficient amount of water and fail to do well simply for this
reason. To obviate this difficulty, the chill should be driven off
the water and the supply should be fresh.
FEEDING THE BREEDING HERD
Feeding the breeding herd differs so essentially from the fat-
tening of swine that it is desirable to treat each separately. In
feeding the herd the object is to keep the animals in a healthy
and thrifty condition. Flesh formation is to be encouraged and
fattening discouraged. If the breeding herd is permitted to be-
come too fat, the animals fail to breed regularly, the litters are
small, and the dangers from difficult parturition are increased.
Feeding the breeding herd naturally divides itself into two parts,
summer and winter feeding. Each of these divisions calls for
widely different practices. Furthermore, the common practice
of breeding swine so young makes it necessary to consider feed-
ing the younger animals separately from the older ones, as the
young and growing breeding animal calls for very different
foods from the older and mature ones.
Feeding the herd in summer
It is the common practice to confine the breeding herd in
too crowded quarters. This close confinement and a too exclu-
THE FEEDING OF SWINE : 473
sive grain feeding account for much of the shy breeding among
many of the more prominent breeds. Hogs will live and breed
under such confinement, but greatest success cannot be attained
under these systems of management. Another serious mistake
is the too liberal use of corn. While no food equals corn for
fattening swine, it is not a good grain for the breeding ani-
mals, and its too exclusive use is a common cause of barren-
ness or of small litters.
Fic. 163.— Duroc Jersey Boar. First prize, Wisconsin State Fair, 1908.
The Duroc Jersey breed of swine is a native of the United States. This breed,
like the Poland China, is noted for its fat production and early maturing
qualities. The breeding qualities of the breed are considered good, as the sows
are fairly prolific. In size the breed is classed as medium. The color is red,
the ears drooping, and face straight. The breed is increasing in popularity
in America,
Ample room should be provided. Nothing is better than
pasturing or soiling. Soiling is likely to involve too much labor
on the average American farm, but in such cases there is usually
an abundance of pasture. Sometimes hogs are denied the run
of a pasture because they require a rather tight fence, and if
474 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
not properly ringed are likely to root up the sod. While hog-
tight fencing is expensive, it must be remembered that greatest
success cannot be attained without pasture. In most local-
ities, woven wire will prove the most effective in restraining the
herd. It need not be high, although all things considered, the
four-foot fence with a barb-wire on top will be found the most
practicable.
With an abundance of pasturage, the breeding herd need
receive no grain until a short time before farrowing, when grain
should be fed sparingly in addition to the pasture. The well-
fed sow will be more quiet at farrowing time and be less likely
to injure her pigs than will the lean gaunt one lacking in milk.
When grain is fed, the kind will depend somewhat on the kind
of pasture; but as a general rule nothing is better than wheat
bran or middlings, as it is rich in protein and mineral matter,
two elements much needed by the developing pigs. Further-
more, bran stimulates the flow of milk, which is very essential
for the sow with a large litter.
Ringing to prevent rooting. — Nothing is more natural than
for swine to root, and if the pastures and meadows are to remain
uninjured, the animals must be
restrained by placing rings in
their noses. This applies par-
ticularly on permanent pastures.
On clover or alfalfa pastures,
there is not so much danger of
=|! the sod being injured, as swine
Fig. 164.— First Prize Duroc JER- seem to get @ more nearly bal-
sey Boar. Wisconsin State Fair, .
1908. anced ration and do not have
the desire to root up the sod as
on. blue-grass, red-top, timothy, or any non-leguminous pasture
plant. The object should be to ring whenever the swine begin
to injure the pastures. The operation of placing the rings in
the nose is not difficult, a hog ringer, some rings, and a short
THE FEEDING OF SWINE 475
rope being all the apparatus that is necessary. Tie a small loop
in one end of the rope, slip the loop into the animal’s mouth
and draw the head up. With the ringer pincers, firmly insert
the rings into the nose, but not too deep, for if set so deep as
to bind or pinch the muscle inside the ring, they will always be
an annoyance to the animal. One or, in the case of old brood
sows, at most two rings are all that are needed for each animal.
Pasture for swine. — Swine may be turned to any pasture
land that is available,—permanent or sown pasture. When
properly ringed, they are no more injurious to pastures than any
other farm animal. Swine thrive much better when they have
access to green forage plants. Since the common pasture plants
are not available before warm weather, it is often of advantage
to provide an earlier forage. Rye sown somewhat early in
the fall makes an excellent substitute for pasture grass, early the
following spring. Among the permanent pasture grasses, blue-
grass comes on very early and provides much succulence through-
out the season. Clover, alfalfa, and cowpeas are unexcelled as
swine pasture in the regions where they thrive. For a quick
growing crop, rape is probably to be accorded first place.
Roots for swine. — Roots are valuable as a food for swine
during the late fall and winter months. They are mainly
desired because of their stored succulence and to serve as a sub-
stitute for pasture. In the United States, roots have not been
so commonly used as in Canada or the Old Country, though of
late years they have increased in favor, and their usefulness,
especially in the corn-belt, is being recognized. Sugar-beets,
mangels, rutabagas, turnips, and carrots are grown as food for
swine. Of these, many prefer mangels largely because of their
high yield per acre, although they will not give as good results
as sugar-beets.
The Jerusalem artichoke, a tuber belonging to the sunflower
family, is often grown as a succulent for swine. This tuber is
highly esteemed for fall, winter, and spring use. It is planted
476 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
in much the same way as the potato and grows from the eye
of the tuber, which may be planted whole, or cut, usually whole
if planted in the fall and cut if planted in the spring. By re-
moving the hogs before all the tubers are secured, this crop
may be grown successively for many years without replanting.
Fig. 165.—Curster Wuite Boar. Photograph by C. 8S. Plumb.
The Chester White breed of swine first became prominent in Chester County,
Pennsylvania. This breed is noted for its fat production. The breeding
qualities rank high. It may be regarded as one of the most prolific of the fat-
producing hogs. In size the breed is classed as the largest of the middle
weights. The color is white, the ears drooping, and the face straight.
Many swine breeders and feeders do not grow artichokes
because of the opinion that when once established they are
dificult to destroy. This is not true. To destroy the crop,
let the hogs root out every tuber, then plow and plant to corn
or some other cultivated crop.
Pumpkins and squashes are much relished by swine in the late
THE FEEDING OF SWINE ATT
fall and early winter. The custom of planting the pumpkins
in the corn results in being able to grow them at almost no ex-
pense; and their keeping qualities add to their value as a suc-
culent food for winter feeding. In addition to their succulence
the seed is very rich in protein; thus they make a very good
supplement for corn. Pumpkin seeds are a natural vermifuge.
When many pumpkins are fed, the animals should be watched
closely to see that they do not get an overfeed of seed and di-
gestive disorders follow.
Feeding the herd in winter
More care must be given the feeding of the herd in winter
than in summer; although if roots or other succulent food has
been provided, the matter will be less difficult than if the
feeder is obliged to rely entirely on dry feeds. The cheapness
and the great abundance of corn really adds to the difficulty
of wintering the herd. The great temptation all through the
corn-belt is to feed a too exclusive corn ration. This difficulty
is increased by the fact that no food equals corn in the fatten-
ing of swine; and the majority of swine feeders let the herd run
with the fattening swine, with the result that the breeding
herd gets so fat that its breeding powers are materially lessened,
the sows often become barren, and those that do breed farrow
small litters of pigs lacking thrift and vigor.
To avoid such difficulties, the herd must be separated from
the fattening swine and fed a growing ration rather than a
fattening ration. The object should be to keep the herd thrifty,
but not fat. This can best be done by feeding such grains as
wheat bran, middlings, and the like, also roots, pumpkins, and
skim-milk for succulence. Alfalfa, clover, or cowpea hay in small
quantities may be fed-with profit. Hayshould be fed from a rack
and not thrown upon the ground, as the animals will tramp it
under their feet. When the hay is clean and sweet, and slightly
salty, the swine will eat it and be much benefited thereby.
478 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
When the grain is fed in the form of meal, better results will
be secured by mixing with water, or better still skim-milk, and
fedasa mash. If skim-milk is used, much care should be taken
not to feed the animals too much, as they will take on flesh
rapidly and may become too fat. A very good mixture is made
by using one part meal to five parts of water or skim-milk.
Another common mistake is confining the herd too closely in
the winter season. The quarters become very muddy. While
it is not possible to keep swine from rooting when the ground
is soft or from wallowing when the weather is warm, they
should be given sufficient room for exercise, and provided with
quarters free from mud where they may eat and sleep, although
the platform on which they feed should be separated from the
one on which they sleep.
Feeding the young and old herd. — Since the young animals
are building bone and flesh for their own bodies, they need a more
nitrogenous ration than the older animals that have attained
their growth and need only enough protein to supply the waste.
While the feeding of the young herd will depend much on the
age at which the animals are bred, it may be said in a general
way that the young herd needs a narrower ration than the old
herd. Thus if the feeder has only sufficient skim-milk for a
part of the herd, it would prove more profitable to feed the
young herd the milk in connection with the grain and give
the old ones water with their other food. In this way the
younger animals will get the necessary mineral matter. The
importance of well-chosen nourishment for the young herd
cannot be overestimated.
FATTENING SWINE
Feeding swine for fattening differs essentially from feeding
the breeding herd. In fattening, the sole object is the economic
production of pork. As a rule the animals are forced to the
limit of their ability as feeders, fattened and marketed under one
THE FEEDING OF SWINE , 479
year of age. In this respect pork production is somewhat similar
to beef production. The same general factors apply in both
cases. Pork production is as much of a business as beef pro-
duction and should be conducted accordingly.
Feeding the. lard-hog
If light -hogs are to be the product, the fattening process
will begin much earlier in the life of the animal than if heavy
hogs are to be produced. If lard-hogs are to be produced, the
feeds will be much different from those required if bacon is to
be the product. In the lard-hog, thick fat is desired, while in
Fic. 166.— CueEster Wuite Pies. Prize winners at Wisconsin State Fair in
1908.
the bacon-hog the flesh covering is rather thin and well inter-
spread; that is, the lean and fat are placed in layers, giving the
meat a marbled appearance, when cut crossways. In the lard-
hog, fattening foods are to be fed, while in the bacon-hog flesh-
ing foods should be used.
Feeding the lard-hog in summer.— As a rule, swine should be
fed in comparatively small droves. It is very important that
the drove be made up of individuals of the same age as well as
the same size. If a few of the individuals are larger and stronger,
they will crowd the smaller and weaker ones back and get more
than their allotment of the food.
480 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Whatever food-stuffs are used, the swine should be put on
full feed slowly. Much care should be exercised not to throw
them off their feed in the beginning, as it will take some time for
animals to recover. For best results swine should never be fed
more than they will clean up at each meal. Fattening swine
make better returns for the food consumed when their appetites
are kept keen; they wait eagerly for their food and relish it
much better than when overfed. If convenient, they should be
fed both mash and dry grain. Nothing makes a better food
for swine in the fore part of the fattening period than meal and
skim-milk mixed in the proportion of one part of meal to five
of milk. As the period progresses the portion of meal should
be gradually increased until towards the close the proportion
may be one part to three parts of skim-milk. If the skim-milk
is not available, water may be used to make the mash. If water
is used, the mash should be fed much thicker, using only enough
water to mix the meal, as it is useless to fill the fattening animal
up on water and thus prevent the consumption of nutritious
foods. When such is the case, some linseed meal should be
used, say 10 per cent of the meal. In either case, dry grain
should be fed in addition.
Swine will make much better returns for the food consumed
if they have access to green forage. Where fattening hogs are
turned to pasture, it must be so arranged that they need not
graze over too large an area. If at all convenient, it will be more
profitable to cut the green forage and feed to the hogs. In
this way a smaller area will support a larger number of hogs, and
the swine need not rustle to get the much needed succulence.
The number of hogs that may be pastured on an acre will de-
pend on the age and size of the animals, the quality and kind
of crop, and other conditions. For an average it may be said
that an acre of blue-grass will support eight to ten hogs for
two months or more in the spring, and for two months in the
fall; red clover should support six to ten hogs for three or four
THE FEEDING OF SWINE 481
months ; alfalfa from ten to fifteen for five months; cowpeas
six to eight for two or three months; and artichokes should
support from six to ten hogs to the acre for a considerable length
of time in the late fall. Clover, alfalfa or cowpea pasture is
to be preferred. Alfalfa in those sections where it will thrive
is regarded as the leading pasture plant for swine. It should
not be grazed so closely as to make mowing unnecessary. To
keep alfalfa in the best condition it should be mowed from one to
three times in a season. These estimates are to be modified
according to conditions.
It is very important that fattening swine be provided with
shade and an abundance of cool, fresh water. The sebacious
glands of the hog are very rudimentary, and the animal can-
not perspire and therefore must keep cool by radiation. This
is one reason why hogs desire mud wallows, and for best results
these must be provided, particularly for thick, fat animals, which
suffer greatly with the heat during the warm summer months.
To avoid the extreme heat of summer, many swine feeders plan
to have the animals fat by the first of July, when they are sold.
Feeding the lard-hog in winter. — When roots or other succu-
lence is available for winter use, much better results can be
obtained than if dry feed alone must be depended on. Sugar-
beets, roots, turnips, potatoes, artichokes, and pumpkins are
often used. No succulence exceeds skim-milk for winter feed-
ing. In the absence of any other succulent food, mashes
should be made, as suggested for summer feeding. For best
results, mash or succulent food, grain, and a small amount of dry
forage should be fed. Sweet, clean clover or alfalfa hay should
constitute the dry forage. It should be fed from a rack.
Care should be exercised in providing dry quarters and lots
as free from mud as possible. The warmth of the quarters best
suited for fattening swine may depend somewhat on the feeds
used. When corn, in one of its many forms, as ear corn, shelled
corn, corn meal, and the like, constitutes the major part of the
21
482 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
ration, the quarters need not be so warm as when an abundance
of more succulent food is fed, such as skim-milk. It has been
proved that for best results, when skim-milk or other very suc-
culent food is freely employed, the quarters should be rather
warm yet very well ventilated and well lighted. Fattening
swine are not likely to spend much time in poorly ventilated,
dark, and foul-smelling quarters. They prefer the cold to
Fic. ie —Vicrorta Sow. First prize, Ohio State Fair. Photograph by
C. 8. Plumb.
The native home of the Victoria is in the United States. It is somewhat
similar to the Cheshire, perhaps tending more towards the lard type. The
breeding qualities are fair, the sows producing medium-sized litters. In size
the breed is classed as small. The color is white, the ears erect, and the face
dished.
such places, and for this reason swine are often known to build
a nest or bed out in the open lot, illustrating that they prefer
exposure to foul quarters. When sweet, well lighted, and well
ventilated quarters are provided, swine will be found to occupy
them except when feeding and taking exercise. Hogs are not
dirty animals by nature, except as they like to wallow in
warm weather.
THE FEEDING OF SWINE 483
During the cold winter season, swine often fail to drink suffi-
cient water to meet their needs. This often seriously in-
terferes with their fattening. To avoid this difficulty, they
should be encouraged to drink water. That contained in
skim-milk, slop, or other succulence is not sufficient. When it
is at all possible, the chill should be taken off before the water
is offered the animals. Swine compelled to eat snow or lick ice
to get water will surely fail to fatten profitably. The importance
of this cannot be overestimated, for in addition to not gaining
rapidly the system becomes weakened and the animals contract
diseases more readily. :
Feeding the bacon-hog
In the production of bacon, the foods must differ from those
used in feeding the fat-hog. In some cases the same food
stuffs may be used in part, but the mixture must be varied.
Corn, the mainstay in the production of the fat-hog, can-
not be used with success in larger proportions than one-third
of the grain ration. A larger proportion is likely to produce
an undesirable quality of bacon. The foods very largely used
are shorts, oats, peas, barley, and skim-milk. Barley is perhaps
the food most used, especially in Canada, where bacon production
finds much favor. It is often fed ground or soaked. Usually
it is fed in connection with small amounts of other food, as peas,
oil meal, finely ground oats, tankage, and the like. Peas are
used to a considerable extent in the production of bacon in
Canada. ‘‘Canada pea-fed bacon” has good market repu-
tation. Among some large bacon feeders, however, peas are not
held in high estimation, the statement being made that they give
dry, rather hard, and flavorless bacon. Oats are often objected
to because of their hulls, which contain little nutrition and
much crude fiber; yet when the price is low, they are extensively
used. Crushing the oats is considered the best method of
preparation.
484 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Skim-milk is held in high esteem by the bacon feeder ;
therefore localities devoted to dairying other than market
milk are admirably adapted for the production of bacon. It
may be fed in the same proportion as to the fat-hog, — that is,
three to five parts milk to one of meal.
Summer feeding on pasture. — Clover, alfalfa, cowpeas, or
rape are excellent pastures for bacon production. Less protein-
rich grain or less skim-milk is required when the swine have
access to such ranges. No cheaper or more economical gains
can be obtained than from a light grain ration when the animals
have these pastures.
Winter feeding wn dry-lot.— Bacon production during the
winter season is approximately 25 per cent more costly than
feeding on pasture. For best results, some succulent food
should be supplied. This may be furnished by growing roots,
such as sugar-beets, mangels, turnips, and the like, and storing
them for winter use. When the animals are confined to a dry-
lot, more protein-rich food is required, which calls for larger
amounts of oil meal, shorts, tankage, or skim-milk, most of which
must be purchased. This balancing is very essential in the
production of bacon, as quality is what commands the extra
price. The lean and fat must be well interspersed, and this can
be secured only by properly balancing the ration.
SAMPLE RATIONS FOR SWINE
To give sample rations for horses, cattle, and sheep is a com-
paratively simple matter, but such is not the case with swine.
The composition and amount of the ration are influenced by
the age and weight of the animal. For 100 pounds live weight,
the younger the animal the more food required, and in addition
it should contain more protein than for the older animal. To
illustrate the ration for fattening swine of increasing size the
following data is made up from Bulletin 106 of the Iowa Ex-
periment Station : —
THE FEEDING OF SWINE 485
Amount of Food consumed per Hog
Averaée Dairy Freep PER Hoa, Pounps.
Periops or Four Werexs Eace Wuos
TIME
Kinp or GRAIN
1 2 3
4
5
Hogs weighing 40 Pounds
at Start and 140 at Close
Dry ear corn !
Soaked shelled corn
Dry corn meal
Soaked corn meal
2.4 2.8 3.0
2.4 3.0 3.1
2.3 2.9 3.4
2.6 3.2 3.5
4.6
4.1
5.0
5.6
’
Hogs weighing 50 Pounds
at Start and 150 at Close
Dry ear corn!
Soaked shelled corn
Dry corn meal
Soaked corn meal
3.0 3.4 3.8
3.1 3.9 4.1
3.0 3.6 3.9
3.2 4.2 4.5
Dry ear corn! .
Soaked shelled corn
Dry corn meal
Soaked corn meal
3.8 5.2 6.7
3.6 5.1 5.8
3.6 4.3 5.8
4.1 6.3 6.7
Hogs weighing 200 Pounds at Start and 365 at Close
Dry ear corn! .
Soaked shelled corn
Dry corn meal
Soaked corn meal
7.5 9.3 7.7
7.6 9.7 8.6
7.3 9.9 9.9
8.1 9.6 9.9
To give an idea of the ration for fattening swine when a
supplement is used in connection with corn, the following data
1 The weight of the cob has been deducted from the figures for shelled corn.
486 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
are taken from Bulletin 65 of the Missouri Experiment Sta-
tion : —
Feed and Gains in Weight, 90 days
DaILy DaiLy
Ramon woe (yen) ree | eee
Heap Heap
Corn meal 5 parts, linseed-oil meal 1
part . . . 116 260 5.6 1.5
Corn meal 10 parts, iadeede oil oe 1
part! .. é 131 209 7.6 1.5
Corn meal 10 parts: linsesd-dil nical i
part . .. 118 209 5.3 1.5
Corn meal 2 parts, heat middling 1
part .. : 114 226 5.3 1.2
Corn meal 4 parts, fhiuade muddlines 1
part .. 117 213 5.0 1.1
Corn meal 2 mares: ‘oreand oats 1 iit 120 173 3.7 0.6
Corn meal 4 parts, ground oats1 part} 111 166 3.8 0.6
Corn meal 4 parts, wheat bran 1 part | 111 188 4.4 0.9
Corn and cob meal ye Sree oa) Ye 135 3.0 0.3
Cornmeal . ...... . .} 115 183 4,2 0.8
Soaked shelled corn. . . . . .| 4115 172 3.6 0.6
Shelled corn, bone meal ? bs shee all | GA 153 3.0 0.5
Shelled corn . . .... . «J U5 152 3.0 0.4
1 Sixty days.
26.2 pounds bone meal per head in ninety days.
CHAPTER XXIII
THE BREEDING OF SWINE
As previously stated, pork production differs from beef pro-
duction in the fact that swine are bred and fed on the same
farm, whereas feeding cattle are frequently bred on the cheap
lands and shipped to the corn-belt to be fed. Since swine are
reared and finished in one place, if success is to be attained, the
feeder must be a breeder as well. Many good swine feeders
often fail to exercise proper judgment in breeding. Breeding
swine is as much a business as feeding swine, and should be
conducted with that understanding. When the price of hogs
is high, the tendency is to rush into swine raising, forgetting
the advantages of good quality, with the result that in a few
months the hog market is glutted with animals of inferior
quality which, of course, command only a low price. This is
discouraging, and the enthusiast of a few months quits the
hog business. With proper management, no line of farming
will prove more profitable than pork production, especially if
continued over a long series of years.
PLAN OF BREEDING
Before beginning to breed swine, one should decide on a plan.
Before formulating the plan one will have to decide upon the
kind of hog he is going to breed. Some will wish to breed market
hogs only, others breeding hogs only, while still others may wish
to produce both market and breeding hogs. When market
hogs only are to be produced, grades may prove as profitable as
487
488 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
pure-bred animals, especially if much care is taken in the pro-
duction of the grades and a pure-bred boar is used. On the
other hand, if breeding hogs are to be produced, pure-bred ani-
mals only can be grown with profit. This calls for much knowl-
edge of the principles of breeding, such as selection, mating, and
the like. Another question that will also modify the plan
is the amount of capital available for the establishment of the
business. When the capital is small and the experience want-
ing, the grade herd is to be preferred. The beginner may well
Fic. 168.— CuHampion Hampsuire Swine. Bred and owned by John Good-
win, Potomac, Iowa.
The Hampshire breed of swine was developed in the United States. Like the
Poland China, this breed is noted for its early maturing and economic fattening
qualities. As breeders the sows rank high. In size the breed is classed with
the middle weights. The color is black, with a white belt about the body.
The breed is increasing in popularity, and animals of the breed are in much
demand by the packers.
start with not more than two or three sows, in pig when pur-
chased, as he can acquire much valuable experience with even so
small a number, while his risk will not be great. The second year
he may add to the number of sows, secure a suitable and pure-
bred boar, and each succeeding year carefully increase the
number of sows bred. In this way, one should soon find
himself in possession of a large herd, and of sufficient knowl-
edge to put it to profitable use.
THE BREEDING OF SWINE 489
Coéperative breeding. — Pure-bred boars are likely to be
costly, and to get the most out of them should be kept in con-
stant use. Since the average farmer does not possess sows
enough to get the maximum use of the boar, it is often a
good plan for a number of farmers to coéperate in the purchase
of aboar. Such coéperation not only reduces the cost of service,
but aids in increasing the uniformity of the animals in a locality.
Furthermore, when a number of farmers codperate in the pur-
chase of a hog, a much better animal can be secured than if each
purchases in his own account.
SELECTING BREEDING STOCK
Many practical questions enter into the selection of swine for
breeding purposes. As a general rule, the animals chosen should
be rather large for the breed to which they belong. In the past
few years there has been a tendency to reduce the size of mar-
ket hogs, and this has extended to the brood sows, with the re-
sult that many of the sows now used for breeding are decidedly
too small for the farrowing and raising of two large and strong
litters of pigs each year. Probably the greatest fault of im-
proved swine breeding is the striving for too great refinement.
If large litters of strong pigs are to result, the sows must possess
much size and length and a good constitution, as shown in suffi-
cient width and depth of the chest region.
The type. — A consideration of prime importance in the selec-
tion of a breed or type is the likes and the dislikes of the breeder.
One is much more likely to succeed with the animals he likes and
to fail with other animals of equal merit that he dislikes. Other
than this there is little to choose, as’each breed has its weak and
strong points. In some sections, however, certain breeds will
remain the most popular because of their adaptability to the
climate. Thus in certain parts of the United States, especially
the West and South, white hogs are not looked on with favor
because they are more liable to be sun-scalded, to have scurvy
490 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and often mangy skins. Again, in the corn-belt, bacon types
doubtless will never be most popular because the available food
is not such as to produce bacon.
Uniformity. — In selecting animals for the breeding herd it is
very important that they be similar in age, size, color, condi-
tion, and quality. The importance of this similarity among
market swine cannot be overestimated. To get animals that
will remain uniform, it isessential to know something of the herd
from which they come. A herd noted for its uniformity is
likely to produce animals that are uniform. In addition to the
uniformity, the herd should be prolific. The sows should farrow
and raise two litters of six or more pigs each year. Prolificacy
is hereditary. A prolific herd is likely to produce prolific
animals.
THE BOAR
The boar is sire of the pigs from many dams, and his general
influence, therefore, is much greater than that of any sow can
possibly be. Therefore, for general improvement the boar
should be largely relied on, as he can effect change either for good
or bad much more rapidly than the sows. The boar should be
the best that the number and quality of the sows or the circum-
stances of the breeder will permit. The ordinary breeder can-
not afford an extremely high-priced boar and is compelled to do
the best he can with the money at his command. This may be
a blessing in disguise, for it should be the work of the ordinary
breeder to grow market hogs, and when the boar is used to sire
market hogs, there is a limit beyond which one cannot go and
realize a profit from swine breeding. Only the man who is
breeding show animals can afford to pay a large sum for a boar
and make a profit on his investment. In any event, however,
the animal that is chosen should be a pure-bred, for if not
pure-bred he cannot be depended on to stamp his own
qualities on his offspring. If the boar should be put to service
THE BREEDING OF SWINE 491
too immature, he cannot be expected to get vigorous pigs.
He should not be used before eight months of age, and it will
be more profitable in the long run to defer using him until one
year of age. When once a satisfactory boar is found, he should
be kept in service as long as he gives satisfaction. When of no
use as a boar, he should be castrated, and fattened for the
market.
THE SOWS ia
As suggested for the boar, when at all possible the sows that
are to form the foundation herd should be chosen on the farm
where raised. This personal inspection may call for an extra
outlay in expense, but it will be well worth while, as it enables
one to know the herd from.which they sprang and in this way
gain an idea as to the kind of offspring that may be expected.
Furthermore, if the sows are purchased from a successful
breeder, the beginner can get much information as to the care
and management of swine.
The age at which to purchase foundation animals is a much-
discussed question, many preferring to buy as soon as the pigs
are weaned, since usually they can be purchased more cheaply,
others preferring to wait until the animals are bred and to
purchase sows in pig. Purchasing sows already in pig will save
to the beginner a considerable outlay at the start, and, all
things considered, it is perhaps the most desirable time to
acquire them.
A good brood sow is a roomy animal, with rather long deep
body and well-developed pelvic region. The back should be
strong and well supported, as a weak or sagging back is very
objectionable in breeding or market swine. There should be
evidence of thrift and constitutional vigor, as these indicate
prepotency. A good brood sow will have many of the char-
acteristics of a good milk cow. She should be motherly, with
a gentle quiet’ disposition; she should be a good milker, thus
492 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
providing much nutrition for her offspring; and she should be
prolific in farrowing healthy, quick-growing pigs. She should
have six or more functional teats on either side. When inspect-
ing the teats, one should see that there are no blind teats either
in the front or in the rear.
Productive period. — On the average farm, sow pigs are bred
too young. Well-kept sows will often breed as young as three
months of age. They should not, however, under any con-
sideration, be bred under six months, eight months being as
young as it is proper to breed them. Sows bred too young
will remain not only underdeveloped, but small litters of weak
pigs will result. There is a rather widespread and growing
practice of breeding sows at six to eight months of age, rais-
ing one litter of pigs and then fattening the sows for market.
This is not good practice, for once a good brood sow is found
she should be kept as long as she continues to breed true and do
well. Some sows will remain productive until five or six years
‘of age, while others will become clumsy or vicious before that
time.
Season to breed. — Throughout the United States the main
crop of pigs should come in the warm days of March to May,
and the second crop in September to November. Since the
period of gestation in sows is approximately 112 days, this
means that they should be mated in December, January, and
February for the first crop and in June, July, and August for
the second crop. As a general rule in the northern states, a
sow should not be bred so as to farrow her pigs in the spring
before March, nor later in the fall than October. Both early
spring litters and those of early fall will pay the best on the
average, as the care of the pigs in the mild season is not so
difficult, and such pigs are likely to make larger and more
economic gain than litters farrowed in the hot days of summer
or the cold days of winter.
Method of mating. —As a rule sows come around every three
THE BREEDING OF SWINE 493
weeks ; hence if the sow has been mated and for some reason has
failed to conceive, she should make the fact known in 20 to 21
days after coupling. A careful record should be kept of the
date of mating so that the probable time of farrowing may be
known.
Often one wishes to mate a large heavy boar to a small sow
or a small short-legged boar to a large sow, and to facilitate this
Fig. 169.—CursHiIRE Pig or Goop Type owNneD sat New York State
CoLLEeGE OF AGRICULTURE AT CoRNELL UNIVERSITY, ITHaca, N. Y.
The Cheshire breed of swine originated in New York. The breed is noted for
occupying a position between the true lard and the true bacon types. It is
rather slow maturing, but the quality of flesh is unexcelled. The breeding
qualities are excellent. In size the breed is classed as small. The color is
white, the ears erect, and the face slightly dished.
the construction of a breeding-crate will be found extremely
useful, if not a necessity to insure a successful service. This
crate is simple, resembling a strong shipping-crate with one
end out. A very convenient size is 6 feet in length, 2 feet
4 inches inside width, and 3 feet high. The frame should be
constructed of 2” X 4” scantling, closed in front and open
494 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
behind. Through the scantling, on either side of the crate,
should be bored 14” holes, so that an inch iron bar may be
slipped behind the sow above the hocks to prevent her from
backing out of the crate. On the inside, on either side of
the crate, 2’’’x 4’ strips should be fastened, placing the front
end about where the sow’s head comes, and then extending to
the rear and bottom. These strips are for the boar’s front feet
to rest upon, thus holding his weight from the sow. When mat-
ing a small boar to a large sow, a small platform may be con-
structed and placed in the crate for the boar’s hind feet to rest
upon; or the sow may be placed in a pit.
The pregnant sow. — The pregnant sow may be permitted to
run with the herd to within two weeks of farrowing time,
when she should be separated and given special attention. In
the case of ill-natured sows, they should receive extra care
during the entire period in order to familiarize them with the
herdsman. Brood sows should be trained much as dairy cows.
During the last two weeks of pregnancy, the sow will need
less exercise than formerly, but should have the best possible
attention as to feeding. She should be well nourished up to a
few days before farrowing, when the feed may be slightly
reduced. Sows that are well fed before and after farrowing are
less likely to injure the pigs, as they will usuallylie quiet. This
does not mean to overfeed, as this will bring troubles at pigging
time; but it does mean that the sow should not be compelled
to go far afield to find her food. If at all possible, succulence
of some kind should be provided; in summer nothing is better
than clover or alfalfa pasture, and in winter roots may be fed
with good results.
If the sow is due to farrow in winter, the quarters should be
warm, comfortable, well ventilated, protected from dampness,
and so arranged that they may have plenty of sunlight. The
floor may be of earth, but should be dry and hard and free from
dust. The sow’s bedding need not be great in quantity, enough
495
THE BREEDING OF SWINE
shop ZI smog —auins ur u0iynjsab fo porsad Burnoys 91907,
iz | 1g 61 | 18 og | 1€ | 6T | Tg 61 | TE oz | 1 ez | Ig
oz | og} iz | oe! st joe] et | og] 6t|] of | 8ST | 08} Gr] Of | ST} OF] GT] Of] ET] oO¢ Tz | o¢
6t |6z] of | 6z| zt | 62] St | 62] ST] 62 | ZI | 62] st} 62] ZT] 62] ST} 62] ST] 62 0 | 6%
st |se] 6t |sz| ot | 92] 2t | sz] 20] 83 | 9t | 82] Zr} 88] Qt} 8a} 21 | 82] ZT] Sz] et | sz] 6t | gz
2t} 22] st | ze} et | zz] ot | 2a} Ot] 28 | ST | 2a] of] 40] ST) 240] OL) 2a] OT] ze] st | zz] st | zz
91 |9z] zt | 92] FI | 9¢] eT | 92] ST] 92 | FL | 92} ET] 93] FI} 9S] ST] 92] ST} 92] zt | 9a] zt | 92
ct |¢z}] 9t jez} et jez] et | ea) FI] $e jet | Se] Fr} G2] St] oo] FL) So] FL] Gz] ot | ez] ot | oz
3. | $2] St | ee] st | eo] St | Fo] SI] Fe | st | Fe] et} Fe) ST] HS] EL) Fe] ST] FE] ST | FZ] GT | #2
et |ez] er | ez} tr | ee] 2t | ez} ot] es | it | ee] et} 2] It] ee} et) e2| et] ez] Fr | ez] er | ez
zi |2e} et | zz} or | ee} it | 22} tt] go | or | ae] 1} 2] OL) 22} TL] 2] Ir] oe] et | az} et | 2
Ir {| zt |1z| 6 |tz2| ot | 1] Of} 12 |}6 | 12] or) te} 6 | Te] OL] Te] OT! 12] et | tz] at | tz
ol }oz}] 11 |oz}] 8 |oz} 6 {oz} 6 | 02 |8 |02] 6 | O08] 8 | 0%) 6 | OZ} 6 | Of] TI | oz] Tr | oz
6 |6t] ot jet] 2 |6t] 8 |6t] 8 | 6f |Z |6t}] 8 | GL] 2 | GI} 8 | GT] 8 | GI] ot | 6T| oF | ET
gs |st| 6 |st}] 9 |st}] 2 |st}] Zz | st |9 |st}] 2 | St] 9 | SE] 2 |] St] 2 | St} 6 {st} 6 {8st
Z2 l/ztl|s fat] ¢ {zt} 9 |2t] 9 | zt |}¢ |2t}] 9 | zt] ¢ | Zt] 9 | Zt] 9 | zt} 8 Jat] 8 fat
9 |or}] z |or| + |ot} ¢ |9t] ¢ | 91 |% J|9t}] ¢ | Ot] & | OT] ¢ | OT] SG | OT] 2 Jot] 2 jot
¢ ict] 9 |erl| e¢ |sr] # |et}] &* | st J@ jst] * | st] & | st] * | st] * | st} 9 |st}] 9 | et
> |trl ¢ |etl z |Ft| ¢ |e] ¢ | 1 ]a |r] ¢ | Ft] @ | et] & | FL] & | FL] ¢ | Ft] ¢ | et
e |er| + |et] t |er] 2 jer] @ | st |i ler] zg | st] ti} et] @ |] st] @ | et] & ler) & | et
Z |St] & | et} ‘qed I | er] t | ot |4on I | @t [deg t_| @t] T | at] ¢ jer} ¢ | a
1 |r] 2 Ir| te | et] ‘oer ‘aq Tg | st | 220 Te | Zt [any Aine z It] @ It
“dy, t |orl og |1t}] te | 1] og] mz ]oe | It] og] If] O& | IL} Te] If] og] It] T Jory tT | or
TE | OT | ABW 6z | OoL| of | OT] 62] OL | 6% | OT] 6%] OT] 62] OT} OF | OT] 62] OT | oune ACW
o¢ |6 | sz |6 | sz |6 | 62 |6 | 82] 6 {8% 16 | gz! 6 | 82] 6 | 6] 6 | 82] 6 | T€ 16 | OF 16
6z is | 4g 1s | zz }/s | sz }s |] za; 8 | 42/8 | 22] 8 | 46] 8 | 82] 8 | 2a] 8 | o& 18 | 62 48
gziz|92¢j)2]o92i/2 {22/2 |] os} 2 192 |2 |] 93} 2 | 93) 2] 28) 2 | 92) 2 | 62 f2z | se ye
zz|9 | 92 |9 | ¢¢ 19 | 92 |9 | sz] 9 |S2 ]9 | gz] 9 | S%@} 9 | 92} 9 | Sa} 9 | 82 19 |] 22 19
9z1¢ | # |¢ | #2 |¢ | oz |e | te] ¢ |e |S | te] G | FE! EG | So] GS | |G | 2a fe | ge ig
ez | | ec |e | ee |e | F2 1% | G3] F [ez |r | Sal] F | SB) F | Fe] & | Sol F | 98 | F | Ge |e
az le | ele | zie | sie | el] e |e |e | a] s | a) & | se} e | a] se | sa fe |] te fe
&% 1% tz |z | 1 lz | zz |e] tile |i1i|e} tl] 2] | @ | oe) @ | %] 2] t i]s} e | 3%
zit | oz |t | og |< | 12 |t | Of] T [os | Tt | of] T | OJ} T |] Te} tT joe | tT | es jt |} alt
ol sa{/2z}/ elo] op /#/ 2) 2b] OE FP) S/F] ele) es) e) 8] (Ble le
PIP/ EIFl EE] Fels el Flels lle el ele el ele lel e [EF
WUINOo s{qnop Youo Ur 4YBI oy} UO SuLMosIVBy JO OYVC “}J9] OY} UO VdTATES Jo Oye]
496 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
only to provide a clean and dry nest. Sometimes pigs are lost
when the nests are too deep. If convenient, the nest should be
so situated that the sun can warm it during a portion of the day.
Straw, chaff, leaves, or hay make good nests. When at pasture
the sow will build her own nest, in which case she gathers grass
and leaves and provides a very shallow place. When the sow
is to farrow in the hog-cot or pen, the little pigs may be kept
from danger of being crushed by the mother by a fender made of
a pole or scantling securely fastened, say eight inches from the
floor and the same distance from the wall. The young pigs
soon learn the protection furnished by this device when the
mother lies down.
Farrowing time. — For several hours before farrowing, the
sow will be very restless and spend much of her time in collect-
ing material and making it into a nest. At this time the feed
should be reduced. The signs
that indicate the near approach
of parturition are a distended
udder, an enlarged vulva, and a
relaxation of the muscles on
either side of the tail. During
the summer season the pigs will
of their own accord usually find
their way to the teats and begin
nursing; but in the winter season.
the young pigs often need assistance in finding the teats, other-
wise they may become chilled and perish. If for any reason the
pigs become chilled, they should be treated similarly to that sug-
gested for chilled lambs (see page 414). Occasionally a sow will
be found that is very nervous and unquiet at farrowing time,
and it will be necessary to keep the pigs from the teats to prevent
the youngsters from being crushed. When such is the case
the pigs should be kept warm, as suggested for lambs.
When permitted to nurse, care should be taken to see that the
Fie 170.— Prize CuHesuire Boar.
THE BREEDING OF SWINE 497
young ones do not overfeed and that each pig receives its share.
Extra attention should be given the pigs at the time they make
their choice of teats, to see that the weaker pigs get their share,
as they usually continue to use the teats first chosen. The
stronger pigs, however, are very likely to take a few pulls at the
teats of their less robust mates. To reduce this difficulty, each
sow and litter should be placed in a lot by themselves.
Brood sows, like all other farm animals, often need assistance
at farrowing time. Difficult parturition among sows should be
handled much as suggested for difficult parturition among sheep
(see page 412). Feeding a heavy corn ration to the pregnant
sow is likely to increase the troubles at farrowing time. A
better plan is to use food containing more protein and mineral
matter, as such foods strengthen the sow, while corn has a
tendency to produce fat and thus to weaken her.
The brood sow eating her pigs. — The causes that induce a sow
to eat her own young are perhaps numerous, though not well
understood. This abnormal appetite may be due to the failure
to remove the afterbirth promptly. If left in the farrowing pen,
the sow scents it and is likely to devour it; and since the scent
of the young pigs is similar, they too may be eaten. If the
sow has not been properly fed during pregnancy, if the ration
lacks flesh-producing and bone-making material, she may have
an appetite for blood.
Sows that have access to clover or alfalfa pasture in summer,
or those that are provided with roots in winter, seldom eat their
pigs, especially if a box of charcoal and salt is kept before them
at all times. When the sow possesses the abnormal appetite,
it has been recommended to feed her pork, preferably salt pork.
The salt pork causes her to drink water, which allays the fever.
The assertion is made that when the appetite is satisfied she
will leave the pigs alone.
The sow after farrowing. — The sow is in a feverish condition
after farrowing and should be provided with an abundance of
25 *
498 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
lukewarm water. Never give her ice-cold water. In a few
hours she will show signs of wanting to eat, when she should be
given a little thin mash or gruel made from shorts, bran, or oat-
meal. This should be given warm, in cold weather. For the
first week the feed should be light, consisting mainly of mashes,
but no corn should be given at this time. Milk-producing foods,
such as skim-milk, shorts, bran, oat meal, and a little clover or
alfalfa hay, should be given, while fattening foods, such as corn,
are to be avoided.
Occasionally the sow’s udder is injured on account of an
unusual development of the pig’s teeth. This condition causes
the sow to withhold her milk, produces a bad temper, and
often excites her to injure the pigs. When such is the case, take
the pigs under the arm and hold the mouth open with one
hand while the sharp teeth are broken off with small pincers.
To do this remove the pigs out of hearing distance from the
sow, as she is likely to object and create a disturbance.
THE PIGS
The pig that is safely born and within a few minutes gets a
firm hold of a teat full of milk, has made a good start in life.
Not all pigs are so fortunate, and many perish for want of care
at farrowing time. When at all convenient, one should be near
by to give assistance if need should arise. Often pigs must be
assisted to find the teat, especially in cold weather. Sometimes
the sow is nervous, and the pigs should be removed as farrowed,
otherwise she may crush them; and sometimes it is necessary to
help dry the pigs to keep them from chilling.
The first meal. — It is important that the young pig get his
stomach full of the first milk of the sow. This should be accom-
plished within a few minutes after farrowing, otherwise the pig’s
strength will rapidly decrease. If for any reason the sow has
no milk for the pigs and it is desired to raise them by hand, they
should be given a very small quantity of cow’s milk warmed to
THE BREEDING OF SWINE 499
body temperature. This may be given from a bottle and nipple.
Great care should be taken not to feed the little fellows too much
at a time, but they should be fed often, every two hours for a
while, then every three hours, then every four hours, and later
they should be fed four times daily. This involves much work,
but is essential if the pigs are to be raised, as hand-fed pigs often
die from overfeeding following a long period during which they
received no food whatever.
Pig ills. — The young pig is very subject to digestive dis-
orders, the result of overfeeding, underfeeding, or otherwise
Fic. 171.— Group or Eneiish SMALL YORKSHIRE OR SMALL WHITES.
The Small Yorkshire, or Small White, was developed in England. This breed is
noted for its fattening qualities, not particularly early maturing. The breed-
ing qualities are only fair, the sows medium in fecundity. In size the breed
is classed as small. The color is white, ears erect, and face greatly dished.
improperly feeding its dam. The brood sow should be fed in
such a way as to encourage a good flow of only medium rich
milk. If her food is too rich, consisting of skim-milk, linseed-oil
meal, corn, and the like, the pigs are likely to be attacked with
thumps, diarrhea, or constipation. On the other hand, if the
sow is underfed, the pigs are likely to suffer. A better plan is to
feed the brood sow regularly on a ration consisting of moderately
rich food, such asmashes made from ground oats, shorts, and bran.
500 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
When the pigs are troubled with thumps or scours, cut down
on the ration of the sow; and if the pigs are valuable, it may be
well to milk the sow at least in part by hand, remembering that
the last milk drawn is the richer in fat.
» Feeding the pigs. — At about three weeks of age, the pigs are
likely to begin to nibble at their mother’s food, to bite at the
grass, and perhaps try to root. This indicates that they are
acquiring an appetite, and they should be encouraged to take
food other than that supplied by the mother. Place a small
trough in one corner of the lot or pen, and arrange a fence across
the corner so the old sows cannot have access to it, but the young
pigs can. Into this trough a little sweet milk may be poured
three times daily. Do not provide more than the pigs will
drink at once, and never leave the milk to sour in the trough, as
digestive disorders and death are sure to follow. In a few days
replace the milk with a small amount of bran and shorts, scalded
and made into a gruel. Later corn soaked for 24 hours may be
placed in the trough. For best results the young pigs should be
fedavariety. Whatever food-stuffs are used, care must be taken
not to feed more than they will clean up. Pigs fed in this way
will make a much more rapid growth than if the extra trough
had not been provided.
Weaning the pigs. — With pigs fed as suggested above, the
weaning process is easy and simple. As the pigs learn to rely
more on the extra food, the mother’s milk-producing food should
be cut down so that she will not be in the height of her flow when
the pigs are taken away. The age to wean pigs varies: with the
youngsters that have made a rapid growth they should be
weaned at about eight weeks of age; or in case the pigs and
mother are not doing well, it may be wise to wean at a much
younger age even though the pigs are small. As a general rule,
it is safer to say the best age for weaning is between seven and
ten weeks. Some advise turning out the most thrifty pigs first,
leaving the weaker ones to nurse a few days longer, the state-
THE BREEDING OF SWINE 501
ment being made that in this way there is no danger of the
sow’s udder spoiling, as the weaker ones will take the milk.
This practice is of doubtful merit ; it is perhaps best to take the
sows entirely away from the pigs, thus leaving the youngsters
in their own pen. If the sows have previously had their food
reduced as suggested and the pigs are fed extra, this will surely
give best results.
Castrating the pigs. — The boar pigs not desired for breed-
ing purposes should be castrated. This should be done rather
early in order that the pigs may recover from the resulting sore-
ness before weaning, say from three to six weeks of age.
At this age, the operation is very simple. Have an assist-
ant hold the pig by the hind legs, placing the pig’s back against
the assistant’s breast, and holding the hind legs apart in such a
way as to expose the scrotum. Simply slit the end of the scro-
tum and remove the testicles by pulling them out; smear a mix-
ture of fresh lard’and turpentine half and half on the scrotum,
and let the pig go. With ridglings and hernia there is more dan-
ger and more care should be used. A ridgling is an animal in
which one or both testicles have not descended into the scrotum.
Marking pigs. — When one is breeding pure-bred animals,
some system of identification is necessary, as even an expert
cannot identify pigs when they are reared in large droves.
The method suggested in Fig. 172 is very good.
Pigs after weaning. — Many pigs are stunted for want of
proper care the first month after weaning. If in summer, they
are frequently turned out to hot dry pasture to forage for them-
selves; or if in winter, they are placed in close, dark, cold and
muddy quarters, and they are likely to fail to develop. An-
imals thus treated, of course do not make satisfactory gain.
For best results, if in summer, the pigs just weaned should
be provided with shade, a clean mud wallow, and receive grain in
addition to the pasture; if in winter, dry, well lighted, well
ventilated, and protected quarters should be provided, and if at
502 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
all possible the animals should receive succulent food in the
shape of roots in addition to the grain, which grain should
not consist entirely of corn.
The breeding hogs and the fat hogs may run together until
three months of age,
when the breeding ani-
mals should be taken
out. At this age the
sows will begin to show
up, so that those likely
to make the best an-
imals may be chosen
for breeding. If later
on some of the sows not
chosen should show good
form, they too may be
taken out of the fat
herd. Those animals
Fic. 172.—Mersop or mMarxinc Pics ror Chosen for breeding
Future IDENTIFICATION, OR UNTIL PERMA- should be fed a nitrog-
NENT TAGS CAN BE INSERTED INTO THE Ear.
enous ration. In addi-
tion, they should be permitted to take abundance of exercise.
If they are confined too closely and fed a fattening ration, their
breeding powers are likely to be weakened.
CHAPTER XXIV
CARE AND MANAGEMENT
As1vE from the various practical points on care and manage-
ment discussed in the chapters on feeding and breeding, special
attention is now given to sanitation and equipment. Many of
the common diseases that often prove so very fatal to swine are
due entirely or in a large measure to carelessness or indifference
in management. It is well known to swine breeders that few
hogs are free from lice. These vermin are blood suckers, and
in a very short time they produce a weakened condition of the
animal, thereby rendering it far more susceptible to other dis-
eases; even cholera is more virulent and more deadly when the
herd is infested with lice.
DIPPING SWINE
To free the hogs from lice or other vermin, all newly ac-
quired hogs should be dipped immediately upon arriving at
the farm in much the same way as suggested for sheep (see
page 423). The hogs should not be permitted to infect the
quarters or lots before dipping. The same dipping-vat as that
suggested for sheep may be used, as well as the same coal-tar
preparation, although the solutions may be used somewhat
weaker for swine. All stock hogs should be dipped at least
twice each year, or whenever they become infested with lice
(Fig. 173).
Good results are reported from the use of a self-dipping device.
This device consists of a shallow vat about ten inches deep and
eight to ten feet square. It is built of two-inch plank and placed
603
504 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
near by or convenient to the well or large water-tank. The vat
is filled about three-fourths full of water and one quart of dip
added. The dip is renewed about once in two weeks and the
water supplied as needed. During the muddy season the tank
should be cleaned and a fresh start made. The liquid may be
removed in a few minutes with a scoop shovel. The hogs
Fig. 173.— Hoc-pippine Equipment. Dipping-vat set in ground.
wallow in this at will, and they do not seem to mind the dip;
when the water is fresh they often drink small quantities of the
liquid. This keeps the hogs free from lice and skin diseases
and helps to keep down worms, cholera, and other swine plagues.
SHELTER FOR SWINE
Some one has fittingly said, ‘‘The hog does not need a palace
or an upholstered cage, nor does he prosper in a dungeon.”
Occasionally much money is uselessly expended in the construc-
tion of a large and expensive building which is in use only a
part of the year; more often, however, swine are housed in a hole
in the straw stack or in a shed constructed from fence rails or
poles and covered with straw or fodder. Such places are dun-
CARE AND MANAGEMENT 505
geons. There is no ventilation, they are dark and damp in
wet weather, and soon become filthy dens of infection.
As with the barn for other farm animals, the hog barn should
be well ventilated, well lighted, well drained, and dry, serviceable,
and sanitary. Any structure that answers these conditions will
prove fairly satisfactory. Convenience and adaptability should
be considered in constructing the hog-house. In general,
hog-houses are of two types: large houses, or those accommo-
dating a considerable number of hogs; and small individual
houses or cots.
The large hog-house. — There are almost as many types of
large hog-houses as there are swine breeders or feeders who have
built them, each having its advantages and disadvantages.
When properly constructed, the large hog-house is serviceable,
sanitary, and convenient; but, if properly constructed, they
are expensive, especially since they are only used a part of the
year. It is difficult to locate them accessibly to the pastures,
particularly in case sown pastures are used, as they are likely to
be on various parts of the farm. Furthermore, when many sows
are housed in close proximity to each other, if one is disturbed or
molested in any way, all the others are likely to become fretful;
and when feeding is begun in one part of the house the other
animals become uneasy and often injure their litters.
The individual hog-house. — Of late years the small individual
hog-house has become very common. These small houses are
constructed on runners so they can be moved from one field
or lot to another. They are well adapted to accommodate a
sow and her litter, and a few of these “cots,” as they are often
called, set side by side afford excellent shelter for a drove of hogs.
The Wisconsin Agricultural Experiment Station has issued a
bulletin devoted chiefly to the construction of these small houses,
and from which we quote: ‘The portable hog-house is
easily and economically constructed; it can be easily moved
and located wherever desired ; it is useful to the general farmer
506 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
and to the breeder of pure-bred stock; and of all systems of
housing swine it is the most natural and sanitary. Only the
simplest workmanship is necessary to build the portable house,
and much old lumber can be worked into it.
“The portable house is peculiarly advantageous, since it can
be readily moved. The renter who finds it impossible to pro-
vide expensive quarters for his hogs can well afford to construct
portable houses, which can be retained as personal property.
It is useful on any sized farm as the number can be regulated to
the size of the herd. With separate paddocks to accommodate
swine of different ages and sexes the portable house is practically
a necessity. Swine will never pile up in a damp, poorly venti-
lated quarter and come out steaming in the cold morning air,
unless compelled. to do so. Where a large number of animals
are continually housed in one hog-house, the surroundings are
sure to become more or less filthy and unsanitary. If feeding
is done on the inside, it keeps a portion of the floor wet, and gives
the entire building an offensive disagreeable appearance. On
the other hand, by using the portable house, moving it occa-
sionally to a fresh piece of ground, and feeding the hogs at dif-
ferent places, one avoids those unsanitary conditions. These
portable houses can be built to accommodate from four to six
mature animals or ten to twenty shotes. This method of
housing keeps them much cleaner and more thrifty than when
allowed to congregate in large numbers, and individuals of a
herd showing evidence of a contagious disease can be readily
isolated.”
The A-shaped individual hog-house. — These portable houses
are usually constructed of two types, the A-shaped and the shed-
roof-shaped. A convenient size for the A-shaped house is eight
feet square and seven feet high. It may be constructed with or
without a wood floor, as desired. If one has paved or very dry
lots where the cots are to remain in winter, perhaps they will give
better satisfaction without the wood floor. On the other hand,
CARE AND MANAGEMENT 507
if the lots where they are kept for winter use are muddy, a wood
floor should be provided. A ventilator should be provided,
which may be made by
sawing off the ends of
two roof boards and cov-
ering the hole thus formed
with a V-shaped hood
(Fig. 174). In order to
provide light a window-
glass ought to be placed in
the front above the door
and a second in the rear.
A door two feet wide and
two feet and six inches ——————
high should be provided Fig. 174.— A-Suarep Inpivipuat Hoc-Hovse.
at one end. The door itself may be suspended by a rope and
arranged to slide up and down as it will need to be used only in
very cold weather. For summer use a gunny sack may be
hung over the door, as this will serve to brush the flies off as
the hog enters and to keep the cot cool. To facilitate moving
from lot to lot, the structures should be placed on runners. If
brood sows are due to farrow in very cold weather, these cots
can be made very comfortable by standing fodder or placing
straw about them.
The shed-shaped individual hog-house. —In Fig. 175 isshown the
front elevation of a shed-roof hog-house eight feet wide, twelve
feet long, and seven feet high in front and three behind, which
is sometimes preferred to the A-shaped house. It is provided
with doors in the rear, the same size as the lower front doors,
and placed diagonally opposite, so that by opening all the doors
it makes a cool house insummer. On the other hand, by closing
the lower doors and opening the upper doors, for ventilation, it
makes a warm house for cold winter weather. The upper front
doors are arranged with wooden ratchets on the back side,
508 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
which holds them in any desired position. By having the hinges
on the top, the storm and hot sun cannot enter and yet by ad-
justing the opening, air may circulate freely without causing a
draft on the animals. These top doors are very important. It
is a serious mistake to build these houses with but one opening,
as is sometimes done. There is no ventilation whatever, and
the house in warm weather becomes a suffocating quarter.
Fic. 175. —SHep-sHarpep InpivipuAL HoG-HoUSE, WITH SHADE ATTACHED.
The illustration of the shed-roof portable hog-house shows a
shade at the rear under which the pigs can lie in comfort. This
shade is five feet wide, made of inch boards placed upon remov-
able supports which rest on cleats nailed to the ends of the
house (Fig. 175).
Disadvantages and advantages. — Theindividual hog-house has
the disadvantage of requiring more labor to feed and care for
the herd. With each sow and litter in a pen or cot by them-
selves it takes considerable time to make the rounds, and this
must often be done inthe storm. Furthermore, vicious sows are
more difficult to attend, and the feeder is often obliged to enter
CARE AND MANAGEMENT 509
the cot to arrange the bedding and clean the quarters. These
small houses; however, are very inexpensive and very efficient,
and all things considered, answer the general farmer’s conditions
much better than the large and expensive hog-house.
THE HOG LOT
The lot in which hogs are quartered should be such as can be
kept clean. A filthy and carelessly kept lot encourages disease
by providing lodgment for the germs; and constant cleanliness
is the most effective means of preventing germ dissemination.
Where disease germs have once been established, an absolutely
thorough disinfection is essential to eradicate them. To facilitate
cleanliness and disinfection, at least a part of the lot should be
paved with brick, stone, or concrete. On this pavement the cots
may be placed during the winter season and on it the feeding
may be done.
Hog-wallows. — Some.very successful breeders heartily favor
hog-wallows, while others equally as successful are much
opposed to their use. Those who are outspoken in opposi-
tion to the wallow have perhaps been influenced from
infections due to a filthy wallow, or from infections at the time
of an outbreak of cholera. There can be no doubt that filthy
wallows are often a sourceof danger, nor can there be any doubt
that once a cholera hog wallows in the water, however clean, all
other hogs wallowing in or drinking this contaminated water
are likely to contract the dreaded disease.
On the other hand, with the healthy herd there can be no ob-
jections to a clean mud wallow, and there are many advantages
to be derived from it. During the heat of summer the hog
cools mainly by radiation, and a cool mud bath is very soothing ;
it cleans the scurf from the skin and enables the hog to find
protection from the flies. This wallow or mud bath should be so
arranged that fresh water may be added as needed, and to insure
absolute freedom from all germ life a quart of coal-tar dip may be
poured in the wallow occasionally (see also page 504).
CHAPTER XXV
DISEASES OF SWINE
WHILE swine are not ordinarily considered as being subject
to so great a variety of diseases as horses, cattle, or sheep, they
are very often attacked by ailments far more serious than afflict
any other class of our farm animals. Chief of these diseases are
cholera, swine plague, and tuberculosis. Throughout the corn-
belt of the United States, the loss caused by these diseases among
swine is not equaled by any other class of diseases to which
farm animals are subject. These very deadly diseases are all
contagious or infectious and therefore, with proper sanitary
methods, can be prevented, although when the animal once
becomes afflicted, there is no cure. It is the ravages caused
by these diseases that makes pork production such a hazardous
business. Sometimes the swine breeder or feeder will have a
drove of swine ready for the market when they will contract
one of these diseases and the entire herd be taken in a few
weeks.
Quarantine lot. — On every farm where hogs are kept in con-
siderable numbers, a small quarantine lot should be provided.
This lot should be located at some distance from the other lots, it
should be tightly fenced and at least a part of it should be paved.
When a new animal arrives, it may be dipped as suggested (page
503) and then placed in this quarantine pen for at least three
weeks. Cholera or any other diseases will be apparent before
this. If all is well, it may then be turned with the herd.
Such a pen could be used by any of the animals of the herd
that may become sick, as all ailing hogs should at once be
610
DISEASES OF SWINE 611
separated until the nature of the disease is determined. Such
a lot set apart for this purpose may prevent outbreaks of very
serious diseases.
HOG CHOLERA
Hog cholera is an infectious disease of swine. It exists in all
sections of the United States, but is particularly prevalent
in the corn-belt. In that section it is the most dreaded
disease to which swine are subject. Not so many animals
are condemned at the large packing houses because of this
disease, as of tuberculosis, but this is due to the nature of the dis-
ease. With cholera the hogs die or recover quickly, while with
tuberculosis they may linger for months. Cholera varies in its
virulence; sometimes comparatively few hogs that have it will
die, while at other times nearly every animal in the entire herd
will succumb to the disease. When the disease once appears, it
spreads very rapidly, not only among the animals of a herd, but
across the country from one farm to another.
Manner of spreading the disease. — Cholera is a germ disease
and may be spread in many ways. These germs are very hardy
and vigorous. They are able to live for a long time in the
water of ponds. and streams; they may live in the soil for at
least three months and in accumulations of straw and litter for a
much longer time. The hog, taking in these germs either by in-
haling with the breath or by ingestion with the food, is likely
to contract the disease. Only the very smallest particle is
necessary to convey the germ. Thus, an attendant passing
from a lot of infected hogs to a lot of healthy ones may carry
the infection on his shoes; dogs, chickens, pigeons, and even
birds are known to have carried the germs. The wind
blowing particles of dust from place to place will also carry with
it sufficient of these germs to produce the disease. A cholera
hog having access to a stream may contaminate the water
sufficiently to infect animals miles below.
512 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Prevention of the disease. — Up to the present time, there has not
been discovered any means by which hog cholera can be cured,
the only safeguard being prevention. All that is necessary to
prevent the disease is to keep the germs of the disease away
from the herd. In the vast majority of cases the germ
is transported mechanically, in the bodies of sick hogs and
on the feet of men or animals, including birds. It follows,
therefore, that the chances of an outbreak of hog cholera will be
greatly lessened, if not completely avoided, if the herd is pro-
tected from these sources of infection. To do this the herd
should be placed on a part of the farm that will be least accessible
to men or animals from other farms. The hogs should be con-
fined to a dry lot free from running water or wallows, unless one is
constructed as suggested on page 509, and the disinfectant added
every two weeks. Careful attention should be given the feed
and water. The hogs should be provided with shade and clean
dry sleeping places.
If at any time any of the animals show signs of sickness, they
should be separated from the healthy ones. Air-slaked lime
should bescattered about the lot, and the feed troughs thoroughly
disinfected or replaced by new ones. For a condition powder
prepare the following : —
Wood charcoal
Sulfur...
Sodium chloride .
Sodium bicarbonate
Sodium hyposulfate .
Sodium sulfate
Antimony sulfite .
rPeENNNRR
SSSSSes
Completely pulverize and thoroughly mix. This powder is
mixed with the feed in the proportion of a large tablespoonful
to each 200 pounds weight of hogs, and given onceaday. When
hogs are suspected to be affected with cholera, they should not
be fed on corn alone, but have, at least once a day, soft feed made
by mixing bran and middlings, or middlings and corn meal, or
DISEASES OF SWINE 513
ground oats and corn, or crushed wheat, and then stirring into
this the proper quantity of the medicine.
After an outbreak of cholera the yardsand pens should be thor-
oughly cleaned, all dead hogs should be burned, the litter should
be collected and burned, and quicklime scattered freely over the
ground. The houses should be washed thoroughly with a coal-
tar preparation before new stock is brought in. The troughs
should be burned, or if this is not practicable, they should be
thoroughly soaked in coal-tar preparation and then washed out.
The lots and houses should not be used again for some time.
Prevention of cholera by immunization. —'The Bureau of Ani-
mal Industry, Department of Agriculture, has developed a serum,
which by means of vaccination will render hogs immune to chol-
era. While its preparation and use are attended with difficul-
ties, the method is briefly given here because of the feeling that
if it is to prove practicable, it must be so simplified as to be used
by any careful workman. Furthermore, a drove of cholera hogs
affords a very good opportunity to practice, as their value is not
likely to be great, especially if the attack is virulent.
In order to make the method clear it will be divided into two
main parts: the preparation of the serum, and the use of the
serum.
Preparation of the serum. — To prepare the serum one must
first procure an immune hog with a long heavy tail, since it is
at this point that the serum is drawn, and it may be necessary
to clip the end two or three times in drawing the serum. This
may be a hog that has recovered from an attack of cholera,
as such animals are immune to further attacks, or it may be
one rendered immune by the method herein described. This
hog we will call the supply animal. This animal must now be
hyper-immunized. This consists of inoculating him, in the mus-
cles of the thigh, with about 10 c.c. (cubie centimeters) of
virulent hog cholera blood, from which the clot has been re-
moved by stirring or whipping with a clean stick, to the pound
2L
14 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
liveweight of hog. Thus a 100-pound hog should receive 1000
c.c. of virulent blood taken from a hog sick with cholera.
This virulent blood may be obtained by allowing the cholera
hog to bleed to death, taking care to collect the blood free from
particles of dirt; or it may be obtained by clipping the end of the
tail and allowing it to flow slowly into a jar well protected from
dirt. If the tail stops bleeding, thump it or cut the end again.
After collecting the blood, gently stir it with a clean stick, or
better still a glass rod to remove the clot. The clot will collect
on the rod while stirring. This diseased blood from which the
clot has been removed is now ready to inject into the muscles of
the supply hog. This is done with a hypodermic syringe and
inoculated into the inner side of the thigh after placing the pig
on his back. There are two methods of inoculating, — the
slow method, and the quick method. By the slow method, in-
creasing amounts of virulent blood are injected at regular inter-
vals, which requires so much time that it isseldom used. By the
quick method, the virulent blood is all injected at one time.
After the injection of this blood, the supply animal is said to
be hyper-immunized.
One week after the injection of the virulent blood into the
supply animal, the hog is ready to have his blood drawn for
the purpose of protecting hogs from cholera. This blood may
be drawn in two ways: the supply animal may be killed and the
entire supply of blood taken at once, or he may be bled at the tail.
The tail should be thoroughly cleaned, disinfected, and then the
end is cut off and the blood caught in a clean jar. Much care
should be used to keep everything clean and free from germ-laden
dirt. In this way, 500 c.c. of blood may be drawn at one time.
This may be repeated three times at intervals of one week, after
which the blood gradually loses its protective properties and
should not be used.
The blood, thus collected is allowed to clot, after which it is
filtered through sterilized gauze in order to get the serum or the
DISEASES OF SWINE 515
liquid part of the blood separated from the clot. Then add suffi-
cient carbolic acid to make a one-half per cent solution; that is,
if there is 500-c.c. of the serum, add 214 c.c. of carbolic acid.
Use of the serum. — There are two methods of using the
serum for the prevention of hog cholera: the serum-alone
method, in which the serum only is used; and the serum-
y
4
4
Fig. 176. —Frrest Prize Tamwortu Sow at Ixuurois Farr.
The Tamworth breed of swine is a native of England. This breed is similar to
the Large Yorkshire and is noted for bacon production. The quality of pork
is unexceled, although the animals are rather late maturing. The breeding
qualities are excellent, the sows being very prolific. The breed is classed as
large. The color is red or sandy, the ears almost erect and the face long and
straight.
simultaneous method, in which the serum and virulent blood
from a hog infected with cholera are used.
Serum-alone method. — With the hypodermic syringe, inject
into the arm and thigh pits 20 c.c. of serum for each 100 pounds
weight of pig. That is, if the pig weighs 50 pounds, inject 10 c.c.
516 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
of the serum, whereas if the pig weighs 150 pounds, inject
30 c.c. of serum. This method gives immediate but tempo-
rary immunity lasting perhaps four or five weeks, possibly
longer. It is recommended for use in herds where cholera
already exists, but to be used on seemingly healthy pigs only.
Pigs already sick will probably not benefit by its use,
although if the animals should be infected with the disease
germ immediately after the serum is injected, the immunity
will last much longer than otherwise. There is no danger
attending this method.
Serum-simultaneous method. — With the hypodermic syringe,
inject simultaneously into the arm and thigh pits 20 c.c. of
serum and 1 ¢.c. of virulent hog cholera blood for each 100 pounds
weight of pig. The virulent blood must be obtained from a hog
sick with cholera and the clot removed. Pigs treated by this
method are immune for six months to one year. This is the
method usually employed, but is attended with greater danger
than the serum-alone method; however, the resulting immunity
is much longer.
Objections to the serum method.— There are two objections to
this method of vaccinating hogs to protect them against cholera:
it is expensive and somewhat dangerous. It is expensive because
a 125-pound hog will furnish a comparatively small amount
of blood, perhaps 500 c.c. at each four bleedings and 1000 c.c.
more at death, making a total of only 3000 c.c., from which
the clot must be taken. Furthermore, this animal must be ren-
dered hyper-immune, which involves much labor and expense.
The process of immunization is dangerous because it requires
the use of the virulent hog cholera blood containing the living hog
cholera germ. When this is used without the protective serum,
an outbreak of hog cholera is immediately started. With proper
precautions, an attendant that takes an interest in the method
can prevent serious outbreaks of hog cholera and thus reduce the
risk in pork production.
DISEASES OF SWINE 617
SWINE PLAGUE
Swine plague is an infectious germ disease of swine. It is
frequently associated with hog cholera, which it resembles. In
fact, the two diseases resemble each other so very closely that it
often requires a post mortem examination by an expert to dis-
tinguish between them. From this it follows that the manner
of spreading the disease as well as its prevention are practically
the same as in the case of hog cholera. While these two diseases
cause untold loss among swine, it must be remembered that by
proper sanitary methods they can be practically prevented.
This calls for better treatment than is ordinarily given swine.
Well-lighted, comfortable quarters; clean, dry lots free from
filthy wallows, but provided with a self-dipping device; a likeral
use of disinfectants in the houses and of air-slaked lime in the
lots, will go a long way towards reducing the ravages of these
two diseases to a minimum.
TUBERCULOSIS
Tuberculosis is most prevalent among swine in those sections
where cattle are most affected. Great numbers of hogs are
condemned by the large packing-houses because of this disease,
more than from all other diseases combined, and the percentage
is increasing year by year until at present it is thought that about
three per cent are being thrown out.
Manner of spreading the disease. — The tubercular germ gains
entrance to the bodies of various animals in different ways.
Thus in the case of man and also cattle, the germ may be either
inhaled or taken in with the food, while in the case of swine the
germ gains entrance by the food alone. It is very seldom that
the disease starts by the germs being inhaled. This being true,
the disease should be very easily controlled in swine. The chief
sourcesof infection among swine are the skim-milk from a tuber-
cular cow, the grain in the droppings of a cow or steer infected
518 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
with the disease, hogs eating carcasses of animals that aave died
with the disease, foods containing sputum of the human affected
with tuberculosis, and like causes.
Prevention consists in the avoidance of all foods containing the
tubercular germs and in providing quarters similar to those
suggested for hog cholera, for poorly ventilated, dark, damp,
and filthy quarters furnish ideal quarters for the breeding of
tuberculosis germs. The direct rays of the sun and cleanliness
provide conditions impossible for the lodgment of these germs.
Care of a tubercular herd. —Tuberculosis in swine is considered
as not curable. Furthermore, its detection is often difficult.
A hog may be affected with the disease and not show the marks
of it until after he is slaughtered. Asarule, pigs are more subject
to the disease than older animals, and weak animals more liable
to attack than strong and vigorous ones. The difficulty of de-
tecting the disease renders the careof the tuberculous animal haz-
ardous. The general signs are coughing, losing in weight rather
than gaining, and a swelling of the glands about the neck. When
the disease is discovered, all animals showing external indications
should be immediately destroyed and the carcasses burned. The
remainder of the herd should be put upon the market at once and
passed upon by a government inspector. Any animals that are
so diseased as to render their carcasses unfit for food will be con-
demned. Not all hogs affected with tuberculosis are condemned.
When the disease is present only in the first stages and only a few
of the organs of the body are affected, these parts only are con-
demned; whereas if the disease is general throughout the car-
cass, the entire animal is condemned.
After an outbreak of tuberculosis and the animals have been
disposed of, the quarters should be thoroughly disinfected. To
do this, use a five per cent carbolic acid solution, or a1 to 1000
corrosive sublimate solution, and then whitewash with fresh lime.
The pastures and lots which are exposed tothe sun are not soseri-
ous a source of infection as the buildings. When at all possible,
DISEASES OF SWINE 519
neither the house nor the lots should be used for a time, thus
giving the sun sufficient time to destroy all the germs. '
WORMS
Internal worms are of frequent occurrence in swine. They in-
habit both the stomach and intestines. These worms interfere
with digestion; in consequence the pigs fail to thrive and become
pot-bellied, rickety, profitless runts, or quickly succumb to the
effects of the worms. Swine infested with worms become an easy
prey to more deadly diseases because of their weakened condi-
tion.
Prevention of worms. — Well-fed swine, in general, are not sub-
ject to worms. The strong thrifty pig is usually able to resist
the parasites. Hogs having free access to wood ashes, charcoal,
air-slaked lime, and coal cinders are not likely to be troubled.
The alkali in the wood ashes, together with the grit in the cinders,
have a tendency to destroy the
worms. Pumpkins, fed seed and
all, in the fall also help to keep
swine free from worms.
Stagnant surface water, in
which hogs wallow, are ideal
places for the incubation and
development of worms. For
this reason old pens and pas- Fic. 177.—Tamworrn Pic ownep
tures, if wet, should not be used Be ENIVERSIDE OF TEEENOIS,
for hogs. The pens and pastures should be well drained and
all stagnant water fenced out or the ponds filled in. The drink-’
ing water should come from a deep well, and it should be kept
pure by using clean troughs so constructed or protected that
‘the hogs cannot wallow in them and fill them with filth.
Treatment for worms. — The average herd of pigs is kept
under such conditions that it is desirable to dose them at least
once during the year with some remedy that will destroy the
[aaa ae Ac
520 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
worms or drive them out of the intestines. Turpentine is the
most popular remedy and perhaps the least dangerous. It is
given in the mash for three successive mornings at the rate of
one teaspoonful for each 80 pounds live weight of pig. With-
holding all food should be practiced for a short time before
giving the remedy.
Sulfate of iron or copperas is a more effective remedy,
and is given as follows: Dissolve half a dram of cop-
peras in warm water and mix in the mash for each pig
for five consecutive mornings, the food being withheld for a
short time before giving remedy. In very bad cases and
when immediate action is desired, the affected pigs may be
given 5 grains of calomel and 8 grains of santonin for
every 100 pounds of live weight. The food should he
withheld for at Jeast 12 hours before administering the
medicine, which is best given in a little mash. Santonin is
somewhat dangerous and should be given in the proportion
mentioned.
; LICE
The hog louse is a common cause of lack of thrift in young
pigs, and when numerous, it tends to retard fattening. It
is advisable and profitable to keep swine free from lice at ali
ages. To this end the houses and pens should be frequently
cleaned and disinfected, the woodwork whitewashed, the
bedding material kept fresh, clean, and dry, and the yards
free from accumulations of litter and filth. The hogs should
be dipped twice each year in a coal-tar dip, 1 part of dip to
50 of warm water, and the treatment repeated in 10 days
to 2 weeks.
To destroy lice, when dipping is not possible, mix equal
parts of kerosene and machine oil, or one part of turpentine
and two parts of machine oil, and apply to every part of the
hog by means of a rag, or swab of cotton waste. It may be
applied along the back, from ears to tail, with a common ma-
DISEASES OF SWINE 521
chine-oil can and allowed to run down the sides of the hog.
Repeat the application in ten days.
SCOURS
Scours in pigs results from two causes, —improper feeding and
contagious infection. Often the trouble comes from overfeeding
on corn, or other rich food just after farrowing. Sudden
changes in the food or feeding sour decomposing slops, or food
from dirty troughs, sour swill barrels, and the like, tend to cause
diarrhea.
The best treatment for scouring pigs is to feed properly the
sows. The food should consist largely of rather thin mash
made from bran, middlings, crushed oats, and the like, which
should be fed regularly. In ordinary cases, treatment consists
in giving the nursing sow parched corn or scalded milk in her
food night and morning. After the trouble has been checked, a
little limewater placed in the mash often proves advantageous.
The best cure for the contagious form of scours is a physic:
one tablespoonful of castor oil in the form of a drench, after
which the pens should be cleaned and thoroughly disinfected.
CONSTIPATION
Constipation frequently occurs among pregnant sows and
other hogs when given too little exercise and too much food.
Brood sows troubled with constipation are likely to farrow
weak, puny pigs. This trouble seldom occurs when hogs are
fed laxative foods, such as bran, linseed-oil meal, or roots, and
in addition are made to take exercise. When it becomes neces-
sary to treat the animals, a very simple method is to mix two
to four ounces of raw linseed oil once daily in the food; or if
more active treatment seems necessary, give four ounces of
Epsom salts at one dose in the same way. Swine that will not
eat the food thus medicated should be drenched. Great care
should be exercised in drenching hogs or they will suffocate.
522 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Drive the animals into a small pen where they have little room
to move about. To hold the animal, secure a quarter-inch rope,
place a noose about the upper jaw well back towards the angle
of the lips, and elevate the head. Wait until the animal stops
struggling. Pull the cheek away from the teeth so as to form
a pouch into which the medicine may be slowly poured. It
will flow from the cheek into the mouth, and when the hog
finds out what it is, he will stop squealing and will swallow. A
very easy method is to cut off the toe of an old shoe, insert the
cut end into the hog’s mouth, and pour the medicine into the
shoe.
THUMPS
Thumps is the term applied to that ailment of young pigs
which is indicated by a jerking motion of the flanks. In
thumps there is usually a derangement of the digestive organs,
due to overfeeding or lack of exercise. The tendency towards
the disease seems to be hereditary. When once the trouble
occurs, the treatment is prevention by decreasing the sow’s
milk-producing food until the pigs are older. Compel the pigs
to take exercise by driving them from their nests. A very good
method when one has the time is to place the little pigs in a
lot near the mother and let them worry about getting back.
They must be separated but a very short time, for they may
nurse too much when turned back.
SORE MOUTH
Pigs are often troubled with sore mouth. Large white
blisters occur about the mouth and snout, and later thick
brown scabs appear, which open into deep cracks. These scabs
extend over the face and later to all parts of the body if not
treated. These sores are due to a germ, and are likely to attack
pigs kept in filthy quarters. Prevention consists in providing
comfortable quarters for the youngsters. Treatment is not
DISEASES OF SWINE 523
difficult, but should be prompt and thorough. Prepare a solu-
tion of permanganate of potash, using one and one-half ounces
of the crystals dissolved in one gallon of warm water. Dip
the young pig, head foremost, into this solution and hold it there
afew seconds. Repeat three times, giving the pig time to catch
his breath in the intermission. The treatment should be re-
peated for four days, after which the quarters should be dis-
infected.
GARGET
Inflammation of the udder is rather common among heavy-
milking brood sows, and is usually caused by the milk not
being removed. The udder thus becomes congested, sore, and
later cakes. The treatment is to relieve the congestion “by
drawing off the milk. This should be done before farrowing,
if the udder is distended. After the milk is drawn, gently but
thoroughly rub the udder. Bathe the parts with hot water
fifteen minutes at a time and rub dry and apply an ointment
made as follows: Dissolve two tablespoonfuls of gum camphor
in a teacupful of melted fresh lard, to which add one ounce of
the fluid extract of belladonna. The udder should be bathed
three times daily and then the ointment well rubbed in.
REMOVING THE TUSKS
After one year old, all boars should have their tusks removed
twice a year. To hold the hog, place a noose around the upper
jaw (as suggested in drenching, p. 522) and tie to a post. Then
with strong nippers or sharp blacksmith’s pincers remove the
tusk. In older boars, when the tusks are hard and will not
cut, they should be filed and then broken off as follows: after
tying the boar to the post, an assistant stands astride the
animal and places a stick in his mouth, takes hold of either
end, and pulls back as far as he can and holds steady. With a
three-cornered file notch each corner of the tusk, then put the
524 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
point of an iron wedge in one of the notches, and tap the tusk
with a hammer, and it will break squarely off. The tusk may
then be filed off rounding.
CHICKEN-EATING SWINE
While not a disease, chicken eating is a vicious habit often
contracted by swine kept near chicken yards. The habit
once acquired is often difficult to overcome. A very good device
to prevent the hogs from catching the fowls is a common four-
inch ring hung before the hog’s snout. This may be held in
place with the ordinary hog-ring placed around the four-inch
ring and into the nose, as when ringing to prevent rooting.
Thtis the large ring hangs in front of the hog’s snout and pushes
the chicken away as the hog reaches for it.
APPENDIX
AVERAGE WEIGHTS OF FEEDING STUFFS
As a rule under average farm conditions, it is not practicable
to weigh each mess of food, nor is it necessary, as measuring
is sufficiently accurate. The food from the measure should
be weighed a few times at the beginning. To aid in approxi-
mating the weight of the various foods, the following table
of weights and measures is quoted from Farmers’ Bulletin
No. 222: — Giste t
Average Weights of Different Feeding Stuffs
One QuaRT One Potnp
Frepine Srurr WEIGHS MEASURES
Pounds Quarts
Corn, whole 0.6
Corn, meal
Corn, bran
Corn and cob meal .
Gluten meal
Gluten feed
Germ ‘meal
Hominy meal .
Distillers’ grains, dried.
Wheat, whole 5
Wheat, ground
Wheat, bran . re
Wheat middlings | (standard)
Wheat middlings our) Dh as
Oats, whole . . :
Oats, ground .
Rye, whole
Rye, meal .
Rye, bran .
Barley, whole
Barley, meal . ,
Brewers’ dried grains A
Malt sprouts. .
Linseed meal, old process
Linseed meal, new process
Cotton-seed meal :
PO CORSO POR ROS NOSE SHO m
MOHMARBHNAANNONDANOMRAWNROON
SPOPPOSPOSrPrOrNSSHSSoSOONSD
NEONNONDNORODWOUNUMNONDORNON
525
526
MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
DIGESTIBLE NUTRIENTS IN FEEDING STUFFS
In calculating a ration for any class of farm animals, the
digestible nutrients of the foods must be known, as it is
the digestible part only that is of use to ‘the animal.
The
following table, adopted from Bailey’s Cyclopedia of American
Agriculture, Vol. III, gives a very complete list of American
feeding stuffs and their digestible nutrients : —
Taste II
Average Digestible Nutrients and Fertilizing Constituents
DicEstiste NvtTRients
Fertivizine Constitu-
Dry
Mat in 100 Pounps ENTS IN 1000 Pounps
NAME OF FRED om
-— : eae Ether | Nitro- Eno
Bee Protein eae Extract | gen a Potash
Concentrates Lb. Lb. | Lb. Lb. | Lb. Lb. Lb.
Corn, all analyses 89.1} 7.9 | 66.7} 4.3 | 18.2] 7.0] 40
Dent corn . 89.4 | 7.8 | 66.7 | 4.3 | 16.5
Flint corn . 88.7 | 8.0 | 66.2 | 4.3 | 16.8
Sweet corn 91.2] 88 | 63.7 | 7.0 | 186] ... et
Corn cob 89.3 | 0.4 | 52.5) 0.3 5.0} 0.6] 6.0
Corn and cob meal . 84.9 | 44] 60.0] 2.9 | 141] 5.7] 47
Corn bran . 90.9 | 7.4 | 59.8] 46 | 16.3) 12.1 6.8
Gluten meal 91.8 | 25.8 | 48.3 | 11.0 | 50.3} 3.3] 0.5
Gluten feed 92.2 | 20.4 | 48.4} 88 | 884] 41] 03
Germ meal 89.6 | 9.0 | 61.2 | 6.2 | 26.5) 8.0] 5.0
Starch refusc . 91.8 | 11.4!158.4) 65 | 22.4) 7.0] 5.2
Grano-gluten . 94.3 | 26.7 | 38.8 | 12.4 | 49.8] 5.1 1.5
Hominy chops 89.9 | 7.5 | 55.2] 68 | 16.3] 98] 49
Glucose meal . 91.9 | 30.3 | 35.38 | 14.5 | 57.7] ... ue
Sugar meal. . . . | 93.2 | 18.7 | 51.7 | 8.7 | 36.3) 41) 03
Distillery grains (dried)
principally corn 93.0 | 21.9 | 38.1 | 10.8
Atlas gluten feed (dis-
tillery by-products) .| 92.6 | 23.3 | 35.6 | 11.9
APPENDIX 527
Tasue II — Continued
Dry | Dicestiste Norrients | Ferrinizina Constirv-
Mar in 100 Pounps ENTS IN 1000 Pounps
Name oF FEED eae ils
100 | Protein fe Ether) Nitro: Bowe Potash
Pounps drates Extract | gen ‘Acid
Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb.
Wheat . . 89.5 | 10.2 | 69.2 1.7 | 23.6| 7.9] 5.0
Wheat bran 88.1 | 12.2 | 39.2 | 2.7 | 26.7) 28.9 | 16.1
Wheat bran, spring . 88.5 | 12.9 | 40.1 3.4
Wheat bran, winter . 87.7 | 12.3 | 37.1 | 2.6]... Ree oa
Wheat shorts . 88.2 | 12.2 | 50.0 | 3.8 | 28.2) 138.5 | 5.9
Wheat middlings 87.9 | 12.8 | 538.0 | 3.4 | 263) 95) 63
Wheat screenings 88.4 | 9.8 | 51.0 | 2.2 | 24.4] 11.7 | 84
Dark feeding flour 90.3 | 18.5 | 61.8 | 2.0 | 31.8] 21.4 | 10.9
High grade flour 87.6 | 8.9 | 62.4 | 0.9 | 18.9] 2.2 1.5
Low grade flour . 87.6 | 8.2 | 62.7 0.9 | 28.9) 56] 3.5
Rye . 88.4 | 9.9 | 67.6 1.1 | 17.6) 82 | 5.4
Rye bran 88.4 | 11.5 | 50.38 | 2.0 | 28.2| 22.8 | 14.0
Rye shorts .. 90.7 | 11.9 | 45.1 16 | 18.4] 12.6] 8.1
Distillery grains (dried)
principally rye 93.2 | 10.4 | 42.5} 6.4 |... aye es
Barley . : 89.1 | 8.7 | 65.6 16 | 15.1] 7.9] 48
Malt sprouts . 89.8 | 18.6 | 37.1 1.7 | 35.5] 14.3 | 16.3
Brewers’ grains, wet 24.3) 3.9] 9.3 1.4 8.9} 3.1) 0.5
Brewers’ grains, dried .| 91.8 | 15.7 | 36.3 | 5.1 | 36.2} 10.3) 0.9
Oats . 89.0 | 9.2 | 47.3 | 42 | 20.6] 82] 62
Oatmeal ‘ 92.1 | 11.5 | 52.1 5.9 | 28.5] ... ge
Oat feed or ahwtte 92.3 | 12.5 | 46.9] 2.8 | 17.2) 9.1) 53
Oat hulls 90.6 | 1.3 | 40.1 0.6 §.2| 24] 5.2
Oat dust 93.5] 8.9 | 38.4] 5.1 | 21.6
Rice . 5 87.6 | 48] 72.2] 0.38 | 10.8; 18), 0.9
Rice hulls . 91.8 | 1.6 | 44.5] 0.6 5.8] 1.7 1.4
Rice bran . 90.3 | 5.3 | 45.1] 7.3 7.1) 2.9) 2.4
Rice polish 90.0} 9.0 | 56.4] 6.5 | 19.7] 26.7 | 7.1
528 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Tasie II — Continued
é
Dry | Dieestisve Norrients |Fertizizinc Consrirv-
Mar- In 100 Pounps ENTS IN 1000 Pounns
Name or Feep ae
" Carbo-| Ether | Nitro-| PROF
100 | Protein| hy- phorie | Potash
Pounps ats Extract | gen
Lb. Lb. Lb, Lb. Lb Lb. Lb.
Buckwheat . . . .| 87.4] 7.7 | 49.2 1.8 | 144) 44] 2.1
Buckwheat middlings . | 87.3 | 22.0 | 33.4) 5.4 | 42.8] 21.9 | 11.4
Buckwheat bran . ./ 89.5 | 7.4) 30.4; 1.9 | 36.4] 17.8 | 12.8
Buckwheat shorts . .| 88.9 | 21.1 | 33.5 Bb» I ease lp Yoo ahs
Buckwheat hulls . .! 86.8] 2.1 | 27.9} 0.6 4.9} 0.7 | 5.2
Sorghum seed . . .| 87.2 | 7.0 | 52.1 3.1 | 148] 81) 42
Broom corn seed . .| 85.9] 7.4] 48.3] 2.9 | 16.3] ... sank
Kafircorn. . . 84.8 | 7.8 | 57.1 DT NM ecto lt ase na:
Millet “ 86.0} 89] 45.0] 3.2 | 204] 85] 3.6
Flaxseed. 3 90.8 | 20.6 | 17.1 | 29.0 | 36.1] 13.9 | 10.3
Linseed meal, old process} 90.8 | 29.3 | 32.7 | 7.0 | 54.3) 16.6 | 13.7
Linseed meal, new pro-
cess... 89.9 | 28.2 | 40.1 | 2.8 | 57.8] 18.3 | 13.9
Cotton-seed . . . 89.7 | 12.5 | 30.0 | 17.3. | 31.3] 12.7 | 11.7
Cotton-seed meal . ./| 91.8 | 37.2 | 16.9 | 12.2 | 67.9] 28.8 | 8.7
Cotton-seed hulls . .| 88.9 0.38 | 33.1 1.7 6.9] 2.5 | 10.2
Peas. . . . . . .| 89.5 | 16.8 | 51.8 | 0.7 | 80.8] 82] 9.9
Cowpea... . . | 85.2 | 18.3 | 54.2 Tale | 3853)| sss oe
Soybean . . . . .| 89.2 | 29.6 | 22.3 | 14.4 | 53.0] 18.7 | 19.0
Horse bean. . . | 85.7 | 22.4 | 49.3 1.2 | 40.7) 12.0 | 12.9
Coconut meal . . ./| 89.7 | 15.6 | 38.3 | 10.5 | 32.8) 16.0 | 24.0
Palm-nut meal . . 89.6 | 16.0 | 52.6 | 9.0 | 26.9] 11.0 | 5.0
Sunflower seed . . ./| 92.5 | 12.1 | 20.8 | 29.0 | 22.8) 12.2 | 5.6
Sunflower seedeakes . | 91.8 | 31.2 | 19.6 | 12.8 | 55.5| 21.5 | 11.7
Peanut meal . . . .} 89.3 | 42.9 | 22.8 6.9 | 75.6] 13.1 | 15.0
Rapeseed meal . . 90.0 | 25.2 | 23.7 | 7.5 | 49.6) 20.0 | 13.0
APPENDIX
Taste [I — Continued
529
Dry | Dicustisce Nurrients | Fertivizing Constitv-
Mart- in 100 Pounps ENTS IN 1000 Pounps
Name or FEED zee Baik ‘.
100 | Protein a Ether. |, Nitro: ae Potash
Pounps drates Extract | gen ‘Acid
Roughage Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb.
Fodder corn —
Fodder corn, green .| 20.7] 1.0; 11.6] 0.4 41) 15] 3.3
Fodder corn, field-
cured . . .| 57.8] 2.5 | 3461 12 | 17.6) 5.4 | 89
Corn stover, field-
cured .| 59.5 | 1.7 | 32.4] 0.7 | 10.4! 2.9 | 14.0
Kafir corn stover,
field-cured . 86.5 | 2.3 | 44.8) 0.8
Sorghum (cane) 94.2 | 2.5 | 44.3 0.9
Fresh grass —
Pasture grasses
(mixed) . . . .| 20.00) 2.5 | 10.2 | 0.5 9.1) 2.3) 7.5
Kentucky blue grass. | 34.9 | 3.0 | 19.8 0.8
Timothy, different
stages . .| 384) 1.2 )19.1 | 06 4.8) 2.6 | 7.6
Orchard-grass, in
bloom : 27.0) 151114) 0.5 4.3) 16] 7.6
Redtop, in bloom 84.7} 2.1 | 21.2] 06 |... San eee
Oat fodder . 37.8 | 2.6) 18.9] 1.0 49) 13] 3.8
Rye fodder 23.4| 2.1 | 141) 04 3.3] 1.5 | 7.3
Sorghum . .| 20.6} 0.6 | 12.2 | 0.4 2.3| 0.9 | 2.3
Meadow fescue, in
bloom : 30.11 15/168) O04 |... 4]... re
Hungarian grass . 28.9} 2.0] 16.0} 0.4 3.9) 16) 5.5
Green barley 21.0] 1.9 | 102] 0.4
Peas and oats . 16.0] 18! 7.1] 0.2
Peas and barley 16.0) 1.7] 7.2] 0.2
Kafir fodder 27.0| 0.9] 13.8] 0.4
2M
530 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Tasie II— Continued
Dry | Dicesriste Nutrients |FEeRTILIziIne Constiru-
Mat- in 100 Pounps ENTS IN 1000 Pounps
Name or Freep aa mak -
100 | Protein ie = ther | Nitro- eis Potash
Pounps drates peerage) || een Acid
Lb. Lb. | Lb. Lb. Lb, Lb. Lb.
Fresh legumes —
Red clover, different
stages 29.2 | 2.9] 148 | 0.7 5.3} 1.3 | 4.6
Crimson clover 19.1 | 2.4] 9.1 0.5 4.3} 13] 49
Alsike, in bloom . 25.2} 2.7 | 13.1 0.6 44} 1.1] 2.0
Alfalfa 28.2 | 3.9 | 12.7] .0.5 7.2| 13 | 5.6
Cowpea . 16.4) 1.8] 8.7 | 0.2 2.7; 10) 3.1
Soybean 24.9) 3.2] 11.0} 0.5 2.9} 1.5] 53
Hay —
Timothy 86.8 | 2.8 | 43.4 14 |12.6) 53) 9.0
Orchard grass . 90.1 | 4.9 | 42.3 14 | 18.1} 4.1 | 188
Redtop . 91.1 | 4.8 | 46.9 1.0 | 11.5} 3.6 | 10.2.
Kentucky blue erase, 78.8 | 4.8 | 37.3 | 2.0 | 11.9] 40 | 15.7
Hungarian grass 92.3 | 4.5 | 51.7 1.3 | 12.0! 3.5 | 18.0
Mixed grasses . 87.1 5.9 | 40.9 1.2 | 14.1) 2.7 | 15.5
Rowen (mixed) 83.4 | 7.9 | 40.1 1.5 | 16.1] 43 | 14.9
Meadow fescue 80.0 | 4.2 | 43.3 1.7 9.9) 4.0 | 21.0
Mixed grasses and
_ clover . .| 87.1 | 6.2 | 42.7 ees ae) il). veces aah
Soybean hay 88.7 | 10.8 | 38.7 1.5 | 23.2) 6.7 | 10.8
Oat hay . 91.1) 4.3 | 46.4 1.5
Marsh or swamp hay 88.4 | 2.4 | 29.9 | 0.9
White daisy 85.0 | 3.8 | 40.7 1.2
Barley 89.4 | 5.1 | 35.9 1.6
Prairie (native) 94.4 | 3.7 | 43.6 | 0.9
Legume hay —
Red clover, medium . | 84.7 | 6.8 | 35.8 1.7 | 20.7} 3.8 | 22.0
Red clover, mammoth] 78.8 | 5.7 | 32.0 1.9 | 22.3] 5.5 | 12.2
Alsike clover . 90.3 | 8.4 | 42.5 1.5 | 23.4) 6.7 | 22.3
APPENDIX
TaBLe II — Continued
531
Dry | Dicustistz Nourrients | Ferriizine Constrrv-
Mar- in 100 Pounps ENTS IN 1000 Pounps
Name or Faep a Cay ee
100 | Protein aig Ether | Nitro- nes ar
Pounps drates Extract | gen ‘Acid
Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb.
White clover . 90.3 | 11.5 | 42.2 | 1.5 | 27.5] +5.2 | 18.1
Crimson clover 90.4 | 10.5 | 34.9] 1.2 | 20.5) 4.0 | 13.1
Alfalfa 91.6 | 11.0 | 39.6 | 1.2 | 21.9] 5.1 | 16.8
Cowpea . 89.3 | 10.8 | 38.6 | 1.1 | 19.5] 5.2 | 14.7
.Soybean-straw 89.9 | 2.3 | 40.0} 1.0 | 17.5] 4.0 | 13.2
Peavine-straw . 86.4 | 4.3 | 32.3] 0.8 | 14.3] 3.5 | 10.2
Straw —
Wheat 90.4} 0.4 | 36.3] 0.4 5.9} 1.2] 5.1
Rye 92.9! 0.6 | 40.6 | 0.4 46; 2.8] 7.9
Oat . 90.8} 1.2 | 386] 08 6.2) 2.0 | 12.4
Barley 85.8 | 0.7 | 41.2 | 0.6 | 138.1) 3.0 | 20.9
Oat chaff 85.7 | 1.5 | 33.0) 0.7 |... ] ... i
Wheat chaff 85.7 | 0.3 | 23.3 | 0.5 7.9| 7.0 | 4.2
Silage —
Corn . 20.9 | 0.9/ 11.3] 0.7: | 2.8] 11] 3.7
Clover 28.0 | 2.0 | 13.5 | 1.0
Sorghum 23.9} 0.61149] 0.2
Alfalfa 27.5} 3.0} 85] 1.9
Grass 32.0) 1.9] 138.4] 1.6
Cowpea vine 20.7) 1.5 | 86] 0.9
Soybean .| 25.8 | 2.7] 8&7] 1.3
Barnyard millet and
soybean . 21.0} 16] 9.2} 0.7
Corn and soybean 24.0 | 1.6! 13.0] 0.7
Roots and tubers — ;
Beet, mangel . 9.1} 1.1] 54] O.1 1.9] 09] 3.8
Beet, sugar 13.5 | 1.1 |10.2] 0.1 2.2; 10} 48
Beet, common 13.0 1.2 8.8 | 0.1 2.4/ 0.9 | 4.4
532 MANUAL OF FARM ANIMALS
Tasie II — Continued
Dry | Dicsstiste Nurrients | FERTILIzING ConstirTv-
Mat mn 100 Pounps ENTS IN 1000 Pounps
Name or FEED . a ie
‘arbo- : =
100 | Protein hy- Care Buttes hehe Potash
Pounps drates siract:| igen Acid
Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb.
Rutabaga . . . .| 114) 10/ 81) 02 1.9} 1.2] 49
Carrot . . . . ./ 114] 08] 7.8) 02 1.5} 0.9] 5.1
Flat turnip - «| 95] 10) 7.2; 02 1.8] 1.0) 3.9
Artichoke . . . .| 20.0) 20/168) 0.2 2.6| 14] 47
Potato . . -| 21.1} 0.9 | 16.3) 0.1 3.2} 1.2] 4.6
Parsnip. . : 11.7 | 16) 11.2] 0.2 18; 20! 4.4
Miscellaneous —
Rape. . . 14.0] 1.5] 81] 02 4.5} 15] 3.6
Cabbage -| 153} 18] 82] 04 3.8| 1.1] 43
Pumpkin, field . .| 9.1 10/ 58) 03 |... ee wats
Pumpkin, garden 19.2 1.4] 83 0.8 11) 16; 09
Sugar beet leaves ./ 12.0) 1.7) 46] 0.2 41) 15] 62
Spurry ... -| 20.0) 1.5] 98] 0.3 3.8} 2.5 | 5.9
: Prickly comfrey 11.6 14] 46; 0.2 4.2) 1.1] 7.5
Acorns, fresh . 44.7] 2.1 | 34.4 DW sees
Beet molasses . .| 79.2 | 9.1 | 59.5 | 0.0 | 14.6! 0.5 | 56.8
Beet pulp . . . ./ 10.2] 0.3] 7.3] 0.0 1.4} 0.2] 0.4
Dried blood . . .} 91.5 | 52.3 | 0.0 | 2.5 [135.0] 13.5 | 7.7
Meat scrap . . .| 89.3 | 66.2 | 0.3 | 13.7 |118.9] 7.0] 1.0
Tankage . . . .{ 93.0 | 31.7 | 15.3) 138.6 |... sl an
Dried fish . . . .| 892] 44.1 | 0.0 | 10.3 | 77.5/|120.0 | 2.0
Cow’smilk. . . .| 128! 36| 49] 3.7 5.3/ 19] 18
Cow’s milk, colostrum] 25.4 | 17.6 | 2.7) 3.6 | 28.2] 66] 1.1
Skim-milk, gravity .| 9.6), 3.1] 47) 08 5.6} 2.0 | 1.9
Skim-milk, centrifugal) 9.4) 2.9] 5.2/ 0.3 5.6; 2.0} 1.9
Buttermilk. . . .| 99] 39] 40] 1.1 4.8) 1.7 | 16
Whey .... .| 66] O8 | 47] 0.3 1.5) 14] 18
INDEX
Aberdeen Angus cattle, 298.
Abortion, in cows, 332; contagious,
333; non-contagious, 332; in mares,
110.
Acid, sulfuric, 253.
Action in horses, 21, 22.
Afterbirth, 336.
Age, of cow, how to estimate, 187; to
feed cattle, 276; of horse, how to
estimate, 7; of sheep, how to esti-
mate, 361; of swine, 454.
Aged horses, 11.
Allerton, 87.
American Merino, 364, 375.
American saddle horse, 97.
American trotter, 24.
Ames, F. L., 192, 197.
Angus cattle, 73.
Animals, breeding, 70; feeding, 37.
Apoplexy parturition, 339.
Arab horse, 6.
Arfman, John, 208.
Arms, in horses, 25, 34.
Artichoke, 475.
A-shaped hog house, 507.
Associations, testing, 235.
Asthma, 176.
Atavism, 82.
Auten, A. O., 250.
Average production for cow, 229.
Ayreshire cattle, 228.
Azoturia, 179.
Baby-beef, 291; advantages, 292;
cattle used, 292; disadvantages,
293; feeds used, 292.
Back-band, 147.
Back, in swine, 461.
Bacon, Canada, 483;
488; type, 454.
Bacon-hog, choosing, 464; condition,
464; feeding, 483; form, 464; feed-
skim-milk for,
ing in summer, 484; feeding in
winter, 484.
Bakewell, Robert, 70.
Balanced ration, 51; use, 55.
Bandage, 152.
Bang, Dr., 350.
Barn, dairy, 264; floors, 268; hog,
505; sheep, 433; ventilation, 266;
watering device, 270.
Barrenness in mares, 109;
332.
Barrier, 10.
Bathing, 156. ;
Bedding for horses, 129; corn stalks,
leaves, shavings, straw, 129; the
cow, 258; sheep, 388, 436.
Beef, baby, 291; food requirements
for, 281.
in cows,
Beef cattle, Aberdeen Angus, 298;
abortion, 332; age to feed, 276;
barrenness, 332; bloating, 351;
breeds, 308; breeding, 305; breed-
ing stock, 308; bull, 311; butchers’
demands, 277; care and manage-
ment, 320; calves from best cows,
307; care of calf, 315-317; choos-
ing, 198; condition of feeder, 200;
condition for feeding, 278; compo-
sition of carcass, 276; codperative
grading-up, 307; cost of bull, 311;
cow, 313; cow with calf at foot, 315;
crossing, 308; dehorning, 354; detail
characters, 200; difficult parturi-
tion, 334; diseases, 331; drifting,
300; dual purpose cow, 309; equip-
ment for summer feeding, 322;
equipment for winter feeding, 326;
essentials of feeding cattle, 275;
eversion of the womb, 338; farms,
322; fat steer, 198; fat steer indi-
cations, 202; feed-bunk, 323, 327;
feed lot, 327; feeding, 275, 318;
533
5384
feeding for local market, 293; feed-
ing grain or pasture, 285; feeding-
standards, 282; feeding shed, 326;
feeder, 198; forage racks, 328; form
of feeder, 199; form for feeding,
277; Galloway bull, 312; garget,
340; general examination, 199; food
requirements, 281; Hereford cow,
806; hogs following, 295; increasing
feeding capacity, 284; indications
of doing well, 320; impaction, 353;
length of feeding period, 297; milk
fever, 338; ‘on feed,’ 296; pasture,
322; percentage dress, 278; plan of
breeding, 307; preparing for ship-
ment, 300; pregnant cow, 314; pro-
duction period, 313; quality for
feeding, 279; quality of feeder, 199;
retained afterbirth, 336; salt, 325;
sample rations, 300-304; season to
breed, 313; self-feeder, 325; shade,
325; shipping, 299; store steer, 198;
summer feeding on pasture, 284;
turning to grass, 285; tuberculosis,
3843; type, 186; uniformity, 200,
310; value of uniformity, 280;
water, 325; weaning the calf, 310;
when to market, 299; white face,
306; wintering, 282; winter feeding
in dry lot, 289.
Belgian horse, 58.
Belly in lard hogs, 462.
Berkshire swine, 463; sow, 460.
Bit, 142; curb, 148; its use, 136;
snaffle, 142; straight, 142; tongue-
lolling, 143.
Bitting, 137.
Bitting-harness, 137.
Black Top Merino, 360.
Blankets, fly, 148; for horses, 130;
outdoor, 131; stable, 130.
Blemish, 14.
Blinds, 143.
Blisters, 156.
Bloat in cattle, 351; in sheep, 446.
Blood-spavin, 18, 161.
Boar, 490.
Body, in beef cattle, 201; dairy cattle,
194; horses, 27, 36; sheep, 370.
Bog-spavin, 18, 161.
Bone-spavin, 158.
INDEX
Bony enlargements, 158.
Bot-flies, 148.
Bottles, whirling test, 233.
Bowen & Quick, 214.
Breast harness, 147.
Breeching, 147.
Breeding animals, 70; atavism, 82;
beef cattle, 305; beef bull, 311;
calves from best cows, 237; co-
operative, 238; crate for swine, 493;
crossing beef breeds, 308; dairy
cattle, 227; ewe flock, 406; ewes,
407; grading-up beef cattle, 307;
heredity, 83; horses and mules, 96;
inheritance of disease, 83;. like pro-
duces like, 71; mare, 103; mating,
81; mating sheep, 407; plan of, 237;
plan beef cattle, 307; plan for
sheep, 404; plan for swine, 487;
prepotency, 84; purity of, 85; ram,
406; reversion, 82; season of year
to breed horses, 104; selection, 77;
selection and improvement, 242;
sheep, 403; soundness, 102; stal-
lion, 102; sterility, 88; swine, 487;
systems of, 89, breeding from best,
95, crossing, 90, grading, 89, line-
breeding, 90, in-breeding, 91.
Bridle, 142; blinds, 143; center-pieces,
144; check-rein, 144; ear-bobs, 144;
head-stall, 143; tassels, 144; throat
latch, 144.
Broken wind, 176.
Brown Swiss bull, 252.
Brown Swiss cow “ Vogel,’ 258.
Bull, 244; beef (see beef cattle); dairy
(see dairy cattle); ringing, 264.
Bunions, 17.
Butter, 227.
Cabbage, 386.
Calf, 250; and cow, 315; castrating
male calf, 255; constipation, 341;
dairy, 250; danger of over-feeding,
253; diarrhea, 341: feeding beef,
318; from best cows, 237; grain
mixture for, 226; ills, 340, consti-
pation, 341; scours, contagious or
“white scours’ and simple, 341;
milk substitutes for feeding, 255;
on skim-milk, 253; on whole milk,
INDEX
253; removing horns, 255; scours,
341; teaching to drink, 252.
Calk-wound, 132, 166.
Cannon in light horses, 26, 28;
heavy horses, 34.
Cans, milk, 260.
Canula and trocar, 352.
Capped-elbows, 164.
Capped-hock, 164.
Capped-knee, 164.
Care, beef cattle, 320; dairy cattle,
257; horse, 127; sheep, 422; swine,
503.
Carpenter & Ross, 277.
Cart-horse, 70.
Cart training, 139.
Caryle, 221.
Caryle’s soiling system, 221.
Castleman, J. B., 97.
Castrating calf, 255;
swine, 501.
Catalonian jack,. 123.
Catarrh, 174. —
Cattle (for beef cattle see beef cattle) ;
(for dairy cattle see dairy cattle) ;
age by horns, 189; estimating age,
178; teeth, 187; types, 185; beef
and dairy, 186.
Champlin Bros., 91.
Chatillon’s Spring Balance, 230.
Check-rein, 144.
Cheese, 227.
Cheshire, swine, 496; pig, 493.
Chest, in light horses, 24; in heavy
horses, 34.
Chester White, swine, 479; boar, 476.
Cheviot,.sheep, 425.
Chicken-eating swine, 524.
Chief perfection, 85.
Choking, 170.
Cholera, in swine, 511; immunization,
513; preventing, 511; spreading
disease, 511; serum, 513; use of se-
Tum, 515.
Choosing cattle, 185; horses, 3; sheep,
359; swine, 453.
Clipping cow’s udder, 258 ; horses, 128.
Clover, 386.
Clydesdale horse, 30.
Colantha 4th’s Johanna, 229.
Collar, 145; kinds: common leather,
in
lambs, 419;
535
half sweeney,
and steel, 146.
Colic, 172.
Colt, age, 8; age to bit, 136; bitting,
137; harnessing, 138; ill, 115; con-
stipation, 115; scours, 115; navel
disease, 116; method of catching,
134; training, 133; training to
mount, 140; training uses of the bit,
136.
Company plan of buying horses, 99.
Composition beef cattle carcass, 276.
Condition of beef cattle, 200; market-
able, 297; of dairy cattle, 193; of
swine, 464.
Constipation, 174; calf, 341; foal,
115; lamb, 416; sheep, 447; swine,
521.
Constitution in swine, 457.
Cook, (. 3, 122,
Cook & Son, W. N., 365.
Cooking feed, 470.
Cooler for milk, 259.
Coéperative breeding, 238; cattle, 238;
horses 98; sheep, 404; swine, 489.
Corns, 167.
Corsa, W.S., 15.
Cots hog, 505.
Cotswold ram, 441.
Cow, barn, 264; beef, 313; dairy,
246; testing associations, 235; with
calf at foot, 315.
Creep for sheep, 392.
Cribbing, 13 (see horse).
Crossing, 77, 90.
Crouch & Son, J., 58.
Croup in horses, 27, 36.
Crupper, 147.
Curb, 18, 163.
Curb-bit, 143.
humane, pneumatic
Dairy-barn ventilation, 265.
Dairy cattle, abortion, 332; Ayreshire,
228; baby-beef, 291; barn, 264;
barrenness, 332 ; bloating, 351 ; breed-
ing, 227; bull, 244; calves from best
cows, 237; care and management,
257; care of bull, 263; choosing,
185; choosing dairy bull, 244; con-
stitution, 193; codperative breeding,
238; dehorning, 354; detail char-
536
acter, 194; difficult parturition,
334; diseases, 331; dry forage for,
217; Dutch Belted, 262; eversion
of the womb, 338; feeding, 203;
feeding calf, 251; féeding in lot, 289 ;
feeding-standard, 204; food-effect
on composition of milk, 210; food
requirements for milk, 203; form,
190; forming the herd, 238; garget,
340; general examination, 190;
grading-up, 239; grading, first gen-
eration, 240; grading, second gen-
eration, 241; Guernsey cow, 192;
Haecker’s feeding-standard, 206;
heifer calves from high-producing
dams, 240; high production, 222;
Holstein-Friesian, 205 ; kicking, 354 ;
impaction, 353; milk fever, 338;
milking, 260; milk-recerds, 229;
milk signs, 197; milk veins, 197;
order of supplying food, 212; par-
turition time, 248; plan of breeding,
237; productive period, 246; pro-
tecting from flies, 215; quality, 193;
retained afterbirth, 336; ringing the
bull, 264; sample rations, 224;
season to breed, 247; selection and
improvement, 242; silage, 218;
succulent feeds, 217; sucking cow,
355; summer feeding, 215; tem-
perament, 193; testing associations,
235; tuberculosis, 343; udder, 195;
uniformity, 245; watering, 213;
winter feeding, 216.
Dairy cow (see dairy cattle).
Dairy herd, 238; (see dairy cattle).
Dairy type, 186.
Davis & Son, Frank, 329.
Davison, Dr. G. H., 390.
Daytholeum, 426.
Dehorning, 354.
De Kol 2d, 85.
Delane Merino, 360, 364.
Denmark, 85.
Devon bull, 344.
Diarrhea, 173; in calves, 341; in foal,
115; in lamb, 416.
Dickinson Merino, 360.
Difficult parturition, 334.
Digestion, 44; conditions influencing,
48.
INDEX
Digestive organs, 45.
Dip, how used, 425.
Dipping, frequency, 426; importance,
423; self, 503; sheep, 423; swine,
503.
Dipping-vat, 424.
Diseases of cattle, 331; of the horse,
151; of sheep, 439; of swine, 510;
prevention, 265.
Distemper, 177.
Docking lambs, 419.
Dogs and goats, 377.
Double safety, 141.
Drenching, 154.
Dressing winter lambs, 393.
Driving horse, feeding, 63.
Drove (see swine).
Dry forage, 217.
Dry-lot, 289.
Dry matter in food, 526.
Dual-purpose cow, 309.
Dumb jockey, 137.
Duroc Jersey, swine, 474.
Dutch Belted cattle, 262.
Ear marking sheep, 420; swine, 502.
Eezema, 169.
Elbows, 25; capped, 164; ‘‘tied in,"
25.
Enemas, 156.
English shire horse, 35.
Environment, 75.
Erotas, 85.
Escutcheon, 198.
Eversion of the womb, 338.
Ewe, 406; lambing time, 411; lamb-
ing pens, 412; method of mating,
407; parturition, 412; pregnant,
410; productive period, 407; season
to breed, 407.
Exercise for sheep, 387.
Exile of St. Lambert, 86.
External medication, 155.
Eye, diseases of, 180; moon-blindness,
181; sore, 417, 440.
Fall lambs, 396; feeding, 396.
Farmer’s cow, 309.
Farms for fattening cattle, 322.
Farrowing swine, 496.
Fat, reading, 233.
INDEX 537
Fattening, cattle, 284; sheep, 388;
swine, 478,
Fecundity (sce prolificacy).
Feed-alley, 267.
Feed-bunk, 323; platform, 327.
Feed-carrier, 267.
Feed cooking, 470 ; digestible nutrients,
526; ‘‘full,” 296; grinding, 469;
list, 526; measures, 525; mixture
for lambs, 392; racks, sheep, 436;
soaking, 467 ; succulent, 217 ; weights,
525.
Feeders, wintering, 282.
Feeding animals, 37; baby-beef, 291;
beef cattle, 275; beef cattle on
pasture, 284; breeding herd, 472;
cattle for local market, 293; capacity
among swine, 470; capacity in-
creased, 284; dairy calf, 251; dairy
cattle, 203; dairy cattle in summer,
215; dairy cattle in winter, 216;
dry forage, 217; equipment for sum-
mer, 322; equipment for winter,
326; feed-bunk, 323; the flock,
380; flock in summer, 381; flock in
winter, 386; for high production,
222; the heifer, 223; horses, 56;
grain to beef cattle on pasture, 285;
grain to cattle in lot, 289; lambs,
391, 417; large hog, 479; mare at
parturition, 112; milking cow, 214;
mules, 67; ‘off feed,’ 353; on
pasture, 324; pigs, 500; sheep, 377;
sheep in corn belt, 399; sheep in
East, 399; sheep in West, 398;
silage, 218; steers in winter, 289;
succulent feeds, 217; swine, 467;
young foal, 117.
Feeding-standard, 51; for beef cattle,
282: for dairy cattle, 204; for the
horse, 57; mere guides, 210; for
sheep, 380; for swine, 468.
Feet, 27, 29, 35; care of, 131; sheep’s,
388; shoeing, 132.
Fetlocks in horses, 26.
Fever, bilious, 178; shipping, 178.
Filly, breeding, 103.
Firing, 157.
Fleece, 372; brightness, 376; condi-
tion, 375; crimp, 374; density, 373;
length, 373; luster, 376; kemp, 375;
purity, 375; quality, 373, 374;
softness, 374; soundness, 374; yolk,
376.
Flies, protecting cows from, 215.
Flock, feeding, 380; (see sheep).
Floors, 268.
Flushing, 407.
Fly-blankets, 148.
Fly-blister, 156.
Fly-killer, 148.
Fly-nets, 148.
Foal, 112, 113; care of, 113; feeding,
117; grain for, 119; ills, 115; con-
stipation, diarrhea, navel infection,
116; jack, 121; skim-milk for, 120;
weaning, 119.
Food, 37; composition, 38, 526, ash,
39, carbohydrates, 40, fat, 41, protein,
39, water, 39; and composition of
milk, 210; cooking for horses, 49;
curing, 49; digestibility, 44, 526;
dry matter to 100 pounds, 526;
effects on flavor in milk, 212; effect
on percentage of fat, 211; effect on
quantity of milk, 212; effect of total
solids in milk, 211; fermenting, for
horses, 49 ; fertilizing constituents, in
1000 pounds, 526; functions, 41, ash,
42, carbohydrates, 43, fat, 43, pro-
tein, 42, water, 41; grinding, 48; list,
526; nutrients, 46; order of supply-
ing, 57, 212; preparation for swine,
469; requirements for beef, 281;
requirements for milk, 203; require-
ments for sheep, 379; requirements
for swine, 468; required for work,
56; steaming, 44; use, 37; used
for baby-beef, 292; wetting, 49.
Foot, corns, 167; cracked hoofs, 168;
lameness, 165; rot in sheep, 440;
wounds, 167.
Forage racks, 328.
Fore-arms in horses, 25, 34.
Fore-quarters, in beef cattle, 201; in
dairy cattle, 194; in sheep, 370.
Foul sheath, 180.
Founder, 17.
Fracture, 160.
Fraser, 221.
Fraser’s soiling system, 221.
French coach horse, 87.
538
French draft horse, 111.
Fruit-growing, 100.
Full feed, 296.
Galbraith, Alex., 30.
Galloway bull, 312.
Galls, 163.
Galton’s Law, 80.
Gambetta Wilks, 87.
Gammon, 466.
Garget, in cattle, 340; sheep, 448;
swine, 523.
Generative organs, 331.
Gestation table, cattle, 249;
108; sheep, 408; swine, 495.
Gifford & Stockwell, 344.
Gillis, A. R., 81.
Glista, 243.
Glista family, 243.
Goats and dogs, 377.
Goodwin, John, 488.
Goodwin, J. 8., 298.
Goubaux, 10.
Grade dairy herd, 239.
Grading, 89.
Grading-up table, 243.
Grain-farming, 100.
horse,
Grass, fattening, 284; turning to,
285.
Gravel, 17.
Grinding feed, 469; food, 48.
Grippe, 178.
Grooming the horse, 127.
Grucels for foal, 118.
Guenon, 198.
Guernsey cow, 192.
Gutter, 269.
Hackney coach horse, 22, cob,
pony, 79.
Haecker, 206.
Halter training, 134.
Hambletonian, 10, 84.
Hame-tug, 146.
Hampshire shcep, 400, 488.
Hams, 463, 466.
Harness, caring for,
149; room, 149.
Harnessing, 141; adjusting hame-tug,
146; bit, 142; breast harness, 147;
bridle, 142; colt (see colt); fitting
79;
148; cleaning,
INDEX
back-band, 147; fitting the collar,
145; fitting crupper, 147.
Hartline, Frank, 337.
Harvesting time, 48.
Head, beef cattle, 200; dairy cattle,
194; horse, 23; sheep, 368; swine,
459.
Hearing, 16.
Heart’s Delight Farm, 418.
Heaves, 176.
Hechtner, C. 8., 312.
Heifer feeding, 223.
Hengerveld De Kol, 86.
Herd, dairy, 238; grading-up, 239;
(see cattle).
Heredity, 83.
Hereford cow, 306.
Hind-quarters in dairy cattle, 195.
Hinny, 125; breeding, 124.
Hitching, double, 139; single, 139.
Hips in swine, 462.
Hip-straps, 147.
Hocks, 28, 36; capped, 164.
Hog-dipping equipment, 504, 509.
Hogs following beef cattle, 295; (see
swine).
Holstein-Friesian cattle, 205.
Hood Farm, 245.
Hoof, care of, 1381; cracked, 168; oil,
131; quarter crack, 168; rate of
growth, 132; sand crack, 168; toe
crack, 168; (see horse).
Horned Dorset ram, 418.
Horns, in estimating age,
moving, 255, 354.
Horse, abortion, 110; action, 21, 32;
American saddler, 97; Arab, 6;
asthma, 176; azoturia, 179; bad
mouth, 137; barrenness, 109; bed-
ding, 129; Belgian, 58; bitting,
137; blankets, 180; blemish, 14;
bred cach year, 96; breeding, 96;
breeding two-year filly, 103; breed-
ing stock, 99; broken wind, 176;
capped elbows, 16; care, 127; care
of teeth, 128; catarrh, 174; choos-
ing, 3; choosing heavy, 29; choos-
ing light, 20; clipping, 128; clipped
hair on legs, 128; Clydesdale, 30;
constipation, 174; colic, 172; co-
operative breeding, 98; cribbing, 15;
189; re-
INDEX
curb, 18; defective hearing, 16;
detail character of heavy horses, 33,
of light horses, 23; diarrhea, 172;
discharge of nostrils, 15; diseases,
151; distemper, 177; English shire,
35; estimating age, 7; examination
in action, 6; examination in stable,
5; feeding, 56; feeding brood mare,
65; feeding for driving, 63; feeding
for work, 60; feeding when idle, 64;
feet, 131; fistula, 16; foal, 112;
forging, 18; for police, 106; French
coach, 87; French draft, 111;
general appearance in heavy, 29, in
light, 21; general examination, 5;
gestation table, period, 108; good
mouth, 136; hackney coach, 79;
harnessing, 141; heaves, 19, 176;
“horse company,” 99; impaired
vision, 16; indigestion, 171; in-
fluenza, 178; interfering, 19; judg-
ing, 3; lameness, 158; locating
lameness, 19; management, 127;
mare, 103; Morgan, 94; number,
96; order of supplying food, 57;
. overreaching, 18; parturition time,
110; Percheron, 15; plan of breed-
ing, 96; poll-evil, 16; quality, 22;
Tegularity in feeding, 57; ring-bone,
17; roaring, 19,176; sample rations,
68, artillery, cavalry, colt, draft,
farm, hunter and race horse, 69;
scouring, 173; scratches, 17; season
of year to breed, 104; Shetland
pony, 117; shoeing, 132; sick, 151;
side-bone, 17; sound, 14; sound-
ness in breeding, 102; spavin, 18;
splints, 16; stallion, 102; stringhalt,
18; Suffolk, 74; sweenied, 16; tem-
perament, 23; thick-wind, 176;
thoroughpin, 18; training, 133;
training vicious, 141; types, 19,
heavy and light, 20; type to breed,
100; uniformity in breeding, 101;
unsound, 14; unsound hoofs, 17;
unsound knees, 16; value of care,
128; watering, 59; weight of heavy
horses, 31; when mares should be
589
Idle horse, feeding, 64.
Impaction in cattle, 353.
Improvement, the basis of, 72; unit of,
237.
In-breeding, 92.
Indigestion, 171.
Individual merit, 78.
Influenza, 178.
Inheritance, 83; of disease, 83.
Ink marking, 421.
Interfering, 166.
Irritants, 156.
Jack, 125; breeding, 121; care of, 124;
Catalonian, 123; foals, 121.
Jennet, 125; breeding, 121;
tion, 121.
Jersey bull, 245.
Jersey cow, ‘“Jacoba Irene,’’ 250.
Jersey Red hog, 474.
Jerusalem artichoke, 475.
Johanna, 85.
Jordan, Dr., 276.
Jowls, 459.
Judging, cattle, 185; becf cattle, 198;
dairy cow, 189; faculties, 3; horse,
8; lard-hogs, 455; sheep, 359;
swine, 453.
parturi-
Kale, 386.
Kansas Agricultural College, 105.
Kemp, 375.
Kicking cow, 354.
Kick-strap, 140.
Knee, 26, 34; bucked, 463; capped, 164.
Lambing time, 411.
Lambs, 413; care, 417; castrating,
419; chilled, 414; constipation, 416;
diarrhea, 416; disowned, 415; dock-
ing, 419; dressing, 393; fall, 396;
feeding, 391, 417; first meal, 413;
full feed, 397; ills 416, constipation
416, diarrhea 416, pinning 416, sore
eyes 417, sore mouth 417; mark-
ing, 420; spring, 396; teaching to
drink, 414; weaning, 417; winter,
388, 398.
tried, 107; whistling, 176.
Hot-house lamb, 389.
Hypodermic medication, 154.
Lameness, 158; blood-spavin, 161;
bog-spavin, 161; bone-spavin, 158;
bony enlargements, 158; curb, 163;
540
fractures, 160; foot, 165; interfer-
ing, 166; overreaching, 166; ring-
bones, 158; shoulder, 162; side-
bones, 158; splints, 158; sprains,
161; sweeny — shoulder, 162;
thoroughpin, 161; wind-galls, 161.
Laminitis, 17.
Lampas, 170.
Lard-hog, winter feeding, 481.
Lard type, 453.
Large Yorkshire swine, 465.
“Lean to,” 153.
Leet, Chas. & Jas., 384.
Leg of horse, 28; of mutton, 370; in
swine, 463.
Leg of mutton, 370.
Lehman & Wolff, 57.
Leicester ewe, 437.
Lice, 440; swine, 520.
Lincoln sheep, 449.
Line-breeding, 90.
Liniments, 155.
Litter-carrier, 269.
Loin in beef cattle, 278; in horses, 27.
Long-horn cattle, 70.
Lord Netherland De Kol, 86.
Lot, 327; dry, 289; feeding, 289;
hog, 509; paving, 327; quarantine,
510; sheep, 438.
Machines, milking, 260.
Maintenance rations, 50.
Management, beef cattle, 320; dairy
cattle, 257; horses, 127; sheep, 422;
swine, 503.
Mangels for sheep, 387.
Mangers, 267.
Maplewood, 79.
Mare, 103; abortion, 110; barren-
ness, 109; brood, 65; colostrum
milk for foals, 113; feeding, 65;
parturition time, 110; at weaning
time, 120; when to try to breed, 107.
Marketable condition, 297.
Market condition of steers, 299; local,
293.
Market-gardening, 100.
Marshall, C., 360.
Mating, 81; sheep, 407.
May & Otis, 310.
Mayes’ ‘‘ Diseases of Animals,’’ 151.
INDEX
Measure of feed, 525.
Medication, 154; bathing, 156; blis-
ters, fly and red, 156; drenching, 154;
enemas, 156; external, 155; firing
line and point, 157; hypodermic,
154; liniments, 155; lotions, 155;
ointments, 155; plasters, 157; poul-
tices, 155.
Medicine, administering, 154.
Merino, American, 375; A type, 364;
B type, 365; C type, 365; Delaine,
360; ram, 364.
Milk, colostrum, 113; cooling, 259;
effect of food on composition, 210;
effect of food on fat, 211; effect of
food on quantity, 212; effect of
total solids, 211; for calf, 253; for
foal, 118; food and flavor, 212; food
requirements for, 203; reading per-
centage fat, 233; sampling, 232;
sanitary, 257; signs of milking ca-
pacity, 197; skim-milk for calves,
253; substitutes for calves, 255;
testing for fat, 232; using acid, 233;
whirling bottles, 233.
Milk-cooler, 260.
Milk-fever, dairy cattle, 338; mare,
111; sheep, 448; swine, 523.
Milk-house, 259.
Milking, 260.
Milking-machines, 260.
Milk-mirror, 198.
Milk-oil, 426.
Milk-records, 229; keeping, 230;
record-sheet, 231; value, 232.
Milk-signs, 197.
Milk-veins, 197.
Moon-blindness, 181.
Morgan.horse, 94.
Mouth, ailments of, 164; importance
of a good one, 136; lampas, 170;
sore, 417; sore, swine, 522.
Moyer, H. A., 205.
Mud fever, 169.
Mules, 67, 124, 125;
feeding, 67.
Mustard plaster, 157.
Mutton, leg of, 370.
breeding, 124;
Naptholeum, 426.
National Merino, 360.
INDEX
National Stockman and Farmer, 67.
Navel infection, 116.
Navicular disease, 17.
Neck sore, 163.
Nets, fly, 148.
Nutrients, 46.
Nutritive-ratio, 52.
Oats, 386.
Oil, neatsfoot, 149.
Ointments, 155.
Old Fanny Cook, 86.
Old Granny, 86.
Onward, 87.
Otis & May, 310.
Outdoor blanket, 131.
Over-check rein, use of, 144.
Overreaching, 166.
Oxford sheep, 409.
Pails, milk, 260.
Palatability, 48.
Parasites, external,
441.
Parents, relative influence, 88.
Parnell, G. W., 425.
Parturition, 334; apoplexy, 339; diffi-
cult in cattle, 334; difficult in horse,
112; difficult in sheep, 412; in jen-
nets, 121; time in cows, 248; time in
mares, 110; time in sheep, 411;
time in swine, 496.
Parturition fever, 339;
sheep, 448; swine, 523.
Pasterns in light horses, 26, 28;
heavy horses, 34.
Pastures, 286, 322, 382: caring for,
287; change for sheep, 383; for
swine, 475; sown for sheep, 385;
steers at, 288; turning sheep, 382;
turning to, 285.
Paul Beets De Kol, 86.
Paving feed lot, 327.
Pedigree, 78.
Pens, lambing, 412.
Percheron horse, 15; why large, 71.
Permanent pastures, 286.
Pigs, 498; after weaning, 501; care
of, 496; castrating, 501; feeding,
500; first meal, 498; marking, 501;
ills, 499, digestive disorders, 499,
440; internal,
cattle, 339;
in
541
scours 500, thumps 500; sow eating,
497; weaning, 500.
Pink-eye, 181.
Pinning in sheep, 416.
Platform for feed-bunks, 327.
Plumb, C. 8., 476.
Pocahontas, 86.
Poland China swine, 455, 457.
Pork chop, 461; roast, 461.
Porterhouse steak, 278.
Poultices, 155; bran, bread and milk,
flaxseed meal, mashed boiled turnips,
156.
Prepotency, 84; breed, 84; race, 84.
Prime of rib, 278.
Productive rations, 50.
Prolificacy, 86.
Pumpkins, for sheep, 386; for swine,
476.
Quality, in light horses, 22, 23; in
heavy horses, 33; in beef cattle, 199;
in dairy cattle, 193; in sheep, 367;
in swine, 457.
Quarantine lot, 510.
Quarter-cracks, 17, 132, 168.
Quick & Bowen, 214.
Quitter, 17.
Racks, 328, 398.
Ram, 406; managing, 410.
Rambouillet, 364; ram, 381.
Ramsdell, J. A. P., 6.
Ratio, method of calculating,
nutritive, 52.
Ration, balanced, 51; for sheep, 386;
for swine, 484; sample, for horse, 68.
Rations, maintenance, 50; productive,
50; sample, 68; sample, beef cattle,
300-304; sample for dairy cattle,
224; sample for sheep, 401; sample
for swine, 484.
Records, 229; keeping, 230: of per-
formance, 236.
Red-blister, 156.
Red polled bull, 329.
Rein, 144; over-check, side, 144.
Retained afterbirth, 336.
Reversion, 82.
Ribs in horses, 27.
Ring-bones, 158.
52;
542
Ringing swine, 474.
Roaring, 176.
Roots, 218; for dairy cattle, 218; for
sheep, 387; for swine, 475.
Ross & Carpenter, 277.
Rotation pastures, 286.
Rump, in sheep, 370; in swine, 462.
Rye, 386.
Saddle horse, 97; five-gaited, threc-
gaited, 97.
Salt, 60, 379; for beef cattle, 325;
for horses, 60; for swine, 472.
Sand cracks, 17, 168.
Sanitary milk, 257; cow stable, 258;
milking, 260; utensils, 260.
Scab, 423, 440.
Schmit-Kolding sterile-air outfit, 339.
Score ecard, value, 5.
Scouring, 173.
Scours in calves, 341;
sheep, 416; swine, 521.
Scratches, 168.
Season of the year to breed beef cattle,
313; dairy cattle, 247; horses, 104;
sheep, 407; swine, 492.
Sedgley Farms, 252.
Seedy toe, 17.
Selection, 77.
Self-feeder, 325.
Shade, for beef cattle, 325; for sheep,
384; for swine, 508.
Shearing sheep by hand, 428; by ma-
chinery, 429.
Shearing, sheep, 427: tying wool,
433; when to shear, 428; wool-box,
433.
Sheath, foul, 180.
Shed, covered, 258; cattle feeding, 326.
Shed-shaped hog house, 508.
Sheep, 359; barns, 433; bedding, 388,
436; bloating, 446; breeding, 403;
breeding ewes, 407; caked udder,
448; care, 422; care of fect, 388;
castrating lambs, 419; catching and
holding, 360; change of pasture,
383; Cheviot, 425; chilled lamb,
414; choosing breeding stock, 404;
condition and weight, 367; consti-
pation, 447; constitutional vigor,
367; Cotswold ram, 441; Delaine
colts, 115;
INDEX '
Merino, 360; detail characters, 368;
difficult parturition, 412; dipping,
423; diseases, 439; disowned lamb,
415; docking lambs, 419; dogs, 377;
dressing winter lambs, 393; exer-
cise, 387; estimating age, 361; ewe
flock, 406; fall lambs, 396; fatten-
ing, 388; feeding, 377; feeding the
flock, 380; feeding flock in summer,
381; feeding flock in winter, 386;
feeding lambs, 391; feeding in corn
belt, 399; feeding in East, 399;
feeding in West, 398; feed racks,
436; fine-wool, 363; fleece, 372;
flock in winter, 386; flushing, 407;
food requirements, 379; foot rot,
440; form, 366; general appearance,
366; garget, 448; gestation, table,
408; Hampshire, 400; holding and
catching, 360; hot-house lamb, 388;
judging, 359; lambs, 413; lamb
ills, 416; lambs on full feed, 397;
lambing pens, 412; lambing time,
411; Leicester ewe, 437; lice, 440;
Lincoln, 449; lot, 438; management,
422; managing the ram, 410;
marking, 421; mating, 407; method
of examination, 359; mutton type,
365; Oxford, 409; overfeeding, 447;
pasture, 382; plan of breeding, 404;
productive period, 407; quality,
367; feeding rack, 398; ram, 406;
ration, 386; roots, 887; sample
rations, 401; scab, 423, 440;
season to breed, 407; shade, 384,
385; shearing, 427; | Shropshire,
342; sick, 439; silage, 387; sore
eyes, 440; sore teats, 440; South-
down, 384; spring lambs, 396;
stomach-worm, 446; tagging, 353;
tape-worms, 444; tick, 426; turning
to pasture, 382; types, 363, 405;
uniformity, 368, 405; washing, 427;
weaning lambs, 417; winter lambs,
398; Wolff-Lehman standards, 380.
Shetland pony, 117; why small, 71.
Shields on swine, 454.
Shipping beef cattle, 299.
Shoe-boil, 165.
Shoe, fitting, 133.
Shoeing, 132.
INDEX
Shorthorn bull, 277.
Shoulders, in horses, 25, 34; sores,
163; in sheep, 368; in bacon-hogs,
464; in lard-hogs, 461.
Shoulder-lameness, 162.
Shropshire sheep, 392; ram, 390.
Side-bones, 158.
Side-crack, 132.
Side-rein, use of, 144.
Sides in bacon-hogs, 465; in lard-hogs,
461.
Sight impaired, 16, 180.
Silage, 218; for cattle, 218; for sheep,
387.
Silo, 270; construction, 273; filling,
272; size, 271; table showing ca-
pacity, 272.
Sirloin steak, 278.
Sisson, L. P., 352.
Skim-milk for beef calf, 318; for dairy
calf, 253; for foal, 120; for sheep,
414; for swine, 484.
Sling, to support sick animals, 152.
Small Yorkshires, 499.
Snyder & Sons, H. D., 66.
Soaking feed, 469.
Soap, castile, 149.
Soiling, 218; examples 220, cattle 220,
* sheep 386, swine 481.
Soundness, in breeding, 102; in horses,
14. ,
Southdown sheep, 384.
Sows, 491; after farrowing, 497: eat-
ing pigs, 497; feeding summer, 472,
winter, 477; pregnant, 494; pro-
ductive period, 492; season to breed,
492.
Spavin, 18; bog, bone and occult, 18.
Speedy cuts, 166.
Splints, 158.
Sprains, 161.
Spring lambs, 396; feeding, 396;
foundation stock, 396; marketing,
396.
Stable-blankets, 130.
Stable-cow, 258.
Stable-yard, 258.
Staley, W. M., 375.
Stallion, 102; securing, 98.
Stanchion, 267.
Standard-feeding, 51.
548
Standard Merino, 360.
Steer, fat, 202; indications when fat,
299.
Steers at pasture, 288.
Sterility, 88.
St. Lambert, 85.
Stockers, wintering, 282.
Stockwell & Gifford, 344.
Stoke Pogis, 85.
Stomach, 45; honeycomb, many-plies,
paunch, rennet, 45.
Stomach-worm, 440.
Strainers, milk, 260.
Strangles, 177.
Stringhalt, 18.
Strongylus contortus, 440.
Stud (see horses).
Succulent feeds, 217 ; cattle, 217 ; sheep,
386; swine, 480.
Sucking cow, 355.
Suffolk ewe, 411.
Suffolk horse, 74.
Sulfuric acid, 233.
Sweeny shoulder, 162.
Swine, after weaning, 501; age, 454;
bacon type, 454; Berkshire, 463;
boar, 440; breeding, 487; breeding
crate, 493; care, 503; care of pigs,
496; care of tubercular herd, 518;
castrating pigs, 501; Cheshire, 496;
Chester White, 479; chicken eating,
524; cholera, 511; condition, 456;
constipation, 521; constitution, 457;
choosing lard-hog, 455; cooking feed,
470; detail characters, 459; dipping,
503; diseases, 510; Duroc Jersey,
474; fattening, 478: farrowing
time, 496; feeding, 467; feeding
breeding herd, 472; feeding capacity,
470; feeding for lard, 479, 481;
feeding old sow, 478; feeding pigs,
500; feeding standards, 468; feed-
ing in summer, 472, 479; feeding in
winter, 477; feeding young sow,
478; food requirements, 468; form,
456; garget, 523; giving feed, 471;
general appearance of lard-hog, 456;
grinding feed, 469; Hampshire, 488 ;
house, A-shaped, 506; house, shed-
shaped, 507; individual hog house,
505; lard type, 453; lice, 520;
544
judging, 453; lot, 509; manage-
ment, 503; marking, 501; method
of mating, 492; pasture, 475;
plague, 517; plan of breeding, 487;
pig ills 499, constipation 521,
scours 521, thumps 522; Poland
China, 457 ; pregnant sow, 494; pro-
ductive period, 492; pumpkins, 476;
quality, 457; quarantine lot, 510;
shelter, 504; removing tusks, 523;
ringing, 474; rooting, 474; roots,
475; salt, 472; sample rations, 484;
scours, 521; season to breed, 492;
selecting breeding stock, 489; self-
dipping vat, 503; skim-milk for,
480; soaking feed, 467; sore mouth,
522; soiling for, 473; sows, 491;
sow after farrowing, 497; sow eating
pigs, 497; Tamworth, 519; thumps,
522; types, 453, 489; tuberculosis,
517; uniformity, 458, 490; wallows,
509, self-dipping, 504; water for,
472: weaning pigs, 500; weight,
456; worms, 519.
Syringe, 345.
Teenia expansa, 444.
Tagging sheep, 383.
Tamworth swine, 519; sow, 515.
Tanks, water, 328.
Tape-worms, 444.
Teaching the colt, 133.
Teams, matching, 4.
Teats, sore, 440.
Teeth, abnormal, 170: bishoping, 14;
broken, 170; of cattle, 187; care of,
128; decayed, 14, 170; diseased,
170; of horse, 8; irregularities, 13;
sheep, 362; split, 170; ulcered, 170.
Temperament, in dairy cattle, 193; in
horses, 23.
Testing milk, 232.
Thermometer, 346.
Thick wind, 176.
Thigh in horses, 27, 36.
Thigh-ovals in cows, 198.
Thoroughpin, 18, 161.
Throat latch, 144.
Thrush, 17.
Thumps, 522.
Tick, sheep, 426.
INDEX
Toe-crack, 132, 168.
Tom Corwin 2d, 85.
Tongue-lolling bit, 143.
Training the horse, 133.
Training, cart, 139; to harness, 137;
hitching double, 139; hitching
single, 139; kick strap, 140; tolead,
134; to mount, 140; vicious horses,
141.
Trees, shade, 325; cattle, 325; sheep,
384,
Trocar and canula, 352.
Tuberculosis, 343, 345; Bang method
of eradicating, 350; eradication,
350; directions for making tuber-
culin test, 346; methods of infection,
343; prevention, 349; retesting,
349; spread, 517; in swine, 517;
testing outfit, 345; tuberculin, test,
345.
Tubers, 218; sheep, 387; swine, 475.
Turnips, 386.
Tusks, removing, 523.
Udder, 195; caked, in cattle, 339;
eaked, in sheep, 448; garget in
cattle, 340; garget in sheep, 448;
garget in swine, 523; milk-fever,
338.
Uniformity, beef cattle, 310; dairy
cattle, 345; horse, 101: sheep, 405;
swine, 490.
Unsoundness, 14.
Variation, 72; causes of 75, crossing
77, environment 75, climate, 75,
care, 76, food, 76; kinds of, 73, func-
tional, qualitative and quantitative,
73; importance, 72.
Vaseline, 346.
Vat, dipping, 424; dipping swine, 503;
self-dipping swine, 503.
Ventilation, 265, 266; King’s system,
266 ; sheep barns, 434; window, 268.
Vicious horses, 141.
Victoria sow, 482.
Vision impaired, 16.
Wallace, 188.
Wallows, swine, 504, 509.
Water-device, 270.
INDEX
Watering beef cattle, 325; the horse,
59; the milking cow, 213; sheep,
427; swine, 472.
Waters, 326.
Water-tanks, 328.
Weaning, the calf, beef, 317; dairy,
252; the foal, 119; the lamb, 417;
the pig, 500.
Weight, of feed, 525; of horses, 31; of
sheep, 367; of swine, 456.
Whistling, 176.
Wind, thick, 176; unsound, 19.
Wind-galls, 161.
Windows, 269.
Wing, 220.
Wing’s soiling system, 220.
Wintering feeders, 282; stockers, 282.
Winter lambs, 398; crating, 395;
545
dressing, 393; foundation stock,
389; packing, 395; shipping, 395;
winter quarters, 391.
Wolff & Lehman, 57.
Womb eversion, 338.
Wool-box, 433.
Wool, sacks, 483; tying, 433.
Work, food required for, 56.
Work horse, feeding, 60; grooming,
127; watering, 59.
Worms, prevention, 519; in sheep,
440; in swine, 519; treatment,
sheep, 442; swine, 519.
Wounds, 177.
Yard, stable, 258.
Zenoleum, 426.
Printed in the United States of America,
TT’HE following pages contain advertisements of a
few of the Macmillan bouks on kindred subjects.
RURAL SCIENCE SERIES
EDITED By L. H. BAILEY
On Selection of Land, etc.
Isaac P. Roberts’ The Farmstead . F é - A ° « $150
On Tillage, etc.
F. H, King’s The Svil . : a a ne cee . 1 50
Isaac P. Roberts’ The Fertility of ilie aed . . ee oe. Oe 150
F. H. King’s Irrigation and Drainage . . : . . s . I 50
Edward B. Voorhees’ Fertilizers . . . . . 5 . I 25
Edward B. Voorhees’ Forage Crops. . . is . . : 150
J. A. Widtsoe’s Dry Farming F : . . ee 4 sr ake 150
L. H. Bailey’s Principles of Agriculture ‘ : q . - . 125
On Plant Diseases, etc.
E. C, Lodeman’s The Spraying of Plants. . 3 A - fs I 25
On Garden-Making
L. H. Bailey’s Garden Making. . . ° 5 . . 2 I 50
L. H. Bailey’s Vegetable-Gardening . . . . . . . 150
L. H. Bailey’s Forcing Book . . . . . . i . 1 25
On Fruit-Growing, etc.
L. H. Bailey’s Nursery Book : . . . . . : . I 50
L. H. Bailey’s Fruit-Growing A A a . . ° $ ‘ 150
L. H. Bailey’s The Pruning-Book . 2 ‘ . : : . I 50
F, W. Card’s Bush Fruits. : : - ‘ P - . $ 150
On the Care of Live-stock
Nelson S, Mayo’s The Diseases of Animals . . . . 7 z I 50
W. H. Jordan’s The Feeding of Animals . 3 ‘ : ‘ 5 I 50
I. P. Roberts’ The Horse. . . . . 7 : I 25
M. W. Harper’s Breaking and Trathing of oe s 7 , I 50
George C. Watson’s Farm Poultry . : . . ‘ . 3 I 25
On Dairy Work, Farm Chemistry, etc.
Henry H. Wing’s Milk and Its Products A . . ‘ : c I 50
J. G. Lipman’s Bacteria and Country Life . . wh: tat we I 50
On Economics and Organization
I. P. Roberts’ The Farmer’s Business Handbook . A 3 z ‘5 I 25
George T. Fairchild’s Rural Wealth and Welfare . ‘ F, . I 25
H. N. Ogden’s Rural Hygiene. . 7 3 ‘ ‘ é % 150
J. Green’s Law for the American Farmer . % . , ¥ ‘ 150
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New York
THE RURAL TEXT-BOOK SERIES
EDITED BY L. H. BAILEY
A series of books primarily intended for the students in agricultural colleges, but
exceedingly useful to any one who is willing to give the subject serious study.
NOW READY OR IN PRESS
The Principles of Soil Management
By T L. LYON anv E. O. FIPPIN
An interesting, easily understood general discussion of soils, drainage, mulch-
ing, irrigation, manures, fertilizers, etc. A book which every farmer should
study.
Southern Field Crops
By J. F. DUGGAR
Cloth, r2mo, 531 pages, illustrated, $1.75
Dec. cloth, illustrated, t2mo, 579 pages, $1.75
Plant Physiology
By B. M. DUGGAR
Dec. cloth, illustrated, 12mo, 516 pages, $1.60
Manures and Fertilizers
By H. ] WHEELER
TO BE ADDED TO THE SERIES LATER
Animal Breeding By F. B. MUMFORD
Cotton By R. J. H. DE LOACH
VOLUMES ON PLANT BREEDING, PLANT PATHOLOGY,
AND SPECIAL PHASES OF FARM LIFE
WILL PROBABLY BE ARRANGED FOR AT AN EARLY DAY
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue Now York
THE RURAL OUTLOOK SET
By Prorsssor L, H. BAILEY
Director of the New York State College of Agriculture at Cornell University
Four Volumes. Each, cloth 12mo. Uniform binding, attractively boxed. $5.00
net per set; carriage extra, Each volume also sold separately,
In this set are included three of Professor Bailey's most popular books as well as a
hitherto unpublished one,—‘ The Country-Life Movement.” The long and persist-
ent demand for a uniform edition of these Mttle classics is answered with the publica-
tion of this attractive series,
The Country-Life Movement
Cloth, 12mo, 220 pages, $1.25 by matl, $1.34
This hitherto unpublished volume deals with the present movement for the redirection
of rural civilization, discussing the real country-life problem as distinguished from the
city problem, known as the back-to-the-land movement,
The Outlook to Nature (New and Revised Edition)
Cloth, 12mo, 195 pages, $1.25 by matl, $1.34
In this alive and bracing book, full of suggestion and encouragement, Professor
Bailey argues the importance of contact with nature, a sympathetic attitude toward
which “ means greater efficiency, hopefulness, and repose.”
The State and the Farmer ew zéition
Cloth, r2mo, $1.25 by matt, $1.34
It is the relation of the farmer to the government that Professor Bailey here discusses
in its varying aspects. He deals specifically with the change in agricultural methods,
in the shifting of the geographical centers of farming in the United States, and in the
growth of agricultural institutions. ;
The Nature Study Idea cvew zaitiony
Cloth, r2mo, $1.25 by mail, $1.34
“It would be well,” the critic of The Tribune Farmer once wrote, “if ‘The Nature
Study Idea’ were in the hands of every person who favors nature study in the public
schools, of every one who is opposed to it, and, most important, of every one who
teaches it or thinks he does.” It has been Professor Bailey’s purpose to interpret the
new school movement to put the young into relation and sympathy with nature,— a
purpose which he has admirably accomplished.
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New York
Un
On
On
On
On
BOOKS ON AGRICULTURE
Selection of Land, etc.
Thomas F. Hunt’s How to Choose a Farm
E. W. Hilgard’s Soils ; Their Formation and Relations to Climate
Plant Growth . . * . c ‘ . « P
Isaac P, Roberts's The Parmetead ex ae ae ae
Tillage, ete.
F. H. King’s The Soil... .
Isaac P. Roberts's The Fertility of the Land e
Elwood Mead’s Irrigation Institutions . «6
F. H, King’s Irrigation and Drainage
William E. Smythe’s The Conquest of Arid Aiwerica
Edward B. Voorhees’s Fertilizers, . . .«»
Edward B. Voorhees’s Forage Crops . .
H. Snyder’s Chemistry of Plant and Animal Life A
H. Snyder's Soil and Fertilizers. Third edition a
L. H. Bailey’s Principles of Agriculture .
W. C. Welborn’s Elements of Agriculture, Southern and Western
J. F. Duggar’s Agriculture for Southern Schools . . . .
G. F. Warren's Elements of Agriculture. .
T. L. Lyon and E. O. Fippin’s The Principles of ‘Soll Mamasement z
Hilgard & Osterhout’s Agriculture for Schools on the Pacific Slope
J. A. Widtsoe’s Dry Farming o 8 © © © © © +6
Garden-Making
L. H. Bailey's Manual of Gardening, . . . e« « « «
L. H. Bailey’s Vegetable-Gardening . + 4 & . . .
L. H. Bailey’s Horticulturist’s Rule Book . . * . eo.
L. H. Bailey's Forcing Book Cr ey
A. French's How to Grow Vegetables . « © «© «© © «
Fruit-Growing, etc.
L. H. Bailey’s Nursery Book ae 2 ee ee ee ee
L. H. Bailey's Fruit-Growing dis fel. wie 938 (58 CSE CAE Wis
L. H. Bailey’s The Pruning Book er)
F. W. Card’s Bush Fruits . . . eo 8 8 6
J. T. Bealby’s Fruit Ranching in British Columbia eo 8 8
the Care of Live Stock
D. E. Lyon’s How to Keep Bees for Profit. . .« «© « «
Nelson S. Mayo’s The Diseases of Animals * o 2. «© *
W.H. Jordan’s The Feeding of Animals ~ . .« «2. «© -«
I. P. Roberts's The Horse . .« 6 6 «© © «© @
George C. Watson's Farm Poultry i * 8 © 2 6
C. S. Valentine’s How to Keep Hens for Profit ‘ Sy oa) oe
O. Kellner’s The Scientific Feeding of Animals (trans. ) ‘ .
M. H. Reynolds's Veterinary Studies for Agricultural Students .
and
$1 75
He HH eH He Ree
iu
3°
AHH He
“N
wm
BOOKS ON AGRICULTURE — Continued
On Dairy Work
Henry H. Wing's Milkandits Products . . . « «+. « « $150
C. M. Aikman's Milk. z : . é . a « 7 . ~ I 25
Harry Snyder's Dairy Chemistry . . oe I 00
W, D. Frost’s Laboratory Guide in Elementary Bacteriology «6 « 160
I. P. Sheldon’s The Farm and the Dairy e I 00
Chr. Barthel’s Methods Used in the Examination ‘of Milk and Dairy
Products 2. . 6 «© © «© «© «e« © «© «© « «6 290
On Plant Diseases, etc.
George Massee’s Plant Diseases o . ‘ . 5 P I 60
J. G. Lipman’s Bacteria in Relation to Country Life = 2 © «© «© 150
E. C. Lodeman's The Spraying of Plants . ° . OS - * T 25
H. M. Ward's Disease in Plants (English) $A eden oie rer” - I 60
A.S. Packard’s A Text-book on Entomology . . .« «© « « 450
On Production of New Plants
L. H. Bailey’s Plant-Breeding . rr 22.1
L. H. Bailey’s The Survival of the Unlike ewe ee «ee @ 2 00
L. H. Bailey's The Evolution of Our Native Fruits. © 6 «© «6 200
W.S. Harwood's New Creations in Plant Life . : * * & * 175
On Economics and Organization
J. McLennan’s Manual of Practical Farming . .« . «« «© «+ 50
L. H. Bailey’s The State and the Farmer . . . . eo . 1 25°
Henry C. Taylor's Agricultural Economics ‘ . . Se I 25
I. P. Roberts's The Farmer’s Business Handbook . . . I 25
George T. Fairchild's Rural Wealth and Welfare Py . . < I 25
S. E. Sparling’s Business Organization . . . ee I 25
In the Citizen's Library. Includes a ghapter 0: on Farming
Kate V. St. Maur’s A Self-supporting Home so Se > eh th Oe OBS.
Kate V. St. Maur’s The Earth's Bounty * . . 7
G. F. Warren and K. C. Livermore’s Exercises in Farm Management # 80
H.N. Ogden’s Rural Hygiene .« .« .« » HM: Ch te . I 50
On Everything Agricultural
L. H. Bailey’s Cyclopedia of American Agriculture:
Vol. I. Farms, Climates, and Soils. Vol. III. Farm Animals.
Vol. If. Farm Crops. Vol. IV. The Farm and the Community
Complete in four royal 8vo volumes, with over 2000 illustrations.
Price of sets: cloth, $20 net ; half-morocco, $32
For further information as to any of the above, address the publisher.
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New York
How to Keep Hens for Profit
By C, 8, VALENTINE Cloth, Mustrated, 12mo, $1.50
The wealth that is sure to come from chickens has long been a delusion to the credu-
lous and a subject for cynical jesting to those who have learned that figures can lie,
But although much real harm has been done by the calculators who insisted on dem-
onstrating the inevitableness of riches if one only started to keep hens, there is an
enormous amount of sound information which is certain to be of the greatest assist-
ance to all who have the opportunity to raise poultry. Mr. Valentine is a well-known
authority upon the subject. He is not a victim of extravagant optimism, nor has he
been driven by the wild statements of others to the opposite extreme. His knowledge
of the whole field is both extensive and accurate; the information that he gives will be
of service, not only to the amateur who keeps poultry for his own pleasure, but to the
man who wishes to derive from it a considerable portion of his income.
A Manual of Practical Farming
By Dr. JOHN McLENNAN Cloth, Illustrated, t2mo, $1.50
In this attractive volume, which is illustrated profusely, Dr. McLennan provides an
entertaining treatise, both for the amateur and the professional. As its title indicates,
the book devotes itself to the practical side of the matter; and by eliminating unnec-
essary theory, Dr. McLennan has found sufficient space to cover all the problems that
the ordinary farmer is compelled to face
Manual of Gardening
By L, H. BAILEY Cloth, INustrated, 12mo, $2.06
This new work is a combination and revision of the main parts of two other books by
the same author, “ Garden Making " and “ Practical Garden Book,” together with much
new material and the result of the experience of ten added years. Among the persons
who collaborated in the preparation of the other two books, and whose contributions
have been freely used in this one, are C. E. Hunn, a gardener of long experience;
Professor Ernest Walker, reared as a commercial florist; Professor L. R. Taft, and
Professor F, A. Waugh, well known for their studies and writings on horticultural
subjects.
How to Grow Vegetables
By ALLEN FRENCH
New edition. Decorated cloth, Illustrated, t2mo, $1.75 by mail, $1.89
“It is what it purports to be, a practical handbook and planting table for the vegetable
garden. Its directions for growing in our northern climate are detailed and explicit,
and will be of invaluable assistance to those who follow them intelligently.” — Boston
Budget,
“ The instructions are terse, yet complete, and cover everything as to method of pre-
paring the ground, sowing seed, cultivation, ete. Practicality and clearness of direc:
tion are the dominant notes of Mr. French’s book.” — Brooklyn Eagle,
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New York
rig
Ki
Be eo ea ae
Lede)
Senet
Rie
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11